JP6652718B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  Related to gaming machines.

  One game is started when a game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on an outer periphery of a spinning-type gaming machine (slot machine). A plurality of rows of rotating drums (reels) are rotated, and the rotating drums are stopped by making full use of a rotating drum stopping device (stop button) for stopping the rotating movements. As a result, a predetermined symbol is displayed on the activated line. (For example, winning combinations such as "777") are arranged in a special gaming state in which the player has a higher profit state than in the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which the lottery probability of a small role, etc. is higher than in the normal state). ) Is common. Here, in the case of a spinning-type gaming machine, a case where an image for staging to enhance the interest of the game is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal in a form synchronized with the rotation and stop operations of the reels. There is a configuration in which when operating a spine stop device or the like, a game result is predicted and enjoyed while comparing a symbol displayed on the spine with an image for staging displayed on a display. There are many things. In addition, many games are configured so that an error that stops the progress of the game can be caused when any abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. Also, in recent years, as a pachinko gaming machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters a starting port on a game board surface (game area), and when the jackpot lottery is won, The game is shifted to a special game state, and the main game machine is a pachinko game machine in which a large winning prize hole provided on the game board surface is opened to obtain a large amount of prize balls. Among the pachinko gaming machines configured in this way, there is a probability varying gaming state in which the winning probability in the jackpot lottery is increased, and a time reducing gaming state in which the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is increased. There are also gaming machines that have a game progress state that creates an advantageous game progress state for the player based on these game states, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

JP-A-2017-113629 Patent 6167422 Patent No. 6083835 JP-A-2017-112415

  It is desired to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly play a game.

The gaming machine according to this aspect,
Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Multiple reels,
Storage means capable of electrically storing a game value within a predetermined number range,
A start switch,
Max bet switch,
Checkout switch,
An operable sub-operation member,
The main control means includes:
Equipped with internal lottery means for performing internal lottery,
It is possible to execute a predetermined operation effect as an effect that prompts the player to operate the sub operation member,
It is configured such that the specific result can be determined by the internal lottery means, and has at least a first specific result and a second specific result as the specific result,
When the sub-operation member is operated in a state where the predetermined operation state is being performed and the predetermined operation effect is being executed, the execution of the predetermined operation effect can be ended and the specific effect can be executed. It is configured as
The predetermined gaming state, the automatic bet is not placed, and one or more game values are stored in the storage means, and the bet number is less than a specific number which is the maximum bet number ; and In a situation where the predetermined operation effect is being executed, when the max bet switch is operated and a bet is made, the execution of the predetermined operation effect is configured to be terminated,
When the Max Bet switch is operated in a state where the predetermined gaming state is set, an automatic bet is made, and the predetermined operation effect is being executed, the execution of the predetermined operation effect is continued. And is configured not to execute the specific effect,
If the max bet switch is operated in a state where the game state is the predetermined game state, the storage value is not stored in the storage unit, and the predetermined operation effect is being executed, It is configured to continue execution of the operation effect, and not to execute the specific effect,
When the settlement switch is operated in a state where the game state is the predetermined game state, a game value is stored in the storage means, and the predetermined operation effect is being executed, the predetermined operation is performed. It is configured to end the execution of the effect,
The specific result can be executed in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, and a suggestion effect that is an effect related to the specific result is configured to be executable,
The suggestion effect includes a case where the execution based on the operation of the start switch Ru is started, and if performed based on the predetermined stop operation has been Ru is started, and at least has,
Have special conditions that are advantageous to the player,
Before shifting to the special state, a predetermined confirmation screen can be displayed,
In the game in which the first specific result or the second specific result is determined and the suggestion effect is executed , a case where the game is a game executed in a situation where the predetermined confirmation screen is displayed. However, the execution of the suggested effect is started based on the operation of the start switch , as compared with the case where the game is a specific game state and the game is a game executed in a predetermined situation where the predetermined confirmation screen is not displayed. probability of being is configured as relatively high,
The suggestion that the execution is started based on an operation of a start switch that can be executed in a game in which the first specific result or the second specific result is executed in a situation where the predetermined determination screen is displayed. Than the number of types of effects, in the game in which the first specific result or the second specific result is determined in the specific game state and executed in a predetermined situation where the predetermined confirmation screen is not displayed A game machine characterized in that the number of types of the suggested effects whose execution is started based on the operation of the start switch that can be executed is larger.
<Appendix>
In addition, although another aspect different from this aspect is listed below, it is possible to implement without being limited to these.
The gaming machine according to this another aspect,
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
A sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect,
The time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the program of the main gaming section is longer than the time from the occurrence of power interruption to the end of power supply to the gaming machine. Is composed of
The time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the program of the main game unit is longer than the time from the start of power supply to the game machine to the start of the program of the sub game unit. It is a gaming machine characterized by having such a configuration.

  According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly play a game.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the turning-type gaming machine according to the embodiment in a state where a door is opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of a medal slot in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a reel arrangement list in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a symbol combination list 1 in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a symbol combination list 2 in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a symbol combination list 3 in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in the turning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of small wins, replays, and bonus appearance rates in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of a spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a setting change device control process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a non-returnable error process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of a game progress control process (second game) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of a game progress control process (third game) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the additional game execution processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control processing (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control processing (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a condition device number management process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of AT state start control processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a game section shift control process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of a timer interruption process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the spine drive control processing on the main control board side in the spine-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of a turning drive control process on the main control board side in the turning game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram related to a reel rotating operation in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of power-off processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is an image diagram of a pressing order display in the turning-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a sub-program start process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of a sub main loop process on the sub control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of a sub power-off process on the sub control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of one-command processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the effect-related determination processing at the time of start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a battle effect execution availability determination process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the AT effect determination processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the resurrection availability determination processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of a process at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of a process during AT during start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the special precursor process at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the additional processing at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of processing during the inside of the advantageous BB when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a process at the time of receiving the first rotation stop on the sub-control board side in the rotation drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of a process at the time of accepting the second torso stop on the sub-control board side in the torso gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of a third barrel stop effect-related determination process on the sub-control board side in the barrel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the third time cylinder stop accepting process on the sub-control board side in the spinning game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a menu screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of standby screen display control processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is an image diagram of transition to a standby screen in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 60 is an action diagram in a won game of a re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to the embodiment. FIG. 61 is an action diagram in a won game of a re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 62 is an action diagram in a won game of a re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 63 is an action diagram in a won game of a re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. FIG. 4 is a side sectional view schematically showing a relative position between a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view which shows the structure inside a hopper. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view showing arrangement of medal auxiliary tank HS and fullness detection electrode DE. It is the schematic which shows the size and position of a fullness detection electrode and a screw BS. It is a figure showing composition of a reel band. It is a figure showing composition of a reel band. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of a game progress control process (third game) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of a freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of reel spin start preparation processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of stop-time freeze execution determination processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is an AT start effect execution image diagram in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is a lamp unit lighting configuration image applicable to the turning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-specific notification mode applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 79 illustrates an example of a configuration related to payout that can be applied to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 80 is an example 1 of a lighting mode of a max bet lamp applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 81 is an example 2 of a lighting mode of a max bet lamp applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 82 is an example 3 of a lighting mode of a max bet lamp applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 83 is an example 4 of a lighting mode of a max bet lamp applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 84 is an example 1 of an operation at the time of operating a checkout button applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 85 is an example 2 of the operation at the time of operating the checkout button, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 86 is an example 3 of an operation at the time of operating the checkout button, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 87 is an example 4 of an operation at the time of operating the checkout button, which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 88 (a) is a timing chart showing a first mode of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power off, and FIG. 88 (b) is a second timing chart of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power off. 6 is a timing chart showing the embodiment. FIG. 89 (a) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state and the situation in the first mode, and FIG. 89 (b) shows the state of the setting key switch in the second mode. 6 is a table showing a relationship between power supply states and states. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing a process of adding the number of credits, a process of paying out game medals, and a process of outputting a game medium providing sound. FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of the electronic components mounted on main control board M. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing on the main control board side applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 94 is a winning information generation table in the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 95 is an effect group number determination table 1 in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 96 is an effect group number determination table 2 in the turning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 97 is an effect group number determination table 3 in the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 98 is an example of the configuration of a lottery table in a spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 99 is an image drawing 1 of an effect during an AT in the turning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 100 is an image drawing 2 of an effect during the AT in the turning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 101 is an image drawing 3 of an effect during an AT in the turning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 102 is an image drawing 4 of an effect during an AT in the turning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 103 is a symbol combination list 4 in the turning-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 104 is a list of condition devices in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 105 is a list of small wins, replays, and bonus appearance rates in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 106 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of a spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 107 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the setting change device control processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 109 is a flowchart of the non-returnable error processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of a game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of a game progress control process (second game) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of a game progress control process (third game) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 114 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control processing (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 116 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 117 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing (fourth sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 118 is an example table of transition of states related to ATs in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of an AT lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the condition device number management processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of a freeze lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flowchart of reel spin start preparation processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 126 is an RT state transition diagram of the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 127 is a flowchart of the in-AT state start control processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 128 is an AT state transition diagram in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 129 is a flowchart of a game section shift control process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 130 is a flowchart of a timer interruption process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 131 is a flowchart of power-off processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of a sub-program start process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 133 is a flowchart of the sub-main loop process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 134 is a flowchart of the processing at the time of the power cut off on the sub control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 135 is a flowchart of one-command processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 136 is a table showing the relationship between the effect type and the effect operation (reproduction) start timing. FIG. 137 is a flowchart of the processing at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 138 is a flowchart of processing during AT during start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the special precursor process at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 140 is a flowchart of the additional processing at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 141 is a flowchart of processing during the inside of the advantageous BB when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 142 is a flowchart of a process for receiving a first barrel stop on the sub-control board side in the barrel-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 143 is a flowchart of a process at the time of receiving the second barrel stop on the sub-control board side in the barrel-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 144 is a flowchart of the third time cylinder stop accepting process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 145 is a flowchart of the effect content determination processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 146 is a subroutine showing a scenario lottery table determination process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 147 is a table showing a scenario lottery table (A) and an effect lottery table distribution table (B) in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 148 is a table showing an effect lottery table in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 149 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect that proceeds in the effect content determination process in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 150 shows an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the turning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 151 shows an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 152 shows an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 153 shows an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the turning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 154 is an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 155 shows an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the turning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing an effect in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 157 is an image diagram showing an effect in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 158 is an image diagram showing an effect in the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 159 is an AT state transition diagram in the spinning-type gaming machine according to Modification Example 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 160 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the AT state transition control processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to Modification Example 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 161 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the AT state transition control processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to Modification Example 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 162 is an example table of transition of a state relating to an AT in a turning-type gaming machine according to a modification example 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 163 is a flowchart illustrating a scenario lottery table determination process in the spinning-type gaming machine according to Modification 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 164 shows an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in a spinning-type gaming machine according to a modification example 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 165 is an AT state transition diagram in the spinning-type gaming machine according to Modification Example 1-2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 166 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the AT state transition control processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to Modification Example 1-2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 167 is an example table of transition of a state related to an AT in a spinning-type gaming machine according to a modified example 1-2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 168 is a flowchart illustrating a scenario lottery table determination process in the spinning-type gaming machine according to Modification Example 1-2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 169 shows an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the spinning-type gaming machine according to Modification 1-2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 170 is a block diagram (A) showing an RT state transition diagram and a block diagram (B) showing an AT state transition diagram in a spinning-type gaming machine according to a modification 1-3 from the third embodiment. is there. FIG. 171 is a block diagram showing an AT state transition diagram of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 172 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing (first sheet) on the main control board side in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 173 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing (second sheet) on the main control board side in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating an effect performed in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 175 is an execution image diagram of a rare combination suggestion effect applicable to the present example. FIG. 176 is an execution image diagram of a rare combination suggestion effect applicable to the present example. FIG. 177 is an execution image diagram of a rare combination suggestion effect applicable to the present example. FIG. 178 is an example of a selection mode of a rare combination suggestion effect applicable to the present example. FIG. 179 is a flowchart of the freeze lottery execution process on the main control board side in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 180 is an illustration of a button effect execution according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 181 is an illustration of a selection candidate character determination applicable to this example. FIG. 182 is an illustration of a selection candidate character determination applicable to this example. FIG. 183 is a conceptual drawing of a selection candidate character applicable to this example. FIG. 184 is a conceptual diagram of a selection candidate character that can be applied to the present example. FIG. 185 is a back lamp effect execution image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 186 is a back lamp effect execution image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 187 is a back lamp effect execution image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 188 is a conceptual diagram of the execution of the push order navigation applicable to this example. FIG. 189 is a conceptual diagram of executing a push order navigation applicable to the present example. FIG. 190 is an example of a configuration of a volume and a BGM tempo applicable to this example.

  First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. The “random number” is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer, sometimes referred to as a lottery) for determining some game content in a spinning-type gaming machine. Pseudo random numbers are also included (for example, a hard random number as a random number, a built-in random number generated by a main control chip including a CPU, and a soft random number as a pseudo random number). For example, a so-called “basic random number” that affects the outcome of a game, specifically, a “winning random number” associated with a special role or a prize role (small role, replaying role) for shifting to a special game, and the like. Can be mentioned. The “CPU” has the same meaning as that known in the art, and is not limited in any way by the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) or processing performance used. “Power interruption (power interruption)” means that the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine has fallen below a certain level irrespective of whether or not the power switch provided on the gaming machine has been operated. This also includes shutting off the power supply due to an unforeseen situation such as damage to the unit or power failure. The “ROM” is synonymous with one known in the art, and physically holds information (for example, “1” if an element configuration is conductive when a current for reading data is given, If the element configuration is not used, it is "0"). A RAM is synonymous with one known in the art, and holds information electrically (for example, when a current for reading data is given, “1” is stored if stored, and if not stored, This is set to “0.” In general, backup power is supplied to part or all of the data held in the RAM when power is cut off.) The "game state" corresponds to, for example, a special game state (a so-called big hit game, which is easy to obtain a game medal and is advantageous to the player, which is a so-called big hit game, such as a bonus game, a first type BB, a second type BB, etc.). ), The replaying probability varying game state (RT state) in which the replaying game winning rate is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state in which the replaying game winning rate is a predetermined value. , An AT (assist time) state in which the stop order of the reels for notifying the reels and the stop position can be reported, and an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined. Also in the normal gaming state, the high-probability normal gaming state, the low-probability normal gaming state, and the like having different transition lottery probabilities to the RT state, the AT state, and the ART state (in this example, the lottery state is referred to. ). There is no problem even if the game states are combined. Furthermore, these game states and functions (for example, a lottery transition to the AT-in-progress state, output of a notification instruction related to the reel stop order, and the like) control the game progress. There is no problem even if all are mounted on the main control board side. In this example, the state relating to the AT and the RT state are separately described, and the RT state is referred to as "RT1" and the state relating to the AT is referred to as "normal game state". May be collectively referred to as an ART-related state, and a state relating to the ART may be referred to as a “normal gaming state” or the like. The "winning combination" is the type (or condition device number) of the condition device that has been won by an internal lottery (sometimes called an internal note drawing). The "notification state" refers to a state relating to an AT capable of executing a push order navigation, which will be described later. Even if the condition device in which the push order navigation is not executed because the winning combination does not differ depending on the reel stop order, even if the game has been won. If the state related to the AT is a state in which the push order navigation can be executed, the state is set to the “notification state”. The “counter value” is also referred to as the “available number of notification games”, and is the AT remaining game number or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when the “available number of notification games” is 1 or more (this game including “0” may be included), a push order navigation described later can be executed. In addition, as the “number of notification game executable numbers”, the difference number of game media (the number of payouts minus the number of inserts) obtained based on the winning of the small role (mainly the push bell), The number of wins of the role of the forward bell may be adopted. The “special notification state” is a state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to the AT, and is referred to as an “additional specialization state” in this example. The “specific condition” is a condition under which the AT counter value can be decremented. For example, the specific condition is that one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, a pressing order bell combination) is won, and the like. "Type 1 special character" is a character that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winnings per specified number or increases the probability that the condition device related to winnings per specified number is activated. The game is activated when it is performed, and can be continued until the result of the game of not more than 12 times is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as RB (regular bonus). A "type 1 special special product continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate a type 1 special special product, which is activated when a specific symbol combination is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is terminated at the same time, and may be referred to as a BB (Big Bonus) or a first type BB. "Type 2 special bonus" is a bonus that activates the condition device related to winning regardless of the result of the lottery, and it is activated when predetermined and the result of one game is obtained. In this case, the operation is terminated and may be referred to as CB (Challenge Bonus). A "second-class special accessory continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate a second-class special accessory, which is activated when a specific symbol combination is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is terminated at this time, and may be referred to as MB (middle bonus) or second type BB. The `` ordinary character '' is a character that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number is activated. It is supposed to be activated when the combination is displayed and to terminate the operation when the result of one game is obtained, and may be referred to as SB (single bonus). The “all JACIN type” is a configuration in which it is considered that JACIN has been performed when the first type BB combination has been won, and the RB is always in progress during execution of the first type BB. The “JACIN lottery type” is a configuration in which the first type BB is repeatedly executed during non-RB and during RB. Further, the "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in a state in which the pull-in control that can be performed after the stop operation is performed is not executed, and is a state in which the reel is stopped at the nearest reel position that can be stopped from the reel position where the stop operation is received. Reel. The “all CB type” is a configuration in which the CB is always in the middle of execution of the second type BB. The “CB transfer lottery type” is a configuration in which during non-CB and during CB, the second type BB is repeatedly executed.

  Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the order of each step in various processes, the timing of turning on / off a flag, the name of a unit responsible for the processing of each step, and the like are described as an example. It is not limited to the following embodiments. In addition, it should not be understood that the above-described embodiments and modified examples are applied to specific ones in a limited manner, and any combination may be used. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of one embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if a certain modification example and another modification example are described independently, the modification example It should be understood that combinations of the modifications and the other modifications are also described.

(This embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the spinning-type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, a basic structure on the front side of a spinning-type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 shows a partial configuration). The spinning-type gaming machine P mainly includes a front door (also referred to as a front door), a back box (also referred to as a cabinet and a base), a reel unit installed in the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, and a main control. A board M (a board on which the main control chip C including the CPUMC is mounted) and a sub-control board S (a board on which the sub-control chip SC including the CPUSC is mounted). Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for visually recognizing a game state, a mechanism for enabling input of a game medium, a mechanism for operating a reel unit, other mechanisms, and the like. Specifically, as a mechanism for making the game state visually recognizable, a reel window D160, an insertion number display lamp D210, a start lamp D180, a re-game lamp D290, an insertion possible lamp D300, a special game state display device D250, a credit number A display device D200, a payout number display device (push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push order display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous section display YH, and the like are attached. Also, as a mechanism for enabling the insertion of game media and input of the number of bets (the number of bets), a mechanism for enabling a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, and a payout of inserted game media, Button D60 is attached. As a mechanism for operating the reel, a start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached. The spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2, and the like. It has a console that protrudes to the side. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

<Mechanism for making the game state visible>
Next, a description will be given of a main part of a mechanism for making the game state visible. The reel window D160 is a transparent member formed of a synthetic resin or the like that forms a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. The insertion number display light D210 is configured by three LEDs, and the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (inserting a game medal required to start one game) are lit. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the insertion number display lamp D210 is configured by three LEDs (lamp) of a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, and a 3-bet lamp D213, and one game medal is bet. In this case, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, the 2-bet lamp D212: turns off, and the 3-bet lamp D213: turns off. : ON, 3 bet lamp D213: OFF, and if there are three game medals bet, 1BET lamp D211: ON, 2BET lamp D212: ON, 3BET lamp D213: ON (re-game) This is not the case with the next game in which is stopped and displayed, and details will be described later). The start lamp D180 is configured by an LED. The start lamp D180 is lit when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (operation is received), and the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (operation is not received). It is configured to turn off the light in a certain case. Further, the re-game lamp D290 is configured by an LED, and is turned on when the re-game is stopped and displayed, and turned off when the next game in which the re-game is stopped is completed. The insertable lamp D300 is turned on (or may blink) when the insertion of a game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 is effective or the operation of the bet button D220 is effective, and the insertion of the game medal is enabled. The light is turned off when the operation is invalid or the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. The special game state display device D250 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. It should be noted that the special game state display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a case, the total number of the payouts may be displayed on an effect display device S40 (also referred to as a second information display unit) described later. Is displayed, the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, and can provide a user-friendly gaming machine. Further, the credit number display device D200 is configured by a seven-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (the number of credits) stored in the gaming machine as medals possessed by the player. The payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is constituted by a 7-segment display, and the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button) (The stopping order of D43), a condition device in which the winning combination may be different ｛a so-called pushing sequence (sometimes referred to as a pushing sequence combination), but when the winning combination and the symbol combination to be stopped are different. Is generally configured so that the profit rate (payout number, subsequent RT state, etc.) given to the player can be different. In a game in which｝ is established, the reel which is most advantageous to the player is The stop order is configured to be notified (the notification may be referred to as a push order navigation). As described above, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is configured to be able to execute two displays of the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order that provides the player with the highest profit. The display mode is such that the player does not mistakenly determine which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. In addition, the AT counter value display device D280 plays a game in accordance with the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as a first information display unit) among the states related to the AT (details will be described later). It is possible to display the number of games that can stay in a state related to the AT (in this example, also referred to as a push-navigation state, which is also referred to as a notification game, which will be described in detail later) which is advantageous to the player that is guaranteed when the game progresses. It is configured as follows. The AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided, and in such a case, the number of games that can stay in the AT state can be displayed on the effect display device S40, so that the player Can recognize the number of games for which the advantageous AT-related state is guaranteed, and can provide a user-friendly gaming machine. Note that the number-of-payouts display device (push-order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices, a number-of-payouts display device and a push-order display device.

  Further, the advantageous section indicator YH is configured by an LED, and is configured to be turned on when it is a “advantageous section” and to be turned off when it is not an “advantageous section”. See below). Here, in the case of the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, similarly to the conventional spinning-type gaming machine, a special gaming state in which game medals are easily obtained and advantageous to the player (a so-called big hit game, a bonus game, And the first type BB, the second type BB, etc.), and the replaying game winning rate is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state in which the replaying game winning rate is a predetermined value. The replay probability changing game state (RT state) which is the state, the stop order of the reels for winning the winning combination, the state during the AT (assist time) which can notify the stop position, and the RT state and the AT state are: A combined ART (assisted replay time) state may be adopted, but apart from these "game state", any one of three "game sections" of "normal section", "standby section" and "advantage section" Can be set Going on. In this example, the “standby section” is not set, and any one of the “normal section” and the “advantageous section” is set. Among them, the “advantageous section” is positioned as being relatively more advantageous to the player than the other “game sections”. For example, the “gaming state” is an AT state or an ART state. "Advantaged section" is associated with it. That is, when the "game state" is the AT state or the ART state, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. As will be described later, the setting control of the "game section" is also the same as the setting control of the "game state". Similarly, since the game progress is performed on the main control board side, whether or not the game progress status is relatively advantageous to the player is determined by the lighting / extinguishing status of the advantageous section indicator YH. It can be communicated to the player without lying. As will be described later, if the "advantageous section" continues until reaching a predetermined upper limit game number (for example, 1500 games), the "normal section" is forcibly set, but in that case, the "normal section" remains. Since the state related to the AT is also forcibly terminated (information for maintaining the state during the AT is cleared / initialized), the change of the set “game section” affects the transition of the “game state”. Therefore, it is possible to automatically suppress a significant increase in gambling due to a "game state" such as an AT state or an ART state having a relatively high degree of freedom in design. It is. As described above, when the “advantageous section” continues until reaching a predetermined upper limit game number (for example, 1500 games), the “normal section” is forcibly set, that is, the “advantageous section” ends. However, the termination condition of the “advantageous section” is not limited to this. The termination condition of the “advantageous section” in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example is “the push that can acquire the small win with the largest number of payouts among the small wins that constitute the push forward (roll with push)”. One execution of the forward navigation (for example, if there are seven, three, and one small wins as the small wins that constitute the push forward, the push-out navigation that can acquire the seven with the largest payout number is not possible. If there is a pushing sequence in which seven or one can be obtained according to the pushing order and a pushing sequence in which three can be obtained according to the pushing sequence, the pushing sequence navigation capable of acquiring three is described here. "Not applicable to the push order navigation)" or "Winning any one of BB, RB, MB", and "arbitrary end conditions (non-winning (AT) in 40G1 set loop lottery, fixed 32G (E.g., progress (both signs)) or "advantageous section 1500G" must be satisfied. To have. In the case of a specification in which there is no pressing order bell combination (eg, a specification in which there is a replay pressing order for shifting the RT state, but there is no small combination in which the number of payouts differs depending on the pressing order), The condition for ending the advantageous section of "one push order navigable to obtain the small combination with the largest payout number" is excluded. Further, in the present embodiment, as the small wins constituting the push order, the small wins include the small win corresponding to the eleventh win and the small win corresponding to the one win, so that the payout number is the largest. "Execution of one push order navigation in which a small role can be acquired" means that a push sequence in which eleven medals can be acquired (eleven roles can be won) is notified.

<Mechanism for enabling input of game media>
Next, a description will be given of a main part of a mechanism for enabling input of a game medium. The medal insertion slot D170 is an insertion slot for game medals, and the game medals inserted into the insertion slot are guided to the inside of the gaming machine in a state where the medals can be accepted. Further, as sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, an insertion reception sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s are provided inside the gaming machine, and the game is guided to the inside of the gaming machine. When it is determined that a game medal has been normally inserted, the inserted medal can be detected as a betted medal. The bet button D220 is configured to be operable by a player, and configured to bet on a stored medal (a credit medal) by an operation. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and by operation, the stored medal (medal of credit) and / or the betted medal can be paid back to the player. I have. The game medals paid out by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the outlet D240.

<Mechanism for operating the reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to start the operation of the reel by the operation. The stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player. The reels can be sequentially stopped by operating the respective stop buttons. Have been.

<Other mechanisms provided on the front door DU>
Next, main parts of other mechanisms provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to a perspective view showing the internal configuration of the spinning-type gaming machine P by opening the front door DU in FIG. The front door DU includes, as a mechanism for enhancing the interest of the game, an effect display device S40 for displaying an effect such as a notice effect or a background effect, and a game effect lamp D26 (not shown) that can be turned on in various lighting modes. Illustrated), a door board D for signal relay, a medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, etc., a speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, a middle panel (middle decorative panel) which is a member formed of synthetic resin or the like. , An upper panel D130, a lower panel D140, and the like. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper portion on the back side of the front door DU so that a display unit for displaying effects and the like can be visually recognized through a see-through area formed on the upper panel. Further, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have a light emitting source that emits light in accordance with the progress of the game of the spinning-type gaming machine P, and the decorative lamps are provided on the right and left sides of the lower panel D140, respectively. A unit D150 is provided, and an LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right and left sides of the upper panel D130. (The decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 may be collectively referred to as a lamp unit. ). Further, a door substrate D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back surface of the front door DU, and input signals of the stop button D40, the start lever D50, the settlement button D60, and the like are provided on the door substrate D. And has a function of a relay board that directly or processes the input signal and outputs it to a main control board M described later. In addition, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided near the door substrate D on the back surface of the front door DU, corresponding to the medal slot D170, for detecting the medal inserted from the medal slot D170 and for simplifying. It has a function of performing proper authentication, guiding an appropriate medal to a hopper H40 described below, and returning an inappropriate medal to a medal tray D230 described later. Further, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right sides below the door substrate D. The middle panel is the upper part of the console, the lower part of the upper panel D130, and is the panel part including the above-mentioned reel window. The sub-input button SB and the cross key SB2 attached to the console D190 described above are an operation on a menu screen, which will be described later, and a button-stroke effect on the sub-control board S (a continuous-stroke operation of the sub-input button SB). This is a member used for performing an effect related to whether or not a bonus has been won), a mini game (for example, an effect of success or failure of entering the “AT state”) and the like. In the front door DU of the spinning-type gaming machine P, a medal tray D230 that receives game medals (or may be simply called medals) discharged from the discharge port D240, and an open / closed state of the front door DU can be detected. A door switch D80 is provided. The front door DU is provided with a keyhole D260, and a key (door key) matching the shape of the keyhole D260 is inserted into the keyhole D260 {in addition, by twisting in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)}. It is configured so that the front door DU can be opened. Further, in the present embodiment, the error state (door opening error or the like) can be released by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 (in addition to twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)). I have. A bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220. The bet button lamp S50 is configured by an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 is turned on (or blinks). ), It is possible for the player to perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is effective. Further, a stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (the stop button lamp S60 is provided on each of the three stop buttons of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43). Is constituted by an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the player determines that the operation of the stop button D40 is effective by the presence / absence of lighting (or blinking) of the stop button lamp S60 and / or the lighting color. Can be perceived. Note that since only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the valid stop button D40 is illuminated in the lighting color corresponding to the valid stop button D40, for example, the left stop button D41 is invalid. When the middle stop button D42 is valid and the right stop button D43 is valid, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 is turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the middle stop button D42 is lit, and the right stop. The stop button lamps S60 corresponding to the button D43 are illuminated, so that the three stop button lamps S60 can be differently illuminated. Further, by changing the lighting color and the lighting mode of the stop button lamp S60 (the lighting color and the lighting mode may be changed, or the stop button lamp S60 may be changed such as the low-speed flashing and the high-speed flashing), the pressing order navigation is executed. In the game, it may be configured so that the player can easily determine the stop button to be currently stopped, for example, all the reels are rotating, and the pressing order of “left → middle → right” is correct ( The stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button blinks in white when the push order bell that has the maximum payout number) is won, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button and the stop corresponding to the right stop button When the button lamp is turned on in blue and the player operates the left stop button to stop the left reel, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button is turned off and the middle stop button is turned off. Blink white stop button lamp may be configured so as to light the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button blue.

  Next, a back box (also referred to as a cabinet or a base) and each device installed in the back box will be described. A reel unit is attached substantially at the center of the back box so that a part thereof can be viewed through a reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (such as a stepping motor) for the reel M50. Further, the reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel portion is formed of a synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of symbols are drawn on the outer periphery of the reel portion (on the reel band MO). Then, based on the operation of each stop button of the start lever D50 and the stop button D40, the respective reel units can be rotated and stopped. Although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter, also referred to as a reel backlight and a torso backlight) are provided inside the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53, and when the LEDs are turned on. The light transmitted through the outer periphery of the reel unit is configured to be visually recognized as if the outer periphery of the reel unit is lit (details of a back lamp effect, which is an effect using a torso backlight, will be described later). Above the reel M50, a later-described spinning board K for driving each reel (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) is stored.

  Above the reel M50, a main control board M for controlling the entire game, which will be described later, is stored. To the left of the reel M50, the effect display device S40, the LED lamp unit S10, and the speaker S20 shown in FIG. Stores a sub-control board S, which will be described later, which controls various effects performed by using the above-described method. The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used to execute a setting change device control process (to change a setting), which will be described later, and a setting / reset capable of changing a set value and canceling an error. Button M30 is connected. In FIG. 2, the setting key switch M20 and the setting / reset button M30 are not shown, but may be provided at appropriate positions on the main control board M (for example, when the front door DU is opened). If not, it is sufficient if it is provided in a position where human access is difficult).

  Below the reel M50, a hopper H40 for collecting inserted game medals and a medal payout device H for paying out game medals are provided. E is stored. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H pass through the coin shooter D90 and are paid out from the outlet D240. In addition, a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the spinning-type gaming machine P is provided on a front surface of the power supply board E (also referred to as a power supply unit E). The details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a path (selector) of game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 inside the spinning-type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an insertion reception sensor D10s serving as a passage of a game medal inserted from the medal insertion port D170 near the door substrate D, and a game medal discharge port D240 below the insertion reception sensor D10s. And a coin shooter D90 for guiding the player to the vehicle. The insertion reception sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on the dimensions and accepting only game medals that conform to the standard dimensions, and determines that the game medals are not adapted by this function. The medal (or other foreign matter) that has been given is configured to be refunded to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. If a player inserts a game medal before the player operates the start lever D50 (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is valid), the game medal is selected by the insertion reception sensor D10s, and only the game medal that satisfies the standard is selected. The medals that are thrown into the hopper H40 and do not satisfy the standard pass through the coin shooter D90 and are returned to the discharge port D240. On the other hand, when a game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is not valid), regardless of whether or not the standard is satisfied, the inserted game medal Is returned to the outlet D240 through the coin shooter D90. A medal insertion sensor, which will be described in detail later, is provided inside the insertion reception sensor D10s (at the back of the flow path), and when a game medal that satisfies the dimensional standard and is accepted passes therethrough, the first insertion sensor D20s. The signal is detected by the second input sensor D30s, and the signal is supplied to a main control board M described later.

  Next, a sensor relating to medal insertion will be described in detail. A game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 first passes through the insertion reception sensor D10s. The insertion receiving sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when the game medal passes, the two protruding mechanisms are pressed down to turn on and the game medal can pass normally through the passage. . Further, with such a configuration, when a foreign substance that is not a game medal (a foreign substance that does not satisfy the standard, for example, a diameter smaller than the game medal) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms are pressed down. Not done. Such medals cannot pass through the passage because the medals cannot be kept upright (the medals fall down), and are paid back to the outlet D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the input reception sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine that an error has occurred (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off) even when the on-time has continued for a predetermined time or more. .

  When the game medal normally passes through the blocker D100, the game medal passes through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s immediately after passing. The input sensors (first input sensor D20s and second input sensor D30s) are composed of two sensors (arranged adjacent to each other at an interval smaller than the standard diameter of the game medal), and each of the sensors is turned on. -Various errors can be detected by monitoring the OFF state (the order in which the combination of ON / OFF of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s transitions, etc.) and the ON / OFF time. Is configured.

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail with reference to a front view and a top view of the medal payout device H in FIG. The medal payout device H operates the settlement button when there is a credit (game medal electronically stored inside the gaming machine) or a betted medal (medal inserted for starting a game). It is activated when a game medal is paid out or a prize is paid out. In operation, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 about the disk rotation axis H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout apparatus H are displaced by the discharge urging means H70 and flow down from the game medal exit H60 toward the discharge port D240. The payout sensors (the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s) are composed of two sensors, and the on / off state of each sensor (the ON / OFF state of the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s). Various errors can be detected by monitoring the transition order of the combination of OFF, etc.) and the ON / OFF time. More specifically, for example, when normally passing through the game medal exit H60, the displacement of the discharge urging means H70 causes the first payout sensor H10s to be turned off and the second payout sensor H20s to be turned off. 1 payout sensor H10s = off, 2nd payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on, 2nd payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on, 2nd payout sensor H20s = on → 1st payout The sensor state transition is such that the sensor H10s = off, the second payout sensor H20s = on, the first payout sensor H10s = off, and the second payout sensor H20s = off. Therefore, when a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected. , An error can be exemplified.

  Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of a spinning-type gaming machine in the present embodiment. The spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a prescribed number (the maximum number of gaming medals that can be bet in one game) of three, and the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 each have twenty frames. The effective line for which the winning determination is made is one line of “the upper stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the lower stage of the right reel M53”. The maximum payout number is 11 and the minimum payout number is 1 (the association between the winning combination and the payout number will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (pull-in priority order) is “re-gaming role → small role (bell, watermelon, etc.) → bonus”. For example, if the re-gaming role and bonus are simultaneously established, , The symbol combination serving as the re-game combination is stopped and displayed, and the bonus cannot be won. When the bell and the watermelon are established, when the stop button is pressed at a position where both of them can be retracted (a position within 4 frames to the stop position for winning), the small payout having a large number of payouts is given priority. It is configured to retract. Note that the configuration shown in the drawing is merely an example, and the number of frames on each reel is changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), and the configuration of the effective lines is changed (for example, 5 horizontal 3 lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem if the line is changed to one line of the lower reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the upper reel M53. In addition, as the pull-in control when a push order small combination that gives a different profit to the player according to the push order is won, the small combination with a large payout number when operated in a predetermined correct answer push order Is controlled so that it is pulled in with priority (number-of-sheets priority control), and if the operation is performed in the wrong push order different from the correct answer, the stop display is possible (the position within 4 frames from the stop operation is displayed). Among the symbols (arranged), a control (a number priority control) for increasing the winning probability (the number of winning combinations among a plurality of winning symbol combinations is the highest) is performed.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of the spinning-type gaming machine in the present embodiment. As shown in the drawing, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53 are all 20 (0 to 19), and the symbols are "black seven", "white seven", and "white seven". Sheep, blank, bell, replay A, replay B, watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Here, “blank” is a symbol included in the symbol combination that constitutes the winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol that does not constitute the winning combination, but a symbol that constitutes the winning combination that includes “blank”. As a combination, for example, “watermelon B / replay A / blank” is replay 02. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type of the symbol is increased or decreased.

  7 to 9 are symbol combination lists 1 to 3 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device, and as described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, as described later. The one symbol combination is configured to be stopped and displayed on the active line (one line described above). In addition, even if the same type of symbols are not arranged on the activated line, the same symbols are easily arranged in a line on a line other than the activated line from the viewpoint of a player (in the case of a watermelon, the middle stage is arranged). For example, three watermelon designs are arranged in a straight line on any of the reels, such as being aligned horizontally.) Further, in the present embodiment, a symbol combination of a first type BB combination (a so-called type 1 continuous special device related to a type 1 special combination, but may be simply referred to as a BB combination hereinafter) is used. One type of BB-A (continuous operation of RB-A and end with payout exceeding 264) "sheep / sheep / sheep" and one type of BB-B (continuous operation of RB-B, 132 sheets "Black Seven, Black Seven, Black Seven" and "White Seven, White Seven," which are one type of BB-C (RB-B is continuously operated and the payment is over 132 cards) It has three symbol combinations with "white seven". In the present embodiment, when the first-type BB combination wins and the BB is executed (the accessory is activated), one BB is executed in all the games in the BB during the execution of the BB. With reference to the lottery table, a winning combination (small role, replay) other than the role is configured to be randomly selected (a method in which the table referred to at the time of the lottery during one BB execution is not switched). And may be hereinafter referred to as an all-JACIN type). It should be noted that the format of the first type BB combination is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the table referred to at the time of the lottery during the execution of one BB can be switched. When the RT state is “RT1”, when the symbol combination to be the replay game 04 corresponding to the 14th to 16th is stopped and displayed, the system shifts to RT0 (for details of the RT state, See below). Note that, since “RT0” is a more unfavorable RT state for the player than “RT1”, transition from “RT1” to “RT0” may be referred to as falling. When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay game 05 corresponding to No. 17 is stopped and displayed, "Black Seven" may be stopped and displayed below the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay game 05 is stopped and displayed, "White Seven" may be stopped and displayed below the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). Further, when the pushing order bell which is a condition device of “winning-A1” to “winning-A6” described later is won, if the reels are stopped in the pushing order most advantageous to the player, the 21st to 27th Are stopped and displayed, and eleven game medals are paid out, while the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order most advantageous to the player. And the symbol combinations of “winning 08” to “winning 11” corresponding to Nos. 39 to 56 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In the figure, "-" indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, "Bell-Bell" corresponding to No. 23 is an effective line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed above, eleven game medals can be obtained regardless of which symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the middle reel M52.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in the present embodiment. In the figure, the condition device number is referred to as a winning number, and hereinafter, the condition device number may be referred to as a winning number. In the present embodiment, the re-gaming combination is provided from re-gaming-A to re-gaming-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and is provided in the stop order and the stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Accordingly, the replaying game to be stopped and displayed may be different. Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in the item of “condition device” which is the rightmost column, a plurality of left reels M51, middle reels M52, and right reels M53 are determined in accordance with the stop order and stop positions. The type of condition devices can be stopped and displayed, and the condition devices having the same winning number among the plurality of types of condition devices are put together, and the “condition device (name)” in the third column from the right is collected. Are shown in the items of FIG. Specifically, for example, in the “re-game-A” which is the condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, the “re-game” is performed according to the stop order and the stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. 01, "re-game 02", and "re-game 03". The “condition device (name)” may be simply referred to as a condition device. In addition, a condition device related to re-games such as “re-game 01” may be referred to as a re-game combination, and a condition device in which a game medal is paid out by winning such as “prize 01” may be referred to as a small combination. A condition device that causes BB to start when a stop display such as “one type BB-A” is displayed may be referred to as a BB combination. In addition, when the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB role and the small role are overlapped and won, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the winning small role is stopped. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at positions where they can be displayed, the symbol corresponding to the small role is not stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small symbol is stopped and displayed, while the symbol corresponding to the small symbol is displayed. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol is not stopped and displayed (can not be retracted), the symbol corresponding to the small combination is not stopped and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is displayed. Is configured to stop display. Specifically, for example, in the case of winning the “one type BB-B + winning-C” which is the condition device of the winning number 21, the cherry which is “winning 12” or “winning 13” and the “one type BB” -B "can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of the left reel M51 → the middle reel M52 → the right reel M53, (1) the symbol numbers 0 to 4 (FIG. 6) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when the reel stop position is located, the symbol number 4 corresponding to the "winning 12" is stopped at the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52. Regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, "winning 12" is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located at the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "winning 13" is displayed at the upper stage of the left reel M51. No. 6, No. 11, or No. 16 corresponding to the symbol No. 13 stops, and "winning 13" is stopped and displayed irrespective of the stop position of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 in the first stop, "1" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "seed BB-B" stops. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are positioned in the middle of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, "1" is displayed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "seed BB-B" stops, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the third stop at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located below the right reel M53. In this case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to “one type BB-B” stops at the lower stage of the right reel M53, and the BB combination is stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, “1” is displayed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol No. 18 corresponding to "seed BB-B" cannot be stopped, and no condition device is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the “role” item shows what role the “condition device (name)” plays, and “normal replay” corresponding to the winning number 1 is in the order of pressing the stop button. Regardless, this is a condition device related to the replay in which the replaying game in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, and “Reversely pressing white 7 replay” corresponding to the winning number 2 is RT regardless of the pressing order of the stop button. This is a condition device related to the replay in which the replaying game whose state does not shift is stopped and displayed, but is pushed backward (stopping the reels in the order of the right reel M53 → the middle reel M52 → the left reel M51) to the right reel M53. Stop at the operation timing in which the range of symbol numbers 18 to 2 of the reel number 52, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 of the middle reel M52, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 of the left reel M51 are located at the lower part of each reel. Operate buttons And by, the right reel M53, "white Seven" is stopped and displayed in the lower part of the center reel M52 and left reel M51, white Seven has been configured to appear to be aligned in the lower part when viewed from the player. In addition, in the game which was won in the replay game-B and was selected in the AT addition lottery, by performing an effect of instructing the player to aim for "white seven" by pressing in reverse (the details will be described later), the player was elected in the AT addition lottery. It is configured to be able to notify the player to the effect. The “replay in order of seven push blacks” corresponding to the winning number 3 is a condition device related to the replay in which the replay that the RT state does not shift to is stopped and displayed regardless of the push order of the stop button. Stopping the reels in the order of the left reel M51 → the middle reel M52 → the right reel M53), the range of the symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of the symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, and the right reel By operating the stop button at the operation timing in which the range of the symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is located in the lower part of each reel, "black seven" is displayed in the lower part of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. Is stopped and viewed from the player, so that black seven appears to be aligned at the bottom. In addition, in the game that was won in the re-game-C and was selected in the AT-additional lottery, an effect of instructing the player to aim for “Black Seven” by pushing forward (details will be described later) was executed, thereby winning the AT-additional lottery. It is configured to be able to notify the player to the effect.

  "RT maintenance RP1 ** (three options)" corresponding to the winning number 4 indicates whether the first stop reel is any one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (any stop button is operated). If the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the replaying game 01, the replaying game 02, or the replaying game 03 to which the RT state does not shift is performed. Is stopped and the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the replay game 04 whose RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. "RT maintenance RP * 1 * (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 5 indicates whether the first stop reel is any of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (by operating any stop button). ), The replaying game which is stopped and displayed may be different. If the first stopped reel is the middle reel M52, the replaying game 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. “RT maintenance RP ** 1 (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 6 indicates whether the first stop reel is any of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (by operating any stop button). Is a condition device in which the re-playing combination stopped and displayed may be different. If the first stop reel is the right reel M53, the re-playing 01 or the re-playing 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. When the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the replay game 04 whose RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed.

  The "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321" corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 are condition devices in which the winning combination may differ depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected. For example, “left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3” and “123” are stopped in the pressing order of “left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53”. For example, in the case of "winning A-1" (winning number 7), when "123" is stopped in the order of "left → middle → right" (the answer is correct in the order of pushing), the maximum number of obtained sheets is reached. The symbol combination of “winning 01” in which eleven game medals can be obtained is stopped and displayed. Note that “123” in the “push order bell 123” and the like indicate a push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of cards acquired in the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in the pushing order other than the pushing order in which the maximum number of acquired coins can be acquired, that is, if the answer is not correct in the pushing order, one payout is made. In the AT-related state such as the "AT state", the navigation order of the push order of the replaying game and the bell is displayed (the push order indicating the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), and the "normal game state" is displayed. , Etc., a plurality of gaming states with different profit rates of the player can be created such that the pushing order is not navigated to. Note that the state regarding the AT will be described later.

  In addition, the “common bell” corresponding to the winning number 13 can acquire 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of winning medals even if any of the prize 04 to the prize 07 are stopped. It is a condition device that can be acquired, and may be referred to as a bell regardless of the order of pushing. The “watermelon A” corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (any of the watermelon A and the watermelon B) can be easily aligned in a parallel line. Reference numeral 14 indicates that three watermelons A are arranged in the middle stage of each reel. Further, “watermelon B” corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured such that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) are easily aligned on a diagonal line. For example, the 66th prize in FIG. 16 is such that three watermelons are arranged diagonally downward and to the right like watermelon B in the upper part of the left reel M51, watermelon B in the middle part of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A in the lower part of the right reel M53. The “BB middle weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)” corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device capable of aligning three bells on the active line, and will be described later in detail. This is a condition device in which an AT addition lottery is executed. The “BB middle strong rare small role (V-shaped bell alignment)” corresponding to the winning number 18 is a condition device in which the bell can be stopped and displayed on the upper left reel M51, the middle middle reel M52, and the upper right reel M53. Although details will be described later, this is a condition device in which an AT-additional lottery is executed by winning during BB.

  Next, in the item of "bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 3 are sorted for each winning number. In the present embodiment, a winning number that does not include the bonus (BB combination) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and a winning number that includes one type of BB-A as the winning number that includes the bonus (BB combination) (19) The bonus winning information of the winning number (20 to 23) containing one kind of BB-B, and the bonus winning information of the winning number (24 to 27) containing one kind of BB-C. And By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information on which BB has been established and which BB combination has been won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

  Next, in the item of "winning / replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 18 are allocated for each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning numbers (winning number 0 corresponding to the loss and winning numbers 19, 20, and 24 corresponding to the bonus) that do not include the replaying role and the small role are set to 0 as the winning / replaying winning information. In addition, 1 to 18 winning / replay winning information is distributed for each condition device with respect to the winning number including the replaying role or small winning combination. By storing the winning / replay winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information relating to which replay winning or small winning combination. The details of the winning / re-game winning information will be described later.

  Next, numerical values from 0 to 11 are sorted for each winning number in the item of “effect group number”. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. The details of the effect group number will be described later.

  Next, in the item of the payout group number, numerical values from 0 to 13 are assigned for each winning number. The main control board M stores the payout group number, and executes the lottery process related to the AT by using the stored payout group number when performing the lottery related to the AT (for example, the AT lottery, the AT addition lottery). Programs and data capacity required for the execution. Note that the AT lottery and the AT addition lottery are not executed even if the condition device in which the payout group number becomes 0 is won. On the other hand, when the condition device with the payout group number other than 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery can be executed. The details of the payout group number will be described later. In addition, even when the condition device in which the payout group number becomes 0 is won, an AT lottery or an AT addition lottery may be configured to be executed. In such a case, the payout group number may be changed. It is preferable that, when the condition apparatus that becomes 0 wins and the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery is executed, the lottery result is always lost (non-winning).

  Next, FIG. 11 shows a lottery probability in which a winning number (also referred to as a condition device number, also referred to as a winning role) and a bonus (also referred to as a BB role, BB) for a small role, a replaying role in the present embodiment are determined by the role lottery means. (Also referred to as a winning rate). In the drawing, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

  First, the lottery probabilities in “RT0”, “RT1”, and “RT2” when the BB is not operating will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of a winning combination (especially, a replaying role) can be different depending on the RT state, and the “replaying role” (appearance of all replaying roles in total) Rate) is higher in the case of “RT1” than in the other RT states. In addition, "re-game 04" which can be stopped and displayed at the winning numbers 4 to 6 (a so-called fall re-game player, which is "RT1" and a symbol corresponding to the re-game player in a situation where no bonus is won) When the combination is stopped and displayed, the process subsequently shifts to "RT0"), which is mainly won at "RT1", and hardly appears at "RT0". In addition, in “RT2”, “re-game 04” that can be stopped and displayed at the winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but even if “re-game 04” is stop-displayed, the RT state does not shift. Note that, when “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed at “RT1”, the transition to “RT0”, that is, a fall effect that is an effect of notifying that the RT state has fallen (for example, the effect display device S40) If "Replay 04" is stopped and displayed at "RT0", the fall effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the player has won the BB due to the fact that the re-rendering game 04 has been stopped and the fall effect has not been performed, and the interest of the game has been enhanced. Can be enhanced. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, a sound effect output when the “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed and a re-game combination other than “re-game 04” (for example, “re-game” in which the RT state does not shift). 01 ”) may be configured to be different from the sound effect output when the stop display is performed. With such a configuration, the player recognizes that the“ re-game 04 ”has been stopped and displayed. It can be easily configured. In addition, a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation does not occur (for example, a “normal game state”, which may be referred to as a non-AT game state) and a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation may occur (for example, “ (At-AT state), which may be referred to as an AT gaming state). At this time, when a winning number that may shift (fall) from “RT1” to “RT0” is won, and in a non-AT gaming state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is displayed. The output may not be performed based on the operation of the start lever D50. This makes it possible to shift the gaming state without making the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to “RT0” in the non-AT gaming state. On the other hand, during the AT gaming state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall down is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-playing role in which the RT state does not fall down is stopped and displayed). (Notifying the forward navigation). This allows the player to operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified, so that the RT state does not fall. The “re-game 05” that can be stopped and displayed at the winning number 2 or 3 (the re-game player who can notify that the lottery has been selected in the AT when stopped and displayed in the AT state) is mainly “RT1”. , And hardly appear in other RT states. The transition of the state related to the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination serving as the re-game combination will be described later. Further, as described later, in the present embodiment, the push order navigation for notifying the reel stop order that is most advantageous to the player is configured to be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. . Note that there is no problem even if the lottery probability is appropriately changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the bonus is configured to be able to overlap with the small combination, and is overlapped with a part of the watermelon A, the watermelon B, and the cherry. Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 are the condition devices in which the bonus and the small role overlap.

  In addition, in the situation of “RT2”, since the BB has been won and the BB has not been activated, the BB role of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (a single role that does not overlap with the small role) In the case of winning the BB role, which may be referred to as a single BB role or a single BB role), the new winning of the BB role becomes invalid, and only the winning of the small role becomes valid. Specifically, for example, when “RT2” is selected and “1 type BB-C” with a winning number 24 is selected in a situation where one type BB-A has been won (carried over), In this case, the type BB-C associated with the winning number 24 becomes invalid. That is, the situation is the same as the case where the "losing" of the winning number 0 is won. In addition, the state where the carried over type 1 BB-A is elected is continued. Further, in the situation of “RT2”, since the BB has been won and the BB has not been operated, the small role of the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 and the BB role are When the overlapping condition devices are won, the new winning of the BB combination is invalidated, and only the winning of the small combination is valid. Specifically, for example, in a situation where “RT2” is selected and one type of BB-A is won (carry over), the player is elected to “one type of BB-B + winning-C” with the winning number 21. In this case, the type BB-B associated with the winning number 21 becomes invalid, and only winning-C becomes valid. That is, the situation is the same as the case where the winning number 14 “winning-C” is won. In addition, the state where the carried over type 1 BB-A is elected is continued. Note that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small combination, and may overlap with a part of the re-game combination. For example, a part of the replaying combinations of the winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus combination. In this way, by making the bonus overlap with the condition device including the RT transition replay (the replaying player whose RT state can transition), the bonus is also won when the condition device including the RT transition replay is won. There is a possibility that even if the RT shift replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus is not denied, so that the player can be expected. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the control is performed so that the RT state does not shift even if the RT shift replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have transitioned to the RT state (transition to an RT state with a relatively low replay probability) but the replay probability has not become low (frequently won a replay). Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the game, such as the possibility that the bonus has been won.

  Next, the lottery probability in “one type BB-A, B, C” during the BB operation will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, during the BB operation, the winning number 13 “common bell”, the winning number 17 “BB middle weak rare small part (oblique bell aligned)”, and the winning number 18 “BB middle strong rare small part” (V-shaped bell alignment) "and" BB middle weak rare small alignment (diagonal bell alignment) "during the operation of the winning BB in the" AT state ". Alternatively, when the player wins the "BB middle strong rare small role (V-shaped bell aligned)", an AT addition lottery is executed (details will be described later).

  In the upper part of the figure, the small combination appearance rate when the set value is 1 is illustrated. In the common bell (winning number 13), the appearance rate is uniform regardless of the RT state. As shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to be different depending on the set value (six levels in this example). Specifically, the setting number in setting 1 is 3204, the setting number in setting 2 is 3404, the setting number in setting 3 is 3604, the setting number in setting 4 is 3904, the setting number in setting 5 is 4204, and the setting number in setting 6 is Is 4504, and the appearance rate increases as the set value increases. With such a configuration, for example, when the player proceeds with the game while measuring the number of appearances of the common bell (the number of wins), the player frequently wins the common bell, thereby providing a game machine that is playing. The game can be advanced while expecting that the set value is a relatively high set value. Also, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the payout rate. The appearance rate of the common bell is configured to be different depending on the set value. However, depending on the winning of the common bell, AT lottery, AT addition lottery, and high-probability state transition lottery described later are not executed. It is configured not to affect the transition lottery of the state related to (also referred to as the lottery regarding the AT).

  The middle part of the figure is a list of expected values when there is a pressing order navigation. In the figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as the “AT state”, the reels are stopped according to the navigation. The average number of payouts per game (the average number of medals paid out by winning small players, also referred to as the expected number of game media obtained in one game), and the expected medal increase / decrease value per game ( The ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted when a game is played with three bets. If the number is larger than 1, the expected value becomes positive and the number of medals increases. The value becomes negative and the medals decrease). The average number of payouts per game is calculated as "sum of the number of re-gaming combinations (sum of the numbers for winning numbers 1 to 6) x number of payouts in re-gaming (3) + small role (11) Sum of the numbers of the role (small role appearance rate) (sum of the numbers of the winning combinations 7 to 16) x number of payouts in the small role (11 pieces) (11) / sum of all the numbers (65536) )]. Also, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game can be calculated as “average payout number per game / medal insertion number per game (3)”. Note that the number of medals inserted per game (the number of game media inserted in one game) is three, and if the average number of payouts per game is greater than three, the medal increase / decrease per game is expected. The value is configured to be greater than one. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the expected value of increase / decrease of medals per game for "RT1" is relatively largest. Note that the numerical values in the figure do not take into account the increase or decrease of medals due to bonuses. That is, when the game proceeds in a situation where the push order navigation occurs (also referred to as being operated in the optimal operation mode or in the advantageous operation mode), the number of medals increases in “RT1”. Although not illustrated in “RT0” and “RT2”, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game is smaller than 1 in a situation where no push order navigation has occurred. Will decrease. In the present embodiment, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game is larger than 1 when there is a push order navigation also in “RT0” or “RT2”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Or "RT2", the expected medal increase / decrease value per game when there is a push order navigation may be smaller than 1. Note that when the symbol combination serving as a re-game combination is stopped and displayed, the bet amount (three) in the previous game is actually automatically bet. However, in calculating the expected medal increase / decrease value in the present embodiment, the medal is expected to be increased. The calculation is performed assuming that three cards are paid out. One game may be referred to as one game.

  The average number of payouts per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is “RT0”, and 4.737915039 when the RT state is “RT1”. Is 3.67137146 when is "RT2". In addition, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is “RT0”, and 1.579305031 when the RT state is “RT1”. In the case where is "RT2", it is 1.2237790487, and when there is a push order navigation, the case where the RT state is "RT1" is the most advantageous RT state for the player. The numerical value is a value in the case of setting 1. Note that the winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities relating to the small winning combinations and re-playing combinations are merely examples, and, for example, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game in “RT2” in which BB is being internally established (when there is a push order navigation) May be configured to be less than 1. With such a configuration, in a situation where the push order navigation occurs and when it is “RT2” (when BB is being established internally), if the bonus is not aligned in a game in which the bonus can be aligned, In addition, the possession medals gradually decrease, and in the game where the push order navigation occurs and when the RT is “RT2” (BB is being established internally), a game in which the bonuses can be aligned intentionally. By not setting up bonuses, it is possible to prevent a strategy in which the number of medals is increased. Specifically, it is preferable to design the probability that a loss will occur in “RT2” to be higher than the winning probability of all the small wins (winning-A1 to winning-I) winning in “RT2”. It is preferable to determine the winning probability of the replaying game so that it is designed as follows (the higher the probability of winning the replaying game, the lower the probability of loss will be, and the higher the probability of winning the replaying game) It is preferable to design so that it does not become too much). In addition, in “RT2” of the present example, the winning probability of the sum of all the small roles is 18784/65536, the winning probability of the sum of all the replays is 12501/65536, and the probability of the loss is: 34251/65536 (see FIG. 11), and the loss probability is designed to be higher than the winning probability obtained by adding all the small roles.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the same number 40 is assigned to the appearance rate of the type 1 BB-A for all of the settings 1 to 6. In addition, as the appearance rate of the type BB-C, the same number 160 is assigned to all of the settings 1 to 6. On the other hand, as for the appearance rate of one type of BB-B, 160 is assigned to setting 1, 180 is assigned to setting 2, 200 is assigned to setting 3, and 200 is assigned to setting 4. 220 is assigned, 240 is assigned to setting 5, and 270 is assigned to setting 6. That is, in the appearance rate of the type BB-B, the assigned numbers are different depending on the set value. As described above, the BB-A and the BB-C have no setting difference, and the BB has no setting difference (the BB-A and the BB-C may be referred to as BB without setting difference and bonus with no setting difference). BB-B functions as a BB having a setting difference (the BB-B may be referred to as a BB having a setting difference and a bonus having a setting difference). In addition, the appearance rate of one type of BB-A, one type of BB-B and one type of BB-C is uniform regardless of the RT state ("RT0" and "RT1"). In addition, the appearance rates of the type BB-A and the type BB-C (sum) are the same regardless of the set value, but the appearance rates of the type BB-B (sum) differ depending on the set value. In addition, although the appearance rate summed as the appearance rate of one type BB-B is the same even if the set value is different, the appearance rate for each winning number may be different depending on the set value. Even in the case of the configuration, one type BB-B may be referred to as BB having a setting difference.

  Next, with reference to a block diagram of FIG. 12, an electrical schematic configuration of the spinning-type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment mainly includes a main control board M for controlling the progress of the game, a sub-control board S, a door board D, a spinning board K, a power board E, a relay board IN, A setting key switch M20, a setting / reset button M30 and the like are connected so as to be able to exchange data. It should be noted that the solid line in the figure shows the movement related to data exchange, and the broken line in the figure shows the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this. For example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN or the door board D without passing through the main control board.

  A main control board (may be referred to as a main control means, a main board, a main control means, a main board, and a main game section) M is a board that controls the progress of the entire game performed by the spinning-type gaming machine P. On the main control board M, a main control chip C is mounted. The main control chip C is connected to a CPU C100 (also referred to as a CPUMC), a built-in ROM C110, a built-in RAM C120, etc. via a bus so that data can be exchanged with each other. Has been mounted. Then, the main control board M receives a signal indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub control board S, the door board D, the spinning board, and the like. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or a control signal) toward K or the like. For example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information) is directed toward the sub-control board S. ), The sub-control board S can execute the push order navigation on the effect display device S40.

  Also, the sub-control board (also referred to as a sub-control unit, a sub-board, a sub-control unit, a sub-board, and a sub-game unit) S is provided with the sub-control chip SC similarly to the main control board M described above. The sub-control chip SC includes a CPU SC100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is configured so as to be able to exchange data with each other via a bus. In addition, the sub-control board S includes various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, an effect display device S40, a torso backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, and the like. Is connected. Here, the spine backlight S30 is a light provided inside each of the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates a symbol drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes the control commands received from the main control board M, and outputs various drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, the speakers S20, the effect display device S40, the turning backlight S30, etc. Has been directed. In the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the player can select nine ranges of the upper, middle, lower, middle, upper, middle, and lower reels of the left reel, and the upper, middle, and lower stages of the right reel. A plurality of LEDs are provided as the torso backlight S30 so that they can be individually identified. As an example, the LED corresponding to the upper stage of the left reel is turned on and all the other LEDs are turned off, so that the player can identify that the upper stage of the left reel is turned on. In addition, when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the turning type gaming machine according to the present example changes the lighting mode of the turning backlight S30 to indicate that the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed. (Referred to later as backlight effect) (see below for details).

  On the door substrate D, the above-described input receiving sensor D10s, first input sensor D20s, second input sensor D30s, stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and start for starting rotation of the reel M50. A lever D50, a payout button D60 for paying out stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals and ending the game, and various display panels D70 for displaying the state of the game (not shown). The inserted number display lamp D210, the start lamp D180, the re-game lamp D290, the insertable lamp D300, the special game state display device D250, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270, the credit number display device D200, the advantageous section A set of display devices such as a display unit YH, etc. Door switch for performing further D80, is determined to be incompatible after being turned a medal (or other foreign) blocker D100 like to reimburse the outlet D240 and are connected. The door board D is connected to the main control board M so that data can be exchanged. Therefore, when the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the settlement button D60, and the like provided on the front door DU are operated, a signal relating to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, a signal indicating that the insertion reception sensor D10s has detected the passing of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

  In addition, a rotating drum motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a rotating drum sensor K20 for detecting the rotation position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the rotating drum substrate K. The rotating body substrate K can stop the reel M50 at the determined stop position by driving the rotating body motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 by the rotating body sensor K20. I have. In the spinning machine of the present embodiment, a so-called stepping motor (sometimes called a stepping motor) is used as the spinning motor K10. The step motor is set to 480 steps as the number of steps for the reel M50 to make one rotation. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, 20) of symbols are set on each reel (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) with a substantially uniform size. Is set to 24 steps (= 480/20). It should be noted that there is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel are changed.

  The medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on a control signal from the main control board M. Perform the operation of issuing. The medal payout device H includes a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s for determining whether or not medals are normally paid out and measuring the number of paid out game medals, and a disk H50. A hopper motor H80 for rotation is connected.

  The power consumed by these various control boards and the boards is supplied from a power board E (a board that controls the presence or absence of power supply by a power switch E10). In FIG. 12, the manner in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is indicated by broken-line arrows. As shown in the drawing, power is directly supplied from the power supply board E to the main control board M and the sub control board S, and various boards (the door board D, the turning body board K, and the relay board IN) are Power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of an AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and the power is converted into a specified DC voltage and then supplied to the control board and the board.

  The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used to execute a setting change device control process (to change a setting), which will be described later, and a setting / reset capable of changing a set value or canceling an error. Button M30 is connected. The main control board M includes a reel control unit that controls the rotation and stop of the reels M50 (the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53), and an "AT-in-state" which is a state related to an AT advantageous to the player. AT lottery means for executing an AT shift lottery for transitioning to "AT", and an AT addition lottery for increasing the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of the AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the "AT state". AT addition lottery means to be executed.

  Next, FIGS. 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the present embodiment.

  The flowchart mainly includes processing steps (shown by rectangles), judgments (shown by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (shown by rounded rectangles) indicating start, end, return, and the like. ing. When details are shown in another flowchart among the processing steps, those that refer to the other flowchart are shown as subroutines (shown by rectangles in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, in the development stage of the gaming machine, a gaming machine with a different specification is also developed at the same time, but in this example, a sub-routine executed by the gaming machine with a different specification is included in the processing on the main side. The configuration is such that a subroutine that is not normally used is not left, and a process related to an unused subroutine that is not normally performed is prevented from being executed due to noise or fraud.

  First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing executed for the first time by the CPU C100 of the main control board M after turning on the power of the spinning-type gaming machine P (or at the time of system reset or user reset). . First, in step 1000, after turning on the power of the spinning-type gaming machine P, in step 1002, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of a timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is started. Instead, only the type of timer interrupt is set, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, a flowchart relating to a timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed). Next, in step 1004, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes setting of serial communication (setting of speed, data length, data transmission method) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPU C100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the top address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPU C100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area, power-off / power-off recovery). To check whether the data stored in the built-in RAM C120 is held correctly) and generates power-off recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPU C100 of the main control board M checks the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

  If Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing completion flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and checksums all RAMs (in step 1006). It is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal with reference to the check result of (2). If Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPU C100 of the main control board M performs initialization of the RAM area in the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPU C100 of the main control board M returns the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the process at the time of power-off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. If Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes reading of the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPU C100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag, and returns to the power-off processing according to the restored stack pointer.

  If No in step 1016, in step 1024, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-returnable error process described later.

  If No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, displayed on the number-of-payouts display device D270) (for example, in the register area). To set). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-returnable error process described later.

  If No in Step 1014, in Step 1028, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing completed flag in the RAM (turns on in Step 1904) and checksums all RAMs (Step 1904). With reference to the result of the check in 1006), it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines and sets the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding a storage area for storing set values (set value data) in the RAM. For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. The range that is not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to the storage area for storing the set value (set value data). The total number of games in the “advantageous section” and the total number of game sections (the advantageous section + (Normal section) The number of games, the result of calculating the staying ratio of the "advantageous section", and the like are also ranges that are not included in the initialization range of the RAM. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate and display the ratio of staying in the “advantageous section” in the game (advantageous section ratio). Further, the processing for calculating the advantageous section ratio is configured to calculate at the timing when the unit game ends. The advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (for example, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at an interval of 5 seconds in the order of “advantageous section ratio → continuous bonus ratio per 6000 games → principal ratio per 6000 games → cumulative continuous bonus ratio → cumulative bonus ratio”. Is displayed. The continuous bonus ratio is the number of payouts in the state where the RB is operating / the total number of payouts, and the bonus ratio is the number of payouts in the state where the RB, CB, or SB is operating. / Total number of payouts ". On the other hand, if No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to be a specific range including a storage area for storing set values (set value data) in the RAM. Set (for example, set in the register area), and then go to step 1034. Next, in Step 1034, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area in the initialization range determined in Step 1030 or Step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process described later.

  Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (the value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area or the like) mounted on the main control board M is not set to the value at which the special game is executed. (In order to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the processing for determining the execution of the special game is executed due to noise or cheating immediately after the start of the processing of the program). Although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured, and a byte storing information about the random number is stored in a byte. It is preferable that only the information related to the random number be stored (other information such as various timer values is not stored) (when operating another data stored in the same one byte, noise may be generated). In order to prevent information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initializes the stack pointer with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPU C100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value (set value data) in the RAM area is within a normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set values (set value data) are managed in 1 to 6, the RAM needs to be initialized, and a process of returning to “1” when the set value becomes “0” is required. Therefore, in the present example, by correcting the normal range of the set value (set value data) from 0 to 5, the correction process of the set value (set value data) after the initialization of the RAM is executed (steps 1106 and Step 1108) can be dispensed with, and the processing time can be reduced and the processing capacity can be reduced. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a set value (set value data) to a predetermined value (for example, 0 = value that is most disadvantageous for the player), and proceeds to step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the number-of-payouts display device D270) that the setting change device is being operated (for example, “88” that turns on all segments). Then, the set value is displayed on the set display LED (not shown) (the display of the set value is a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112 is performed. Move to As described above, the number-of-payouts display device D270 is also used when notifying the pressing order. With such a configuration, for example, when a part of the 7-segment LED has a failure (there is a segment that cannot be turned on), the erroneous information may be reported when the pressing order is reported. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, the number-of-payouts display device D270 lights all the segments “88” during the operation of the setting change device, so that it is possible to confirm whether or not the seven segments are out of order, and to inform the player of the failure. Profit can be prevented. In addition, as a configuration related to the display of the set value (set value data), the storage of a set value display RAM for storing data obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) in the storage area for storing the set value It may be configured to have an area and display the set value with reference to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1110, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the mode is shifted to the setting change mode to the sub-control board S is executed.

  Next, in step 1112, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from off to on. If Yes in step 1112, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (set value data) in step 1114 (if the set value (set value data) exceeds 5 as a result of the addition, , The set value (set value data) becomes 0), and the process proceeds to step 1116. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1112, the process proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the start lever D50 has been switched from off to on. In the case of No at step 1116, the process moves to step 1112, and the processing of steps 1112 to 1116 is looped. If Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 has been switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process of step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays that the operation of the setting change device has been completed on an error display LED (not shown), and turns off the setting display LED (not shown). The display of the set value (set value data) is deleted, and the process proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process for transmitting a command to end the setting change mode to the sub-control board S is executed.

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the non-recoverable error processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 13 (and called in another flowchart). First, in step 1302, the CPU C100 of the main control board M prohibits an interrupt (hereinafter, a flowchart related to a timer interrupt process described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (0 to 6, in this example, display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, the display output to various LEDs and the drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not output to each output port has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (when executing this processing, some error has occurred), and Are repeated, and the reset signal is input as the power supply voltage decreases, and the process ends. (That is, since it enters an infinite loop, no operation for prompting return is accepted.) If the determination in step 1310 is No, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processing in steps 1306 to 1310 is a processing for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information on the error, the game progress at the time of occurrence of the error, and the like are displayed on the hall computer side). It is possible to output to.)

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initializes the stack pointer with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area necessary for the game (for example, the maximum number of bets, the activated pay lines, etc.). It should be noted that the step 1203 is to clear the data used in the previous game (for example, the condition device number (winning number), the effect group number, and the instruction information) (data of “0” for clearing the RAM address). Data) in the RAM. The condition device number, the effect group number, the instruction information, etc. may not be cleared, and the number selected when the next game is executed may be overwritten. Next, in step 1204, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an RT state (for example, “RT0” or the like) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 in FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) relating to the RT state set in step 1204. The process for setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 in FIG. In step 1704, a command relating to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set. When transmitting the RT state to the sub side, it is not necessary to transmit the RT state to the sub side at all times, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a state related to the AT in the game (for example, “AT state”) (steps 1420 and 1429 in FIG. 21, steps 1435 in FIG. The state relating to the AT determined in steps 1439 and 1443, and steps 1444-3 and 1444-4 in FIG. 23 is set). Next, in step 1207, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command relating to the state related to the AT set in step 1206 (command to the sub side). Further, the processing for setting the state relating to the AT may be executed in steps 1416 and 1428 in FIG. 21, step 1438 in FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 in FIG. Further, when transmitting the status relating to the AT to the sub-side, it is not necessary to transmit the status at all times, and the status relating to the AT may be transmitted to the sub-side only when the gaming section is an “advantageous section”. Next, in Step 1208, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, “advantageous section”) in the game (the game section determined in Step 3510, Step 3516, and Step 3520 in FIG. 31). set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) relating to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H is provided, and two full detection electrodes DE (details described later) that can enter the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS. Is determined based on the conduction / non-conduction of the current (when the current is conducted through the medal, it is determined to be full). In the case of Yes in step 1209, the process moves to step 1218.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). ). Next, in step 1212, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal full error using a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been cleared (for example, the current is not conducted by the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS and the setting / It is determined whether or not the reset button M30 has been pressed. If Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and proceeds to step 1216. Control is passed to 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214, the process moves to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPU C100 of the main control board M permits acceptance of medal insertion (in the next game of the replaying game, the insertion operation is automatically performed), and the next processing (step 1220) Processing). Here, in step 1218, an ON process of the blocker D100 (a process of forming a medal channel) is performed. Specifically, when the replaying game is established in the previous game, the ON processing of the blocker D100 is performed on condition that the current number of stored credits is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Execute. In other words, if the current stored number (credit) is the predetermined value, the ON processing of the blocker D100 is not executed. On the other hand, when the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the ON process of the blocker D100 is uniformly executed. With such a configuration, even if the re-gaming combination is established, the game medal can be inserted if the stored number (credit) has not reached the predetermined value, such as "RT1". When staying in an RT state (for example, “RT1”) where the probability of winning a replaying game is higher than the RT state, or a replaying game that looks hard to understand is a replaying game (a replay that looks like a small role: Even when the bell-bell-bell or the symbol combination where the cherry stops on the left reel on the invalid line is stopped, the player can play the game with a good rhythm (without feeling uncomfortable).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control processing (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a game medal has been bet or has not been saved (there is no credit). If Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPU C100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display condition (for example, the condition is satisfied when all of the door switch D80 and the set key switch M20 are turned on). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the setting display LED (not shown, but may be the payout number display device D270, the credit number display device D200, or the insertion number display light D210). The value is displayed (transition to the setting confirmation mode), and the routine proceeds to step 1221 on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. Processing for transmitting a command to start the setting change mode to the sub-control board S when the transition condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, and setting change mode when the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied. Is executed to transmit a command indicating that the process is terminated. In the case of No in Step 1220 or Step 1221, in Step 1224, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes management related to insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPU C100 of the main control board M checks the number of acceptable game medals. Next, in step 1226, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on. If Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in the present embodiment, the medal insertion is not performed). It has two insertion sensors for detection, and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been received). If Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D20s). When the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. ). If Yes in step 1230, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines in step 1231 that the insertion of one normal game medal has been received. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the credit is the upper limit number (50 in this example) and the bet number is the maximum number (3 in this example). Is determined, and if the determination is Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be turned off (a state in which the medal flow path is not formed). Note that if No in Step 1230, the process of Step 1230 is repeated, and if No in Step 1226 or 1227, the process shifts to Step 1232.

  Next, in step 1232, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the settlement button D60 has been operated. If Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of credits or a betting game medal. If Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven), and The payout of one medal is executed. Next, in step 1236, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in the present embodiment, it is necessary to detect the payout of medals). It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal is being performed). In the case of Yes at step 1236, the process moves to step 1247. Although not explicitly shown in the flowchart, if the previous game was a replay, only the remaining number of credits is settled.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1234). . Specifically, it is determined whether or not the medal has not been paid out for a predetermined period of time even though the hopper drive signal is transmitted to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1241, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to on) in step 1242. Next, in step 1244, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been released (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). If Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), It moves to 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245, the process moves to step 1244.

  Next, in step 1247, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal for which the payout operation has been performed has been completed. If Yes in step 1247, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag in step 1248, and proceeds to step 1233. If the answer is No in Step 1241 or Step 1247, the process proceeds to Step 1236.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1232 or step 1233, in step 1251, the CPU C100 of the main control board M has the start lever D50 valid (for example, a predetermined number of game medals for starting the game are inserted). It is determined whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. If Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the set value in the RAM area is within a normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPU C100 of the main control board M proceeds to the next process (the process in step 3600) after performing the process of acquiring random numbers and turning off the blocker D100. On the other hand, if No in Step 1253, in Step 1256, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. If the determination in step 1251 is No, the process moves to step 1220.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control processing (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is a state in which an AT-additional lottery is possible. Here, in the present example, the states related to the ATs in which the AT addition lottery can be executed are “AT-in-progress state”, “additional specialization state”, “specialization precursor state”, and “advantageous BB state”. In the “advantageous BB inside middle game”, the AT counter value may be larger than 0, but the AT addition lottery is not executed. This is in order to prevent a situation in which the player does not intentionally arrange the BB symbol combinations in the “advantageous BB inside middle game” to be more advantageous to the player. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute the AT addition lottery in the “advantageous BB inside middle game”, and in such a case, it is possible to win the AT addition lottery in the “advantage BB inside middle game”. Alternatively, it may be configured not to notify immediately, but to notify that an AT addition lottery has been won at the timing when BB has ended thereafter or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games has been added.

  In the case of Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an additional game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1259, the process shifts to step 1400. In this additional game execution processing, it is possible to execute a lottery using a different lottery table according to the state related to the AT, but the lottery probability does not differ depending on the set value (using the same lottery table). Executing a lottery) is preferable. Next, in step 1400, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an AT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a condition device number management process described later.

  Here, states related to the AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 30). (1) The “low-probability state” is a state in which the player has not won the AT (has not obtained the right to shift to the “during-AT state”) and has not won the bonus combination. Note that the “low-probability state” is a so-called “normal state”, and thus may be referred to as a “normal state”. (2) “Normal BB inside game” is a state in which the BB role has been won in the “low probability state”, the BB role has not won, and the AT lottery has not been won. (3) The “normal BB state” means that when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “low probability state” in a situation where the BB combination has been won and the AT lottery has not been won, Alternatively, this is a state that is executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “normal BB inside middle game”. (4) The “high probability state” is a state in which the player has not won the AT lottery (has not obtained the right to shift to the “AT state”) and has not won the bonus role. This is a state in which it is easier to win the AT than in the aforementioned “low probability state”. Note that, as described later, when the game mode newly shifts to the “high probability state”, the game mode is configured not to shift to the “low probability state” until the number of highly secured failure games has elapsed. "Is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, when a continuous lottery described later is won, a predetermined value is set in the AT counter, and the “AT in progress state” is continued. Is a state in which the user has acquired the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" in which the number of AT games is relatively more easily added than in the "in-AT state". (7) The “additional specialization state” is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easily added to the “additional state”. (8) The “advantageous BB internal middle game” means that the player wins the BB role in the “high probability state”, the “AT state”, the “specialization precursor state”, or the “additional specialization state”, and the BB role is It has not been awarded. (9) The “standby BB inside game” is a state in which the BB role is won in the “low probability state”, the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role has not won. . (10) The “advantageous BB state” is a symbol combination that is won as the BB role and corresponds to the BB role in the “high-probability state”, the “at-AT state”, the “specialization precursor state”, or the “additional specialization state”. The state executed when the stop combination is displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “advantageous BB inside game”, or the BB combination is won in the “low probability state”, and , The BB combination has won the AT lottery, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the "standby BB internal middle game" It is a state that is sometimes executed. (12) "Resurrection availability state" refers to a state relating to the AT which is transferred when the AT counter value becomes 0 and the subsequent lottery described later is not won. In the “state of resurrection possible or not”, a resurrection lottery described later is executed, and when the resurrection lottery is won, the state shifts to the “AT state” (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and the resurrection lottery is not performed. In the case of winning, the state shifts to the “low probability state”.

  Next, in step 1550, the CPU C100 of the main control board M starts rotation of all reels, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M requests the pull-in point creation (a request is made to determine the stop positions of the rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53. And the other reels are stopped as required). If Yes in step 1261-1, in step 1262, the CPUC100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point, and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1261-1, the processing shifts to step 1263. As described above, in the “BB inside middle game”, the stop button is not stopped in the pushing order of the correct answer to pay out 11 sheets in the game that is won in the pushing order bell (for example, in the case of the winning-A1) In the case where the stop button is not stopped in the order of “left → middle → right” (when the reels are stopped in the order of pushing the wrong answers), the symbol combination that results in the payout of 11 sheets by the reel stop control is not performed. It is configured to win. Next, in step 1263, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptability check. Next, in step 1264, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. If Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). . On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the all reel stop check processing. Next, in step 1267, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether all the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) have stopped. If Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPU C100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stoppable position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (if it does not match the winning combination determined by the internal lottery, it is abnormal. Is determined). The determination as to whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal in step 1269 is based on whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally, and the winning combination is won. In the game being played, when the stop button is operated in an operation mode in which the winning combination can win, the reel position actually stopped is not normal (the winning determination determined by the internal lottery becomes possible). Even if the role does not appear to be stopped from the appearance of the player), if the reel stop control is normally completed by the internal processing of the gaming machine, the game medal based on the winning of the winning combination is obtained. The payout is configured to be performed. If Yes in step 1269, the process moves to step 1274. On the other hand, if No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a display determination error display (for example, sets it in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process moves to step 1261-1.

  Next, in step 1274, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out a game medal. The game medal obtained by the winning exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). In this case, the payout of the game medal is executed. If Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven) and executes payout of one game medal. . Next, in step 1277, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal is performed). In the case of Yes in step 1277, the flow shifts to step 1286.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1276). . In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1281, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the medal empty error display with the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been released (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). If Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), The process proceeds to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process moves to step 1281.

  Next, in step 1286, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal for which the payout operation has been performed has been completed. If Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag, and proceeds to step 1290. If the result of step 1279 or step 1286 is No, the process moves to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the winning (the winning in step 1275) has been completed. In the case of Yes at step 1290, the process moves to step 3400. If the answer is No in Step 1286, the process proceeds to Step 1277. If the answer is No in Step 1275, the process proceeds to Step 3400. If the result is No in Step 1290, the process proceeds to Step 1276.

  Next, in step 3400, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a remaining game number management process described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a later-described RT state transition control process. Next, in Step 1750, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an AT state start control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a game section shift control process described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing a bet number, shifting a game state, and the like), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1202).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3600 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used to execute the internal lottery, in which a winning number, a set number for comparison with an acquired random number, and the like are stored). Then, control goes to a step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires a winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. Note that winning / replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if the bonus and the small role are overlapped and the bonus is won, or if the bonus and the replaying role are overlapped and the winning is performed, both the winning / replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are determined from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. Specific generation processing will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same payout group number and the same number for comparison with the acquired random number, and is stored in the ROM of the main control board M in advance. It is remembered. For example, the payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers of winning numbers 4 to 12, and the number is the same for three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6, which are the re-playing order. Since the numbers are the same for the six consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12, which are the pushing order bell combination, the number of repetitions related to the pushing order replaying game is 3, and the pushing order bell The number of repetitions for the role is 6. In addition, the lottery table used when acquiring the winning numbers 4 to 6 that are the pushing order replaying game and the lottery table used when acquiring the winning numbers 7 to 12 that are the pushing order bell role are a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in Step 3608, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to Step 3610.

  Next, in step 3610, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery has been won (whether or not the obtained random number exists in the currently searched internal lottery table). In the case of Yes in step 3614, it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, so that the determination (lottery) is not executed for the subsequent internal lottery table address, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1259). On the other hand, if No in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPU C100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions. Next, in step 3618, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the flow shifts to step 3610, and the processing of steps 3610 to 3618 is repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If No in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates the address to the next payout group number), and proceeds to step 3604 to step 3604. Execute the following processing. The specific process of the internal lottery will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the additional game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to the AT is the “in AT state”, the “specialization precursor state”, or the “additional specialization state”. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the payout group number relating to the game to an additional during AT (winning number that can add the remaining number of AT games in the “in AT state”). In this example, it is determined whether or not the payout group number (1, 3 in this example) relating to the replay-B, the replay-C, and the winning-D. If Yes in step 1504, the process moves to step 1514. In addition, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, when the state related to the AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the payout group number related to the game in the BB additional role (“ In the "advantageous BB state", it is a winning number that can add the remaining number of AT games, and in this example, whether or not it is a payout group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning -H, winning -I). Is determined. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. If No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to the AT is the "additional specialization state". In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M may add the payout group number relating to the game during the specialization additional role (in the “additional specialization state”, the number of remaining AT games and In the "AT state", the winning number is the winning number which does not add the remaining AT game number, and in this example, the payout group number relating to replay-A, replay-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6) (In this example, 2, 13) is determined. If Yes in step 1508, the process moves to step 1514. If the answer is No in step 1506 or 1508, the process moves to step 1518.

  Next, in step 1514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the number-of-additional-games lottery table at the time of winning and determines the number of AT-added games based on the payout group number of the game (for example, in the margin). In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether the latched random number value falls within any range). Determining the number of AT-added games is also referred to as executing an AT-added lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of added games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition in the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the command related to the determined number of added games (the command is directed to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S receives the command, It is set whether the additional number of AT games has been executed or not and the number of additional games can be recognized). In addition, even in the case of the payout group numbers 7 to 11, which are payout group numbers related to the winning numbers (winning numbers 19 to 27) including the bonus, the lottery relating to the AT (AT lottery, AT additional lottery) can be executed. .

  Here, the lottery table shown outside the figure is an example of a lottery table for additional games at the time of winning, and in the present embodiment, a part of the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is executed (in this example, “ If the additional role is won at the time of the election in the “AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization state”, “advantageous BB state”), based on the payout group number related to the game, The number of AT-added games “0” to “300” is determined by lottery, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. Note that if “0” is determined, the number of remaining AT games does not increase (if “0” is determined, the AT addition lottery may be referred to as non-winning).

  In addition, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT-added games when the winning combination is won at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure. As a specific calculation method, the winning combination is watermelon A. In this case, $ (600) × the number of AT-added games (0) + number of (100) × AT-added games (10) + number of (300) × AT-added games (30) + number of ( 24) × AT additional games (100)｝ / total number of placed games (1024) = 12.1 (game).

  Next, when the winning combination is replay-B or replay-C, the number of placements (500) × the number of AT-added games (0) + the number of placements (200) × the number of AT-added games (50) + The number (300) × the number of AT-added games (100) + the number of (AT) (24) × the number of AT-added games (300)｝ / the total number of placed numbers (1024) = 46.1 (game). be able to.

  Next, when the winning combination is replay-A or replay-D1 to D3 and winning-A1 to A6, the number of places (300) × the number of AT-added games (10) + the number of places (600) × The number of AT-added games (30) + the number of placements (124) × the number of AT-added games (50)｝ / the total number of placements (1024) = 26.61 (game). In addition, when the winning combination is replay-A or replay-D1 to D3, winning-A1 to A6, the number of AT games is added only when the state related to AT is “additional specialization state”. Has become.

  Next, in the case where the winning combination is a BB middle weak rare combination, the number of (800) × the number of AT-added games (0) + the number of (100) × the number of AT-added games (10) + the number of (100) ) × the number of AT-added games (30) + the number of set (24) × the number of AT-added games (100)｝ / total number of set (1024) = 6.3 (game).

  Next, in the case where the winning combination is a BB middle strong rare role, $ (300) × the number of AT-added games (0) + number of (300) × AT-added games (30) + (400) ) × the number of AT-added games (50) + the number of set (24) × the number of AT-added games (300)｝ / total number of set (1024) = 35.4 (game).

  In the present embodiment, when an AT-addition lottery is executed, the average value of the number of AT-added games may be different depending on the type of the winning combination. The average values are configured not to differ. Here, in the case of performing the AT-added lottery based on the winning number, for example, when executing the same processing as the AT-added lottery with the winning number 7 and the winning number 8, the winning number is 7. Although it is necessary to execute a process of determining whether the number is 8 or 8 as in the present embodiment, by executing the AT addition lottery based on the payout group number, the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 are obtained. When the same process is executed as an AT-addition lottery, the process relating to the AT-addition lottery of either the winning number 7 or the winning number 8 is executed only by determining whether the payout group number is 2. Can be done.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M may determine the winning number (or winning / replay winning information, or the payout group number) related to the game. ) Determines whether or not the winning number is related to replay-B (reverse push white 7 replay, which is a replay in which white seven can be aligned with an invalid line by stopping with reverse push). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of AT games added by the replay-B has been added, in other words, the number of AT added games by winning the replay-B It is determined whether it was not 0. If Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M issues a reverse push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and an invalid line by a reverse push (“right → middle → left”)). Is performed, the effect of instructing to align white seven) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a command other than the reverse push avoidance command (the command to the sub control board S side and the reverse push (“right → middle → left”)). The order of pressing is instructed, and an effect of preventing white seven from being aligned with the invalid line is set), and the flow proceeds to step 1526. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1518, the processing shifts to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the winning number (or may be determined based on winning / replay winning information or a payout group number, etc.) related to the game by a re-game-C ( It is determined whether or not the game is a replay game in which black seven can be aligned with the inactive line by stopping the game with the forward push. In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of AT games added by the re-game-C has been added, in other words, the number of AT added games by winning the re-game-C is It is determined whether it was not 0. If Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M issues a forward push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and an invalid line by forward push (“left → middle → right”)). Will be executed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a forward push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side, except for forward push (“left → middle → right”)). An instruction is given to instruct the pressing order, and an effect of not aligning the black seven with the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1526, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1400). In the present embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command are transmitted to the sub-control board S. The control board S side is configured to be able to execute the effect related to the push order navigation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the AT addition lottery is won, it is determined that the AT addition lottery is won and the number of AT addition games. A command (for example, a command related to the number of AT-added games related to the processing in step 1517) is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and when the sub-control board S receives the command, the pressing order navigation is performed on the sub-control board S. It may be configured to determine the effect execution timing and the effect mode related to the effect. As an example, the replaying game-B is a winning game, and the sub-control board S selects an effect mode for instructing reverse pressing in a game (a game with an additional number of AT games) that receives the command. The game may be configured to be executed, or in a game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side, an effect of instructing a reverse push is not executed, and then a predetermined condition (for example, a specific replaying role (for example, In a game that satisfies (game-B or C)), an effect of instructing a pressing order in which seven sets can be made on an invalid line may be executed. Alternatively, in the game in which the re-game-B is a winning game, in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game with an additional number of AT games), the effect of instructing the reverse pressing is not executed, and (For example, after a predetermined number of games (continuous production may be performed at the same time, in that case, the final game of the continuous production), an additional production of AT games is performed (displayed on the production display device S40). This is an effect in which the display related to the number of remaining AT games is increased, and for example, “+ 30G” may be displayed.) In this example, the effect display device S40 also increases the number of remaining AT games. The display is configured to be able to be displayed, and the display may be the same as or different from the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side. B won In the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games is added), an effect of instructing a reverse push is not performed, and a game that satisfies a predetermined condition thereafter is executed. As an example of the case where the effect of adding the number of AT games is executed, when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) for inducing the winning of the bonus is executed on the sub-control board S side (in the bonus game, a replaying game is performed). Since the winning probability of B is low (including 0%), the player will be notified that a bonus has not been won if the player has informed the pressing order in which seven matches can be made.) The main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery, and the sub control board S side determines that the AT remaining game number has been added, (1) AT remaining game After the information on the number is added to the AT, the main control board M transmits the information to the sub-control board S after the lottery, and then the sub-control board S provides information on the previously transmitted AT remaining game number and the currently transmitted AT remaining game. The number of AT-added games obtained by the AT-addition lottery is calculated by calculating a difference from the number-related information, and (2) a command relating to the number of AT-added games obtained as a result of the AT-added lottery on the main control board M is The command is transmitted to the control board S. If the player does not win the AT addition lottery, a command indicating that the player does not win the AT addition lottery is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. When the command is received, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine the effect mode of the effect related to the push order navigation, for example, the game in which the re-game-B has been won. In the game (the game in which the number of AT games was not added) on which the command was received on the sub-control board S side, the middle press (operating the middle stop button as the first stop, the order of pushing to avoid the 7 sets) May be selected and executed. Note that, although the AT-additional lottery is executed on the main control board M side, the sub-control board S side determines that the AT-additional-game-number has not been added. After the AT addition lottery, it is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Thereafter, the sub-control board S calculates the difference between the previously transmitted information on the number of remaining AT games and the currently transmitted information on the remaining number of AT games, and ascertains the number of AT-added games won in the AT-addition lottery. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information on the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time from the information on the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time is 1, it is determined that the AT addition lottery has not been won.) (2) Main control board As a result of the AT addition lottery on the M side, a command relating to the fact that the number of AT addition games is 0 is transmitted to the sub control board S side.

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first sheet) of the AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a state related to an AT that can execute the AT lottery. In the present embodiment, the state relating to the AT in which the AT lottery can be executed is only the “high-probability state”. By winning the BB in the “high-probability state”, the “advantageous BB inside game” is achieved. Then, when the BB combination wins, the state shifts to the “advantageous BB state”. When the executed BB ends, the state shifts to the “AT state”. A value of 50 is set. Even if the player wins the BB in the “low probability state”, the game shifts to the “normal BB inside game” and does not shift to the “AT state”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which, when a BB is won in the “normal gaming state”, an AT lottery can be won with the BB combination as a trigger. In such a configuration, if the player wins the BB in the “normal gaming state” and wins the AT lottery with the BB role as an opportunity, the game shifts to the “advantageous BB internal middle game”, and then the BB is played. By aligning, the state shifts to the “advantageous BB state”. Note that, in a state where the BB is won in the “normal game state” and the BB is not aligned, the game section may be set to the “advantageous section” or the “standby section”. In the case of Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery role (in this example, a first type BB-A or a first type It is determined whether or not the type is BB-C). In the present embodiment, the winning number of the BB without setting difference alone (winning number 19, 24) and the winning number (winning number, 25, 26, 27) in which BB with no setting difference and the small role overlap are used. All are AT lottery combinations. In the case of Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT after the next game to “advantageous BB inside game”, and proceeds to step 1410. Also, in the case of No in step 1402 or 1404, the process also proceeds to step 1410. In the present embodiment, when the state related to the AT is different, the AT winning rate (whether the player can win or not win) related to the AT lottery is configured to be different, but when the state related to the AT is the same. Means that even if the set value is different, the AT winning rate related to the AT lottery is the same (when the BB is won in the “high probability state”, the AT is always won regardless of the set value = The state transitions to “AT in progress”).

  Next, in step 1410, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state regarding the AT after the next game has been determined. If Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the “low probability state”. If Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a state promotion combination (a small state that can be shifted from the “low-probability state” to the “high-probability state by winning”. In this example, it is determined whether or not it is “Cherry”. In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPU C100 of the main control board M wins at a predetermined probability (in the present example, it is 1/2, and if there is no difference depending on the set value, there is no problem in changing). A high-probability state transition lottery. Next, in step 1418, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high probability state transition lottery has been won. If Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430.

  If No in step 1412, in step 1424, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state related to the AT is the “high probability state”. If Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc to 1 (this is the high security failure final game, and the tenth game since the “high probability state” is set). ) Is determined. If Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the low-probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in the present embodiment, when the state related to the AT is the “high probability state”, the game section is “advantageous section”, and when the game section is “advantageous section”, the pushing order is The configuration is such that the “advantageous section” does not end unless the navigation is executed one or more times or the predetermined number of games (1,500 games in this example) “continuation of the advantageous section” is not satisfied (ie, Even if the low-probability state transition lottery is won, if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push order navigation has not been performed one or more times, the “high-probability state” is not ended. ). When the BB role is won during the “advantageous section” and the BB is executed, the “advantageous section” is set at an arbitrary timing even if the push order navigation is not executed once in the “advantageous section”. It may be configured to be able to end. If Yes in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low-probability transition condition is satisfied when the pushing order navigation is executed once. In addition, as the pushing order (the winning number where the winning combination differs depending on the reel stop order and the profit rate of the player is different), the maximum payout number of 8 and the maximum payout number of 11 are provided. In such a case, the low-probability transition condition may be that the pressing order navigation of the hand with the maximum payout number being 11 and having the maximum payout number being large is performed once. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426, or step 1428, the processing shifts to step 1430. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the state newly shifts to the “high-probability state”, 10 games, which are the high security failure games, are set in the high security failure counter KHc, and until the counter value becomes 0. Are configured not to transition to a “low probability state”. Note that such a lottery method is merely an example. For example, after shifting to the “high-probability state”, the low-probability state shift lottery is not executed for 10 games (the stay in the “high-probability state” is guaranteed). ), A lottery may be executed to shift from the “high-probability state” to the “low-probability state” with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game after the ten games have elapsed. Note that the AT lottery combination (low certainty AT lottery combination, high certainty AT lottery combination) and the status promotion combination have the same winning probability in all set values.

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second sheet) of the AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the “AT-in-progress state”. If Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is equal to or more than a predetermined value (4 in this example). Here, in the present embodiment, when the state related to the AT is the "AT state", when the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 4 or more, the watermelon B In the case where the player has the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" with half the probability of winning, and can shift to the "specialization precursor state", while the state relating to the AT is the "AT in-state" In the case where the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, even if the watermelon B is won, the lottery (specialization) for acquiring the right to shift to the “additional specialization state” (Also referred to as a state transition lottery), and does not transition to the “specialization precursor state” or the “additional specialization state”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the AT counter value is 3 or less, a lottery that wins the watermelon B and obtains the right to shift to the “additional specialization state” (both specialization state shift lottery) (May be referred to as "a") may be executed, and in such a case, when the AT counter value is 3 or less, the watermelon B is elected and the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" is granted. When the lottery to be won is won, the next game that has won the lottery may be configured to be able to (become to) the “specialization precursor state” or the “additional specialization state”, or the AT counter value May become (specify special sign state) or (additional special state) when () becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), or a game won in the lottery After the execution of a predetermined number of games from "specialized precursor state" or " Place may be configured as capable of becoming a specialized state "(which can migrate to). In addition, when transitioning to the “additional specialization state”, it is not always necessary to go through the “specialization precursor state”. For example, a configuration is possible in which the “additional specialization state” can be directly transitioned from the “AT in progress state” to the “additional specialization state”. May be. In the case of Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a special transfer role (a small lot that can execute a lottery to acquire the right to transfer to the “additional special state”). In this example, it is determined whether or not it is a watermelon B). In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a specialization state transition lottery in which a winning is achieved with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Next, in step 1434, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialization state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1434, in step 1435, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to “specialized precursor state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No in step 1431, in step 1436, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, the AT final game is performed). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1437, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a continuous lottery in which the winning is performed with a predetermined probability (in this example, 2/3). Next, in step 1438, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the “AT state” and shifts to step 1444-1 (the AT state shiftable condition The number of AT initial games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter to satisfy the requirement. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the “state for resilience effect production”, and proceeds to step 1444-1. Note that also in the case of No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434, or step 1436, the processing shifts to step 1444-1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the continuous lottery is executed in the AT final game, and when the continuous lottery is won, the initial value of 50 games is set in the AT counter M60 again. That is, when the addition of the number of AT games is not taken into account, the gaming property is such that 50 games of AT per set are continuously looped at 2/3. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is not limited to the AT final game. For example, the first game of the AT (the first game that has newly entered the “AT-in-progress” state) or the initial value is set in the AT counter M60 (A first game) may be configured to execute a continuous lottery. With such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the next set (AT related to the continuous lottery winning) is executed (whether or not the AT is continued) in the “AT state”. The effect during the AT can be made different between when the continuous lottery is won and when the continuous lottery is not won. For example, when the continuous lottery is won, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is used. In one or more situations (during the execution of the AT), it is possible to change the BGM (such as playing a song) or execute an effect in which it is determined that the continuous lottery has been won.

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third sheet) of the AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a resilience availability state. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device relating to the game is a winning combination in the resurrection role (“resurrection enable / disable effect state”) so that the next game is executed. It is determined whether or not it is a role that can be shifted to the “AT-in-progress state”, in other words, a role that allows the AT to be pulled back. Here, in the present embodiment, the resurrection role is a role that includes any one of the watermelon A, the watermelon B, the cherry, and the bonus role (only the BB role without the setting difference and not including the BB role with the setting difference). It is said that when the condition device related to the game becomes a resurrection hand, the resurrection lottery is won. If Yes in step 1444-2, in step 14444-3, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the “AT-in-progress state”, and proceeds to step 1445. Here, the AT initial game number (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter in order to satisfy the AT state shiftable condition. On the other hand, if No in step 1444-2, in step 1444-4, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1445. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1441-1, the processing shifts to step 1445. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the game is the AT final game and the continuous lottery is not won, the state shifts to the “resurrection feasibility production state”, and the resurrection is performed in the “resurrection feasibility production state”. If the lottery can be won, the game shifts to the “AT state” from the next game. Note that the "resurrection availability state" is an "advantaged section", but the lottery relating to the AT in the "during the AT state" (AT addition lottery, continuous lottery, etc.) is not executed, and the resurrection lottery can be executed. The "state during AT" and the "state for resurrection effect production" are different in the manner of executing the lottery relating to the AT.

  Next, in step 1445, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a state regarding the AT after the next game has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the transition condition of the state regarding the AT is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. This is satisfied when 10 games, which are the number of precursor games, are consumed in the “state”.) In the case of Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a state relating to the AT after the next game, and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. If the number of precursor games is exhausted in the precursor state, the state is determined to be the "additional specialization state." It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1445 or step 1446, the processing shifts to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the high security failure counter value command (in this example, a command to the sub side, and the current high security failure counter value, in other words, the high probability state is guaranteed. (The command related to the number of remaining games being played), and the flow shifts to step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT after the next game is determined to be "advantageous BB inside game". If Yes in step 1449-1, in step 14449-2, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc to zero, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1450). Note that also in the case of No in step 1499-1, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1450).

  In the present embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to be different depending on the lottery state, and when the player wins the BB role (the BB role without setting difference) in the “low-probability state”, the AT shift lottery is won. No (after that, the state does not shift to the “AT state”). On the other hand, if the player wins the BB role (the BB role without setting difference) in the “high probability state”, the player wins the AT shift lottery (then, the state changes to the “AT state”). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as an AT lottery combination, and “high probability state A” and “high probability In the case where the condition device A is won in the “high-probability state A”, the condition device A is won in 1/10 and the condition device is won in the “high-probability state B”. If you win A, it will be 1/2 for AT transfer lottery It may be configured so as to be selected. When the AT transfer lottery is won, the state shifts to the “AT preparation state”, which is the preparation state before the transition to the “AT-in-progress state”, as the state relating to the AT, and then a predetermined end condition (for example, “AT preparation state”). The state may be changed to the “AT state” when 10 games have passed since the transition to the “state”.

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a command related to winning / re-game winning information (a command on the sub-control board S side, for example, a winning / re-game winning related to the game). Information related command) is set. Next, in step 1454, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a role having a pressing order (a condition device having a different winning combination depending on the pressing order, for example, winning-A1). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a pressing order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and issues the instruction. The number is stored in a RAM address for storing the number (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). Note that the instruction number is information related to the pressing order, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). In addition, the sub control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. Note that, even when the push order navigation is not performed, the instruction number is determined (although not shown, the instruction number becomes an initial value based on clearing the instruction number). When the pressing order game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the pressing order game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (display of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). The image is shown in FIG. 34). Next, in step 1466, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (for example, sets in the register area) the command (command to the sub side) corresponding to the instruction number determined in step 1458, and proceeds to step 1472. (See FIG. 34 for a display image of the push order navigation display on the sub-control board side.) In this example, displaying the stop order of the reels with the highest profit for the player on the pressing order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as displaying the pressing order navigation, displaying the pressing order navigation display, and the like. ing. In the present embodiment, the pressing order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the pressing order of “left → middle → right” is displayed as “= 1” on the pressing order display device D270. It is configured to display “= 1” in both the push order bell and the push order replay. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the game related to the push order bell, the case where the push order navigation of “left → middle → right” is displayed on the push order display device D270 and the case where the game related to the push order replay game is “ The display mode may be different from that in the case where the pressing order navigation “left → center → right” is displayed on the pressing order display device D270. That is, the number of types of display modes of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of the winning / replay winning information.

  If No in step 1451 or step 1454, in step 1468, the CPU C100 of the main control board M performs a mask process on the winning / replay winning information of the game, and stores the masked information in a predetermined address of the RAM. To memorize. Here, when the winning / re-game winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / re-game winning information is recognized due to an improper act, the high profit related to the game is increased. The pressing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S , So that a high profit push order cannot be recognized. As a method of mask processing in the present embodiment, a plurality of winning / replay winning information (winning / replay winning information having the same role is preferable, for example, the RT state shifts according to the pressing order). A plurality of winning / replay winning information in which a symbol combination serving as a re-game combination can be stopped and displayed) is rendered as one rendering group number (for example, the winning / replay winning information 4 to 6 is rendered as a rendering group 4). The group number is transmitted to the sub control board S side. The mask processing method is not limited to this. For example, after the provided prize / replay winning information (0 to 18 in this example), a new prize / replay after mask processing is performed. You may comprise so that winning information may be provided. Also in such a case, a plurality of winning / replay winning information out of the existing winning / replay winning information, such as the effect group number, is converted into one winning / replay winning information as the winning / replay after mask processing. It is desirable to provide the game winning information (for example, the winning / re-game winning information 4 to 6 is replaced with the winning / re-game winning information 19 which is the winning / re-game winning information after mask processing (the newly provided winning-information).・ Replay winning information). If it is determined that the game is to notify operation information (push order navigation) on the basis of the state of the AT on the main control board M, etc., winning / re-game winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In a game in which the operation information is not notified, the effect group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In such a configuration, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S, or may not be transmitted.

  Next, in step 1470, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing (for example, sets the command in the register area). Move to 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (a command to the sub side) related to the bonus winning information (the sub side can recognize whether or not the bonus has been won) (for example, (Set in the register area), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1550). In the present embodiment, the winning / re-game winning information and the bonus winning information are configured to be derived from the winning number. The deriving method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, as an example of the display of the push order navigation, in the case of “in the AT state”, (1) a case where a fall replaying game is included → a push that the fall replaying game is not stopped is displayed. The order is navigation, (2) In the case of a bell (single-course / 11-course) → Navigation, etc., in the pushing order in which the number of payouts is the largest. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game section is the “advantageous section”, the prize / re-game winning information (the type of the winning combination and the pushing order most advantageous to the player) are displayed on the sub-control board S side. ) Or an instruction number (a number capable of specifying the most advantageous pressing order for the player), while if the game section is a “normal section”, the sub control board S It is configured to transmit the effect group number (a number that can specify only the outline of the winning combination) to the side. In other words, in the "advantageous section", the winning / re-game winning information on the game including the winning / re-game winning information including the result of the game and the profit of the player that differs depending on the pressing order is directly transmitted to the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in a game section that is not an “advantage section”, the winning / re-game winning information relating to the game is not transmitted, and the result of the game and the profit of the player are different depending on the pressing order. In the case of the winning information, the effect group number in which the information related to the pressing order is concealed is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

  When the game section is not the “advantageous section” or the like, a mask process is executed when transmitting the winning / re-game winning information determined by the main control board M to the sub-control board S to determine the effect group number. Then, the effect group number is transmitted to the sub control board S. The production group number is the winning / re-game winning information, and the winning / re-game winning information relating to the winning role having the same role (for example, a re-gaming role including a falling re-gaming role, a pushing order bell, etc.). Are grouped and numbers are assigned. The winning / re-game winning information relating to the game is masked {the winning / re-gaming winning information (particularly the information related to the pressing order) is concealed} and then transmitted to the sub-control board S. This prevents a situation in which information related to the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an improper act, and a pushing order (reel stopping order) that gives a high profit related to the game is recognized. In addition, the transmission mode of the effect group number is not limited to the configuration shown in the figure. The effect group number can be transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S only in the “normal section”, and in the “advantage section”. May be configured not to transmit the effect group number.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) to be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). Is a timer for measuring If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPU C100 of the main control board M newly sets the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 to a minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) and starts. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the pressing order related to the ended game. Next, in step 1558, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears information related to the stopped state of the reels related to the ended game and the draw-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPU C100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data relating to the ended game. Next, in step 1562, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an output request at the time of standby for reel rotation start for the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1260). In other words, by the processing of step 1562 and step 1564, it is possible to transmit a command to the sub-control board S to indicate that the reel starts rotating.

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the “advantageous section” is one of the game sections, and a situation of the game that is advantageous to the player when the state related to the AT is “the AT state”. It is a game section that is easy to be set at. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc- 1 (which is a decrement counter and the maximum number of games that can stay in the “advantage section” is 1500 as an initial value). The counter value of a counter which is set as a value and which can be decremented for each game in a period which is an “advantage section” is decremented by one.

  Next, in step 3408, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the “AT-in-progress state”. If Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPU C100 of the main control board M decrements the AT counter value by one. Next, in step 3412, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state regarding the AT is the high probability state. If Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPU C100 of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc by 1, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1700). Note that also in the case of No in Step 3402, Step 3408, or Step 3412, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of Step 1700). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the state of the AT that can be displayed by the push order navigation is the “AT state”, the AT counter value for each game is decremented, but the “advantageous BB state”, When the game is in the advantageous BB internal middle game, the "specialization precursor state" or the "additional specialization state", the AT counter value is not decremented even if the game is executed. That is, when the state of the AT counter value remains (one or more remains) and the state transitions from the “in-AT state” to the “specialized precursor state”, the “AT-in-progress state” is maintained while the AT counter value is maintained. It is configured to be able to make a transition (transition) from “state” → “specialization precursor state” → “additional specialization state”. It should be noted that even if the state relating to the AT is the “AT state”, it is possible to prevent the AT counter value from being decremented by one when the winning number including the bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the display is performed such that the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is subtracted. It may be controlled. For example, when the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is “30” and the remaining AT remaining game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is “30”, the AT counter value is “30”. Is stored or “30 + α” which is a value obtained by adding the value “α” obtained by the AT addition lottery related to the game, but is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the start lever D50 is operated. “29” may be displayed as the number of remaining AT games, or “29 + α” which is a value obtained by adding the value “α” obtained by the AT additional lottery may be displayed (note that “α” obtained by the additional lottery is , Without notifying in the game, a specific game after the game (a game that satisfies predetermined conditions from the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the end of the bonus game) May be notified of “α”). The AT remaining game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is also decremented by one for each game in the "advantageous BB inside game", and an effect (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) indicating a bonus decision is output. The remaining number of AT games can be subtracted for each game. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately knowing the winning of the bonus when the player wins the bonus in a state where the push order navigation such as the “AT state” can be executed. That is, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, a continuous effect over a plurality of games for inducing whether or not the bonus has been won is executed using the effect display device S40 or the like, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, the remaining game number of the AT displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is completed is “30” or a value of “30” or more when notifying the result of winning and adding the result of the AT addition lottery. May be controlled to be displayed. When the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is “1” and the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is “1”, the game is displayed on the effect display device S40. The display relating to the number of remaining AT games is "0", but while maintaining this state, a continuous effect is performed over a plurality of games to inspire whether or not a bonus has been won, and the AT counter value is "1". When the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1", a game is executed and an AT-added lottery number can be executed (or a winning / re-game winning information or a payout group number). Is won, and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games becomes “0” and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 becomes “0”. Further, when the number of remaining AT games is small, the probability of executing the continuous effect may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of remaining AT games is large.

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition possible condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the present embodiment, the RT state transition possible condition includes execution of RAM clear (initialization of RAM), display of stop of replay (in this example, display of stop of replay 04), winning and start of BB -It is configured so that it can be satisfied at the end. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state can be shifted and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT state shiftable condition (the RT state transition in FIG. 28). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1750). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1702, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1750). In the present embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels have been stopped. However, when transitioning to “RT1”, the transition timing may transition when the lever is turned on. The timing at which the RT state is shifted (the RT number is stored in the RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

  Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are four RT states “RT0” to “RT2” and “one kind of BB-A, B, C”, and the RT state is satisfied by satisfying the condition indicated by the arrow in the figure. Will shift. As a specific example of the transition of the RT state, when the RT state is “RT1”, the RAM is initialized, or when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the transition is made to “RT0”. The replay game 04 is a stop display, specifically, when the player has won the "replay game-D1" in the situation where the RT state is "RT1" and operated the left stop button as the first stop. , The replays 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, in the case where the RT state is “RT1” and the “re-game-D1” is won, if the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed. , The RT state shifts from “RT1” to “RT0”.

  If the RT state is “RT0” or “RT1”, the player wins the BB role and does not win the BB role in the selected game (the condition devices related to the one type of BB-A to C-C operate). The RT state shifts to “RT2”. When a BB combination is won at "RT2" (one type of BB-A to C is activated), the process shifts to "one type of BB-A, B, C". When the BB is completed in “one type BB-A, B, C” (the operation of one type BB-A to C is completed), the process proceeds to “RT1”. When the state regarding the AT is the “low probability state”, the player wins the BB, and when the BB ends, the RT state shifts to “RT1”, which is highly profitable for the player. In the state where the pressing order navigation does not occur, the incorrect pressing order (when the first stop is the left button, the middle button, the right button, One of the three choices is in the correct push order and replays other than replay 04 are stopped and displayed, and two of the three choices are in the wrong push order and replay 04 is stopped and displayed. By stopping the game, the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed, and the state shifts from “RT1” to “RT0”. If the state related to the AT is “high probability state”, “during AT state”, “specialization precursor state” or “additional specialization state”, the BB is won, and if BB ends, the RT state is set. Is shifted to “RT1”, which is highly profitable for the player, and the state related to AT is a state in which the push order navigation occurs. Navigates in the order in which the correct answers are not stopped and displayed, so that "RT1" can be maintained.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control processing according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state transition possible condition has been satisfied in the game. Note that the AT state transitionable conditions include, for example, (1) when the BB without a setting difference that has been won in the “high probability state” ends, (2) when the continuous lottery is won, and (3) when the resurrection lottery is won. It will be satisfied if you do. In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M triggers the new transition to the “AT precursor state” to trigger the number of AT initial games (50 in this example, “50 After the transition to the “state”, the number of games for which the subtraction is started) is set in the AT counter M60, and the flow shifts to step 1756. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1752, the process shifts to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a high probability state. If Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the next game is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the number of games with high security failure (10 in this example) in the high security failure counter, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3500). Transition. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1756 or step 1758, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the “high probability state” and shifting to the “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB is won to shift to the “advantageous BB state”, and the AT game is performed in the “advantageous BB state”. When the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter exceeds 50 when the BB ends and the state shifts from the “advantageous BB state” to the “AT-in-progress state”. Specifically, when the number of AT games is increased by 30 games in the "advantageous BB state" and then the state is shifted to the "AT state", 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30) is set in the AT counter. become. At this time, when an effect of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the “advantageous BB state” is performed, at the start of the “AT state”, the player is notified that the number of AT initial games is 80 games. It is desirable to notify, but as another notification method, without performing an effect of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the initial value is used at the start of the "AT state". After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is informed that 30 games have been added during the AT (for example, immediately after the start of the “AT state” or the state where the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 is small). A notification method of performing an effect to notify is also conceivable. By doing so, the player cannot clearly know whether the number of AT games has been added or how many games have been added in the "advantageous BB state". It is possible to enhance the interest in the additional effect which suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during the AT (a state in which the push order navigation can occur). In this example, the number of AT initial games is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the process of setting the number of AT initial games is not limited to that of this example. The AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the above-described AT state transition control processing in step 1400. The number of games set in the AT counter M60 (the number of AT initial games) is configured to be subtracted from the time when the game after the BB ends (the state related to the AT becomes the “AT state”). (Don't start subtraction during BB). Further, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board M.

  Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, “low probability state”, “normal BB internal medium game”, “normal BB state”, “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization state” , "Advantageous BB inside game", "Advantageous BB state", "Resurrection availability state", and there are 10 states related to ATs. By satisfying the conditions shown by arrows in the figure, the ATs are related. The state will transition. For example, if the player wins the watermelon B in the "AT state" and wins the specialization state transition lottery to win at 1/2, the state transitions to the "specialization precursor state". Further, when ten games have elapsed (digested) since the transition to the “specialization precursor state”, the state is shifted to the “additional specialization state”. Note that, as the game section, the three AT-related states of “low probability state”, “normal BB inside game”, and “normal BB state” are set to “normal section”, and “high probability state” and “AT during The state relating to the seven ATs of the “state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization state”, “advantageous BB inside middle game”, “advantageous BB state”, and “state of resurrection feasibility effect” is “advantaged section”. Is set. In other words, even if the states relating to the seven ATs that are "advantageous sections" are transitioning (shifting), if 1500 games have elapsed without setting the "normal section", the "advantageous section" is forcibly terminated. “Normal section” is set. Further, when the notification game state in which the push order navigation is displayed is the “AT state”, the “specialization precursor state”, or the “additional specialization state”, the replay game 04 is stopped and displayed. Also, the gaming state is maintained.

  As described above, if the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0 in the “AT state” and the continuous lottery is not won, the state is the “revival possibility effect state”. When the resurrection lottery is won in the “resurrection availability state”, it is possible to return to the “AT state” again. On the other hand, when the resurrection lottery is not won in the “resurrection availability state”, the state shifts to the “low probability state”, and the “interest section” is changed to the “normal section”.

  When the player wins the BB without setting difference (one type BB-A or one type BB-C) in the “high probability state”, the BB without setting difference is activated, and the “advantageous BB state” ends, the “AT state” ”. In addition, when the BB without a setting difference (one type BB-A or one type BB-C) is won in the “AT state” and the BB without the setting difference is activated, and the “advantageous BB state” ends, “ The state shifts to the “AT in progress state”. In addition, when the BB with no setting difference (one type BB-A or one type BB-C) is won in the “state of resurrection availability stage”, the BB without setting difference is activated, and the “advantageous BB state” ends. Also transitions to the “AT state” (to win the resurrection lottery). In addition, when the BB with a setting difference is won in the “state of resurrection possibility production” (one type BB-B), the BB with the setting difference is activated, and when the “advantageous BB state” ends, the BB with the setting difference is alone. If the winning number related to the BB role (winning number 20) is reached, the state becomes “low probability” after the BB ends (because the BB role does not trigger the resurrection lottery), and the BB with the setting difference is rare. If the winning number overlaps with the winning combination (winning numbers 21 to 23), the state becomes "AT in progress" after BB ends (because the rare winning role triggers the resurrection lottery).

  In addition, in the case of the “advantageous section” and the “high-probability state”, when the BB with the setting difference is won (one type BB-B), the BB with the setting difference is activated, and the “advantageous BB state” ends, Move to the “high probability state”.

  Further, the state regarding the AT to be shifted to after the “advantageous BB state” ends is the state after the BB that has been won during the AT (“the AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization state”) (setting difference). In both the presence BB and the BB without the setting difference), the state shifts to the state relating to the AT at the time of the BB win among the “in-AT state”, the “specialization precursor state”, and the “additional specialization state”. After the end of the BB without setting difference, which has been won in the “high probability state”, the state shifts to the “AT in-state”. In addition, after the BB with the setting difference which is won during the non-AT (“high probability state”), the state shifts to the “high probability state”.

  Note that the state regarding the AT is not limited to the state of the present embodiment. For example, the AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in the “low probability state” or the “high probability state”, and the AT lottery is performed. , The game may shift to the "precursor state" by passing the game, and may shift to the "AT state" after the lapse of 16 to 32 games. In such a case, the predetermined condition device The AT lottery is executed by winning, and if the AT lottery is not won, the game shifts to the “bogus sign” state and shifts to the “low-probability state” or the “high-probability state” after 16 to 32 games have elapsed. May be configured. In addition, a “standby section” different from the “advantageous section” and the “normal section” may be provided as a game section. For example, in a case where a game is performed in which the AT lottery is executed by winning “cherry”, BB When the "BB + Cherry" wins with the overlap of "Cherry" and the AT lottery, the state inside the BB until the "BB" of "BB + Cherry" wins is set as the "standby section". You may. In this way, by providing the “standby section”, the BB is won in the “low-probability state” and the BB is won in the “low-probability state”, During the period until the symbol combination of BB is completed (until the advantageous section indicator is turned on) between the case where the lottery has been won and the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off. Whether or not it is possible can be inspired to the player. In addition, when a BB is won in the “additional specialization state”, the “additional specialization state” may be configured to restart after the BB ends. Executes an AT addition lottery different from the BB won in the "AT state" as the BB selected in the "addition specialization state" (for example, the AT addition lottery is selected more than the BB selected in the "AT state") (The number of games per addition to the number of AT games is relatively large). In addition, when a BB is won in the “specialization precursor state”, it may be configured to shift to the “additional specialization state” after the end of the BB. In such a case, during the BB, In the "additional specialization state", the AT addition lottery may be executed in the same manner as the winning BB.

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section shift control processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in the present embodiment, a game section is provided as a section related to the state of the game, and the game section includes a “normal section” that is relatively low in profit for the player and a “normal section” that is relatively high for the player. It has two game sections, “interesting section” which is a profitable section. As a description of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. If Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section following the next game to be the game section corresponding to the current AT state and the current game state, and proceeds to step 3528. I do. On the other hand, if No in step 3508, in other words, if the game section is an “advantageous section”, in step 3514, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the counter value of the number-of-advantageous-sections remaining game counter YKc-1 to 0. In other words, it is determined whether or not the “advantageous section” has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued. If Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears all information related to AT (the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of stay games in the “specialized precursor state”). Are also 0). On the other hand, if No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an end condition of the “advantageous section” other than the case where the counter value of the remaining number-of-advantageous-sections game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0. For example, the AT counter value is 0. Or when the push order navigation has been executed a predetermined number of times. In the case of No at Step 3518, that is, when an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the flow shifts to Step 3515. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the “advantageous section” is completed and the “normal section” is set after the next game, information related to the AT (the number of AT continuous games, the number of remaining AT games, etc.) ) Is cleared, so that the condition for the subsequent “normal section” to become the “advantageous section” again is not relaxed. Note that the information related to the AT cleared by the processing of step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section) includes a counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1, a flag indicating a gaming state, and the like. In addition, these pieces of information are also cleared by the RAM clear at the time of setting change, but depending on the RAM clear at the time of setting change, the “condition device related to the continuous actuation device (BB)” or the “RT state” , The information related to the “number of stored”, etc., is cleared, but depending on the processing in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section), the “condition apparatus related to the continuous actuation device (BB)” or the “RT state” , And the information related to the “number of stored sheets” is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range at the time of setting change and the clear range at the end of the “advantageous section” (for example, at the time of executing the process of step 3515) are different. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the "condition device relating to the continuous actor (BB)" or the "RT state" is held by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed. The addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the “advantage section” are continuous. In this way, by making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" continuous, it is possible to clear by a simple process of specifying the start address to be cleared in the clearing process and the range of addresses to be cleared. When the “advantageous section” has ended, a command indicating that the “advantageous section” has ended is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S receives the command, the sub-control board S is configured not to delete the game history such as information indicating that the game is in the “advantageous section” and information on how many games the “AT state” has been executed. ing. However, when the RAM clear at the time of the setting change is executed, the game history such as information indicating that the game is in the “advantageous section” and information on how many games have been executed in the “AT state” on the sub-control board S side. Will also be erased.

  When the "advantageous section" ends because the counter value of the number-of-advantageous-sections remaining game counter YKc-1 has become 0, (1) when the current state of the AT is "high probability state" In the next game, the state related to the AT becomes the “low probability state”. (2) If the state related to the current AT is “the game inside the advantageous BB”, the state related to the AT in the next game is “ (3) If the current state related to AT is "advantageous BB state", the state related to AT will be "normal BB state" in the next game. If the state related to the AT is “in AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization state”, or “state for resurrection effect”, the state related to AT in the next game is “low probability”. State (AT For relevant information is cleared).

  Next, in step 3516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a game section after the next game to a “normal section”. Next, in step 3517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the “advantageous section” has ended, and proceeds to step 3528. It should be noted that the advantageous section indicator YH is configured to be turned off when the “advantageous section” is completed and the “normal section” is set. For example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when a game medal is inserted in a game in which the "advantage section" ends and the "normal section" ends. In other words, it is sufficient that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off before the start lever D50 at which the next game can be started is operated. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game to be “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3528.

  Next, in step 3528, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines to set a new “advantageous section” in the next game (determined to set “advantageous section” from “normal section”). It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value to the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. It should be noted that the predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed numerical value (1500 in this example) common to all set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the advantageous section indicator YH, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1293). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 3528, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1293). In the present embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the lighting of the advantageous section indicator YH is performed. The timing may be from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the new “advantageous section” (the game in the “normal section”) to the timing at which the game medal can be inserted in the game in the new “advantage section” (new “ If the game before the “advantageous section” is a game related to the replay, the game is appropriately set during the period until the start lever operation becomes effective in the new “advantageous section” game). Is also good.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the timer interruption process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the present embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and thereafter, is performed for a predetermined time (in this example, T, for example, a time of about 2 ms is set. Is performed at regular intervals.

  First, in step 1602, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a process at the time of starting an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPU C100, checking an input port of a power-off detection signal, and the like). Next, in step 1604, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power interruption has been detected at present (in the current interrupt processing). In the case of No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process described later. On the other hand, if Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPU C100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPU C100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes a settlement button D60, a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a door switch D80, a setting key switch M20, a setting / reset button M30, a power-off detection signal, an input receiving sensor D10s, and a first input sensor. D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, and the like (ie, the presence / absence of operation with these operating members and the sensor detection state are sampled at the interrupt interval T). Is done).

  Next, in step 1610, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switching (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over a plurality of samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise. Can also be detected). Next, in step 6100, the CPU C100 of the main control board M performs a spinning drum drive control process (control process of driving the reel M50) for all reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53). Will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (the number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1612, the process shifts to step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing of step 1612 and step 1613 is unnecessary. Next, in Step 1614, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off all error flags (not shown, inserted medal backflow error flag, inserted number error flag, inserted medal retention error flag, inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether or not all the flags related to errors, such as a payout abnormality error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, and a door switch flag, are off). In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error non-detection command (a command to the sub side and a command indicating that no error is detected) (for example, a register (Set in the area), and the flow shifts to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side, a command related to the fact that an error is detected) (for example, (Set in the register area), and the flow shifts to step 1622. In step 1620, information on an error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the ON error flag is transmitted to the sub side. Also, the error non-detection command may be set only when the error has been released from the state in which the error has occurred (only when it is determined that the flag has been turned off). The information setting process may not be performed (the step 1618 may not be necessary). Further, the error detection command may execute the setting process only when an error has occurred from a state where no error has occurred, or may be performed from a state where a first error (for example, an inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The setting process may be executed when the type of error has changed, such as a second error (for example, a payout medal staying error).

  Next, in step 1622, the CPU C100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (command on the sub side) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set) Control command is transmitted). Here, as a command to be transmitted to the sub-control board S, a command relating to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation), a command relating to the first reel stop reception timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop) Immediately after), a command related to the second reel stop reception timing (transmitted immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), a command related to the third reel stop reception timing (the stop button as the third stop) Transmitted immediately after operation), transmitted immediately after all reels have stopped), a command relating to the stop timing of the stop display symbol (transmitted immediately after operating the stop button as a display symbol stop), winning and re-starting Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever (only during the advantageous section)), bonus Commands related to information (transmitted immediately after start lever operation), commands related to the RT state (transmitted from the time when all reels stop until the next game is started), commands related to the state related to AT (Transmitted from the time when all reels stop until the next game is started), a high failure counter value command (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation), a command related to the AT remaining game number (all Commands transmitted during the period from the stop of the reels to the start of the next game or immediately after the operation of the start lever) (commands from the stop of all reels to the start of the next game) Sent in between), etc. Next, in step 1624, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the spinning-type gaming machine P to an external hall computer or the like). It should be noted that as information relating to the error output by the external signal, although not shown, a door opening error, a loading abnormal error, a dispensing abnormal error, a loading reception sensor staying error, and the like are output. Note that the door opening error is configured to generate an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on. Is configured to generate an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs the output data of the LED (such as a 7-segment LED lamp) (for example, turns on a predetermined 7-segment LED unit out of a plurality of 7-segment LED units). A predetermined segment of the segment is turned on) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a lighting mode of the LED (for example, changing a lighting color of the LED). Step 1628 may not be performed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a soft random number management process (such as a process of updating a random number value managed by software). Next, in step 1632, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 1634, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not an abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is not set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, an abnormality flag bit is set. If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the update state of the internal random number is normal (whether or not an abnormality flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is not set). Is determined. If Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an interrupt end process, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1602). On the other hand, if No in step 1634 or 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the above-described non-returnable error processing.

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the turning drum drive control process according to the subroutine of step 6100 in FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. In this process, the process for one reel is illustrated, but it is supplemented that the processes corresponding to the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are executed. First, in step 6102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after execution of the processing of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. If Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to a reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to step 6106. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6102, the processing shifts to step 6106.

  Next, at step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing at which the reel rotation start standby state ends and the reel acceleration processing starts). (The execution timing of the process). If Yes in step 6106, in step 6108, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to a reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6110, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel acceleration process, and proceeds to step 6112. When the reel is stopped, the rotation of the reel is started by this processing. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6106, the processing shifts to step 6112.

  Next, in step 6112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is a reel acceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the end timing of the reel acceleration state (for example, all the interrupt processes for the “number of interrupt executions” in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35 described later). (Timing) is determined. If Yes in step 6114, in step 6116, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in Step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel constant speed maintaining process, and proceeds to Step 6120. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 6112 or step 6114, the processing shifts to step 6120.

  Next, in step 6120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel constant speed state. In the case of Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the reel constant speed state (after executing the processing in step 6116), and then sets the reel sensor to the reel (corresponding to the processing in this subroutine). It is determined whether or not an index provided on the reel to be read is detected. Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided in a convex shape on, for example, a peripheral side surface of the reel, and is used when detecting whether the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether the reel has made one rotation, and the like. Each index is detected by a reel sensor. The signal of the reel sensor is electrically connected to the main control board M. When the reel sensor detects (turns off) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is detected that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has become constant, and the flow shifts to the processing in step 6130. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 6122, in step 6124, the CPUMC of the main control board M passes a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is determined whether or not it has been performed. If No in step 6124, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has become constant, and the flow shifts to the processing in step 6130. As described above, in this example, it is possible to determine whether the reel rotation speed is normally constant by detecting the index by the reel sensor within a predetermined time after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured. In the present example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing 400 interrupt processes (the interrupt process is configured to be able to rotate 400 steps with 400 interrupt processes), and when the reel rotation speed is constant. This is longer than the time required for the reel to make one rotation (one rotation) (for example, the time required for one rotation of the reel is 336 steps, and the interrupt processing is executed 336 times). With such a configuration, the distance between the index and the reel sensor (the distance from the rotation of the reel to the detection of the index by the reel sensor) at the timing when the reel driving state becomes the constant speed state is long. However, if the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects the index within the predetermined time (time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured to be able to.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 6124, in step 6126, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel re-acceleration process, and proceeds to the process of step 6130. As described above, in this example, if the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state, Then, the reel driving state is updated to the reel acceleration state again, and the reel re-acceleration processing (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration processing) is executed. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 6120, the processing shifts to the processing of step 6130. Note that the reel re-acceleration processing need not be the same as the above-described reel acceleration processing. The reel re-acceleration processing and the reel acceleration processing are performed by interrupt processing for each combination of the phases to be excited by the stepping motor and each combination of the phases to be excited. May be made different.

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel rotation stop processing according to the subroutine of step 6200 in FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines a reel deceleration standby state start timing (a timing at which the reel constant speed state ends, for example, a reel deceleration standby state start timing by operating a stop button). Is determined). If Yes in step 6130, in step 6132, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel deceleration standby state, and proceeds to step 6134. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6130, the process shifts to step 6134.

  Next, in step 6134, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel deceleration standby state. In the case of Yes in Step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (the timing to start the execution of the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts reel deceleration (reel deceleration processing). Next, in step 6140, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state, and proceeds to the processing in step 6142. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 6134 or step 6136, the processing shifts to step 6142.

  Next, in step 6142, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel deceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration state end timing (timing to end the execution of the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel stopped state, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1612). Note that also in the case of No in step 6142 or 6144, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1612).

  Next, the rotation operation of the reel M50 of the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and thereafter, when the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed, maintains the constant speed (reel). When the driving state becomes the reel constant speed state, the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed, but the rotation speed may not actually reach the constant speed in some cases.) Then, when one of the stop buttons is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a four-phase stepping motor having four phases Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3 (there is no problem if it is not a four-phase stepping motor). Rotation control is performed by phase excitation. That is, by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of phases to be excited), the stepping motor can be rotated in the forward direction. In the figure, one of the phases Φ0 to Φ3, which indicates which phase is to be excited, is shown in the column of “Phase to Excite” (details will be described later).

  Further, as shown in the “reel rotation speed image” at the top of the figure, the driving state from the start of rotation to the stop of the stepping motor is divided into six, and the stepping motor is driven according to a driving pattern corresponding to each driving state. Drive control. Here, the driving state includes a "reel stop state", a "reel rotation start standby state", a "reel acceleration state", a "reel constant speed state", a "reel deceleration standby state", and a "reel deceleration state". In the “reel rotation speed image”, the vertical axis indicates the reel rotation speed, and the speed increases in the upward direction. The horizontal axis indicates time, and the time elapses in the right direction. I have. Also, the example shown in the figure illustrates a case where the reel rotation failure has not occurred.If the reel rotation failure has occurred due to factors such as holding the reel by hand, step-out, etc. This is not the case (reel rotation failure will be described later).

  The "reel stopped state" indicates a state in which the reel is stopped. When the reel is in the "reel stopped state", the reel is in a stationary state and all four phases of the stepping motor are in a stopped state. Are not excited.

  Next, in the "reel stop state", the reel drive state is updated to the "reel rotation start standby state" based on the operation of the start lever D50 at the timing (1) in the drawing. . Here, the "reel rotation start standby state" indicates a state in which the apparatus waits until the stepping motor acceleration processing (reel acceleration processing) starts after the start lever D50 is operated. This standby period is a period until the reel driving state shifts from the “reel stopped state” to the “reel acceleration state”. For example, the time from when the drive state of the reel becomes the “reel acceleration state” in the previous game is measured, and the start lever D50 related to the current game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) elapses. In this case, a "reel rotation start standby state" is entered.

  Next, at the timing (2) in the drawing, the reel driving state is updated from the “reel rotation start standby state” to the “reel acceleration state”. Here, the “reel acceleration state” is a state in which the reel is accelerating to reach a constant speed from a state in which the reel is stationary. In this example, if the timer interrupt processing is executed 220 times (“100 + 60 + 30 + 15 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 220”, and refer to the number of interrupts executed in the reel acceleration state at the lower left of FIG. 9), the acceleration state ends (the reel driving state is changed to “reel constant speed”). State). Next, at the timing (3) in the drawing, in other words, at the timing when the “reel acceleration state” ends by executing one more timer interrupt process, the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed. Note that, at this timing, the reel driving state remains in the “reel acceleration state”. Next, at the timing (4) in the drawing, the reel drive state is updated from the “reel rotation start standby state” to the “reel acceleration state”, and the timer interrupt processing is executed 220 times. The state is updated to the “reel constant speed state”. As described above, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed, the reel drive state remains in the “reel acceleration state” for one timer interrupt process, in other words, the final state in the “reel acceleration state” "Φ3, φ0", which is a combination of phases to be excited, is configured to execute interrupt processing only once, similar to the "reel constant speed state" in which interrupt processing is executed once for each combination of phases to be excited. (When no reel rotation abnormality occurs). With this configuration, it is possible to stably execute the acceleration process until the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed.

  Here, the lower part of the figure is a “step motor excitation image”. FIG. 3 illustrates a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel acceleration state” and a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel constant speed state”. First, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel acceleration state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower left part of FIG. The “phase to be excited” is a combination of the phases to be excited, and the “interruption execution count” indicates the number of times of executing the interrupt processing to be excited by the combination of the phases to be excited. In this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the step motor (stepping motor) is configured to be excited by the timer interrupt process 220 times, and the interrupt process is performed 100 times in (KA) “φ0” → ( KB) Interrupt processing is performed 60 times at “φ0, φ1” → (KC) Interrupt processing is performed 30 times at “φ1” → (KD) Interrupt processing is performed 15 times at “φ1, φ2” → (KE) “φ2” 8 times interrupt processing → (KF) 4 times interrupt processing with “φ2, φ3” → (KG) 2 times interrupt processing with “φ3” → (KH) Interruption with “φ3, φ0” It is configured to execute an interrupt process as in the case of once to excite the step motor (stepping motor) (the number of executions of the interrupt process is only an example and there is no problem if it is changed). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the reel acceleration process is performed, the number of times of executing the interrupt process in one combination of the phases to be excited is gradually reduced.

  Next, the step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel constant speed state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of FIG. In this example, when the reel is in the constant-speed state (when the reel constant-speed maintaining processing is executed), the interrupt processing is performed once at (TA) “φ0” → (TB) at “φ0, φ1”. Interrupt processing once → (TC) Interrupt processing once at “φ1” → (TD) Interrupt processing once at “φ1, φ2” → (TE) Interrupt processing once at “φ2” → (TF) Interrupt processing once at “φ2, φ3” → (TG) Interrupt processing once at “φ3” → (TH) Interrupt processing once at “φ3, φ0” → (TA) “ (TA) to (TG) are repeated one time at a time, as shown in (TB), one time for interrupt processing at (TB), one time for interrupt processing at (φ0, φ1), etc. To excite a stepping motor (stepping motor). As described above, in the present example, when the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed, the number of times of executing the interrupt process in one combination of the phases to be excited is all one.

  Next, in the situation where the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state", the stop button corresponding to any one of the reels is operated at the timing (5) in the drawing, and the reel drive state becomes the "reel deceleration standby state". It is updated to. Here, the “reel constant speed state” is a state in which the rotation speed of the reel is constant (a state in which a combination of phases to be excited is switched for each interrupt process), and a “reel deceleration standby state”. Indicates the state from the time when the stop button is operated by the player to the time when the stop control is started (in the reel deceleration standby state, the slip of the reel corresponding to the number of slip frames has occurred). . The period of this driving state is determined based on the operation timing of the stop button.

  Next, at the timing (6) in the drawing, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and the reels are started to decelerate. When the reel driving state is updated from the “reel deceleration standby state” to the “reel deceleration state”, a specific phase of the stepping motor is continuously excited for a predetermined time to stop the rotation of the reel. Four-phase excitation for exciting all is performed. Then, when the excitation is performed for a predetermined time, the reel driving state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stop state" at the timing (7) in the figure, and the reel stops.

  As described above, in the spinning machine according to the present example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. If not, the reel driving state is updated to the reel acceleration state again, and the reel re-acceleration processing (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration processing) is executed. When the reel drive state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, it is not determined whether or not the reel has been normally accelerated. The processing in step 6124 (the reel driving state is changed to the reel constant speed state) is to check whether the reel acceleration is performed normally, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (whether the reel rotation failure is not occurring). The determination is made after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the update. However, in the processing of step 6124, the reels are not at a constant speed because the reel sensor did not detect the index (reel rotation failure occurs. When it is determined that the reel acceleration has occurred, the reel re-acceleration processing is executed, that is, the reel acceleration processing is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by not configuring whether or not the reel acceleration has been performed normally during the execution of the reel acceleration process, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, When the reel rotation speed has reached the constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration processing until the reel rotation failure is eliminated and the reel acceleration processing is completed, the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. When the reel sensor detects the index before the predetermined time elapses after the update, the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed without executing the re-acceleration process. , The game cannot proceed (the stop button cannot be operated). In addition, during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, by not executing the processing for determining whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally executed, it is possible to reduce the data amount required for the processing related to the reel rotation. In addition, since the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured as described above, if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the following operations are performed. Becomes

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts → Update reel drive state to reel acceleration state → Execute reel acceleration processing → End reel acceleration processing → Update reel drive state to reel constant speed state → Execute reel constant speed maintenance processing → Reel constant Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the speed maintaining processing → reel rotation failure is detected → reel re-acceleration processing is executed.
In addition, the reel rotation failure means that the rotation of the reel is hindered by a member provided near the reel such as the reel window D160 (the reel rubs against the reel window D160) or the reel is accelerated due to loss of synchronism. Is not executed normally. As described above, by executing the reel re-acceleration processing even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintaining processing, the game can be smoothly advanced.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts → Updates reel drive state to reel acceleration state → Executes reel acceleration processing → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Continues reel acceleration processing → Ends execution of reel acceleration processing → Update the reel driving state to the reel constant speed state → Execute the reel constant speed maintaining processing → Detect a reel rotation failure → Execute the reel re-acceleration processing It is configured to be able to operate as described above. As described above, even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel re-acceleration processing is executed when the reel rotation failure is detected, so that the game proceeds smoothly. Can be done. In addition, as described above, even when a rotation failure of the rotating drum occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel acceleration processing is continuously performed, and the same interruption as that in the case where the rotation failure of the rotating drum does not occur occurs. When the reel acceleration processing has been executed for the number of times, the execution of the reel acceleration processing ends. With this configuration, the reel rotation speed can easily reach the constant speed without performing the reel re-acceleration process when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the start of the reel acceleration process. it can.

<Function 3>
Reel rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state → Executes the reel acceleration processing → A power failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing → Recovers from the power failure → Continues the reel acceleration processing (not processed Reel acceleration processing) → Reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of reel acceleration processing → Continue reel acceleration processing (execute unprocessed reel acceleration processing) → End of reel acceleration processing → Reel driving state Is updated to the reel constant speed state → reel constant speed maintaining processing is executed → reel rotation failure is detected → reel re-acceleration processing is executed. As described above, even when the power is cut off during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel acceleration processing is continuously performed after the power is restored, and thereafter, the reel driving state is updated to the reel constant speed state within a predetermined time. By executing the reel re-acceleration process when the reel sensor does not detect the index, the game can proceed smoothly. In addition, when the power is cut off during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel acceleration processing is continuously performed after the power is restored, and then the reel sensor is updated within a predetermined time after the reel driving state is updated to the reel constant speed state. Is configured not to execute the reel re-acceleration processing when an index is detected. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot proceed with the game (cannot operate the stop button) due to the reel re-acceleration processing. It can be less likely to occur.

<< Action after final stop button operation >>
In the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example, after the final stop button (third stop button) is operated, the final reel (the reel that rotates to the end, also referred to as the third reel) stops, and the winning combination is established. Although the payout of the game medals is configured to be executed when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the operation related to the payout of the game medals may be configured as follows.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has won the winning combination → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Performs constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Stops first reel as first stop operation Button operation → first reel stopped display → second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation → second reel stopped display → third reel stop operation as third reel stop operation (third stop button) Operation) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power loss occurs → Move the third reel to the stop display position (rotation) → Detect power loss → Execute power-off processing → Return power → Reel The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed → the processing relating to the payout of game medals may be executed. With this configuration, in a game such as the above-described common bell that can win a win regardless of the operation timing of the stop button in the case of winning, a stop operation of the third stop button is accepted. Immediately after the power failure due to a power outage of the game arcade or the like, regardless of the expected stop position of the third reel (even when the number of sliding frames is maximum), the power failure is detected before the power failure is detected. The movement (rotation) to the expected stop position can be configured to be completed. Further, when the symbol combination (for example, the common bell) constituting the winning combination is stopped and displayed after the return of the power supply, the payout of the game medals can be normally executed, and the disadvantage is hardly generated for the player. Can be configured.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has won the winning combination → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Performs constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Stops first reel as first stop operation Button operation → first reel stopped display → second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation → second reel stopped display → third reel stop operation as third reel stop operation (third stop button) Operation) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → Wins the reel as viewed from the player Is not stopped, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 (the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is correct). For example, in the game in which the bell role has been won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role as the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of →), the processing relating to the payout of the game medals is executed. May be configured. With this configuration, even when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, In the internal processing of the gaming machine, the winning button is won and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is received at a timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the payout of the game medals can be executed, and the disadvantage is not easily generated for the player. can do. The timing at which the reel rotation failure occurs is not limited to the above example, and the reel rotation failure occurs during the period from the stop display of the second reel to the execution of the processing related to the payout of the game medals. If the reel corresponding to 3 stops cannot be stopped at the expected stop position, all of them can be applied (the present invention is also applicable to the operation related to reel rotation failure exemplified below). In the above-described operation 2, an operation in a game in which a winning combination is won is illustrated. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following operation is performed (the same operation is performed when the rotation failure and the power supply interruption do not occur in other operations, too). Good).
Reel rotation starts as a game that has won the winning combination → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Performs constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Stops first reel as first stop operation Button operation → first reel stopped display → second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation → second reel stopped display → third reel stop operation as third reel stop operation (third stop button) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. In the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the process of paying out game medals is executed. A winning combination (for example, a common bell) that can win a prize regardless of the operation timing of the stop button in the game played, or a prize may or may not be won depending on the operation timing of the stop button in the won game It may be a role (for example, watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry). Further, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination has been won in a predetermined gaming state, when reel rotation failure or power interruption does not occur and a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, a reel backlight ( When the back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect (which may be referred to as a back lamp effect) in which a back lamp is sometimes flashed, the predetermined game state is established. In the game that has won the predetermined prize combination, even if a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined prize combination is not stopped and displayed, the back-up corresponding to the predetermined prize combination is also performed. You may be comprised so that a ramp effect may be performed. Also, in the present operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not be stopped at the expected stop position was described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is scheduled to stop due to reel rotation failure. The present invention may be applied to the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the expected stop position due to the reel rotation failure (the same applies to other operations). Applicable).

<Function 3>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has won the winning combination → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Performs constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Stops first reel as first stop operation Button operation → first reel stop display → second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation → second reel stop display → power cutoff and power supply to gaming machine is stopped → third reel Operate the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power-off → Execute power-off process → Player on third reel Cannot be moved (rotated) to the expected stop position as viewed from the side → Although the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269. (This is a case in which it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a game in which the bell role has been won, a bell which is a winning combination on the reel as viewed from the player) Although the symbol combination corresponding to the role was not stopped and displayed, the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role was normally executed by processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. (Case) → Execute processing related to payout of game medals. It may be configured to operate as described above. Note that the timing of detecting the power-off, the timing of the power-off occurring and stopping the supply of power to the gaming machine, the timing of determining that the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269, and the timing of returning to the power supply are as follows. The timing is not limited to the timing described above, and during the period from the stop display of the second reel to the execution of the processing relating to the payout of the game medals, the timing of detecting the power-off, , The timing at which the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269, and the timing at which power is restored may be present. Is applicable if the vehicle cannot be stopped at the expected stop position. The way is). With this configuration, the power is cut off immediately before (or immediately after) the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination cannot be stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. In this case, the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is selected at the timing when the winning combination is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the operation is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the payout of the game medals after the return of the power (the payout of the game In addition to the payout from the discharge port, the display of the credit number display device (the number of credits) is assumed to be increased). Can benefit constitutes such that less likely to occur. Note that the timing at which the power is cut off and the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped may be referred to as the timing at which the power is cut off. Further, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination has been won in a predetermined gaming state, when reel rotation failure or power interruption does not occur and a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, a reel backlight ( When the back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect (which may be referred to as a back lamp effect) in which a back lamp is sometimes flashed, the predetermined game state is established. In the game that has won the predetermined winning combination, even if a power failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back lamp corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not displayed. The effect may be configured to be performed. Also, in the present operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not be stopped at the expected stop position was described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be applied to the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the expected stop position due to the power interruption (the same applies to other operations). Is).

<Action 4>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped and displayed. → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel. → The second reel is stopped and displayed. → The third stop button is operated as a stop operation of the third reel. Operation is accepted) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → Wins the reel as seen from the player Although the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it is determined in the determination process of step 1269 that the symbol combination is normal (the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally performed). For example, in a lost game, a symbol combination corresponding to the loss was not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but a game corresponding to the operation of the player's stop button was performed. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the losing is normally executed by the processing inside the machine) → the payout of the game medal is not executed. With such a configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the reel corresponds to a winning combination as viewed from the player. Even if the symbol combination to be stopped is displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and it will correspond to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed If the stop button operation to accept the stop button is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game medal is displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Can be configured not to execute the payout, a fair gaming machine can be provided, and a game that does not cause unintended disadvantages at the game hall can be achieved. It can be a machine. The action 4 is not limited to the loss. For example, in a game that has not been won by a bell (a game that has been won as a replaying game, a game that has been won by a watermelon, or the like), a reel rotation failure may occur. It is supplemented that the present invention can be applied to a case where a symbol combination corresponding to a generated bell is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed as viewed from the player is a symbol combination that is not consistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation. Since the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (the display determination error is not determined to have occurred).

<Action 5>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is stopped → The power is cut off and the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped → The third reel Operation of the third stop button as a stop operation of the (reception of the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect the power-off → Execute the power-off process → From the player Unable to move (rotate) to the expected stop position as seen → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269. Judgment (This is a case where it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a lost game, a symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. However, when the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player is normally executed) → power return → payout of the game medal. It may be configured to operate as described above, which is not executed. With such a configuration, in the game in which the lottery is lost as a result of the lottery, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the reel corresponds to the winning combination as viewed from the player. Even if the symbol combination to be stopped is displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and it will correspond to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing that the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed If the stop button operation to accept the stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game medal is displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Gaming machine that can be configured not to execute the payout and can be a fair gaming machine, and that does not cause unintended disadvantages at the gaming hall It can be. Note that the action 5 is not limited to the loss only. For example, in a game that has not been won for a bell (a game that has been won for a re-playing role, a game that has been won for a watermelon, and the like), a reel rotation failure may occur. It is supplemented that the present invention can be applied to a case where a symbol combination corresponding to a bell has been stopped and displayed. In such a case, the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed as viewed from the player is a symbol combination that is not consistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation. Since the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (the display determination error is not determined to have occurred).

<Function 6>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped and displayed. → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel. → The second reel is stopped and displayed. → The third stop button is operated as a stop operation of the third reel. Operation is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → the bonus role (reel) as viewed from the player For example, the symbol combination corresponding to BB combination is stopped and displayed, but in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is determined to be normal (reset based on the operation of the stop button). This is a case where it is determined that the stop control of the game has been completed normally. For example, in a game in which a bonus combination has not been won and a loss has occurred, a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on a reel as viewed from a player. Is stopped and displayed, but the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss by the processing in the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player is normally executed) → The bonus does not start, In addition, it may be configured to operate as described above in which the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the reel corresponds to the bonus role as viewed from the player. Even if the symbol combination to be stopped is displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and it will correspond to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed If the stop button operation to accept the stop button is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the bonus is not displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. A game machine that can be configured not to start, can be a fair gaming machine, and does not cause unintended disadvantages to the game hall It can be a machine. Note that the action 6 is not limited to the loss, for example, a game in which the bonus combination has not been won (not inside the bonus) and the bonus combination has not been won (the replaying game has been won). In addition, the present invention can be applied to a case where a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination is stopped and displayed in a case where a reel rotation failure occurs in a game, a game having won a watermelon, and the like. In the above-described operation 6, an operation in a game in which the bonus combination is not won is illustrated. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following operation is performed (there is also applicable in the case where the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other operations).
Reel rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → First reel Is a stop display → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stop → operation of a third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. It is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process → the bonus execution is not started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure has not occurred in the game or the inside of the bonus winning the bonus combination, the following operation is performed.
Reel rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → First reel Is a stop display → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stop → operation of a third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. It is possible to exemplify an operation in which the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the execution of the bonus is started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above description, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated. However, depending on the type of the bonus (the type of the bonus combination), a bonus in which the freeze is executed and a bonus in which the freeze is not executed may be provided. The execution of the freeze may be made different depending on the gaming state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Action 7>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is stopped → The power is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The third reel The third stop button is operated as a stop operation of the player (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power-off is detected → Power-off processing is executed → The third reel is received from the player Unable to move (rotate) to the expected stop position as seen → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, but in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is determined. It is determined that the combination is normal (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally, for example, in a game in which the bonus combination has not been won and the game has been lost) , The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but a stop for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss by processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the player's stop button. If the control is executed normally) → power return → the bonus does not start and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. With such a configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the reel is viewed as a bonus hand from the player. Even when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, a loss occurs in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is displayed at a timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the corresponding stop button is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game is performed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured not to start the medal bonus, it can be a fair gaming machine, and it will cause unintended disadvantages at the game hall It was not can be a game machine. Note that the action 6 is not limited to the loss, for example, a game in which the bonus combination has not been won (not inside the bonus) and the bonus combination has not been won (the replaying game has been won). In addition, the present invention can be applied to a case where a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination is stopped and displayed in a case where a reel rotation failure occurs in a game, a game having won a watermelon, and the like. In the above-described operation 6, an operation in a game in which the bonus combination is not won is illustrated. In other words, the following operation is performed when the power supply is not interrupted (applicable when rotation failure and power interruption do not occur in other operations).
Reel rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → First reel Is a stop display → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stop → operation of a third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. It is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process → the bonus execution is not started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel power is not cut off during the game or the inside of the bonus that has been won, the following operation is performed.
Reel rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → First reel Is a stop display → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stop → operation of a third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. It is possible to exemplify an operation in which the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the execution of the bonus is started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above description, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated. However, depending on the type of the bonus (the type of the bonus combination), a bonus in which the freeze is executed and a bonus in which the freeze is not executed may be provided. The execution of the freeze may be made different depending on the gaming state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Action 8>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed during the bonus or as a game won as a bonus combination → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operation of the first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → Display of the first reel stopped → Operation of the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Display of the stop of the second reel → Stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Move the third reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player (rotation) No → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination Align starts determination → bonus to be normal, and may be configured to act as described above to freeze Bonus start is executed. With this configuration, in a game executed in a situation where a bonus has been won or a game where a bonus has been won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after a stop operation of the third stop button is received, Even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reels as viewed from the player, each reel (the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel) is displayed at the timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the corresponding stop button is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed. Can also be configured to start a bonus and to execute a freeze that is performed at the start of the bonus. It can be configured so as not to cause a significant disadvantage for the player such that the reel is not started due to the reel rotation failure in the situation to be performed, and the bonus is the same as when the reel rotation failure does not occur By executing the freeze at the start, the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable.

<Action 9>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed during the bonus or as a game won as a bonus role → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation of the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Game with power cut off Power supply to the machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated as a stop operation of the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power cut is detected → Power cut Time processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) stops on the reel as viewed from the player Although not shown, in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → return to power → the bonus is started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. Good. With this configuration, in a game executed in a situation where a bonus has been won or a game where a bonus combination has been won, a power-off process is executed immediately after a stop operation of the third stop button is received. Even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reels as viewed from the player, each reel (the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel) can be stopped and displayed with the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination. When the stop button operation corresponding to the bonus combination is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed. Can be configured to start a bonus and to execute a freeze that is performed at the start of the bonus, It can be configured so as not to cause a significant disadvantage for the player such that the bonus is not started due to power cutoff in the situation to be performed, and at the same time as when the reel rotation failure does not occur, Is executed, the player can proceed with the game without a sense of incongruity.

<Action 10>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped and displayed. → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel. → The second reel is stopped and displayed. → The third stop button is operated as a stop operation of the third reel. Operation is accepted) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel cannot move (rotate) to expected stop position as seen from player → Replay role on reel as seen from player Is stopped and displayed, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normal). This is a case where it is determined that the game has been completed.For example, in a lost game, the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but the game corresponding to the operation of the player's stop button is performed. If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the machine, the automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-game combination is not performed, and the re-game lamp D290 is newly added. It may be configured to operate as described above without lighting. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the reel is viewed from the player as a re-playing role. Even when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, a loss occurs in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is displayed at a timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed. The automatic bet is not made, and the re-game lamp D290 is not newly turned on. Further, in the operation 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination to which the RT state shifts when the stop display is performed in the current RT state is stopped and displayed when viewed from the player, The operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is received at the timing when the loss is caused by the internal processing and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is received. If the stop control for displaying the stop display is normally executed, the RT state does not shift (the symbol combination corresponding to the hand to which the RT state other than the replaying game shifts is stopped and displayed). It is equally applicable to cases). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game arcade. The action 10 is not limited to the loss, and is applied to, for example, a case where a reel combination failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is stopped and displayed in a game that has not been won as a replaying game. Supplement what you can do. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following operation is performed (there is also applicable in the case where the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other operations).
Reel rotation starts → Updates reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as first reel stop operation → First reel Is a stop display → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stop → operation of a third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed as stopped on the reel as viewed from the player. It is determined that the combination is normal. The operation is such that the automatic bet is not made and the re-game lamp D290 is not newly turned on.
The automatic bet means that a predetermined number (for example, three) of game medals that have been bet in a game that has been won as a re-game combination is displayed with the re-game combination stopped and a bet button (max bet button) is displayed. No bet operation or game medal insertion from the medal insertion slot is required to bet automatically.
On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game won as the re-game combination, the following operation is performed.
Reel rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → First reel Is a stop display → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stop → operation of a third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the stop expected position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. It is determined that the symbol combination is normal → The automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit (if the player has won the replay in the previous game, the replay is performed. Lamp D290 will continue to light up)
The following operation can be exemplified.

<Action 11>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is stopped → The power is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The third reel The third stop button is operated as a stop operation of the player (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power-off is detected → Power-off processing is executed → The third reel is received from the player The player cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position. → The symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player. However, in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is normal. (This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a lost game, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay The stop display is performed, but the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → power return → re-play The automatic bet corresponding to the stop display may not be performed, and the re-game lamp D290 may not be newly turned on. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the reels are re-played from the player as viewed from the player. Even when the symbol combination corresponding to the symbol is stopped, the reels (left reel, middle reel, right reel) are lost at the timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed in the internal processing of the gaming machine. When the stop button operation corresponding to the replaying combination is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is stopped and displayed. No automatic bet is made, and the re-game lamp D290 is not newly turned on. Further, in the operation 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination to which the RT state shifts when the stop display is performed in the current RT state is stopped and displayed when viewed from the player, The operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is received at the timing when the loss is caused by the internal processing and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is received. If the stop control for displaying the stop display is normally executed, the RT state does not shift (the symbol combination corresponding to the hand to which the RT state other than the replaying game shifts is stopped and displayed). It is equally applicable to cases). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game arcade. The action 11 is not limited to the loss, and may be applied to, for example, a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is stopped and the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is stopped in a game in which the replaying game has not been won. Supplement what you can do. In other words, the following operation is performed when the power supply is not interrupted (applicable when rotation failure and power interruption do not occur in other operations).
Reel rotation starts → Updates reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as first reel stop operation → First reel Is a stop display → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stop → operation of a third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed as stopped on the reel as viewed from the player. It is determined that the combination is normal. The operation is such that the automatic bet is not made and the re-game lamp D290 is not newly turned on. On the other hand, the following operation is performed when the power is not cut off in the game won as the replaying role.
Reel rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → First reel Is a stop display → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stop → operation of a third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → The third reel moves to the stop expected position as viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. It is determined that the symbol combination is normal → The automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit (if the player has won the replay in the previous game, the replay is performed. Lamp D290 will continue to light up)
The following operation can be exemplified.

<Action 12>
Reel rotation starts as a game won in the re-game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First stop as first reel stop operation Button operation → first reel stopped display → second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation → second reel stopped display → third reel stop operation as third reel stop operation (third stop button) Operation) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → Re-play on the reel as viewed from the player Although the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not stopped and displayed, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269. It is, and replay lamp D290 may be configured to act as described above to be newly turned. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery is a replay, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the replay of the replay Even if the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped and displayed, each reel (the left reel) is selected at the timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination can be stopped and displayed. , The middle reel, the right reel) and accepts the operation of the stop button. If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is normally executed, the replaying game is supported. Even if the symbol combination to be performed is not stopped and displayed, the automatic bet is made and the re-game lamp D290 is newly turned on. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying role is not stopped and displayed, so that even if the reel is visually recognized, Even if it cannot be determined whether or not the player has won the role, by visually checking whether or not an automatic bet has been executed and the lighting of the re-game lamp D290, the situation of the game can be prevented from being erroneously recognized. Further, in the action 12, if the player has won the replaying game to which the RT state shifts when the stop display is performed in the current RT state, the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is stopped and displayed. If not, the RT state is shifted. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a problem does not easily occur in the progress of the game, and to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Action 13>
Reel rotation starts as a game won in the re-game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First stop as first reel stop operation Button operation → first reel stop display → second reel stop operation as second reel stop operation → second reel stop display → power cutoff and power supply to gaming machine is stopped → third reel Operate the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power-off → Execute power-off process → Player on third reel Cannot be moved (rotated) to the scheduled stop position as viewed from the side → The symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269 There a decision → power supply recovery → automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the replay combination has been made, and replay lamp D290 may be configured to act as described above to light anew. With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery is a re-game, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the game is re-played to the reels as viewed from the player. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the role is not stopped and displayed, the reels are won at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game has been won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming role can be stopped and displayed. (Reel, middle reel, right reel) operation is accepted, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is normally executed, Even if the corresponding symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, an automatic bet is made, and the re-game lamp D290 is newly turned on. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying role is not stopped and displayed, so that even if the reel is visually recognized, Even if it cannot be determined whether or not the player has won the role, by visually checking whether or not an automatic bet has been executed and the lighting of the re-game lamp D290, the situation of the game can be prevented from being erroneously recognized. Further, in the operation 13, if the player has won the replaying role to which the RT state shifts when the stop display is performed in the current RT state, the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is stopped and displayed. If not, the RT state shifts. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a problem does not easily occur in the progress of the game, and to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Action 14>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has been won in a role where the RT state shifts (sometimes referred to as an RT shift combination) → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → reception of a stop button is performed. Becomes valid → Operation of the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → Display of the first reel stopped → Operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Display of stop of the second reel → Display of the third reel Operate the third stop button as a stop operation (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Move the third reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player (Rotation) is not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transfer combination is not stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 → R State transitions may be configured to act as described above. With this configuration, in the game that has been won as the RT transfer combination, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol corresponding to the RT transfer combination appears on the reel as viewed from the player. Even when the combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel) is selected at the timing when the RT combination is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT combination can be stopped and displayed. , Right reel), the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transfer combination is normally executed when the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transfer combination is normally executed. Even if is not stopped, the RT state shifts. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and to allow the game to progress along the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine originally has, and The administrator can operate the gaming machine with ease. Note that the RT transfer role is a role that shifts to an RT state different from the predetermined RT state by stopping and displaying the symbol combination in the predetermined RT state. Or not. That is, in RT state A, predetermined role A is an RT transfer role, but in RT state B, predetermined role A may not be an RT transfer role. In RT state A, predetermined role A is an RT transfer role. However, in the RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be won in some cases.

<Action 15>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has been won in a role where the RT state shifts (sometimes referred to as an RT shift combination) → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → reception of a stop button Enabled → Operate first stop button as stop operation of first reel → First reel stop display → Operate second stop button as stop operation of second reel → Second reel stop display → Power off occurs Supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped and the third stop button is operated as a stop operation of the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → power cutoff is detected → Execute power-off processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transfer combination is not stopped and displayed as viewed from the player, but step 1 Symbol combination in determination processing 69 and the determination → RT state transitions is normal (to RT conditions may shift after power restoration, may shift the RT state before power restoration)
It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in the game that has been won as the RT transfer combination, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the reel corresponds to the RT transfer combination as viewed from the player. Even when the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel) is selected at the timing when the RT combination is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT combination can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button corresponding to the reel or the right reel is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transfer combination is normally executed, the symbol corresponding to the RT transfer combination is executed. Even if the combination is not stopped and displayed, the RT state shifts. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and to allow the game to progress along the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine originally has, and The administrator can operate the gaming machine with ease.

<Action 16>
Reel rotation is started as a game that has not been won in a role in which the RT state shifts (sometimes referred to as an RT shift combination) → the reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → stop button is pressed. Reception is enabled → The first stop button is operated as the first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is stopped → Third The third stop button is operated as a reel stop operation (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel is expected to be stopped from the player's expected position Unable to move (rotate) up to → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transfer combination is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269. It may be configured to act as described above for RT state is not migrated. With this configuration, in a game that has not been won as the RT transfer combination, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the reel corresponds to the RT transfer combination as viewed from the player. Even when the symbol combination to be stopped is displayed, the RT state does not shift. With such a configuration, for example, when the push order navigation for preventing the transition to the RT state disadvantageous to the player in the AT state is performed, the player operates the stop button in accordance with the push order navigation by operating the stop button. Nevertheless, even if the symbol combination shifts (falls down) due to reel rotation failure and the symbol combination is apparently stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift and the player does not intend to do so. A gaming machine that does not generate a profit can be provided, and the game can proceed along the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine originally has, so that the administrator of the gaming hall can operate the gaming machine with confidence.

<Action 17>
Reel rotation is started as a game that has not been won in a role in which the RT state shifts (sometimes referred to as an RT shift combination) → the reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → stop button is pressed. Reception is enabled → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation of the first reel → Display the stop of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Display the stop of the second reel → Power off Occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated as a stop operation of the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power is turned off → The power-off process is executed → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transfer combination is stopped and displayed as viewed from the player, Step In the determination process in 1269 may be configured to act as the symbol combination is that no shift determination → RT state to be normal. With this configuration, in a game that has not been won as the RT transfer combination, the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the reels are displayed on the reels as the RT transfer combination as viewed from the player. Even when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. With such a configuration, for example, when the push order navigation for preventing the transition to the RT state disadvantageous to the player in the AT state is performed, the player operates the stop button in accordance with the push order navigation by operating the stop button. Nevertheless, even if the symbol combination shifts (falls down) due to reel rotation failure and the symbol combination is apparently stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift and the player does not intend to do so. A gaming machine that does not generate a profit can be provided, and the game can proceed along the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine originally has, so that the administrator of the gaming hall can operate the gaming machine with confidence.

<Action 18>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user (when the second reel moves to the expected stop position, the symbol combination of the first reel and the second reel is not displayed). The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line.) → Tempai sound is output from the speaker. Also, when no reel rotation failure occurs, the operation is as follows.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to a scheduled stop position as viewed from the player → The first reel as viewed from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line on the second reel → a tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to a scheduled stop position as viewed from the player → The first reel as viewed from the player In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination may not be stopped and displayed on the activated line on the second reel → the speaker may not output a tempered sound.
With this configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and the symbol combination forming the bonus symbol becomes the first stop. Also, when the bonus symbol is stopped at the second stop, in other words, even when the bonus symbol is tempered, when the bonus symbol is stopped at the expected stop position in this example, the tempai sound is not output when the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempered. That is, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly recognize that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and the symbol combination forming the bonus symbol is the first stop and the second stop. Even if the stop did not stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not change, if it stopped at the expected stop position in this example, a tempai sound was output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to change. Therefore, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly recognize that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker.

<Function 19>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Detect power loss → Perform power off processing Execution → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → A symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player → Power Return → No sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Detect power loss → Perform power off processing Execution → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player ( When the second reel moves to the expected stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel.) → Power return → Speaker May be configured to act as described above to Luo Tenpai sound is output. In addition, when the power supply is not interrupted, the operation is as follows.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to a scheduled stop position as viewed from the player → The first reel as viewed from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line on the second reel → a tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to a scheduled stop position as viewed from the player → The first reel as viewed from the player In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination may not be stopped and displayed on the activated line on the second reel → the speaker may not output a tempered sound. The timing at which the speaker outputs the tempai sound may be before the execution of the power-off process is completed, or after the power is restored after the power-off occurs.
With such a configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first symbol combination. Stopped as a stop and a second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempered, if it stops at the scheduled stop position in this example, if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempered, a tempai sound is output. Therefore, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly recognize that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Similarly, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and the symbol combination forming the bonus symbol is the first stop and the second stop. Even if it did not stop as a stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not squeeze, if it stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example, if the bonus symbol was slated to be tempered, a tempai sound was output That is, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly recognize that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (the first stop operation is executed. Shortage of reel rotation occurs immediately after the operation).

<Function 20>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Updates the reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Enables first reel Operation of the first stop button as a stop operation → Display of the first reel stopped → Operation of the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Reel rotation failure occurred → The second reel reaches the expected stop position as viewed from the player The player cannot move (rotate) → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player → the bonus confirmation tempai sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is inside the bonus or won as a bonus → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button → Enables the first reel Operation of the first stop button as a stop operation → Display of the first reel stopped → Operation of the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Reel rotation failure occurred → The second reel reaches the expected stop position as viewed from the player Unable to move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stop-displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player (if the second reel moves to the expected stop position, The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel.) → Bonus confirmation sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to act as described above. Also, when no reel rotation failure occurs, the operation is as follows.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is inside the bonus or won as a bonus → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button → Enables the first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Move the second reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player (rotation) → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user → the bonus confirmation sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Updates the reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Enables first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Move the second reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player (rotation) → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user → the bonus confirmation tempe sound is not output from the speaker. The bonus confirmation tempai sound is a tempai that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting the predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the activated line (tempai) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It is a sound.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning lottery is a loss and the bonus is not in the inside of the bonus, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and a symbol constituting the bonus symbol If the combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, if the bonus symbol is tempered, if it stops at the expected stop position in this example, if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempered, Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a reel rotation failure, the player can quickly recognize that the reel rotation failure has occurred, even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure. can do.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the role lottery becomes a bonus combination or a game executed during the inside of the bonus, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and a bonus symbol is formed. If the symbol combination does not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, if the bonus symbol does not stop, the bonus symbol will stop if the stop is at the expected stop position in this example. In this case, a bonus confirmation tempi sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a reel rotation defect, the player will experience a reel rotation defect due to the output from the speaker. Can be quickly detected. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (the first stop operation is executed. Shortage of reel rotation occurs immediately after the operation).

<Action 21>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Detect power loss → Perform power off processing Execution → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → A symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player → Power Return → No sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Detect power loss → Perform power off processing Execution → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player ( When the second reel moves to the expected stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the first reel and the second reel.) → Power return → Speaker May be configured to act as described above to Luo Tenpai sound is output. In addition, when the power supply is not interrupted, the operation is as follows.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to a scheduled stop position as viewed from the player → The first reel as viewed from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line on the second reel → a tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → first reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as a stop operation of the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to a scheduled stop position as viewed from the player → The first reel as viewed from the player In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination may not be stopped and displayed on the activated line on the second reel → the speaker may not output a tempered sound. The timing at which the speaker outputs the tempai sound may be before the execution of the power-off process is completed, or after the power is restored after the power-off occurs.
With such a configuration, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and the symbol combination forming the bonus symbol becomes the first symbol combination. Stopped as a stop and a second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempered, if it stops at the expected stop position in this example, if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempered, a tempai sound is output. Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of power interruption, the player will be able to quickly detect from the speaker output that the reel is abnormal due to the power interruption. Can be. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning lottery is lost, a power-off occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first stop and the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol did not change, if the bonus symbol was scheduled to stop at the stop position in the present example, a bonus sound was output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to change. That is, even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of power loss, the player can quickly detect that the reel is abnormal due to the power failure by the output from the speaker. it can. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (the first stop operation is executed). Immediately after the power-off process is performed).

<Action 22>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Updates the reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Enables first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → display the stop of the first reel → stop power supply and stop supplying power to the gaming machine → operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → power off Detection → Power-off processing executed → Second reel cannot move (rotate) to scheduled stop position as viewed from player → Corresponds to bonus combination on activated line on first reel and second reel as viewed from player The symbol combination is stopped and the bonus confirmation sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is inside the bonus or won as a bonus → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button → Enables the first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → display the stop of the first reel → stop power supply and stop supplying power to the gaming machine → operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → power off Detection → Power-off processing executed → Second reel cannot move (rotate) to scheduled stop position as viewed from player → Corresponds to bonus combination on activated line on first reel and second reel as viewed from player The symbol combination does not stop and display (when the second reel moves to the expected stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination stops on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel. Shimesuru) → may be configured to act as described above bonus determined Tenpai sound is output from the speaker. In addition, when the power supply is not interrupted, the operation is as follows.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is inside the bonus or won as a bonus → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts the stop button → Enables the first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Move the second reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player (rotation) → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user → the bonus confirmation sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Updates the reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Enables first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Move the second reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player (rotation) → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line on the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user → the bonus confirmation tempe sound is not output from the speaker. The bonus confirmation tempai sound is a tempai that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting the predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the activated line (tempai) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It is a sound.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning lottery is a loss and the bonus is not in the inside, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and the bonus symbol is configured. When the symbol combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even when the bonus symbol is tempered, when the bonus symbol is stopped at the expected stop position in the present example, the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempered. Will not output the bonus confirmation sound, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the power failure, the player will have an abnormality on the reel due to the power failure due to the output from the speaker. Can be detected quickly.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a bonus combination or a game executed during the bonus, a power-off process is performed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and the bonus symbol is displayed. If the constituent symbol combination does not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not stop, the bonus symbol will stop when the stop is at the scheduled stop position in this example. If it was scheduled, a bonus confirmation tempai sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the power failure, the player will output an abnormal sound on the reel due to the power failure. It can be quickly detected that the problem has occurred. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (the first stop operation is executed). Immediately after the power-off process is performed).

<Action 23>
The number of credits is one or more, and reel rotation starts as a game that has been won as a predetermined replaying role → reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → reception of a stop button is enabled → Operate the first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Display the stop of the second reel → Stop the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Move the third reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player (rotation) No → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination does not stop display → Max bet lamp does not light
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is one or more and has not been won as a replaying role → the reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → reception of a stop button is enabled → Operate the first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Display the stop of the second reel → Stop the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Move the third reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player (rotation) It may not be possible to configure such that the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination is stopped and the max bet lamp is lit. Also, when no reel rotation failure occurs, the operation is as follows.
The number of credits is one or more, and reel rotation starts as a game that has been won as a predetermined replaying role → reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → reception of a stop button is enabled → Operate the first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Display the stop of the second reel → Stop the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the third reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped display → Max bet lamp does not light
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is one or more and has not been won as a replaying role → the reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → reception of a stop button is enabled → Operate the first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Display the stop of the second reel → Stop the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the third reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not stopped and displayed. The max bet lamp is turned on.
With this configuration, in the game that has been won in the re-game, when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed, Also, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the max bet lamp is not turned on, so that the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the max bet button is not valid. Also, in a game that has not been won in a replay, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, As in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the game is not stopped and displayed, the max bet lamp is turned on, so that the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the max bet button is effective.

<Action 24>
The number of credits is one or more, and reel rotation starts as a game that has been won as a predetermined replaying role → reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → reception of a stop button is enabled → Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation of the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Game with power cut off Power supply to the machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated as a stop operation of the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power cut is detected → Power cut Time processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replaying combination is not stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp does not light up It was,
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is one or more and has not been won as a replaying role → the reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → reception of a stop button is enabled → Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation of the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Game with power cut off Power supply to the machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated as a stop operation of the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power cut is detected → Power cut Time processing → the third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-playing combination is stopped → the max bet lamp is lit It may be configured to act on. In addition, when the power supply is not interrupted, the operation is as follows.
The number of credits is one or more, and reel rotation starts as a game that has been won as a predetermined replaying role → reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → reception of a stop button is enabled → Operate the first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Display the stop of the second reel → Stop the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the third reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped display → Max bet lamp does not light
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is one or more and has not been won as a replaying role → the reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintaining processing is executed → reception of a stop button is enabled → Operate the first stop button as the stop operation of the first reel → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Display the stop of the second reel → Stop the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the third reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not stopped and displayed. The max bet lamp is turned on.
With this configuration, in the game won in the re-game, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed. Also, similarly to the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max bet button is not valid, because the max bet lamp is not turned on. Also, in a game that has not been won in the replay, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed. As in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped, the max bet lamp is turned on, so that the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the max bet button is effective.

<Action 25>
This is a game during the execution of a bonus, and has been won as a winning combination, and a game medal corresponding to the winning of the winning combination is given to a player, so that a bonus ending condition is satisfied. Rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → Stops first reel Display → Operation of second stop button as stop operation of second reel → Display of stop of second reel → Operation of third stop button as stop operation of third reel (accepts operation of third stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stops Do not show → bonus is completed, may be configured to act as described above that bonus at the end of the freeze is executed. Also, when no reel rotation failure occurs, the operation is as follows.
This is a game during the execution of a bonus, and has been won as a winning combination, and a game medal corresponding to the winning of the winning combination is given to a player, so that a bonus ending condition is satisfied. Rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → Stops first reel Display → Operation of second stop button as stop operation of second reel → Display of stop of second reel → Operation of third stop button as stop operation of third reel (accepts operation of third stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel decelerating state → The third reel moves to the expected stop position (rotation) as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and the bo It may be configured to act as described above to scan end freeze is performed.
With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final game of the bonus, and a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed. In the case where the bonus combination ends, the bonus is terminated and a freeze is executed at the end of the bonus, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can detect and does not give a sense of discomfort to the progress of the game.

<Action 26>
This is a game during the execution of a bonus, and has been won as a winning combination, and a game medal corresponding to the winning of the winning combination is given to a player, so that a bonus ending condition is satisfied. Rotation starts → Updates reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → Stops first reel Display → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Display the stop of the second reel → Stop power supply and stop supplying power to the gaming machine → Third stop button as the stop operation of the third reel (Accepts the operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power-off → Executes power-off processing → Moves the third reel to the expected stop position as viewed from the player Rotation) can not → symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed → bonus is completed, may be configured to act as described above to the end of the bonus freezes is executed. In addition, when the power supply is not interrupted, the operation is as follows.
This is a game during the execution of a bonus, and has been won as a winning combination, and a game medal corresponding to the winning of the winning combination is given to a player, so that a bonus ending condition is satisfied. Rotation starts → Updates the reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → Stops first reel Display → Operation of second stop button as stop operation of second reel → Display of stop of second reel → Operation of third stop button as stop operation of third reel (accepts operation of third stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel decelerating state → The third reel moves to the expected stop position (rotation) as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and the bo It may be configured to act as described above to scan end freeze is performed.
With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final game of the bonus, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. In the case where there is no bonus, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus, so that the player is notified that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can promptly detect and does not give a sense of discomfort to the progress of the game.

In addition, from the configuration related to the reel acceleration process in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the above-described example,
Execution period of reel acceleration processing when no rotational drum rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = A
Execution period of reel acceleration processing until occurrence of rotational drum rotation failure when rotational drum rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = B
Execution period of reel acceleration processing after occurrence of rotation failure of the cylinder when the rotation failure of the rotation cylinder occurs during execution of the reel acceleration processing = C
Then,
A = B + C
It is configured so that
Also,
Number of times of execution of interrupt processing of reel acceleration processing when no rotational drum rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = D
In the case where the rotation failure of the rotating drum occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the number of times of execution of the interrupt processing of the reel acceleration processing until the defective rotation of the rotating drum occurs = E
When the rotation failure of the rotating drum occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the number of times of execution of the interrupt processing of the reel acceleration processing after the occurrence of the defective rotation of the rotating drum = F
Then,
D = E + F
It is configured so that

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power-off process according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPU C100 of the main control board M stores the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processing completed flag (for example, updates the power-off processed flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1906, the CPU C100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and detects error detection information based on the calculated checksum (for example, The lower one byte of the obtained checksum or its complement is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPU C100 of the main control board M prohibits writing in the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for reset.

  Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of a pressing order display of the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example. The table on the drawing shows the reel stop order and the instruction number indicated by the executed push order navigation (information related to the push order. In this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S). It is a table | surface which shows correspondence with. For example, the instruction number when notifying “middle → right → left” as the pressing order is “A5”. Next, on the left side in the figure, when the pressing order is “left → center → right” (the corresponding instruction number is “A1”), the pressing order display device D270, the advantageous section display YH, and the effect display device S40. FIG. Here, the pressing order display device D270 of this example is a 7-segment display method, and also serves as a payout number display device. When the payout of medals is executed, the number of paid out medals is displayed as a two-digit number on the pressing order display device D270. Here, even when the push order navigation is executed, if the display of the push order display device D270 is displayed as a two-digit numerical value, whether the display on the push order display device D270 is the number of payout medals or the push order It is difficult to determine whether the display is the navigation display. Therefore, "=" is displayed in the left digit such as "= 1" on the pressing order display device D270 so that it is possible to distinguish between the number of paid out medals and the pressing order navigation display. With this configuration, when the display of the pressing order display device D270 is a two-digit number, it is a display of the number of payout medals, and the display of the pressing order display device D270 is “=” on the left side and a numeral on the right side. If there is, it is configured to be able to determine that it is the display of the push order navigation, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being erroneously recognized. Further, in the advantageous section indicator YH provided at the lower right of the push order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is an "advantageous section" is lit. At the same time, the display of "40 remaining games" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantage section" (or "in the AT state") is displayed on the effect display device S40. Also, the right side in the figure illustrates an image displayed on the pressing order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the pressing order is “middle → left → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A3”). I have. In addition, since the current game section is the “advantageous section”, the advantageous section indicator YH lights up, and “25 remaining games” indicating the number of remaining games in the “advantaged section” is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is displayed. It should be noted that a role with a pressing order (a condition device with a medal payout among the condition devices in which the role stopped and displayed according to the reel stop order is different, for example, a bell) and a replay with a pressing order (a reel stopping order) Of the condition devices that are differently displayed and stopped, the segment display of the instruction number of the condition device related to the replay combination may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is limited to 7 segments. Instead, for example, an instruction may be given by turning on a plurality of LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to an instruction number using an LED display. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which an advantageous section display YH is provided in the lower right part of the credit amount display device D200. In this case, it is preferable to turn on the advantageous section indicator YH until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player stops playing the game, the player visually checks the number-of-credits display device D200 to check whether medals remain. Then, if medals remain, the settlement button D60 is operated. That is, by turning on the light until the settlement button D60 becomes effective, a user-friendly gaming machine can be prevented from erroneously quitting the game even though it is an “advantageous section” from the next game. be able to.

  In addition, the notification mode of the game section in the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this example, and a section indicator similar to the advantageous section indicator YH is provided at the lower right of both of the two seven segments (the section indicator is displayed). In such a case, when the left-hand section indicator is lit, it is notified that the current game section is a “normal section”, and on the other hand, When the section indicator is turned on, a notification that the current game section is an “advantaged section” may be provided. Further, the “normal section” and the “advantageous section” are distinguished by the color and lighting mode at the time of lighting of the section indicator (for example, “green” in the “normal section” and “red” in the “advantage section”). Alternatively, the lighting may be performed in a “normal section”, and “blinking” in an “advantaged section”. Further, the display mode of the section display is changed according to the “game during AT inside BB”, “BB state during AT”, “AT precursor state”, “state during AT”, etc. in the “advantage section”. You may. Furthermore, the present game section may be configured to be able to recognize that the current game section is the “standby section” separately from the “normal section” and the “advantage section”. However, the “normal section” and the “advantageous section” are distinguished by using different section indicators, for example, and the player recognizes whether or not the current game section is the “advantage section”. It is preferable to make it easier.

  Also, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section", for example, in the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparation in progress", the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is not displayed. A configuration may be adopted (in a state where the profit is relatively low for the player, the disadvantage for the player is not notified that the number of remaining games in the “advantage section” is subtracted). However, even in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the section indicator be turned on to notify the player that the “advantageous section” is being performed. At the same time, it is preferable that the section display is configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and that the display is set at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

  Next, control processing executed on the sub-control board S side will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Sub-side program start processing>
First, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing a sub-side program start process. This sub-program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

  First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S prohibits interruption. Next, in step 2004, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processing such as initialization of the CPU and RAM, calculation of a checksum, and the like.

  Next, in step 2008, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on matches the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off. If Yes in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination processing in step 2008 that both checksum values match, in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one-command processing described below. It is determined whether or not the state has been restored from the state in which the power supply has been interrupted, that is, whether or not the state has been completely restored.

  In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, in the case where it is determined that the return is complete, in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permitted the interrupt and executed when the power was cut off. The processing returns to one command processing.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination processing in step 2008 that both checksum values do not match, in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the RAM. Execute After executing the process of step 2014 or in the case of No in step 2010, the process is shifted to the sub main loop process.

<Sub main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing a sub main loop process. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

  First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits the interruption. Next, in step 2108, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a command receiving process. This command receiving process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

  Next, in step 2250, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes one-command processing described later. The one command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control unit 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms, has elapsed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step 2102. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be appropriately changed according to processing.

<Sub-side power-off processing>
Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing a sub-side power-off process executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power-off process is a process started when the sub-control board S detects the power-off.

  First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start processing is being executed. If Yes in step 2204, the process moves to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calculates the checksum. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

  Next, in step 2210, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether 500 ms has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off process is terminated. On the other hand, if No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the power has been restored. If Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S updates the number of occurrences of instantaneous interruption. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer, and returns to the processing that was being executed when the power was turned off. If it is determined in step 2212 that the power has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing one-command processing called and executed in the processing of step 2250 in FIG.

  Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is time to operate the start lever. In the case of No in step 2252, in other words, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the start lever, in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of a start lever operation effect-related determination process described later. I do. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a start lever operation process described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2252, in other words, when it is not the operation timing of the start lever, in step 2254, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether it is the first reel stop reception timing. If No in step 2254, in other words, if it is the first reel stop reception timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a first-time cylinder stop reception processing subroutine described later. Then, control goes to a step 7100.

  Next, if Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop reception timing, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is the second reel stop reception timing. . If No in step 2258, in other words, if it is the second reel stop reception timing, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of a second body stop reception process described later. Then, control goes to a step 7100.

  Next, if Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop reception timing, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is the third reel stop reception timing. . If No in step 2262, in other words, if it is the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls a subroutine of a third-body-stop-state effect-related determination process described later. Run. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a process for receiving a third cylinder stop described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether it is the stop display symbol stop timing. . If Yes in step 2266, in other words, if it is the stop display symbol stop timing, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes stop display symbol time processing (not shown), and proceeds to step 7100. Move to On the other hand, if No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the stop display symbol stop timing, the CPUSC of the sub control board S immediately proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, in step 7100, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a menu screen display control process described later. Next, in step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a standby screen display control process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing the start lever operation effect-related determination processing called and executed in the processing of step 3000 of FIG. 41. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S, based on the high security failure counter value command received from the main control board M side, determines the number of high security failure games remaining at the current time (high probability state Check how many more games are guaranteed). Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for battle effect execution determination processing described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a battle effect has been determined to be executed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3006, in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, the state related to the AT of the next game, and the current number of high security failure games. Based on the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44), a stay stage shift lottery (lottery for changing the stay stage) is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). Note that also in the case of No in step 3006, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3002, in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the state related to the AT of the game is the “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the stay stage determination table (FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. With reference to (see step 2300), a stay stage shift lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is the “AT-in-progress state”. If Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine for AT effect determination processing described later, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state regarding the AT of the game is the “state for resilience effect presentation”. In the case of Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of a resilience availability determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the notice effect and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. After the determination, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). Note that the stay stage is an effect mainly including a background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and is configured so that any one of the stay stages is always set. If the stay stage is different, the tendency of various effects such as background effects, notice effects, and the like will be different.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a battle effect execution availability determination process called and executed in the process of step 3050 in FIG. 42. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of high security failure games is four or more. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a BB combination. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not to execute a battle effect execution lottery (battle effect (win)) with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example) to win. Lottery). Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the battle effect execution possibility lottery executed in step 3056 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (win), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3006). On the other hand, if No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines an effect related to the game as an effect other than the battle effect, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3006). Here, the battle effect is a continuous effect performed over a plurality of games, and the battle effect is won, that is, the battle effect (victory) is executed, thereby winning the BB role and performing the AT lottery. It is configured so that winning is determined. Note that the configuration related to the battle effect is not limited to this. If the player has won the BB role even if he has not won the AT lottery (the state transitions to the “low-probability state” or the “high-probability state” after the BB ends) ), A battle effect (victory) may be executed.

  In the case of No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a rare combination. Here, in the present example, the rare roles are winning-C (cherry), winning-D (watermelon A), and winning-E (watermelon B). Has become. That is, when the rare combination is stopped and displayed, the player has a feeling of expectation that the rare combination is won simultaneously with the BB combination. In the case of Yes in step 3064, in step 3066, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S , A predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3, which is lower than the predetermined probability in step 3056). ). Next, in Step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the gas battle effect execution lottery executed in Step 3066 has been won. If Yes in step 3068, in step 3070, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be a battle effect (defeat), and proceeds to the next process (process in step 3006). If No in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, in step 3072, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as an effect other than the battle effect, and performs the next process (the process in step 3006). ). Here, the battle effect (defeat) may be configured to be executable even in the “normal section”.

  As described above, when the number of games with high security failure is equal to or more than a predetermined number, for example, when the number of games with high security failure is four or more, a continuous effect such as a battle effect can be executed over a plurality of games. When the number is less than the number, for example, when the number is less than 4, the continuous effect such as the battle effect is configured not to be executed. (The "normal section" is set), it is possible to prevent the advantageous section indicator YH from being turned off, and to perform the battle effect only when the lighting of the advantageous section indicator YH until the end of the battle effect can be ensured. By executing this, a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided without impairing the player's expectation of winning the BB.

  Also, when the role of rare is elected, it is configured to be able to execute continuous production such as battle production (defeat), so that the frequency of execution of the battle production can be secured and the game can be played with expectation at all times. Can be.

  Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is an excerpt of only a part. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is used when the game is in the “low-probability state”, and is used when the game is in the “high-probability state” and the number of high security failure games is 4 or more. There are three types of tables: a table used when the game is in the “high probability state” and the number of high security failure games is three or less.

  In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the “low probability state”, the relationship between the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the stay stage of the real game, and the corresponding number is shown. Stipulated. In the case of the “low probability state”, the current stay stage is composed of two types of staging stages, a desert stage and a town stage, and the transition stage is a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. And four production stages. As states relating to the AT of the next game, there are three states of a “low probability state”, a “normal inside BB game”, and a “high probability state”.

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state” or “normal BB inside game”, 0 to 979 are assigned as the number when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. Also, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state” or “normal BB inside game”, the number of shifts from the desert stage to the city stage in the game is 980 to 980. 999 has been assigned.

  Further, when the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state” or “normal BB internal middle game”, the number of characters to shift from the town stage to the desert stage in the game is 0 to 0. 19 are assigned. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state” or “normal BB inside game”, 20 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  In addition, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as the numbers when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 250 to 499 are assigned as the numbers when the game shifts from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 500 to 749 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 750 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

  When the current stay stage is the town stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the town stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the town stage and the state shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 250 to 499 are assigned as the number of positions when the town stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 500 to 749 are assigned as the numbers when the game is shifted from the town stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the town stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 750 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the game shifts from the town stage to the cave stage in the game.

  In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the “high probability state” and the number of highly secured games is four or more, the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the real game, and the number of sets is defined. Have been. As the current stay stage and the stage to be shifted, there are four types of performance stages: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage.

  In the case where the current stay stage is the desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game, 0 to 879 are assigned as the numerical values. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 880 to 929 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as numbers when the game shifts from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current staying stage is the desert stage and the game shifts from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game, 960 to 999 are assigned.

  The current stay stage is a town stage, and 0 to 879 are assigned as numbers when the game shifts from the town stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the city stage is maintained in the game, 880 to 929 are assigned as the numbers. The current stay stage is the town stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as numbers when the game is shifted from the town stage to the conference room stage in the game. The current stay stage is the town stage, and 960 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the game shifts from the town stage to the cave stage in the game.

  The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the numbers when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the setting numbers when shifting from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game. When the current staying stage is the conference room stage and the conference room stage is maintained in the game, 100 to 949 are assigned as numbers. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 950 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the cave stage in the game.

  The current staying stage is a cave stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. The current staying stage is a cave stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the numbers when the game is shifted from the cave stage to the city stage in the game. The current stay stage is a cave stage, and 100 to 199 are assigned as the number of positions when the game is shifted from the cave stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current staying stage is a cave stage and the cave stage is maintained in the game, 200 to 999 are assigned as numbers.

  In the staying stage determination table used when the game is in the “high probability state” and the number of highly secure failure games is 3 or less, the current staying stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the staying stage of the real game, , And the relationship with the number. As the current stay stage and the stage to be shifted, there are four types of performance stages: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. As states relating to the AT of the next game, there are three states: a "high probability state", a "game inside the advantageous BB", and a "low probability state".

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 0 to 979 are assigned as the numbers when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 980 to 999 are set as the numbers when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. Have been assigned.

  When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 0 to 19 are set as the numbers when the game shifts from the town stage to the desert stage. Have been assigned. When the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 20 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the town stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  If the current stay stage is a conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, the number of units to be shifted from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the relevant game is 0 to 0. 29 are assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, the number of units to be changed from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game is 30 to 59 are assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or the “advantageous BB internal middle game”, 60 to 999 are set as the numbers when the conference room stage is maintained in the game. Have been assigned.

  When the current staying stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 0 to 29 are set as the numbers when the game shifts from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. Have been assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 30 to 59 are set as the number of shifts from the cave stage to the city stage in the game. Have been assigned. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, the number of characters to shift from the cave stage to the conference room stage in the game is 60 to 99. Is assigned. When the current staying stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 100 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the cave stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “low-probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game.

  When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the state shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the city stage is maintained in the game.

  When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the game is shifted from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game.

  When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the game shifts to the low probability state in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the cave stage to the city stage in the game.

  As described above, when the state is the “low probability state”, two stages of the desert stage or the town stage can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, when the state is the “high probability state”, four stages of the desert stage, the town stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage can be selected (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, four stay stages can be selected in the “advantageous section”, while two stay stages can be selected in the “normal section”, and can be selected in the “normal section”. The second stay stage can also be selected in the “advantage section”. With this configuration, even in the “normal section” where there is no expectation of winning the AT lottery, by selecting a staying stage that can be a staying stage in the “advantageous section”, the “normal section” is not tired. The gaming machine can proceed. In addition, when transitioning from the “high-probability state” to the “low-probability state”, that is, when changing from the “advantageous section” to the “normal section”, the “normal section” is selected in the “advantageous section” stage. By selecting the effect stage, it is difficult for the player to determine that the transition from the “advantageous section” to the “normal section” is made, and the game can be continued with a sense of expectation.

  In addition, a part of the production stage selected in the “normal section” overlaps with the production stage selected in the “advantage section” (the production stage that can be selected in the “normal section” but is not selected in the “advantage section”). May be included).

  Also, the stay stage determination table used when the number of highly secured obstacle games is four or more and the stay stage determination table used when the number of highly secured obstacle games is three or less are different. If the number of games is reduced (less than 3 games), do not shift to a staying stage with a higher expectation, which is an “advantageous section” than the current staying stage (for example, desert stage → meeting room stage). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged from becoming a “normal section” with a small number of games despite shifting to the stay stage having a higher degree of expectation. Note that the staying stages are in the order of “desert stage, town stage, cave stage, and conference room stage” from those with low expectations of “advantageous sections” (hard to select in “advantageous sections”).

  Note that the configuration of the stay stage is not limited to that of the present example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage is that the expected degree of the “advantageous section”, the expected degree that has been won in the AT lottery, and the BB have been won. It may be configured to indicate a certain degree of expectation. As an example, it is configured that the stay stage can be shifted in a game that has won the BB role or the rare role (when the AT lottery is won by the BB role and when the AT rare lot is won by the single rare role) ), And the expected degree of winning in the AT lottery is different depending on the staying stage that has been shifted, and the order is “desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage” in order of decreasing degree of expectation. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the degree of expectation elected to the role of BB differs depending on the staying stage that has been shifted, and configured in the order of “desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage” in ascending order of expectation. Good (for example, when the process proceeds to the conference room stage, it is determined that the BB internal election or the AT lottery has been elected).

  Next, FIG. 45 is a subroutine showing an AT effect rendering determination process called and executed in the process of step 3100 in FIG. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of remaining AT games is three or less. If Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game is the AT final game. In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S continues the AT-related effect (success) in the effect relating to the game (AT is continued, and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60. Then, an effect that informs that the state relating to the AT of the next game becomes “the state during AT” or an AT continuation effect (failure) (determine that the AT continues and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60). It is determined that the state relating to the AT of the next game is an “in-AT state” or a “state for resurrection performance effect”), and the flow shifts to step 3126. Here, when the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous fueling effect (success) to the AT continuous fueling effect (failure) is determined at a ratio of 4: 1. In other words, in the present embodiment, even when the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, it corresponds to the first game of the next set. In the next game, the resurrection effect (success) is executed, and the player feels as if he / she has won the resurrection lottery (actually, the player has won the continuous lottery and the main control board M The control on the side is the same as when the AT continuation effect (success) is executed). With such a configuration, it is rare to win the resurrection lottery in the “state of resurrection feasibility effect”, but {wins the lottery of 2320/65536 (in the case of setting 1) in one game} and wins the continuous production By configuring so that the resurrection effect (success) can be executed even when the resurrection effect is executed, the rate at which the resurrection effect (success) is executed when the resurrection effect is executed can be increased, and the player expects the resurrection effect. Feeling can be enhanced.

  Also, in the case of No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect relating to the game to be the AT continuation effect (failure), and proceeds to step 3126. Also, in the case of No in step 3104, in step 3112, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an AT late effect, and proceeds to step 3126. Further, in the case of No in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the next game is the one in which the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) has been executed. In the case of Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the effect related to the game in a resurrection effect (success) (similar to the resurrection effect (success) performed in the “resurrection availability effect state”). In the present process, it is determined that the “state during AT” has been continued), and the flow proceeds to step 3126. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3114, the processing shifts to step 3126.

  Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds an effect related to the game (an effect to notify that the number of remaining AT games has been added, for example, “+50 GET” or the like). ), And proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect during AT (an effect executed during AT such as an “AT state”), and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine showing a resurrection feasibility effect determination process called and executed in the process of step 3150 in FIG. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the resurrection lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S revives the effect related to the game (success) (this is an effect mode similar to the effect performed in step 3116 described above; This is an effect of notifying that the player has won the resurrection lottery in the “resurrection availability state”. The state shifts to the “AT state” in the next game, and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60.) After the determination, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 3152, at Step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not win the resurrection lottery in the resurrection effect (failure) in the effect relating to the game (“resurrection feasibility effect state”). This is an effect that informs the user that the game is going to go to the “low-probability state” in the next game.)

  As described above, the “state of resurrection availability” is also an advantageous section, that is, a continuous lottery is won in the AT final game (the last game in the “AT state”) which is the “advantageous section”. Even if there is no, the "advantageous section" is configured to be extended even in the next game "revival state", so the player checks whether or not the advantageous section indicator YH is lit. It is difficult to determine whether the resurrection effect is successful only by doing so, and the result of the resurrection effect will be noted. Also, as described above, the “lot during AT” state and the “state for resurrection effect” differ in the manner of executing the lottery regarding the AT. In other words, the execution mode of the lottery regarding the AT differs between the next game that has won the continuous lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed and the game that has won the resurrection lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed. .

In the present embodiment, in the next game after the AT-in-progress state has been completed, the game is shifted to the “resurrection feasibility effect state” of one game, and the resurrection lottery is executed in the “resurrection feasibility effect state”. By doing so, both the execution game of the resurrection effect (success) and the execution game of the resurrection effect (failure) are set as “advantageous sections”, that is, by configuring so that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. Although it has been prevented that it is possible to determine whether or not the AT is completed without checking the result, such a configuration may be configured as follows.
(1) In one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, the state relating to the AT is set to the “AT state”. Turning off the flag sets a different lottery mode for the AT.
(2) It is configured not to execute the resurrection lottery, and the control of the main control board M is configured to determine whether or not the “AT-in-progress state” ends based on whether or not the continuous lottery is won, and The execution timing of the continuous lottery is set to a game before the AT final game (one game before the AT final game, the first game in the set being executed, and the like). With such a configuration, a resurrection effect (success) and a resurrection effect (failure) can be executed as effects on the sub control board S side in the AT final game. Examples of the effects include “a game before the AT final game: AT continuation production (success) → AT final game: a production to start the next set of AT”, “a game before the AT final game: AT continuation production”. Direction (continued to the next game) → AT final game: AT continuous fanning effect (success) ”,“ Previous game before AT final game: AT continuous fanning effect (failure) → AT final game: Resurrection effect (successful) ”,“ AT A game prior to the final game: AT continuous fanning effect (failure) → AT final game: resurrection effect (failure) ”may be executed. That is, the main control board M determines whether or not the “AT state” is continued (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won. It may be configured to execute an AT continuation effect and a resurrection effect.
(3) In the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed, an effect is executed in the same manner as the resurrection effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and the resurrection effect (success) is obtained from the predetermined timing. , That is, to inform the player at the predetermined timing that the AT will be continued. In the case of such a configuration, as the predetermined timing,
(1) A bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to a game in which a resurrection effect (success) is executed, which can be executed when a continuous lottery is won.
(2) This is the start lever operation timing according to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed. When the start lever operation timing is reached, the effect having the same effect as the resurrection effect (defeat) is not executed.
(3) A timing at which a stop button serving as a first stop according to a game in which a resurrection effect (success) is executed (a timing at which a first stop is turned on);
(4) Timing of releasing the stop button after pressing the stop button that becomes the first stop according to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (the timing of the first stop on → off);
(5) A timing at which a stop button serving as a second stop according to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (a timing at which the second stop is turned on);
(6) Timing of releasing the stop button after pressing the stop button which is the second stop related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (timing when the second stop is turned on → off),
(7) The timing at which the stop button for the third stop related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed is pressed (the timing when the third stop is turned on),
(8) Timing of releasing the stop button after depressing the stop button which is the third stop related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (timing when the third stop is turned on → off),
And so on,
(9) Bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the game following the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed;
(10) Start lever operation timing relating to the game following the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed;
And so on. Further, in the case where it is configured to determine which of the various timings such as the above (1) to (10) by lottery, after the timing when the stop button for the first stop is pressed. Since the advantageous section indicator YH is continuously lit even when neither the continuous lottery nor the resurrection lottery is won, the player presses the stop button for the third stop, and then presses the stop button. Can be played with a sense of expectation that the AT will continue until the timing when the player releases the button or until the start lever operation timing relating to the game following the game in which the resurrection effect is executed.

<Start lever operation processing>
Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing a process at the time of start lever operation called and executed in the process of step 2300 in FIG.

  Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state regarding the AT is the AT-in-progress state. If Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to the AT is the AT-in-progress state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes a start lever-operating AT-in-time process described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2302, in other words, when the state related to the AT is not the AT in-progress state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is the special precursor state. Is determined. If Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is the special indication state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the start lever specialization processing when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not the “specialization precursor state”, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the state related to the AT to the “additional specialization state”. Is determined. If Yes in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to the AT is “additional specialization state”, in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs additional addition specialization processing at the time of start lever operation described later. The process is read and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not the “additional specialization state”, in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the state related to the AT to “the inside of the advantageous BB. It is determined whether or not it is "game". If Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is “advantageous BB inside middle game”, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs a start lever operation middle BB inside middle processing subroutine. Is called and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  If No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is not “advantageous BB inside game”, in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the RT state is “RT1”. Is determined. If Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is “RT1”, in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the AT-related state to no push order navigation (push order navigation It is determined whether or not the state is related to an AT that does not occur, such as “low probability state”, “normal BB inside game”, “normal BB state”, and the like. If Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state related to the AT is no push order navigation, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. As described above, the reverse control instruction command, the reverse push avoidance command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoidance command are received by the sub-control board S side, so that it is not a configuration capable of executing the push order navigation effect. When the main control board M sends the AT addition lottery and the command relating to the number of AT addition games is sent to the sub control board S when the AT addition lottery is won, and the sub control board S receives the command. Alternatively, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to the push order navigation.

  If Yes in step 2312, in other words, if the avoidance command has been received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image whose avoidance is to be established as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode group. Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of games elapses from the state of “RT1” and the “at-AT state” and the AT counter value becomes 0, the state transits to “RT1” and the “low-probability state”. In this case (before the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed), if the player has won the replay of seven reverse push whites or the seven replays of forward push blacks, the additional number of AT games does not occur. It is configured so that the pushing order that is not in a straight line is navigated. When the number of games elapses from the state of “RT1” and the “at-AT state” and the AT counter value becomes 0 and the state shifts to “RT1” and the “low-probability state”, the state is still “advantage section”. In the game in which the pushing order bell is won, the pushing order navigation can be generated, but the game in which the pushing order replaying game is won may be configured so that the pushing order navigation does not occur.

  If No in Step 2308, No in Step 2310, or No in Step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an effect image and a background image based on the state related to the AT in Step 2316. (Step 2110).

<Process during AT during start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing a process during AT during start lever operation called and executed in the process of step 2350 in FIG. 47.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the information on the condition device related to the game in Step 2352, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in Step 2354, and indicates the instruction number in Step 2356. Check the command related to. As described above, in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, such as the “during the AT state”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, If the staging group number is transmitted in a state related to the AT where the pushing order navigation is not executed such as the “probability state” (the game section is also a “normal section”), it is not necessary to transmit the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and transmits the effect group number and the instruction number to the effect group number. Based on such a command, the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell (or the pressing order replay) has been won and the correct pressing order can be grasped. For example, the push order navigation display at the time of executing the push order bell and the push order navigation display of the push order replay are the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by a number, and the display colors related to the numbers are the same). ) Is applicable. Further, in the case of such a configuration, at the time of executing the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the push order navigation display is displayed, and the push order bell is displayed. A different effect image may be displayed between the execution of the push order navigation and the execution of the push order navigation related to the push order replay.

  Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the pushing order bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  If Yes in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order navigation Are displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button corresponds to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case of winning the prize-A1 which is a pressing order bell, a number indicating a pressing order corresponding to the pressing order "left → middle → right" which can obtain the maximum payout number is circled. Display in display mode.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the pushing order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is Is determined. Here, the push order replay is one of replays-D1 to D3.

  If Yes in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order replay game as the push order navi display. An image indicating the correct pressing order of the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the pressing order is three choices, the pressing order is information for associating the first stop button with one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the numeral 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

  If No in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as avoidance commands. If Yes in step 2366, in other words, if the avoidance command has been received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to be avoided in the first numerical display mode as the push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described processing of step 2360, 2364, or 2368, and then displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2370.

  Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of remaining AT games is three or less. If Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is three or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the number of remaining AT games in display mode B (display mode described later). (A display mode that is less conspicuous than A).

  Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a forward push instruction command has been received. If Yes in step 2376, in other words, if the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to be avoided as the push order navigation display in the first order. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the number display mode group.

  If No in step 2376, or if the process in step 2378 has been executed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a reverse push instruction command has been received. In step 2380, in the case of Yes, in other words, in the case where the reverse push command has been received, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image to be avoided as the push order navigation display in the first order. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the number display mode group.

  If No in Step 2380 or if the process of Step 2382 is performed, the CPUSC of the sub control board S proceeds to the next process (Process of Step 2110).

  If No in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is four or more, in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the number of remaining AT games in the display mode A (the display mode described above). (Display mode more prominent than B) on the effect display device S40. Here, when there are four or more games, the display is in display mode A, and when there are three or less games, the display is in display mode B.

  Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a forward push instruction command has been received. In step 2386, if Yes, in other words, if the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2388, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S responds to “left → center → right” as the push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order to be performed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  If No in step 2386, or if the process in step 2388 is executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse pressing instruction command has been received. In step 2390, if Yes, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2392, the CPUSC of the sub control board S responds to “right → middle → left” as a push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order to be performed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  If No in Step 2390 or if the processing in Step 2392 has been performed in Step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub control board S proceeds to the next processing (Processing in Step 2110). As described above, when the number of remaining AT games is small, in other words, when the display of the number of remaining AT games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode that is more prominent than the display mode A, the forward push instruction command or the reverse Even if the push instruction command is received, the effect of displaying "Aim for 7!" Together with the image of the arrow is not executed, and the middle reel in the pushing order in which the white seven and the black seven are not stopped and displayed on the invalid line is the first stop reel. It was configured to execute the push order navigation. With this configuration, in a situation where the number of remaining AT games is small, the number of remaining AT games is displayed in display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player to know that the number of remaining AT games is small. Can be configured so that the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B is not hindered by the image of the arrow or the display of “Aim at 7!”. Similarly, in a situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small, a continuous effect (eg, an AT-related state) (a state relating to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed) continues to be performed to stimulate whether or not to continue. , Battle effect), the image of the arrow and "Aim for 7!" Are not displayed during the execution of the battle effect, so that the visibility of the battle effect is not hindered. be able to. Further, with this configuration, even when the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 becomes 0, and a message is displayed indicating that the battle effect has been defeated and the “at-AT state” is to be ended, the battle effect is being displayed. If the forward push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command has been received, the forward push instruction command or the reverse push is performed at the operation timing or the like of the bet button D220 after the display indicating that the “AT state” is finished. The number of AT-added games based on the instruction command (based on the winning of the forward push black 7 replay or the reverse push white 7 replay) is reported, that is, the fact that the number of AT games has been added in the game that has won the AT-addition lottery is reported. Instead, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a subsequent timing, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

<Special precursor processing at start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing the start lever operation special precursor sign process called and executed in the process of step 2400 in FIG. 47.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game in step 2402, confirms winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2404, and indicates the instruction number in step 2406. Check the command related to. As described above, in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, such as the “during the AT state”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, If the staging group number is transmitted in a state related to the AT where the pushing order navigation is not executed such as the “probability state” (the game section is also a “normal section”), it is not necessary to transmit the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and transmits the effect group number and the instruction number to the effect group number. Based on such a command, the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell (or the pressing order replay) has been won and the correct pressing order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the pushing order bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  If Yes in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as the push order navigation display in step 2410. Are displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second number display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button corresponds to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case where the winning order-winning-A2, which is the pushing order bell, is won, the number indicating the pushing order corresponding to the pushing order “left → right → middle” that can obtain the maximum payout number is surrounded by an asterisk. Display in display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numerical values indicating the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group may include a number. May be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the pushing order bell, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2412 that the condition device of the game is the pushing order replaying game. Is determined. Here, the push order replay is one of replays-D1 to D3.

  If Yes in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order replay game as the push order navi display. An image indicating the correct pressing order of the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second number display mode group. Here, since the pressing order is three choices, the pressing order is information for associating the first stop button with one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the pressing order of the correct answer, a numeral “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number “1” is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the lower right of the center of the effect display device S40 is displayed. The numeral "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the pressing order information is displayed at a position near the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. Judge. If Yes in step 2416, in other words, if a forward push instruction command is received, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to “left → center → right” as the push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in Step 2416, in other words, in the case where the forward push instruction command has not been received, in Step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. to decide. If Yes in step 2420, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as a push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, in the case where the reverse push command has not been received, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as avoidance commands. If Yes in step 2424, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to be avoided in the second numerical display mode as the push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has executed the processing of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, 2426, or in the case of No at step 2424, at step 2428, the CPU displays a background image during AT. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step S2430, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Additional processing for start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 50 is a subroutine showing an additional specialization process at the time of start lever operation which is called and executed in the process of step 2450 of FIG. 47.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game in Step 2452, confirms winning / replay winning information related to the game in Step 2454, and determines the instruction number in Step 2456. Check the command related to. As described above, in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, such as the “during the AT state”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, If the staging group number is transmitted in a state related to the AT where the pushing order navigation is not executed such as the “probability state” (the game section is also a “normal section”), it is not necessary to transmit the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and transmits the effect group number and the instruction number to the effect group number. Based on such a command, the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell (or the pressing order replay) has been won and the correct pressing order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the pushing order bell or the common bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

  If Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. In the first numerical display mode group, an image indicating the correct pressing order of the 6 selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button corresponds to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case of winning the prize-A4, which is a pressing order bell, a number indicating a pressing order corresponding to the pressing order “right → left → middle” in which the maximum payout number can be obtained is surrounded by an asterisk. Is displayed in the display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numerical values indicating the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group may include a number. May be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither the pushing order bell nor the common bell, in step 2462 the CPUSC of the sub control board S The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is one of replays-D1 to D3.

  If Yes in step 2462, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order replay game as the push order navi display. An image indicating the correct pressing order of the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since the pressing order is three selections, the first stop button is information corresponding to one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the pressing order of the correct answer, a numeral “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number “1” is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the lower right of the center of the effect display device S40 is displayed. The numeral "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, information on the pressing order is displayed at a position near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives the forward push instruction command It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, in the case where the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to “left → center → right” as the push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the pressing order is a forward pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43, respectively. The direction of the push can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing toward.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, in the case where the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the reverse push instruction command has been received. Is determined. If Yes in step 2470, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2472, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as a push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the pressing order is the reverse pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are a right stop button D43, a middle stop button D42, and a left stop button D41, respectively, in order from right to left. The direction of the push can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing toward.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, in the case where the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. If Yes in step 2474, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image whose avoidance is to be avoided in the first numerical display mode as the push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group. Here, the avoidance command generically refers to both the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether the forward push avoidance command is received or the reverse push avoidance command is received. For example, when the forward push avoidance command is received, a numeral “1” is displayed on the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40 to avoid the forward push “left → middle → right”, Information as if the one-stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

  Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has executed the processing of the above-described steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, 2476, or in the case of No in 2474, in step 2480, the effect of displaying the background image during AT is displayed. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step 2482, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Advantageous BB internal processing during start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 51 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation advantageous BB inside middle process called and executed in the process of step 2700 of FIG. 47.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game in Step 2702, confirms winning / replay winning information related to the game in Step 2704, and indicates the instruction number in Step 2706. Check the command related to. As described above, in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, such as the “during the AT state”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, If the staging group number is transmitted in a state related to the AT where the pushing order navigation is not executed such as the “probability state” (the game section is also a “normal section”), it is not necessary to transmit the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and transmits the effect group number and the instruction number to the effect group number. Based on such a command, the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell (or the pressing order replay) has been won and the correct pressing order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (five games) has elapsed since the shift to the advantage BB inside middle game. If Yes in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (five games) has not elapsed since the shift to the advantageous BB internal middle game, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub control board S The condition device of (1) determines whether or not it is a pushing order bell or a common bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

  If Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. In the first numerical display mode group, an image indicating the correct pressing order of the 6 selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button corresponds to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case of winning the prize-A4, which is a pressing order bell, a number indicating a pressing order corresponding to the pressing order “right → left → middle” in which the maximum payout number can be obtained is surrounded by an asterisk. Is displayed in the display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numerical values indicating the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group may include a number. May be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither the pushing order bell nor the common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub control board S The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is one of replays-D1 to D3.

  If Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order replay game as the push order navi display. An image indicating the correct pressing order of the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since the pressing order is three selections, the first stop button is information corresponding to one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the pressing order of the correct answer, a numeral “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number “1” is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the lower right of the center of the effect display device S40 is displayed. The numeral "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, information on the pressing order is displayed at a position near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the command related to 7 replays It is determined whether or not. Here, the forward push instruction command, the reverse push instruction command, the forward push avoidance command, and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as 7 replay commands. If Yes in step 2718, in other words, if a command related to 7 replays is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image whose avoidance is to be performed as the first number in the push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode group.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of the above-described steps 2712, 2716, 2720, or in the case of No in step 2718, in step 2722, displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2722. Then, in step S2724, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on display device S40 in display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

  In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (five games) has elapsed since the shift to the advantageous BB inside middle game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the effect display device S40. Then, the fact that the BB has been won is notified (in this process, the pressing order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of receiving the first torso stop>
Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine showing a first-body-stop-acceptance-time process called and executed in the process of step 2500 in FIG. 41.

  Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2502, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a stop button operation based on the correct push order as the first stop. It is determined whether or not.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S The display related to the first stop is deleted, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the order of pressing the correct answer as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S It is determined whether or not the pressing order navigation related to the pressing navigation is being displayed. Here, the 7 replays are a general term for a replay of seven forward-pressed blacks and a replay of seven reverse-pressed whites. If Yes in step 2508, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub control board S darkly displays the push order navigation (continuously darkly displayed in the game), and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2110). Migrate.

  In the case of No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub control board S deletes all the push order navigation displays, and the push order fails. The effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Process at the time of accepting the second torso stop>
Next, FIG. 53 is a subroutine showing a second trunk stop acceptance process which is called and executed in the process of step 2550 in FIG. 41.

  Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the pressing order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop. It is determined whether or not there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S 2 The display related to the stop is deleted, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S Erase, a push order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is not being displayed, or in the case of No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, immediately Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<3rd torso stop effect-related decision processing>
Next, FIG. 54 is a subroutine showing the third trunk stoppage effect-related determination process called and executed in the process of step 3200 in FIG. 41.

  Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the BB combination has won. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in other words, when the BB combination is won, in step 3204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S has won during the non-AT ("low probability state" or "high probability state") It is determined whether or not it is a BB combination. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in other words, in the case of the winning BB combination during the non-AT, in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the non-AT BB start effect determination table to determine the AT of the game. Based on the status and the BB combination, the BB start effect (the effect executed when the BB combination is won) is determined and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  Next, in the case of No at step 3204, in other words, the BB role which has been won during the AT ("AT state", "additional specialization state", "specialization preparation state", or "state for resurrection performance") If there is, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the BB start effect determination table during AT, determines and executes the BB start effect based on the state of the AT regarding the game and the BB combination, and executes The processing shifts to processing (processing of step 2600).

  Next, in the case of No in step 3202, in other words, if the BB combination does not win, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines and executes an effect based on the effect performed in the game, The process moves to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  The non-AT during BB start effect determination table shown in the lower left of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of the BB in the non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for defining the relationship between the type of the BB combination, the state related to the AT, the type of the BB start effect, and the probability (allocation). There are two types of BB combination, BB with setting difference (one type BB-B) and BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C). There are two types of states relating to the AT: “Normal BB inside game” and “Advantageous BB inside game”. There are three types of BB start effects: a normal effect, a high expectation effect, and a premium effect. It should be noted that the degree of expectation of shifting to the “AT state” after the end of the BB is configured to be different depending on the type of the BB start effect in the BB that has been won during the non-AT, and from the low expectation to the “normal effect” → High-expected production → Premier production ”.

  When the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one kind of BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is a normal BB inside game, the probability that the BB start effect is a normal effect is 179/256. . When the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type of BB-B) and the state of the game related to the AT is “normal BB internal middle game”, the probability that the BB start effect becomes a high expectation effect is 77. / 256. When the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type of BB-B) and the state of the game related to the AT is “normal BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a premium effect is 0/256. It is.

  When the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type of BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a normal effect is 179/256. It is. If the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type of BB-B) and the state of the game related to the AT is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a high expectation effect is 77. / 256. When the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type of BB-B) and the state of the game related to the AT is “advantageous BB inside middle game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a premium effect is 0/256. It is.

  When the BB combination is BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C) and the state of the game related to AT is “normal BB inside middle game”, the BB start effect becomes a normal effect. The probability is 179/256. When the BB combination is a BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a high expectation effect Is 77/256. If the BB combination is BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C) and the state of AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a premium effect. The probability is 0/256.

  When the BB combination is BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a normal effect. The probability is 67/256. When the BB combination is a BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a high expectation effect Is 157/256. When the BB combination is BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a premium effect. The probability is 32/256.

  When it is a “normal section”, even if a BB without a setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C) is won or a BB with a setting difference (one type BB-B) is won, a premium effect Is not selected, and it is determined that the possibility of selecting the normal effect is higher than that of the high expectation effect.

  Even if it is an advantageous section, if a BB (one type BB-B) with a setting difference is won, a premium effect is not selected and a normal effect may be selected rather than a high expectation effect. It is set to be high.

  In the case of the “advantageous section”, when a BB without a setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C) is won, there is a possibility that a premium effect is selected. With this configuration, when the premiere effect is selected, the BB without the setting difference is won, and the transition to the “AT state” is completed after the BB without the setting difference ends. Can be shown to the player. In the case of the “advantageous section” and the BB without the setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C) is won, the possibility that the high expectation effect is selected more than the normal effect is increased. (It is unlikely that a normal effect will be selected.) By doing so, the player can guess whether or not the AT will be started after the end of the BB by confirming the BB start effect, and can have a sense of expectation for winning the AT. In addition, the distribution of the BB start effect related to the BB (one type BB-B) having a setting difference won in the “normal BB internal middle game” and the setting difference BB (winning in the “normal BB internal middle game”) The distribution of the BB start effect according to one type BB-A and one type BB-C) is the same distribution. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and there is a setting difference that has been won in “Normal BB inside game” and the distribution of the BB start effect related to BB (1 type BB-B) and “Normal BB inside game” The distribution of the BB start effect related to the winning BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C) may be made different from each other. The distribution can be configured to differ depending on whether the effect is an effect or a BB start effect for a BB with no setting difference.

  The BB start effect determination table during AT shown in the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining an effect at the start of BB during AT. The BB start effect determination table during AT is also a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (allocation). There are two types of BB combination, BB with setting difference (one type BB-B) and BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C). The state relating to the AT is one type of “advantageous BB inside middle game”. The BB start effect is of two types, an effect that can be added and an effect that cannot be added. The addition possible effect is an effect indicating that the AT addition lottery can be executed during the execution of the BB, and the addition impossible effect is an effect indicating that the AT addition lottery is not executed during the execution of the BB. The BB won during the AT does not have an element of whether or not to win the AT lottery, and depending on the type of the BB, whether or not the AT addition lottery is executed may be different. In addition, during the AT, even if there is a setting difference in which the AT addition lottery is not executed in the BB, the BB to be executed can be added to the AT addition lottery due to the fact that a game medal can be obtained and the AT becomes advantageous to the player after the end of the BB. Is configured to clearly notify whether or not is executed. Hereinafter, specific examples will be described in detail.

  If the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type BB-B) and the state of the game related to the AT is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is an additional effect is 0 / It is 256, and an additional possible effect is not executed. If the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type BB-B) and the state of the game regarding the AT is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is an additional effect and the effect is 256 / 256, and an effect that cannot be added is always executed. When the BB combination is BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the game related to the AT is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect can be added. Is 256/256, and an effect that can be added is always executed. If the BB combination is BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is “advantageous BB internal middle game”, the BB start effect cannot be added. The probability is 0/256, and no extra performance is performed.

<Process at the time of accepting the 3rd body stop>
Next, FIG. 55 is a subroutine showing a third torso stop acceptance process executed by being called and executed in the process of step 2600 in FIG. 41.

  Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2602, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. It is determined whether or not there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces an effect as a pressing order successful effect. “GET!” Is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, if No in step 2606, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines “GET Is not displayed.

  If No in step 2602 described above, in other words, if the push order navigation is not being displayed, if No in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, or step 2608 or 2610 Is executed, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT-added games (the command set in step 1517) has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S calculates the difference from the previously received command indicating the number of remaining AT games. It may be configured to determine whether the number of AT-added games has been executed and determine the number of AT-added games, and display the number of AT-added games.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, in the case where a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the effect display device S40 to display the AT additional game. The number is displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). On the other hand, if No in step 2612, in other words, if a command related to the number of AT games has not been received from the main side, in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds AT to the effect display device S40. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110) without displaying the number of games. In addition, as a method of informing the number of AT added games, (1) notifying all of the number of added games by the game, (2) notifying a part of the number of added games by the game, and the remaining number of games after the game (3) The number of added games is not notified in the game, and the game after the game (for example, at the time of winning 7 replays, at the time of winning a common bell (at the time of winning a role that is not originally added), or at a plurality of times. After executing the game (continuous effect), or the game in which the remaining game number of the effect display device S40 is "0", or the bet button D220 operation of the game next to the game in which the game number is "0", the operation of the start lever D50 ).

  Note that when the common bell is won in the "additional specialization state", the display regarding the number of AT-added games is not displayed even if the game is stopped according to the push order navigation (the AT-added lottery is performed with the common bell. Absent).

  With the above-described configuration, according to the turning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the gaming machine configured such that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on in the “advantageous section”, the period that is advantageous for the player Can be appropriately notified. In addition, by providing the “state for resurrection effect production”, when the continuous production is won and the resurrection production (success) is subsequently executed, the state related to the AT of the game in which the resurrection production (success) is executed is The advantageous section indicator YH is lit because it is in the "AT state". On the other hand, even when the continuous effect is not won and the resurrection effect (failure) is subsequently executed, the resurrection effect (failure) is executed. By setting the state relating to the AT of the game to be performed to the “state of resurrection availability effect” and the state relating to the AT to the “advantageous section”, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. With this configuration, by visually recognizing the advantageous section indicator YH in the game in which the resurrection effect is executed, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the resurrection effect is successful or unsuccessful. In a gaming machine configured to be able to appropriately notify a period that is advantageous to the gaming machine, a gaming machine with high interest can be secured.

  In this example, when the player wins the BB role in the “high probability state”, the player is configured to be able to win the AT lottery, and is configured to be able to shift to the “AT in progress state” after the end of the BB. The configuration related to the present example is not limited to the example. For example, the player is configured to be able to win the AT lottery by a rare role such as cherry (can be won even if it is not the BB role), and to win the AT lottery. The state relating to the AT may be shifted to the “AT precursor state”, and by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the “AT precursor state”, the transition to the “AT during state” may be made.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 7100 in FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu screen is not displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the menu screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG by pressing the sub input button SB or the like, and the player selects from a plurality of items to check various settings and information on the gaming machine. It is a screen that can be. As an example of a method of selecting and determining an item, a cross key SB2 (having four buttons of an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button) is operated to move a cursor to a desired item, and By operating the sub input button SB, the currently selected (cursored) item is determined, and a screen corresponding to the item is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that both the screen for selecting an item and the screen corresponding to the item displayed after determining the selected item are menu screens. The menu screen may have a plurality of display modes, for example, the items that can be selected on the menu screen may be different depending on the game state, or the design of the background image may be different. Even if there is a difference, the menu screen is all referred to.

<Items that can be selected on the menu screen>
Examples of items that can be selected on the menu screen are listed below.
(1) Volume adjustment: The volume output from the gaming machine may be configured so that the player can adjust the volume. For example, after displaying a screen corresponding to the volume adjustment, the output is performed by operating the right button of the cross key SB2. The volume may be increased, and the output volume may be decreased by operating the left button of the cross key SB2.
(2) Light amount adjustment: The light amount (brightness) of various lamps controlled by the sub-control board S such as the LED lamp S10 (stop button lamp S60, bet button lamp S50) may be configured so that the player can adjust the light amount. For example, after the screen corresponding to the light amount adjustment is displayed, the light amount (brightness) is increased (brightened) by operating the up button of the cross key SB2, and the light amount (brightness) is weakened by operating the down button of the cross key SB2. (Dark).
(3) Character customization: Characters appearing during the game (such as the main character, the voice of the push order navigation, the battle character, and the character that supports the game progress that is always displayed on the staging display device S40) can be selected and changed. After displaying the screen corresponding to the character customization, the cursor may be moved to the character to be selected with the cross key SB2, and the sub input button SB may be operated.
(4) Reel arrangement table: Reel arrangement may be displayed on a screen corresponding to the reel arrangement table.
(5) Payout Table: A payout table (a list of symbol combinations that constitute replays or winning combinations by being stopped and displayed) may be displayed on a screen corresponding to the payout table. When the payout table is divided and displayed on a plurality of screens, for example, the screen of the payout table may be switched using the left button and the right button of the cross key SB2.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7102, in step 7104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the menu screen can be displayed. Here, the menu screen displayable state means that the menu screen is displayed when an operation capable of displaying the menu screen (may be configured to be displayed over time) such as an operation of the sub input button SB is performed. The state may be as follows, and a specific example may be configured as follows.
(1) Game end timing (when the third stop button is turned on → off, display determination timing, payout completion timing based on winning, and a command related to game end is set or transmitted to the sub-control board S side as game end processing) The game does not proceed from the timing, the timing at which the sub-control board S side receives a command relating to the end of the game, and the like (there is no new bet operation, no automatic bet operation based on the new game stop display, a new start). If a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed with no operation of the lever, no new rotation of the reel, etc., the menu screen displayable state may be set (until the sub input button SB is operated until then). Menu screen is not displayed.) The bet operation includes both a case where a bet is made by operating the bet button D220 and a case where a game medal is inserted into the medal slot D170 and a bet is made (the automatic bet based on the re-game stop display). May be included in the betting operation).
(2-1) The menu screen may not be displayed during execution of a game (betting of a game medal, during a wait period until the start of reel rotation, and during reel rotation).
(2-2) A menu screen may be displayed during execution of a game (eg, a game medal is bet).
(3) During the execution of a predetermined effect (during the execution of the effect to notify whether or not the bonus has been won, during the continuous effect to be executed over a plurality of games, during the execution of the effect, the effect to notify whether or not the lottery has been selected by adding the number of AT games) , Etc.) may be configured so that the menu screen display is not enabled.
(4) A configuration may be made so that the menu screen display is not enabled while the replay is stopped.
In order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the menu screen can be displayed, when the menu screen can be displayed, the sub input button SB (an LED provided inside the sub input button SB) is set. You may comprise so that it may blink.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7104, in step 7106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the sub input button SB has been operated. In this example, the operation of displaying the menu screen is the operation of the sub input button SB. However, the operation of displaying the menu screen may be changed, or a plurality of operations of displaying the menu screen may be configured. . If Yes in step 7106, in step 7108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a menu screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7109, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer (timer for measuring the time required to shift from the game end timing to the standby screen described later) and clears the timer value to zero. Next, in step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the waiting timer counting flag (the flag that is turned on when the waiting timer is counting). Next, in step 7111, the CPUSC of the sub control board S measures the menu standby timer (timer for transitioning from the menu screen to a standby screen described later). Is set) to a predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example, which is longer than a predetermined time A described later), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the menu waiting timer counting flag (the flag that is turned on when the menu waiting timer is counting), and performs the next process (the process of step 7200). Move to

In step 7114, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether the menu screen end condition is satisfied. The menu screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the menu screen, in other words, a condition for switching the screen (image) displayed on the effect display device S40 from the menu screen to another screen (image). May be configured as follows.
(1) It may be configured to be satisfied when a bet operation is newly performed, a start lever is newly operated, and a reel rotation is newly started.
(2) In a situation where the menu screen is continuously displayed, the configuration may be such that the condition is satisfied when a predetermined time (300 seconds, which is the predetermined time B, in this example) has elapsed from the start of the menu screen display.
(3) It may be configured such that a predetermined item on the menu screen is selected and determined, and a predetermined operation is performed on a screen corresponding to the predetermined item to be satisfied. By operating the sub input button SB, a screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is displayed. After operating the cross key SB2 to adjust to a desired volume, operating the sub input button SB again to select The volume is set to a medium size, the display of the menu screen ends, and a screen before the menu screen is displayed (sometimes referred to as a normal screen) is displayed.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7114, in step 7116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image displayed on the effect display device S40 before the menu screen is displayed. As an example, when the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB in a situation where the screen where the hero is walking in the forest is displayed, when the display of the menu screen ends, The screen where the hero is walking in the forest will be displayed. Next, in step 7118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 7200).

  If No in step 7114, in step 7122, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 has been operated. If Yes in step 7122, in step 7124, the CPUSC of the sub control board S resets the menu standby timer to the predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example), and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 7200). I do. Note that also in the case of No in step 7104, step 7106, or step 7122, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 7200). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 is operated while the menu screen is displayed, the menu standby timer sets the predetermined time B (300 in this example). ) Is reset, in other words, the measurement of the time until the standby screen is displayed is restarted from the beginning. In this example, two timers, a standby timer and a menu standby timer, are used as timers for displaying the standby screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Only one timer for displaying the standby screen is used. It may be configured to be used. Specifically, only the standby timer is used as a timer for displaying the standby screen, and the predetermined time A (180 seconds) set in the standby timer and the predetermined time B (300 seconds) set in the menu standby timer are set in standby. You may comprise so that it may set to a timer. As a specific example, the third stop button changes from ON to OFF, a predetermined time A (180 seconds) is set in the standby timer, and then, when the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, the sub input button SB is operated. Then, when the menu screen is started to be displayed, the standby timer may be set to a predetermined time B (300 seconds).

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control processing according to the subroutine of step 7200 in FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7202, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether the standby screen is not displayed. Here, the standby screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined time (the game has not progressed). A moving image related to a story is repeatedly played back, a display of "power saving" is displayed, or a logo mark related to a game machine maker is displayed. Note that, in this example, the operation by the player is required as a condition for displaying the above-described menu screen, while the operation by the player is not required as the condition for displaying the standby screen.

  In the case of Yes in step 7202, in step 7204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when a standby timer described later is counting) is off. I do. If Yes in step 7204, in step 7206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game end timing has been reached. In this process, the timing at which the third stop button is turned from on to off is set as the game end timing. If Yes in step 7206, in step 7208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S measures a standby timer (a timer for measuring a time required to shift to a standby screen from the end of the game, and the initial value is set at the timing when the game ends). Is set to a predetermined time A (180 seconds in this example, which is shorter than the predetermined time B described above), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the waiting timer counting flag, and proceeds to step 7212. In the present embodiment, the condition for executing the processing of step 7208 and step 7210 is that the game end timing has been reached. Accordingly, the condition that the image displayed before the display of the menu screen is displayed (the display of the menu screen is ended) may be used as a condition.

  Next, in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the standby timer has become 0. If Yes in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40 in step 7214, and proceeds to step 7216. Next, in step 7216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7218, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag. Next, in step 7220, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7222, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the waiting timer counting flag, and proceeds to step 7224. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 7206, the processing shifts to step 7224.

  Next, in step 7224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu standby timer counting flag is on. If Yes in step 7224, in step 7226, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the timer value of the menu standby timer has become 0. If Yes in step 7226, in step 7228, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7230, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7232, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag. Next, in step 7234, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7236, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the waiting timer counting flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 7224 or step 7226, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2110).

  If No in step 7204, in other words, if the standby timer timing flag is on, in step 7238, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the standby timer timing end condition is not satisfied. I do. Here, the standby timer timing end condition is a condition for terminating the timing of the standby timer and clearing the timer value of the standby timer to zero, and there is a new bet operation and a new start lever operation. In addition, the start of the reel rotation and the like are the conditions for terminating the counting of the standby timer. If Yes in step 7238, the process moves to step 7212, while if No in step 7238, the process moves to step 7216.

  If No in Step 7202, in Step 7240, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the standby screen end condition is satisfied. Here, the standby screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the standby screen, and in this example, there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, and a new reel rotation. "Started" is the standby screen end condition. Note that the standby screen may be changed to a menu screen (menu screen is displayed). For example, the menu screen may be displayed by operating the sub input button SB while the standby screen is displayed. It may be configured as follows. Next, in step 7242, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image displayed before the display of the standby screen on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). As an example, in a situation where a screen in which the hero is walking in the forest is displayed, if the standby screen is displayed because the A game has not progressed for a predetermined time, the bet operation is performed to execute the bet operation again. Is displayed in the forest.

  Next, FIG. 58 is an image diagram of transition to a standby screen according to the present embodiment. First, in the case of (a), the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB in the menu screen display enabled state. Thereafter, under the condition that the menu screen is displayed, five minutes (the predetermined time B and 300 seconds) elapse without operating the sub input button SB or the bet button D220, and the standby screen is displayed. Next, in the case of (b), the game is executed, the player stops the reels, and all the reels are stopped by performing a stop operation of the third stop button, and the player presses the third stop button. Three minutes (180 seconds, which is the predetermined time A) have elapsed since the release, and the standby screen is displayed because the sub input button SB and the bet button D220 have not been operated during that time. As described above, in this example, a case where a predetermined time B has elapsed since the menu screen was displayed, and a case where the predetermined time A has elapsed since the game was ended (after the third stop button was turned on → off). , The standby screen can be displayed, and the predetermined time B is longer than the predetermined time A.

<< Configuration of menu screen and standby screen applicable to this example >>
Here, a configuration regarding a menu screen and a standby screen applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail below, including the configuration of the present embodiment. It should be noted that the configurations listed below are applicable to all of the above-described embodiments, and that one or a plurality of them are appropriately combined without any problem.

<Timing start timing of standby timer>
The initial value is set in the standby timer that measures the time until the standby screen is displayed, and the timing for starting the time measurement is as follows: (1) The third stop button (the stop corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) Button) is turned on and then turned off, timing is started, (2) timing is started from execution timing of display determination, (3) timing is started from payout completion timing based on winning, (4) game. Timing is started from the timing at which a command related to the game end is set or transmitted to the sub-control board S as the end processing. May be. Alternatively, a predetermined time A (a timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) may be set as an initial value.

<Timing start timing of menu standby timer>
The timing is started from the timing when the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB as the timing for setting the initial value to the menu standby timer for measuring the time until the menu screen is displayed and for starting the timing. May be. Alternatively, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set as an initial value. The predetermined time B set in the menu standby timer is longer than the predetermined time A set in the standby timer described above (a timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds).

<Configuration of sub input button>
In a situation where the menu standby timer is counting, the menu standby timer may be configured so that the initial value can be reset. For example, operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 while the menu screen is displayed Thus, a predetermined time B which is an initial value (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set in the menu standby timer. For example, when the menu screen is started to be displayed, the menu standby timer is set to 300 seconds, and the timer is started. After 100 seconds, the timer value of the menu standby timer is 200 seconds. The operation may be configured so that 300 seconds is reset in the menu standby timer by the operation. In addition, the menu screen can be started to be displayed by operating the sub input button SB, and while the menu screen is being displayed (the screen is started by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after the menu screen is displayed). By operating the cross key SB2 at the transition destination screen where the transition has occurred, the initial value can be reset in the menu standby timer, or during the menu screen display (menu By operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 on the transition destination screen to which the screen has changed by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after the screen display is started) A configuration may be made so that an initial value can be reset in the menu waiting timer.

<Configuration of stop button>
In the situation where the standby timer is counting, as a final stop operation, the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and thereafter, no betting operation is performed. Even if the stop button (the left stop button, the middle stop button, and the right stop button) is operated in the situation, the initial value may not be reset in the standby timer. As an example, as a final stop operation, a third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, 180 seconds is set in the standby timer, and the timer starts counting. After that, in a situation where the bet operation is not executed and the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, the timer value of the standby timer is not reset again even if the stop button is operated, and the timer value is 100 seconds. It may be configured to remain as it is.

<Configuration related to betting operation>
When the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as a final stop operation while the standby timer is counting, and then a bet operation is performed ( When the bet is made by operating the bet button D220 or when a game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 and the bet is placed), the timer of the standby timer is stopped and the timer value is cleared to zero. That is, in a situation where the standby timer is counting, as a final stop operation, the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and thereafter, a bet operation is executed. If no other operation is performed, the standby screen may not be displayed as time elapses. In such a configuration, the standby screen is not displayed due to the lapse of time from the betting operation, but the volume of the sound being output when a specific time (for example, 100 seconds) has lapsed from the betting operation. May be set to 0 or smaller. With such a configuration, the number of remaining game medals is less than a specified number (for example, three) (for example, one), and the remaining one game medal is bet (for example, a bet button is operated). When the game is finished, or when the player finishes the game with no medal remaining in the credits less than the specified number (the bet has not been placed), the bet button is used when the clerk at the game hall cleans the gaming machine. , The sound will not be output at an unintended volume.

<Display condition of standby screen>
The standby screen may be displayed on condition that the timer values of the decrement timer (in this example, the standby timer and the menu standby timer) related to the display of the standby screen have changed from “1 → 0”. With this configuration, the timer value reaches “0” without going through “1”, such as “20 → 0”, when a bet operation is performed or some abnormality occurs in timer measurement. In this case, the standby screen is not displayed even when the timer is cleared to zero, and the display of the unintended standby screen can be prevented (the timer value is reset and then changed from “1 → 0”). In such a case, a standby screen may be displayed. A flag for displaying the standby screen may be provided, and the standby screen may be displayed when the flag is turned on.

<Structure related to checkout button>
In a situation where the standby timer is counting, as a final stop operation, a third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then one or more credits are present. In the situation, when the payment of the credit is executed by operating the payment button, the predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the operation timing of the payment button or the timing at which the payment of the credit is completed (the last game medal is executed). The standby screen may be displayed at the timing of returning to the discharge port D240).

<Configuration of setting key switch>
As a final stop operation, the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned from off to on while the power is on. The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing. Also, as a final stop operation, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the front door is opened while the power is on. A standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the setting key switch is turned on from off to on and the front door is closed thereafter.

<Configuration related to occurrence of predetermined error>
As a final stop operation, a third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and thereafter, a predetermined error relating to the main control board M side (for example, a game medal When a predetermined time A (e.g., 180 seconds) elapses from the timing at which the predetermined error is released, a standby screen may be displayed.

<Configuration of front door>
As a final stop operation, the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, so that the standby timer starts timing, and then the front door is opened, and the open state is opened. May be configured to continue counting the time of the standby timer even when the time is maintained. Also, as a final stop operation, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that has been spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off, so that the standby timer starts timing, and then the front door is opened, Thereafter, even when the front door is closed, the timing of the standby timer may be continued.

<Configuration 1 during AT>
In a non-AT state (for example, the state relating to the AT is a “normal game state”), the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on as a final stop operation and then turned off. When a predetermined time A (e.g., 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing at which the AT has been set, the standby screen can be displayed, while the final stop operation is performed in a situation where the AT is being performed (e.g., the state relating to the AT is "AT in progress"). The standby screen is not displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off. May be. Similarly, even during the execution of the continuous effect, the execution of the bonus, and the ART, the standby screen may not be displayed even if the predetermined time A has elapsed after the end of the final stop operation. Further, in a situation where the AT is being performed (for example, the state relating to the AT is “the AT state”), a third stop button (corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is determined as the final stop operation in the game in which the push order navigation is executed. When a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the stop button (which has been turned on) is turned on after turning on, the standby screen is not displayed, and the AT is being displayed (for example, the status relating to the AT is "AT status"). In this situation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on as a final stop operation in the game in which the push order navigation has not been executed, and a predetermined time has elapsed since the turn off. When A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed, a standby screen may be displayed.

<Configuration 2 during AT>
When a menu screen is displayed by operating a sub input button or the like in a situation where an AT is being performed (for example, the state relating to the AT is an “AT being performed”), (1) a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed. To display a standby screen, and (2) return to the normal screen during AT (the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed) after a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed. You may.

<Configuration 3 during AT>
In a non-AT state (for example, the state relating to the AT is a “normal game state”), the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on as a final stop operation and then turned off. When a predetermined time A (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the timing set in the above, a standby screen can be displayed, and in a situation where a non-AT is being performed (for example, a state relating to the AT is a “normal game state”), A menu screen is displayed, and when a predetermined time B (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the display of the menu screen, a standby screen can be displayed. ), The menu screen is displayed, and if a predetermined time C (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the menu screen display, the normal screen during AT (display before the menu screen is displayed) May be configured to return to that have been screen) it is. That is, when the time values are compared, the configuration may be such that “predetermined time A = predetermined time B <predetermined time C”. Note that the time values of the predetermined time A and the predetermined time B do not have to be the same, and the predetermined time C may be the longest.

<Other Configuration 1>
A menu screen may be displayed by inserting game medals from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is being displayed. Note that the menu screen displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 during the display of the standby screen includes (1) the same screen as the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button; A) a screen displayed by executing a predetermined operation from the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button (selecting and determining a predetermined item); (3) operating the sub input button It may be configured as a screen different from the displayed menu screen. Further, even if a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 while the menu screen is displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal slot D170 during the display of the standby screen, the menu screen continues to be displayed. When a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen displayed by operating the input button is displayed, the screen may return to the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed. In addition, when a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 and a bet is made during the display of the standby screen, a menu screen is displayed. (A normal screen displayed during a game when the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on) may be displayed. When a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is being displayed and a bet is placed, a menu screen is displayed, the standby screen is displayed, and the number of game medals stored in the credit is the specified number. In the above situation, if a bet is made by operating the bet button (for example, a max bet button that allows three bets by one operation), the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed (the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on) Is displayed, the normal screen displayed during the game) is displayed, the standby screen is being displayed, and the number of game medals stored in the credit is less than the specified number of three, and the bet button is displayed. A menu screen may be displayed when a bet is made by operating (for example, a max bet button that allows three bets by one operation).

<Other configuration 2>
It has a plurality of display modes of the standby screen, and satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, by entering a password on the menu screen, it may be set as a predetermined condition that a game is taken over from the previous game history up to the previous time). If not, a moving image for introducing a story is displayed as a standby screen, but if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a moving image for introducing a character may be displayed as a standby screen. . In both cases where the predetermined condition is not satisfied and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the story introduction and the character introduction can be displayed as a standby screen. The frequency of displaying either story introduction or character introduction may be different depending on whether or not it is displayed.

<Other changes>
In the present example, a first BB role in which the first BB is executed by winning a prize, and a second BB role in which the second BB that is less profitable for the player than the first BB is executed by winning the prize. It may be configured such that the first BB combination and the second BB combination can be elected and won (a combination of “1 BB + 2 BB” is provided). With such a configuration, when the “1st BB + 2nd BB” is won, the symbol combination (1st BB role) corresponding to the execution of the high profit 1BB can be stopped and displayed, and after the execution of the 1st BB, The symbol combination (second BB combination) corresponding to 2BB may be stopped and displayed (while the first BB is being executed, the fact that the second BB has been won is carried over). When the first BB + second BB is won, by executing the high profit first BB first, for example, in a situation where the closing time of the game hall is approaching, the first BB + second BB is won. In this case, the low profit second BB is executed first, and the game hall is closed during the execution of the second BB, and the game must be terminated without executing the high profit first BB. Can be prevented.

  After the operation of the first BB is completed, the winning of the second BB may be immediately notified, or may be notified after the concealment (after a predetermined game has elapsed without notifying), and the concealment configuration is adopted. In such a case, it may be configured to increase the probability of winning the re-game in the incubation period after the operation of the first BB is completed. When hiding, an effect indicating the possibility of winning the second BB may be configured to be executed (for example, “BB consecutive villa chance time !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40). . In such a configuration, unless the case where the second BB is not won after the end of the first BB is not provided, it is definite that the effect is generated = the second BB is won, so that only the first BB is won. However, it is preferable that an effect indicating the possibility of winning the second BB is executed even after the operation of the first BB is completed (the effect after the end of the first BB is the same as that described above). For example, "BB consecutive villa chance time !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40). In addition, even if the first BB is won only, and the first BB is won again after the operation of the first BB is completed, the execution of the effect indicating the possibility of winning the second BB is not stopped. You may. Furthermore, after the first BB winning is informed, the first BB winning may be notified (for example, the display of “BB Rensou Chance Time !!” → the display of “sorry” → the “first”). 1BB winning !!!! " Further, when the second BB is hidden after the operation of the first BB is completed after the winning in the AT and the operation of the first BB is completed, the effect display device S40 returns the AT to the AT after the AT is being prepared. The number of remaining games may be reduced, but the internal number of remaining games may be continuously interrupted. In addition, when the first BB and the second BB are repeatedly won, the payout number from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be accumulated and displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like.

In this example,
(1) When the first BB and the small winning combination A win, the stop control is performed with priority given to the first BB.
(2) When the first BB and the small win B are won twice, stop control is performed with priority given to the small win B.
That is, there may be provided a small combination for performing stop control with priority over the BB combination and a small combination for performing stop control with priority over the BB combination.
(3) When the first BB and the small win A are won twice, when the small win A wins, or a part of the symbol combinations corresponding to the small win A (for example, at the time of the first stop, If the second stop is stopped, a notification corresponding to the small combination A (a notification that the small combination A can win) is made.
In other words, the notification of the first BB combination that should normally be controlled to stop before the small combination A is reported as a result of the first stop or the second stop (a stop mode after the execution of the first stop or the second stop). Accordingly, when the first BB combination cannot be won (regardless of the position where the third stop is stopped), the notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. In addition, if the small win A wins as a result of the game, a notification corresponding to the small win A is issued. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the most advantageous notification to the player in accordance with various game situations that change during the game, and to compare the content notified by the effect display device S40 and the like with the actual content. It is possible to prevent inconsistent winning combinations.
(4) When the first BB and the small win B are won twice, a notification corresponding to the small win B is made during rotation of all reels.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a display (7-segment or the like) for displaying the number of the symbol (or symbol combination) stopped and displayed, which is controlled by the main control board M, is provided. In such a configuration, the effect display device S40 performs a contradictory effect that does not correspond to the symbol (or symbol combination) stopped and displayed. For example, when the symbol combination of replay-replay-replay is stopped on the activated line, an effect that is likely to be output when a watermelon is won (for example, a lamp is lit in green) is executed.

In this example, an earphone jack which can output (cannot input) from the sub-control board S side may be provided, and may have the following features.
(1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from a plurality of levels using the sub input button of the gaming machine.
(2) Even when a game is played using the earphone jack, when an error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the gaming machine at a predetermined volume (for example, output from a speaker provided in the gaming machine). ).
(3) When playing a game using the earphone jack, even when the maximum volume is selected, an error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume other than the maximum volume.

  In addition, during the AT state or during the execution of the BB, the effect sound may be output from the gaming machine even when playing a game using the earphone jack. Further, the volume for when the earphone jack is not used and the volume for when the earphone jack is not used may be separately stored. Even when the earphone is unplugged, the sound volume for when the earphone jack is used may not be cleared (to the initial value) immediately. For example, when there is no operation for 10 minutes, any volume may be cleared (to the initial value). However, when the earphone is still inserted, the volume for use of the earphone jack does not have to be cleared (to the initial value). The earphone jack is preferably provided at a place where it does not interfere with the game (for example, when the earphone is inserted into the earphone jack, the earphone cord is not entangled with the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever) ).

In this example,
(1) The winning probability of the replaying game can be changed between after the BB ends when the number of the specified number or more is obtained during the execution of the BB and after the BB ends when the number of the obtained number or less is obtained. You may comprise.
(2) There may be a plurality of RT states to which a transition is made when an RT state (for example, RT1) with a relatively high winning probability of a re-game combination ends. For example, it may be configured to shift to “RT0” after “RT1” ends, or to shift to “RT3” (a newly provided RT state).
(3) When a predetermined combination is won, the state is shifted to the RT state. That is, the transition of the RT state does not correspond one-to-one with the winning, but transitions at a constant probability regardless of the condition device and the winning (for example, the RT transition lottery is executed at a constant probability for each game).
(4) It is possible to mount a zero RT shift, win a zero win, and win a double win. In other words, no matter which pressing order, even if the stop operation is performed at any position, a zero role is provided in which one or more roles do not win, and the RT state shifts by the winning of the zero role. It is also possible to configure so that it is possible to obtain a winning combination of zero-copies and seven-copies, or a double-winning of zero-copies A and B. In addition, at the time of the winning combination of the zero-copies, one of the zero-copies which shifts to RT and the non-RT-copies which does not shift to RT may be configured to win depending on the pressing order. It is also possible to win a winning combination with a winning combination of 0 and a BB role, giving priority to the winning of 0.

  In addition, as in this example, the pressing order of the pressing order bell is 6 choices (“left → middle → right”, “left → right → middle”, “middle → left → right”, “middle → right → left”, (Right → Left → Middle), “Right → Middle → Left”, and the push order of the push order replay is three choices (the first stop is left, middle, right three choices) In this case, as the push order display on the push order display device D270, the push order navigation display related to the push order bell and the push order navigation display related to the push order replay are different, in other words, the 6-select push order navigation. The display and the three-selection push order navigation display may be configured to be different. As an example, as the pressing order display related to 6 selections, “= 1” in the case of “left → center → right”, “= 2” in the case of “left → right → middle”, and “middle → left → “= 3” for “right”, “= 4” for “middle → right → left”, “= 5” for “right → left → middle”, “right → middle → left” In the case of, "= 6" is displayed, and as a pressing order display related to three selections, "= 7" when the first stop is on the left and "= 8" when the first stop is in the middle. In the case where the first stop is on the right, "= 9" may be displayed.

In addition, in this example, you may comprise as follows.
(1) The number of AT digested games, which is the number of games continuously digested in the “AT-in-state”, “specialized precursor state”, or “additional specialized state”, can be displayed on the effect display device. If the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the game shifts from the “AT state” to the “normal game state” and then wins the AT lottery again within the specified game and shifts to the “AT state”, the previous AT While the number of digested games is taken over and added, the number of "advantageous sections" continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games). When the player wins the AT lottery and shifts to the “AT-in-progress state”, the number of AT digestion games is counted from 0 game again without inheriting the previous AT digestion game number.
(2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reel starts rotating, a display prompting to stop the reel on the effect display device S40 (for example, “Reel If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time after the reel starts rotating in the game in which the push order navigation has occurred, (2-1) production The display area of the push order navigation display on the display device S40 does not overlap with the display for urging the reel to stop, and the display for urging the reel to stop (2-2) is not displayed.
(3) When the power is changed from “on → off → on” in a game in which the push order navigation is generated, the rotation speed of the reels becomes constant, and the operation of the stop button becomes effective before the stop button becomes effective. At the timing of, the push order navigation (display on the push order display device D270 and / or display on the effect display device S40) is displayed again.
(4) The state related to a certain AT differs from the state related to another AT in the frequency in which the push order navigation occurs in the game in which the common bell is won, or the AT related state in which the push order navigation can occur. The frequency related to a certain AT differs from the frequency related to another AT which is a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can occur in the game in which the common bell is won, in the frequency of occurrence of the push order navigation.
(5) In the case of the RT state in which the winning probability of the replay is the highest ("RT1" in this example), the ratio of the game in which the push order navigation occurs is higher than the ratio of the game in which the push order navigation does not occur. high. For example, the combined winning rate of the bell role and the replaying role is 1/2 or more. With this configuration, the player can proceed with the game without getting tired during the AT.
The configuration may be as described above.

  Here, the characteristic points of the above-described game section will be described in detail below.

≪Normal section≫
(1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The pressing order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) The main control board M does not transmit a command (signal) related to the condition device that causes a difference in the player's profit rate depending on the pressing order to the sub control board S.
(4) It is possible to execute the transfer lottery to the “advantageous section” except during the internal winning of the BB and during the execution of the BB.

≪Standby section≫
(1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The pressing order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) The main control board M does not transmit a command (signal) related to the condition device that causes a difference in the player's profit rate depending on the pressing order to the sub control board S.
(4) The transfer lottery to the “advantageous section” is not executed.
(5) After the BB has won in the "standby state", the "advantageous section" starts from the next game.

≪Advantaged section≫
(1) The push order navigation can be displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The pressing order navigation can be displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) related to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) A lottery in which the performance of the “advantageous section” is changed (for example, a transition from a “high probability state” to an “in-AT state” as an AT-related state), an AT game number added lottery, and the like can be executed.
(5) During the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH is constantly lit.
(6) When the counter value of the remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, the BB or the push order navigation is not executed at least once in the “advantageous section”, the “advantageous section” is basically used. However, as an exception, when the “advantageous section” continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 in this example), the BB and the push order navigation are performed once in the “advantageous section”. It is configured such that the “advantageous section” can end even if the execution is not performed.
(7) The measurement of the number-of-advantageous-sections remaining game counter YKc-1 is executed in all the games in the “advantageous section” (for example, each game counter value is added even during BB execution).

Here, the characteristic points relating to the setting lottery for the “advantageous section” will be described in detail below.
(1) The presence or absence of the setting for the “advantage section” is determined based on the result of the role lottery, and the presence or absence of the setting for the “advantage section” is not determined when the number of games elapses.
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability is established depending on a set value, the setting lottery for the “advantage section” is not executed when the condition device is established.
(3) In the case where a certain condition device is established and the set lottery for the “advantageous section” is executed, even if the set values are different, the lottery probability is the same.
(4) The performance of the “advantageous section” does not differ depending on the set value (for example, when the strong cherry is established, the setting 1 shifts to the “high-probability state” and the setting 6 shifts to the “AT-in-progress state”. Etc. does not differ depending on the set value).
(5) Setting to “Advantaged Section” When a lottery is won, the next game is basically set to “Advantaged Section” (setting to “Advantaged Section” in the BB combination established in “Normal Section”) If the lottery is won, the next game may be a “standby section”).

Here, the characteristic points related to the change in the performance of the “advantage section” will be described in detail below.
(1) The lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” with reference to the set value is not executed (a condition common to all set values may be that a predetermined number of games elapse and a predetermined condition device is established). .
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability is established depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantage section” is not executed when the condition device is established. No lottery or the like is added to the number of AT games.
(3) When BB is internally won, a lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” is not executed. No lottery or the like is added to the number of AT games.
(4) During the BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed differs depending on the set value, the lottery that changes the performance of the “advantageous section” during the BB execution Does not run. No lottery or the like is added to the number of AT games.
(5) During the BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed does not differ depending on the set value, the lottery that changes the performance of the “advantage section” during the BB execution Can be performed. A lottery or the like with the number of AT games added can also be executed.

  Further, the following configuration may be applied to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Further, the following configuration may be applied alone, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

<< Point 1 >>
(1) It is configured to have a “gase high probability state” as a state relating to an AT which is an “advantageous section” but is harder to win the AT lottery than the “high probability state”.
(2) The continuous effect is constituted by at least a predetermined number of consecutive games equal to or more than G.
(3) It has a normal role that does not win 100% in the AT lottery and a special role that wins 100% in the AT lottery. If a continuous production is executed with the normal role as an opportunity and the AT lottery is not won. In this case, if the special role is won during the continuous production, a production to notify that the player has won the AT lottery is executed even during the continuous production (replace the continuous production).
(4) As the number of remaining games with the number of highly secured games increases, the probability of selecting a continuous effect with a high degree of expectation (expectation of bonus winning, expectation of AT lottery winning) increases, and the remaining games with the number of highly secured games fail. The smaller the number is, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous production with a low degree of expectation.
(5) The smaller the number of remaining games in the number of games with high security failure, the higher the probability of selecting an effect that completes one game with a higher expectation (expectation of bonus winning, expectation of AT lottery).
(6) When the number of remaining games of the number of games with a high security failure is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), continuous production of losing is not executed. Can be performed. In other words, when the number of remaining games of the number of high security failure games is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, four games), the effect of completing one game can be executed in the case of a loss or a hit, but the continuous effect is performed in the case of a hit. Can only be performed if.
(7) If the number of ceilings G in the advantageous section is equal to or less than the predetermined value (4 games) up to the number of ceilings G (1500 games), the continuous effect is not executed.
(8) The effect selection tendency is different between the case where the ceiling G number of the advantageous section is equal to or less than a predetermined value and the case where the ceiling G number is larger than the predetermined value (frequency of occurrence of continuous effects, degree of expectation of big hit of predetermined effects, etc.).
(9) In the case of a new transition to the “advantageous section” in the middle of a continuous production of losses (for example, a defeat effect) in the “normal section”,
(9-1) Rewrite the continuous production (stage change production in the “advantageous section” transition game, such as “When you turn around, there is a character and Stechen suggests words”). The rate at which effects are rewritten during continuous production (defeat) is higher than the rate at which effects are rewritten during continuous production (victory).
(9-2) Change the stay stage after performing the continuous production to the end. The ratio of notifying that the transition has been made on the sub-control board S side in the game when the transition to the “advantageous section” during the execution of the continuous production The rate at which the control board S side notifies that the transition has occurred is different.

<< Point 2 >>
(1) A stay stage (stage A group) that can be set in the “normal section” is configured to be selectable by the player. For example, selection can be made by operating a sub input button.
(2) 1: A lottery result of whether or not the staying stage A group is in the “advantageous section” is notified in advance when the start lever is turned on in the game,
2: The lottery result of the stay stage A group 2: whether or not to be in the "advantageous section" is notified later at the end of the game (or at the time of the next game bet (at the time of operating the start lever when the re-game stop is displayed)).
(3) When the state is a “normal section” from a state other than the “advantage section” and the stay stage A group, the stay stage is selected from the stay stage A group. In the case where the state becomes the “normal section” from the state of the staying stage other than the “advantageous section” and the effect A group, the staying stage is maintained.
(4) The AT expectation when the advantageous section indicator is off and the stay stage A is different from the AT expectation when the advantageous section indicator is off and other than the stay stage A group. For example, since the AT expectation is low, “the advantageous section indicator is turned off and the staying stage A group → the advantageous section indicator is turned on and the staying stage A group → the advantageous section indicator is turned on and other than the staying stage A group”
(5) The transition of the staying stage (staying stage A group → staying stage B group) triggered by the effect (including the 1G complete effect and the continuous effect) in the game that has changed from the “normal section” to the “advantageous section” The ratio of occurrence of the stay stage differs from the ratio of occurrence of the stay stage triggered by the effect in the game in which the “advantage section” is changed to the “normal section”.

<< Point 3 >>
(1) The greater the number of guaranteed games in the “advantageous section” (the number of remaining games of the number of games with high security failure), the higher the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of winning the AT lottery and the degree of expectation of winning the bonus). The higher the probability of selecting the staying stage and the smaller the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (the number of games remaining with the number of games with a high level of difficulty), the higher the expected degree (the expected degree and the bonus that has been won in the AT lottery). Probability of selecting a stay stage with a high degree of expectation).
(2) When the number of remaining guaranteed games in the “advantage section” is equal to or less than a predetermined value (four games or less), the smaller the number of remaining guaranteed games, the lower the probability of selecting an effect in which the stay stage shifts.
(3) If an effect with a high degree of expectation is selected in a situation where the user is not staying at a stay stage with a high degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of winning an AT lottery, the degree of expectation of winning a bonus), the degree of expectation is determined. Expectation (AT lottery win) than when a high expectation effect is selected while staying on a stay stage with a high degree of expectation (AT lottery win, bonus win) Expectation level, expected degree of bonus).

<< Point 4 >>
(1) In the case of winning in BB in "Resurrection possibility production state",
(1-1) The lottery with the AT added during the BB may or may not be executed.
(1-2) After the BB ends, the state may shift to the “AT-in-progress state” or may not shift.
(1-3) The lottery with the AT added during the BB may or may not be executed.
(1-4) When the state shifts to the “AT-in-progress state” after the end of the BB, the number of remaining AT games may or may not be reduced by one game in the “resurrection feasibility effect state”.
(2) In the “resurrection availability state”, an AT-added lottery may or may not be executed. If you run an AT-added lottery,
(3) In the “state of resurrection feasibility effect”, when the player wins a replay with seven reverse push whites or a replay with seven forward push blacks, an avoidance navigation occurs, and at the timing after executing the resurrection effect (success). Notify the number of additional games.
(4) If a winning combination that can shift to the “advantageous section” is won in the “resurrection possibility effect state”, the advantage section indicator turns off at the start timing of the next game, while the “resurrection possibility state” In the case where a winning combination that can shift to the “advantageous section” is won in the next game when the resurrection lottery is not won, the advantageous section indicator may be turned on at the start timing of the next game.
(5) In the case of a specification where the lottery is not added to the AT although it is an advantageous section in the “revival state”,
(5-1) The number of AT games is not added even if a role (for example, watermelon A) that can execute an AT addition lottery in the “state of resurrection availability effect” in the “state of resurrection availability effect” is not added, but a resurrection effect (success) is executed. If the player wins a role (eg, watermelon A) that can be added in the ("AT state"), the number of AT games can be added.
(6) When "Battle effect 3G + Resurrection effect (failure) 1G" is to be executed as an effect at the end of the AT, a bonus when the resurrection effect (success) is executed by winning a bonus in the resurrection effect execution game AT game number is not added during the game, but AT game number is added during the bonus when the bonus is won and the resurrection effect (success) is executed in the battle effect execution game (any of 3G) I can do it. Also, the production tendency during the bonus may be different.

<< Point 5 >>
(1) When the game state A and the game state B are included as states relating to the AT which is an “advantage section”,
(1-1) The expected degree of winning in the AT addition lottery is “gaming state A> advantageous state B” (the number of AT games is more likely to be increased in the gaming state A than in the gaming state B or the AT added game). a lot).
(1-2) The additional number that can be added when the player X is won in the gaming state A is different from the additional number that can be added when the player Y is won in the gaming state A.
(1-3) The additional number that can be added when winning the role X in the gaming state B is the same as the additional number that can be added when winning the role Y in the gaming state B.

<< Point 6 >>
(1) The display modes of the fall prevention suggestion display are as follows: during start lever operation (A), after the first stop to before the second stop (B), and after the second stop to before the third stop (C). To make a difference.
(1-1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display is in the order of “A <B <C” from the one that is inconspicuous for the player.
(2) In the case where the state is changed from the “AT in progress state” and the “RT1” state to the “low probability state” and the “RT1” state where the AT is completed, when the winning combination is won, the pushing is performed by the pushing order display device. The order navigation is displayed, but the effect display device does not display the push order navigation (displays “???”).
(3) When the winning 18 (falling hand) is won at the third stop in the game in which the fall avoidance suggestion display is displayed, the display is maintained in the same display manner as that after the second stop. .
(4) If the start lever is operated in a situation where the power is turned off and the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device is not completed, the start process is completed more than the completion of the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device. At the previous timing, the push order navigation is executed by the sound from the speaker (for example, “Left!”).
(5) Even if the player is in a state related to an AT that is highly profitable for the player, such as “additional specialization state”, if the player has won the fall role, the fall avoidance suggestion effect is displayed with priority.
(6) Even if the falling role wins in the "advantageous section", the "advantageous section" is maintained.
(7) In the case where the falling hand is configured to be a pushing role (determining whether or not to stop and display according to the pushing sequence), a winning role (a pushing sequence bell or the like) which is not a falling role is won, and the pushing sequence is performed. When the navigation is executed and stopped in the pressing order different from the pressing order navigation, the display of the staging display device may be darkened, while if the fall role is won, the display is stopped in the pressing order different from the pressing order navigation. In this case, the display of the effect display device does not darken (or does not darken to the display of the effect to avoid falling).

<< Point 7 >>
(1) In the case where it is configured to shift to “RT3” and “AT preparation state” after the BB related to the BB having the setting difference (similar to the first modification from the present embodiment).
(1-1) By winning a winning combination with a high probability in "RT3", an AT-added lottery is won (may be 100% winning or a predetermined probability may be won).
(1-2) The RT state to be shifted to after the end of the BB is made different depending on the type of BB combination, and the AT addition lottery execution mode (additional lottery execution, addition) The lottery winning probability and the number of AT-added games) are made different.
(1-3) Bonus A → RT1 → Promotion Replay A → RT3 (High Replay Probability), Bonus B → RT2 → Promotion Replay B → RT3 The winning rate or the number of added games is different.
(1-4) When the bonus A → RT1, the bonus B → RT2, and the promotion replay A and the promotion replay B are included, the winning probability of the promotion replay A and the promotion replay B at RT1 and RT2 is Different.
(1-5) Bonus A → RT1, Bonus B → RT2, so that promotion replay and fall replay can be won, respectively, and the winning probability of promotion replay and fall replay differs between RT1 and RT2.
(1-6) After completion of BB with setting difference, the state shifts to the dedicated RT state ("RT3" and "AT preparation state"), and then shifts to the "additional specialization state" triggered by the promotion replay.

<< Point 8 >>
(1) It has one type BB-B1 and one type BB-B2, and shifts to “RT3” after one type BB-B1 ends, and shifts to “RT4” after one type BB-B2 ends. If configured.
(1-1) “RT3” and “RT4” have different AT addition lottery execution modes (the role of executing the additional lottery, the additional lottery winning probability, and the number of AT additional games).
(1-2) The production tendency is different between the BB start production according to the type BB-B1 and the BB start production according to the type BB-B2 (selection rate of the BB start production with high expectation is different).
(2) When the replay game 04 is stopped and displayed before the replay game 06 in the “AT preparation state” and the “RT3”, the process shifts to “RT4” and the treasure box lost effect is not executed. In “RT4”, the replaying player promoted to “RT3” wins. Also, in the case where "RT4" is changed to "RT3", the treasure chest opening addition effect is not executed even if re-games-E1 to E3 are subsequently won.
(3) A plurality of types of BB roles are provided, and it is configured that it is difficult for a player to visually recognize which BB role has won even if the BB role is won, and that after the BB ends depending on the type of BB And the execution state of the AT addition lottery at the time of winning the promotion re-game combination differs depending on the RT state. In such a configuration, the selection tendency of the treasure chest acquisition effect executed during the BB is made different depending on the type of the BB (the acquisition of the gold treasure chest, the acquisition of the silver treasure chest, the acquisition of the copper treasure chest, etc.). Number distribution is different).

<< Point 9 >>
(1) There is a setting difference that has been won during the AT. There is no setting difference that has been won during the BB and the BB start effect that has been won during the AT. There is a difference between the BB start effect related to BB and the ratio of the same effect in the start effect related to BB without setting difference winning during non-AT.

<< Point 10 >>
(1) The setting value is suggested when the BB without the setting difference is won in the “normal section”, rather than the probability that the effect indicating the setting value is selected when the BB with the setting difference is won in the “advantage section”. There is a higher probability that an effect will be selected.
(2) A different BB start effect is selected according to the setting difference for a BB that has been won during non-AT, but the same BB start effect is selected for a BB that has been won during AT regardless of the set difference.
(3) The ratio in which the BB start effect is the same effect mode between the BB with the setting difference won during AT and the BB without the setting difference won during AT, and the BB with the setting difference won during non-AT and the non-AT The ratio of the BB start effect being the same effect mode is different between the BB with no setting difference and the BB that has been won.

<< Point 11 >>
(1) At the time of the winning combination of “No difference in setting (winning ratio that does not differ depending on the set value) + BB” + BB, select “Advantaged section display lighting + production B”, which can be executed when the winning of “No difference in setting” wins The probability of selecting “Advantage section indicator off + effect A”, which can be executed at the time of winning the “role with setting difference (the winning rate differs depending on the set value)”, is higher than the probability of performing The “role + BB time” is a production (for example, a battle production) that stimulates the BB winning, rather than a production for promoting the transition to the high probability state (for example, a transition to a stay stage where the user can stay in the high probability state). Is easier to implement.
(2) When a predetermined combination (for example, cherry) is won, the game is shifted to the high probability state at 100%, and the distribution of the number of games with high security failure is changed from “50% → 3G, 40% → 20G, 10%”. → 50G ", and if 3G is selected, the battle is defeated; otherwise, the battle is won. In addition, the degree of expectation of the length of the number of highly accurate games (whether it is 20 games or 50 games) differs depending on the opponent who has won the battle. Also, in the case of the above example, an effect that stimulates the continuity at the 20th high accuracy (the effect that stimulates whether the game is a 20 game or a 50 game, and if it succeeds, the game is definitely determined to be 50 games) is executed. .

<< Point 12 >>
(1) There is a predetermined freeze effect that can be executed in the “normal section”, and the occurrence probability of the freeze effect differs depending on the set value.
(1-1) In the “advantageous section”, a predetermined freeze effect is not executed.
(1-2) The predetermined freeze effect is more easily performed in the “normal section” than in the “advantage section”.
(1-3) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-4) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-5) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed at the time of loss.

<<<< Applicable configuration to this example >>>>
The configuration applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Note that any of the configurations described below can be applied to all of the above-described embodiments, and the configuration 1 described below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations described below may be applied. Supplement what you may do.

<< Configuration of Memory Map >>
First, with reference to FIG. 59, a configuration of a part of a memory map in a RAM (sometimes referred to as a first RAM) of a main control board M applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. In the area shown in the figure, from the upper address, (1) “set value data”: an area for data relating to a number for managing the setting stage, and (2) “external signal data”: external signal output Area for storing related information, (3) "RAM checksum data": data used in checksum calculation processing executed when power is turned on, calculated from data stored in RAM when power is turned off Area for storing information for calculating a specific value (for example, “0”) in a checksum calculation process executed when the power is turned on. (4) “Control command buffer”: Area for storing command information to be transmitted to the control board side, (5) “Stack pointer temporary storage buffer”: information used when power is turned off, and the current stack is used when power is turned off. An area for storing data stored in the pointer and storing information to be stored in the stack pointer when the power is restored, (6) “unused area”: an area for storing an area not used for a game, ( 7) “Saved data 1 to Saved data 8”: The areas are used in the order of the RAM to which the data to be saved is likely to be written to a maximum by design according to the CALL instruction and the PUSH instruction. In such a configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is “7FF8H” by design. However, when an unexpected failure (unexpected power interruption, etc.) occurs, it is higher than “7FF8H”. May be indicated by the stack pointer. In this case, there is a possibility that the saved data may be stored beyond the area of “save data 1 to save data 8” secured as the area of the data to be saved in advance. In consideration of such a situation, an address (an address close to “7FF8H”) that may be indicated by the stack pointer when the unexpected failure occurs is data that does not affect the progress of the game (a small effect). Data) is preferably stored. Specifically, by providing an address for storing “set value data” at an address at least one address apart from “save data 1 to save data 8” previously secured as an area for data to be saved, It is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause a disadvantage not only to the game player but also to the game hall. In this figure, (5) "Stack Pointer Temporary Save Buffer" is data that is not used in the situation where the game is progressing after the power is restored, and (4) "Control Command Buffer" Means that even if a command cannot be transmitted to the sub control board S side, the progress of the game is hardly affected, and (3) "RAM checksum data" is used in a situation where the game is progressing after the power is restored. (2) "External signal system data" is data to be transmitted to the hall computer and therefore has little effect on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) “set value data” is data relating to set values that affect the outcome of the game, and for example, if the set value is changed to a low set value, a significant disadvantage occurs to the player. there is a possibility. Furthermore, for example, when the setting value is changed to a high setting value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage may occur in the game hall. As described above, (1) “set value data” is important data for the normal progress of a game. For these reasons, in (1) to (7) in FIG. 7, (1) “set value data” is the highest data (data stored in the higher address). In other words, addresses between (1) “set value data” and (7) “save data 1 to save data 8” include (2) “external signal data”, and (3) “RAM checksum data”. , (4) “control command buffer”, (5) “stack pointer temporary storage buffer”, and (6) “unused area”. With this configuration, even if a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine and the number of data saved from the stack pointer to the RAM exceeds the design, the game machine is provided with a RAM not used for the game. Thus, it is possible to configure the gaming machine such that an abnormal state is unlikely to occur. (2) “External signal data”, (3) “RAM checksum data”, (4) “Control command buffer”, (5) “Stack pointer temporary storage buffer”, (6) “Unused area” There is no problem if the order of the addresses for storing the five data is changed. For example, even if the addresses are stored in the order of (3) → (2) → (4) → (5) → (6) from the upper address. Alternatively, they may be stored in the order of “(6) → (5) → (3) → (2) → (4)” from the upper address. Further, (6) the configuration may be such that the “unused area” is not provided. Note that the data stored in the RAM area (2) to (5) does not make it impossible to insert a game medal even if the data stored in the RAM area is changed (game medal). No error that makes it impossible to input).

The area for storing “set value data” shown in FIG. 59, in other words, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to store the following data.
(A) Total score data: an area for storing data relating to the game value number that plays the same role as the total number of game medals that can be inserted in an enclosed spinning-type gaming machine that does not use actual game medals (total When the score data is stored in the area (1) in FIG. 59, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to have 2 bytes.
(B) Minimum game time: data for counting one minimum game time (subtracting a counter value for each interrupt processing) (a minimum game time is 4.1 seconds).
(C) Obtained number counter at the time of BB operation: a counter for determining whether or not a condition (payout number) for ending BB is satisfied (a counter corresponding to a value obtained by adding a game value to a player) Value is subtracted)
(D) Obtained number counter at the time of MB operation: a counter for determining whether or not a condition (payout number) for ending MB is satisfied (a counter corresponding to a value obtained by adding a game value to a player) Value is subtracted)
A plurality of (A) to (D) and "setting value data" may be stored (stored at different addresses), or only one of them may be stored. Good. Further, in the case of a configuration in which a plurality of data can be stored, each of the plurality of data is stored at an address higher than the areas (2) to (7) in FIG. 59 (an area for storing is provided). It is preferable to configure so that With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not disadvantage a player or a game arcade. Furthermore, if the address is at least higher than the area (6), the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is “7FF8H” by design, but an unexpected failure (unexpected power interruption, etc.) has occurred. In this case, there is a possibility that the stack pointer indicates an address higher than “7FF8H”, but it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not disadvantage a player or a game arcade.

<< Action at the time of replay stop display >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the action in the won game of the replay applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail. The configuration exemplified below illustrates a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even during the stop display of the re-game.

  First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the automatic bet operation related to the replay that is stopped and displayed (when the replay is stopped and displayed, a bet is made without inserting a game medal or operating the bet button), the 2-bet lamp is displayed. D212 lights up. Thereafter, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and as an automatic bet operation related to the replay that has been stopped, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. At substantially the same time, the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on (the turn-on lamp D300 may be configured to blink).

  Here, the features of the operation in the figure will be described in detail below.

<Configuration 1>
The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game for which the replay is stopped are lit at substantially the same timing. When the insertable lamp D300 is turned on after the start lamp D180, when the player wants to insert a game medal, the player recognizes that the game medal cannot be inserted by visually recognizing that the start lamp D180 is turned on first. On the other hand, if the start lamp D180 is turned on after the turn-on lamp D300, it may be recognized that the game cannot be started. Therefore, by turning on the insertable lamp D300 and the start lamp D180 almost at the same time as described above, it is possible to smoothly determine the player's insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever D50, and to determine the wrong game medal. The closing and the operation of the start lever D50 can be prevented.

<Configuration 2>
The 1-bet lamp D211 is always on from the bet operation timing for the game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed until the end of the game in the next game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it is easy for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by the re-game winning, and it is possible to notify the player that the re-game has been won. It can be smooth.

<Configuration 3>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the start lamp D180. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is first notified that the re-game has been won, and thereafter, the start lamp D180 is turned on and the start lever D50 can be operated by the re-game win. By notifying the player of the fact, the player can smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Configuration 4>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the insertable lamp D300. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, the fact that the re-game has been won is notified first, and then the turn-on lamp D300 is turned on to notify that the game medal can be inserted. This makes it easy to grasp the game situation.

<Configuration 5>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the 3-bet lamp D213. As described above, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified in advance that the re-game has been won, so that the player can easily recognize that the automatic bet operation by the re-game win has been performed. Since the player can be notified that the re-game has been won, the progress of the game can be smooth.

<Configuration 6>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the 2-bet lamp D212. As described above, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified in advance that the re-game has been won, so that the player can easily recognize that the automatic bet operation by the re-game win has been performed. Since the player can be notified that the re-game has been won, the progress of the game can be smooth.

<Configuration 7>
The two-bet lamp D212 and the three-bet lamp D213 related to the next game for which the re-game is stopped are turned on. The three-bet lamp D213 is turned on after the two-bet lamp D212 is turned on. They do not light up at the same time). With this configuration, the player can easily recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by the replay winning, and the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 8>
The turn-off timings of the two-bet lamp D212 and the three-bet lamp D213 after the replay is stopped and displayed are substantially the same. When a plurality of lamps (2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213) are turned on, it is difficult to grasp the game state. You will be able to quickly grasp the gaming state.

<Configuration 9>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is earlier than the turn-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the stop display of the re-game. As described above, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified in advance that the re-game has been won, so that the player can easily recognize that the automatic bet operation by the re-game win has been performed. Since the player can be notified that the re-game has been won, the progress of the game can be smooth.

<Structure 10>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is earlier than the turn-off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the stop display of the re-game. As described above, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified in advance that the re-game has been won, so that the player can easily recognize that the automatic bet operation by the re-game win has been performed. Since the player can be notified that the re-game has been won, the progress of the game can be smooth.

<Configuration 11>
The lighting timings of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped are substantially simultaneous. With this configuration, it is possible to promptly notify the player that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective, so that the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

<< Other actions 1 >>
Here, an operation different from the configuration in FIG. 60 in the won game of the replay applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail below as the other operation 1.

<Configuration 12>
The two-bet lamp D212 and the three-bet lamp D213 may always be lit from the bet operation timing relating to the game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed until the end of the game of the next game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, the player can easily recognize that the automatic bet operation has been performed by the replay winning, and can be notified that the replay has been won, so that the progress of the game can be improved. Can be smoothed.

<Configuration 13>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game and the turn-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the stop display of the re-game may be configured substantially simultaneously. The player wants to be notified that the automatic betting operation is being performed, but if the betting lamp (the two-bet lamp D212) is kept on, it becomes difficult to grasp the game state. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game state, and furthermore, the lighting timing of the two-bet lamp D212 relating to the next game in which the re-gaming lamp D290 is displayed with the re-game stopped (the lighting timing of the insertable lamp D300 may be used). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert a game medal by turning on the light earlier than this.

<Configuration 14>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game and the turn-off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the stop display of the re-game may be configured substantially simultaneously. We want to inform the player that the automatic betting operation is being performed, but if the betting lamp (three-betting lamp D213) continues to be turned on, it will be difficult to grasp the gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game state, and furthermore, the lighting timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the re-gaming lamp D290 is displayed in which the re-gaming is stopped (the lighting timing of the insertable lamp D300 may be used). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert a game medal by turning on the light earlier than this.

<Structure 15>
If a player wins a re-game in a certain game and also wins a re-game in the next game of the certain game, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on based on the stop display of the re-game related to the certain game. Thus, the re-game lamp D290 may continue to be turned on until the end of the game after the certain game. In this way, by continuously lighting the re-game lamp D290, the player can be quickly notified of the re-game winning, and the progress of the game can be smooth.

<Structure 16>
Various lamps such as a re-game lamp D290, a 3-bet lamp D213, a 2-bet lamp D212, a 1-bet lamp D211, a start lamp D180, and an insertable lamp D300 are triggered by the third stop operation (or a re-game symbol stop display). May be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification by the ramp according to the progress timing of the game, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the progress status of the game.

<Configuration 17>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the turn-on lamp D300 may be configured to be substantially simultaneous. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the lamp is turned on based on the stop display of the replay.

<Configuration 18>
Based on the stop display of the re-game, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off almost simultaneously, and thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off. You may comprise so that it may light substantially simultaneously. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals to be automatically bet when the re-game is won is three.

<Configuration 19>
Based on the stop display of the replay, the three-bet lamp D213, the two-bet lamp D212, and the one-bet lamp D211 are almost simultaneously turned off, and thereafter, the three-bet lamp D213, the two-bet lamp D212, the one-bet lamp D211 and the second bet lamp D211. The game lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 may be configured to be turned on substantially simultaneously. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals to be automatically bet in the case of winning the re-game is three, and to clearly indicate that the lamp is turned on based on the stop display of the re-game. Can be notified.

<< Other actions 2 >>
Here, an operation different from the configuration in FIG. 60 in the replayed game that can be applied to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail below as another operation 2 with reference to FIGS. Will be described.

<Functional diagram 2 when replay stop is displayed>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, an operation applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine of this example will be described in detail.

  First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. At substantially the same time, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on, and the two-bet lamp D212 and the three-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same timing. Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the drawing, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the closing lamp are turned on. The possible lamps D300 are turned on almost simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Functional diagram 3 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Functional diagram 4 when replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and thereafter, at the timing (3) in the figure, the start lamp D180 and the start lamp D180 are almost simultaneously turned on at the same time as the re-game lamp D290 is turned on. The enabling lamp D300 is turned on. Thereafter, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing (4) in the figure. The 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Functional diagram 5 regarding replay stop display>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then at the timing (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are switched. Turns off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the drawing, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the re-game lamp D290 are turned on substantially simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously.

<Functional diagram 6 when replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp is almost simultaneously turned on with the re-game lamp D290. D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Functional diagram 7 regarding replay stop display>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and thereafter, at the timing (3) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the re-game lamp D290 and The start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on almost simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Functional diagram 8 when replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then at the timing (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are switched. Turns off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the re-playing game lamp D290, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300. And light up almost simultaneously.

<Functional diagram 9 regarding replay stop display>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (6) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (7) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Functional diagram 10 regarding replay stop display>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, and one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating. Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

  In addition, among the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 61 to 63, the same configuration as the above-described configuration 1 to configuration 19 can produce the same effect as the above-described configuration 1 to configuration 19.

  In addition, the stop display timing of the re-gaming symbol, the operation timing of the stop button, the turning-on / off timing of the re-gaming lamp D290, the turning-on / off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213, the turning-on / off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212, 1 It should be added that any configuration (timing) can be used for any combination of the lighting timing of the betting lamp D211, the lighting timing of the start lamp D180, and the lighting timing of the insertable lamp D300.

  In the above description, the configuration in which the game medal can be inserted even during the stop display of the re-game is exemplified. However, the configuration is not limited thereto. It may be configured (applicable to all the configurations described above). In the case of such a configuration, the insertable lamp D300 remains turned off during the period in which the replay is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned substantially simultaneous may be recognized as being simultaneously apparent when the player visually recognizes it. For example, a process (lighting / light-off timing) executed within a period of executing interrupt processing ten times may be used. If they are almost the same, there is no problem.

<< Configuration of Bet Button Lamp >>
The configuration relating to the bet button lamp S50 in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured as follows.

  The processing of turning the bet button D220 from invalid to valid is executed by the processing of the main control board M, and thereafter, the main control board M transmits a command for turning on the bet button lamp S50 to the sub-control board S side (main control board S). The board M may be configured to transmit a command to the sub-control board S to the effect that the bet button D220 has become effective.) Then, the sub-control board S receives the bet button lamp S50 transmitted from the main control board M. May be configured to execute a process for turning on the bet button lamp S50 by receiving a command for turning on the bet button lamp S50. With this configuration, the bet button lamp S50 manages lighting and extinguishing on the sub-control board S side, but in a situation where the bet button D220 is effective according to the game situation on the main control board M side. The bet button lamp S50 can be reliably turned on, and even if the player visually recognizes the turn-on of the bet button lamp S50 and determines whether or not the bet (the bet button D220) is valid, the bet button lamp S50 on the main control board M side is not affected. It can be configured so as not to cause inconsistency with the game situation.

<< Configuration of stop button lamp >>
The configuration related to the stop button lamp S60 in the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.

  A process of changing the stop button D40 (any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) from invalid to valid is executed by the processing of the main control board M, and thereafter, the main control board M becomes the sub control board. A command for turning on the stop button lamp S60 (the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the stop button for which the enabling process has been executed) is transmitted to the S side. The main control board M sends a stop button to the sub control board S side. D40 (one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) may be configured to transmit a command indicating that it has become valid. Then, the sub control board S becomes the main control board. Executes the process for turning on the stop button lamp S60 by receiving the command for turning on the stop button lamp S60 transmitted from M. It may be so that configuration. With this configuration, the stop button lamp S60 manages lighting and extinguishing on the sub-control board S side, but the stop button lamp S60 is effective according to the game situation on the main control board M side. , The stop button lamp S60 can be reliably turned on, and the player visually recognizes the lighting of the stop button lamp S60, and the stop button D40 (any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43). Can be configured so that even if it is determined whether or not is valid, there is no inconsistency with the game situation on the main control board M side.

<< Configuration of reel unit RU applicable to this example >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example is provided with each of the reels M50 (M51, M52, and M53) rotatably via a reel unit RU. FIG. 64 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. FIG. 65 is a sectional view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. The reel unit RU of the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example is an integrated unit that rotatably stores all three reels M51, M52, and M53. The reel unit RU has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape, and has an opening RU10. The three reels M51, M52 and M53 are provided on the reel unit RU so that the symbols of the three reels M51, M52 and M53 can be visually recognized through the opening RU10. Although the details will be described later, each of the three reels is formed by attaching a reel band MO to a reel frame MW.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the reel unit RU has a top part RU20 and a bottom part RU30 across the opening RU10. By mounting the bottom part RU30 of the reel unit RU on the upper surface of a pedestal part BU described later, the reel unit RU can be provided on the pedestal part BU.

<Through hole RU40>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, a plurality of, for example, three through holes RU40 are formed in the front end of the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. I have. The three through holes RU40 are formed so as to correspond to, for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53.

<< Pedestal BU >>
The pedestal BU is made of a metal plate or the like, and has a substantially plate shape. An end of the base BU is attached to a left side, a right side, a back, or the like of the back box with a screw or the like (not shown), and the base BU is fixed to the back box. The base BU is attached to the back box so as to extend in the horizontal direction. As described above, the reel unit RU is mounted on the base BU.

<Screw hole BU10>
At the front end of the base BU, a plurality of, for example, three screw holes BU10 are formed along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. The plurality of through holes RU40 formed in the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU described above are formed so as to correspond to each of the plurality of screw holes BU10 of the pedestal BU. The three screw holes BU10 are formed to correspond to, for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53.

  The numbers and positions of the through-holes RU40 and the screw holes BU10 may correspond to each other and may be arranged along the horizontal direction, as long as the reel unit RU can be stably mounted on the base BU. Further, only the reel unit RU may be attached to the pedestal part BU by the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the pedestal part BU, or the reel unit may be attached by the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the pedestal part BU. Both the RU and one reel (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53) may be configured to be attached to the base BU.

<< How to fix the reel unit RU >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel unit RU is mounted on the pedestal BU, and the reel is mounted such that each of the through holes RU40 of the reel unit RU communicates with the corresponding screw hole BU10 of the pedestal BU. By positioning the unit RU and screwing the screw BS into the screw hole BU10 through the through hole RU40 of the reel unit RU, the reel unit RU can be attached and held at a fixed position of the pedestal BU. By doing so, the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the base BU.

  The reel unit RU may be detachably attached using a detachable rivet, for example, a member such as a push rivet, instead of being attached with a screw member or a screw member other than the screw BS. It is sufficient that the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by an engaging member, a locking member, or the like.

<< Hopper H40 and medal auxiliary tank HS >>
FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the hopper H40 from the rear right side, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the hopper H40 from the rear left side. 66 (a) and 66 (b) also show arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS described later. Arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS are shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B for both the positions (1) and (2) of the screw BS and the hopper H40.

  The hopper H40 is a funnel-shaped tank molded of ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 66, the hopper H40 has a front side wall H42, a left side wall H44, a rear side wall H46, and a right side wall H48. The front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 are arranged so as to go around, and an opening H30 is formed by the front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48. You. The opening H30 is formed so as to open upward. The medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 described above is introduced into the hopper H40 through the opening H30.

  Further, the hopper H40 has a hopper bottom H52, a right slope H54 and a left slope H56. The right inclined portion H54 is disposed on the right side of the hopper H40, and a game medal introduced to the right side of the hopper H40 is guided by its own weight toward a hopper bottom portion H52 described later. The left inclined portion H56 is disposed on the left side of the hopper H40, and guides medals introduced to the left side of the hopper H40 toward the hopper bottom H52 by its own weight. Further, the left inclined portion H56 has a covering portion H57. The covering portion H57 extends from the left inclined portion H56 and is disposed so as to cover an upper portion of a substantially left half of a disk H50 described later. By providing the covering portion H57, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game medals from being continuously linked to the hopper bottom H52 so that the game medals cannot be dropped, and the game medals can be smoothly guided toward the hopper bottom H52.

  Since the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 are provided, any game medal introduced into the hopper H40 through the opening H30 can be guided to the hopper bottom H52. The medals guided by the right inclined section H54, the left inclined section H56, and the covering section H57 are stored in the hopper bottom H52. As described above, the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion that stores game medals in the hopper H40.

  A disk H50 as a rotating body is disposed on the hopper bottom H52. The disk H50 is driven to rotate by the hopper motor H80 described above, and the game medal is discharged from the game medal exit H60 by the rotation of the disk H50. In this way, the medals stored in the hopper H40 can be discharged one by one from the game medal exit H60.

<Discharge guide H62>
A discharge guide H62 is formed inside the front side wall H42 along the front side wall H42. The discharge guide portion H62 has a long shape, and has an inclined surface H64 formed to be inclined. When the hopper H40 is placed in the back box, the right side of the inclined surface H64 is located lower than the left side of the inclined surface H64. The width of the inclined surface H64 is formed substantially constant, but is formed so as to be slightly widened downward (from left to right).

  The discharge guide section H62 guides the game medals on the upper portion of the hopper H40 to the medal auxiliary tank HS before the game medals overflow from the hopper H40, and stores the game medals in the hopper H40. It is a member for reducing the number of medals being played. A discharge port H66 is formed on the right side of the inclined surface H64, and the game medals guided by the inclined surface H64 are discharged to the medal auxiliary tank HS via the discharge port H66. As described above, the discharge guide portion H62 functions as a discharge inclined portion that discharges game medals to the outside of the hopper H40. As described above, the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion that stores game medals inside the hopper H40, whereas the discharge guide portion H62 performs the game medals. It functions as a discharge inclined portion for discharging to the outside of the hopper H40, and has a function opposite to the right inclined portion H54 and the left inclined portion H56.

  Further, the left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all move the game medal from the left side to the right side. That is, each of the left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 has a downward slant. The final target of the left inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57 is the hopper bottom portion H52, and the final target of the discharge guide portion H62 is the medal auxiliary tank HS. The movement of the game medals can be aligned from left to right.

  In the vicinity of the discharge port H66 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62, a protruding wall H58 protruding upward is provided along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64. The projecting wall H58 can prevent the medal placed on the inclined surface H64 from falling to the hopper bottom H52.

<Medal auxiliary tank HS>
The medal auxiliary tank HS has a substantially quadrangular prism shape, and has a bottom surface and four side surfaces. The medal auxiliary tank HS has an opening HS10 at an upper portion, and the medals discharged from the hopper H40 are introduced through the opening HS10 and stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The detailed structure and function of the medal auxiliary tank HS will be described later.

<< Removal of screw BS of reel unit RU >>
In a spinning-type gaming machine, a front door DU is attached to a back box so as to be openable and closable (the front door DU and the back box may be collectively referred to as a housing). The front door DU is rotatably attached to the back box around the left side of the front door DU (left side as viewed from the player) as a center of rotation. For this reason, the right side of the front door DU (right side as viewed from the player) has the longest moving distance, and when the front door DU is closed, an impact due to contact with or collision with the back box occurs and propagates to the back box. Since an impact is generated on the right side of the spinning-type gaming machine, the impact on the right side of the spinning-type gaming machine is the largest, and the impact tends to gradually decrease on the left side of the rotating-type gaming machine.

  As described above, the reel unit RU is detachably attached to the base BU by the screw BS. The screw BS is screwed into the screw hole BU10 of the pedestal portion BU at three places on the left, center, and right. The right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 receives the largest impact. For this reason, the right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 is most easily loosened by an impact, and when the screwing is released, the right screw BS drops and falls. The central screw BS screwed into the central screw hole BU10 is also subjected to an impact, and may loosen and fall off due to the impact. The left screw BS screwed into the left screw hole BU10 is expected to reduce the impact to some extent, but there is a possibility that the left screw may loosen and fall off depending on the degree of propagation of the impact and the usage time.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (1) >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the hopper H40 (medal payout device H) and the medal auxiliary tank HS are arranged below the reel unit RU. In the example shown in FIG. 64, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located at least below the right screw BS among the three screws BS described above.

  When the right screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 1A). The dropped right screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 by the weight of the right screw BS, and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 1B). When the right screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it falls freely toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 1C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  As described above, even when the right screw BS is dropped due to an impact, the right screw BS can be discharged from the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS is prevented from entering the hopper H40. It is possible to prevent the rotation operation of the disk H50 from being hindered or to damage the disk H50, and to operate the hopper H40 stably.

  In the above-described example, only the right screw BS is targeted, but the hopper H40 is configured so that all three left screws BS, the center screw BS, and the right screw BS are positioned above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. And the reel unit RU may be positioned. Whichever screw BS is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS. Further, in this example, the screw BS for mounting the reel unit RU on the pedestal portion BU has been described as an example. A member such as a screw attached to the right side (right side as viewed from the player) may be configured to be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS when dropped.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (2) >>
FIG. 67 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. In the example shown in FIG. 67, of the three screws BS described above, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below the central screw BS, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is located below the right screw BS. In FIG. 67, the same components as those in FIG. 64 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  When the right screw BS drops due to an impact, it falls freely downward (arrow 2A), and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS as it is (without touching the inclined surface H64).

  When the central screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 3A). The dropped central screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 by the weight of the central screw BS, and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 3B). When the central screw BS reaches the outlet H66, it falls freely toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 3C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  The dropped right-hand screw BS and the central screw BS are prevented from entering the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS is prevented from hindering the rotation operation of the disk H50 or damaging the disk H50. It can be operated stably.

  In the above-described example, the right screw BS and the center screw BS are targeted. However, the hopper H40 and the reel unit RU are positioned so that the left screw BS is also located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. Is also good. Whichever screw BS is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  As described above, it is preferable to form the protruding wall H58 that protrudes upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. By providing the protruding wall H58, it is possible to prevent the screw BS falling off and resting on the inclined surface H64 from falling to the hopper bottom H52. The height of the protruding wall H58 is equal to or higher than the height at which the screw BS rebounds when the screw BS falls on the inclined surface H64. The screw BS can be prevented from dropping to the hopper bottom H52, and the screw BS can be prevented from hindering or causing the disk H50 to operate.

  As described above, even when the screw BS for mounting the reel unit RU is detached due to vibration or the like due to opening and closing of the front door DU, the detached screw BS does not enter the hopper H40, and the medal assisting device does not. By configuring to fall into the tank HS, the administrator of the game arcade can easily collect the detached screw BS.

<< Hopper H400 >>
In the example shown in FIG. 67, when the right screw BS falls, it passes through the outside of the hopper H40 (the right side of the right side wall H48 when viewed from the player) (arrow 2A) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The configuration is such that the dropped right screw BS is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS without passing through the inside of the hopper H40, so that it can be shared with the hopper H40 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 67, a hopper H400 having a structure in which the right side wall H48 extends rightward (right side wall H480) may be used. In the hopper H400, a bottom opening H410 is formed at the bottom near the right side wall H480. When the right screw BS falls, it passes through the inside of the hopper H400, and further through the bottom opening H410, the medal auxiliary tank. Stored in HS. In this way, through the bottom opening H410, the dropped right screw BS can be accurately guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS without entering the hopper H40.

<<< Extension part RU50 >>>
In the above-described example, when the screw BS falls off, the screw BS falls freely toward the medal auxiliary tank HS below. On the other hand, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 65, an extension part EN may be provided below the reel unit RU or the pedestal part BU. By providing the extension portion EN, even if the screw BS falls off, the screw BS does not immediately fall, but can be once guided by the extension portion EN and then dropped into the medal auxiliary tank HS. In this way, the extension portion EN can match the position where the screw BS is attached with the position of the medal auxiliary tank HS, and can increase the degree of freedom of the position where the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged.

<< Configuration of medal auxiliary tank HS >>
<Through hole HS20 for full detection electrode>
As shown in FIG. 68, in the medal auxiliary tank HS, at least two full-hole detection electrode through-holes HS20 are formed on the rear surface. Further, two full detection electrodes DE and a continuity detection board CC (see FIG. 65) are provided in a lower portion of the back surface of the back box. The two full detection electrodes DE have a long shape, extend in parallel with each other and horizontally, and are arranged so as to protrude forward. The two full detection electrode through holes HS20 of the medal auxiliary tank HS are formed corresponding to the two full detection electrodes DE. When the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged at the bottom of the back box, the two full detection electrodes DB pass through the corresponding full detection electrode through holes HS20 and protrude toward the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  As the medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS, the uppermost portion UL of the stored game medals (see FIG. 69 (c)) gradually rises and approaches the two full detection electrodes DE. FIG. 69 (c) is a cross-sectional view showing a state where game medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The line of the uppermost portion UL shown in FIG. 69 (c) is a line (for example, an envelope or the like) connecting the contours of the game medals located in the uppermost portion UL among the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. (For convenience, the uppermost portion UL is shown by a smooth curve). When the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS come in contact with the two full detection electrodes DE and the two full detection electrodes DE conduct through a plurality of medals, the two full detection electrodes DE are connected. An electric circuit is formed. Due to the formation of the electric circuit, the conduction detection substrate CC outputs a signal indicating that conduction has occurred between the two full detection electrodes DE. In this way, when game medals are stored up to the position of the two full detection electrodes DE, a medal full error can be detected.

  The number of full detection electrodes DE is not limited to two, but may be three or more. For example, when three are provided, one full detection electrode is newly provided below the two full detection electrodes in addition to the two full detection electrodes described above, and the newly provided one full detection electrode is provided. A medal full error can be detected by conducting the full detection electrode and one of the two full detection electrodes described above, so that the medal assistance can be detected. Even when game medals are not uniformly stored in the tank HS (for example, when game medals are stored on the right side of the medal auxiliary tank HS), a medal full error can be detected.

<<<< material of screw BS and medal material >>
The material of the screw BS is magnetically attachable and conductive. For example, it is formed of a steel material. Further, the material of the medal is non-magnetically attachable and conductive. For example, it is formed by plating brass or stainless steel. With this configuration, even when the screw BS falls into the medal auxiliary tank HS, the screw BS can be easily taken out of the medal auxiliary tank HS by using a magnet or the like.

<< Relationship between total length BL of screw BS and distance EL between two full detection electrodes DE >>
The above-mentioned left screw BS, center screw BS, and right screw BS are used for attaching the reel unit RU to the base BU. FIG. 69 (b) is a front view showing the entire screw BS. The screw BS used has a total length BL in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 69 (b)) shorter than a distance EL (see FIG. 69 (a)) between the two full detection electrodes DE (see FIG. 69 (a)). Total length BL <distance EL between two full detection electrodes DE). By doing so, even if the screw BS (for example, the right screw BS) falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, it is shorter than the space between the full detection electrodes DE. Does not conduct with the full detection electrode DE (the screw BS does not catch on the two full detection electrodes DE). The total length BL of the screw BS is the sum of the thickness (length) of the head and the nominal length. FIG. 69 (a) is a plan view of the inner portion of the medal auxiliary tank HS showing a state where the full detection electrode DE protrudes into the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<<< Relation between length HR of seat surface of screw BS and diameter ED of full detection electrode DE>
The radial length HR of the bearing surface of the screw BS (see FIG. 69 (b)) is shorter than the diameter ED (see FIG. 69 (a)) of the fullness detection electrode DE (see FIG. 69 (a)). Length HR <diameter ED of full detection electrode DE). In this way, even when the screw BS falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, the head of the screw BS is not hooked on the one full detection electrode DE, and Even when the BS comes in contact with the full detection electrode DE, it can be immediately separated, and the bis BS alone does not accidentally conduct.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), one of the two full detection electrodes DE is full (eg, the full detection electrode DE on the right side in FIG. 69 (c)). When in contact with the medal (uppermost part UL), the other full detection electrode DE (for example, the left full detection electrode DE in FIG. 69 (c)) and the screw BS temporarily contact. Even if such a case occurs, the screw BS is not hooked on the full detection electrode DE, and the screw BS can be immediately separated from the full detection electrode DE (see arrow F in FIG. 69 (c)). , No conduction circuit is formed via the screw BS, and the full state of the medal auxiliary tank HS is not erroneously determined.

  In this example, the case where the reel unit RU is an integrated unit that accommodates all three reels has been described. Thus, there is a possibility that the screw BS is detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU and the screw BS comes off. For this reason, a configuration such as the medal auxiliary tank HS and the screw BS can be similarly employed.

<< Reel band configuration >>
FIG. 70A is a front view showing the entire reel band MO. FIG. 70B is a perspective view showing a state where the reel band MO is curved. FIG. 70 (c) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of a break M59 of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. FIG. 70D is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the “white seven” symbol in an enlarged manner. The “white seven” symbol is a bonus symbol, and BB is started when “white seven / white seven / white seven” is stopped and displayed on the activated line. The reel band MO has an elongated shape (a band shape) having a thin plate shape. As described above, a plurality of symbols are drawn on the reel band MO along the longitudinal direction. The reel band MO has flexibility and can be curved. In addition, it has translucency, and it is possible to illuminate the design from the back with light emitted from the torso backlight.

  The reel strip MO has a first end M55 and a second end M57 in the longitudinal direction. The first end M55 and the second end M57 are curved so as to face each other, and are attached to the reel frame MW to form an annular (cylindrical) reel M50. The reel frame MW is mainly composed of two annular frames of the same size, and the two frames are formed of a resin such as plastic to reduce the weight. The two frames are arranged in parallel with each other and such that both centers are located on the same rotation axis. The interval between the two frames is arranged to be substantially the same as the width of the reel band MO. By attaching the reel band MO between the two frames along the outer periphery of the two frames, the reel M50 can be formed.

<Overlapping portion M58 and break M59>
The reel band MO is formed such that the length in the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO is slightly longer than the entire circumference of the reel frame MW. Therefore, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a portion where the reel band MO partially overlaps near the first end M55 and the second end M57 (overlapping portion M58) occurs. By doing so, the reel band MO can be attached over the entire periphery of the reel frame MW without a gap being generated along the circumferential direction (the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO). When the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a part of the reel band MO overlaps, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (c), the reel band MO is attached to the upper side of the second end M57, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55. When the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW as described above, first, when the reel band MO starts to be attached, the reel band MO starts to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the reel frame MW is attached to the reel frame MW. While gradually rotating in the same direction as the rotation direction of M50, the reel band MO is stuck from the second end M57 toward the first end M55 along one circumference of the reel frame MW. The reel band MO is pasted on the upper side of the second end portion M57, and the pasting up to the first end portion M55 is completed. When the reel band MO is pasted in such an order, the first end M55 ends in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the first end M55 is placed on the reel band MO. The portions M55 are in an overlapping state.

  On the other hand, the reel band MO starts to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and then, while the reel frame MW is gradually rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, the reel band MO is moved to the first end. Along the circumference of the reel frame MW from M55 to the second end M57, finally, a reel band MO is applied above the first end M55, and is applied up to the second end M57. Ends. When the reel band MO is pasted in such an order, the second end M57 ends in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the second end M57 is placed on the reel band MO. M57 overlaps.

  Here, the reel band MO starts to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end portion M55, and then the second end portion M57 ends to be attached in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50. When the end M57 of the second end is in an overlapping state, when the game is executed and the reel M50 rotates, the air comes into contact with the cross section of the second end M57 (the air resistance is large). Then, air easily enters between the second end M57 and the reel band MO below the second end M57, and the reel band MO near the second end M57 is gradually peeled off.

  On the other hand, the reel band MO starts to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end portion M57, and then the first end portion M55 is attached in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the reel M50. In the case where the first end M55 overlaps the upper end, when the game is executed and the reel M50 rotates, the second end M57 overlaps the reel band MO described above. As compared with, air does not easily come into contact with the cross section of the first end M55 (the air resistance is small), and air does not easily enter between the first end M55 and the reel band MO below the first end M55. The reel band MO near the first end M55 is hardly peeled off.

  As described above, when attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO starts to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is rotated in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the reel M50. It is preferable that the first end portion M55 be overlaid on the reel band MO so that the first end portion M55 is overlaid on the reel band MO.

<Various errors>
As described above, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, an overlap portion M58 is formed between the first end M55 and the second end M57, and the first end M55 or the second end M55 is formed. A cut M59 is formed by any one of the ends M57. Since the above-described reel frame MW is formed of a resin such as plastic, an error may occur during molding. In addition, when assembling the reel frame MW, an error may occur due to deformation. Furthermore, since the reel band MO has flexibility, when the reel band MO is mounted on the reel frame MW, the reel band MO is mounted with distortion or the like occurring, or the size of the reel frame MW ( (Outer periphery) may be attached in a state slightly different from the design value. When a large symbol (for example, “White Seven”) is positioned on the reel band MO below the superimposed portion M58, the mounting position of the reel band MO is not desired because of these various errors. When the large symbol overlaps with the large symbol when the large symbol overlaps with the large symbol, the large symbol may be covered by the upper reel band MO.

  In addition, the player may aim at the bonus symbol depending on the playing state, and when the bonus symbol is arranged near the cut M59, the player may aim at the bonus symbol at the time of pushing. For example, when the bonus symbol is stopped, the cut M59 may be visually recognized when the bonus symbol is visually recognized. When the various errors as described above have occurred, it is assumed that the player may visually recognize not only the design but also the shift of the cut M59 and the shift of the position of the design. When the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol combination, the player pays attention to the bonus symbol together with the joy, since the symbol combination is a symbol combination having a high profit for the player. If the shift of the position of the symbol is visually recognized, the joy that the symbol combination serving as the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed may decrease.

<In case of bonus design>
In order to prevent such a situation, a symbol smaller than the largest symbol such as a bonus symbol is arranged at a position closest to the cut M59. Specifically, when the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (eg, the bonus symbol) having the longest length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LL, the length in the longitudinal direction is larger than LL. The shorter symbol (the length SL in the longitudinal direction) is arranged at a position closest to both the first end M55 and the second end M57.

  By arranging a symbol having a short length in the longitudinal direction at a position closest to the first end M55 and the second end M57 in this manner, even if various errors occur, these symbols can be used. The symbol can be arranged at a position separated from the overlapping portion M58 (cut M59), and the symbol can be prevented from being covered by the reel band MO. Further, even when the above-described various errors occur, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the shift of the cut M59, the shift of the symbol position, and the like. In the figure, the length in the longitudinal direction of a bell symbol (a symbol that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to a bell) and the longitudinal length of a cherry symbol (a symbol that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to a cherry) are shown. Although shown as the same SL, if the length is shorter than LL which is the length of the bonus symbol (white seven) in the length direction, the length of the bell symbol and the length of the cherry symbol in the length direction are made different. No problem. Further, the symbols arranged near the cut M59 are not limited to the bell symbol and the cherry symbol, but may be a bonus symbol. For example, a re-game symbol (a symbol that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to the re-game) Or, a watermelon symbol (a symbol that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon) may be arranged near the cut M59. Further, in this example, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bonus symbol (white seven) and the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (for example, a bell symbol) located near the cut M59 are compared, but the present invention is not limited to this. The length of the bonus symbol (white seven) in the width direction may be longer than the length of the symbol (for example, a bell symbol) located near the cut M59 in the width direction.

  In the above-described example, a symbol having a longest length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (eg, a bonus symbol) has a length LL, and a symbol having a length in the longitudinal direction shorter than LL has a length SL in the longitudinal direction. The layout of the symbols is determined by the comparison of the above, but the length of the short direction (the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LT, and the width of the symbol whose length in the short direction is shorter than LT. The arrangement of the symbols may be determined by comparison with the length ST in the direction.

  The above-mentioned lengths LL and SL in the longitudinal direction are the lengths of the difference between the uppermost projecting symbol portion and the lowermost projecting symbol portion along the longitudinal direction. Similarly, the lengths LT and ST in the short direction are the lengths of the differences between the uppermost and lowermost design portions along the short direction.

<In the case of small role design>
Furthermore, in addition to the bonus symbol, a symbol such as a watermelon symbol or a cherry symbol which is not stopped and displayed on the activated line depending on the operation timing of the stop button even if it is won, in other words, is arranged at a distance more than the maximum number of slip frames. A symbol having at least one location (a symbol corresponding to a rare role, a symbol that may be missed, etc.) is also a symbol to be pushed, and is a symbol that the player is trying to visually recognize. It is. Also, in a game that has won the rare role, the player may not be notified of the rare role before operating the stop button.In such a case, the player wants to win the rare role. In many cases, the stop button is operated at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button in which it is easy to acquire a role (the player has the highest profit). Some gaming machines have a large number of winning combinations, such as one when the player wins a prize, and in such a case, the operation timing of the stop button (the operation timing of the stop button, which is the most profitable for the player). In many cases, the stop button is operated. Note that operating the stop button at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button that is most profitable for the player may be referred to as an optimal game method.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 71, an example of the relationship with the break M59 when executing the game by the optimal game method will be described in detail below. In the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 71, the activated lines are the upper left reel, the upper middle reel, the upper right reel (upper straight line), the left reel middle stage, the middle reel middle stage, and the right reel middle stage (middle straight line). Left reel lower, middle reel lower, right reel lower (straight lower straight), left reel upper, middle reel middle, right reel lower (right lower straight), left reel lower, middle reel middle, right reel upper (right rising straight) ), And the specified number is three. In addition, when the role of watermelon and the role of cherry are held as rare roles, when the role of watermelon wins, "watermelon / watermelon / watermelon" is stopped and displayed in a straight line on the activated line, and the role of cherry wins Is configured to stop and display "Cherry / any / any" (any indicates any symbol) on the activated line in a straight line. Further, since both the watermelon symbol and the cherry symbol are rare, the symbol has at least one or more locations separated by more than the maximum number of sliding frames.

  FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. In the figure, only the left reel is illustrated. In the example shown in FIG. 71, watermelon, bell, replay, BAR, and cherry are arranged in this order on the reel band MO, and these symbols are located at positions away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. Are located in When the rare role is won, the player often operates the stop button aiming at a position on the reel where it is easy to detect the winning of the rare role and easily win the rare role. When a certain watermelon role or cherry role is won, the rare role can be awarded by playing with the above-mentioned optimal game method. Specifically, as the operation timing of the stop button that allows the rare role to be won, the stop button stops during three frames from the timing at which the cherry symbol is located at the upper stage to the timing at which the cherry symbol is located at the lower stage. By operating the button, it is possible to win a winning in both the watermelon role and the cherry role. When the stop button is operated at such an operation timing (optimal game method), a range of nine frames from the upper stage of the cherry symbol to the lower stage of the watermelon symbol is a range in which stop display is possible, and is shown in FIG. As described above, even when any of the nine frames is stopped and displayed (in any of the nine stop display modes), the position distant from the first end M55 or the second end M57. (There is no cut M59 near the design placed two frames above the watermelon, and there is no cut M59 near the design placed two frames below the cherry), and the gap M59 is misaligned. It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the shift of the positions of the symbols and the symbols.

  As shown in the drawing, a symbol that can be stopped and displayed when the stop button is operated aiming at a position on the reel where the rare role is likely to be won is displayed near the first end M55 or the second end M57. The first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57 can be configured so as not to be located at positions where the reel is frequently stopped and displayed, so that the gap M59 is displaced and the position of the symbol is not provided. Even if a shift occurs, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the shift of the cut M59 and the shift of the position of the symbol.

  In this example, the number of steps for one round of the reel is 336 steps, and the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 20 symbols (20 frames). Here, since 336 ÷ 20 = 16, which is surplus 16, there are 16 17-step frames (symbols) and 4 16-step frames (symbols) as 20 frames (symbols). The reel is configured. In addition, it is preferable that the break M59 be configured so as not to be visually recognized by the player as much as possible. Therefore, the frame (symbol) adjacent to the break M59 should be 16 steps having a relatively small number of steps. Is preferred.

  In addition, as a configuration of the spinning-type gaming machine in this example, there is no need to insert and pay out substantial game medals used in a general spinning-type gaming machine, and a pseudo-medium of data is used. The game may be configured to be able to proceed. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the spinning-type gaming machine can be improved by the amount that there is no need to insert and pay out substantial game medals (for example, the game medal insertion opening portion). And the front door and the back box are integrated so as to block the gap where foreign objects are inserted), reducing the risk of using illegal gaming medals, It can also be configured to improve security against such illegal acts (so-called goto acts) (sometimes referred to as enclosed-type spinning-type gaming machines). Note that the configuration of the enclosed spinning-type gaming machine is applicable to any of the above-described embodiments (or configurations). The credit and the number-of-credits display device D200 may not be provided. For example, the credit and the total score (total score) are collected as one total score, and the main control board M, the payout control. The board H (may also be referred to as a game value control board or a game value control means) or another board may execute the process of increasing or decreasing the total score or the display process.

In addition, it corresponds to a substantial game medal used in a general spinning-type gaming machine, and has a "score" as a pseudo game medium used for playing a game in a sealed-type spinning-type gaming machine. You may comprise. The “score” may be referred to as “score information”, “points”, “points information”, “game value”, and “game value information”. A physical game medal that physically exists can be handled directly by a player. On the other hand, with the enclosed spinning-type gaming machine, the player can proceed with the game without directly handling substantial game medals. The score is not a substantial game medal but a pseudo game medium converted into data so that a CPU such as a main control board can perform arithmetic processing. The “credit” is a score for temporarily storing the score in a bettable state or a state in which the account can be settled, and is data mainly managed by the main control board M. Further, the “total score” is all the scores that can be put into the enclosed spinning-type gaming machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The “total score” corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a general spinning-type gaming machine using substantial game medals. In the case where the configuration of the enclosed spinning-type gaming machine is applied to the above-described embodiment, what is referred to as a “game medal” in this specification is referred to as a “score”, “score information”, There is no problem to treat as "points", "point information", "game value", "game value information", etc. As appropriate, "score", "score information", "points", "point information" , "Game value" and "game value information". It is not necessary to have “credit”. Further, there is no problem in replacing the credit number display device with the total score display device.

(2nd Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, a state in which the player is in an advantageous state with respect to the AT is configured to include an in-AT state and the like. Is provided and the interest of the game is improved, but the configuration of the gaming machine capable of executing the AT is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, a configuration of a spinning-type gaming machine capable of executing an AT different from the configuration of the present embodiment will be described as a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 16 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment in this figure is step 4100 (second) and step 4200 (second), that is, after executing the above-described condition device number management processing in step 1450, step 4100 (second) In 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a rotation start freeze execution determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1550.

  Further, after executing the above-described during-AT state start control processing in step 1750, in step 4200 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a freeze stop execution determination processing described later, and proceeds to step 3500. Transition. As will be described later in detail, in the second embodiment, the freeze occurs when the reel starts rotating (when the start lever D50 is operated) and when the reel stops (when the last reel stops and when the third reel stops). (The reels do not start to rotate for a predetermined time or the betting operation related to the next game for a predetermined time cannot be executed).

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of rotation start freeze execution determination processing according to the subroutine of step 4100 (second) in FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT has been newly changed to the “AT-in-progress state” from the game. Here, the "newly in the AT state" means that the state relating to the AT becomes the "AT in state" for the first time after winning the AT lottery (also sometimes referred to as an AT first hit). As an example, (1) BB is won in the “high probability state” → transition to “advantageous BB inside medium state” → BB symbol (bonus symbol) is stopped and displayed, and transition to “advantageous BB state” → BB Finished and newly transitioned to the "AT state", (2) when winning the cherry in the "high probability state", win the AT lottery in 1/2, and after winning the AT lottery, there is a precursor state. This is a state related to the AT that allows the player to have a sense of expectation regarding whether or not the player has won the AT lottery. Even if the player does not win the AT lottery related to the cherry, the same as the “foreboding state” The production mode (background production, etc.) When configured to shift to｝, the cherry is won in the “high probability state” and the AT lottery based on the winning of the cherry is won, so the state shifts to the “aura state” → Since the predetermined number of games as the end condition of the “precursor state” has been executed, a transition to the game state such as a new transition to the “at-AT state” corresponds to “a new AT state”. . On the other hand, as an example of a case that does not correspond to “the AT is in the new AT state”, (1) staying in the “AT being in the AT state” → “AT continuation battle state” because the AT counter value has become 0０ The state shifts again to the state during which there is a possibility that the state may shift to the “AT state” again (runs in a row) → The state shifts to the “AT state” again. (2) BB is won in the “AT state” → “ The game state transition, such as shifting to the advantageous BB inside middle state → stopping the BB symbol (bonus symbol) and displaying the “advantageous BB state” → ending the BB and shifting to the “AT during state” again, is “new”. AT state ".

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 4102, in step 4104, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the AT start freeze execution flag (the flag that turns on to execute the freeze at the start of reel rotation). ) Is turned on. Next, in step 4106, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues an AT start freeze execution command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and when the sub-control board S side receives the command, , An AT start effect will be executed), and then the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 4102, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1550). Note that the freeze illustrated in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if various types (execution conditions and execution times) of freezes are provided.

  Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. The differences from the present embodiment are steps 1568 (second) to step 1574 (second), that is, in step 1568 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the AT start freeze execution flag to ON. Is determined. If Yes in step 1568 (second), in step 1570 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the AT start freeze execution flag. Next, in step 1572 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a freeze execution timer (a decrement timer, and a freeze execution time to be executed when a new “in AT state”) and an “AT The timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze executed when the "middle state" ends and the freeze execution time at the start (in this example, 5 seconds, and the new "AT state") The execution time of the freeze executed in this case is set, the timer is started, and the flow shifts to step 1574 (second). Next, in step 1574 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer has become 0. If Yes in step 1574 (second), the process moves to step 1552. On the other hand, if No in step 1574 (second), the process of step 1574 (second) is repeatedly performed until the freeze execution time at the start of the “AT state” has elapsed. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1568 (second), the processing shifts to step 1552.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, a freeze (which may be referred to as a freeze at the time of starting the AT) is executed when a new “AT-in-progress state” is started, and details thereof will be described later. However, during the execution of the freeze, an AT start effect is executed on the sub-control board S side. In this example, the execution time of the freeze at the start of the AT is set to 5 seconds. However, the execution time can be changed without any problem, and it is preferable to set the execution time in accordance with the execution time of the AT start effect. In this example, the freeze execution time at the end of the AT described later is 3 seconds, and the freeze execution time at the start of the AT is longer than the freeze execution time at the end of the AT. Have been. As described above, by setting the freeze execution time at the start of the AT, which will be advantageous to the player in the future, relatively longer than the freeze execution time at the end of the AT, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play. It can be a high gaming machine.

  Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the freeze-at-stop-execution determination processing according to the subroutine of step 4200 (second) in FIG. 75 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT counter value has newly become 0 in the game. “The AT counter value has newly become 0” means that the AT counter value has changed from “1 → 0” in a situation where the AT counter value is decreasing, such as “in the AT state”. This does not include the case where the AT counter value is always 0, such as the situation where the state related to the AT is the “normal game state”.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 4202, the process proceeds to step 4206. On the other hand, if No in step 4202, in step 4204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the advantageous section remaining game number counter value is newly set to 0 in the game. "The advantageous section remaining game number counter value is newly set to 0" means that the advantageous section remaining game number counter value is reduced in a situation where the advantageous section remaining game number counter value is decremented such as "in the AT state". This is the case where “1 → 0”, and does not include the case where the counter value of the number-of-advantageous-section remaining game counter is always 0, such as a situation where the state related to the AT is the “normal game state”. In the case of Yes in step 4204, the process moves to step 4206. Next, in step 4206, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a freeze execution timer (a decrement timer, the execution time of the freeze which is executed when the state newly changes to the "AT state" and the "AT state". The end freeze execution time (in this example, 3 seconds, which is executed when the “AT-in-progress state” ends) is added to the end freeze execution time (a timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze executed at the end). Is set, and the timer is started. Next, in step 4208, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues an AT end freeze execution command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and when the sub-control board S side receives the command, , An AT end effect will be executed), and the flow shifts to step 4210. Next, in step 4210, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer is 0. If Yes in step 4210, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 3500). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 4210, the process of step 4210 is repeatedly executed until the freeze execution time at the end of the “AT state” ends. If the answer is No in Step 4204, the process moves to the next process (the process in Step 3500).

  Next, FIG. 76 is an AT start effect execution image diagram in the second embodiment. In the figure, an example of a case where the power is not interrupted during the execution of the AT start effect and an example of a case where the power is interrupted will be described in detail.

  First, a case where the power supply is not interrupted during the execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, when the start lever D50 relating to the game in which the state relating to the AT is newly changed to the "AT state" is operated (the start condition of the game is satisfied), the AT start effect is started, and the freeze is executed. Is done. Further, as an effect mode of the AT start effect, “Warp execution!” Is displayed for one second on the effect display device S40 (while the AT start effect is being executed, a background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is always executed). . In this example, the execution time of the AT start effect and the freeze is 5 seconds. After that, one second has elapsed from the start of the freeze, and the display of "Warp execution!" On the effect display device S40 is erased. Note that the state in which only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for three seconds. Thereafter, when four seconds have elapsed from the start of the freeze, “AT50G START !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40 for one second as the effect mode of the AT start effect. Thereafter, when five seconds elapse from the start of the freeze, the execution of the freeze ends, the execution of the AT start effect ends, and the rotation of the reels starts. When the execution of the AT start effect is completed, the display of “AT50G START !!” on the effect display device S40 is erased, and the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed in the AT-in state. It will switch to a possible background effect. Also, in the first game in the AT state, when the above-described push order navigation is executed, (1) the freeze starts to execute → five seconds have elapsed and the freeze ends → the reel starts rotating and the effect is produced. The push order navigation is displayed on the display device S40. (2) Freezing starts → Freeze ends after 5 seconds elapses → Reel starts rotating → Reel driving state changes to reel constant speed state and effect display device S40 displays To display the push order navigation. With this configuration, even when the rotation start timing of the reel is later than the conventional timing due to the execution of the freeze, the player erroneously operates the stop button corresponding to the pressing order different from the correct pressing order. Can be prevented.

  Next, a case where the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail in FIG. First, when the start lever D50 relating to the game in which the state relating to the AT is newly changed to the "AT state" is operated (the start condition of the game is satisfied), the AT start effect is started, and the freeze is executed. Is done. Further, as an effect mode of the AT start effect, “Warp execution!” Is displayed for one second on the effect display device S40 (while the AT start effect is being executed, a background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is always executed). . In this example, the execution time of the AT start effect and the freeze is 5 seconds (excluding the time during which the power is turned off). After that, one second has elapsed from the start of the freeze, and the display of "Warp execution!" On the effect display device S40 is erased. Note that the state in which only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for three seconds. Thereafter, when two seconds have elapsed from the start of the execution of the freeze, the power is cut off (for example, the power supply of the game hall is cut off). Thereafter, when the power is restored, “AT50G START !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 3 seconds, and the freeze is kept executed. Thereafter, when the total time from the start of execution of the freeze except for when the power is turned off becomes 5 seconds, the execution of the freeze ends, the execution of the AT start effect ends, and the rotation of the reels starts. It will be. As described above, in the present example, when the power is cut off during the execution of the freeze (during the execution of the AT start effect), and the power returns after the power cut, the execution time of the freeze is changed from the state before the occurrence of the power cut. It will be executed continuously. As an example, when the execution time of the freeze is 5 seconds, if the power is turned off one second after the start of the execution of the freeze, the freeze is executed for 4 seconds after the power is restored, and the execution of the freeze is performed. If a power failure occurs three seconds after the start, freeze is performed for two seconds after the power is restored.

  Also, the execution time of the AT start effect is the same as the execution time of the freeze. It will be executed continuously from the state before the occurrence. On the other hand, the effect mode of the AT start effect is different between the case where the power supply is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect and the case where the power supply is not cut off. Specifically, during the execution of the AT start effect. If no power interruption has occurred, “AT50G START !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40 at the timing when four seconds have elapsed from the start of the execution of the AT start effect, while the AT start effect is being executed. When the power is turned off, “AT50G START !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40 after the power is turned off, regardless of the power-off timing. The display of “AT50G START !!” may be referred to as an AT start game number display. Also, in the same drawing, the number of games at start of AT is displayed so as to notify that the number of remaining AT games at the start of AT (at the start of the state during AT) is 50 games. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a case where the lottery with the number of AT games added can be executed in the “advantageous BB state” executed immediately before the transition to the AT in-state, the AT in the “advantageous BB state” can be executed. The number of AT remaining games acquired in the winning of the number-of-games lottery is added to the 50 games that is the initial number of AT games, and the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the number of games displayed at the start of AT. Is also good. As an example, when the number of AT remaining games of 30 games is acquired by an additional lottery in the number of AT games in the “advantageous BB state”, “AT80G START !!” is displayed as the game number display at the start of AT. You may. Note that, in the same drawing, only the AT start effect is illustrated, but the AT end effect is similarly performed in the case of the AT end effect in the case where power is cut off during the execution of the AT end effect and in the case where power is cut off. (For example, in the case where the power is not turned off during the execution of the AT end effect, “AT end GET〇〇” is displayed two seconds after the start of the AT end effect.) On the other hand, when the power is cut off during the execution of the AT end effect, “AT end GET〇〇” is displayed after the return from the power off, regardless of the timing of the power cut off). The effect is displayed during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, and is displayed immediately after the power is turned off when the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect. If so, the display is not limited to the display of the number of games at the start of the AT, and there is no problem as long as the display allows the player to visually recognize the game so that the game can proceed smoothly.

  With the configuration described above, according to the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed when the state is newly shifted to the AT state and when the AT state is ended, and Then, an AT start effect is executed during the freeze execution when the state is newly shifted to the AT state, and an AT end effect is executed during the freeze execution when the AT state is ended. In the case of such a configuration, in the case where the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, after the power is turned off, the display is scheduled to be displayed from a predetermined timing in the AT start effect or the AT end effect. By configuring the display to be displayed immediately after returning from the power-off, even if an unintended power-off (for example, a power outage at the amusement arcade) occurs during execution of the freeze, the game, such as the number of remaining AT games, can be performed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot grasp the state of the game by immediately displaying information necessary for the player to grasp the state of the game.

  In the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed when the state is newly shifted to the AT state and when the AT state is ended. However, the freeze execution mode is not limited to this. , BB start, BB end, or the like, or may be configured to be executed based on a winning condition device or a staying game state.

In addition, from the configuration related to the freeze in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the above-described example,
Freeze execution period when no power failure occurs during freeze execution = A
When a power failure occurs during execution of a freeze, a freeze execution period until the power failure occurs = B
When a power failure occurs during execution of a freeze, a freeze execution period after the power failure occurs = C
Then,
A = B + C
It is configured so that

  When the freeze related to the AT start effect is completed, the above-described reel acceleration processing is executed.

<<<<< Configuration 2 applicable to this example >>>>>
The configuration applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Note that any of the configurations described below can be applied to all of the above-described embodiments, and the configuration 1 described below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations described below may be applied. Supplement what you may do.

<<<< Lamp unit configuration >>>>
First, a configuration related to lighting of a lamp unit (a generic name of the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10) applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78.

  FIG. 77 is a lamp unit lighting configuration image. In the same figure, a configuration relating to lighting of a lamp unit applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail. Each item shown in the figure is only a partial excerpt. For example, the items shown in the column of the element 1 are not limited to eight items from “red” to “no color”. First, as shown in FIG. 77, there are six types of elements 1 to 6 as elements related to lighting of the lamp unit.

<Element 1>
Element 1 is a lighting color, and includes 8 of “red”, “blue”, “green”, “white”, “red + green”, “blue + green”, “blue + white”, and “no color”. Elements 1 have different types of lighting colors. Note that the lamp unit according to the present example is configured by a plurality of LEDs, and when the lighting color is “red”, it indicates that all the LEDs are lit in red, and the lighting color is “red + blue”. "Indicates that out of N LEDs, which is the total number of LEDs, M LEDs are lit in red and L LEDs are lit in blue (N = M + L). . In addition, the combination of the order of the LED which lights up in red and the LED which lights up in blue may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds. A plurality of lighting colors such as “red + blue 1” and “red + blue 2” may be provided). “No color” indicates light-off (non-lighting), which is the lighting color selected when the light is always turned off. Note that, as described above, the number of items constituting elements 1 to 6 in the drawing is only an excerpt, and in element 1, three or more colors such as “red + blue + green” are used. There is no problem even if it is configured to have a combined lighting color.

<Element 2>
Element 2 is the lighting time, and includes “0.1 seconds”, “0.2 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, “1 second”, “3 seconds”, “always”, and “no lighting”. Element 7 has seven types of lighting time. Note that “always” is the lighting time selected when the lighting is always on, and “no lighting” is the lighting time selected when the lighting is always off.

<Element 3>
Element 3 is a light-off time, and includes “0.1 seconds”, “0.2 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, “1 second”, “3 seconds”, “always”, and “no light off”. Element 3 has seven types of light-off time. “Always” is the lighting time selected when the light is always turned off, and “No light” is the light-off time selected when the light is always turned on.

<Element 4>
The element 4 is a lighting time pattern, and the lighting time pattern is configured by combining the lighting time of the element 2 and the light-off time of the element 3; "OFF", "ON for 0.1 seconds → OFF for 0.3 seconds", "ON for 0.2 seconds → OFF for 0.3 seconds", "ON for 1 second → OFF for 0.1 seconds", "ON for 3 seconds → 0. Element 4 has seven types of lighting time patterns of “3 seconds off”, “always on”, and “always off”. As an example of the lighting time pattern, in the case of “lighting on for 0.1 second → lighting off for 0.1 second”, the lighting time of element “0.1 second” and the lighting off of element 3 “0.1 second” It is configured by combining time. Note that “always on” is a lighting time pattern selected when the lighting is always on, and is configured by combining the lighting time of “always” which is the element 2 and the lighting time of “no light off” which is the element 3 Have been. “Always off” is a lighting time pattern that is selected when the lighting is always off, and is configured by combining the lighting time of “no lighting” which is element 2 and the “light off time” of “always” which is element 3 Have been.

<Element 5>
The element 5 is a lighting element, and the lighting element is configured by combining a lighting color as the element 1 and a lighting time pattern as the element 4. In other words, the lighting element is configured by combining the lighting color as the element 1, the lighting time as the element 2, and the light-off time as the element 3. In the figure, for the sake of explanation, the specific contents of the lighting elements are shown as lighting element contents, and the identification elements assigned to the respective lighting element contents are shown as lighting element types. As lighting elements,
Lighting element type a: "0.1 second red on → 0.1 second off"
Lighting element type b: “blue light on for 0.1 second → light off for 0.1 second”
Lighting element type c: "0.1 second red on → 0.3 second off"
Lighting element type d: "0.1 seconds red + blue light → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type e: "0.2 seconds red + blue light → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type f: "blue + green light for 0.2 seconds → light off for 0.3 seconds"
Lighting element type g: "1 second white on → 0.1 second off"
Lighting element type h: "1s blue + white lighting → 0.1s off"
Lighting element type i: "Green for 3 seconds → Turn off for 0.3 seconds"
Lighting element type j: "3 seconds blue + green light → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type k: "Always red light"
Lighting element type 1: "Always blue light"
Lighting element type m: "Always green light"
Lighting element type n: "Always white lighting"
Lighting element type o: "Always red + green light"
Lighting element type p: "always blue + green light"
Lighting element type q: "Always blue + white lighting"
Lighting element type r: "Always off (no color)"
18 as the element 5. As an example of the lighting element, in the case of “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off”, element 1 “red” and element 4 “0.1 second lighting → 0.1 second off” The lighting time pattern (the lighting time pattern is a combination of the lighting time and the light-off time as described above) is combined. “Always on red + green” is configured by combining “red + green” which is element 1 and “always on” which is element 4. “Always off (no color)” is configured by combining element 1 “no color” and element 4 “always off”.

<Element 6>
The element 6 has a lighting pattern, and is configured by combining one or a plurality of lighting elements as the element 5. In the figure, for the sake of explanation, the specific contents of the lighting pattern are shown as the lighting pattern contents, and the identification elements assigned to the respective lighting pattern contents are shown as the lighting pattern types. As the lighting pattern,
Pattern 1: “a → a → a → a”
Pattern 2: “b → b → b → b”
Pattern 3: “a → b → a → b”
Pattern 4: “a → a → g → g”
Pattern 5: “g → f → j”
Pattern 6: “i → h → b”
Pattern 7: “g → f → b”
Pattern 8: “i → j → g”
Pattern 9: “g → g → g”
Pattern 10: "k"
Pattern 11: "l"
Pattern 12: "m"
Pattern 13: "n"
Pattern 14: "o"
Pattern 15: "p"
Pattern 16: “q”
Pattern 17: "r"
17 as the element 6. As an example of the lighting pattern, in the case of pattern 1: “a → a → a → a”, the element 5 “red light for 0.1 second → light off for 0.1 second” is configured to be repeated four times. In the case of the pattern 8 “i → j → g”, after the lighting element type i: “3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off”, the lighting element type j: “3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0” .3 seconds off "and the lighting element type g:" 1 second white on → 0.1 seconds off ". It is to be noted that the lighting units may be further combined to light the lamp unit as in pattern 1 → pattern 4, or “1” → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 →. “Pattern 1 → Pattern 4” may be repeatedly turned on until the lighting end condition is satisfied. In addition, the lighting end condition may be configured to be satisfied when a game situation such as a predetermined error release changes, or may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  As described above, the lamp unit in the gaming machine according to the present example is configured to be lit by a combination of the lighting patterns, and the lighting pattern of the element 6 is configured by the combination of the lighting elements of the element 5; Are configured by a combination of the lighting color of the element 1 and the lighting time pattern of the element 4, and the lighting time pattern of the element 4 is configured by a combination of the lighting time of the element 2 and the extinguishing time of the element 3. Have been.

  In addition, although the structure related to the lighting of the lamp unit has been described in detail as including the elements 1 to 6, the invention is not limited thereto, and the number of elements may be increased or decreased, or the elements 1 to 6 may be increased. May be changed (for example, the element 1 is set to the lighting luminance).

  Next, FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-based notification mode. In the same drawing, a lighting pattern of a lamp unit (sometimes referred to as a lamp unit lighting pattern) and a lighting mode of a turning backlight S30 (also referred to as a back lamp lighting mode) applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. ), And an example of the configuration of the sound output from the speaker S20 (also referred to as the sound of the speaker) for each game situation. Note that each item shown in the figure is only a partial excerpt. For example, the lighting pattern executed during the execution of BB is not limited to only one type of pattern 7, but the type of BB (conditions related to BB) The lighting pattern may be made different depending on the type of device) or the gaming state where the BB has been won. In one BB, a lighting mode (lighting cycle) combining a plurality of lighting patterns is repeatedly executed until the BB ends. It should be added that the configuration may be such that As for the error, a medal empty error is shown as an example, but the lighting pattern of the lamp unit may be different depending on the type of the error. In all of Configurations 1 to 6, during a normal game (an error is not occurring, the power is not immediately turned on, the standby screen is not displayed, the setting check mode is not set, and the setting change mode is not set. Any of the lighting patterns of the lamp unit that can be selected in the situation where the bonus is not being executed) is any of pattern 2, pattern 5, pattern 6, pattern 7, pattern 8, pattern 9, pattern 11, pattern 15, pattern 16, and pattern 17. Or one or more combinations. In addition, since it is comprised so that it may have various game states, such as a low probability state and an AT state, as a normal game, the lighting pattern of the lamp unit which can be selected according to a game state may be made different. In other words, it may be configured to have a lighting pattern that is not selected in a specific gaming state or a lighting pattern that can be selected only in a specific gaming state. Note that the time when the power is turned on is a state (immediately after the power is turned on) until a predetermined time (for example, one second) elapses after the power is turned on.

<< Configuration 1 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with a relatively small light quantity (light quantity smaller than normal light quantity) Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) for exclusive use while a medal empty error occurs until the error is cleared
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Turns off speaker sound: Outputs a dedicated sound for a predetermined time when the power is turned on. <During standby screen display>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light volume Speaker sound: No output <During setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 12 (always lit green)
Back lamp lighting mode: Turn off speaker sound: Sound exclusively for setting check mode <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 9 (Repeat "1 second white on → 0.1 second off" three times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Turn off speaker sound: Sound exclusively for setting change mode <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 (“1 second white lighting → 0.1 second dark” → “0.2 second blue + green lighting → 0.3 second dark” → “0.1 second blue lighting → 0.1 second” Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting at normal light volume Speaker sound: Looping (repeated playback) of the dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above. It should be noted that the effect performed when the power is turned on may be configured to be different depending on the effect executed before the power-off occurs or the game state before the power-off occurs.

  As in Configuration 1, only different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting patterns of the lamp unit during the occurrence of an error such as when a medal empty error occurs and during the normal game, and as the lighting colors that constitute the lighting patterns. By configuring so that red is used when a medal empty error occurs, and red is not used during a normal game (configured so that a predetermined lighting color is selected only when an error occurs), a player or an administrator can In this case, it is possible to easily determine whether an error has occurred and whether no error has occurred, thereby making it possible to smoothly operate a game arcade or progress a game. Further, by configuring different lighting patterns as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit immediately after power-on and during normal game, a player or an administrator can easily determine immediately after power-on and during normal game. It is possible to smoothly operate the game arcade and the progress of the game. In addition, the player can proceed with the game without stress without misunderstanding that an error has occurred even during the normal game, and the manager can clearly determine the gaming machine in which the error has occurred. Becomes Also, by configuring a different lighting pattern as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit between when the standby screen is displayed and during the normal game, the player or the manager can easily switch between the standby screen display and the normal game. It is possible to make a determination, and it is possible to smoothly operate the game hall and progress the game. In addition, during the display of the standby screen, it is possible to suppress power consumption due to using a flashy lighting pattern even though the player is not playing a game. Further, by configuring a different lighting pattern as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit during the setting check mode and during the normal game, the player or the manager can easily switch between the setting check mode and the normal game. It is possible to make a determination, and it is possible to smoothly operate the game hall and progress the game. In addition, it is possible to immediately determine an unintended setting confirmation mode by the administrator, to quickly identify an unintended setting confirmation mode, and to detect even if the user forgets to turn off the setting key switch. can do. Further, by configuring a different lighting pattern as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit during the setting change mode and during the normal game, the player or the manager can easily switch between the setting change mode and the normal game. It is possible to make a determination, and it is possible to smoothly operate the game hall and progress the game. In addition, the setting change mode not intended by the administrator can be immediately determined, and the setting change mode not intended by the administrator can be quickly determined. Further, by configuring a different lighting pattern as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit during the BB execution and during the normal game (a state where the BB is not being executed), the player or the administrator can perform the BB execution and the normal game. It is possible to easily determine that the game is in progress (a state in which BB is not being executed), and the player or the manager can clearly determine the situation of the game.

  Note that, as described above, the difference between the occurrence of an error relating to the lamp unit and during a normal game, the difference between immediately after power-on and during a normal game, the difference between when a standby screen is displayed and during a normal game, and settings. The difference between the confirmation mode and the normal game, the difference between the setting change mode and the normal game, and the difference between the BB execution and the normal game include lighting colors (elements not used during the normal game). 1), may be configured to have a lighting time (element 2) that is not used during a normal game, or may be configured to have a lighting time (element 3) that is not used during a normal game. It may be configured to have a lighting time pattern (element 4) that is not used during a normal game, or may be configured to have a lighting element (element 5) that is not used during a normal game. And it may be configured to have unused lighting patterns (element 6) during normal game.

<< Configuration 2 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) for exclusive sound during medal empty error until error is cleared
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no color))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights (flashes) in a special pattern during standby screen display
Speaker sound: no output <during setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light volume Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light volume Speaker sound: No output <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 (“1 second white lighting → 0.1 second dark” → “0.2 second blue + green lighting → 0.3 second dark” → “0.1 second blue lighting → 0.1 second” Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting at normal light volume Speaker sound: Looping (repeated playback) of the dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above.

<< Configuration 3 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (repeat "0.1 second red on → 0.1 second off" four times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) for exclusive sound during medal empty error until error is cleared
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light volume Speaker sound: No output <During standby screen display>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 (“1 second white light → 0.1 second light off” → “0.2 second blue + green light → 0.3 second light off” → “3 second green light → 0.3 second light off” )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light volume Speaker sound: No output <During setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light volume Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light volume Speaker sound: No output <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 (“3 seconds green on → 0.3 seconds off” → “1 second blue + white on → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.1 second blue on → 0.1 seconds off” )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting at normal light volume Speaker sound: Looping (repeated playback) of the dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above.

<< Configuration 4 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 14 (always red + green)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) for exclusive sound during medal empty error until error is cleared
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Turn off speaker sound: No output <during setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 (“0.1 second red on → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second blue on → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second red on → 0.1 second Off ”→“ Blue on for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds ”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 (“0.1 second red on → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second blue on → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second red on → 0.1 second Off ”→“ Blue on for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds ”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Turn off speaker sound: No output <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 (“3 seconds green on → 0.3 seconds off” → “1 second blue + white on → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.1 second blue on → 0.1 seconds off” )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting at normal light volume Speaker sound: Looping (repeated playback) of the dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above. Note that the warning sound output from the speaker during the medal empty error and the warning sound output from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode are the same warning sound, and a medal empty error is generated separately from the warning sound. During the setting, the sound "Medium empty error is occurring" is output from the speaker. During the setting check mode, "Setting check mode is in progress" is output from the speaker. During the setting change mode, "Setting change mode is on.""Is output from the speaker. It should be noted that a warning sound and a sound of “〇〇 error in progress” may be similarly output from the speaker for an error different from the medal empty error.

<< Configuration 5 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) for exclusive sound during medal empty error until error is cleared
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: lighting → extinguished (lights up when playing normal game)
Speaker sound: no output <while the standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Turn off speaker sound: No output <during setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light volume Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for setting check mode <during setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light volume Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for setting change mode <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 (“1 second white light → 0.1 second light off” → “0.2 second blue + green light → 0.3 second light off” → “3 second blue + green light → 0.3 second” Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting at normal light volume Speaker sound: Looping (repeated playback) of the dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above.

<< Configuration 6 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (repeat "0.1 second red on → 0.1 second off" four times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) for exclusive sound during medal empty error until error is cleared
<At power-on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Turn off speaker sound: No output <during setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 (“0.1 second red on → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second red on → 0.1 second off” → “1 second white on → 0.1 second off” → "1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light volume Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for setting check mode <during setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 (“0.1 second red on → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second red on → 0.1 second off” → “1 second white on → 0.1 second off” → "1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting with normal light volume Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for setting change mode <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 (“1 second white light → 0.1 second light off” → “0.2 second blue + green light → 0.3 second light off” → “3 second blue + green light → 0.3 second” Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lighting at normal light volume Speaker sound: Looping (repeated playback) of the dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above.

  In the figure, six types of configurations, Configuration 1 to Configuration 6, are illustrated, but the configuration is merely an example, and the lamp unit lighting pattern, the back lamp lighting mode, and the sound output from the speaker for each game situation are shown. May be combined from each configuration, or may be changed in any way. Also, regarding the lighting pattern of the lamp unit, the difference between the error occurrence and during the normal game, the difference between immediately after the power is turned on and during the normal game, and the difference between the display of the standby screen and the normal game concerning the lamp unit. The above-described elements 1 to 6 include the differences, the differences between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game, the differences between the setting change mode and the normal game, and the differences between the BB execution and the normal game. It is preferable to configure any one of (see FIG. 77) such that an item that is not selected during a normal game is selected.

  Also, in the same figure, only a medal empty error is illustrated as an error, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a display determination error and a door opening error are also related to the lamp unit when an error occurs and during a normal game. Differences, differences between immediately after power-on and during normal games, differences between displaying the standby screen and during normal games, differences between during setting check mode and during normal games, during setting change mode and during normal games As a difference from the middle, and a difference between the BB execution and the normal game, one of the above-described elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) that is not selected during the normal game is selected. Depending on the type of error that has occurred, for example, one of the above-described elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) relating to the lamp unit may be different between a medal empty error and a display determination error. Lamp unit The elements described above 1 elements 6 according to the may be different from any of the (see FIG. 77).

  In addition, when the replay combination is stopped and displayed, the player may be notified of the stop display of the symbol combination relating to the replay combination by the lighting mode of the lamp unit. In the game executed in the gaming state of (1), the lamp unit is configured to be turned on when the symbol combination related to the replaying game is stopped and the replaying game is won, and any one of the elements 1 to 6 is performed. Is included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit, and is not included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit when a symbol combination different from the symbol combination related to the replaying game is stopped and displayed without winning the replaying game. You may comprise so that it may be. With this configuration, the player can clearly recognize that the player has won the replaying role.

<<<< Opening the front door and paying out >>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a detailed description will be given of a configuration relating to the payout of gaming medals applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In the figure, "normal" means, for example, that the winning combination -B (common bell) is won in the "low probability state", and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, winning 04) is stopped and displayed. In this case, 11 game medals are paid out. In the case of "Payout occurs before door is opened" or "Payout occurs after door is opened", winning -B (common bell) is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, winning 04) is stopped and displayed. Is exemplified. It should be noted that FIG. 14 illustrates a case where the credit (the number of credits displayed on the credit amount display device D200) is the upper limit value (50 in this example).

<< Configuration 1 >>
<In the case of normal payment>
The case where the normal payout in the configuration 1 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other one is spinning, the third stop button is pressed (when the third stop button is pressed, the third stop button is pressed). (It may be referred to as being turned on), the winning 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button becomes non-pressed (the state of the third stop button changes from being pressed to non-pressed, for example, when the player releases his / her finger from the third stop button. In addition, from when the third stop button is pressed) When the button is not pressed, the third stop button may be referred to as being changed from ON to OFF), a game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 (the same). A sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<Payment is executed before the door is opened>
Next, a case where the payout is executed before the door is opened in the configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other one is spinning, the third stop button is turned on, and the prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button is changed from on to off, a game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output from the speaker S20. Thereafter, in a situation where the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is output, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound for notifying that the front door DU is open from the speaker S20 (see FIG. Sound A) is output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output simultaneously. Thereafter, the output of the payout sound ends after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the output of the payout sound, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. Note that the front door DU is kept open, that is, the front door opening notification sound is output when the front door DU is opened, and is output even after the front door DU remains open. The output is terminated when a specific time has elapsed from the opening. With this configuration, in a case where the administrator opens the front door DU to perform setting confirmation or setting change, the front door opening notification sound is continuously output until the setting confirmation or the setting change is completed. Without being prevented, setting confirmation and setting change can be performed without stress. Although the output of the front door opening sound is ended at the same time as the output of the payout sound in the same figure, the present invention is not limited to this. There is no problem even if the end timing is different from the end timing.

<When payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in the configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other one is spinning, the third stop button is turned on, and the prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, in a situation where the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and a front door opening notification sound (sound A in the same figure) for notifying that the front door DU is open is output from the speaker S20. You. That is, regardless of the on / off state of the third stop button, the front door DU is opened to output a front door opening notification sound. Thereafter, in a situation where the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned off from on, a game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out, and the speaker S20 is output. The output of the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output simultaneously. After that, a specific time has elapsed since the opening of the front door DU, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. Thereafter, the output of the payout sound ends after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the output of the payout sound.

  As in the configuration 1, the payout of the game medals can be executed regardless of the opening of the front door DU, so that the administrator of the game hall forgets to close the front door DU when refilling the game machine with the game medals. Even in the case where the game has been completed (it does not close securely), the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player can be configured so as not to cause disadvantage. Further, by configuring so that the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound can be simultaneously output, the situation of the gaming machine can be grasped in real time. In addition, in the case of the above-described configuration 1, it is preferable to set an output mode (tone, pitch, tempo, etc.) so that the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound can be easily distinguished.

<< Configuration 2 >>
<In the case of normal payment>
The case where the normal payout in the configuration 2 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other one is spinning, the third stop button is pressed (when the third stop button is pressed, the third stop button is pressed). (It may be referred to as being turned on), the winning 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button becomes non-pressed (the state of the third stop button changes from being pressed to non-pressed, for example, when the player releases his / her finger from the third stop button. In addition, from when the third stop button is pressed) When the button is not pressed, the third stop button may be referred to as being changed from ON to OFF), a game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 (the same). A sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<Payment is executed before the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed before the door is opened in the configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other one is spinning, the third stop button is turned on, and the prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button is changed from on to off, a game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output from the speaker S20. Thereafter, in a situation where the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is output, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound for notifying that the front door DU is open from the speaker S20 (see FIG. The sound A) is output, and the output of the payout sound ends. Thereafter, a specific time has elapsed since the opening of the front door DU, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. Note that the predetermined time, which is the output period of the payout sound, ends during the output of the front door opening notification sound.

<When payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in the configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other one is spinning, the third stop button is turned on, and the prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, in a situation where the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and a front door opening notification sound (sound A in the same figure) for notifying that the front door DU is open is output from the speaker S20. You. That is, regardless of the on / off state of the third stop button, the front door DU is opened to output a front door opening notification sound. Thereafter, in a situation where the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned off from on, and a game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out. The corresponding payout sound is not output. Thereafter, in a situation where the payout of the game medals is being executed, a specific time has elapsed since the opening of the front door DU, the output of the front door opening notification sound ends, and the payout sound corresponding to the prize 04 is output. After that, a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the payout of the game medal corresponding to the winning 04, and the output of the payout sound ends.

  By configuring the game medal payout to be executable irrespective of the opening of the front door DU as in the configuration 2, the administrator of the game hall forgets to close the front door DU when refilling the gaming machine with the game medal. Even in the case where the game has been completed (it does not close securely), the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player can be configured so as not to cause disadvantage. Also, by preventing the front door opening notification sound and payout sound from being output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the situation of the gaming machine from being difficult to judge due to the mixture of the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound. can do. Note that, in the configuration 2, the payout sound is output even during the output of the front door opening notification sound, and the volume of the payout sound is relatively small compared to the volume of the front door opening notification sound (the volume 0 is also set). Included).

<< other configuration >>
When the configuration illustrated in FIG. 79 is applied, even when the front door DU is open, the insertion of a game medal, the operation of the max bet button (the bet button D220 in this example), and the bet button lamp S50 (both the max bet lamp) are performed. ) Or a bet lamp (1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp). That is, when a game medal is inserted while the front door DU is open, the insertion of the game medal can be detected (the blocker is on) and the insertion is valid (the credit increases or the game medal is Bet). In such a configuration, a bet sound (or medal insertion sound) corresponding to the insertion of a game medal or the operation of a bet button (max bet button) may be output from the speaker S20 (the front door DU). Even if is not open, the bet sound corresponding to the insertion of the game medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) can be output), and the insertion of the game medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) is supported. It may be configured not to output the played bet sound.

<<<< Power off and payout configuration >>>>
The following is an example of the operation that can be applied to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment when the power is turned off while the third stop is being pressed at the time of winning the small role. It should be noted that any of the configurations exemplified below can be applied to all embodiments according to the present example. The configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is the upper limit (for example, 50), in other words, a case where a game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small role. In addition, the effect by the flashing of the torso backlight S30 may be referred to as a back lamp effect.

<Configuration 1>
In a game that has won a small role (for example, a common bell of winning 04), the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win the small role → Power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed. (A power failure occurs in the game arcade, etc.) → Return to power while holding down the third stop button → Return to power and execute the above-mentioned operation of paying out game medals corresponding to the small role. You may.

  Further, when the game proceeds in a situation where the power supply is not interrupted and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small role is executed, a back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role can be executed, In addition, the payout sound based on the winning of the small role can be output, while the power is restored while pressing the third stop button as in the configuration 1 described above, and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small role is executed. In such a case, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role may not be executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small role may not be output. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sudden execution of the back lamp effect and the payout sound after the power is restored.

  With such a configuration, even if the power is turned off when the player presses the third stop and the power is immediately restored, the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small role is executed. And no disadvantage is caused to the player. In addition, even if any one of the predetermined operating members (for example, the start lever, all the stop buttons, the bet button (max bet button), the settlement button, etc.) controlled by the main control board M is operated, the other predetermined members are operated. If the operation member is not operated, payout of game medals based on winning may be executed. For example, when returning from a power-off, when both the third stop button and the start lever are operated (turned on), the payout of the game medal based on the winning is not executed. Is also good. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, (1) after that, by releasing the third stop button or releasing the start lever (one of the operating members controlled by the main control board M side that is turned on becomes one of the operating members). Payout of game medals based on winnings may be executed. (2) After that, by releasing the third stop button and the start lever (when the main control board M side is released). The payout of the game medals based on the winning may be executed by turning off all the operating members to be controlled).

  In addition, when the above-mentioned power interruption occurs, for example, a power switch is turned on from off, a power supply cable is disconnected, a power outage occurs in a game arcade, a power supply cable comes out of an insertion slot, In any case, the present invention can be applied to the above-described configuration.

<Configuration 2>
In the game that has won a small role (for example, a common bell of winning 04), the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win the small role → the front door DU is opened while the third stop button is pressed. (A door opening error occurs when the front door DU is opened), and the power is cut off (turn off the power switch, etc.) → The power is restored while the third stop button is pressed (the power switch is turned on). Etc.) → Close the front door DU while pressing the third stop button to release the door opening error (for example, insert the door key into the keyhole D260 and twist in a predetermined direction) → The door opening error is released and Alternatively, the above-described operation in which the payout of the game medal corresponding to the small combination is executed may be performed.

  In addition, when the game progresses in a situation where the power supply is not interrupted and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small role is executed, a back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role can be executed, In addition, the payout sound based on the winning of the small role can be output, while the door opening error is released while the third stop button is pressed as in the configuration 2 described above, and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small role Is executed, the backlamp effect based on the winning of the small role may not be executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small role may not be output. With this configuration, the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound are suddenly executed after the door opening error is cleared, so that the player is not surprised.

<Configuration 3>
In a game that has won a small role (for example, a common bell of winning 04), the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win the small role → Power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed. (A power failure occurs at the amusement arcade, etc.) → Release the third stop button (turn off the third stop button from ON to OFF) → Return to power → Return to power and pay out game medals corresponding to the small role May be executed as described above.

  In addition, when the game progresses in a situation where the power supply is not interrupted and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small role is executed, a back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role can be executed, In addition, the payout sound based on the winning of the small role can be output, while the power is cut off while the third stop button is depressed as in the above-described configuration 3, and the power is restored after the third stop button is released. In the case where the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small role is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role is not executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small role is not output. Good. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sudden execution of the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is restored.

  In the case of the above-described configuration 1, configuration 2 or configuration 3, it is determined whether or not the third stop button is pressed (whether or not the third stop button is on) as a process after the power is restored. Before executing the process (the process executed in the game progress control process), the payout of the game medals based on the winning (the process executed in the game progress control process) may be executed. In addition, as described above, in the situation where the symbol combination in which the small winning combination is awarded is stopped and displayed, the power is turned off while the third stop button is pressed, and then the power is restored from the power cut while the third stop button is pressed. After that, the payout of the game medal based on the winning may be executed by releasing the third stop button. In such a case, the output of the payout sound corresponding to the payout and the back lamp effect May be configured not to be executed (when the payout of the game medal based on the winning is executed without turning off the power, the output of the payout sound and the back lamp effect are executed).

<<<< Configuration Confirmation Mode and Payout Configuration >>>>
The following is an example of the operation that can be applied to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment when the setting key switch is turned on while the third stop is being pressed at the time of winning the small role. It should be noted that any of the configurations exemplified below can be applied to all embodiments according to the present example. The configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is the upper limit (for example, 50), in other words, a case where a game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small role. The configuration described in detail below is a state in which the reel is stopped and the power is turned on, and the main control board side such as a start lever, all stop buttons, a bet button (max bet button), a settlement button, and the like. When the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned on from off in the situation where the various operating members controlled by are not operated (not on), it is possible to shift to the setting check mode. This is an example. In the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to notify that the setting confirmation mode is being performed, or may not be configured to be notified.

<Configuration 1>
In the game that has won a small role (for example, a common bell of winning 04), the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win the small role → the front door DU is opened while the third stop button is pressed. (A door opening error occurs by opening the front door DU) and turn on the setting key switch (do not shift to the setting confirmation mode) → Close the front door DU while holding down the third stop button Releasing the door opening error (for example, inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 and twisting it in a predetermined direction) → The setting may not be shifted to the setting confirmation mode even if the third stop button is released.

  In addition, in the case of such a configuration, a bet can be made while the setting key switch is turned on thereafter, and a reel can be started to rotate by operating a start lever in a betting situation, and a stop button is provided. , The reels can be stopped (the game can proceed). Further, if the setting key switch is kept on thereafter, betting may not be possible (game medal may not be inserted), or betting is possible but the reel does not start rotating even if the start lever is operated. May be. In other words, the game may not be executed while the setting key switch remains on. In the case of such a configuration, it is added that the effect display device S40 does not display a display indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being performed. If the front door DU is opened in a state where the replay symbol is not stopped and the setting key switch is kept on (after the operation as in the above configuration 1), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode. It may be configured so as to obtain, or not to shift to the setting confirmation mode when the front door DU is opened in a state where the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, when the front door DU is opened and the mode is shifted to the setting check mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to display that the mode is the setting check mode.

<<<< Max bet lamp lighting configuration >>>>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83, an operation related to lighting of a max bet lamp (also referred to as a bet button lamp S50) applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail. The configuration exemplified below illustrates a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even during the stop display of the re-game. The max bet lamp is controlled by the sub control board S or the main control board M, which is provided inside or near the max bet button and notifies that the operation of the max bet button is effective. It is a lamp. In the figure, ON indicates that the max bet lamp is lit (or blinks), OFF indicates that the max bet lamp is off, ON indicates that the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, and 1 bet OFF when the lamp D211 is off, ON when the 2-betting lamp D212 is on, OFF when off the 2-betting lamp D212, ON when on the 3-betting lamp D213, OFF indicates that the 3-bet lamp D213 is off, ON indicates that the start lamp D180 is on (or blinks), and OFF indicates that the start lamp D180 is off. In the figure, when game medals are inserted one by one from the medal insertion slot D170 (detection of game medals inserted into the medal insertion port D170 such as the insertion receiving sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s). (A case in which the game sensor detects each game medal one by one), but the bet button can bet one game medal by one operation (off → on) different from the max bet button. A one-bet button or a two-bet button that can bet two game medals by one operation (off → on) may be provided. Same as game medal insertion (detection of one game medal by insertion reception sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, or second insertion sensor D30s) The use, there is no problem even when applied to a single press of the 1 bet button.

<< Configuration 1 >>
First, configuration 1 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where a gaming medal is not bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off. The three-bet lamp D213 is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is turned on, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned on. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is turned on and the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, the three bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

  By configuring the Max Bet lamp to “turn off → turn on” each time one game medal is inserted as in Configuration 1, during the period in which the game medal is guided from the medal insertion slot D170 into the inside of the gaming machine, Since the operation of the bet button is invalid, the period during which the max bet button is valid can be accurately notified by turning off the max bet lamp during the guided period. Also, by accurately notifying the period in which the max bet button is valid, the player can know the period in which the max bet button is invalid, in other words, the period in which the insertion of the game medal is invalid, A situation in which game medals are inserted during the invalid period and game medals are not normally inserted can be prevented, and a good-tempo game progress can be realized.

  Also, as in the configuration 1, by configuring the 3-bet lamp D213 to be turned on after the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off, when the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. Since the max bet lamp is turned off, the player can clearly recognize that the predetermined number of game medals has been bet.

<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, the configuration 2 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where a gaming medal is not bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off. The three-bet lamp D213 is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the first bet lamp D211 is lit. Then, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the second bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the three-bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on. Thereafter, the max bet lamp turns off.

  As in the configuration 2, the max bet lamp is turned off after the third game medal is inserted and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on. In other words, the player presses the max bet button with the 3 bet lamp D213. By configuring to light as soon as possible after the operation, the three-bet lamp D213 can be lighted seamlessly in accordance with the operation of the player, so that the progress of the game can be made smooth and the player is It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is thrown into the game machine or the performance or behavior of the gaming machine is distrusted due to a slow operation.

<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, the configuration 3 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where a gaming medal is not bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off. The three-bet lamp D213 is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the first bet lamp D211 is lit. Then, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the second bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned on. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on.

  As in the configuration 3, the start game D180 is turned on almost at the same time when the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off before the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on, so that the next game can be performed. Notifying the player that the game can be started can be promptly notified to the player, and the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.In addition, the player can insert an extra game medal, and the performance of the gaming machine due to the slow operation can be improved. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the behavior is distrusted.

<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, Configuration 4 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where a gaming medal is not bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off. The three-bet lamp D213 is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is turned on, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned on. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is turned on and the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the three-bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, Configuration 5 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. When no gaming medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is blinking, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The three-bet lamp D213 is on, and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the three-bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on. Thereafter, before the timing at which the max bet lamp blinks, the max bet lamp is turned off before (in the middle of lighting) the timing of turning on and off. Note that FIG. 3 illustrates a case where the third game medal is inserted in a state where the max bet lamp is turned on in a blinking state where the max bet lamp is repeatedly turned on and then turned off. The max bet lamp is turned on and off at the timing of the first game medal being inserted, but the third game medal is inserted when the max bet lamp is blinking and turned off , The max bet lamp remains off after the timing at which the third game medal is inserted.

  Even in the case where all the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned on in a situation where no bet is made as in the configuration 5, the number of inserted game medals (first, By changing the combination of turning on / off the start lamp D180, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 depending on the second and third sheets, the player can determine the current game situation (how many game medals). Is bet).

<< Configuration 6 >>
Next, the configuration 6 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where a gaming medal is not bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off. The three-bet lamp D213 is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the first bet lamp D211 is lit. Then, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the second bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, a third game medal is inserted, and the start lamp D180 is turned on at a timing when the insertion of the game medal is detected (a timing earlier than the lighting timing of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 in the configuration 2). The 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. Thereafter, the max bet lamp turns off.

  As in Configuration 6, the max bet lamp is turned off after the third game medal is inserted and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. In other words, the player presses the max-bet button with the 3-bet lamp D213. By configuring to light as soon as possible after the operation, the three-bet lamp D213 can be lighted seamlessly in accordance with the operation of the player, so that the progress of the game can be made smooth and the player is It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is thrown into the game machine or the performance or behavior of the gaming machine is distrusted due to a slow operation.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, Configuration 7 in FIG. 83 will be described in detail. In a situation where a gaming medal is not bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is on, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off. The three-bet lamp D213 is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the first bet lamp D211 is lit. Thereafter, the start lamp D180 turns on (starts blinking). Then, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the second bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on.

  As in Configuration 6, after the third game medal is inserted, the turning off of the max bet lamp and the turning on of the 3 bet lamp D213 are substantially simultaneous. In other words, the player places the max bet lamp D213 in the max. By configuring so as to light up as soon as possible after operating the bet button, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be turned on seamlessly in accordance with the operation of the player, and the progress of the game can be made smooth, and It is possible to prevent a situation in which a player throws in extra gaming medals or distrusts the performance and behavior of the gaming machine due to the slow operation.

  Note that, in the above-described configurations 1 to 4, configuration 6, and configuration 7, the max bet lamp is turned on = the max bet lamp is lit, but a lighting mode in which the player can recognize that the max bet button is effective is used. Just as with the configuration 5, the max bet lamp may be turned on and the max bet lamp may blink. Also, in the configuration 5, the max bet lamp may be turned on and the max bet lamp may be turned on. Similarly, in the configuration 1 to the configuration 6, the start lamp D180 is turned on and the start lamp D180 is lit. However, any lighting mode may be used as long as the player can recognize that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective. Similarly to the configuration 7, the start lamp D180 may be turned on and the start lamp D180 may blink. Also, in the configuration 7, the start lamp D180 may be turned on and the start lamp D180 may be turned on. Further, the max bet lamp may be configured to be controlled on the sub control board S side, or may be configured to be controlled on the main control board M side.

<<<< Configuration at the time of operating the payment button >>>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84 to FIG. 87, the operation at the time of operating the settlement button D60 applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. The following configuration illustrates a case where three gaming medals are bet on a gaming machine and the number of credits displayed on the credit amount display device D200 is four. In the figure, ON indicates that the max bet lamp is lit (or blinking), OFF indicates that the max bet lamp is off, ON indicates that a new operation of the adjustment button has been detected, and the adjustment button Is not detected, or the operation of the settlement button is not newly detected. OFF, 1 BET lamp D211 is ON, 1 BET lamp D211 is OFF, OFF. ON when the 2-bet lamp D212 is on, OFF when the 2-bet lamp D212 is off, ON when the 3-bet lamp D213 is on, and when the 3-bet lamp D213 is off. OFF, ON when the start lamp D180 is lit (or flashing), OFF when the start lamp D180 is off, ON when the possible lamp D300 is turned on (or blinking), OFF when the available lamp D300 is turned off, and subtract 1 from OFF → ON → OFF to subtract 1 from the credit number display device D200. , Is illustrated. In the drawing, the case where game medals are inserted one by one from the medal insertion slot D170 is illustrated. However, as a bet button, a single operation (off → on) different from the max bet button is performed by one operation. A one-bet button for betting game medals or a two-bet button for betting two game medals by one operation (off → on) may be provided. In such a case, a medal slot is provided. There is no problem if the same operation as that of inserting one game medal into D170 is applied to one press of one bet button. The configuration exemplified below may be configured so that the game medals stored in the gaming machine can be settled even during the stop display of the re-game, or stored in the game machine during the stop display of the re-game. The game medals that are present may not be settled. In addition, by operating the settlement button D60, the settlement button is changed from "on to off" as a condition for paying out the betting gaming medals from the discharge port D240 (as a condition for determining that the settlement button has been operated). , Or may be “on”, or may be “on for 0.5 seconds or more”.

<< Configuration 1 >>
First, the configuration 1 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is on. The three-bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insertable lamp D300 is on. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned from off to on), the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned off and a bet is made. Three game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started), and then four game medals, which are credits stored in the game machine displayed on the credit amount display device D200, are released. Dispensed from exit D240. Further, at the timing when the game medal to be paid out last (the game medal whose display on the credit amount display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 is turned on.

  By configuring so that the game medals bet are settled (paid out) before the credits as in the configuration 1, it is confirmed that the credits have become 0 when the player ends the game. Even if the player leaves the seat immediately, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to settle the game medal bet. In particular, when ending the game in a situation where the number of credits is a small amount such as one or two, the possibility that the player ends the game without obtaining a sufficient game medal is relatively high. May be distracted. Even in such a case, in order to prevent unintended disadvantages to the player, the betting game medals are settled (paid out) before the credits. Because of the configuration, in Configuration 1, before the credit amount displayed on the credit amount display device D200 is subtracted, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, and the start lamp D180. , And the turn-on lamp D300 are turned off.

<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, the configuration 2 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is on. The three-bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insertable lamp D300 is on. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned from off to on), the max bet lamp is turned on, and the three game medals bet are paid out from the outlet D240 (payout is started). Thereafter, the start lamp D180 is turned off and the turn-on lamp D300 is turned off. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 turns off. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 turns off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off and the insertable lamp D300 is turned on. In the configuration 2, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the betting game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out. The credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

  When it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once as in the configuration 2, the game medal bet is paid out, but no credit is paid out, and when the settlement button D60 is operated, By configuring the max bet lamp to be turned on at a timing before turning off the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300, the player may erroneously settle the settlement button. Is operated, only the game medals that have been betted will be paid out, and the player wants to operate the max bet button again to bet credits, so that the max bet button can be operated quickly. By configuring to notify, the progress of the game It can be.

<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, the configuration 3 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is on. The three-bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insertable lamp D300 is on. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned from off to on), and the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned off. The three gaming medals bet are paid out from the outlet D240 (payout is started), and thereafter, the four credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit amount display device D200 are displayed. A game medal will be paid out from the outlet D240. After the timing at which the finger is released from the settlement button D60, the lights are turned off in the order of the 3-bet lamp D213 → the 2-bet lamp D212 → the 1-bet lamp D211. Further, at the timing when the game medal to be paid out last (the game medal whose display on the credit amount display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 is turned on.

<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is on. The three-bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insertable lamp D300 is on. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (from OFF to ON), the start lamp D180 and the insertable lamp D300 are turned off, and the three game medals bet are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout starts). Is done). Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 turns off. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 turns off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off and the insertable lamp D300 is turned on. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is turned on. Note that, in the configuration 4, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the betting game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out. The credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

  As in the configuration 4, by paying out the gaming medals bet, but not paying out the credits, and by illuminating the max bet lamp at a timing later than the illumination of the insertable lamp D300. In the case where the player desires to change to one bet after betting three coins, the settlement button D60 is operated once to settle the three game medals bet, and then to set one game medal. Since the player inserts or operates the 1-bet button, in such a case, by turning on the insertable lamp D300 earlier than the max bet lamp, the progress of the game can be made smoother.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is on. The three-bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insertable lamp D300 is on. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned from off to on), the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned off and a bet is made. Three game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started). Thereafter, the enabling lamp D300 is turned on. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is turned on. Note that, in the configuration 5, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the betting game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out. The credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

<< Configuration 6 >>
Next, the configuration 6 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is on. The three-bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insertable lamp D300 is on. Thereafter, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed (the timing when the payment button D60 is turned on), the turn-on lamp D300 is turned off. Thereafter, the start lamp D180 turns off. The three gaming medals bet are paid out from the outlet 2D40 (payout is started), and thereafter, the four credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit amount display device D200 are displayed. A game medal will be paid out from the outlet D240. After the timing when the settlement button D60 is operated, the lights are turned off in the order of the 3-bet lamp D213 → 2-bet lamp D212 → 1-bet lamp D211. After the game medal to be paid out last (game medal in which the display of the number-of-credits display device D200 becomes 1 → 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 is turned on. Note that the max bet lamp remains off.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, the configuration 7 in FIG. 87 will be described in detail. In a situation where three gaming medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is on. The three-bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insertable lamp D300 is on. Thereafter, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed (the timing when the payment button D60 is turned on), the max bet lamp starts blinking, and the start lamp D180 is turned off. Thereafter, the insertable lamp D180 is turned off, and the three game medals bet are paid out from the outlet D240 (payout is started). Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 turns off. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 turns off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off. Thereafter, the enabling lamp D300 is turned on. Note that the max bet lamp remains off. Note that, in the configuration 7, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the betting game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out. The credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

<<<< Differences in operation due to power-off timing >>>>
FIG. 88 is a timing chart for explaining the operation of the main control board M and the sub control board S at the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power off. FIG. 88 (a) is a timing chart showing a first mode of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and the power-off, and FIG. 88 (b) is the timing chart of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and the power-off. 6 is a timing chart illustrating an aspect 2.

  The first mode is a mode in which the power is cut off after the execution of the main program of the main control board M and the subprogram of the sub control board S is started. On the other hand, the second mode is a mode in which the power is cut off before the execution of the main program of the main control board or the subprogram of the sub-control board is started.

  In this example, the power interruption is a state in which power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.The power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the power cable is disconnected, the power cable is disconnected, or the power failure occurs. May be. This also includes the case where the power supply is unintentionally stopped at the game hall. The timing when the power is cut off is the timing when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the timing when the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the timing when the power cable is disconnected, and the timing when the power cable is disconnected. This is the timing when the power failure occurs.

  In FIG. 88 (a) and FIG. 88 (b), ΔT1 is the time from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches a low level (may be referred to as an off level) after a power failure occurs. ΔT2 is the time from the start of power supply to the time when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level, and ΔT3 is the time when the supply voltage to the main control board M ΔT4 is the time from when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level to when the sub-program of the sub-control board S is started, and ΔT5 is the time until the sub-program of the sub-control board S is started. This is the time from when the supply voltage to M reaches the supply level to when the main program of the main control board M is started. Here, the following relationships hold: ΔT5 <ΔT1, ΔT2 <ΔT3, ΔT5> ΔT3, ΔT4 <ΔT5.

<<< first embodiment >>>>
<< Change in power supply status >>
Power supply to the gaming machine is started at time t1, power is cut off at time t3, and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.

<< Operation of main control board >>
<Power supply voltage supplied from power supply unit E to main control board>
As described above, power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2. Although FIG. 3 illustrates a case where the time from when power is supplied to the main control board to when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant, the present invention is not limited thereto. May be configured so that the time from when the power supply is started to when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may vary (become random). In addition, although the case where the time from when power is supplied to the sub-control board to when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the time from when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level to the time when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level varies (is random). Even in such a configuration, the minimum value (minimum time) from the start of power supply to the main control board to the point at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is determined by starting the power supply to the sub-control board. It is preferable that the power supply voltage be longer than the maximum value (maximum time) until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level.

  Thereafter, the power is turned off at time t3. Due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t3) to the maintenance level (time t4), and substantially decreases from the time t4 to the maintenance level. It will be constant. The power supply unit E has a backup power supply composed of a capacitor. Even when a power failure occurs, the power supply unit E maintains a substantially constant power supply voltage for a predetermined time (time t4 to time t5). (Maintenance level) can be output (the power-off process is executed in a state where the voltage of the maintenance level is supplied). In this example, the time during which the maintenance level is maintained (time from the time t3 to the time t5) from the start of execution of the power-off processing (detection of the power-off) is at least as long as the timer interrupt processing can be executed 20 times. (Time during which the timer interruption process (FIG. 32) can be called and executed 20 times) is ensured.

  Thereafter, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t5, and goes to the off level at time t6.

<Starting the main program>
The main program executed by the main control board is started from time ta when ΔT5 has elapsed from time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant. By executing the main program, the above-described main control board START (power-on) processing shown in FIG. 13 is executed.

  As described above, if the setting key switch is turned off in the determination processing of step 1014 in FIG. Is started.

  If the setting key switch is ON in the judgment processing of step 1014 in FIG. 13, the processing of steps 1028 to 1034 and 1100 is executed.

<Activation of timer interrupt>
When the setting key switch is off, a timer interrupt is started by the processing of step 1040 in FIG. 13, and when the setting key switch is on, a timer interrupt is started by the processing of step 1104 of FIG. . After the timer interrupt is activated, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is called and executed at every predetermined period T. The cycle T at which the timer interrupt is executed is 1.8 msec.

<Detection of occurrence of power interruption>
When a power failure occurs, the power supply unit E outputs a power failure detection signal. The main control board M has an input port to which a power-off detection signal is input. The power-off detection signal is a high-level signal when the power-off has not occurred, and is a low-level signal when the power-off has occurred. The main control board M can determine whether or not the power is cut off, based on whether the data read from the input port is a high-level signal or a low-level signal.

  In this example, the main control board M detects a power-off in the determination processing of step 1604 in FIG. Specifically, the main control board M determines that the power interruption has occurred when the data read from the input port is a low-level signal in both of the two successive timer interrupt processes.

  Thus, in this example, the occurrence of power interruption is detected by two consecutive timer interrupt processes. Therefore, when the power interruption occurs after the timer interrupt is activated by the processing of step 1040 of FIG. 13 or the processing of step 1104 of FIG. 14, the occurrence of the power interruption can be detected. On the other hand, if the power interruption occurs before the timer interrupt is activated, the occurrence of the power interruption cannot be detected.

  As described above, when the power is turned off after the execution of the main program is started and the power is turned off after the timer interrupt is activated by the processing of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the processing of step 1104 in FIG. In addition, it is possible to detect the occurrence of power interruption due to the interrupt processing. When it is detected that the power interruption has occurred, the power interruption processing shown in FIG. 36 can be executed.

<<< Operation of sub control board >>>
<Activation of subprogram>
The sub-program executed by the sub-control board S is started from time tb when ΔT4 has elapsed from time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant. By executing the sub-program, the above-described sub-side program start processing shown in FIG. 38 is executed. Note that ΔT4 is shorter than ΔT5 described above, and the sub-control board S is activated before the main control board M, so that the sub-control board S does not drop the command transmitted from the main control board M. Can be received. In the figure, the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after the power supply to the main control board M is started, and the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after the power supply to the sub control board S is started. Is shown as the same time tb, but the time from when the power supply to the main control board M is started to when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level and when the power supply voltage is started after the power supply to the sub control board S is started. The time until reaching the supply level may be configured to be different. Even in such a case, the power supply to the main control board M is started until the main program of the main control board M is started. Is preferably longer than the time from when power is supplied to the sub-control board S to when the sub-program of the sub-control board S is started. Supply level reached From the time when the main program of the main control board M is activated to the time when the subprogram of the sub-control board S is activated after the power supply voltage on the sub-control board S reaches the supply level. It is preferred to configure.

<<< 2nd aspect >>>
FIG. 88 (b) is a timing chart showing a second mode of the timing of supplying power to the gaming machine and turning off the power. The second mode is a mode in which the power supply is cut off before the execution of the main program executed on the main control board M is started. In other words, this is a mode in which the power supply is cut off at a time point before ΔT5 elapses from time t2 when the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the sub-control board S reaches the supply level.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the power is turned off at a time before the execution of the main program is started (at a time before the timer interrupt is activated). 36 cannot be detected, and the gaming machine is stopped by the power cutoff (the supply voltage reaches a low level) without executing the power-off processing shown in FIG.

<< Operation of main control board >>
<Power supply voltage supplied from power supply unit E to main control board>
Power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board M from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2.

  Thereafter, at time t13, the power is cut off. Due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t13) to the maintenance level (time t14), and from the time t14 to the maintenance level. It will be constant. Thereafter, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t15, and goes to the off level at time t16.

  As described above, in the second mode, the execution of the main program is started after the power is cut off. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is turned off before the power supply unit E is turned off.

Although FIG. 1 illustrates the first mode and the second mode, the configurations applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment include:
(1) Immediately after the power supply to the main control board M is started (for example, after a lapse of the time for executing the timer interrupt process once after the power supply to the main control board M is started), the power is cut off → the main program is executed. Before the start, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M becomes an off level (the execution of the main program is not started).
(2) Power supply to the main control board M is started → immediately after the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M reaches the supply level (for example, the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M becomes the supply level). (After the time for executing the timer interrupt process once after the time reaches the power supply time), the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is turned off before the execution of the main program is started. Level (the execution of the main program will not start)
You may comprise as mentioned above.

<<<< Relationship between setting key switch state and power supply state >>>>
FIG. 89 (a) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state and the situation in the first mode, and FIG. 89 (b) shows the state of the setting key switch in the second mode. 6 is a table showing the relationship between the power supply state and the state.

<< Relationship Between Setting Key Switch State and Power Supply State in First Aspect >>
<State 1>
First, in state 1 of FIG. 89 (a), the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which a game is executed or a state in which the game can be executed, and the setting key switch is turned off. The “power supply state” is “on”.

<State 2>
In state 2, power is cut off while the setting key switch is kept "off", and the "power supply state" is turned "off". At this time, the power-off process shown in FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state is stored in the storage area as the return address.

<State 3>
In state 3, the setting key switch is operated and switched to "on" while "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4>
Next, in state 4, when the power is supplied in a state where the setting key switch is “on”, the “power supply state” is switched to “on”. When the “power supply state” is set to “on”, the main control board START (power-on) processing of FIG. 13 is executed. As described above, the first mode is a mode in which the power is turned off after the execution of the main program is started. Control board START (power-on) processing can be executed.

  In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13 described above, it is determined that the setting key switch is ON, the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 are executed, and the setting change device control process is called and executed in step 1100. Then, the mode shifts from the normal state to the setting change mode. In this setting change device control process, the storage area is initialized by the process of step 1102 shown in FIG. As described above, when the "power supply state" is turned "on" while the setting key switch is "on", the mode shifts to the setting change mode, and thereafter, the setting change switch and the start lever are operated. This makes it possible to change the set value. In addition, by transmitting the setting change start command to the sub-control board S by the processing of step 1622 in FIG. 32, it is possible to notify that the sub-control board S is in the setting change mode.

<State 5>
Next, in the setting change mode, when the power is cut off while the setting change device control process is being executed, the “power supply state” changes to “off”. When the power is cut off, the process at the time of power cut off in FIG. 36 is called and executed, and the process of step 1902 sets the address of the process to be executed next in the setting change device control process (setting change mode) to the return address. Is stored in the storage area.

<State 6>
In state 6, the setting key switch is operated and the setting key switch is switched to "off" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 7>
In state 7, the power is supplied while the setting key switch is "off", and the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the “power supply state” is set to “on”, the main control board START (power-on) processing of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination processing of step 1014 in FIG. 13, the setting key switch is determined to be “OFF”, and the processing of step 1022 is executed. By the processing of step 1022, the process returns to the return address stored in the storage area in state 5, and execution is started from the processing of the return address. As described above, the return address stored in the storage area in the state 5 is the address of the process to be executed next in the setting change device control process, and by returning, the process of the setting change device control process is immediately executed. Is done. As described above, in the first mode, the power supply is turned off in the normal state, and in the situation where the power supply is off, the setting key switch is turned on and the power supply is turned on to shift to the setting change mode. This is the basic operation when shifting to the setting change mode.However, even if the power supply is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting key switch is turned off, and then the power supply is turned on, Since the setting change mode is stored as the return address, it is configured to be in the setting change mode. With such a configuration, even when a power failure occurs during the setting change mode (for example, when a power failure occurs in a game arcade or the like), it is possible to return to the state before the power failure occurred, and the abnormality of the gaming machine It is possible to make it difficult to generate an unnecessary operation.

<< Relationship Between Setting Key Switch State and Power Supply State in Second Aspect >>
<State 1>
In state 1 of FIG. 89 (b), as in the first mode, the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the game is being executed or a state in which the game can be executed, and the setting key switch is “ "Off" and "power supply state" is "on".

<State 2>
In the state 2, similarly to the first aspect, the power is cut off while the setting key switch is kept “off”, and the “power supply state” is turned “off”. At this time, the power-off process shown in FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state is stored in the storage area as the return address.

<State 3>
In state 3, the setting key switch is operated and switched to "on" while "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4>
In state 4, power is supplied while the setting key switch is turned “on”, and the “power supply state” is switched to “on”.

<State 5>
In state 5, while the setting key switch is "on", power is cut off and the "power supply state" is switched to "off". As described above, in the second embodiment, the power supply is cut off before the execution of the main program executed on the main control board M is started. Therefore, in the second mode, the “power supply state” is temporarily turned “on” (state 4), but immediately after the “power supply state” related to the state 4 is turned “on” (for example, the timer interrupt processing is performed). After a lapse of one execution time), the “power supply state” is switched to “off”. In other words, before the main control board START (power-on) processing of FIG. 13 is executed (or before the timer interrupt is started), the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is turned off. (State 5). Therefore, the setting change device control process is not executed, the return address stored in the storage area is not changed, and the return address stored in the state 2 is stored in the storage area as it is.

<State 6>
Next, in state 6, the setting key switch is operated and the setting key switch is switched to "off" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 7>
In state 7, the power is supplied while the setting key switch is "off", and the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the “power supply state” is set to “on”, the main control board START (power-on) processing of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, it is determined that the setting key switch is off, and the process of step 1022 is executed. By the processing in step 1022, the process returns to the return address stored in the storage area in state 2, and execution is started from the return address. As described above, the return address stored in the storage area in the state 2 is the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state, and the process to be executed next is executed in the normal state. As described above, in the second mode, even when the “power supply state” is turned “on” in a state where the setting key switch is turned “on”, before the main program of the main control board M is executed. When the power supply is turned off, the setting key switch is turned off and then the power supply is turned on. . By configuring as in the second aspect, if the power is turned off immediately after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, if the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, an unintended malfunction may occur in the gaming machine. Even if the setting key switch is turned on, it is possible to configure so as not to shift to the setting change mode, and it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which trouble is less likely to occur.

<<<< Medal award control and payout sound output control >>
As described above, when the small winning combination is won (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed), the payout number of medals corresponding to the small winning combination is given to the player.

<< Medal award processing >>
The process of giving medals includes a process of adding and giving as a credit number, and a process of actually paying out game medals outside the gaming machine and giving them.

<Credit number addition process>
When the current number of credits is less than the maximum number of savings (for example, less than 50), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of savings. This credit number adding process is executed by the arithmetic process of the CPU C100 of the main control board M.

<Payout process for game medals>
When the current number of credits exceeds the maximum number of stored credits, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out medals from the medal payout device H to give medals. The payout process from the medal payout device H is executed by outputting a drive signal from the main control board M to the hopper H40.

<< Medal grant mode >>
In accordance with the current number of credits and the number of medals to be awarded, the mode is shifted to the mode of only adding credits, the mode of only paying out game medals, and the process of adding credits to payout of game medals ( Both the process of adding the number of credits and the process of paying out medals are executed).

<Aspect of only credit number addition process>
If the current number of credits is equal to or less than the maximum number of credits, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of credits. If the number of payouts does not reach the maximum number of storages even if the number of payouts is added, only the process of adding the number of credits is completed, and the medal awarding process ends.

<Mode of shifting from credit number addition processing to game medal payout processing>
When the current number of credits is equal to or less than the maximum number of credits, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of credits. When the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits, the CPU C100 of the main control board M switches from the credit number adding process to the game medal payout process. The CPUC100 of the main control board M pays out the remaining number of game medals obtained by subtracting the credit addition amount from the payout number from the medal payout device H by driving the hopper H40. The sum of the credit addition and the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H is the payout number corresponding to the winning small combination.

  As described above, when shifting from the credit number adding process to the game medal payout process, the CPU C100 of the main control board M switches from the credit adding process to the game medal payout process.

<Aspect of game medal payout process only>
If the current number of credits has already reached the maximum number of credits, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 and pays out the number of game medals from the medal payout device H from the medal payout device H.

<< Specific example >>
For example, as shown in FIG. 90, when the current number of credits is 47 and a player is given 5 medals to be paid out, the CPUC100 of the main control board M first sets the number of credits to 1 Add one by one. Specifically, the CPU C100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits to 48, 49, and 50. In the example shown in FIG. 90, the number of credits displayed on the credit amount display device is 47 → 48 (first (time t1)) → 49 (second (time t2)) → 50 (third ( It changes at time t3)). When the number of credits reaches 50, the maximum number of stored credits (50) is reached, and the credit cannot be increased any more.

  Next, the CPU C100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition processing to the game medal payout processing, outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40, and subtracts three credits for the credit addition from the five payouts. Are paid out from the medal payout device H.

  In the example shown in FIG. 90, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 at time t4 to start the payout process. From time t4 to time t5, the fourth game medal is paid out, and from time t6 to time t7, the fifth game medal is paid out. The CPU C100 of the main control board M counts the number of medals paid out from the medal payout apparatus H, detects that the fifth game medal has been paid out at time t7, and ends the payout processing. .

<< Various Times >>
<Unit processing time of credit addition processing and unit processing time of game medal payout processing>
In the credit addition processing by the CPU C100 of the main control board M, it takes a unit processing time a to increase the number of credits from m to m + 1. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, time t2−time t1 = a is required to increase the number of credits from 48 (first) to 49 (second), and the number of credits is 49 (second). From time t3 to time t2 = a, it is necessary to increase the number of credits from 50 to the third (the third). In the credit addition processing, the unit processing time a is substantially constant.

  In the process of paying out game medals from the medal payout device H, a unit processing time c is required from the payout of the nth game medal to the payout of the (n + 1) th game medal. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, time t6 to time t4 = c is required from the payout of the fourth game medal to the payout of the fifth game medal. In the game medal payout process, the unit processing time c is substantially constant.

  One unit processing time a can be defined by the difference between the timings of two consecutive addition processes. For example, the unit processing time a is the difference between the timing of the (first) addition process from 47 to 48 (time t1) and the timing of the (second) addition process from 48 to 49 (time t2). Or, the difference between the timing of the (second) addition process from 48 to 49 (time t2) and the timing of the (third) addition process from 49 to 50 (time t3).

  Further, one unit processing time c can be defined by the difference between the start timings of two consecutive payout processes. For example, the unit processing time c is the difference between the start timing of the fifth sheet processing (time t6) and the start timing of the fourth sheet addition processing (time t4). Thus, the unit processing times a and c may be defined so as to have a constant cycle.

<Switching time e from credit number addition processing to game medal payout processing>
As described above, the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number, and if all the payout numbers have not been provided, the processing is switched to a game medal payout process. The switching time e is required for the CPU C100 of the main control board M to switch from the credit number adding process to the game medal payout process.

<< Comparison of time >>

<Unit processing time a and unit processing time c>
The unit processing time a described above is different from the unit processing time c. The unit processing time a is a time determined by the arithmetic processing of the CPU C100 of the main control board M, and the unit processing time c is a time required for the arithmetic processing of the CPU C100 of the main control board M and a time required for driving the medal payout device H. And both. The unit processing time c can be longer than the unit processing time a. In this way, the payout can be accurately controlled including the driving time of the medal payout device H.

  As described above, by adjusting the time required for driving the medal payout device H, the unit processing time c can be made equal to the unit processing time a. By doing so, the payout process can be speeded up.

<Switching time e>
The switching time e is different from the unit processing time a. The switching time e can be longer than the unit processing time a. By increasing the switching time e, it is possible to stably switch from the credit number addition processing to the game medal payout processing, and smoothly switch from the arithmetic processing of the CPU C100 of the main control board M to the driving of the hopper H40. .

  Further, the switching time e can be shorter than the unit processing time a. By shortening the switching time e, it is possible to quickly switch from the processing of adding the number of credits to the processing of paying out game medals. In addition, it is possible to increase the consumption of game medals, increase the profit of the game arcade, and increase the operating efficiency of the game machine.

  In this way, by changing the switching time e from the unit processing time a, when switching to the game medal payout process, the payout is different from the fixed cycle, and the payout of the game medal to the medal tray starts, so Expectation can be given to the game.

  The switching time e can be matched with the unit processing time a. When the switching time e is made to coincide with the unit processing time a, medals can be given to the player at a fixed cycle, and both the process of adding the number of credits and the process of paying out game medals are equivalent medals. By showing this to the player, a sense of security can be given.

<< output of game media imparting sound >>
The CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs a payout start command to the sub-control board S when starting credit addition processing (time t1). Upon receiving the payout start command, the sub-control board S starts outputting the game medium providing sound from the speaker S20.

  When the payout of the game medals ends (time t7), the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs a payout end command to the sub control board S. Upon receiving the payout end command, the sub-control board S ends the output of the game medium providing sound from the speaker S20. As described above, the CPU C100 of the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H, and gives all the game medals of the payout number corresponding to the winning small combination to the player. It is determined whether or not it has been granted. When the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that all the game medals of the payout number corresponding to the winning small combination have been given, the CPU C100 terminates the output of the payout end command to the sub control board S, and outputs the command from the speaker S20. The output of the game medium imparting sound ends. In a case where the game medium-applied sound is repeatedly reproduced (output) at a fixed cycle, the game medium-applied sound is immediately output at the timing when the sub-control board S receives the payout end command. The output may be ended, or the output of the game medium application sound ends at the timing when the cycle of the game medium application sound output at the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the payout end command ends. May be configured.

  The game medium imparting sound is a sound output from the speaker S20 by reproducing the unit imparting sound data at least once. The unit imparting sound data is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board S in advance. As shown in FIG. 90, the playback time for one unit of assigned sound data is d. By repeatedly playing the unit-applied sound data a plurality of times until the game medium is received, the game-medium applied sound is output from the speaker S20.

<First aspect>
The first mode of the game medium providing sound shown in FIG. 90 is a mode in which the unit providing sound data is repeatedly reproduced every reproduction time d from when the payout start command is received. By playing back in this way, a game medium imparting sound is output at a constant cycle. As described above, even in the case of switching from the processing of adding the number of credits to the processing of paying out game medals, the game medium imparting sound is output at a constant cycle, so that the player does not feel discomfort about the payout, It is possible to give a sense of security to the player by indicating to the player that both the number adding process and the game medal payout process give the same value.

<Second aspect>
In the second mode of the game medium providing sound shown in FIG. 90, the unit providing sound data is reproduced for each reproduction time d from when the payout start command is received, and only after time f after the credit number adding process is completed. In this embodiment, the unit-added sound data is reproduced, and thereafter, at the time t4, the payout of the game medals is started, and the reproduction of the unit-added sound data is started again. When switching to the game medal payout process, the game medium imparting sound is output at a timing different from the predetermined cycle, so that a sense of excitement or a sense of expectation that the payout of the game medal to the medal tray starts can be given to the game. .

  Note that, during the payout of the game medals from the medal payout device H, when the game medals of the hopper H40 are exhausted and a hopper error occurs (for example, when it is determined to be Yes in the process of step 1279), the sub The control board S stops outputting the game medium providing sound and outputs a sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. When the game medals are supplied to the hopper H40 and a payout is possible, the main control board M transmits a payout start command to the sub-control board S again, and the sub-control board S starts outputting the game medium giving sound. . The present invention is not limited to this. Even when a hopper error occurs, the game medium providing sound is continuously output, but the volume of the game medium providing sound is changed to a sound indicating that the hopper error has occurred. Output at a volume lower than the volume (the volume may be set to 0), and when the hopper error is released, the output of the sound indicating the occurrence of the hopper error is terminated, and the game medium sound You may comprise so that a sound volume may be restored.

<<< Arrangement of integrated circuit on substrate >>
FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of the electronic components mounted on main control board M.

  The main control board M has a substantially board-shaped and rectangular printed board MP. On the front side of the printed board MP, a CPUC 100, an IC, a resistor, a connector, and the like are mainly mounted, and on the back side of the printed board MP, a circuit pattern mainly made of a conductor is formed. The main control board M (printed board MP) includes two long ends ML1 and ML2 parallel to each other and along the longitudinal direction, and two short ends MS1 and MS2 parallel to each other and along the short direction. It has a rectangular shape.

  In this example, the main control board M is attached so as to stand up inside the housing of the gaming machine. When the main control board M is mounted upright, the long ends ML1 and ML2 are arranged along the horizontal direction, and the short ends MS1 and MS2 are arranged along the vertical direction. The longitudinal end ML1 is located on the upper side, and the longitudinal end ML2 is located on the lower side. When viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP, the short end portion MS1 is located on the left side of the short end portion MS2, and the short end portion MS2 is located on the right side of the short end portion MS1.

  Hereinafter, the longer end ML1 side is referred to as an upper side, the longer end ML2 side as a lower side, the shorter end MS1 side as a left side, and the shorter end MS2 side as a right side.

<CPUC100>
The CPUC 100 has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is CLL, and the length in the short direction is CSL. CPUC100 has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed to protrude from the main body. When the CPU C100 is mounted on the printed circuit board MP, an electrical connection is formed by a plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. For this reason, in the operation of attaching the CPU C100 to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the CPU C 100 in an appropriate direction so that the CPU C 100 performs a desired operation. The first pin (1P shown in FIG. 91) of the CPU C100 is used as a reference pin for arranging the CPU C100. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) is formed in the main body of the CPUC100, and a cutout (not shown) for visually recognizing the direction of the CPUC100 is formed.

  In this example, the CPU C100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP such that the longitudinal direction of the CPU C100 matches (is parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. In this example, as shown in FIG. 91, by arranging the CPUC100 so that the first pin of the CPUC100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC100 is arranged in alignment with the direction of an IC described later. When mounting the CPUC100 on the printed circuit board MP, mistakes in mounting the CPUC100 in the wrong direction can be reduced.

  Further, generally, various types of character information (not shown) such as a model number and a manufacturer name are printed on the main body of the CPU C100. The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the CPU C100. It is preferable that character information such as a model number and a manufacturer name can be easily visually recognized while the CPUC 100 is mounted on the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the CPUC100 so that the first pin of the CPUC100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC100 can be arranged in a direction that makes it easy to visually recognize the model number, the manufacturer name, and the like that are printed.

  When the CPUC100 is mounted on the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the CPUC100 sequentially increase in a counterclockwise direction starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. .

<IC>
Various ICs (integrated circuits) are also mounted on the front side of the printed board MP. The IC has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is ILL, and the length in the lateral direction is ISL. Similarly to the CPUC100, the IC also has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed to protrude from the main body. When the IC is mounted on the printed circuit board MP, an electrical connection is formed by the plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. For this reason, even in the operation of attaching the IC to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the IC in an appropriate direction in order to perform a desired operation on the IC. Therefore, the first pin (1P shown in FIG. 91) of the IC is also used as a reference pin for arranging the IC. In the main body of the IC, a mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) is formed, or a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the direction of the IC is formed.

  In this example, the IC is mounted on the printed circuit board MP such that the longitudinal direction of the IC coincides with (is parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. Further, the IC is arranged on the printed circuit board MP such that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side. In this manner, by arranging the IC such that the first pin of the IC is always located on the lower left side, all the ICs are arranged in the same direction, and the operation of attaching the IC to the printed circuit board MP is performed. In this case, mistakes such as mounting the IC in the wrong direction can be reduced.

  Further, generally, various types of character information (not shown) such as a model number and a manufacturer name are printed on the main body of the IC. The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the IC. It is preferable that character information such as a model number and a manufacturer name of the IC can be easily visually recognized while the IC is mounted on the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the IC such that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side, the IC is arranged so that the model number, the manufacturer name, and the like that are printed can be easily viewed. You can also.

  When the IC is mounted on the printed board MP, the numbers of the pins of the IC are sequentially increased in a counterclockwise direction starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed board MP. .

<Resistance>
Various resistors are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and electrical connections with other electronic components are formed. The IC has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is RLL, and the length in the lateral direction is RSL.

<Connector>
A connector is also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and electrical connection with other electronic components is formed. The main control board M is connected to the sub-control board S via a connector, and can transmit and receive various signals.

<Interval between CPUC100 and IC>
As shown by a broken line in FIG. 91, only a resistor is arranged inside a predetermined range CSR1 around the CPU C100, and no IC is arranged. The predetermined range CSR1 is a range in which the length from the outer periphery COR of the CPU C100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length CSL in the short direction of the CPU C100. Various currents (currents that change over time, for example, high-frequency signals) flow through the IC, and the IC may be a source of noise, which may affect the operation of the CPU C100. As described above, by not arranging the IC inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the IC is arranged at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, the length CSL), and noise generated from the IC is reduced. , CPUC100.

  Further, the predetermined length from the outer periphery COR of the CPU C100 may be at least the length RLL of the resistor in the longitudinal direction. Since a current flows through the resistor, the resistor can be a heat source, which may affect the operation of the CPU C100. Therefore, by not disposing the resistor inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the resistor is disposed at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, the length RLL), and the resistor is emitted from the resistor. The heat generated can be prevented from affecting the operation of the CPU C100.

<Relationship between height of CPUC100, height of IC, and height of other components>
FIG. 92 is a side view showing the heights of the various electronic components shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 92, the height CHT of the CPU C100 is the highest, the IC height IHT is the second highest, and the resistance height RHT is the lowest. As shown in FIG. 91, only parts having a height less than the height CHT of the CPU C100 are arranged inside a predetermined range CSR2 around the CPU C100. The predetermined range CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer periphery COR of the CPU C100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, the length RLL of the resistor in the longitudinal direction.

  In the operation of attaching the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP, an attaching tool (not shown) is used. The mounting tool is a tool that clamps the CPUC 100 at the tip of the mounting tool and mounts the CPUC 100 close to the printed circuit board MP. Since the CPUC 100 is sandwiched by the distal end portion of the mounting tool, the distal end portion of the mounting tool is arranged around the CPUC 100 when the CPU C100 is gripped. For this reason, when attaching the CPUC100, the tip of the attachment must be close to the printed circuit board MP, and the space for the tip of the attachment is set so that the tip of the attachment does not interfere with other electronic components. Need to secure.

  For this reason, in the region CSR2 around the position where the CPU C100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, only components having a height less than the height CHT of the CPU C100 are arranged. By doing so, even when the tip of the mounting tool is closest to the printed circuit board MP, the tip of the mounting tool does not interfere with other components. The region CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer periphery COR of the CPU C100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length RLL of the resistor in the longitudinal direction.

  It should be noted that only the parts of the CPU C100 less than the height CHT are arranged only in the area around the position where the CPU C100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, and in the area around the position where the CPU C100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP in the printed circuit board MP. Outside, a component having a height equal to or higher than the height CHT of the CPU C100 may be mounted, or all components mounted on the printed circuit board MP may be configured to be lower than the height CHT of the CPU C100.

  Thus, by arranging only electronic components lower than the height CHT of the CPU C100 inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPU C100, it is possible to secure a space in which the tip of the mounting tool can be approached, Even if the attachment is used, the CPUC 100 can be attached to the printed circuit board MP without damaging other electronic components.

  In the above-described example, the main control board M is described as an example. Can be applied to

<<<< AT Lottery Configuration >>>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a detailed description will be given of a configuration of an AT state transition control process applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Note that the configuration illustrated in the drawing is applicable to all the above-described configurations when configured to have an AT.

  First, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1401-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a state in which the AT lottery is possible. It should be noted that in the figure, there is no plurality of gaming states having different probabilities of winning the AT lottery such as a low probability state and a high probability state, and for example, one gaming state such as a high probability state in the present embodiment. Is configured to be able to execute the AT lottery. Also, as a difference from the present embodiment, an AT lottery is not executed based on the winning of BB.

  If Yes in step 1401-1, in step 1401-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets "2" as the AT lottery type and temporarily stores the AT lottery type in a predetermined RAM area. Here, the AT lottery type is a type provided for reducing the data capacity required for executing the AT lottery, and for identifying a winning probability when executing the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the condition device related to the game has no setting difference (a condition device having no setting difference in the lottery probability). In the modification example shown in the drawing, the condition devices that do not have a setting difference are watermelon B, cherry, watermelon A, replay (all replays or some replays), In the present processing, it is determined whether or not a condition device having no setting difference has been won. Note that a setting difference is provided in the lottery probability between the loss and the common bell (there is a setting difference). However, in the present process, it is configured not to determine whether the loss or the common bell has been won. ing. It is preferable that the predetermined RAM area for storing the AT lottery type is different from the RAM area for storing the winning numbers and the effect group numbers. With such a configuration, an area for storing a winning number, which is an area in which information on a condition device having a setting difference in the winning probability and information on a condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability are stored, and an effect group. An area for storing an AT lottery type, which is an area for storing information about condition devices having a setting difference in the winning probabilities and information about condition devices having no setting difference in the winning probabilities; Can be configured not to be confused.

  If Yes in step 1401-3, in step 1401-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the AT lottery type table, sets the AT lottery type, and sets the AT lottery type in the predetermined RAM area (step 1401-2). Temporarily store (will be overwritten) in the same RAM area as the predetermined RAM area, and then proceed to step 1401-5. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1401-3, the processing shifts to step 1401-5. Here, the AT lottery table in the middle right of the drawing will be described in detail. In this modified example, when a condition device that has no setting difference in a situation where the AT lottery can be executed is won, when the watermelon B is won, the AT lottery type is “0”, and when the cherry is won. Is "0" as the AT lottery type, "1" as the AT lottery type when winning watermelon A, "2" as the AT lottery type when winning the replay, and It is configured to set “2” as the AT lottery type.

  Next, in step 1401-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the AT lottery based on the set AT lottery type. Here, as shown in the lower right part of the figure, the probability of winning the AT lottery is 56/256 when the AT lottery type is “0”, and 18/256 when the AT lottery type is “1”. When the AT lottery type is “2”, the number is 1/256, and “0 → 1 → 2” in order from the player who easily wins the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery executed in step 1401-5 has been won. If Yes in step 1401-6, in step 1401-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 50) as an AT initial game number in an AT counter. In this modification, unlike the present embodiment, the AT initial transition game number is set to the AT counter in the AT state transition control processing, and the AT initial game number is set in the AT state start control processing. (When the number of AT games is added, the number of AT games may be added). Next, in step 1401-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the “AT-in-progress state”, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1430). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1401-1 or 1401-6, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1430).

  In a conventional gaming machine, as an AT lottery, a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination and a lottery process (lottery process that refers to the winning combination) executed when a condition device having no setting difference is won are selected. In the case of having the configuration, the AT lottery has to be executed at least twice. However, by providing the AT lottery type as shown in the figure, a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination (in the figure, And the lottery process executed in the case where the condition device with no setting difference is won (the process of step 1401-4 corresponds in the figure). Can be executed in a single lottery process (in the figure, the process of step 1401-6 corresponds).

<<< Process for Determining Bonus Winning Information, Winning / Replaying Winning Information, Direction Group Number, and Outgoing Group Number Applicable to This Example >>>>
In the following, a process of generating bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information from a winning number applicable to this example, a process of determining a production group number from winning / replay winning information, and a determination of a payout group number Will be described. By executing the processing described below, the program processing stored in the ROM of the main control board M can be simplified, and the program area and data area required for the program processing can be compressed. It is to be noted that the processing described in detail below is applicable to any of the above-described embodiments and configurations and any of the embodiments and configurations described below.

<<< Process of Generating Bonus Winning Information and Winning / Replaying Winning Information from Winning Number >>>
In the following, a description will be given of a process of generating two types of winning information from the winning number, that is, bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information. As described above, the condition device number can be referred to as a winning number, and is hereinafter referred to as a winning number. The winning number is determined by the winning lottery means. Based on the determined winning number, two types of winning information, that is, bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information, are generated and stored in another storage area of the built-in RAMC120. In this process, the winning number itself is not stored in the built-in RAMC120.

  In the process of generating the bonus winning information and the winning / replay winning information, the winning information regarding the bonus combination and the winning / replay winning information are generated from the winning number by using a winning information generating table shown in FIG. By using the winning information generation table, the control processing can be simplified and the load on the control processing can be reduced. The winning information generation table is stored in the built-in ROM C110.

<Specific method>
Numerical values from 0 to 27 are defined as the winning numbers. As shown in FIG. 10, the winning numbers 0 to 18 are assigned as winning numbers not including the bonus combination, and the winning numbers 19 to 27 are assigned as the winning numbers including the bonus combination. By allocating in this way, if the winning numbers are 0 to 18, it can be immediately determined that the information is either winning or replay winning information. If the winning number is 19 or more, a process of generating winning information on the bonus combination and winning / replay winning information from the winning number is performed.

<Winning information generation table>
FIG. 94 shows a specific example of the winning information generation table. The winning information generation table shown in FIG. 94 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the internal ROMC 110 and the data stored at that address. In the example shown in FIG. 94, the address is indicated by a hexadecimal number (H), and the data is indicated by a decimal number (D).

  As shown in FIG. 94, data 19D is stored at address 1300H, data 38D is stored at address 1301H, data 52D is stored at address 1302H, and data 53D is stored at address 1303H. , Address 1304H stores data 54D, address 1305H stores data 57D, address 1306H stores data 71D, address 1307H stores data 72D, and address 1308H stores data 72D. Data 73D is stored.

  The address 1300H corresponds to the winning number 19, the address 1301H corresponds to the winning number 20, the address 1302H corresponds to the winning number 21, the address 1303H corresponds to the winning number 22, and the address 1304H corresponds to the winning number 22. Address 1305H corresponds to winning number 24, address 1306H corresponds to winning number 25, address 1307H corresponds to winning number 26, and address 1308H corresponds to winning number 27. .

  The data of the winning information generation table is determined from (bonus winning information) and (winning / re-game winning information) shown in FIG. The data stored in the winning information generation table is determined by (data) = (bonus winning information corresponding to the winning number) × 19D + (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number).

  For example, the address 1300H corresponds to the winning number 19, and referring to FIG. 10, (bonus winning information of the winning number 19) = 1D, and (winning / replaying winning information corresponding to the winning number 19). = 0D. Therefore, the data at the address 1300H becomes 19D by calculating 1D × 19D + 0D. The address 1303H corresponds to the winning number 22. Referring to FIG. 10, (bonus winning information of the winning number 22) = 2D, and (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number 22). = 15D. Therefore, the data at the address 1303H becomes 53D by calculating 2D × 19D + 15D. Further, the address 1308H corresponds to the winning number 27. Referring to FIG. 10, (bonus winning information of the winning number 27) = 3D, and (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number 27). ) = 16D. Therefore, the data at the address 1308H becomes 73D by calculating 3D × 19D + 16D. The value thus calculated in advance is stored in each of the addresses 1300H to 1308H of the internal ROM C110. In other words, (bonus winning information) and (winning / replay winning information) are encoded by the above-described formula, and the values are stored in each of the addresses 1300H to 1308H of the internal ROMC110.

<Process for determining winning information>
The winning number determined by the role lottery means is stored in the A register and the L register. Next, a comparison operation is performed between the data stored in the A register and the value 19D. Specifically, a process of subtracting 19D from the data stored in the A register is executed. If the carry flag is not set to 1 by this arithmetic processing, the winning information generation table shown in FIG. 94 is referred to. The comparison operation between the data stored in the A register and the value 19D is a process for determining whether to refer to the winning information generation table.

  As a result of comparing the data stored in the A register with the value 19D, if the data stored in the A register is smaller than 19D (when the carry flag = 1), the data is stored in the L register. The stored data is stored in the built-in RAMC 120 as winning / replay winning information.

  As a result of comparing the data stored in the A register with the value 19D, if the data stored in the A register is 19D or more (when the carry flag is not set to 1), the following processing is executed. I do.

  First, 12EDH is stored in the HL register. This 12EDH is an address value obtained by subtracting 13H (19D) from 1300H. In the following processing, a target address is determined using this 12EDH as a reference address.

  A register is added to the address value (12EDH) stored in the HL register to obtain a target address. In other words, the address value (12EDH) stored in the HL register becomes the reference address, and the winning number stored in the A register becomes the offset value. As described above, the target address is obtained by using the reference address and the offset value, and the data stored at the target address is read and stored in the A register.

  Next, the value stored in the A register is divided by 19D, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the L register. The value (quotient) of the A register is (bonus winning information), and the value (remainder) of the L register is (winning / replay winning information). By doing so, it is possible to decode into (bonus winning information) and (winning / replay winning information).

  Next, the information stored in the A register is stored in the built-in RAM C120 as bonus winning information, and the information stored in the L register is stored in the built-in RAM C 120 as winning / replay winning information.

<Example 1 When the winning number determined by the role lottery means is 19D (13H) and 19D is stored in the A register>
By carrying out a comparison operation between the data 19D stored in the A register and the value 19D, the carry flag = 1. Based on the result, 12EDH (HL register) + 13H (A register) is calculated. As a result, the target address becomes 1300H, and the data 19D of 1300H is read and stored in the A register, so that the A register = 19D.

  Next, 19D stored in the A register is divided by the value 19D, and the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the L register. The quotient is 1D and the remainder is 0D. As described above, the address 1300H corresponds to the winning number 19. Therefore, if the winning number 19 (bonus winning information) is 1 and the winning number 19 (winning / replay winning information) is 0, decoding is possible.

<Example 2 When the winning number determined by the role lottery means is 21D (15H) and 21D is stored in the A register>
By carrying out a comparison operation between the data 21D stored in the A register and the value 19D, the carry flag = 1. Based on the result, 12EDH (HL register) + 15H (A register) is calculated. As a result, the target address becomes 1302H, and the data 52D of 1302H is read out and stored in the A register, so that A register = 52D.

  Next, 52D stored in the A register is divided by the value 19D, and the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the L register. The quotient is 2D and the remainder is 14D. As described above, the address 1302H corresponds to the winning number 21. Therefore, if the winning number 21 (bonus winning information) is 2, and the winning number 21 (winning / replay winning information) is 14, the decoding can be performed.

<<< Process for Determining Production Group Number from Winning / Replay Winning Information >>>>
The process of determining the effect group number from the winning / replay winning information will be described.
In the processing on the main control board M side, the winning / replay winning number is stored in the RAM, and when the bonus combination is won, the winning number of the bonus combination is stored in another storage area of the RAM. In the main control board M, the effect group number determination table is stored in the ROM. The effect group number determination table is used to determine an effect group number from a winning / re-game winning number. The effect group number determination table is defined in duplicate for the winning and replay winning numbers. By referring to the effect group number determination table, the effect group number can be determined from the winning / replay winning number. The effect group number determination table stores effect group numbers corresponding to each of a plurality of addresses. An address is determined from a winning / re-game winning number, and the effect group number can be determined by reading out the effect group number stored at that address.

<Direction group number>
The effect group number is information corresponding to the winning / re-game winning information, and is information in which at least a part of the information is grouped. The effect group number is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. For example, push order replays with RT fluctuations can be grouped into the same effect group number, and push order bells with different payout numbers can be grouped into the same effect group number.

<< Example 1 of effect group number determination table >>
The effect group number determination table is a table for specifying an effect group number using winning / replay winning information as an offset value. The effect group number determination table is stored in built-in ROMC110. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a first specific example of the effect group number determination table. Hereinafter, it is referred to as effect group number determination table 1. The effect group number determination table 1 shown in FIG. 95 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the internal ROMC 110 and the data stored at that address. In the example shown in FIG. 95, the address is indicated by a hexadecimal number (H), and the data is indicated by a decimal number (D).

  As shown in FIG. 95, data 1200 is stored at address 1200H, data 1D is stored at address 1201H, data 2D is stored at address 1202H, and data 3D is stored at address 1203H. , An address 1204H stores data 4D, an address 1205H stores data 4D, an address 1206H stores data 4D, an address 1207H stores data 5D, and an address 1208H stores Data 5D is stored, data 5D is stored at address 1209H, data 5D is stored at address 120AH, data 5D is stored at address 120BH, data 5D is stored at address 120CH, Data 6D is stored at address 120DH, and Address 120FH stores data 7D, address 120FH stores data 8D, address 1210H stores data 9D, address 1211H stores data 10D, and address 1212H stores data 10D. 11D is stored.

  The address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 0, the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 1, the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 2, the address 1203H corresponds to the winning number 3, and the address 1204H corresponds to the winning number 3. Address 1205H corresponds to the winning number 4, address 1205H corresponds to the winning number 6, address 1206H corresponds to the winning number 6, address 1207H corresponds to the winning number 7, and address 1208H corresponds to the winning number 8. , The address 1209H corresponds to the winning number 9, the address 120AH corresponds to the winning number 10, the address 120BH corresponds to the winning number 11, the address 120CH corresponds to the winning number 12, and the address 120DH corresponds to the winning number. The address 120EH corresponds to the winning number 14, and the address 120FH corresponds to the winning number 14. Corresponding to the winning number 15, the address 1210H corresponds to the winning number 16, the address 1211H corresponds to the winning number 17, the address 1212H corresponds to the winning number 18.

<Process of determining the production group number>
1200H is stored in the HL register, and the winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning lottery means is stored in the C register. Next, the effect group number can be obtained by adding the value of the C register to the value of the HL register and reading the value stored at the address of the built-in ROM C110 indicated by the added value. In other words, 1200H stored in the HL register is the reference address, and the winning / replay winning information stored in the C register is the offset value. As described above, the target address is obtained by using the reference address and the offset value, and the data stored at the target address is read to obtain the effect group number.

  For example, when the winning number 7 is determined by the role lottery means, 1207H is obtained by 1200H + 7D. The data corresponding to the address 1207H of the effect group number determination table 1 is 5, and the effect group number can be determined to be 5. When the winning number 12 is determined by the winning lottery means, 120CH is obtained by 1200H + 12D. The data corresponding to the address 120CH in the effect group number determination table 1 is 5, and the effect group number can be determined to be 5.

<< Example 2 of effect group number determination table >>
In the above-described first example of the effect group number determination table, an example is described in which the effect group number determination table in which one effect group number is associated with one address of the internal ROMC 110 is used. The effect group number determination table may be defined by associating two effect group numbers. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a second specific example of the effect group number determination table. Hereinafter, it is referred to as effect group number determination table 2. The effect group number determination table 2 shown in FIG. 96 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the internal ROMC 110 and the data stored at that address. In the example shown in FIG. 96, the address is indicated by a hexadecimal number (H), and the data is indicated by a binary number (D). In FIG. 96, a symbol “/” is inserted between the upper and lower bits in order to clearly show the separation between the upper 4-bit data and the lower 4-bit data. In practice, the data consists of only 0s and 1s.

  Out of the data stored in the effect group number determination table 2, the lower 4 bits of data correspond to the even winning numbers, and the upper 4 bits of the data correspond to the odd winning numbers. Specifically, the following measures are taken.

  As shown in FIG. 96, 0001 / 0000B is stored at address 1200H. The lower 4 bits 0000 correspond to the winning number 0, and the upper 4 bits 0001 correspond to the winning number 1. 0011 / 0010B is stored in the address 1201H. The lower 4 bits 0010 correspond to the winning number 2, and the upper 4 bits 0011 correspond to the winning number 3. 0100 / 0100B is stored in the address 1202H. The lower 4 bits 0100 correspond to the winning number 4, and the upper 4 bits 0100 correspond to the winning number 4. 0101 / 0100B is stored in the address 1203H. The lower 4 bits 0100 correspond to the winning number 4, and the upper 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5.

  Further, 0101 / 0101B is stored in the address 1204H. The lower 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5, and the upper 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5. 0101 / 0101B is stored in the address 1205H. The lower 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5, and the upper 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5. 0110 / 0101B is stored in the address 1206H. The lower 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5, and the upper 4 bits 0110 correspond to the winning number 6. The address 1207H stores 1000 / 0111B. The lower 4 bits 0111 correspond to the winning number 7, and the upper 4 bits 1000 correspond to the winning number 8. The address 1208H stores 1010 / 1001B. The lower 4 bits 1001 correspond to the winning number 9, and the upper 4 bits 1010 correspond to the winning number 10. 0000 / 1011B is stored in the address 1209H. The lower 4 bits 1011 correspond to the winning number 11.

<Processing for determining the production group number>
1200H is stored in the HL register, and the winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning lottery means is stored in the A register. Next, a shift operation for shifting the data of the A register to the right is executed. According to this shift operation, if the carry flag is 1, the winning / replay winning information can be determined to be odd, and if the carry flag is 0, the winning / replay winning information is determined to be even. can do. If the winning / replay winning information is an odd number, the upper 4 bits of the data stored in the built-in ROM C110 may be read. What is necessary is just to read the lower 4 bits of the stored data.

  Further, as described above, since the data in the A register is shifted to the right, the value of the winning / replay winning information is divided by two. Since this value indicates the relative distance (offset value) from the address 1200H, the address from which the value should be read can be calculated by adding the A register to the HL register.

  When the winning / replay winning information is an odd number, the upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits of the data stored in the address are exchanged, and a logical product is obtained with 000011111B, whereby the effect group number stored in the upper 4 bits. Can be obtained. When the winning / replay winning information is an even number, the data stored in the address is logically ANDed with 000011111B to obtain the effect group number stored in the lower 4 bits.

  In this way, by determining the address and the upper 4 bits or lower 4 bits, the effect group number stored in the effect group number determination table 2 can be determined.

<< Example 3 of effect group number determination table >>
As described above, the effect group number determination table is a table for specifying an effect group number using winning / replay winning information as an offset value. The effect group number determination table is stored in built-in ROMC110. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a third specific example of the effect group number determination table. Hereinafter, it is referred to as effect group number determination table 3. The effect group number determination table 3 shown in FIG. 97 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the internal ROMC 110 and the data stored at that address. In the example shown in FIG. 97, the address is indicated by a hexadecimal number (H), and the data is indicated by a binary number (B).

  The effect group number determination table 3 shown in FIG. 97 is a table for specifying an effect group number by counting a value (1 (or 0)) defined corresponding to the winning / replay winning information. .

  As shown in FIG. 97, data 01111001B is stored at address 1200H, data 00000011B is stored at address 1201H, and data 111100B is stored at address 1202H.

  The address 1200H corresponds to the winning numbers 0 to 7, the address 1201H corresponds to the winning numbers 8 to 15, and the address 1202H corresponds to the winning numbers 16 to 18. Specifically, the seventh bit of address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 0, the sixth bit of address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 1, the fifth bit of address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 2, and the address 1200H of the address 1200H. The fourth bit corresponds to the winning number 3, the third bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 4, the second bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 5, and the first bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 6. Correspondingly, the 0th bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 7.

  The seventh bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 8, the sixth bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 9, the fifth bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 10, and the fourth bit of the address 1201H. Corresponds to the winning number 11, the third bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 12, the second bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 13, the first bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 14, The 0th bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 15.

  Further, the seventh bit of the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 16, the sixth bit of the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 17, and the fifth bit of the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 18.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the winning numbers 0 to 18, the effect group number of one winning number is increased by 1 with respect to the effect group number of the immediately preceding winning number, and the value is unchanged and the same effect group is not changed. It may be a number. For example, the production group number of the winning number 3 is 3, the production group number of the winning number 2 immediately before the winning number 3 is 2, and the production group number of the winning number 3 is different from the production group number of the winning number 2. Has increased by one. The production group number of the winning number 11 is 5, the production group number of the winning number 10 immediately before the winning number 11 is 5, and the production group number of the winning number 11 is different from the production group number of the winning number 10. Does not change.

  The effect group number determination table 3 is a table configured by focusing on such a change in the effect group number. When the effect group number of one winning number is increased by 1 with respect to the effect group number of the immediately preceding winning number, the value corresponding to the one winning number is set to 1 and does not change with respect to the immediately preceding effect group number. In this case, the effect group number determination table 3 is defined by setting the value corresponding to one winning number to 0.

  In the above-described example, the effect group number of the winning number 3 is 3, the effect group number of the winning number 2 immediately before the winning number 3 is 2, and the effect group number of the winning number 3 is the effect group of the winning number 2. Since the number is increased by one, the value corresponding to the winning number 3 is set to 1 (see the fourth bit of the address 1200H). The production group number of the winning number 11 is 5, the production group number of the winning number 10 immediately before the winning number 11 is 5, and the production group number of the winning number 11 is different from the production group number of the winning number 10. Therefore, the value corresponding to the winning number 11 is set to 0 (see the fourth bit of the address 1201H). That is, the value of the change of the effect group number is stored in the effect group number determination table 3 in association with the winning number.

  As described above, in Example 3 of the effect group number determination table, it is sufficient to secure an area for one bit for one winning number, and the table data to be stored in the built-in ROMC 110 can also be compressed.

<Process of determining the production group number>
First, the data stored in 1200H of the built-in ROM C110 is read out and stored in the HL register, and a value obtained by adding 1H to the winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning lottery means is stored in the C register. Let it. Further, 8H is stored in the B register. Next, a shift operation is performed on the data stored in the HL register as the number of times to shift the value stored in the C register. In this process, a shift operation to the left is performed, and in the shift operation, the number of times that the carry flag becomes 1H is counted, and the counted result becomes the effect group number.

  If the value stored in the C register is less than 8, the data stored in 1200H of the built-in ROM C110 is read out, stored in the HL register, and shifted with respect to the data stored in the HL register. Perform the operation. In this shift operation, the number of times that the carry flag becomes 1H is counted, and the counted result is used as the effect group number.

  Further, when the value stored in the C register is 8 or more and less than 16, first, the data stored in 1200H of the built-in ROM C110 is read out, stored in the HL register, and the data stored in the HL register is read out. , And the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted. Subsequently, data stored in 1201H of the built-in ROM C110 is read out, stored in the HL register, a shift operation is performed on the data stored in the HL register, and the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted. In addition to the counting result of, the added result is used as the production group number. As described above, when the value stored in the C register is 8 or more and less than 16, the effect group number can be obtained using the data stored in the internal ROMC110 at 1200H and 1201H.

  Further, when the value stored in the C register is 16 or more and less than 19, first, the data stored in 1200H of the built-in ROM C110 is read, stored in the HL register, and stored in the HL register. A shift operation is performed on the data, and the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted. Subsequently, data stored in 1201H of the built-in ROM C110 is read out, stored in the HL register, a shift operation is performed on the data stored in the HL register, and the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted. To the counting result. Further, the data stored in 1202H of the built-in ROM C110 is read, stored in the HL register, a shift operation is performed on the data stored in the HL register, and the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is counted. In addition to the counting result of, the added result is used as the production group number. As described above, when the value stored in the C register is 16 or more and less than 19, the effect group number can be obtained by using the data stored in 1200H, 1201H, and 1202H of the internal ROMC110. .

  In this way, the data stored in the internal ROMC 110 is read from 1200H to 1202H in accordance with the value stored in the C register, and the total number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is calculated, thereby producing the effect. You can get the group number.

<Example 1 When the winning / replay winning information is 0D>
First, since the winning / re-game winning information is 0D, the number of shifts is one due to 0D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROM C110 and storing it in the HL register, an operation of shifting the data stored in the HL register one time to the left is executed. By the shift operation, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H becomes 0D, and “0” is determined as the effect group number.

<Example 2 Winning / replay winning information is 5D>
First, since the winning / re-game winning information is 5D, the number of shifts is 6 by 5D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored at the address 1200H of the internal ROM C110 and storing it in the HL register, an operation of shifting the data stored in the HL register leftward six times is executed. By the shift operation, the number of times that the carry flag becomes 1H becomes 4D, and “4” is determined as the effect group number.

<Example 3 Winning / replay winning information is 10D>
First, since the winning / re-game winning information is 5D, the number of shifts is 11 by 10D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROM C110 and storing it in the HL register, the data stored in the HL register is firstly subjected to an operation of shifting left eight times. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H by the shift operation is 5D.

  Further, since the number of shifts is 8 or more, next, 00000111B stored in the address 1201H of the internal ROM C110 is read out, stored in the HL register, and then stored in the HL register. Performs an operation to shift left by the number of times. By the shift operation, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H becomes 5D, and “5” is determined as the effect group number.

<Example 4 Winning / Replay Winning Information is 18D>
First, since the winning / replay winning information is 18D, the number of shifts is 19 due to 18D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROM C110 and storing it in the HL register, an operation of shifting the data stored in the HL register to the left eight times is executed. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H by the shift operation is 5D.

  Further, since the number of shifts is eight or more, 00000111B stored in the address 1201H of the built-in ROM C110 is read out and stored in the HL register. Performs an operation to shift left by the number of times. By the shift operation, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H becomes 8D by adding 3D.

  Further, since the number of shifts is 16 or more, next, 11100000B stored in the address 1202H of the built-in ROM C110 is read out, stored in the HL register, and then stored in the HL register. Performs an operation to shift left by the number of times. By the shift operation, the number of times the carry flag becomes 1H becomes 11D by adding 3D further, and “11” is determined as the effect group number.

  In the above-described example, an example has been described in which the number of 1Bs included in the data stored in the effect group number determination table 3 is counted to determine the effect group number. The effect group number may be determined by counting the number of 0B included in the data.

  By determining a rendering group number by the above-described determination method and defining a rare role and a non-rare to be described later by the rendering group number, a gaming machine with reduced complicated processing can be created.

<<<< Departure group number determination processing >>>>
When the winning number is determined by the role lottery means, the lottery table is referred to. The lottery table stores winning numbers, numbers to be compared with random numbers, and the like. Further, the payout group number is determined together with the winning number with reference to the lottery table. Therefore, data corresponding to the payout group number is also stored in the so-called lottery table. The payout group number is a number used when performing a lottery relating to the instruction function (AT lottery, AT addition lottery, state transition lottery related to AT, etc.).

  The payout group numbers are assigned in correspondence with the winning numbers, but are not necessarily assigned in a one-to-one manner. For some win numbers, duplicate payout group numbers may be assigned. is there. As the configuration of the lottery table, all information for each of the winning numbers can be defined and configured.However, if information on duplicated payout group numbers is also specified, the capacity of the lottery table increases and the lottery table becomes larger. It is necessary to process the information read from the main control board M, and the processing in the main control board M must be complicated. For this reason, when defining the lottery table, the information regarding the overlapping payout group numbers includes information indicating that they are duplicated, so that the entire capacity of the lottery table can be reduced and the main control board M Can be simplified and efficiency can be improved.

  FIG. 98 is a table showing an example of the lottery table. Note that FIG. 98 illustrates a case where the winning group number of which the payout group number is 2 is six, that is, six winning numbers 7 to 12. The first line of the table shown in FIG. 98 is data indicating that the winning number is designated and indicating that the winning number is 7D. The second row of the table shown in FIG. 98 is data indicating that the information on the payout group numbers is duplicated and that the number of times of duplication is 6D. The third row of the table shown in FIG. 98 indicates that the data indicates the payout group number and that the payout group number is 2D. The fourth line of the table shown in FIG. 98 is data indicating that the set number (judgment value, probability data) is 2 bytes. The fifth row of the table shown in FIG. 98 is data indicating that the actual number (determination value, probability data) is 2034D.

  In the example shown in FIG. 98, the winning number is 7, and the condition device (name) is the winning-A1 data (see FIG. 10). As shown in FIG. 10, the condition device (name) of the winning number 8 is winning-A2, the condition device (name) of the winning number 9 is winning-A3, and the condition device (name) of the winning number 10 Is winning-A4, the condition device (name) of the winning number 11 is winning-A5, and the condition device (name) of the winning number 12 is winning-A6. The payout group numbers of the winning numbers 7 to 12 are all 2 in common, and are defined redundantly. As described above, when the information on the winning group numbers for the winning numbers 7 to 12 is defined for each winning number, the capacity of the lottery table must be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 98, in the second row, data indicating that the number of times of duplication is 6 is stored. Therefore, information on the payout group numbers for the winning numbers 8 to 12 can be omitted, and the capacity of the lottery table can be reduced. Further, for the winning numbers 8 to 12, the process of reading out information on the payout group number from the lottery table can be omitted, and the process can be simplified and speeded up.

  With the configuration as described above, a plurality of states relating to the AT are provided, and the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 on the main control board M side and the push order navigation on the effect display device on the sub control board S side are performed. Is notified in an appropriate display mode based on the state related to the AT, whereby a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided.

  Next, FIG. 99 is an image diagram 1 of an effect during execution of an AT that is applicable to the present example. First, on the left side of the figure, in the situation where the state relating to the AT is the “AT-in-progress state”, the daytime background is displayed on the effect display device S40, and “winning-A1” (push order bell) is displayed as the condition device. The winning order is displayed, and a pressing order navigation display corresponding to “left → middle → right” is displayed in a circular figure as a number (first number display mode group). Also, in the center of the figure, the day background is displayed on the effect display device S40 under the situation where the state related to the AT is the "specialized precursor state", and "winning-A1" (push order bell) as the condition device. Has been won, and a push order navigation display corresponding to “left → middle → right” is displayed in a star-shaped figure as a number (second number display mode group). On the right side of the figure, under the situation where the state relating to the AT is “additional specialization state”, the night background is displayed on the effect display device S40, and “winning-A1” (push order bell) is displayed as the condition device. Has been won, and the push order navigation display corresponding to “left → middle → right” is displayed as a numeral (first numeral display mode group) in a circular figure. As described above, the background effect is different between the case where the state relating to the AT is the “AT-in-progress state” and the case where the state is the “additional specialization state”, but the display mode group of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is different. Are the same. Further, the background effect is the same between the case where the state regarding the AT is the “in-AT state” and the case where the “specialized precursor state”, but the display mode group of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is different. ing. In the figure, the push order navigation of “left → middle → right” is shown as an example, but the same configuration is used when other push order navigations are displayed. Further, in the present example, the “special advance sign state” and the “additional special state” are configured so that the number of remaining AT games is not reduced by the execution of the game.

  Next, FIG. 100 is an image drawing 2 of an effect during execution of an AT that is applicable to the present embodiment. First, in the upper left part of the figure, in a situation where the state relating to the AT is “the state in which the AT is in progress”, the player wins “winning-A1”, which is a pressing order bell, and displays the inside of a circular figure on the effect display device S40. With the drawn numbers (first number display mode group), a push order navigation display indicating that the stop button D40 is operated in the order of “left → middle → right” is displayed. “= 1”, which is a display corresponding to the pressing order of the “middle → right” stop button D40, is displayed. When the player operates the left stop button D41, which is the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, the second stop is displayed to prompt the operation of the middle stop button D42 (the display of the effect display device S40). The display of “2” in the push order navigation display becomes larger). Next, when the middle stop button D42, which is the stop button based on the correct pressing order, is operated as the second stop, a display prompting the operation of the right stop button D43 is displayed as the third stop (the pressing of the effect display device S40). The display of “3” in the forward navigation display becomes larger). Next, when the right stop button D43 is operated, the operations of all the stop buttons D40 are executed in the order of pressing the navigation, and the 11 payout bells, which is the maximum payout number, wins, and the 11 payouts are performed. Is paid out, and the effect display device S40 displays “GET !!”.

  On the other hand, when the player operates the middle stop button D42, which is a stop button different from the left stop button D41, which is a stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in the upper left of the drawing, the effect display device S40. Is deleted, and the character "Bad ..." is displayed as a press order failure effect. Next, the operation is performed in the order of the right stop button D43 and the left stop button D41, and the operations of all the stop buttons D40 are completed. However, the stop buttons D40 are arranged in the order of “middle → right → left”, which is a pressing order of incorrect answers. As a result of the operation, one of the condition devices “winning 08” to “winning 10” wins and one game medal is paid out. Note that the character “GET !!” is not displayed on the effect display device S40. That is, when the stop button D40 is operated in the correct pushing order in accordance with the instruction of the pushing order navigation, there is a payout with the maximum payout number (there is the most advantageous payout number in the winning condition device) and the player In the case where the stop button D40 is operated in an incorrectly pressed order while the effect to congratulate is displayed on the effect display device S40, when the stop button for the incorrect answer is operated, the pressing order is changed. Even if a message indicating that navigation has failed is displayed and the operation of all the stop buttons D40 has been completed, an effect for congratulating the player is not displayed on the effect display device S40. In addition, since the reels are stopped in the pushing order in which the maximum payout number is 11 to be paid out, “GET!” Is not displayed, but the pushing order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 follows. "GET!" Is displayed depending on whether or not the reel is stopped. That is, in the situation where the pressing order of “left → middle → right” is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the pressing order navigation, the reels are stopped in the order of “middle → right → left”, and the maximum payout number and When the bell wins, no "GET!" Is displayed on the effect display device S40. In a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation is not displayed, such as a "normal game state", if the player wins the push order bell and the player stops the reels in an arbitrary push order, the correct answer is the correct answer in the 6 alternate push order. Then, even if 11 payouts are obtained, "GET!" Is not displayed on the effect display device S40. Similarly, in the push order failure effect, the push order failure effect is displayed by stopping the reels in the push order in which the maximum payout number of 11 sheets is not paid out (one payout). That is to say, a push order failure effect is displayed depending on whether or not the reel is stopped without following the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40. That is, in the situation where the pressing order of “left → middle → right” is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the pressing order navigation, the reels are stopped in the order of “middle → right → left”, and the maximum payout number and In the event that a bell has been won, a pressing order failure effect is also executed on the effect display device S40. When the stop button is operated in a pressing order different from the correct pressing order, the pressing order navigation display on the pressing order display device D270 displays (1) until the reel related to the third stop stops (2). Until a stop button different from the correct answer pressing order is operated, (3) a stop button different from the correct answer pressing order is operated and a reel related to the stop button stops, and (4) a bet button related to the next game is operated. Until the operation is performed, (5) the display may be displayed until the start lever for the next game is operated.

  Next, FIG. 101 is an image drawing 3 of an effect during execution of an AT that is applicable to the present embodiment. First, on the left side of the figure, in a situation where the state relating to the AT is “additional specialization state” and the state relating to the RT is “RT1”, the player is elected to “re-game-C”, which is a replay with seven push blacks. In addition, the number of AT games is added to the number of lotteries and the lottery is won (wins by 1/2), and on the staging display device S40, the pressing order in which black seven is aligned with the invalid line (lower line) is “left → middle → right”. Is displayed in the form of an arrow (a display mode using an arrow image), and a message "Aim for 7!" Is displayed. The pressing order display device D270 is not displayed (the pressing order navigation is not displayed). At this time, at the same time, the decorative lamp unit D150 shown in FIG. 1 is used to emit light from left to right (for example, the decorative lamp on the left blinks from bottom to top, and then blinks from below. , The right decorative lamp blinks from top to bottom to indicate the left-to-right flow.) The push order navigation may be executed by the lamp unit D150. Thereby, for example, even in a situation where the push order navigation cannot be displayed due to a malfunction of the effect display device S40, it can be suggested that the game is a game aiming at 7 in the order of “left → middle → right”. Further, in this example, the replay is employed as a role for aligning the seven alignments with the invalid line. However, in the case of substituting with a pressing order bell whose number varies according to the pressing order, the failure of the effect display device S40 is fatal. Since a situation can occur, the suggestion of the push order navigation using the decorative lamp unit D150 works more effectively. In the case of the push order bell, even if a failure occurs in the effect display device S40, the display of the push order navigation is continuously performed by the push order display device D270, but in the case of a new player, the push order display device is Since it is not easy to understand the pressing order represented by the display mode of D270, the role of insurance against an irregular situation can be expected by using the lighting mode of the decorative lamp unit D150 that is easily understood visually. Thereafter, when the stop button D40 is operated in the order of “left → middle → right”, a display to the effect that “50 games” has been added as the number of AT added games is displayed on the effect display device S40. On the other hand, the push order navigation display corresponding to “left → middle → right” is displayed by an arrow (a display mode by an arrow image), and the message “Aim for 7 !!” is displayed. When the middle stop button (a stop button other than the left stop button which is a correct answer stop button) is operated in the first stop, the entire screen darkens, but the pressing order navigation of the arrow corresponding to “left → middle → right” is performed. The display and the display of the message "Aim for 7 !!" are not deleted. Thereafter, when all the reels are stopped, a display indicating that "50 games" has been added as the number of AT-added games is displayed on the effect display device S40. At the time of the replay winning with seven push blacks, the number of AT games is added and the lottery is won. Therefore, regardless of whether or not to follow the push order navigation, the number of AT games is added. On the right side of the figure, under the situation where the state relating to the AT is “additional specialization state” and the state relating to the RT is “RT1”, the player is elected as “re-game-C” which is a replay with seven push blacks. If the number of AT games is increased and the lottery is not won (1/2 is not won), on the effect display device S40, the pushing order in which the black seven is not aligned with the invalid line (lower line) (“left As a pressing order navigation display corresponding to a pressing order other than “→ middle → right”, a pressing order navigator indicating a middle stop button D42 as a stop button for the first stop is displayed. The pressing order display device D270 is not displayed. Next, after that, the middle stop button D42 was operated as the first stop button, but no effect related to adding the number of games is generated. As described above, in this example, “re-game-C1” is a condition device in which the profit for the player is the same regardless of the pushing order, and the AT addition lottery is executed based on the operation of the start lever. That is, whether or not to win the AT-additional lottery is determined based on the operation of the start lever, and it is configured that the presence or absence of the AT-additional lottery is not different depending on the pressing order, but is shown to the player. In order to produce the effect, if the player wins "Re-Game-C" and wins the AT-additional lottery, he must instruct the pushing order ("Left → Middle → Right") where Black Seven can be aligned with the invalid line. As a result, it is possible to feel as if the number of AT games has been added by the player having prepared the black sevens, and the interest of the game is improved. On the other hand, if "Re-Game-C" has been won and the AT addition lottery has not been won, black seven is instructed to be in a non-aligned line (other than "left → center → right"). By doing so, the player does not notice that Black Seven has won the replay that can be aligned with the invalid line, that is, does not notice that the lottery has not been won in the additional number of AT games, so extra stress The game can proceed without feeling. When the reels are stopped in the pushing order in which the black seven cannot be aligned with the invalid line, the normal replay (for example, replay 01) in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable. In addition, in the case where the number of AT games is not added to the lottery, the order of pushing in which black seven cannot be aligned with the invalid line (other than “left → middle → right”) is instructed, so that the number of AT games is not added. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player feels uncomfortable when the black sevens are aligned with the invalid line. In addition, in a state related to an AT in which a normal pushing order navigation can occur (such a state is sometimes referred to as an AT state) such as an “AT state”, a particularly high effect can be expected. The same may be applied to a state related to an AT where forward navigation does not occur (sometimes referred to as a non-AT state). In this case, unlike during the AT, the push order navigation does not normally occur, so that, for example, when “Re-Game-C” is won, it is impossible for Black Seven to be aligned with the invalid line. The sudden occurrence of the pressing order (other than “left → middle → right”) may give a sense of incongruity to the player, but black 7 may accidentally be aligned with the invalid line during non-AT. This situation is not desirable because there is a concern that the player may be aware of some special benefits due to the seven sets on the invalid line. In the same drawing, an example of an effect related to the addition of the number of AT games when the player wins the "replay-C", which is a progressive black 7 replay, and wins the AT addition lottery is illustrated. The effect mode of notifying the additional game number is not limited to this. For example, when a certain game wins the AT additional lottery and the remaining number of AT games is added to 50 games, the game that is selected for the AT additional lottery is performed. In, without notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added, the game that won the "Re-Game-C1", which is a 7-play replay of black in the subsequent games, was placed on the invalid line (lower line) A push order navigation display corresponding to the push order “left → middle → right” in which the black sevens can be aligned is displayed by an arrow (a display mode using an arrow image), and a message “Aim at 7!” Is displayed. It is shown, wherein by black Seven align disable line (lower line) AT the number of remaining games may be configured to notify the subject that is plus 50 games. Similarly, for "Replay-B", which is a 7-play reversal, the AT addition lottery is also performed, for example, when the AT addition lottery is won in a certain game and 50 remaining games are added to the AT. In the game that was elected to, without notifying that the number of remaining AT games was added, in the game that was elected to "Re-Game-B", which is a 7-play replay in the subsequent game, an invalid line (lower row) The push order navigation display corresponding to the push order “right → middle → left” in which the white sevens can be aligned with the line 7) is displayed by an arrow (a display mode by the image of the arrow) and “Aim at 7!” May be displayed, and the fact that the number of remaining AT games has been added to 50 games may be notified by aligning white sevens on the invalid line (lower line). In addition, the player wins "Re-Game-C" or "Re-Game-B" and wins the number of AT games added to the lottery, has already won the AT addition lottery in the previous game, and determines the number of AT added games related to the winning. If the situation has not been notified, the number of AT-added games related to the game and the number of AT-added games related to the previous game are summed up, and the number of AT-added games related to the previous game is added at the timing when 7 replays in the game are aligned with the invalid line. You may comprise so that the total game number may be alert | reported.

  Next, FIG. 102 is an image drawing 4 of an execution during an AT effect applicable to the present embodiment. As shown in the upper left of the drawing, in the situation where the vehicle is in the AT state, when the winning device -E (watermelon B) is won as a condition device and a winning is achieved, "GET!" Is displayed on the effect display device S40 and added. It is shown that was won. By winning the prize-E, a special state shift lottery is won, and the state shifts to the state shown in the upper middle diagram.

  As shown in the upper middle figure, the battle effect is executed, and the push order navigation is displayed in the second number display mode group. The state regarding the AT at this time is “specialized precursor state”. Also, the number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of times of the push order navigation is 39 games. When the battle effect has been performed 10 times and the battle effect has ended, the state shifts to the state shown in the upper right figure.

  As shown in the upper right figure, it changes to a background image indicating that the battle effect has been won. As a result, the state regarding the AT shifts to the “additional specialization state”. The number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of times of the push order navigation is 29 games.

  On the other hand, in the stage of the upper left figure, when the winning device-E (watermelon B) is not won as the condition device, the special state transition lottery is not won, and the state shifts to the state of the lower center diagram.

  As shown in the figure in the lower center, a battle effect is executed, and the push order navigation is displayed in the first number display mode group. The state relating to the AT at this time is the “AT-in-progress state”. Also, the number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of times of the push order navigation is 39 games. When the battle effect is performed 10 times and the battle effect ends, the state shifts to the state shown in the lower right diagram.

  As shown in the lower right figure, the game loses the battle effect and remains in the “AT state”. The number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of times of the push order navigation is 29 games. In this example, in the “specialization precursor state”, the push order navigation is displayed in the second number display mode group at half of the push order navigation occurrence, and the “AT state” and the battle effect is being produced. Is configured to display the push order navigation in the second number display mode group at 1/5 of the time when the push order navigation occurs, and the player performs the push order navigation executed in the battle effect in the second order. By counting the number of times in the number display mode, the player has a feeling of expectation for the battle victory, that is, the transition to the “additional specialization state”. Note that, during the execution of the battle effect, a push-navigation, which is a first numerical display mode, can be displayed. Note that the above-mentioned “GET!” May not be displayed on the effect display device S40 during the execution of the battle effect. More specifically, if the state is "AT state" and the battle effect is not executed, the winning order is won and if the reels are stopped in the correct order, there are 11 payouts. "GET!" Is displayed on the effect display device S40 while the "AT is in progress" and the battle effect is being executed, the winning order is won and the reels are pushed in the order of the correct answer. When stopped, there are 11 payouts, but “GET!” Is not displayed on the effect display device S40. With this configuration, the player can pay more attention to the result of the battle effect without hindering the display of the battle effect. Further, the above-described configuration in which the entire screen darkens when the user does not follow the pressing order navigation (when the stop button is operated in a different pressing order from the pressing order navigation) may be applied to the pressing order bell. As an example, if the state is "AT state" and the battle effect is not executed, the push order bell is won, and if the reels are stopped in the push order different from the correct answer order, the entire screen is displayed. Is turned off and one card is paid out. On the other hand, when the game is in the "AT state" and the battle effect is being executed, the reel is pressed in a pressing order different from the correct pressing order, and the reels are pressed. If stopped, one payout is made, but the entire screen may not be darkened. With this configuration, the player can pay more attention to the result of the battle effect without hindering the display of the battle effect.

  By configuring as described above, even if the watermelon B is won in the “AT state” and the specialization transfer lottery is not won, the battle effect for 10 games is executed. Every time the player wins the watermelon B in the "AT state", the player has a sense of expectation for shifting to the "additional specialization state", and the interest of the game is improved. Also, during the execution of the battle effect, during the battle effect (defeat) in which the state related to the AT is “AT state”, the battle effect (win) in which the state related to the AT is “specialized precursor state” is performed. Even during execution, the display of the number of remaining AT games on the effect display device S40 is reduced every time the game is consumed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to make it difficult to determine which state is related to the AT during execution of the battle effect, and to pay attention to the result of the battle effect.

  Further, the following configuration may be applied to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Further, the following configuration may be applied alone, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

<< Point 1 >>
(1-1) After performing a lottery of various roles by the main control means (main control board), an AT lottery is performed based on one piece of information (combination of condition devices) determined by the lottery result, but non-winning (complete loss) In the case of), the AT lottery is not always performed.
(1-2) The AT lottery includes an AT lottery state promotion (low probability → high probability) lottery. In this case, the above (1-1) is applied. When a lottery is performed (high probability → low probability), the above (1-1) is not applied (a lottery is possible even with a complete loss).
(A) When the duration of the AT lottery state (high probability) is determined by the number of games, (1-1) is not applied to the number-of-games lottery.
Example 1: Even with the same combination of condition devices, the number of games varies randomly.
Example 2: After winning the promotion lottery in the AT lottery state, the number-of-games lottery is separately performed based on the result of the role lottery (including loss) in the next game and thereafter.
(B) The method of determining the duration of the AT lottery state (high probability) by the number of games and the method of performing the demoted lottery in the AT lottery state are used together (transition to the demoted lottery after the so-called security period).
(1-3) The AT lottery includes an AT state promotion lottery (non-AT → AT). In this case, the above (1-1) is applied. AT) When performing a lottery, the above (1-1) is not applied (a lottery is possible even with a complete loss).
(1-4) In the AT lottery, there is a promotion (low-probability → high-probability) lot in which the transition to the specialized AT is selected. In this case, the above (1-1) is applied. In the case of performing a demoted (high-probability-> low-probability) lottery in the transition lottery state to the specialized AT, (1-1) is not applied (a lottery is possible even with complete loss).
(1-5) In the AT lottery, there is a promotion lottery to the specialization type AT (AT → specialization type AT). In this case also, (1-1) is applied. In the case of performing a (type AT → AT) lottery, the above (1-1) is not applied (a lottery is possible even with complete loss).
In addition, if a grace period (so-called latent / aura game) is provided before the state transition after winning the AT lottery (any of (1-2) to (1-5)), the grace period is determined by ( 1-1) does not apply.

<< Point 2 >>
(2-1) After the lottery of the various roles is performed by the main control means, the AT lottery is performed based on one piece of information (combination of condition devices) determined by the lottery result. is there.
(2-2) At the time of the lottery in (2-1) (when the start lever is ON), information on the AT can be transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means.
(2-3) The information that can be transmitted in (2-2) includes at least the AT state type in the game and the AT state type in the next game.
(2-4) Based on the information of (2-3) transmitted in (2-2), the sub-control means determines and executes a series of effect contents corresponding to the game including an AT state transition notification. I do.
(2-5) The main control means does not output information on the AT as the outer end signal / test signal at the chance of the lottery in (2-1).
After the game is over, only the AT state type determined by the main control means is output.

<< Point 3 >>
(3-1) In the AT state (AT, specialized AT), when the main control means wins a small role in which the number of payouts and / or the RT state changes according to the pressing order, the main control means displays a specific display. Information that can specify the pressing order that is the most advantageous for the player is displayed. ) Do not display anything.
(3-2) When in the AT state (AT, specialized AT), the sub-control means determines the number of remaining games in the AT state (hereinafter referred to as “AT remaining game number”) and the total number of games consumed in the AT state ( In the following, it is possible to display "AT total game number * total net increase number".
(3-3) The number of remaining AT games is updated based on the number of remaining games in the AT state transmitted from the main control means for each game, but the total number of AT games is updated for each game. Is updated based on the AT status type transmitted from the.
Based on the advantageous section, the total number of AT games (including the total net increase) is cleared at the time of AT → non-AT.
(3-4) The number of remaining AT games can be hidden (or not updated) when in the AT state, but the total number of AT games is not hidden (or not updated) when in the AT state. .
A battle effect state before the end of the AT state, a specialized AT state, and the like are assumed.
(3-5) The number of remaining AT games is not displayed in excess of the number of remaining games in the AT state transmitted from the main control means, but may be displayed in less than that.

<< Point 4 >>
(4-1) There is a case where display is performed in a specific display mode on a specific display device controlled by the main control means (for example, 6 = 1 bell is sequentially pushed and displayed by "= 1").
(4-2) When displaying in a specific display mode (example: “= 1”), an operation instruction image (example: 1.2.3) is displayed on the image display.
(4-3) When an operation according to the instruction is performed, a series of effect images A (e.g., sequentially deleting 1.2.3 and effect images indicating the correct pressing order (e.g., 1.2.3) are displayed on the image display unit. Example: An image to defeat an enemy)) is displayed.
(4-4) When the operation according to the instruction is not performed, when it is determined that the operation according to the instruction is not performed, the effect image A to the effect image B (for example, all the operation instruction images are erased, and the pressing order incorrect answer). Switch to the effect image shown (eg, an image attacked by the enemy).
(4-5) In the case of (4-3), when a small win (eg, 9 small wins when a 6-choice bell is correctly answered) wins, a winning notification image (eg, GET) is displayed on the image display. However, in the case of (4-4), even if a small combination (for example, one small combination at the time of incorrect answering of 6-choice bell) wins, no winning notification image (for example, GET) is displayed on the image display.
(4-6) Even in the case of (4-4), when the game is over, information on the AT (eg, the number of additional games) may be displayed.
(4-7) When a predetermined error (door error, etc.) occurs while a specific display mode (eg, “= 1”) and an operation instruction image (eg, 1.2.3) are displayed. In the specific display mode, the display is maintained, but the operation instruction image is not displayed.
It is assumed that the main control means will display an error on a separate display.
(4-8) The effect of prompting the sub-button operation when nothing is displayed on the specific display device (the sub-button operation is not performed) than when displaying in the specific display mode (eg, “= 1”) (Necessary additional production) is likely to occur.

<< Point 5 >>
(5-1) There is a case where display is performed in a specific display mode on a specific display device controlled by the main control means (for example, “= 1” and a 6-push bell push display is performed).
(5-2) In the case of displaying the first effect image (example: 1.2.3 push order + AT image) on the image display when displaying in a specific display mode (example: "= 1") And a case where the second effect image (for example, the order of pressing of 1.2.3 and the special AT type image or when the additional effect is generated) is displayed.
(5-3) When displaying the second effect image, the degree of expectation that the stay period in the AT state is extended is higher than when the first effect image is displayed.
(5-4) In a game prior to the game displaying the second effect image, a precursor effect indicating the display of the second effect image can be executed.
(5-5) The second effect image (and precursor effect) is not displayed when the number of remaining AT games is less than a predetermined value (eg, in the battle effect state, when LAST? Game is displayed).

<< Point 6 >>
(6-1) There is a case where a specific display mode controlled by the main control means is displayed in a specific display mode (eg, “= 1”).
(6-2) When displaying in a specific display mode (eg, “= 1”), the image is displayed in the first display mode (eg, 1.2.3) on the image display, and in the second display mode. (Eg: → (arrow symbol)).
(6-3) The first display mode (example: 1.2.3) is a display mode in which the pressing order constituted by numbers can be specified, and the second display mode (example: → (arrow symbol)) is This is a display mode in which the pressing order composed of numbers other than numbers can be specified.
(6-4) The degree of expectation that the stay period in the AT state is extended is different between when the first display mode is displayed and when the second display mode is displayed.
Even when the second display mode is displayed, if the operation according to the pressing order is not performed, the basic operation of the point 4 is followed.

<< Point 7 >>
(7-1) The first lottery result in which the number of payouts differs according to the pressing order (eg, the correct answering order is left → middle → right pressing order bell) and the second lottery result in which the number of payouts is the same regardless of the pressing order (example) : Common bell).
(7-2) When the first lottery result is determined and when the second lottery result is determined, the profit related to the instruction function is different (for example, adding an AT ... first lottery result> second) Lottery results).
(7-3) When the first lottery result is determined during the notification game, a specific display mode (eg, “= 1”) is displayed on a specific display controlled by the main control means, and an image is displayed. It is also displayed in a display mode in which the order of pressing can be specified on the container.
(7-4) During the notification game, when the second lottery result is determined, the pressing order may be displayed on the image display.
(7-5) During the notification game, when the second lottery result is determined, the degree of expectation that the stay period of the notification game is extended differs depending on whether the push order is displayed or not displayed on the image display. * When the second lottery result is determined during the notification game, when the pressing order is displayed on the image display, and when the operation according to the pressing order is not performed, the basic operation of the point 4 is followed.

<< Point 8 >>
(8-1) The first lottery result is a lottery result in which the number of payouts differs depending on the pressing order.
(8-2) When the first lottery result is determined during the inside of the bonus, the reels are controlled to stop so that the payout number becomes the same regardless of the pushing order.
(8-3) When the first lottery result is determined during the notification game and during the inside of the bonus, a specific display mode controlled by the main control means (for example, “= 1”) ) Is displayed, and also displayed on the image display in a display mode in which the pressing order can be specified.
(8-4) A case where the first lottery result is determined during the notification game and during the non-bonus period, and a case where the first lottery result is determined during the notification game and during the bonus period. Thus, the same specific display mode (e.g., "= 1") is displayed on a specific display, but the push order display in a different mode can be displayed on the image display (e.g., 1. 2.3, in the latter, → (arrow symbol)).
In the latter case, if the operation according to the pressing order is not performed, the basic operation of the point 4 is performed.
(8-5) In the case of (8-3), if an effect to win a bonus in the previous game is displayed, the display is deleted.
(8-6) During the notification game and inside the bonus, information about the AT (eg, the number of additional games) cannot be displayed.
If the addition has been confirmed but the added amount has not been notified, the notification is postponed until after the inside of the bonus has been escaped (during the bonus game, after the bonus ends).

<< Point 9 >>
(9-1) A first lottery result in which the degree of advantage changes according to the pressing order (example: a pushing order replay in which the first stop maintains a high RT at the left) and a second lottery result in which the degree of advantage does not change according to the pressing order ( Example: Special replay).
(9-2) When the second lottery result is determined, a game in which a specific symbol combination is notified of the pressing order in which the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed (for example, when the addition of the AT is determined (executed) or in the specialization zone) Is determined (if it is determined to shift to), and a game in which a specific symbol combination does not notify the pressing order that can be stopped and displayed.
(9-3) When notifying the pressing order in which a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed, the specific display controlled by the main control unit does not notify the pressing order and the image controlled by the sub control unit. The display informs the pressing order.
(9-4) When the second lottery result is determined, and a notification of a pressing order in which a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed (hereinafter, “7 reverse notification”) is performed, a specific symbol combination (eg, 7 replays) is prepared. Even if it is not (even if there is a mistake in pushing), information on the AT (eg, the number of additional games) may be displayed at the end of the game.
(9-5) When the second lottery result is determined and the reverse push 7 notification is not performed, even if a specific symbol combination (eg, 777 replays) is prepared, information on the AT at the end of the game (eg, an additional game) Number) is not displayed.
(9-6) When the first lottery result is determined, the reverse push 7 notification is not displayed. However, when the third lottery result (normal replay without the pressing order) is determined, the reverse push 7 notification is not issued. Can be displayed.
(9-7) Even when the operation according to the reverse push 7 notification is not performed (when the reverse push is not performed, the first stop does not stop the 7), the reverse push 7 notification can be maintained. .

<< Point 10 >>
(10-1) A first lottery result in which the degree of advantage changes according to the pressing order (eg, a pressing order replay in which the first stop maintains a high RT on the left) and a second lottery result in which the degree of advantage does not change according to the pressing order ( Example: Special replay).
(10-2) In the second lottery result, the probability of winning in the second RT (high RT that is likely to be staying during the notification game) is higher than in the first RT.
(10-3) When the second lottery result is determined, a game for notifying the pressing order in which a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed (for example, when the addition of the AT is determined (performed), or in the specialization zone) Is determined (if it is determined to shift to), and a game in which a specific symbol combination does not notify the pressing order that can be stopped and displayed.
(10-4) When the second lottery result is determined after the notification game ends and before the second RT falls to the first RT, a specific symbol combination cannot be stopped and displayed in a pressing order. Notify.
After the end of the notification game and before the fall from the second RT to the first RT, it is determined that the AT lottery will not be performed (10-5). In the case of (10-4), the specific symbol combination ( For example, even if 777 replays) are completed, information regarding the AT (eg, the number of additional games) is not displayed at the end of the game.
(10-6) When the first lottery result is determined, the same effect as in the case of (10-4) is not displayed, but when the third lottery result (normal replay without pressing order) is determined. , An effect similar to the case of (10-4) can be displayed.

<< Point 11 >>
(11-1) The correct pressing order of the pressing order small combination (or replay) is six choices, and the image display notifies the image display of the operating sequence from the first stop to the third stop at the time of the notification game.
(11-2) The pressing order of the correct order of the pressing order replay (or small role) is three choices, but the operation order from the first stop to the third stop is notified to the image display at the time of the notification game.
(11-3) In the case of (11-1) and the case of (11-2), the display mode when notifying the operation order on the image display device is the same (the color and shape, etc., make it possible to fulfill the role. Not announce).
In the case of (11-2), as the case where the operation according to the pressing order is not performed, since there are two choices of the correct answer for the three choices and the incorrect answer for the remaining pushing order or the incorrect answer for the three choices, each is a different effect. Operation.

(Third embodiment)
The effect execution mode applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is not limited to the above-described configuration. Therefore, a configuration of a spinning-type gaming machine having a configuration related to an effect execution mode different from the configuration described above will be described in detail below as a third embodiment.

  First, FIG. 104 is a list of symbol combinations according to the third embodiment. In the figure, only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail. First, “re-game 06” corresponding to No. 68 in FIG. 104 is a symbol combination that can be shifted (promoted) to RT1, and when the RT state is “RT0” or “RT4”, “re-game 06” When the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the process moves (promotes) to "RT1". The “re-game 07” corresponding to the 69th is a symbol combination that can shift to “RT4”, and when the RT state is “RT1”, the symbol combination that becomes “re-game 07” is stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to “RT4”.

  Next, FIG. 105 is a list of condition apparatuses in the third embodiment. In the figure, the condition device number is referred to as a winning number, and hereinafter, the condition device number may be referred to as a winning number. In the third embodiment, the replaying game is replaying-A to replaying-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), replaying-E1 to E3 (winning numbers 28 to 30), and replaying-F1 to F3 (winning). Nos. 31 to 33) are provided, and the replaying game to be stopped and displayed can be different depending on the stop order and the stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Here, in the third embodiment, as shown in the item of “condition device” which is the rightmost column, according to the stop order and the stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. A plurality of condition devices are configured to be stopped and displayed, and among the plurality of condition devices, condition devices having the same winning number are put together, and “condition device (name)” in the third column from the right is collected. ”. Specifically, for example, in the “re-game-A” which is the condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, the “re-game” is performed according to the stop order and the stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. 01, "re-game 02", and "re-game 03". The “condition device (name)” may be simply referred to as a condition device. In addition, a condition device related to re-games such as “re-game 01” may be referred to as a re-game combination, and a condition device in which a game medal is paid out by winning such as “prize 01” may be referred to as a small combination. A condition device that causes BB to start when a stop display such as “one type BB-A” is displayed may be referred to as a BB combination. In addition, when the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB role and the small role are overlapped and won, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the winning small role is stopped. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at positions where they can be displayed, the symbol corresponding to the small role is not stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small symbol is stopped and displayed, while the symbol corresponding to the small symbol is displayed. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol is not stopped and displayed (can not be retracted), the symbol corresponding to the small combination is not stopped and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is displayed. Is configured to stop display. Specifically, for example, in the case of winning the “one type BB-B + winning-C” which is the condition device of the winning number 21, the cherry which is “winning 12” or “winning 13” and the “one type BB” -B "can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of the left reel M51 → the middle reel M52 → the right reel M53, (1) the symbol numbers 0 to 4 (FIG. 6) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when the reel stop position is located, the symbol number 4 corresponding to the "winning 12" is stopped at the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52. Regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, "winning 12" is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located at the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "winning 13" is displayed at the upper stage of the left reel M51. No. 6, No. 11, or No. 16 corresponding to the symbol No. 13 stops, and "winning 13" is stopped and displayed irrespective of the stop position of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 in the first stop, "1" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "seed BB-B" stops. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are positioned in the middle of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, "1" is displayed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "seed BB-B" stops, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the third stop at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located below the right reel M53. In this case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to “one type BB-B” stops at the lower stage of the right reel M53, and the BB combination is stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, “1” is displayed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol No. 18 corresponding to "seed BB-B" cannot be stopped, and no condition device is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the “role” item shows what role the “condition device (name)” plays, and “normal replay” corresponding to the winning number 1 is in the order of pressing the stop button. Regardless, this is a condition device related to the replay in which the replaying game in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, and “Reversely pressing white 7 replay” corresponding to the winning number 2 is RT regardless of the pressing order of the stop button. This is a condition device related to the replay in which the replaying game whose state does not shift is stopped and displayed, but is pushed backward (stopping the reels in the order of the right reel M53 → the middle reel M52 → the left reel M51) to the right reel M53. Stop at the operation timing in which the range of symbol numbers 18 to 2 of the reel number 52, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 of the middle reel M52, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 of the left reel M51 are located at the lower part of each reel. Operate buttons And by, the right reel M53, "white Seven" is stopped and displayed in the lower part of the center reel M52 and left reel M51, white Seven has been configured to appear to be aligned in the lower part when viewed from the player. In addition, in the game which was won in the replay game-B and was selected in the AT addition lottery, by performing an effect of instructing the player to aim for "white seven" by pressing in reverse (the details will be described later), the player was elected in the AT addition lottery. It is configured to be able to notify the player to the effect. The “replay in order of seven push blacks” corresponding to the winning number 3 is a condition device related to the replay in which the replay that the RT state does not shift to is stopped and displayed regardless of the push order of the stop button. Stopping the reels in the order of the left reel M51 → the middle reel M52 → the right reel M53), the range of the symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of the symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, and the right reel By operating the stop button at the operation timing in which the range of the symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is located in the lower part of each reel, "black seven" is displayed in the lower part of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. Is stopped and viewed from the player, so that black seven appears to be aligned at the bottom. In addition, in the game that was won in the re-game-C and was selected in the AT-additional lottery, an effect of instructing the player to aim for “Black Seven” by pushing forward (details will be described later) was executed, thereby winning the AT-additional lottery. It is configured to be able to notify the player to the effect.

  "RT maintenance RP1 ** (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 4 indicates whether the first stop reel is any of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (any stop button is operated). If the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the RT state does not shift to "re-game 01" or "re-game 02". Alternatively, when “re-game 03” is stopped and displayed, and the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the RT state shifts from “non-RT”, “RT1” or “RT3” to “RT0”. A possible “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed. “RT maintenance RP * 1 * (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 5 indicates whether the first stop reel is any one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (by operating any stop button). ) Is a condition device in which the replaying game stopped and displayed may be different. If the first stopped reel is the middle reel M52, the "replaying game 03" in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. When the first reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the "re-game 04" in which the RT state can shift from "non-RT", "RT1" or "RT3" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. You. “RT maintenance RP ** 1 (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 6 indicates whether the first stop reel is any one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (by operating any stop button). Is a condition device in which the replaying game stopped and displayed may be different, and when the first stop reel is the right reel M53, the RT state does not shift to “replaying game 01” or “replaying game 03”. Is stopped and the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, and the RT state can shift from “non-RT”, “RT1” or “RT3” to “RT0”. 04 "is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321" corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 and 35 to 40, the winning small role may differ depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected. The condition device is, for example, “left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3”, and in the case of “123”, “left reel M51 → center reel M52 → right reel M53” is pushed. For example, in the case of “winning A-1” (winning number 7), when stopping in the order of “123” = “left → middle → right” (the answer is correct in the pushing order), A symbol combination of "winning 01" in which eleven game medals, which is the number of acquired medals, can be acquired is stopped and displayed. Note that “123” in the “push order bell 123” and the like indicate a push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of cards acquired in the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in the pushing order other than the pushing order in which the maximum number of acquired coins can be acquired, that is, if the answer is not correct in the pushing order, one payout is made. In the AT-related state such as the "AT state", the navigation order of the push order of the replaying game and the bell is displayed (the push order indicating the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), and the "normal game state" is displayed. , Etc., a plurality of gaming states with different profit rates of the player can be created such that the pushing order is not navigated to. Note that the state regarding the AT will be described later.

  In addition, the “common bell” corresponding to the winning number 13 can acquire 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of winning medals even if any of the prize 04 to the prize 07 are stopped. It is a condition device that can be acquired, and may be referred to as a bell regardless of the order of pushing. The “watermelon A” corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (any of the watermelon A and the watermelon B) can be easily aligned in a parallel line. Reference numeral 14 indicates that three watermelons A are arranged in the middle stage of each reel. Further, “watermelon B” corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured such that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) are easily aligned on a diagonal line. For example, the 66th prize in FIG. 16 is such that three watermelons are arranged diagonally downward and to the right like watermelon B in the upper part of the left reel M51, watermelon B in the middle part of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A in the lower part of the right reel M53. The “BB middle weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)” corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device capable of aligning three bells on the active line, and will be described later in detail. This is a condition device in which an AT addition lottery is executed. The “BB middle strong rare small role (V-shaped bell alignment)” corresponding to the winning number 18 is a condition device in which the bell can be stopped and displayed on the upper left reel M51, the middle middle reel M52, and the upper right reel M53. Although details will be described later, this is a condition device in which an AT-additional lottery is executed by winning during BB.

  "RT promotion RP1 ** (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 28 indicates whether the first stop reel is any of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (any stop button is operated). If the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the "re-game 01" in which the RT state does not shift is stopped. When the first stop reel is displayed as the left reel M51, the "re-game 06" in which the RT state can shift from "RT0" or "RT4" to "RT1" is stopped and displayed. The “RT promotion RP * 1 * (3 options)” corresponding to the winning number 29 indicates whether the first stop reel is any of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (by operating any stop button). ), The replaying game stopped and displayed may be different. If the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the RT state does not shift to “replay 01” or When "re-game 02" is stopped and displayed and the first stop reel is the middle reel M52, "re-game 06" in which the RT state can shift from "RT0" or "RT4" to "RT1" is stopped and displayed. Is done. “RT promotion RP ** 1 (3 options)” corresponding to the winning number 30 indicates whether the first stop reel is any one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (by operating any stop button). ), The replaying game stopped and displayed may be different, and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the RT state does not shift to “replaying 01”, When "re-game 02" or "re-game 03" is stopped and displayed, and the first stop reel is the right reel M53, the RT state can shift from "RT0" or "RT4" to "RT1". "Gaming 06" is stopped and displayed.

  The “specialization transition RP1 ** (3 options)” corresponding to the winning number 31 indicates whether the first stop reel is any one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (any stop button must be pressed). The replaying game that is stopped and displayed may be different depending on whether the operation is performed. If the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the RT state does not shift to “replaying 01”. Is stopped and the first stop reel is set to the left reel M51, and the "re-game 07" in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT4" is stopped and displayed. The “specialization transition RP * 1 * (3 options)” corresponding to the winning number 32 indicates whether the first stop reel is any of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (any stop button). ), The replaying game that is stopped and displayed may be different. If the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the RT state does not shift. Or "re-game 02" is stopped and the first stop reel is the middle reel M52, and "re-game 07" in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT4" is stopped and displayed. . The “specialization transition RP ** 1 (3 options)” corresponding to the winning number 33 indicates whether the first stop reel is any of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (any stop button). ), The replaying game stopped and displayed may be different, and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the RT state does not shift. , "Re-game 02" or "re-game 03" is stopped, and when the first stop reel is the right reel M53, the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT4". Appears stopped.

  Next, in the item of "bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 3 are sorted for each winning number. In the third embodiment, a winning number that does not include the bonus (BB combination) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and a winning number (19) that includes one type of BB-A as the winning number that includes the bonus (BB combination). ), The bonus winning information of the winning number (20 to 23) including one kind of BB-B, and the bonus winning information of the winning number (24 to 27) including one kind of BB-C. It is set to 3. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information on which BB has been established and which BB combination has been won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

  Next, in the item of "winning / replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 24 are allocated for each winning number. In the third embodiment, the winning numbers (winning number 0 corresponding to the loss and winning numbers 19, 20, and 24 corresponding to the bonus) that do not include the replaying role and the small role are set to 0 as the winning / replaying winning information. The winning / replay winning information of 1 to 24 is distributed for each condition device with respect to the winning number including the replaying role or small winning combination. By storing the winning / replay winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information relating to which replay winning or small winning combination. The details of the winning / re-game winning information will be described later.

  Next, numerical values from 0 to 13 are assigned to each of the winning numbers in the item of “effect group number”. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. The details of the effect group number will be described later.

  Next, in the item of the payout group number, numerical values from 0 to 17 are sorted for each winning number. The main control board M stores the payout group number, and executes the lottery process related to the AT by using the stored payout group number when performing the lottery related to the AT (for example, the AT lottery, the AT addition lottery). Programs and data capacity required for the execution. Note that the AT lottery and the AT addition lottery are not executed even if the condition device in which the payout group number becomes 0 is won. On the other hand, when the condition device with the payout group number other than 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery can be executed. The details of the payout group number will be described later. In addition, even when the condition device in which the payout group number becomes 0 is won, an AT lottery or an AT addition lottery may be configured to be executed. In such a case, the payout group number may be changed. It is preferable that, when the condition apparatus that becomes 0 wins and the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery is executed, the lottery result is always lost (non-winning).

  Next, FIG. 105 illustrates a lottery in which a winning number (also referred to as a condition device number, also referred to as a winning role) and a bonus (also referred to as a BB role, BB) are determined by the role lottery means. It is a list showing probabilities (also called winning rates). In the drawing, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

  First, the lottery probabilities in “RT0”, “RT1”, “RT2”, “RT3”, “RT4” and “non-RT” when the BB is not operated will be described in detail. In the third embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of the winning combination (especially, the replaying role) can be different depending on the RT state, and the “replaying role” (the sum of all the replaying roles) is configured. (Appearance rate) is higher in the case of “RT1” than in other RT states. "Replay 04" (a so-called fall replay, which is "RT1" and a symbol corresponding to the replay in the situation where no bonus is won), which can be stopped and displayed at the winning numbers 4 to 6 When the combination is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to “RT0”), which is easier to win (appear) at “RT1”, and “RT0”, “RT2”, and “RT3” are more likely than “RT1”. It is difficult to appear, and in "RT4", it is configured not to appear at all. In addition, in “RT0” and “RT2”, “re-game 04” that can be stopped and displayed at the winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but even if “re-game 04” is stop-displayed, the RT state is displayed. Does not migrate. Note that, when “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed in “RT1”, the transition to “RT0”, that is, a fall effect that is an effect of notifying that the RT state has fallen (for example, the effect display device S40) May be configured so as not to execute the fall effect when "Replay 04" is stopped and displayed at "RT2". With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the player has won the BB due to the fact that the re-rendering game 04 has been stopped and the fall effect has not been performed, and the interest of the game has been enhanced. Can be enhanced. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, a sound effect output when the “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed and a re-game combination other than “re-game 04” (for example, “re-game” in which the RT state does not shift). 01 ”) may be configured to be different from the sound effect output when the stop display is performed. With such a configuration, the player recognizes that the“ re-game 04 ”has been stopped and displayed. It can be easily configured. In addition, a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation does not occur (for example, a “normal game state”, which may be referred to as a non-AT game state) and a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation may occur (for example, “ (At-AT state), which may be referred to as an AT gaming state). At this time, when a winning number that may shift (fall) from “RT1” to “RT0” is won, and in a non-AT gaming state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is displayed. The output may not be performed based on the operation of the start lever D50. This makes it possible to shift the RT state without making the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to “RT0” in the non-AT gaming state. On the other hand, during the AT gaming state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall down is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-playing role in which the RT state does not fall down is stopped and displayed). (Notifying the forward navigation). This allows the player to operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified, so that the RT state does not fall. In addition, "Re-Gaming 05" that can be stopped and displayed at the winning number 2 or 3 (re-gaming that can notify that the player has won the AT-additional lottery when stopped and displayed in the AT state) appears in "RT1". It is supposed to. The transition of the state related to the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination serving as the re-game combination will be described later. Further, as described later, in the third embodiment, the push order navigation for notifying the reel stop order that is most advantageous to the player is configured to be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. I have. Note that there is no problem even if the lottery probability is appropriately changed. Further, in the third embodiment, the bonus is configured to be able to overlap with the small role, and the watermelon A (winning-D), the watermelon B (winning-E), the cherry (winning-C), the replay (replay) It overlaps with a part of the play order bell (winning-A1 to A6). Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23, the winning numbers 25 to 27, and the winning numbers 34 to 40 are condition devices in which the bonus and the small role or the replaying role overlap. It should be noted that the “RT0” and the “non-RT” may be configured so that the winning probability of the replaying game or the type of the replaying game to be won may be similar or overlapping. Is set to "non-RT" after executing the RAM clear, and then to "RT0", which is the RT state where the stay ratio is the highest throughout the entire game, by configuring the effect tendencies executed on the sub-control board S side to be similar. Also in the case of transition, the player can easily feel as if he / she is always staying at "RT0", and can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, in the situation of “RT2”, since the BB has been won and the BB has not been activated, the BB role of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (a single role that does not overlap with the small role) In the case of winning the BB role, which may be referred to as a single BB role or a single BB role), the new winning of the BB role becomes invalid, and only the winning of the small role becomes valid. Specifically, for example, when “RT2” is selected and “1 type BB-C” with a winning number 24 is selected in a situation where one type BB-A has been won (carried over), In this case, the type BB-C associated with the winning number 24 becomes invalid. That is, the situation is the same as the case where the "losing" of the winning number 0 is won. In addition, the state where the carried over type 1 BB-A is elected is continued. Further, in the situation of “RT2”, since the BB has been won and the BB has not been operated, the small role of the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 and the BB role are When the overlapping condition devices are won, the new winning of the BB combination is invalidated, and only the winning of the small combination is valid. Specifically, for example, when “RT2” is selected, and “1 type BB-B + winning C” of the winning number 21 is won in a situation where one type BB-A has been won (carried over). , The type BB-B associated with the winning number 21 becomes invalid, and only the winning prize C becomes valid. That is, the situation is the same as the case where the winning number 14 “winning-C” is won. In addition, the state where the carried over type 1 BB-A is elected is continued. Note that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small combination, and may overlap with a part of the re-game combination. For example, the bonus may be overlapped with a part of the replays having the winning numbers 4 to 6. In this way, by making the bonus overlap with the condition device including the RT transition replay (the replaying player whose RT state can transition), the bonus is also won when the condition device including the RT transition replay is won. There is a possibility that even if the RT shift replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus is not denied, so that the player can be expected. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the control is performed so that the RT state does not shift even if the RT shift replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have transitioned to the RT state (transition to an RT state with a relatively low replay probability) but the replay probability has not become low (frequently won a replay). Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the game, such as the possibility that the bonus has been won.

  “RT3” is an RT state after one type BB-A to one type BB-C is completed. If the AT lottery has not been won, the push order navigation does not occur, so that the replay-D1 to D3 are won and the “replay 04” is stopped and displayed, thereby shifting to “RT0” ( In this example, it is configured to shift to the “low-probability state” after the BB ends in a situation where the AT lottery has not been won). On the other hand, when the player has won the AT lottery, the state relating to the AT after the BB is completed is the AT preparation state 1. In the AT preparation state 1, the push order navigation occurs. State 2 → AT in progress state ”. In "RT3", re-game-E1 to re-game-E3 (winning numbers 28 to 30) and re-game-F1 to re-game-F3 (win numbers 31 to 33) are configured not to win. On the other hand, when the symbol combination corresponding to “re-game 04” included in re-game-D1 to re-game-D3 (winning numbers 4 to 6) is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to “RT0” (AT preparation state 2). I do.

  Further, “RT4” is a symbol combination corresponding to “re-game 07” included in re-game-F1 to re-game-F3 (winning numbers 31 to 33) when in the specialized precursor state (RT1) described later. Is an RT state to which the display shifts by being stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the player has won the re-game-F1 to the re-game-F3 while in the specialization precursor state (RT1) and stopped and displayed the symbol combination corresponding to "re-game 07" in accordance with the push order navigation, The state shifts to the additional specialization state (RT4). Also, when the player is not in the specialization precursor state (RT1), in other words, when the player does not have the right to shift to the additional specialization state (for example, during the AT state), the player does not follow the push order navigation, and When the symbol combination corresponding to "game 07" is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to the specialization state (RT4) after falling. In "RT4", re-game-E1 to re-game-E3 (winning numbers 28 to 30) are configured to be won. For this reason, the symbol corresponding to the “re-game 06” included in the re-game-E1 to the re-game-E3 (winning numbers 31 to 33) regardless of whether the state is the special state of addition or the special state after falling. When the combination is stopped and displayed, the process returns to RT1.

  Next, the lottery probability in “one type BB-A, B, C” during the BB operation will be described in detail. In the third embodiment, during the BB operation, the winning number 13 “common bell”, the winning number 17 “BB middle weak rare small part (oblique bell aligned)”, and the winning number 18 “BB middle strong rare small” Role (V-shaped bell aligned) "is configured so as to be able to win. During the operation of the winning BB in the" AT state "," BB middle weak rare small role (oblique bell aligned) ”Or“ BB middle strong rare small role (V-shaped bell aligned) ”, an AT-added lottery is executed (details will be described later).

  The lower part of FIG. 105 illustrates the small combination appearance rate when the set value is 1, and the appearance rate of the common bell (winning number 13) is uniform regardless of the RT state. However, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (six levels in this example). Specifically, the setting number in setting 1 is 3204, the setting number in setting 2 is 3404, the setting number in setting 3 is 3604, the setting number in setting 4 is 3904, the setting number in setting 5 is 4204, and the setting number in setting 6 is Is 4504, and the appearance rate increases as the set value increases. With such a configuration, for example, when the player proceeds with the game while measuring the number of appearances of the common bell (the number of wins), the player frequently wins the common bell, thereby providing a game machine that is playing. The game can be advanced while expecting that the set value is a relatively high set value. Also, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the payout rate. The appearance rate of the common bell is configured to be different depending on the set value. However, depending on the winning of the common bell, AT lottery, AT addition lottery, and high-probability state transition lottery described later are not executed. It is configured not to affect the transition lottery of the state related to (also referred to as the lottery regarding the AT).

  Next, with reference to a block diagram of FIG. 106, an electrical schematic configuration of a spinning-type gaming machine P according to the third embodiment will be described. First, the spinning-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment includes a sub-controlling board S, a door board D, a spinning board K, a power supply board E, and a relay board IN centering on a main control board M for controlling the progress of a game. , A setting key switch M20, a setting / reset button M30, etc., are connected so as to exchange data. It should be noted that the solid line in the figure shows the movement related to data exchange, and the broken line in the figure shows the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this. For example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN or the door board D without passing through the main control board.

  A main control board (may be referred to as a main control means, a main board, a main control means, a main board, and a main game section) M is a board that controls the progress of the entire game performed by the spinning-type gaming machine P. The main control board M has a main control chip C mounted thereon. The main control chip C has a CPU C100, a built-in ROM C110, a built-in RAMC 120, etc., connected to each other via a bus so that data can be exchanged therebetween. Then, the main control board M receives a signal indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub control board S, the door board D, the spinning board, and the like. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or a control signal) toward K or the like. For example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information) is directed toward the sub-control board S. ), The sub-control board S can execute the push order navigation on the effect display device S40.

  Also, the sub-control board (also referred to as a sub-control unit, a sub-board, a sub-control unit, a sub-board, and a sub-game unit) S is provided with the sub-control chip SC similarly to the main control board M described above. The sub-control chip SC includes a CPU SC100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is configured so as to be able to exchange data with each other via a bus. The sub-control board S is connected with various LED lamps S10, speakers S20, effect display devices S40, a turning backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, and the like. Here, the spine backlight S30 is a light provided inside each of the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates a symbol drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes the control commands received from the main control board M, and outputs various drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, the speakers S20, the effect display device S40, the turning backlight S30, etc. Has been directed.

  On the door substrate D, the above-described input receiving sensor D10s, first input sensor D20s, second input sensor D30s, stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and start for starting rotation of the reel M50. A lever D50, a payout button D60 for paying out stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals and ending the game, and various display panels D70 for displaying the state of the game (not shown). The number-of-inserted indicator D210, the operation status indicator D180, the special game status indicator D250, the number-of-payout indicator (push-order indicator) D270 are display devices such as a credit number indicator D200, an advantageous zone indicator YH, and the like. , A door switch D80 for opening / closing judgment of a front door, cancellation of an error, and execution of a change of a set value. Game medals is determined to be incompatible (or other foreign) blocker D100 like to reimburse the outlet D240 and is connected after. The door board D is connected to the main control board M so that data can be exchanged. Therefore, when the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the settlement button D60, and the like provided on the front door DU are operated, a signal relating to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, a signal indicating that the insertion reception sensor D10s has detected the passing of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

  In addition, a rotating drum motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a rotating drum sensor K20 for detecting the rotation position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the rotating drum substrate K. The rotating body substrate K can stop the reel M50 at the determined stop position by driving the rotating body motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 by the rotating body sensor K20. I have. Further, in the spinning machine of the third embodiment, a so-called stepping motor (stepping motor) is used as the spinning motor K10. The step motor is set to 480 steps as the number of steps for the reel M50 to make one rotation. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, 20) of symbols are set on each reel (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) with a substantially uniform size. Is set to 24 steps (= 480/20). It should be noted that there is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel are changed.

  The medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on a control signal from the main control board M. Perform the operation of issuing. The medal payout device H includes a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s for determining whether or not medals are normally paid out and measuring the number of paid out game medals, and a disk H50. A hopper motor H80 for rotation is connected.

  The power consumed by these various control boards and the boards is supplied from a power board E (a board that controls the presence or absence of power supply by a power switch E10). In FIG. 106, the manner in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is indicated by broken-line arrows. As shown in the drawing, power is directly supplied from the power supply board E to the main control board M and the sub control board S, and various boards (the door board D, the turning body board K, and the relay board IN) are Power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of an AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and the power is converted into a specified DC voltage and then supplied to the control board and the board.

  The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used to execute a setting change device control process (to change a setting), which will be described later, and a setting / reset capable of changing a set value or canceling an error. Button M30 is connected. The main control board M includes a reel control unit that controls the rotation and stop of the reels M50 (the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53), and an "AT-in-state" which is a state related to an AT advantageous to the player. AT lottery means for executing an AT shift lottery for transitioning to "AT", and an AT addition lottery for increasing the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of the AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the "AT state". AT addition lottery means to be executed.

  Next, FIGS. 107 to 131 are flowcharts showing a flow of a general process performed by the main control board M in the third embodiment.

  The flowchart mainly includes processing steps (shown by rectangles), judgments (shown by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (shown by rounded rectangles) indicating start, end, return, and the like. ing. When details are shown in another flowchart among the processing steps, those that refer to the other flowchart are shown as subroutines (shown by rectangles in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, in the development stage of the gaming machine, a gaming machine with a different specification is also developed at the same time, but in this example, a sub-routine executed by the gaming machine with a different specification is included in the processing on the main side. The configuration is such that a subroutine that is not normally used is not left, and a process related to an unused subroutine that is not normally performed is prevented from being executed due to noise or fraud.

  First, FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing executed for the first time by CPU C100 of main control board M after turning on the spinning-type gaming machine P (or at the time of system reset or user reset). . First, in step 1000, after turning on the spinning-type gaming machine P, in step 1002, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is not started but started. Only the type of interrupt is set, and in the subsequent processing, when a timer interrupt is started, a flowchart relating to a timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed). Next, in step 1004, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes setting of serial communication (setting of speed, data length, data transmission method) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPU C100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the top address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPU C100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area, power-off / power-off recovery). To check whether the data stored in the built-in RAM C120 is held correctly) and generates power-off recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPU C100 of the main control board M checks the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

  If Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing completion flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and checksums all RAMs (in step 1006). It is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal with reference to the check result of (2). In the case of Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPU C100 of the main control board M initializes the RAM area in the initialization range determined in step 1018. Next, in step 1022, the CPU C100 of the main control board M returns the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the process at the time of power-off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. If Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes reading of the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPU C100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag, and returns to the power-off processing according to the restored stack pointer.

  If No in step 1016, in step 1024, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-returnable error process described later.

  If No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, displayed on the number-of-payouts display device D270) (for example, in the register area). To set). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-returnable error process described later.

  If No in Step 1014, in Step 1028, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing completed flag in the RAM (turns on in Step 1904) and checksums all RAMs (Step 1904). With reference to the result of the check in 1006), it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines and sets the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding a storage area for storing set values (set value data) in the RAM. For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. The range that is not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to the storage area for storing the set value (set value data). The total number of games in the “advantageous section” and the total number of game sections (the advantageous section + As a result of calculating the number of games, the ratio of staying in the “advantageous section”, the number of games, the normal section + standby section, and the like, are ranges that are not included in the initialization range of the RAM. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate and display the ratio of staying in the “advantageous section” in the game (advantageous section ratio). Further, the processing for calculating the advantageous section ratio is configured to calculate at the timing when the unit game ends. The advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (for example, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at an interval of 5 seconds in the order of “advantageous section ratio → continuous bonus ratio per 6000 games → principal ratio per 6000 games → cumulative continuous bonus ratio → cumulative bonus ratio”. Is displayed. The continuous bonus ratio is the number of payouts in the state where the RB is operating / the total number of payouts, and the bonus ratio is the number of payouts in the state where the RB, CB, or SB is operating. / Total number of payouts ". On the other hand, if No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to be a specific range including a storage area for storing set values (set value data) in the RAM. Set (for example, set in the register area), and then go to step 1034. Next, in Step 1034, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area in the initialization range determined in Step 1030 or Step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process described later.

  Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (the value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area or the like) mounted on the main control board M is not set to the value at which the special game is executed. (In order to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the processing for determining the execution of the special game is executed due to noise or cheating immediately after the start of the processing of the program). Although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured, and a byte storing information about the random number is stored in a byte. It is preferable that only the information related to the random number be stored (other information such as various timer values is not stored) (when operating another data stored in the same one byte, noise may be generated). In order to prevent information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

  Next, FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the setting change device control processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 107, which is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initializes the stack pointer with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPU C100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value (set value data) in the RAM area is within a normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set values (set value data) are managed in 1 to 6, the RAM needs to be initialized, and a process of returning to “1” when the set value becomes “0” is required. Therefore, in the present example, by correcting the normal range of the set value (set value data) from 0 to 5, the correction process of the set value (set value data) after the initialization of the RAM is executed (steps 1106 and Step 1108) can be dispensed with, and the processing time can be reduced and the processing capacity can be reduced. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a set value (set value data) to a predetermined value (for example, 0 = value that is most disadvantageous for the player), and proceeds to step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the number-of-payouts display device D270) that the setting change device is being operated (for example, “88” that turns on all segments). Then, the set value is displayed on the set display LED (not shown) (the display of the set value is a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112 is performed. Move to As described above, the number-of-payouts display device D270 is also used when notifying the pressing order. With such a configuration, for example, when a part of the 7-segment LED has a failure (there is a segment that cannot be turned on), the erroneous information may be reported when the pressing order is reported. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, the number-of-payouts display device D270 lights all the segments “88” during the operation of the setting change device, so that it is possible to confirm whether or not the seven segments are out of order, and to inform the player of the failure. Profit can be prevented. Further, as a configuration related to the display of the set value, a storage of a set value display RAM for storing data obtained by adding 1 to a set value (set value data) in a storage area for storing the set value (set value data). It may be configured to have an area and display the set value with reference to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1110, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the mode is shifted to the setting change mode to the sub-control board S is executed.

  Next, in step 1112, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from off to on. If Yes in step 1112, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (set value data) in step 1114 (if the set value (set value data) exceeds 5 as a result of the addition, , The set value (set value data) becomes 0), and the process proceeds to step 1116. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1112, the process proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the start lever D50 has been switched from off to on. In the case of No at step 1116, the process moves to step 1112, and the processing of steps 1112 to 1116 is looped. If Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 has been switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process of step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays that the operation of the setting change device has been completed on an error display LED (not shown), and turns off the setting display LED (not shown). Clear the display of the set value (set value data). Next, in step 1122, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the RT state after the next game to “non-RT”. Note that “non-RT” is an RT state to which a transition is made after execution of the RAM clear. In the situation of “non-RT”, the overflow of the pressing order bell is stopped and displayed, so that “RT0” is displayed. The transition is made (the transition of the RT state will be described in detail). Next, in step 1124, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the “low probability state”. Next, in step 1126, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a game section after the next game as a normal section. Next, in step 1128, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH (turns off at the time of power-off and keeps turning off without newly turning on), and the game proceeds in step 1200. Move to control processing. As described above, in the third embodiment, when the setting change device control processing is executed, in other words, when the RAM clear is executed, the RT state is “non-RT” and the state related to the AT is “low probability”. State ", and the game section is set to be a" normal section ".

  Here, the processing of step 1122, step 1124, step 1126, and step 1128 is configured to be executed by the above-described processing of step 1034 in FIG. 107 (processing of initializing the RAM within the determined initialization range). You may. Specifically, as the processing of step 1034, (1) storing “0” (data corresponding to “non-RT”) in an address (storage area) for managing the RT state, and (2) managing the state related to the AT (0) (data corresponding to the "low probability state") is stored in the address (storage area) to be played, and (3) "0" (data corresponding to the "normal section") is stored in the address (storage area) for managing the game section. ) And (4) storing "0" (data corresponding to turning off the advantageous section display YH) in the address for managing the lighting and extinguishing of the advantageous section display YH. You may. Note that the address (storage area) for managing the RT state can be either an initialization range (predetermined range) when Yes is determined in step 1028 or an initialization range (specific range) when No is determined in step 1028. May be included, or may not be included in the initialization range (predetermined range) when Yes is determined in step 1028, but may be included in the initialization range (specific range) when No is determined in step 1028. May be included. Further, the configuration may be such that the RAM initialization process in step 1034 is performed in the process after step 1118. Specifically, if the determination in step 1028 is Yes, the process in steps 1102 to 1118 is performed. After the execution, the RAM is initialized to a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing the set value (set value data). If No in step 1028, the set value (set value data) is stored. The RAM is initialized for the area, and then the processing of steps 1102 to 1118 is performed, and then the RAM is initialized for a predetermined range excluding the storage area storing the set value (set value data). It may be configured as follows.

  Next, FIG. 109 is a flowchart of the non-recoverable error processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 107 (and called in another flowchart). First, in step 1302, the CPU C100 of the main control board M prohibits an interrupt (hereinafter, a flowchart related to a timer interrupt process described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (0 to 6, in this example, display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, the display output to various LEDs and the drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not output to each output port has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (when executing this processing, some error has occurred), and Are repeated, and the reset signal is input as the power supply voltage decreases, and the process ends. (That is, since it enters an infinite loop, no operation for prompting return is accepted.) If the determination in step 1310 is No, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processing in steps 1306 to 1310 is a processing for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information on the error, the game progress at the time of occurrence of the error, and the like are displayed on the hall computer side). It is possible to output to.)

  Next, FIG. 110 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 108. First, in step 1202, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initializes the stack pointer with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area necessary for the game (for example, the maximum number of bets, the activated pay lines, etc.). It should be noted that the step 1203 is to clear the data used in the previous game (for example, the condition device number (winning number), the effect group number, and the instruction information) (data of “0” for clearing the RAM address). Data) in the RAM. The condition device number, the effect group number, the instruction information, etc. may not be cleared, and the number selected when the next game is executed may be overwritten. Next, in step 1204, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an RT state (for example, “RT0” or the like) in the game. Note that the RT state in the first game after the setting change (after the RAM is cleared) is “non-RT”. Next, in step 1205, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) relating to the RT state set in step 1204. Note that the process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. In step 1704, a command relating to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set. When transmitting the RT state to the sub side, it is not necessary to transmit the RT state to the sub side at all times, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a state related to the AT in the game (for example, “AT state”). Note that the state relating to the AT in the first game after the setting change (after clearing the RAM) is the “low probability state”. Next, in step 1207, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command relating to the state related to the AT set in step 1206 (command to the sub control board S side). Further, the process of setting the state relating to the AT may be executed in each step described above. Also, when transmitting the state relating to the AT to the sub-control board S side, it is not necessary to always transmit the state relating to the AT, and the state relating to the AT is transmitted to the sub-control board S side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. May be. Next, in step 1208, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, “advantageous section” or the like) in the game. The game section in the first game after the setting change (after the RAM is cleared) is a “normal section”. Next, in step 1208-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) relating to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, a sub-tank (not shown) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H is provided, and a determination is made based on conduction / non-conduction of current by a plurality of full detection sensors provided in the sub-tank (via medals). If the current is conducted, it is determined that the current is full.) In the case of Yes in step 1209, the process moves to step 1218.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). ). Next, in step 1212, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal full error using a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been released (for example, whether or not the current by the sub-tank is non-conductive and the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). I do. If Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and proceeds to step 1216. Control is passed to 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214, the process moves to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPU C100 of the main control board M permits acceptance of medal insertion (in the next game of the replaying game, the insertion operation is automatically performed), and the next processing (step 1220) Processing). Here, in step 1218, an ON process of the blocker D100 (a process of forming a medal channel) is performed. Specifically, when the replaying game is established in the previous game, the ON processing of the blocker D100 is performed on condition that the current number of stored credits is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Execute. In other words, if the current stored number (credit) is the predetermined value, the ON processing of the blocker D100 is not executed. On the other hand, when the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the ON process of the blocker D100 is uniformly executed. With such a configuration, even if the re-gaming combination is established, the game medal can be inserted if the stored number (credit) has not reached the predetermined value, such as "RT1". When staying in an RT state (for example, “RT1”) where the probability of winning a replaying game is higher than the RT state, or a replaying game that looks hard to understand is a replaying game (a replay that looks like a small role: Even when the bell-bell-bell or the symbol combination where the cherry stops on the left reel on the invalid line is stopped, the player can play the game with a good rhythm (without feeling uncomfortable).

  Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 108. First, in step 1220, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether a game medal has not been bet and no credit exists. In the case of Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPU C100 of the main control board M satisfies the setting display condition (for example, the condition is satisfied when all of the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are turned on). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the setting display LED (not shown, but may be the payout number display device D270, the credit number display device D200, or the insertion number display light D210). The value (set value data) is displayed (shift to the setting confirmation mode), and the process shifts to step 1221 on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. Processing for transmitting a command to start the setting change mode to the sub-control board S when the transition condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, and setting change mode when the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied. Is executed to transmit a command indicating that the process is terminated. In the case of No in Step 1220 or Step 1221, in Step 1224, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes management related to insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPU C100 of the main control board M checks the number of acceptable game medals. Next, in step 1226, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in the third embodiment, the insertion of medals). Is detected, and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been received). If Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D20s). When the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. ). If Yes in step 1230, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines in step 1231 that the insertion of one normal game medal has been received. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the credit is the upper limit number (50 in this example) and the bet number is the maximum number (3 in this example). Is determined, and if the determination is Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be turned off (a state in which the medal flow path is not formed). Note that if No in Step 1230, the process of Step 1230 is repeated, and if No in Step 1226 or 1227, the process shifts to Step 1232.

  Next, in step 1232, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the settlement button D60 has been operated. If Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of credits or a betting game medal. If Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven), and The payout of one medal is executed. Next, in step 1236, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in the third embodiment, in order to detect payout of medals). When the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal is performed). In the case of Yes at step 1236, the process moves to step 1247. Although not explicitly shown in the flowchart, if the previous game was a replay, only the remaining number of credits is settled.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1234). . Specifically, it is determined whether or not the medal has not been paid out for a predetermined period of time even though the hopper drive signal is transmitted to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1241, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to on) in step 1242. Next, in step 1244, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been released (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). If Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), It moves to 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245, the process moves to step 1244.

  Next, in step 1247, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal for which the payout operation has been performed has been completed. If Yes in step 1247, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag in step 1248, and proceeds to step 1233. If the answer is No in Step 1241 or Step 1247, the process proceeds to Step 1236.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1232 or step 1233, in step 1251, the CPU C100 of the main control board M has the start lever D50 valid (for example, a predetermined number of game medals for starting the game are inserted). It is determined whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. If Yes in step 1251, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines in step 1253 whether the set value (set value data) in the RAM area is within a normal range (0 to 5 in this example). I do. If Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPU C100 of the main control board M proceeds to the next process (the process in step 3600) after performing the process of acquiring random numbers and turning off the blocker D100. On the other hand, if No in Step 1253, in Step 1256, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. If the determination in step 1251 is No, the process moves to step 1220.

  Next, FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the game progress control processing (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 108. First, in step 3600, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an AT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a condition device number management process described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is a state in which an AT-additional lottery is possible. Here, the states related to the ATs in which the AT addition lottery according to the third embodiment can be executed are “AT in progress state”, “additional specialization state”, “specialization precursor state”, and “advantageous BB state”. In the "advantageous BB internal middle game", the AT counter value may be larger than 0, but the AT addition lottery is not executed. This is in order to prevent a situation in which the player does not intentionally arrange the BB symbol combinations in the “advantageous BB inside middle game” to be more advantageous to the player. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute the AT addition lottery in the “advantageous BB inside middle game”, and in such a case, it is possible to win the AT addition lottery in the “advantage BB inside middle game”. Alternatively, it may be configured not to notify immediately, but to notify that an AT addition lottery has been won at the timing when BB has ended thereafter or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games has been added. In the third embodiment, even in the “specialized state after falling”, the “during AT state after falling”, and the “state after bell spill”, it is configured not to execute the AT addition lottery. In the "specialized state after falling", "in AT state after falling" and "state after bell overflow", the subtraction of the AT counter value is not executed, so that the player ignores the pushing order navigation. If a transition is made to the "specialized state after falling", "state during AT after falling", or "state after bell spill", if it is configured to be able to execute an AT-additional lottery, the push order navigation will not be followed. There is a risk that it will be more profitable to follow. Therefore, in the third embodiment, in the “specialized state after falling”, the “state during AT after falling”, and the “state after bell spillover”, it is configured not to execute the AT-added lottery. In the third embodiment, in the “specialized state after falling”, the “during AT state after falling”, and the “state after bell overflow”, the AT counter value is not subtracted. The AT counter value may be decremented every time the game is executed. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the configuration may be such that a lottery can be executed on the AT. In the case of Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an additional game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 3100. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1259, the processing shifts to step 3100. In this additional game execution processing, it is possible to execute a lottery using a different lottery table according to the state related to the AT, but the lottery probability does not differ depending on the set value (using the same lottery table). Executing a lottery) is preferable. Next, in Step 3100, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a freeze lottery execution process described later, and proceeds to Step 1550.

Here, states related to the AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 128).
(1) The “low-probability state” is a state in which the player has not won the AT (has not acquired the right to shift to the “during-AT state”) and has not been won in the bonus combination. Note that the “low-probability state” is a so-called “normal state”, and thus may be referred to as a “normal state”.
(2) "Normal BB inside game" is a state in which the BB role has been won in the "low probability state", the BB role has not won, and the AT lottery has not been won, or In the "falling waiting state", the BB combination has been won, and the BB combination has not won (in the "falling waiting state", no AT lottery is won).
(3) The “normal BB state” means that when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “low probability state” in a situation where the BB combination has been won and the AT lottery has not been won, When the winning combination BB is won in the “falling waiting state” and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “normal BB internal middle game” It is in the state of being executed.
(4) The "high probability state" is a state in which the player has not won the AT lottery (has not obtained the right to shift to the "AT state") and has not won the bonus role. This is a state in which it is easier to win the AT than in the aforementioned “low probability state”.
(5) The “AT-in-progress state” is a state in which an AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted.
(6) The "specialization precursor state" is a state in which the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" in which the number of AT games is relatively more easily added than the "AT in-state" is acquired. .
(7) The “additional specialization state” is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easily added to the “additional state”.
(8) The “advantageous BB internal middle game” means that the player wins the BB role in the “high probability state”, the “AT state”, the “specialization precursor state”, or the “additional specialization state”, and the BB role is No prize has been won.
(9) The “standby BB inside middle game” is a state in which the BB role has been won in the “low probability state”, the AT lottery has been won by the BB role, and the BB role has not won. .
(10) The “advantageous BB state” is a symbol combination that is won as the BB role and corresponds to the BB role in the “high-probability state”, the “at-AT state”, the “specialization precursor state”, or the “additional specialization state”. The state executed when the stop combination is displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “advantageous BB inside game”, or the BB combination is won in the “low probability state”, and , When the BB role has won the AT lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the "standby BB internal middle game" It is a state that is sometimes executed.
(11) The "falling wait state" means that the "AT state" has ended (for example, when the AT counter value becomes 0, or when the counter value for counting the number of games in the advantageous section is the upper limit value (1500 games)) ), The state may shift later, and the RT state is a state in which “RT1” is maintained. When the RT state at the end of the "AT state" is "RT0" (RT having the highest stay ratio), the state may shift to the "low probability state" instead of the "falling wait state". good.

(12) The “AT preparation state 1” is a state in which the condition shifts to a condition that the advantageous BB state has ended, and the RT state is “RT3”. In other words, when BB ends in a situation where the AT lottery has been won, the state shifts to “AT preparation state 1”.
(13) The "AT preparation state 2" is a state in which the condition shifts to the condition that the AT preparation state 1 is completed, and the RT state is "RT0".
(14) The “in-AT state during fall” is a state to which a transition can be made when a stop operation is performed in a different push order (ignored) from the executed push order navigation while in the “in-AT state”. . Specifically, in the “AT state”, one of “re-game-D1” to “re-game-D3” is won, and the stop operation is performed in the push order different from the push order navigation, so that “re-game 04” is performed. Is a gaming state to which the game is shifted by stop display, and the RT state is “RT0” in which the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is relatively lower than “RT1”. If the player wins any of "re-game-E1" to "re-game-E3" while in the "AT state after falling", the push order navigation is executed, and the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation. By stopping and displaying the "re-game 06", it is possible to return to the "AT-in-progress state" again.
(15) The “specialized state after falling” is a state to which a transition can be made when a stop operation is performed in a pressing order different (ignored) from the executed pressing order navigation while in the “AT state”. . Specifically, in the "AT state", one of "re-game-F1" to "re-game-F3" is won, and the stop operation is performed in a push order different from the push order navigation. Is a game state to which the game state shifts by stop display, and the RT state is “RT4”, which has the same probability of winning a replay as “RT1”. In the case of “special state after falling”, if one of “re-game-E1” to “re-game-E3” is won, the push order navigation is executed, and the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation. Then, by stopping and displaying “re-game 06”, it is possible to return to the “at-AT state” again.
(16) The “post-bell overflow state” is the “AT state”, “specialization precursor state” or “additional special state”, “after fall AT state” or “after fall state”. Sometimes, the state can shift to a stop operation performed in a pressing order different (ignored) from the executed pressing order navigation. Specifically, in the “AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization state”, “after fall AT state” or “specialization state after fall”, “winning-A1” to “winning” -A6 ”, and the stop operation is performed in the push order different from the push order navigation, so that one of“ winning 08 ”to“ winning 11 ”is stopped and displayed, and the game state shifts to the RT state. Is "non-RT" which has the same probability of winning a replay as "RT0" and "RT3". If any of the re-game-D1 to the re-game-D3 is won while the state is “after the bell overflow” and “non-RT”, the push order navigation is executed and the push order navigation is performed. Is performed in accordance with, and "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed, thereby shifting to "RT0". In addition, if any of the re-game-E1 to the re-game-E3 is won while the state is “bell overflow state” and “RT0”, the push order navigation is executed, and the push order is performed. By performing a stop operation in accordance with the navigation and stopping and displaying “re-game 06”, it is possible to shift (return) to the “at-AT state”.

  Next, in step 1550, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a reel rotation start preparation process described later. Next, in step 1260, CPUC100 of main control board M starts rotation of all reels. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M requests the pull-in point creation (a request is made to determine the stop positions of the rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53. And the other reels are stopped as required). In the case of Yes in Step 1261-1, in Step 1261-2, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game is not “BB inside game”. Here, the “BB inside middle game” is a general term for “normal BB inside middle game” and “advantageous BB inside middle game”, and is in a state where the BB role is won and BB does not win. . If Yes in step 1261-2, the process moves to step 1262. On the other hand, if No in step 1261-2, in step 1261-3, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device related to the game is the push order bell (winning-A1 to winning-A6). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1261-3, in step 1261-4, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M creates a draw-in point that is the maximum payout number (11 in this example), and proceeds to step 1263. If the result of step 1261-3 is No, the process moves to step 1262. Next, in step 1262, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point, and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1261-1, the processing shifts to step 1263. As described above, in the “BB inside middle game”, the stop button is not stopped in the pushing order of the correct answer to pay out 11 sheets in the game that is won in the pushing order bell (for example, in the case of the winning-A1) In the case where the stop button is not stopped in the order of “left → middle → right” (when the reels are stopped in the order of pushing the wrong answers), the symbol combination that results in the payout of 11 sheets by the reel stop control is not performed. It is configured to win. Next, in step 1263, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptability check. Next, in step 1264, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. If Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). , To step 1266. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the all reel stop check processing. Next, in step 1267, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether all the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) have stopped. If Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPU C100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stoppable position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (if it does not match the winning combination determined by the internal lottery, it is abnormal. Is determined). If Yes in step 1269, the process moves to step 1274. On the other hand, if No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a display determination error display (for example, sets it in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process moves to step 1261.

  Next, in step 1274, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out a game medal. The game medal obtained by the winning exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). In this case, the payout of the game medal is executed. If Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven) and executes payout of one game medal. . Next, in step 1277, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal is performed). In the case of Yes in step 1277, the flow shifts to step 1286.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1276). . In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1281, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the medal empty error display with the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been released (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). If Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), The process proceeds to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process moves to step 1281.

  Next, in step 1286, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal for which the payout operation has been performed has been completed. If Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag, and proceeds to step 1290. If the result of step 1279 or step 1286 is No, the process moves to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the winning (the winning in step 1275) has been completed. In the case of Yes at step 1290, the process moves to step 3400. If the answer is No in Step 1286, the process proceeds to Step 1277. If the answer is No in Step 1275, the process proceeds to Step 3400. If the result is No in Step 1290, the process proceeds to Step 1276.

  Next, in step 3400, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a remaining game number management process described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a later-described RT state transition control process. Next, in step 1750, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an in-AT state start control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a game section shift control process described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing a bet number, shifting a game state, and the like), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1202).

  Next, FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3600 in FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used to execute the internal lottery, in which a winning number, a set number for comparison with an acquired random number, and the like are stored). Then, control goes to a step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires a winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. Note that winning / replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if the bonus and the small role are overlapped and the bonus is won, or if the bonus and the replaying role are overlapped and the winning is performed, both the winning / replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are determined from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. Specific generation processing will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same payout group number and the same number for comparison with the acquired random number, and is stored in the ROM of the main control board M in advance. It is remembered. For example, the payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers of winning numbers 4 to 12, and the number is the same for three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6, which are the re-playing order. Since the numbers are the same for the six consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12, which are the pushing order bell combination, the number of repetitions related to the pushing order replaying game is 3, and the pushing order bell The number of repetitions for the role is 6. In addition, the lottery table used when acquiring the winning numbers 4 to 6 that are the pushing order replaying game and the lottery table used when acquiring the winning numbers 7 to 12 that are the pushing order bell role are a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in Step 3608, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to Step 3610.

  Next, in step 3610, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery has been won (whether or not the obtained random number exists in the currently searched internal lottery table). In the case of Yes at step 3614, it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, so that the subsequent internal lottery table address is not subjected to the determination (lottery), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, if No in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPU C100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions. Next, in step 3618, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the flow shifts to step 3610, and the processing of steps 3610 to 3618 is repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If No in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates the address to the next payout group number), and proceeds to step 3604 to step 3604. Execute the following processing. The specific process of the internal lottery will be described later.

  Next, FIGS. 114 to 117 are flowcharts of AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a state related to an AT that can execute the AT lottery. In the third embodiment, the states relating to the ATs in which the AT lottery can be executed are “low probability state” and “high probability state”. When the BB is won in the "high probability state", the game proceeds to the "advantageous BB inside game", and thereafter, the BB combination wins, thereby shifting to the "advantageous BB state", and the executed BB ends. As a result, the state shifts to the “AT-in-progress state”, and the initial value of the number of AT games, 50, is set in the AT counter. In addition, in 1/5 of the case where the BB is won in the “low probability state”, the game shifts to the “standby BB inside middle game”, and then the BB role is won, thereby shifting to the “advantageous BB state”. When the executed BB ends, the state shifts to the “AT-in-progress state” and the AT counter is set to the initial value of the number of AT games of 50. In addition, in the state where the player wins the BB and the AT lottery in the “normal game state” and the AT lottery is not performed and the BB is not aligned, the game section may be set as the “advantageous section” or the “standby section”. ". If Yes in step 1402, in step 3000, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an AT lottery execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1408. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1402, the process proceeds to step 1408. In the third embodiment, when the state related to the AT is different, the AT winning rate related to the AT lottery (whether it is easy to win the AT lottery or difficult to win) is configured to be different. If they are the same, the AT winning rate related to the AT lottery is the same even if the setting value is different (when the BB is won in the “high probability state”, the AT winning rate is always Winning = After that, the state shifts to the “AT-in-progress state”).

  Next, in step 1408, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the “low probability state”. If Yes in step 1408, in step 1410, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a state promotion combination (a small state that can transition from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state by winning”. In this example, it is determined whether or not it is “Cherry”. In the case of Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPU C100 of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (in the present example, it is 1/2, and if there is no difference depending on the set value, there is no problem in changing). A high-probability state transition lottery. Next, in step 1414, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high probability state transition lottery has been won. If Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1802.

  If No in step 1408, in step 1418, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state related to the AT is the “high probability state”. If Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is in a state falling role (a role that can shift from the “high-probability state” to the “low-probability state by winning”. In this example, it is determined whether or not the game is replay-A). In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPU C100 of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/5, and if there is no difference depending on the set value, there is no problem in changing). A low probability state shift lottery is executed. Next, in step 1424, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed low probability state transition lottery has been won. If Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the low-probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in the third embodiment, when the state relating to the AT is the “high probability state”, the game section is “advantageous section”, and when the game section is “advantageous section”, the push is performed. It is configured such that the forward navigation is executed once or more, or the predetermined number of games (in this example, 1500 games), the “advantage section” does not end unless it is satisfied that the “advantage section” continues. Even if the low-probability state transition lottery is won, the "high-probability state" is not terminated if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push order navigation has not been performed one or more times. Is). When the BB role is won during the “advantageous section” and the BB is executed, the “advantageous section” is set at an arbitrary timing even if the push order navigation is not executed at all in the “advantageous section”. It may be configured to be able to end. If Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1420, step 1424, or step 1426, the processing shifts to step 1802. Note that such a lottery method is merely an example. For example, after shifting to the “high-probability state”, the low-probability state shift lottery is not executed for 10 games (the stay in the “high-probability state” is guaranteed). ), A lottery may be executed to shift from the “high-probability state” to the “low-probability state” with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game after the ten games have elapsed. Note that the AT lottery combination (low certainty AT lottery combination, high certainty AT lottery combination) and the status promotion combination have the same winning probability in all set values.

  Next, in step 1802 shown in FIG. 115, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the advantageous BB state.

  If Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the BB end condition is satisfied in the game. If Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the AT preparation state 1 and ends this subroutine.

  In the case of No in Step 1802 or No in Step 1804, in Step 1808, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is the AT preparation state 1. If Yes in step 1808, in step 1810, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is replay-D1 to D3. If Yes in step 1810, in step 1812, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a selection candidate of a state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device, This subroutine ends.

  The selection candidates for the state relating to the AT after the next game in the processing of step 1812 include the AT preparation state 2. As shown in FIG. 118, when the state regarding the AT of the game is the AT preparation state 1, there are two selection candidates, an AT preparation state 1 and an AT preparation state 2. When "re-game 01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" are stopped and displayed, AT preparation state 1 is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game, and "re-game 04" is stopped. When displayed, AT preparation state 2 is selected as a state relating to the AT after the next game.

  In the case of No in step 1808 or No in step 1810, in step 1814, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state related to the AT is the AT preparation state 2. If Yes in step 1814, in step 1816, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is replay-E1 to E3. If Yes in step 1816, in step 1818, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a candidate for selecting a state relating to the AT after the next game based on the state relating to the current AT and the winning condition device, This subroutine ends.

  The selection candidates for the state relating to the AT after the next game in the processing of step 1818 include the AT-in-progress state. As shown in FIG. 118, when the state related to the AT of the game is the AT preparation state 2, there are two selection candidates, the AT preparation state 2 and the AT in-operation state. When "re-game 01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" are stopped and displayed, the AT preparation state 2 is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game, and "re-game 06" is stopped. When displayed, the state during AT is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game.

  In the case of No in step 1814 or No in step 1816, in step 1820, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state related to the AT is the AT in-progress state. If Yes in step 1820, in step 1822, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is equal to or more than a predetermined value (11 in this example). Here, in the third embodiment, when the state relating to the AT is the “AT state”, when the AT counter value is 11 or more, in other words, when the remaining AT game number is 11 games or more, the watermelon is used. When the player has acquired the right to shift to the “additional specialization state” with half the probability of winning B, and can shift to the “specialization precursor state”, while the state related to the AT is “the AT state” In the case where the AT counter value is 10 or less, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 10 or less, even if the watermelon B is won, the lottery (special (Which may also be referred to as a specialization state transition lottery), and does not transition to the “specialization precursor state” and the “additional specialization state”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the AT counter value is 10 or less, a lottery that wins the watermelon B and obtains the right to shift to the “additional specialization state” (both specialization state shift lottery). May be executed, and may be configured as such, and in a situation where the AT counter value is 10 or less, the watermelon B is elected and the right to shift to the “additional specialization state” is granted. When the lottery to be won is won, the next game that has won the lottery may be configured to be able to (become to) the “specialization precursor state” or the “additional specialization state”, or the AT counter value May become (specify special sign state) or (additional special state) when () becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), or a game won in the lottery After the execution of a predetermined number of games, "Plus specialized state" and can become (may transition to) as may be configured. In addition, when transitioning to the “additional specialization state”, it is not always necessary to go through the “specialization precursor state”. For example, a configuration is possible in which the “additional specialization state” can be directly transitioned from the “AT in progress state” to the “additional specialization state”. May be. If Yes in step 1822, in step 1824, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a lottery to acquire the right to shift to the specialty transfer role (“additional specialization state”) for the condition device related to the game. In this example, it is determined whether or not it is a watermelon B). In the case of Yes in step 1824, in step 1826, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a specialization state transition lottery in which the winning is performed with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Next, in step 1828, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialization state transition lottery has been won. If Yes in step 1828, in step 1830, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the “specialized precursor state”.

  After the processing of step 1830, if step 1820, step 1822, step 1824 or step 1828 is No, the process moves to step 1832. In step 1832, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is the special indication state. If Yes in step 1832, in step 1834, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is replay-F1 to F3. In the case of Yes in step 1834, in step 1836, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a selection candidate of the state relating to the AT after the next game based on the state relating to the current AT and the winning condition device, This subroutine ends.

  The selection candidates for the state relating to the AT after the next game in the processing of step 1836 include an additional specialization state. As shown in FIG. 118, when the state related to the AT of the game is the specialization omen state, there are two selection candidates, a specialization omen state and an additional specialization state. When "re-game 01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" are stopped and displayed, the special precursor state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game, and "re-game 07" is stopped. When displayed, an additional specialization state is selected as a state relating to the AT after the next game.

  In the case of No in step 1832 or No in step 1834, in step 1840, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state related to the AT is the AT in-progress state. If Yes in step 1840, in step 1842, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device related to the game is “re-game-F1” to “re-game-F3”. If Yes in step 1842, in step 1844, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a candidate for selecting a state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device, This subroutine ends.

  The selection candidates for the state related to the AT after the next game in the processing of step 1844 include the post-fall specialization state. As shown in FIG. 118, when the state related to the AT of the game is the AT state, there are two selection candidates, the AT state and the post-fall special state. When "re-game 01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" are stopped and displayed, the AT-in-progress state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game, and "re-game 07" is stopped and displayed. In this case, the post-fall specialization state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game.

  If No in step 1842 described above, in step 1846, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device related to the game is “re-game-D1” to “re-game-D3”. I do. If Yes in step 1846, in step 1848, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device, This subroutine ends.

  The selection candidates for the state relating to the AT after the next game in the processing of step 1848 include the post-fall AT state. As shown in FIG. 118, when the state related to the AT of the game is the AT state, there are two selection candidates, the AT state and the fall AT state. When the “re-game 01”, “re-game 02”, and “re-game 03” are stopped and displayed, the AT-in-progress state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game, and “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed. In this case, the fall-in-AT state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game.

  If No in step 1840 described above, in step 1850, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state related to the AT is an additional specialization state or a specialization precursor state. In the case of Yes in step 1850, or in the case of No in step 1846, in step 1852, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is “winning-A1” to “winning-A6” Is determined. If Yes in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device, This subroutine ends.

  Selection candidates for the state relating to the AT after the next game in the processing of step 1854 include the state after the bell overflows. As shown in FIG. 118, when the state related to the AT of the game is the AT state, there are two selection candidates, an AT state and a bell overflow state. When "winning 01" to "winning 03" are stopped and displayed, the state during AT is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game, and when "winning 08" to "winning 11" is stopped and displayed. Is selected as the state regarding the AT after the next game, the state after the bell overflows. In addition, when the state related to the AT of the game is an additional specialization state, there are two additional candidates, an additional specialization state and a bell overflow state. When "winning 01" to "winning 03" are stopped and displayed, the additional specialization state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game, and "winning 08" to "winning 11" is stopped and displayed. In this case, the state after the bell overflows is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game. Further, when the state related to the AT of the game is a specialization precursor state, there are two selection candidates, a specialization precursor state and a bell overflow state. When the "winning 01" to "winning 03" are stopped and displayed, the specialization precursor state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game, and the "winning 08" to "winning 11" are stopped and displayed. In this case, the state after the bell overflows is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game.

  In the case of No in Step 1850 and in the case of No in Step 1852, in Step 1856, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT-related state is the post-fall special state or the post-fall AT in-state. Is determined. If No in step 1856, in step 1862, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state related to the AT is the state after the bell overflows. If Yes in step 1862, in step 1864, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current RT state is RT0.

  In the case of Yes in step 1856 and in the case of Yes in step 1864, in step 1858, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is replay-E1 to E3. If Yes in step 1858, in step 1860, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a selection candidate of a state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device, This subroutine ends.

  The selection candidates for the state relating to the AT after the next game in the processing of step 1860 include the AT in-state. As shown in FIG. 118, when the state related to the AT of the game is the special state after falling, there are two selection candidates, a special state after falling and a state during AT. When "re-game 01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" are stopped and displayed, a special state after falling is selected as a state relating to the AT after the next game, and "re-game 06" is displayed. When the stop display is performed, the AT-in-progress state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game.

If the state of the game regarding the AT is a fall-in-AT state, there are two selection candidates, a fall-in-AT state and an AT-in state. When “re-game 01”, “re-game 02”, and “re-game 03” are stopped and displayed, the state after the fall is selected as the AT-related state after the next game, and “re-game 06” is displayed. When the stop display is performed, the AT-in-progress state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game.

  Further, if the state of the game regarding the AT is the state after the bell overflow and the RT state is RT0 (hereinafter referred to as the state after the bell overflow (RT0)), the state after the bell overflow (RT0) is selected as a selection candidate. RT0) and AT in progress. When "re-game 01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03" are stopped and displayed, the state after the bell overflow (RT0) is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game, and the "re-game" When "06" is stopped and displayed, the AT-in-progress state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game.

  In the case of No in step 1858, in the case of No in step 1862, or in the case of No in step 1864, in step 1870, the CPU C100 of the main control board M satisfies the condition for shifting to the fall waiting state in the game. It is determined whether or not it has been performed. Here, when the current state related to the AT is the AT in-operation state and the AT counter value is newly set to 0 in the game (the number of remaining AT games is exhausted), the condition for shifting to the fall waiting state is set. Be satisfied. If Yes in step 1870, in step 1872, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the fall waiting state.

  After Step 1872 or in the case of No in Step 1870, in Step 1440, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state regarding the AT after the next game has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1440, in step 1442, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition for transition to the state relating to the AT is satisfied (for example, the number of predictive games in the “specialized predictive state”). Satisfaction when 10 games are completed). In the case of Yes in step 1442, in step 1444, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines a state relating to the AT after the next game, and ends this subroutine. Also, in the case of No in step 1440 and in the case of No in step 1442, this subroutine is immediately terminated.

  In the third embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to be different depending on the lottery state. If the BB role is won in the “low probability state”, the AT lottery is won by 1/5 (winning) If it does, then it transitions to the "AT state"), while if it wins the BB role in the "high probability state", it always wins the AT transition lottery (then it transitions to the "AT state"). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as an AT lottery combination. In the case where the condition device A is won in the “high probability state A”, the player wins the AT transfer lottery in 1/10 and wins the condition device A in the “high probability state B”. In such a case, it is possible to win the AT transfer lottery in 1/2. It may be. When the AT transfer lottery is won, the state shifts to the “AT preparation state”, which is the preparation state before the transition to the “AT-in-progress state”, as the state relating to the AT, and then a predetermined end condition (for example, “AT preparation state”). The state may be changed to the “AT state” when 10 games have passed since the transition to the “state”.

  Next, FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the AT lottery execution processing according to the subroutine of step 3000 of FIG. 114 in the third embodiment. First, in step 3002, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery combination (in this example, a BB combination). Note that a condition device in which the small role and the BB role overlap each other is also included. If Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 3004, in step 3006, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the inside BB advantageous game, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1408). Here, when the BB which has caused the transition is completed, the initial value (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter, and the state shifts to the AT in-state. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3004, in step 3008, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an AT lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/5 in this example). Next, in step 3010, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the inside game in the standby BB, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1408). Here, when the BB which has caused the transition is completed, the initial value (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter, and the state shifts to the AT in-state. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3010, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the normal BB inside game, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1408). Note that also in the case of No in step 3002, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1408).

  Note that the AT-in-progress state is started after the AT preparation state 2 is completed and the initial value (50) is set in the AT counter. In addition, AT preparation state 1, AT preparation state 2, additional specialization state, specialization precursor state, advantageous BB inside middle game, favorable BB state, AT after fall state, special state after fall, and bell overflow state. Then, the AT counter value is not decremented (see FIG. 124).

  Next, FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a command related to winning / re-game winning information (a command on the sub-control board S side, for example, a winning / re-game winning related to the game). Information related command) is set. Next, in step 1454, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game has a role in the pressing order (a condition device having a different winning combination depending on the pressing order, for example, “winning-A1”). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a pressing order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and issues the instruction. The number is stored in a RAM address for storing the number (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). Note that the instruction number is information related to the pressing order, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). In addition, the sub control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. Note that, even when the push order navigation is not performed, the instruction number is determined (although not shown, the instruction number becomes an initial value based on clearing the instruction number). When the pressing order game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the pressing order game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game. Next, in step 1466, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (eg, sets in the register area) the command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458, and proceeds to step 1472. . In this example, displaying the stop order of the reels with the highest profit for the player on the pressing order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as displaying the pressing order navigation, displaying the pressing order navigation display, and the like. ing. In the third embodiment, the pressing order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the pressing order of “left → middle → right” is displayed as “= 1” on the pressing order display device D270. It is configured to display “= 1” in both the push order bell and the push order replay. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the game related to the push order bell, the case where the push order navigation of “left → middle → right” is displayed on the push order display device D270 and the case where the game related to the push order replay game is “ The display mode may be different from that in the case where the pressing order navigation “left → center → right” is displayed on the pressing order display device D270. That is, the number of types of display modes of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of the winning / replay winning information.

  If No in step 1451, in other words, if the game section is a “normal section” or “standby section”, or if No in step 1454, in step 1468, the CPU C100 of the main control board M Is performed on the winning / replay winning information, and the masked information is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM. Here, when the winning / re-game winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / re-game winning information is recognized due to an improper act, the high profit related to the game is increased. The pressing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S , So that a high profit push order cannot be recognized. In the third embodiment, as a mask processing method, a plurality of winning / replay winning information (prize / replay winning information having a similar role is preferable, and for example, the RT state shifts according to the pressing order). A plurality of winning / re-game winning information that can be stopped and displayed as a symbol combination serving as a re-playing combination to be performed is defined as one effect group number (for example, the winning / re-game winning information 4 to 6 is set as the effect group 4). The effect group number is transmitted to the sub control board S side. The mask processing method is not limited to this. For example, after the provided prize / replay winning information (0 to 18 in this example), a new prize / replay after mask processing is performed. You may comprise so that winning information may be provided. Also in such a case, a plurality of winning / replay winning information out of the existing winning / replay winning information, such as the effect group number, is converted into one winning / replay winning information as the winning / replay after mask processing. It is desirable to provide the game winning information (for example, the winning / re-game winning information 4 to 6 is replaced with the winning / re-game winning information 19 which is the winning / re-game winning information after mask processing (the newly provided winning-information).・ Replay winning information). If it is determined that the game is to notify operation information (push order navigation) on the basis of the state of the AT on the main control board M, etc., winning / re-game winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In a game in which the operation information is not notified, the effect group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In such a configuration, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S, or may not be transmitted.

  Next, in step 1470, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub control board S side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing (for example, set in the register area). Then, the flow shifts to step 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub control board S side) related to the bonus winning information (the sub side can recognize whether or not the bonus has been won). (For example, set in the register area), and the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1259). In the third embodiment, the winning / replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number, but the deriving method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, as an example of the display of the push order navigation, in the case of “in the AT state”, (1) a case where a fall replaying game is included → a push that the fall replaying game is not stopped is displayed. The order is navigation, (2) In the case of a bell (single-course / 11-course) → Navigation, etc., in the pushing order in which the number of payouts is the largest. As described above, in the third embodiment, when the game section is the “advantageous section”, the prize / re-game winning information (the type of the winning combination and the most advantageous pushing order for the player) is displayed on the sub control board S side. And a command number (a number that can specify the most advantageous pressing order for the player), while the sub-control board is provided when the game section is a “normal section”. The effect group number (a number that can specify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the S side. In other words, in the "advantageous section", the winning / re-game winning information on the game including the winning / re-game winning information including the result of the game and the profit of the player that differs depending on the pressing order is directly transmitted to the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in a game section that is not an “advantage section”, the winning / re-game winning information relating to the game is not transmitted, and the result of the game and the profit of the player are different depending on the pressing order. In the case of the winning information, the effect group number in which the information related to the pressing order is concealed is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

  In the case where the game section is not the “advantage section” (“normal section” or “standby section”) or the like, when the winning / re-game winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub-control board S, The effect group number is determined by executing the mask processing, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The production group number is the winning / re-game winning information, and the winning / re-game winning information relating to the winning role having the same role (for example, a re-gaming role including a falling re-gaming role, a pushing order bell, etc.). Are grouped and numbers are assigned. The winning / re-game winning information relating to the game is masked {the winning / re-gaming winning information (particularly the information related to the pressing order) is concealed} and then transmitted to the sub-control board S. This prevents a situation in which information related to the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an improper act, and a pushing order (reel stopping order) that gives a high profit related to the game is recognized.

  Next, FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to the AT is the “in AT state”, the “specialization precursor state”, or the “additional specialization state”. It should be noted that, in the after-fall AT state, the after-fall special state, and the after-bell overflow state, the addition of the number of AT games is not executed. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the payout group number relating to the game to an additional during AT (winning number that can add the remaining number of AT games in the “in AT state”). In the present example, it is determined whether or not the payout group number (in this example, 1, 3) relating to “re-game-B”, “re-game-C”, and “prize-D”. Is determined. If Yes in step 1504, the process moves to step 1514. In addition, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, when the state related to the AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the payout group number related to the game in the BB additional role (“ In the "advantageous BB state", it is a winning number that can add the remaining number of AT games. In this example, it is a winning group number (5, 6 in this example) related to "winning-H" and "winning-I". It is determined whether or not there is. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. If No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to the AT is the "additional specialization state". In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M may add the payout group number relating to the game during the specialization additional role (in the “additional specialization state”, the number of remaining AT games and In the “AT state”, it is a winning number that does not add the number of remaining AT games. In this example, “replay-A”, “replay-D1” to “replay-D3”, “winning-A1” to It is determined whether or not the payout group number (in this example, 2, 13) regarding “winning-A6”. If Yes in step 1508, the process moves to step 1514. If the answer is No in step 1506 or 1508, the process moves to step 1518.

  Next, in step 1514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the number-of-additional-games lottery table at the time of winning and determines the number of AT-added games based on the payout group number of the game (for example, in the margin). In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether the latched random number value falls within any range). Determining the number of AT-added games is also referred to as performing AT-added lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of added games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition in the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the command related to the determined number of added games (the command is directed to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S receives the command, It is set whether the additional number of AT games has been executed or not and the number of additional games can be recognized). In addition, even in the case of the payout group numbers 7 to 11, which are payout group numbers related to the winning numbers (winning numbers 19 to 27) including the bonus, the lottery relating to the AT (AT lottery, AT additional lottery) can be executed. .

  Here, the lottery table shown outside the figure is an example of a lottery table for additional games at the time of winning, and in the third embodiment, a part of the state related to the AT where the push order navigation is executed (in this example, If the winning combination is won in the “AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization state”, “advantageous BB state”), based on the payout group number of the game in question. , The number of AT-added games is determined by lottery from “0” to “300”, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. Note that if “0” is determined, the number of remaining AT games does not increase (if “0” is determined, the AT addition lottery may be referred to as non-winning).

  In addition, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT-added games when the winning combination is won at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure. As a specific calculation method, the winning combination is watermelon A. In this case, $ (600) × the number of AT-added games (0) + number of (100) × AT-added games (10) + number of (300) × AT-added games (30) + number of ( 24) × AT additional games (100)｝ / total number of placed games (1024) = 12.1 (game).

  Next, when the winning combination is replay-B or replay-C, the number of placements (500) × the number of AT-added games (0) + the number of placements (200) × the number of AT-added games (50) + The number (300) × the number of AT-added games (100) + the number of (AT) (24) × the number of AT-added games (300)｝ / the total number of placed numbers (1024) = 46.1 (game). be able to.

  Next, when the winning combination is “re-game-A” or “re-game-D1” to “re-game-D3”, “winning-A1” to “winning-A6”, the number of places is (300). × number of AT added games (10) + number of set (600) × number of AT added games (30) + number of set (124) × number of AT added games (50) ゲ ー ム / total number of set (1024) = 26.61 ( Game). If the winning combination is "replay-A" or "replay-D1" to "replay-D3", "winning-A1" to "winning-A6", the number of AT games is added. This is only when the state related to the AT is “additional specialization state”.

  Next, in the case where the winning combination is a BB middle weak rare combination, the number of (800) × the number of AT-added games (0) + the number of (100) × the number of AT-added games (10) + the number of (100) ) × the number of AT-added games (30) + the number of set (24) × the number of AT-added games (100)｝ / total number of set (1024) = 6.3 (game).

  Next, in the case where the winning combination is a BB middle strong rare role, $ (300) × the number of AT-added games (0) + number of (300) × AT-added games (30) + (400) ) × the number of AT-added games (50) + the number of set (24) × the number of AT-added games (300)｝ / total number of set (1024) = 35.4 (game).

  In the third embodiment, when an AT-addition lottery is executed, the average value of the number of AT-added games may be different depending on the type of the winning combination. Are configured not to differ from each other. Here, in the case of performing the AT-added lottery based on the winning number, for example, when executing the same processing as the AT-added lottery with the winning number 7 and the winning number 8, the winning number is 7. Although it is necessary to execute a process of determining whether the number is 8 or not, as in the third embodiment, by executing the AT addition lottery based on the payout group number, the winning number 7 and the winning number are determined. In the case where the same processing as the AT-addition lottery is executed with the number 8, the processing relating to the AT-addition lottery of either the winning number 7 or the winning number 8 is executed only by determining whether the payout group number is 2. You can do it.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M may determine the winning number (or winning / replay winning information, or the payout group number) related to the game. ) Determines whether or not the winning number is related to replay-B (reverse push white 7 replay, which is a replay in which white seven can be aligned with an invalid line by stopping with reverse push). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of AT games added by the replay-B has been added, in other words, the number of AT added games by winning the replay-B It is determined whether it was not 0. If Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M issues a reverse push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and an invalid line by a reverse push (“right → middle → left”)). Is performed, the effect of instructing to align white seven) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a command other than the reverse push avoidance command (the command to the sub control board S side and the reverse push (“right → middle → left”)). The order of pressing is instructed, and an effect of preventing white seven from being aligned with the invalid line is set), and the flow proceeds to step 1526. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1518, the processing shifts to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the winning number (or may be determined based on winning / replay winning information or a payout group number, etc.) related to the game by a re-game-C ( It is determined whether or not the game is a replay game in which black seven can be aligned with the inactive line by stopping the game with the forward push. In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of AT games added by the re-game-C has been added, in other words, the number of AT added games by winning the re-game-C is It is determined whether it was not 0. If Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M issues a forward push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and an invalid line by forward push (“left → middle → right”)). Is performed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3100). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a forward push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side, except for forward push (“left → middle → right”)). The order of pressing is instructed, and an effect of not aligning black seven on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3100). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1526, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 3100). In the third embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command are transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives these commands. The sub-control board S is configured to be able to execute an effect related to the push order navigation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Such a command (for example, a command related to the number of AT-added games according to the processing in step 1517) is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and when the sub-control board S receives the command, the pressing order on the sub-control board S side You may be comprised so that the execution timing and the production mode of the production | generation regarding navigation may be determined. As an example, the replaying game-B is a winning game, and the sub-control board S selects an effect mode for instructing reverse pressing in a game (a game with an additional number of AT games) that receives the command. The game may be configured to be executed, or in a game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side, an effect of instructing a reverse push is not executed, and then a predetermined condition (for example, a specific replaying role (for example, In a game that satisfies (game-B or C)), an effect of instructing a pressing order in which seven sets can be made on an invalid line may be executed. Alternatively, in the game in which the re-game-B is a winning game, in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game with an additional number of AT games), the effect of instructing the reverse pressing is not executed, and (For example, after a predetermined number of games (continuous production may be performed at the same time, in that case, the final game of the continuous production), an additional production of AT games is performed (displayed on the production display device S40). This is an effect in which the display related to the number of remaining AT games is increased, and for example, “+ 30G” may be displayed.) In this example, the effect display device S40 also increases the number of remaining AT games. The display is configured to be able to be displayed, and the display may be the same as or different from the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side. B won In the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games is added), an effect of instructing a reverse push is not performed, and a game that satisfies a predetermined condition thereafter is executed. As an example of the case where the effect of adding the number of AT games is executed, when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) for inducing the winning of the bonus is executed on the sub-control board S side (in the bonus game, a replaying game is performed). Since the winning probability of B is low (including 0%), the player will be notified that a bonus has not been won if the player has informed the pressing order in which seven matches can be made.) The main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery, and the sub control board S side determines that the AT remaining game number has been added, (1) AT remaining game After the information on the number is added to the AT, the main control board M transmits the information to the sub-control board S after the lottery, and then the sub-control board S provides information on the previously transmitted AT remaining game number and the currently transmitted AT remaining game. The number of AT-added games obtained by the AT-addition lottery is calculated by calculating a difference from the number-related information, and (2) a command relating to the number of AT-added games obtained as a result of the AT-added lottery on the main control board M is The command is transmitted to the control board S. If the player does not win the AT addition lottery, a command indicating that the player does not win the AT addition lottery is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. When the command is received, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine the effect mode of the effect related to the push order navigation, for example, the game in which the re-game-B has been won. In the game (the game in which the number of AT games was not added) on which the command was received on the sub-control board S side, the middle press (operating the middle stop button as the first stop, the order of pushing to avoid the 7 sets) May be selected and executed. Note that, although the AT-additional lottery is executed on the main control board M side, the sub-control board S side determines that the AT-additional-game-number has not been added. After the AT addition lottery, it is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Thereafter, the sub-control board S calculates the difference between the previously transmitted information on the number of remaining AT games and the currently transmitted information on the remaining number of AT games, and ascertains the number of AT-added games won in the AT-addition lottery. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information on the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time from the information on the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time is 1, it is determined that the AT addition lottery has not been won.) (2) Main control board As a result of the AT addition lottery on the M side, a command relating to the fact that the number of AT addition games is 0 is transmitted to the sub control board S side.

  Next, FIG. 122 is a flowchart of a freeze lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3100 in FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. This flowchart shows a process for determining the execution of a specific freeze effect among the freeze effects, and is not limited to the freeze effect shown in the figure, but is shown as an example of the freeze effect. ing. First, in step 3102, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is a “high probability state”. As described above, in the third embodiment, the specific freeze effect is executed only in the “advantage section”, and is not executed in the “normal section” and the “standby section”. The freeze effect means that the stop button is not operable until a predetermined time (60 seconds in this example) has elapsed after the start lever is operated (the processing after step 1554 is not executed). This is an effect controlled by the control board M. During the freeze effect, the reels may be kept stopped, or all the reels may rotate at a low speed, rotate at a high speed, or rotate reversely. Good. In the third embodiment, a freeze effect performed only in the “advantage section” is illustrated as a specific freeze effect. However, the execution mode of the freeze effect is not limited to this. A different freeze effect may be configured to be executed in a game section other than the “advantage section”, or a specific freeze effect may be executed in a game section other than the “advantage section” and a specific freeze The effect may be configured such that the “advantageous section” is more easily executed (the execution probability is higher) than the game sections (“normal section” and “standby section”) other than the “advantage section”. That is, a plurality of types of freeze effects may be configured to be executable as a freeze effect, a predetermined freeze effect may be configured to be executed in a plurality of types of game sections, and a plurality of predetermined freeze effects may be performed. The execution probabilities (for a predetermined freeze effect) may be different for each game section in the case where the game section is configured to be executed in various types of game sections. Further, in a case where the predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a state relating to a plurality of types of ATs, the execution probabilities (for the predetermined freeze effect) for each state related to the AT may be different, or the predetermined freeze effect may be performed. The execution probabilities (for a predetermined freeze effect) may be different for each RT state in a case where the system is configured to be executed in a plurality of types of RT states. In addition, it is preferable that the freeze effect as exemplified in the third embodiment is configured to be executed in a game having a relatively high profit for the player. Is completed (freeze effect execution period) until the stop button becomes operable (freeze effect execution period). The mode of execution of the freeze effect is not limited to the mode of the third embodiment. The game is frozen at the end of the bonus (the bet and the start lever relating to the start of the next game are invalidated for a predetermined time), and the number of medals acquired in the bonus during the freeze is obtained. (Or the total of the number of medals acquired by the AT and the acquisition by the bonus) may be displayed on the effect display device S40, or at the end of the AT, in other words, when the AT counter value becomes 0. It may be configured to freeze and display the number of medals acquired in the AT (or the total of the number of medals acquired by the AT and the acquisition by the bonus) in the effect display device S40 during the freeze. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a condition device that can acquire the right to shift to the AT lottery role (“AT state”). Then, it is determined whether or not it is BB role). In Steps 3102 and 3104, it is determined whether or not the right to shift to the “AT-in-progress state” is obtained (in this example, the case where the AT lottery is won). In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a freeze execution lottery (lottery of whether or not to execute a freeze effect) to win with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/20). I do. Next, in step 3108, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the freeze execution lottery executed in the processing of step 3106 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on a freeze execution flag (when the flag is turned on, a freeze effect is executed in the game). . Next, in step 3112, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side, a command related to executing a freeze effect in the game), and the next processing The process proceeds to (Process of Step 1550). Note that also in the case of No in step 3102, step 3104, or step 3108, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1568, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the freeze execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1568, in step 1570, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the freeze execution flag. Next, in step 1572, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a freeze execution time (60 seconds in this example) to a freeze execution timer FZt (a timer for measuring the execution period of the freeze effect, a decrement timer). Is set and the timer is started. Next, in step 1574, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer FZt is 0. In the case of Yes at step 1574, the procedure moves to step 1552. On the other hand, if No in step 1574, the process of step 1574 is repeatedly executed until the timer value of the freeze execution timer FZt becomes 0. If the answer is No in Step 1568, the process proceeds to Step 1552. Next, in step 1552, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) to be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). Is a timer for measuring If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPU C100 of the main control board M newly sets the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 to a minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) and starts. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the pressing order related to the ended game. Next, in step 1558, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears information related to the stopped state of the reels related to the ended game and the draw-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPU C100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data relating to the ended game. Next, in step 1562, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an output request at the time of standby for reel rotation start for the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game. In other words, by the processing of step 1562 and step 1564, it is possible to transmit a command to the sub-control board S to indicate that the reel starts rotating. Next, in step 1566, the CPU C100 of the main control board M updates the reel driving state stored in the RAM area from the reel stopped state to the reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to the next processing (the processing of step 1260). Transition.

  Next, FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 in FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the “advantageous section” is one of the game sections, and a situation of the game that is advantageous to the player when the state related to the AT is “the AT state”. It is a game section that is easy to be set at. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc- 1 (which is a decrement counter and the maximum number of games that can stay in the “advantage section” is 1500 as an initial value). The counter value of a counter which is set as a value and which can be decremented for each game in a period which is an “advantage section” is decremented by one.

  Next, in step 3408, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the “AT-in-progress state”. If Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPU C100 of the main control board M decrements the AT counter value by 1, and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1700). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 3402 or 3408, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1700). As described above, in the third embodiment, when the state related to the AT that can be displayed by the push order navigation is the “AT state”, the AT counter value for each game is decremented. "AT preparation state 1", "AT preparation state 2", "addition specialization state", "specialization precursor state", "gaming inside advantageous BB", "advantageous BB state", "state during AT after falling", " In the case of "special state after falling" or "state after bell overflow", the AT counter value is not decremented even if the game is executed. As an example, in a case where the AT counter value remains (one or more remain) and the state transitions from the “AT-in-progress state” to the “specialized precursor state”, the AT counter value is maintained and “ It is configured to be able to make a transition (transition) from “AT in progress state” → “specialization precursor state” → “additional specialization state”. It should be noted that even if the state relating to the AT is the “AT state”, it is possible to prevent the AT counter value from being decremented by one when the winning number including the bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the display is performed such that the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is subtracted. It may be controlled. For example, when the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is “30” and the remaining AT remaining game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is “30”, the AT counter value is “30”. Is stored or “30 + α” which is a value obtained by adding the value “α” obtained by the AT addition lottery related to the game, but is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the start lever D50 is operated. “29” may be displayed as the number of remaining AT games, or “29 + α” which is a value obtained by adding the value “α” obtained by the AT additional lottery may be displayed (note that “α” obtained by the additional lottery is , Without notifying in the game, a specific game after the game (a game that satisfies predetermined conditions from the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the end of the bonus game) May be notified of “α”). The AT remaining game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is also decremented by one for each game in the "advantageous BB inside game", and an effect (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) indicating a bonus decision is output. The remaining number of AT games can be subtracted for each game. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately knowing the winning of the bonus when the player wins the bonus in a state where the push order navigation such as the “AT state” can be executed. That is, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, a continuous effect over a plurality of games for inducing whether or not the bonus has been won is executed using the effect display device S40 or the like, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, the remaining game number of the AT displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is completed is “30” or a value of “30” or more when notifying the result of winning and adding the result of the AT addition lottery. May be controlled to be displayed. When the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is “1” and the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is “1”, the game is displayed on the effect display device S40. The display relating to the number of remaining AT games is "0", but while maintaining this state, a continuous effect is performed over a plurality of games to inspire whether or not a bonus has been won, and the AT counter value is "1". When the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1", a game is executed and an AT-added lottery number can be executed (or a winning / re-game winning information or a payout group number). Is won, and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games becomes “0” and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 becomes “0”. Further, when the number of remaining AT games is small, the probability of executing the continuous effect may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of remaining AT games is large.

  Next, FIG. 125 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition possible condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the third embodiment, when the RT state transition enabling condition satisfies a predetermined condition (specifically, the setting key switch is turned on while the power is off, and then the power is turned on). RAM clearing (initialization of RAM) and stop display (in this example, re-game 04, re-game 06 and The stop display of the re-game 07 and the stop display of the prizes 08 to 11) and the winning, start, and end of the BB are satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state can be shifted and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT shiftable condition (see the RT state transition diagram in FIG. 126). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1750). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1702, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1750). In the third embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all the reels are stopped. However, when transitioning to “RT1”, the transition timing may be transitioned when the lever is turned on. The timing at which the RT state is shifted (the RT number is stored in the RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

  Next, FIG. 126 is an RT state transition diagram in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, there are seven RT states of “non-RT”, “RT0” to “RT4”, and “one type of BB-A, B, C”, and the condition indicated by the arrow in the figure. By satisfying the condition, the RT state shifts. As a specific example of the transition of the RT state, when the RAM initialization is executed, the state becomes “non-RT”. In addition, when the RT state is “non-RT”, when the replay 04 symbol is stopped and displayed, the display becomes “RT0” (see the arrow (1) shown in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). The stop display of the re-game 04 is, for example, when the RT state is “non-RT”, when the “re-game-D1” is won, and when the left stop button is operated as the first stop. , The replays 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and the "non-RT" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, when the RT state is “non-RT” and the “re-game-D1” is won, if the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed. Then, the RT state shifts from “non-RT” to “RT0”.

  When the RT state is “RT0”, “RT1”, “RT3” or “RT4”, and the overflow of the bell in the pushing order is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to “non-RT” (RT state transition in FIG. 126). (See arrow (2) in the figure). The pushing order bell overflow means that, for example, when the winning order of the correct answer is “left → middle → right” and “winning-A1” is won, the pushing order other than the pushing order of the correct answer ( For example, it is an arrangement of symbols that are stopped and displayed when a stop operation is performed in “middle → left → right”). When the stop operation is performed in a pressing order other than the correct pressing order, one game medal is paid out (see FIG. 104). Specifically, the symbol combinations of winning 08 to winning 11 correspond to the bell overflowing order.

  When the RT state is “RT0” or “RT4”, when the replay 06 is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to “RT1” (see the arrow (3) shown in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). The stop display of the replay 06 is, for example, when the RT state is “RT0” and the “replay-E1” is won, and when the left stop button is operated as the first stop. , The replay 06 stops and the RT state shifts from "RT0" to "RT1". On the other hand, if the player has won the "replay-E1" in the situation where the RT state is "RT0" and operates the middle stop button or the right stop button as the first stop, the replay 01 is stopped. Then, “RT0” is maintained as the RT state. In the case where the RT state is "RT4" and the player has won the "replay-E1" and operates the left stop button as the first stop, the replay 06 is stopped and displayed, and the RT state is displayed. Shifts from “RT4” to “RT1”. On the other hand, if the RT state is "RT4" and the player has won the "replay-E1" and operates the middle stop button or the right stop button as the first stop, the replay 01 is stopped. Then, “RT4” is maintained as the RT state.

  In addition, when the RT state is “RT1” or “RT3”, when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to “RT0” (see the arrow (1) in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). ).

  Further, when the RT state is "RT1" and the replay 07 is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to "RT4" (see the arrow (7) in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). The stop display of the replay 07 is, for example, a case where the player has won the “replay-F1” in a situation where the RT state is “RT1”, and has operated the left stop button as the first stop. , The replay 07 is stopped and the RT state shifts from “RT1” to “RT4”. On the other hand, if the RT state is "RT1" and the player has won the "replay-E1" and operates the middle stop button or the right stop button as the first stop, the replay 01 is stopped. Then, “RT1” is maintained as the RT state. When the RT state is "RT1", the replay 07 is stopped and displayed, and when the RT state shifts from "RT1" to "RT4", the state relating to the AT when the RT state is "RT1" is changed. When the state is the "AT in progress", the state related to the AT in "RT4" is "specialized state after falling", and the state related to the AT when the RT state is "RT1" is "specified precursor state". , The state related to the AT in “RT4” is “additional specialization state”.

  In addition, when the RT state is “non-RT”, “RT0”, “RT1”, “RT3” or “RT4”, the role of BB is won (the condition devices related to one type of BB-A to C are activated). If the BB combination is not won in the won game, the RT state shifts to “RT2” (see the arrow (4) in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). In addition, when the BB combination is won at “RT2” (one type of BB-A to CB is activated), the state shifts to “one type of BB-A, B, C” (shown in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126 ( See arrow 5)). When the BB is completed in “one type BB-A, B, C” (the operation of one type BB-A to BB is completed), the process proceeds to “RT3”. Note that among the seven RT states in the present example, the RT state having the highest stay ratio throughout all games is “RT0”, the “AT state” ends, and the game section changes from “advantage section” to “normal”. When shifting to the “section”, the user stays at “RT0” having the highest stay ratio. Note that, in the “standby section”, an AT lottery (a lottery for acquiring a right to shift to the “AT state”) is not won, and an AT game number added lottery is not won.

  Next, FIG. 127 is a flowchart of the in-AT state start control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT start enabling condition is satisfied in the game. The AT startable condition can be satisfied, for example, based on the end of the advantageous BB state after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. Specifically, the AT preparation state 1 and the AT preparation state 2 This is satisfied when the game shifts to the “AT-in-progress state” from the next game through (see FIG. 128). If Yes in step 1752, in step 1760, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the number of AT initial games (50 in this example, the number of games for which the subtraction is started after shifting to the “AT-in-state”). Is set in the AT counter M60, and the flow shifts to the next processing (processing in step 3500). It should be noted that, also in the case of No in step 1752, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 3500). In addition, after winning the role of BB in the “high probability state” and shifting to “advantageous BB inside game”, a BB is awarded to shift to the “advantageous BB state” and the AT in the “advantageous BB state” If the number of games has been added, the initial value set in the AT counter exceeds 50 at the time of transition to the “AT-in-progress state”. Specifically, when the number of AT games is increased by 30 in the “advantageous BB state” and then the state shifts to the “AT in-state” via the “AT preparation state 1” and the “AT preparation state 2”, , 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30) is set in the AT counter. At this time, when an effect of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state" is performed, at the start of the "AT state", the player is notified that the number of AT initial games is 80 games. It is desirable to notify, but as another method of notification, without performing the effect of informing the player that 30 games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”, the “AT preparation state 1”, “AT preparation state” After presenting the game with the initial value of 50 games to the player at the start of “2,” “at AT state,” etc., the player is in an AT state (for example, a state immediately after the start or a state where the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 is small). ), An effect of notifying the player that 30 games have been added is also conceivable. By doing so, the player cannot clearly know whether the number of AT games has been added or how many games have been added in the "advantageous BB state". It is possible to enhance the interest in the additional effect which suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during the AT (a state in which the push order navigation can occur). In this example, the number of AT initial games is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1760, but the execution timing of the process of setting the number of AT initial games is not limited to that of this example. The number of AT initial games may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the above-mentioned AT lottery execution process in step 3000. Also, the number of games set in the AT counter M60 (the number of AT initial games) becomes the “AT ready state” via the “AT ready state 1” and the “AT ready state 2” after the BB ends. Is configured to be subtracted from. Further, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board M.

  Next, FIG. 128 is an AT state transition diagram in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, “low probability state”, “normal BB inside middle game”, “normal BB state”, “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization” State, "advantageous BB inside game", "advantageous BB state", "standby BB inside game", "falling wait state", "AT preparation state 1", "AT preparation state 2", "AT after fall" There are 16 AT-related states of “state”, “special state after falling”, and “state after bell overflow”, and the state related to the AT shifts by satisfying the conditions indicated by arrows in the figure. Become. For example, if the player wins the watermelon B in the "AT state" and wins the specialization state transition lottery to win at 1/2, the state transitions to the "specialization precursor state". Further, when ten games have elapsed (digested) since the transition to the “specialization precursor state”, the state is shifted to the “additional specialization state”. As the game section, the states relating to the four ATs of “low probability state”, “normal BB internal middle game”, “normal BB state”, and “falling waiting state” are set to “normal section”, and “standby BB” “Inside middle game” is set to “standby section”, and “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization state”, “advantageous BB inside middle game”, “advantageous BB” The state relating to the 11 ATs of “state”, “AT preparation state 1”, “AT preparation state 2”, “AT falling state”, “special state after falling” and “state after bell overflow” is “advantage section”. Is set to In other words, even if the state relating to the 11 ATs serving as the "advantageous section" is transitioned (shifted) (even if the state transitions from a state of the advantageous section to another state of the advantageous section), the state is set to the "normal section". If a total of 1500 games have elapsed, the "advantageous section" is forcibly terminated and set to the "normal section".

  The state related to the AT is not limited to that of the third embodiment. For example, an AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in a “low probability state” or a “high probability state”, and the AT lottery is executed. The system may be configured to shift to the “precursor state” by winning the lottery and to shift to the “AT state” after 16 to 32 games have elapsed, or in such a case, the predetermined condition device AT lottery is executed by winning the game, and if the AT lottery is not won, the game shifts to the “bogus sign” state, and after the lapse of 16 to 32 games, enters the “low probability state” or the “high probability state”. You may be comprised so that it may transfer. In the third embodiment, a “standby section” is provided as a game section, and when a BB is won in the “low probability state” and an AT lottery based on the BB is won, the “standby section” is set. It is configured to be. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the AT lottery can be won by a condition device other than the BB combination. For example, when the game is performed in such a manner that the AT lottery is executed by winning the “Cherry”, the BB and the cherry overlap. If the player wins the “BB + Cherry” and wins the AT lottery, the state inside the BB until the “BB” of “BB + Cherry” wins may be set as the “standby section”. In this way, by providing the “standby section”, the BB is won in the “low-probability state” and the BB is won in the “low-probability state”, In both cases where the lottery has been won, the AT lottery is performed because the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off until the BB symbol combination is completed (until the advantageous section indicator turns on). It can be fueled by having the player expect whether or not he / she has won. In the “standby section”, the advantageous section indicator YH may be configured to be turned on, or both the case where the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on and the case where the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off may be performed. (The effect to be executed by the sub-control board S may be determined based on the turning on / off of the advantageous section indicator YH). In addition, when a BB is won in the “additional specialization state”, the “additional specialization state” may be configured to restart after the BB ends. Executes an AT addition lottery different from the BB won in the "AT state" as the BB selected in the "addition specialization state" (for example, the AT addition lottery is selected more than the BB selected in the "AT state") (The number of games per addition to the number of AT games is relatively large). In addition, when a BB is won in the “specialization precursor state”, it may be configured to shift to the “additional specialization state” after the end of the BB. In such a case, during the BB, In the "additional specialization state", the AT addition lottery may be executed in the same manner as the winning BB.

  Next, FIG. 129 is a flowchart of the game section shift control processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in the third embodiment, a game section is provided as a section relating to the state of the game. The game section includes a “normal section” that is relatively low in profit for the player and a game section that is relatively low in profit for the player. The game section has two game sections of “high profit section” and “advantageous section”. As a description of the flowchart, first, in step 3502, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. In the case of Yes in step 3502, in step 3504, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game based on the determined state regarding the AT and the current game state, and proceeds to step 3534. I do. On the other hand, if No in step 3502, in step 3506, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “standby section”. If Yes in step 3506, in step 3508, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not BB has been activated. If Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game to be “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3534. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3508, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the “standby section” in step 3506, and proceeds to step 3534. On the other hand, if No in step 3506, in step 3522, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the number-of-advantageous-sections remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 0, in other words, the “advantageous section” continues. It is determined whether the maximum possible number of games has been reached. If Yes in step 3522, in step 3526, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears all information related to the AT (the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of stay games in the “specialized precursor state”). Are also 0). On the other hand, if No in Step 3522, in Step 3524, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an end condition of the “advantageous section” other than the case where the counter value of the remaining number-of-advantageous-sections game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0. For example, the AT counter value is 0. Or when the push order navigation has been executed a predetermined number of times. If Yes in step 3524, in step 3532, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game to be “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3534. On the other hand, if No in step 3524, that is, if an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the flow shifts to step 3526. Thus, in the third embodiment, when the “advantageous section” ends and the “normal section” is set after the next game, information related to the AT (the number of AT continuous games, the number of remaining AT games, , Etc.) are all cleared, so that the condition for the subsequent “normal section” to become the “advantageous section” again is not relaxed. Note that the information related to the AT cleared by the processing of step 3526 (processing at the end of the advantageous section) includes the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1, a flag indicating the gaming state, and the like. In addition, these pieces of information are also cleared by the RAM clear at the time of setting change, but depending on the RAM clear at the time of setting change, the “condition device related to the continuous actuation device (BB)” or the “RT state” , The number of stored sheets, etc., is cleared, but depending on the processing in step 3526 (processing at the end of the advantageous section), the “condition device related to the continuous actuation device (BB)” or the “RT state” , And the information related to the “number of stored sheets” is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range at the time of setting change is different from the clear range at the end of the “advantageous section” (for example, at the time of executing the process of step 3526). It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the "condition device relating to the continuous actor (BB)" or the "RT state" is held by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed. The addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the “advantage section” are continuous. In this way, by making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" continuous, it is possible to clear by a simple process of specifying the start address to be cleared in the clearing process and the range of addresses to be cleared. When the “advantageous section” has ended, a command indicating that the “advantageous section” has ended is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S receives the command, the sub-control board S is configured not to delete the game history such as information indicating that the game is in the “advantageous section” and information on how many games the “AT state” has been executed. ing. However, when the RAM clear at the time of the setting change is executed, the game history such as information indicating that the game is in the “advantageous section” and information on how many games have been executed in the “AT state” on the sub-control board S side. Will also be erased.

  When the "advantageous section" ends because the counter value of the number-of-advantageous-sections remaining game counter YKc-1 has become 0, (1) when the current state related to the AT is the "high probability state" In the next game, the state related to the AT becomes the “low probability state”. (2) If the state related to the current AT is “the advantageous BB internal middle game”, the state related to the AT in the next game is “ (3) If the current state related to AT is "advantageous BB state", the state related to AT becomes "normal BB state" in the next game. (4) Present The states related to the AT are “AT-in-state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization state”, “AT preparation state 1”, “AT preparation state 2”, “AT state after fall”, “after fall” In the case of "specialized state" or "state after bell overflow" , (For information related to the AT is cleared) state on the AT in the next game is configured so as to be "low probability state" or "fall waiting state".

  Next, in step 3528, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the game section after the next game to the “normal section”, and proceeds to step 3530. Next, in step 3530, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the “advantageous section” has ended, and proceeds to step 3534. It should be noted that the advantageous section indicator YH is configured to be turned off when the “advantageous section” is completed and the “normal section” is set, but the detailed timing of turning off the light is limited to the timing of the third embodiment. Instead, for example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when a game medal is inserted in a game in which the “interest section” ends and the “normal section” ends. In other words, it is sufficient that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off before the start lever D50 at which the next game can be started is operated.

  Next, in step 3534, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines to set a new “advantageous section” in the next game (determined to set “advantageous section” from “normal section”). It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 3534, in step 3536, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value to the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. It should be noted that the predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed numerical value (1500 in this example) common to all set values. Next, in step 3538, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the advantageous section indicator YH, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1293). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 3534, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1293). In the third embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section display YH is executed at the timing of step 3538. However, the lighting timing of the advantageous section display YH is not limited to this. The lighting timing ranges from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the new “advantageous section” (the game in the “normal section”) to the timing at which the game medal can be inserted in the game in the new “advantageous section” (new If the game before the “advantage section” is a game related to the replay, it is set appropriately during the period until the start lever operation becomes effective in the game that becomes a new “advantage section”. You may.

  Note that, when the BB is executed when the number of continuous games in the “advantageous section” is close to 1500 games, the counter value of the number-of-advantageous-sections remaining game counter YKc-1 is 5 (the number of continuous games in the advantageous section). BB is started at 1495), and when the counter value of the number-of-advantageous-sections remaining game counter YKc-1 reaches 0 (the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is 1500) during the execution of BB, Section ”.

  Next, FIG. 130 is a flowchart of the timer interruption process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the third embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and thereafter, is performed for a predetermined time (in this example, T, for example, a time of about 2 ms is set. Is performed at regular intervals.

  First, in step 1602, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a process at the time of starting an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPU C100, checking an input port of a power-off detection signal, and the like). Next, in step 1604, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power interruption has been detected at present (in the current interrupt processing). In the case of No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process described later. On the other hand, if Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPU C100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPU C100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes a settlement button D60, a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a door switch D80, a setting key switch M20, a setting / reset button M30, a power-off detection signal, an input receiving sensor D10s, and a first input sensor. D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, and the like (ie, the presence / absence of operation with these operating members and the sensor detection state are sampled at the interrupt interval T). Is done).

  Next, in step 1610, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switching (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over a plurality of samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise. Can also be detected). Next, in step 1611, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a drum drive control process (a process relating to control of driving the reel M50) of all reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53). . Next, in step 1612, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (the number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1612, the process shifts to step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing of step 1612 and step 1613 is unnecessary. Next, in Step 1614, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off all error flags (not shown, inserted medal backflow error flag, inserted number error flag, inserted medal retention error flag, inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether or not all the flags related to errors, such as a payout abnormality error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, and a door switch flag, are off). In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error non-detection command (a command to the sub side and a command indicating that no error is detected) (for example, a register (Set in the area), and the flow shifts to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side, a command related to the fact that an error is detected) (for example, (Set in the register area), and the flow shifts to step 1622. In step 1620, information on an error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the ON error flag is transmitted to the sub side. Also, the error non-detection command may be set only when the error has been released from the state in which the error has occurred (only when it is determined that the flag has been turned off). The information setting process may not be performed (the step 1618 may not be necessary). Further, the error detection command may execute the setting process only when an error has occurred from a state where no error has occurred, or may be performed from a state where a first error (for example, an inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The setting process may be executed when the type of error has changed, such as a second error (for example, a payout medal staying error).

  Next, in step 1622, the CPU C100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (command on the sub side) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set) Control command is transmitted). Here, as a command to be transmitted to the sub-control board S, a command relating to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation), a command relating to the first reel stop reception timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop) Immediately after), a command related to the second reel stop reception timing (transmitted immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), a command related to the third reel stop reception timing (the stop button as the third stop) (Transmitted immediately after the operation), transmitted immediately after all reels stop), a command related to the effect group number (transmitted immediately after the operation of the start lever D50), a command related to the winning / replay winning information ( A command (sent immediately after the start lever is operated (during the advantageous section)) related to the bonus winning information Command related to the AT state (transmitted after all reels stop until the next game starts), command related to the state related to AT (all reels stop). Between the start of the next game and the start of the next game), the command related to the number of remaining AT games (from the time when all reels are stopped until the next game is started, or immediately after the start lever operation) Forward push command (sent immediately after start lever operation), forward push avoidance command (sent immediately after start lever operation), reverse push command (sent immediately after start lever operation) , A reverse push avoidance command (sent immediately after the start lever operation), a freeze execution command (a command related to execution of a freeze effect on the main control board M side). A de, sent after the start lever operation force), the command regarding the game period (all the reels is sent between the stops until the next game starts), and the like. Next, in step 1624, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the spinning-type gaming machine P to an external hall computer or the like). It should be noted that as information relating to the error output by the external signal, although not shown, a door opening error, a loading abnormal error, a dispensing abnormal error, a loading reception sensor staying error, and the like are output. Note that the door opening error is configured to generate an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on. Is configured to generate an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs the output data of the LED (such as a 7-segment LED lamp) (for example, turns on a predetermined 7-segment LED unit out of a plurality of 7-segment LED units). A predetermined segment of the segment is turned on) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a lighting mode of the LED (for example, changing a lighting color of the LED). Step 1628 may not be performed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a soft random number management process (such as a process of updating a random number value managed by software). Next, in step 1632, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 1634, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not an abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is not set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, an abnormality flag bit is set. If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the update state of the internal random number is normal (whether or not an abnormality flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is not set). Is determined. If Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an interrupt end process, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1602). On the other hand, if No in step 1634 or 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the above-described non-returnable error processing.

  Next, FIG. 131 is a flowchart of the power-off processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPU C100 of the main control board M stores the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processing completed flag (for example, updates the power-off processed flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1906, the CPU C100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and detects error detection information based on the calculated checksum (for example, The lower one byte of the obtained checksum or its complement is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPU C100 of the main control board M prohibits writing in the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for reset.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 to 146, a control process executed on the sub-control board S side will be described.

<Sub-side program start processing>
First, FIG. 132 is a subroutine showing a sub-side program start process. This sub-program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

  First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S prohibits interruption. Next, in step 2004, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processing such as initialization of the CPU and RAM, calculation of a checksum, and the like.

  Next, in step 2008, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on matches the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off. If Yes in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination processing in step 2008 that both checksum values match, in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one-command processing described below. It is determined whether or not the state has been restored from the state in which the power supply has been interrupted, that is, whether or not the state has been completely restored.

  In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, in the case where it is determined that the return is complete, in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permitted the interrupt and executed when the power was cut off. The processing returns to one command processing.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination processing in step 2008 that both checksum values do not match, in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the RAM. Execute After executing the process of step 2014 or in the case of No in step 2010, the process is shifted to the sub main loop process.

<Sub main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 133 is a subroutine showing a sub main loop process. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 132 is executed.

  First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits the interruption. Next, in step 2108, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a command receiving process. This command receiving process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

  Next, in step 2250, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes one-command processing described later. The one command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control unit 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms, has elapsed, and when it is determined that the time has not elapsed, returns the process to step 2250. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step 2102. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be appropriately changed according to processing.

<Sub-side power-off processing>
Next, FIG. 134 is a subroutine showing a sub-side power-off process executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power-off process is a process started when the sub-control board S detects the power-off.

  First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start processing is being executed. If Yes in step 2204, the process moves to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calculates the checksum. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

  Next, in step 2210, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether 500 ms has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off process is terminated. On the other hand, if No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the power has been restored. If Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S updates the number of occurrences of instantaneous interruption. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer, and returns to the processing that was being executed when the power was turned off. If it is determined in step 2212 that the power has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 135 is a subroutine showing one command process called and executed in the process of step 2250 of FIG. 133.

  First, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is time to operate the bet button. If No in step 2250, in step 2251, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the bet button operation process, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110 in FIG. 40). By the processing of step 2251, the effect can be started or switched in response to the operation of the bet button. The effect performed in the process of step 2251 is performed in accordance with the content determined in the effect content determination process (the process of step 2800 described later) performed in the game or the game at a time before the game. .

  If Yes in step 2250, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is time to operate the start lever. If Yes in step 2252, the process moves to step 2253. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2252, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a start lever operation process. By the processing of step 2300, the effect can be started or switched, triggered by the operation of the start lever. Next, in step 2800, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for effect content determination processing described later, and proceeds to the next processing (the processing of step 2110 in FIG. 133).

  Next, in step 2253, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the reel rotation start timing. In the case of Yes at step 2253, the process moves to step 2255. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2253, in step 2254, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the reel rotation start processing, and proceeds to the next processing (the processing of step 2110 in FIG. 133). By the process of step 2254, the effect can be started or switched when the reel rotation is started. The effect performed in the process of step 2254 is performed in accordance with the content determined in the effect content determination process (the process of step 2800 described later) performed in the game or a game at a time before the game. . Further, the reel rotation start timing may be the rotation start timing of the reel that has started to rotate first among the three reels, or may be the rotation start timing of the reel that has started to rotate last among the three reels (three reels). When the rotation starts simultaneously, the rotation start timing).

  Next, in step 2255, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the first reel stop acceptance (first stop operation) timing. In the case of No in step 2255, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the first-time body-stop receiving process and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110 in FIG. 133). In other words, in the process of step 2500, the effect is executed with the timing of turning on the first trunk stop. The ON timing will be described later. By the process of step 2500, the effect can be started or switched when the stop button is pressed to stop the first body.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2254, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the second reel stop acceptance (second stop operation) timing. In the case of No at Step 2258, at Step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process for receiving the second body stop, and shifts to the next process (the process of Step 2110 in FIG. 133). In other words, in the process of step 2550, an effect is executed with the timing of the second barrel reel stop ON. By the processing in step 2550, the effect can be started or switched when the stop button is pressed to stop the second body.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2258, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the third reel stop acceptance (third stop operation) timing. In the case of No in step 2262, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the third-body-stop-receiving-time process, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110 in FIG. 133). In other words, in the process of step 2600, an effect is executed with the timing of turning on the third reel stop. By the process of step 2600, the effect can be started or switched when the stop button is pressed to stop the third body.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the symbol stop display timing. If Yes in step 2266, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a stop display symbol time process (not shown) and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110 in FIG. 133). . On the other hand, if No in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110 in FIG. 133). By the processing in step 2268, the effect can be started or switched when the stop button pressed to stop the third body is released. In other words, in the process of step 2268, an effect is executed with the timing of turning off the third barrel reel stop. The timing of turning off will be described later.

<Contents of production in the third embodiment>
As described above, in the third embodiment, the operation timing of the bet button, the operation timing of the start lever, the first reel stop reception timing, the second reel stop reception timing, the third reel stop reception timing, and the symbol , The content of the effect is determined. Hereinafter, types of effects in the third embodiment will be described.

  The effects are mainly stage effects (sometimes referred to as background effects), notice effects, and push order navigation effects.

<Stage production>
The stage effect is an effect mainly performed by displaying a background image or the like. The stage mode in which the stage effect is executed and the notice effect is not executed corresponds to the effect of the effect group 1 shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) (the push order navigation effect is not executed without the effect Or it may be configured to be able to execute a push order navigation effect even without an effect). That is, in this example, there is no effect = no execution of the notice effect. Here, the background image includes not only a static image that does not change over time, but also a dynamic image that changes over time. Further, only one part may change over time, or the whole may change. For example, an image from a certain viewpoint such as a landscape or a room is displayed on the entire screen (display area) of the effect display device S40.

  The stage effect can be mainly determined by a game state determined by an RT state, an AT-related state, and the like, and can be executed so as to indicate the overall state of the game. Further, it is configured such that a stage shift lottery for changing a stage effect to be executed can be executed for each game. The configuration may be such that the number of stage effect candidates that can be determined according to the RT state and the state related to the AT and the number of stage transition lotteries are different. In addition, in the stage effect, not only the image display but also sound such as music, narration, sound effect and the like are output together with the background image display, and if necessary, character information is displayed together with the background image. (For example, in a game in which the stage effect has been changed, a sound for explaining the stage effect is output). Further, an effect by lighting or blinking of the lamp D26 can be included in the stage effect.

  The stage effect is basically started with the operation of the bet button D220 of the game (including detection of medal insertion) or the operation of the start lever D50. ) Or the operation of the start lever D50. The trigger for starting and ending the stage effect is not limited to these, and may be a first stop, a second stop, a third stop, or a start of reel rotation. It is not necessary to start or end simultaneously with the operation of the bet button D220, the detection of the insertion of medals, the operation of the start lever D50, the first stop, the second stop, the third stop, or the start of reel rotation. May be started or ended with a delay of a predetermined time from. The start and end timings can be arbitrarily determined according to the contents of the effect and the information to be suggested.

<Preliminary production>
The announcement effect can be mainly performed so as to indicate a detailed state desired by the player such as a condition device, an RT state, an AT-related state, and a set value, which have been won in the game. Note that the announcement effect includes an effect of informing information completely unrelated to these states. The announcement effects are “character effects” of effect group 2, “conversation effects” of effect group 3, “cut-in effects” of effect group 4, and “effects of effect group 5” shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C). This corresponds to “showdown effect”, “additional battle” of effect group 6, effect group 7 “common navigation effect”, and effect group 8 “target aiming effect”.

  The mode of the notice effect is such that the image indicating the notice effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 so as to be superimposed on the background image (stage effect), or the image is displayed alone on the entire screen of the effect display device S40. There is. The announcement effect can be configured by an image that is more dynamic and changes with time with respect to the stage effect. As with the stage effects, the preview effects not only display images, but also output sounds such as music, narration, and sound effects along with the background images, and display character information along with the background images as necessary. And other embodiments. In addition, effects by lighting or blinking of the lamp D26 and operation of a movable body (not shown) are also included.

  Generally, the content of the notice effect changes or switches within one game. For example, the first effect is started in response to the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, and then the contents are changed by starting an intermediate effect in response to the first stop or the second stop. The content can be changed or switched by starting the final effect on the occasion of the third stop. In this way, by developing an effect corresponding to the operation of the player, various detailed information can be suggested. As an example, in the case of executing a notice effect that inspires a player as to whether or not a bonus has been won, the operation of the start lever D50 triggers the expectation of the bonus being won in the game. An example of an effect mode in which an effect is executed, and thereafter, at the third stop button operation timing, an effect of notifying the result of whether or not a bonus has been won in the game, is executed.

  Opportunities for switching the notice effect include an operation of the bet button D220, an operation of the start lever D50, a first stop, a second stop, a third stop, and the like. Triggers according to can be used arbitrarily. Also, it is not necessary to be at the same time as these triggers, and the effect can be started after a predetermined time delay from the operated timing. Furthermore, it is also possible to start the effect simultaneously with these triggers, display the image in a dynamic manner until a predetermined period elapses, and thereafter display the image in a stationary manner.

  Further, in various operations of the player, there are a timing at which the player applies a force to displace the button or the lever (a timing at which the button or the lever is turned on) and a timing at which the player releases the button or the lever to return ( (On-off timing). Either one of the timings, the timing of both timings, or neither timing may be used. By using the ON timing and the OFF timing, the timing at which the effect can be switched can be increased, and the effect can be developed and advanced in various ways.

  For example, when the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50 is turned on, the image display as the stage effect is started, the sound effect is output, and the image display as the notice effect is started at the first stop on time. Then, at the second stop, a sound effect is output and the lamp is turned on, the image as the notice effect is switched at the timing of turning on the third stop, and a further sound effect is output at the timing of turning off the third stop, Until the timing of the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50 of the next game is turned on, an effect such as displaying an image as a notice effect can be performed.

  As described above, the announcement effect is mainly performed so as to indicate a detailed state such as a set value in addition to a condition device, an RT state, and an AT-related state which have been won in the game. The switching or development of the contents can be arbitrarily determined so as to suggest such information.

  For example, in a notice effect, it is possible to suggest a condition such as a winning condition device, a state of an RT state, or a state related to an AT by a display mode such as a color, a number, a degree of change, etc. of characters (characters), items, goods, and the like. it can. As an example, the winning small role can be notified by the color of the item or goods (a red color indicates a cherry, a green color indicates a watermelon, etc.).

<Push order navigation direction>
In the third embodiment, the push order navigation effects are the replay-B, replay-C, replay-D1 to replay-D3, winning-A1 to winning-A6, and replay-E1 to replay- described above. When a condition device (sometimes referred to as a pushing sequence) that may have a different role to stop and display according to the pushing sequence of E3, re-game-F1 to re-game-F3 is won, the pushing sequence is represented by an image or a character. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 (for example, when the first stop is the left reel, “1” is displayed in an area above the left reel in the effect display device S40, etc.), and is output from the speaker S20 by voice. (For example, output "Left!").

  The player can stop and display the symbol by operating the stop button D40 according to information displayed on the effect display device S40 or output from the speaker S20. Note that, in the case of a pushing sequence in which game medals are paid out by displaying the stop, the stop order is used to instruct the pushing order in which the number of payouts is the largest. Stage productions and announcement productions are mainly indirect notification productions that mainly suggest or imply a game state, while push-navigation productions are often direct notification productions that display the pressing sequence. . In the pressing order navigation effect, indirect information such as suggesting or implying the pressing order may be displayed.

  Hereinafter, each effect group shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) will be described.

<Direction Group 1 “No Direction”>
In the third embodiment, “no effect” in group 1 does not mean that no effect is performed at all, but means that the above-described notice effect is not performed. is there. In other words, the “effect” of the effect group 1 means the above-described announcement effect, and the “effect” of the effect group 1 does not include the stage effect or the push-navigation effect. Therefore, even when “No effect” of group 1 is selected, the stage effect and the push order navigation are executed, and the display of the image, the output of the sound, the lighting of the lamp, and the like are performed as the stage effect and the push order navigation. Be executed.

<"Character production" of production group 2>
The “character effect” of group 2 is an effect of displaying a character together with a background image on the effect display device S40 (see FIG. 155 (A)). Specifically, it is displayed on the effect display device S40 from the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50 in the game to the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50 in the next game. This is an effect in which the character performs a predetermined action (see FIG. 155 (A)).

  For example, a background image is displayed (operation of the stage effect) triggered by the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50. The character performs a final operation (for example, disappears, etc.) upon the third stop.

  The character effect only needs to be displayed on the effect display device S40 together with a background image (sometimes referred to as a stage effect), and may be any character that additionally decorates a normal background image. By additionally displaying the display, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. Whether or not a character appears, the type of character to appear, and the like may be determined based on the condition device won in the game or may be determined independently of the condition device. Furthermore, various display modes such as a position, a number, and a color in which the character is displayed may be changed based on the winning condition device. The display mode of the character may be any mode that is different so as to be visible to the player.

  Here, the characters are not only living objects such as humans and animals, but also moving objects that can be visually recognized by the player when they act with some intention, such as artificial living objects such as robots and pseudo-creatures, as well as inorganic objects. For example, objects such as vehicles, battleships, and weapons can also be included in the character.

<"Conversation production" of production group 3>
An effect in which a display frame (also referred to as a window) or the like is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a part such as a lower part together with a background image, and character information relating to a game state or a story is displayed in an area inside the display frame. It is. For example, the character information to be displayed may be determined based on the condition device won in the game or may be determined independently of the condition device. The degree of expectation may be indicated by the color of display information, the color of characters, the timing of display, or the like.

  The conversation effect may be any one that is displayed together with the background image on the effect display device S40, and may be one that additionally decorates a normal background image. By additionally displaying the display, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. Further, in addition to the display, character information for explaining the playability and the like can be output as a sound from the speaker S20, and a sound effect can be output from the speaker S20 together with the display (see FIG. 155 (B)).

  For example, when the reel rotation starts, the display frame is superimposed and displayed on the effect display device S40 together with the background image (start of stage effect), and then the character is triggered by the first stop or the second stop. Information is displayed one after another, and the final character information is displayed upon the third stop. As an example, the image, the display frame, and the character information (line) of the character A are displayed in response to the start of the rotation of the reel, and then, at the first stop, the image, the display frame, and the character information (line) of the character B are displayed. Is displayed, it is possible to exemplify an effect mode in which the character A and the character B are having a conversation.

  Note that character information may be displayed in a predetermined area such as an end of the display area of the effect display device S40 without displaying a display frame or the like.

<Direction Group 4 “Cut-in Direction”>
The “cut-in effect” is an effect in which a cut-in effect image is displayed so as to be interrupted from a background image (the stage effect described above) previously displayed on the effect display device S40 (see FIG. 155 (C)). ). For example, triggered by the operation of the start lever D50, a cut-in effect image completely different from the normally displayed background image is displayed on the entire effect display device S40 for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the condition device selected in the game is won. Perform the production that suggests. It should be noted that the cut-in effect may be executed without executing the cut-in effect, so that the effect in the same manner as the effect other than the cut-in effect may be executed. In other words, an effect indicating the condition device won in the game may be executed in response to the operation of the start lever D50. The cut-in effect is an example of an effect corresponding to the effect group 4, and the effect corresponding to the effect group 4 is not limited to the cut-in effect. In addition, the effect corresponding to the effect group 4 is such that the effect is performed upon the operation of the start lever D50, and the type of the condition device won in the game is suggested, or the effect is determined in the game. It is configured to indicate whether or not the winning condition device includes a bonus combination, or to indicate whether or not an AT lottery has been won.

  The “character production” of group 2 and the “conversation production” of group 3 described above are to additionally decorate a normal background image, but this “cut-in production” is basically , An image independent of the normal background image (the entire screen is switched from the background image).

  The display of the cut-in effect image is performed by the operation of the start lever D50, and in addition to the mode in which the cut-in effect image is suddenly switched to be displayed on the entire effect display device S40, the effect display device S40 has The cut-in effect image is inserted in such a way as to break into a part of the displayed background image, and the originally displayed background screen and the cut-in effect image are temporarily displayed together. An aspect (an aspect in which the cut-in image is displayed only in a part of the display area of the effect display device S40) may be employed.

  By displaying such a cut-in effect image, it is possible to suggest a condition device or the like that has been won in the game by the content of the cut-in effect image. For example, depending on the character (character) appearing in the cut-in effect image, the display mode such as the color, the number, and the degree of change of the item or the goods, the selected condition device, the state such as the RT state, and the state related to the AT. Can be suggested.

<Direction Group 5 “Showdown”>
The “confrontation effect” is an effect in which at least two types of characters display competing images on the effect display device S40, and an effect in which the result of a competition (win / loss, success / failure, etc.) is determined in one game (FIG. 155). (A)). For example, triggered by the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, the image before the two types of characters start the confrontation is displayed on the effect display device S40, and then, triggered by the first stop, An image in which two types of characters start a confrontation is displayed, an intermediate progress of the confrontation is displayed with the second stop, and an image showing a final victory or the like is displayed with the third stop.

  Note that this confrontation is not limited to fighting or struggle, but may include not only two or more characters (including groups and teams) competing, such as sports and fast eating, but also at least one character's action. As long as the character determines the winning or losing of the character. For example, this is an effect in which the victory or defeat of a competition is completed in one game. When one character wins, the degree of expectation of a bonus win or an AT win can be suggested depending on the type of the winning character. Alternatively, the winning condition device, RT state, set value, or the like may be suggested. At the end of one game, character information such as “WIN!” Is displayed. In the event that a victory or success is achieved as a result of the showdown, the result of the game indicates that the result is advantageous to the player, and the player is notified that the player has won the bonus role in the game. In this case, it is notified that the state will shift to the AT-in-progress state after the next game. On the other hand, if the result of the confrontation is a defeat, failure, or the like, this indicates that the result of the game is not advantageous to the player, and informs that the player did not win the bonus role in the game. Or that the game will not shift to the AT in progress even after the next game. In the case of executing the showdown, the effect that the result of the showdown is victory / success, and the effect of the result of the showdown that is defeated or unsuccessful, are different from the start of the effect immediately before the result notification (for example, Until the 3 stop button is operated), the same effect mode is used. At the result notification timing (for example, the third stop operation timing), the effect is produced depending on whether the result of the confrontation is victory / success or defeat / failure. You may comprise so that an aspect may differ.

<Direction Group 6 “Additional Battle (for exclusive use during ART)”>
The “additional battle (for exclusive use during ART)” is an effect in which at least two types of characters display competing images on the effect display device S40 in the same manner as the “confrontation effect”, and the result of the competition in one game (eg, win / loss) Is determined (see FIG. 157 (B)). As in the confrontation production, it is not limited to fighting and struggle, but also sports or fast-eating, not only those in which two or more characters (including groups and teams etc.) that are always in conflict with each other, but also the movement of at least one character It is only necessary that the winning or losing of the character be determined.

  In particular, with the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, an image before the two types of characters start the confrontation is displayed on the effect display device S40, and then, triggered by the first stop, An AT game in which an image in which two types of characters start a confrontation is displayed, the progress of the confrontation is displayed in response to the second stop, and an image indicating final victory or defeat is provided in response to the third stop. Information indicating the number is displayed. In addition, if the result of the additional battle (for exclusive use during ART) is victory, success, or the like, it indicates that the result of the game is advantageous to the player, and the number of AT games in the game is increased. It informs you of the winning. On the other hand, if the result of the additional battle (for exclusive use during ART) results in a loss or failure, the player is notified that he or she did not win the additional number of AT games in the game. A predetermined game in which the player has won the additional game, but is notified of a loss, a failure, or the like as a result of the additional battle (for exclusive use during ART), and then executes a predetermined condition (the next additional battle (exclusive for ART)). By satisfying the number of elapsed games, the operation of the bet button D220 for the next game, and the like, it may be notified that the player has won the additional number of AT games.

  In both the “confrontation effect” and the “additional battle (for exclusive use during ART)”, similarly to the “character effect”, a character can be a living object such as a human or an animal, or an artificial living object such as a robot or a simulated character. Characters can include not only moving objects that can be visually recognized by the player when they act with a certain intention such as living things, but also inorganic objects such as vehicles, battleships, and weapons.

<Direction Group 7 “Common Navigation Direction”>
The “common navigation effect” is an effect of displaying a common navigation effect image while the background image (the stage effect described above) and the like previously displayed on the effect display device S40 are displayed. For example, triggered by the operation of the start lever D50, the common navigation effect image is displayed in a partial area of the effect display device S40 for a predetermined time, and thereafter, it is indicated that the player has won the rare role in the game. Perform the production. Although the details will be described later, the common navigation effect is an effect that can be executed when the rare role is won in the AT preparation state 1, the AT preparation state 2, or the like. In the AT preparation state 1 or the AT preparation state 2, the player has a sense of expectation for the ball coming out after the transition to the AT-in-progress state. There is a risk that the willingness of the game will be cut off if a stir effect is performed. Therefore, in the AT preparation state 1 and the AT preparation state 2, when the rare role is won, the fact that the rare role has been won is notified, but the additional number of the AT games does not occur as in the AT state. Also in this case, there is no effect mode in which an additional battle is executed to instigate whether or not the additional number of AT games is added.

<Direction Group 8 “Aim Direction”>
"Aiming effect" indicates, for example, when the reverse-pressed 7-match replay (replay-B) or the forward-pressed 7-match replay (replay-C) is won, character information, image information, and the like are displayed on the effect display device S40. (See FIG. 158). For example, triggered by the operation of the start lever D50, an image prompting to align the symbols 7 is displayed on the effect display device S40. The player can perform a stop operation by aiming at the symbol 7 according to the image, and align the symbol 7 with a line that is not an active line (sometimes referred to as an invalid line). In a game state where the lottery can be executed with the number of AT games, such as when the state related to the AT is the state during the AT, if the player can arrange the symbols 7 in accordance with the “target aiming effect”, the number of AT games is increased. It is configured to notify that the game has been won. It should be noted that the replay of seven reverse pushes (replay-B) and the seven replays of forward push (replay-C) are replays in which the player's profit does not differ depending on the push order (not push order replay). In the case of winning in a replay of 7 reverse pushes (replay-B) or a replay of 7 forward pushes (replay-C), an aiming effect occurs, and the game is not executed in the pushing order suggested by the aiming effect. In this case, it is not notified that the game has been added to the number of AT games, but since the game has been selected for the addition of the number of AT games, the number of games that have been added is notified at a timing satisfying a predetermined condition. Also, as another effect mode of the aiming effect, when the player is elected as the pushing order bell or the pushing order replaying game, an image such as "?????" Is displayed, and the player is allowed to apply the correct pressing order (the highest profiting pressing order) by himself / herself. In such a case, for example, when the player executes the game in the low-probability state in the order of pushing the correct answer, the state is shifted to the during-AT state, which is a high profit for the player, and the high probability is set for the player. When the player is notified of the profit, when the player executes the game in the order of pushing the wrong answer, the player is configured to maintain a low probability state in which the player does not have a high profit, and the player does not have a high profit. You may be comprised so that it may notify.

<"Push order navigation effect">
Although the details will be described later, the “push order navigation effect” includes, as described above, the replay-B, the replay-C, the replay-D1 to the replay-D3, and the prize-A1 to the prize- A6, a player according to the situation of the game when a condition device that can have a different role to stop and display according to the pressing order such as re-game-E1 to re-game-E3, re-game-F1 to re-game-F3 is won. This is an effect in which the pressing order in which the most advantageous combination is stopped and displayed is displayed as images or characters, or is output as audio. By operating the stop button D40 in accordance with the displayed or output information, the player stops and displays the most advantageous symbols, obtains a specified number of medals, or shifts to an advantageous gaming state. Or you can. It should be noted that even if the player has won a replay (replay game that is not a push order replay) in which the profit of the player does not differ according to the push order of the replay-B, the replay-C, etc., the push order navigation effect is executed. It may be configured to be able to be performed.

  Note that, as described above, the “production” of “no production” of the production group 1 does not include the stage production or the push order navigation production, and even if “no production” of the group 1 is selected, Stage effects and push order navigation effects are executed. The push order navigation effect can be executed together with the stage effect and the notice effect. For example, a push order navigation effect can be executed together with a stage effect, or a push order navigation effect can be executed together with a cut-in effect.

<< Relationship between Production Type and Production Operation (Reproduction) Start Timing >>
FIG. 136 is a table showing the relationship between the effect type and the effect operation (reproduction) start timing. As shown in FIG. 136, the production operation (reproduction) start timing includes a start lever operation timing, a winding drum (reel) rotation start timing, a first reel stop reception timing, and a second reel stop reception timing. , There is a third reel stop acceptance timing and a bet button operation timing. The rotation start timing of the reel (reel) can also be determined by the sub-control board S by receiving a signal from the main control board M.

  In addition, the types of the effects include “No effect” for effect group 1, “Character effect” for effect group 2, “Conversation effect” for effect group 3, “Cut-in effect” for effect group 4, and effects There is a “showdown effect” of group 5, an “additional battle” of effect group 6, a “common navigation effect” of effect group 7, and an “aiming effect” of effect group 8.

<Direction Group 1 “No Direction”>
In the effect group 1 “no effect”, the background image (stage effect) is continuously displayed from the operation timing of the start lever to the operation timing of the bet button of the next game. That is, the background image continues to be displayed over the entire game, but no new announcement effect image or the like is displayed.

<"Character production" of production group 2>
In the "character effect" of the effect group 2, the character image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the background image at the subsequent reel rotation start timing without executing the effect at the operation timing of the start lever. As described above, the display of the image of the character only needs to be added to the background image, and the character image may be displayed at any timing from the reel rotation start timing to the operation timing of the bet button of the next game. May be displayed or the image of the character displayed in advance may execute the action. Note that the character motion may be displayed so as to change at any one of the first reel stop reception timing, the second reel stop reception timing, and the third reel stop reception timing. It is not necessary to change the movement of the character at each of these timings, and the movement of the character can be changed at any timing.

  In this case, at the timing of operating the bet button in the next game, the battle effect (additional battle) does not develop. Note that the game may be configured to develop into a confrontation effect (additional battle) at the operation timing of the bet button in the next game.

<"Conversation production" of production group 3>
In the "conversation effect" of the effect group 3, the effect is not executed at the operation timing of the start lever D50, but is started by displaying the image of the display frame so as to be superimposed on the background image at the subsequent reel rotation start timing. "Conversation effect" is a display of character information about the state of the game or the story of the effect in the area inside the display frame at any time from the reel rotation start timing of the game to the operation timing of the bet button of the next game. It should be done. Note that the display may be such that the content of the character information changes at the first reel stop reception timing, the second reel stop reception timing, or the third reel stop reception timing. It is not necessary to change the content of the character information at each of these timings, and the content of the character information can be changed at any timing. The display of the character information may be any as long as it is additionally decorated with respect to the background image. As a specific example in which the content of the character information changes, a line frame image is displayed at the reel rotation start timing, and a line corresponding to the character A is displayed together with the character A image at the first stop timing. After that, at the third stop timing, a new dialog box, an image of the character B, and a line corresponding to the character B may be displayed.

  In this case, at the timing of operating the bet button in the next game, the battle effect (additional battle) does not develop. Note that the game may be configured to develop into a confrontation effect (additional battle) at the operation timing of the bet button in the next game.

<Direction Group 4 “Cut-in Direction”>
In the “cut-in effect” of the effect group 4, the effect is executed at the operation timing of the start lever D50 (for example, a cut-in announcement sound, a cut-in image, and the like). Next, at the same time as the start of rotation of the rotating drum (reel), the effect image is switched from the background image to the effect image for small role announcement. Further, at the first reel stop reception timing to the third reel stop reception timing, the condition device which has been won in the game is displayed using the effect image for small role notification. In addition, it is also possible to sequentially switch and display the effect image for the small role notification at each of the first reel stop reception timing to the third reel stop reception timing.

  In this case, the game may develop into a confrontation effect (additional battle) at the operation timing of the bet button in the next game. In this way, at the time of executing the cut-in effect, the effect is performed at the operation timing of the start lever, and the character effect and the conversation effect are configured such that the effect is not executed at the operation timing of the start lever, as described above, By configuring the game that executes the cut-in effect to be more profitable for the player than the game that executes the character effect or the conversation effect, the player can perform the effect at the operation timing of the start lever. When executed, it can be expected that a profitable event will occur. In a game in which a character effect or a conversation effect is executed, a high profit event does not occur (does not occur in a bonus winning game, does not occur in an AT lottery winning game, does not occur in a rare winning game, etc.). Is also good.

<Direction Group 5 “Showdown” and Group 6 “Additional Battle (for exclusive use during ART)”>
In the “Confrontation Effect” of the effect group 5 and the “additional battle (for exclusive use during ART)” of the group 6, at least two types of characters confront each other between the operation timing of the start lever and the operation timing of the bet button of the next game. Is displayed. In the case where a rare role is won in the immediately preceding game and a cut-in effect is executed, for example, by operating the bet button after the immediately preceding game is over, the “confrontation effect” or the “additional battle (ART) (Only for middle) is notified, and the “play-off effect” or “additional battle (for exclusive use during ART)” may be started from the operation timing of the start lever of the game. Note that the “showdown effect” of the effect group 5 is mainly used for announcing a bonus, and the additional battle (for exclusive use during ART) is mainly used for announcing an additional number of AT games. Further, it is possible to display such that the state of the confrontation gradually changes at each of the first reel stop reception timing to the third reel stop reception timing. For example, an image in which the turn of the confrontation changes at each of the first reel stop reception timing to the third reel stop reception timing can be displayed. Further, the “showdown effect” can be executed in a plurality of consecutive games. It is possible to display an image in which a provisional win or loss is determined for each of the plurality of games, and a final win or loss is determined in the last game. By doing so, it is possible to maintain or enhance the player's expectation over a plurality of continuous games.

<Group 7 “Common Navigation”>
As described above, in the group 7 “common navigation effect”, the operation image of the common navigation effect is displayed in response to the operation of the start lever D50.

  In this case, the game may develop into a confrontation effect (additional battle) at the operation timing of the bet button in the next game.

<Group 8 “Aiming Direction”>
As described above, in the “aiming effect” of the group 8, as described above, when a replay with seven reverse pushes (replay-B) or a replay with seven forward pushes (replay-C) is won, information indicating that sevens are aligned is displayed. Is displayed. Alternatively, if the player has won the push-bell or push-play replay, he or she will display an image such as "?????" It is also possible to execute a pushing order game in which the pushing order (the pushing order with the highest profit) is applied by itself.

  In this case, the background image (stage effect) can be switched at the operation timing of the bet button in the next game, depending on whether the predetermined combination can be stopped and displayed.

<"Push order navigation effect">
In the “push order navigation effect”, as described above, the push order is displayed as an image or a character, or is output as sound at each of the first reel stop reception timing to the third reel stop reception timing.

  In this case, the game may develop into a confrontation effect (additional battle) at the operation timing of the bet button in the next game.

<Start lever operation processing>
Next, FIG. 137 is a subroutine showing a process at the time of start lever operation called and executed in the process of step 2300 in FIG. 135.

  First, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is the AT-in-progress state. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to the AT is the AT-in-progress state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes a start lever-in-process during AT operation described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2800). The determination process in step 2302 is not only when the state related to the AT is the "AT state", but also the "AT state after the fall", "specialized state after the fall", and "state after the bell overflow". Also in this case, the determination is YES.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2302, in other words, when the state related to the AT is not the AT in-progress state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is the special precursor state. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is the special indication state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the start lever specialization processing when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2800).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not the “specialization precursor state”, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the state related to the AT to the “additional specialization state”. Is determined. If Yes in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to the AT is “additional specialization state”, in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs additional addition specialization processing at the time of start lever operation described later. The processing is read out and executed, and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2800).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not the “additional specialization state”, in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the state related to the AT to “the inside of the advantageous BB. It is determined whether or not it is "game". If Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state relating to the AT is “advantageous BB inside middle game”, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the advantage BB inside middle processing subroutine when the start lever is operated. Is called and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2800).

  If No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is not “advantageous BB inside game”, in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the RT state is “RT1”. Is determined. If Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is “RT1”, in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the AT-related state to no push order navigation (push order navigation It is determined whether or not the state is related to an AT that does not occur, such as “low probability state”, “normal BB inside game”, “normal BB state”, and the like. If Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state related to the AT is no push order navigation, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. As described above, the reverse control instruction command, the reverse push avoidance command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoidance command are received by the sub-control board S side, so that it is not a configuration capable of executing the push order navigation effect. When the main control board M sends the AT addition lottery and the command relating to the number of AT addition games is sent to the sub control board S when the AT addition lottery is won, and the sub control board S receives the command. Alternatively, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to the push order navigation.

  If Yes in step 2312, in other words, if the avoidance command has been received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image whose avoidance is to be established as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode group. Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). As described above, in the third embodiment, when the number of games elapses from the state of “RT1” and “at the AT state” and the AT counter value becomes 0, the state shifts to “RT1” and “low-probability state”. If the player has won the replay of seven reverse push whites or seven forward push blacks (before the replay game 04 is stopped and displayed), the additional number of AT games does not occur, so the white seven or black seven Is arranged so that the pushing order that does not become a straight line is navigated. When the number of games elapses from the state of “RT1” and the “at-AT state” and the AT counter value becomes 0 and the state shifts to “RT1” and the “low-probability state”, the state is still “advantage section”. It may be configured such that the pushing order navigation occurs for the pushing order bell, but the pushing order navigation does not occur for the pushing order replay.

  If No in Step 2308, No in Step 2310, or No in Step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an effect image and a background image based on the state related to the AT in Step 2316. (Step 2800).

<Process during AT during start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 138 is a subroutine showing a process during AT during start lever operation called and executed in the process of step 2350 in FIG. 137.

  First, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads information related to the condition device related to the game, checks the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2354, and sets the instruction number in step 2356. Check the command. As described above, in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, such as the “during the AT state”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, If the staging group number is transmitted in a state related to the AT where the pushing order navigation is not executed such as the “probability state” (the game section is also a “normal section”), it is not necessary to transmit the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and transmits the effect group number and the instruction number to the effect group number. Based on such a command, the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell (or the pressing order replay) has been won and the correct pressing order can be grasped. For example, the push order navigation display at the time of executing the push order bell and the push order navigation display of the push order replay are the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by a number, and the display colors related to the numbers are the same). ) Is applicable. Further, in the case of such a configuration, at the time of executing the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the push order navigation display is displayed, and the push order bell is displayed. A different effect image may be displayed between the execution of the push order navigation and the execution of the push order navigation related to the push order replay.

  Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the pushing order bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  If Yes in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order navigation Are displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button corresponds to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case of winning the prize-A1 which is a pressing order bell, a number indicating a pressing order corresponding to the pressing order "left → middle → right" which can obtain the maximum payout number is circled. Display in display mode.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the pushing order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is Is determined. Here, the push order re-game is any of re-game-A and re-game-D1 to D3.

  If Yes in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order replay game as the push order navi display. An image indicating the correct pressing order of the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the pressing order is three choices, the pressing order is information for associating the first stop button with one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the numeral 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

  If No in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. . If Yes in step 2366, in other words, if the avoidance command has been received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to be avoided in the first numerical display mode as the push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described processing of step 2360, 2364, or 2368, and then displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2370.

  Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of remaining AT games is 10 or less. If Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is 10 or less, in step 2374, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the number of remaining AT games in display mode B (display mode described later). (A display mode that is less conspicuous than A).

  Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a forward push instruction command has been received. If Yes in step 2376, in other words, if the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to be avoided as the push order navigation display in the first order. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the number display mode group.

  If No in step 2376, or if the process in step 2378 has been executed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a reverse push instruction command has been received. In step 2380, in the case of Yes, in other words, in the case where the reverse push command has been received, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image to be avoided as the push order navigation display in the first order. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the number display mode group.

  If No in step 2380 or if the process of step 2382 is performed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (the process of step 2800).

  If No in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is 11 or more, in step 2384, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the number of remaining AT games in the display mode A (the display mode described above). (Display mode more conspicuous than B) on the effect display device S40.

  Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a forward push instruction command has been received. In step 2386, if Yes, in other words, if the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2388, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S responds to “left → center → right” as the push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order to be performed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  If No in step 2386, or if the process in step 2388 is executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse pressing instruction command has been received. In step 2390, if Yes, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2392, the CPUSC of the sub control board S responds to “right → middle → left” as a push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order to be performed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  If No in Step 2390 or if the process of Step 2392 has been performed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (Process of Step 2800). As described above, when the number of remaining AT games is small, in other words, when the display of the number of remaining AT games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode that is more prominent than the display mode A, the forward push instruction command or the reverse Even if the push instruction command is received, the effect of displaying "Aim for 7!" Together with the image of the arrow is not executed, and the middle reel in the pushing order in which the white seven and the black seven are not stopped and displayed on the invalid line is the first stop reel. It was configured to execute the push order navigation. With this configuration, in a situation where the number of remaining AT games is small, the number of remaining AT games is displayed in display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player to know that the number of remaining AT games is small. Can be configured so that the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B is not hindered by the image of the arrow or the display of “Aim at 7!”. Similarly, in a situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small, a continuous effect (eg, an AT-related state) (a state relating to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed) continues to be performed to stimulate whether or not to continue. , Battle effect), the image of the arrow and "Aim for 7!" Are not displayed during the execution of the battle effect, so that the visibility of the battle effect is not hindered. be able to. Further, with this configuration, even when the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 becomes 0, and a message is displayed indicating that the battle effect has been defeated and the “at-AT state” is to be ended, the battle effect is being displayed. If the forward push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command has been received, the forward push instruction command or the reverse push is performed at the operation timing or the like of the bet button D220 after the display indicating that the “AT state” is finished. The number of AT-added games based on the instruction command (based on the winning of the forward push black 7 replay or the reverse push white 7 replay) is reported, that is, the fact that the number of AT games has been added in the game that has won the AT-addition lottery is reported. Instead, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a subsequent timing, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

<Special precursor processing at start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 139 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation special precursor sign process called and executed in the process of step 2400 of FIG. 137.

  First, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game in Step 2402, confirms winning / replay winning information related to the game in Step 2404, and sets the instruction number in Step 2406. Check the command. As described above, in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, such as the “during the AT state”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, If the staging group number is transmitted in a state related to the AT where the pushing order navigation is not executed such as the “probability state” (the game section is also a “normal section”), it is not necessary to transmit the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and transmits the effect group number and the instruction number to the effect group number. Based on such a command, the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell (or the pressing order replay) has been won and the correct pressing order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the pushing order bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  If Yes in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as the push order navigation display in step 2410. Are displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second number display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button corresponds to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case where the winning order-winning-A2, which is the pushing order bell, is won, the number indicating the pushing order corresponding to the pushing order “left → right → middle” that can obtain the maximum payout number is surrounded by an asterisk. Display in display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numerical values indicating the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group may include a number. May be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the pushing order bell, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2412 that the condition device of the game is the pushing order replaying game. Is determined. Here, the push order re-game is any of re-game-A and re-game-D1 to D3.

  If Yes in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order replay game as the push order navi display. An image indicating the correct pressing order of the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the pressing order is three choices, the pressing order is information for associating the first stop button with one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the pressing order of the correct answer, a numeral “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number “1” is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the lower right of the center of the effect display device S40 is displayed. The numeral "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the pressing order information is displayed at a position near the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. Judge. If Yes in step 2416, in other words, if a forward push instruction command is received, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to “left → center → right” as the push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in Step 2416, in other words, in the case where the forward push instruction command has not been received, in Step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. to decide. If Yes in step 2420, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as a push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, in the case where the reverse push command has not been received, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. . If Yes in step 2424, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to be avoided in the second numerical display mode as the push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has executed the processing of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, 2426, or in the case of No in step 2424, in step 2428, the CPU displays a background image during AT. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step 2430, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2800).

<Additional processing for start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 140 is a subroutine showing an additional specialization process at the time of start lever operation called and executed in the process of step 2450 of FIG. 137.

  First, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game in Step 2452, confirms winning / re-game winning information related to the game in Step 2454, and sets the instruction number in Step 2456. Check the command. As described above, in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, such as the “during the AT state”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, If the staging group number is transmitted in a state related to the AT where the pushing order navigation is not executed such as the “probability state” (the game section is also a “normal section”), it is not necessary to transmit the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and transmits the effect group number and the instruction number to the effect group number. Based on such a command, the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell (or the pressing order replay) has been won and the correct pressing order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the pushing order bell or the common bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  If Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the 6 selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second number display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button corresponds to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case of winning the prize-A4, which is a pressing order bell, a number indicating a pressing order corresponding to the pressing order “right → left → middle” in which the maximum payout number can be obtained is surrounded by an asterisk. Is displayed in the display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numerical values indicating the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group may include a number. May be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither the pushing order bell nor the common bell, in step 2462 the CPUSC of the sub control board S The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is any of re-game-A and re-game-D1 to D3.

  If Yes in step 2462, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order replay game as a push order navi display. An image indicating the correct pressing order of the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the pressing order is three selections, the first stop button is information corresponding to one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the pressing order of the correct answer, a numeral “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number “1” is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the lower right of the center of the effect display device S40 is displayed. The numeral "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, information on the pressing order is displayed at a position near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives the forward push instruction command It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, in the case where the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to “left → center → right” as the push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the pressing order is a forward pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43, respectively. The direction of the push can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing toward.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, in the case where the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the reverse push instruction command has been received. Is determined. If Yes in step 2470, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2472, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the reverse push navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the pressing order is the reverse pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are a right stop button D43, a middle stop button D42, and a left stop button D41, respectively, in order from right to left. The direction of the push can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing toward.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, in the case where the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. If Yes in step 2474, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image whose avoidance is to be avoided in the first numerical display mode as the push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group. Here, the avoidance command generically refers to both the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether the forward push avoidance command is received or the reverse push avoidance command is received. For example, when the forward push avoidance command is received, a numeral “1” is displayed on the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40 to avoid the forward push “left → middle → right”, Information as if the one-stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2474 described above, in other words, in a case where the avoidance command has not been received, in step 2478, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not perform the push order navigation display.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has performed the processing of steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, 2476, or 2478 described above, in step 2480, the CPUSC displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40. In step 2482, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2800).

<Advantageous BB internal processing during start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 141 is a subroutine showing an additional processing at the time of start lever operation called and executed in the processing of step 2700 in FIG. 137.

  First, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game in Step 2702, confirms winning / replay winning information related to the game in Step 2704, Check the command. As described above, in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, such as the “during the AT state”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, If the staging group number is transmitted in a state related to the AT where the pushing order navigation is not executed such as the “probability state” (the game section is also a “normal section”), it is not necessary to transmit the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and transmits the effect group number and the instruction number to the effect group number. Based on such a command, the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell (or the pressing order replay) has been won and the correct pressing order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (five games) has elapsed since the shift to the advantage BB inside middle game. If Yes in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (five games) has not elapsed since the shift to the advantageous BB internal middle game, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub control board S The condition device of (1) determines whether or not it is a pushing order bell or a common bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  If Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. In the first numerical display mode group, an image indicating the correct pressing order of the 6 selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button corresponds to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case of winning the prize-A4, which is a pressing order bell, a number indicating a pressing order corresponding to the pressing order “right → left → middle” in which the maximum payout number can be obtained is surrounded by an asterisk. Is displayed in the display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numerical values indicating the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group may include a number. May be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither the pushing order bell nor the common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub control board S The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is any of re-game-A and re-game-D1 to D3.

  If Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order replay game as the push order navi display. An image indicating the correct pressing order of the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since the pressing order is three selections, the first stop button is information corresponding to one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the pressing order of the correct answer, a numeral “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number “1” is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the lower right of the center of the effect display device S40 is displayed. The numeral "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, information on the pressing order is displayed at a position near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the command related to 7 replays It is determined whether or not. Here, the forward push instruction command, the reverse push instruction command, the forward push avoidance command, and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as 7 replay commands. If Yes in step 2718, in other words, if a command related to 7 replays is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image whose avoidance is to be performed as the first number in the push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode group.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of the above-described steps 2712, 2716, 2720, or in the case of No in step 2718, in step 2722, displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2722. Then, at step 2724, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on display device S40 in display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2800).

  In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (five games) has elapsed since the shift to the advantageous BB inside middle game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the effect display device S40. Then, the fact that the BB has been won is notified (in this process, the pressing order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of receiving the first torso stop>
Next, FIG. 142 is a subroutine showing a first trunk stop acceptance process executed by being called and executed in the process of step 2500 in FIG. 135.

  Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2502, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a stop button operation based on the correct push order as the first stop. It is determined whether or not.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S The display related to the first stop is deleted, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the order of pressing the correct answer as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S It is determined whether or not the pressing order navigation related to the pressing navigation (the pressing order navigation for instructing to align the forward pressing black replay or the reverse pressing white 7 replay to the invalid line) is being performed. If Yes in step 2508, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub control board S darkly displays the push order navigation (continuously darkly displayed in the game), and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2110). Migrate.

  In the case of No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub control board S deletes all the push order navigation displays, and the push order fails. The effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  In addition, in the third embodiment, the push order navigation can be displayed even in the AT after fall state, the state after the bell overflow, and the special state after the fall. The display can be erased or darkened.

<Process at the time of accepting the second torso stop>
Next, FIG. 143 is a subroutine showing a second-body-stop-accepting process called and executed in the process of step 2550 in FIG. 135.

  Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the pressing order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop. It is determined whether or not there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S 2 The display related to the stop is deleted, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S Erase, a push order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is not being displayed, or in the case of No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, immediately Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  In the third embodiment, the navigation in the push order can be displayed even in the state during the AT after the fall, the state after the bell overflow, and the special state after the fall. Can erase the display.

<Process at the time of accepting the 3rd body stop>
Next, FIG. 144 is a subroutine showing a third-body-stop-accepting process called and executed in the process of step 2600 of FIG. 135.

  Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2602, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. It is determined whether or not there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces an effect as a pressing order successful effect. “GET!” Is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, if No in step 2606, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines “GET Is not displayed.

  If No in step 2602 described above, in other words, if the push order navigation is not being displayed, if No in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, or step 2608 or 2610 Is executed, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT-added games (the command set in step 1517) has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S calculates the difference from the previously received command indicating the number of remaining AT games. It may be configured to determine whether the number of AT-added games has been executed and determine the number of AT-added games, and display the number of AT-added games.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, in the case where a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the effect display device S40 to display the AT additional game. The number is displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). On the other hand, if No in step 2612, in other words, if a command related to the number of AT games has not been received from the main side, in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds AT to the effect display device S40. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110) without displaying the number of games. In addition, as a method of informing the number of AT added games, (1) notifying all of the number of added games by the game, (2) notifying a part of the number of added games by the game, and the remaining number of games after the game (3) The number of added games is not notified in the game, and the game after the game (for example, at the time of winning 7 replays, at the time of winning a common bell (at the time of winning a role that is not originally added), or at a plurality of times. After executing the game (continuous effect), or the game in which the remaining game number of the effect display device S40 is "0", or the bet button D220 operation of the game next to the game in which the game number is "0", the operation of the start lever D50 ).

  In the third embodiment, the navigation in the push order can be displayed even in the state of the AT after the fall, the state after the bell overflow, and the special state after the fall. A push order success effect can be executed.

  Note that the common bell in the special addition state does not display the number of AT-added games, even when stopped in accordance with the push order navigation (the common bell does not perform an AT-addition lottery).

<< Direction content decision processing >>
<Outline of Scenario Decision and Production Decision>
The outline of the scenario decision and the production decision is as follows. In the third embodiment, six scenario lottery tables T1, T2, T3, T6, T7, and T8 are defined as scenario lottery tables. In each of the scenario lottery tables, three scenarios (scenarios 1 to 3) that can be selected and their selection probabilities are defined. First, one scenario lottery table is selected from the six scenario lottery tables based on the state relating to the AT and the RT state. This scenario lottery table is a table for selecting one of the scenarios 1 to 3 by a lottery process.

  Next, using the selected one scenario lottery table, one scenario is selected from the three scenarios based on the condition device won in the game. Each of the scenarios defines an effect lottery table to be used and its order. The effect lottery table is a table for selecting one effect from a plurality of effects by a lottery process. The order of the effect lottery tables is determined according to the determined scenario, and the content of the effect (effect group) of each game is determined by the lottery process using the effect lottery table in accordance with the determined order. In other words, the flow of the effect in a plurality of continuous games can be determined by the scenario.

  In the third embodiment, as shown in scenario 1 of FIG. 147 (B), there is a scenario in which only an effect lottery table used in the first game (the game) is specified. The second and subsequent games of the scenario 1 are defined as “no scenario (none)”. Therefore, when scenario 1 is selected in the first game, the second game in scenario 1 has "no scenario", and the scenario is executed in the determination process of step 4002 described later in the second game. If it is determined that there is no scenario, a process of selecting a scenario is executed in the process of step 4006, and a new scenario is selected. As described above, when the scenario 1 is selected in the game, a new scenario is selected by the lottery process in the next game. With this configuration, when scenario 1 is selected, an effect that is completed in one game can be executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in Scenario 2 and Scenario 3 in FIG. 147 (B), there is also a scenario that defines an effect lottery table used in each of a plurality of games (for example, the first game to the fourth game). When the scenario 2 or 3 is selected, the effect lottery table assigned to each of the multiple games specified in the scenario 2 or 3 is selected in each game, and the content of the effect of each game is displayed. It is determined. With this configuration, when the scenario 2 or 3 is selected, it is possible to execute an effect that continues over a plurality of games. In the case of scenario 2 or 3, since the fifth game is “no scenario”, it is determined that the scenario is being executed in the determination processing in step 4002 described below until the fifth game, and the scenario is executed in the processing in step 4006. Is not executed.

  In the third embodiment, an example is shown in which each of the six scenario lottery tables can select three scenarios. However, the number of scenario lottery tables and the number of scenarios that each scenario lottery table can select are limited to these. Not something. By increasing the number of scenario lottery tables and scenarios, it is possible to diversify the contents of the effects executed as the game progresses. On the other hand, by reducing the number of scenario lottery tables and scenarios, the processing can be lightened, the required storage capacity of the scenario lottery table can be reduced, and the processing can be simplified or speeded up. Hereinafter, specific processing will be described in detail.

<Details of the scenario decision and production decision>
FIG. 145 is a subroutine showing an effect content determination process called and executed in the process of step 2800 in FIG. 135.

  First, in step 4002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a scenario is being executed in the game (whether the scenario is being executed and the scenario is not applicable without a scenario). As described above, in the scenario, the order of the effect lottery table used to determine the content of the effect performed in each of one or a plurality of successive games is defined. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 147 (A), three scenarios 1 to 3 are defined in the scenario lottery table. In each of the scenarios 1 to 3, the number is set for each type of the condition device, and the ease of selection differs depending on the type of the condition device won in the game. 147 (A) shows an example in which the value of the denominator is 256, but the value of the denominator is not limited to this value, and other values such as 65536 may be used. The condition can be appropriately determined according to the type of the condition device, the type of effect, the processing, and the like.

  Note that the scenario lottery table shown in FIG. 147 (A) shows an example of a scenario lottery table selected when the game section is a normal section and the RT state is RT0. Scenario lottery tables selected in other game states are similarly defined corresponding to game sections (normal sections or advantageous sections) and RT states (RT0, RT1, etc.), but are omitted here. Hereinafter, a case where the game section is a normal section and the RT state is RT0 will be described as an example. In the following, rare roles are common bell (winning-B), cherry (winning-C), watermelon A (winning-D), and watermelon B (winning-E). Non-rare roles are other than rare roles. The role of. The rare role is merely an example, and the common bell (winning-B) may be a non-rare role, or the replay-B or replay-C may be a rare role.

  In the example shown in FIG. 147 (A), scenario 1 is most likely to be selected when the condition device is a loss or a bonus non-overlapping (a condition device not overlapping with the bonus) and is a non-rare combination (the number of Value 250). Scenario 1 may also be selected when the condition device is a bonus duplication (the value of the number is 24 or 12), and the condition device is less than the rare combination (the value of the number is 12). It is easy to select when it is a rare combination (the value of the number is 24). Note that scenario 1 is not selected when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and rare combination (the value of the number is 0).

  Further, scenario 2 of the example shown in FIG. 147 (A) is most likely to be selected when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and rare combination (the value of the number is 192). Next, scenario 2 is likely to be selected when the condition device is a bonus duplication (the value of the number is 116 or 122), and the condition device is rarer than the non-rare role (the value of the number is 116). Is slightly easier to select when the value of is 122). Further, in the scenario 2, when the condition device is a loss or a bonus non-overlapping and is a non-rare role, the condition device is most difficult to be selected (the value of the set number is 4).

  Further, scenario 3 in the example shown in FIG. 147 (A) is most likely to be selected when the condition device is a bonus overlap (the value of the number is 116 or 122), and when the condition device is a non-rare combination (the value of the number of Is slightly easier to select when the role is rare (the value of the number is 122) than in 116). Next, scenario 3 is likely to be selected when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and rare combination (the value of the set number is 64), and when the condition device is a loss or a bonus non-overlapping and is a non-rare combination (setting When the value of the number is 2), it is most difficult to select.

  As shown in FIG. 147 (B), in the scenario 1, the effect lottery table A is assigned in the first game (the game). In Scenario 1, an effect lottery table is not allocated in the second and subsequent games (after the next game). That is, scenario 1 is a scenario for determining only the content of the effect in the game, and is not for determining the content of the effect in a plurality of successive games.

  In Scenario 2, an effect lottery table A is allocated in the first game (the game), an effect lottery table B is allocated in the second and third games, and an effect lottery table C is allocated in the fourth game. In the fifth game, the effect lottery table is not allocated. As described above, the scenario 2 is for determining the contents of effects in four consecutive games including the game.

  Further, in scenario 3, in the first game (the game), an effect lottery table A is allocated, in the second and third games, an effect lottery table D is allocated, and in the fourth game, an effect lottery table E is allocated. In the fifth game, the effect lottery table is not allocated. As described above, the scenario 3 is for determining the contents of the effects in four consecutive games including the game.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the scenarios 2 and 3 are for determining the contents of effects in four consecutive games including the game, but the number of consecutive games is limited to four. It is not a thing and may be more or less. When the number is increased, it is possible to execute an effect that gives a sense of narrative, and when the number is reduced, it is possible to promptly switch the contents of the effect in accordance with the selected condition device or the like. As described above, the condition device referred to when determining a scenario is a rare role, and the condition device referred to when determining a scenario includes a bonus (a single bonus or a condition device overlapping with a bonus). ), It is configured to be easily determined as Scenario 2 or Scenario 3. In other words, the condition device referred to when determining a scenario is a rare role, and the condition device referred to when determining a scenario includes a bonus (a single bonus or a condition device overlapping with a bonus). In such a case, it is configured such that an effect based on the same scenario is easily executed over a plurality of games. With this configuration, Scenario 2 or Scenario 3 is determined in the case where there is a possibility that a high profit is expected for a player, such as when winning a rare role, which has a relatively high expectation of winning a bonus or an AT lottery. In addition, it can be configured to easily determine whether or not a high profit is obtained over a plurality of games.

  If No in step 4002, in step 4004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a scenario lottery table determination process (FIG. 146) described later. As described above, in the third embodiment, six scenario lottery tables T1, T2, T3, T6, T7, and T8 are defined as scenario lottery tables, and one scenario lottery is determined by the scenario lottery table determination process. The table is determined.

  Next, in step 4006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines one of the scenarios 1 to 3 using the scenario lottery table determined in step 4004.

  In the case of Yes in step 4002 or when the process of step 4006 is executed, in step 4008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines an effect lottery table. The processing in step 4008 determines an effect lottery table defined in the scenario determined in the processing in step 4006. By the processing of step 4008, it is possible to determine an effect lottery table used in the game.

  Next, in step 4010, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the content of one specific effect by the lottery process using the effect lottery table determined in step 4008, and ends this subroutine. Through the processing in step 4010, the specific effect of the game can be determined. Specifically, by the processing of step 4010, any one of the effect groups 1 to 8 shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) is determined in step 4008. It is determined by the production lottery table.

  In the third embodiment, the determination of the effect contents and the determination of the effect group are synonymous, and each of the effect groups 1 to 8 shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) belongs to the effect group 1. Belongs to "No Direction", directing group 2 belongs to "character directing", directing group 3 belongs to "conversation directing", directing group 4 belongs to "cut-in directing", and directing group 5 belongs to directing group 5. The “showdown effect” belongs, the effect group 6 belongs to “additional battle”, the effect group 7 belongs to “common navigation effect”, and the effect group 8 belongs to “target aiming effect”. Therefore, in the third embodiment, one specific effect content belonging to the effect group is determined by determining any one effect group from the effect groups 1 to 8.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 147, in some cases, condition devices are shown in a group. The group “losing” belongs to the condition device “losing” shown in FIGS. 104 and 105. The group “re-game” includes “re-game-A”, “re-game-B”, “re-game-C”, “re-game-D1 to D3”, “re-game” in the condition devices shown in FIGS. Games-E1 to E3 "and" Re-Games-F1 to F3 ". The group “bell” includes “winning-A1 to A6”, “winning-H”, and “winning-I” of the condition devices shown in FIGS. 104 and 105. The group “rare role” includes “winning-B”, “winning-C”, “winning-D”, and “winning-E” of the condition devices shown in FIGS. 104 and 105. The group “one type BB” includes “one type BB-A”, “one type BB-B”, and “one type BB-C” of the condition devices shown in FIGS. 104 and 105.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 147, each of the grouped condition devices is associated with an effect group number (see FIG. 104). The effect group number 0 corresponds to the group “losing” without bonus duplication. The effect group numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 12, and 13 correspond to the group "replay" without bonus duplication. The effect group number 5 corresponds to the group "Bell" without bonus duplication. The effect group numbers 6, 7, 8, and 9 correspond to the group "rare role" without bonus duplication. In addition, the effect group number 0 corresponds to the group “1 type BB” with the bonus overlap, the effect group number 2 corresponds to the group “replay” with the bonus overlap, and the group “Bell” with the bonus overlap. And the effect group number 5, and the effect group numbers 7, 8, and 9 correspond to the group "rare role" with bonus duplication.

  Furthermore, in the following, the condition devices belonging to the group "rare role" may be collectively referred to simply as the rare role, and the condition devices belonging to the group "replay" and the group "bell" may be collectively referred to simply as the non-rare role. .

  As described above, when the winning / replay winning information related to the game is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / replay winning information can be acquired by an illegal act, Therefore, it is highly likely that the pressing order (reel stopping order) of the game is recognized, and an unreasonably high profit can be obtained. Therefore, when the section is an advantageous section and the condition device is a hand with a pressing order, winning / replay winning information is transmitted to the sub control board S side (see steps 1458 and 1466 in FIG. 120). If the section is a section or a standby section, or if the section is an advantageous section and the condition device is not in a pressing order, the effect group number obtained by masking the winning / replay winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. (See steps 1468 and 1470 in FIG. 120). The bonus winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S in the advantageous section, the normal section, and the standby section as well (see step 1472 in FIG. 120). For this reason, the sub-control board S determines the contents of the effect by referring to either the winning / re-game winning information or the effect group number and the bonus winning information transmitted from the main control substrate M based on the game situation. be able to.

<Scenario lottery table determination process>
FIG. 146 is a subroutine showing a scenario lottery table determination process called and executed in the process of step 4004 in FIG. 145.

  First, in step 4102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a specific freeze execution command transmitted from the main control board M has been received.

  In the case of Yes in step 4102, in step 4104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects a specific freeze time table, and ends this subroutine. In the third embodiment, the freeze effect is executed on the sub-control board S while the operation of the stop button is disabled until a predetermined time elapses after the start lever is operated on the main control board M. The specific freeze effect is configured to be executed only in the “advantage section”. By this step 4104, a specific freeze effect to be executed in the game can be determined. Also, as shown in the figure, when a specific freeze occurs, irrespective of the game state (AT-related state, RT state), referring to the special specific freeze time table, It is configured to determine the contents of the effect in the game.

  If No in step 4102, in step 4106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game section is an advantageous section.

  In the case of Yes in step 4106, in step 4108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is the AT-in-progress state. If Yes in step 4108, that is, if the state related to the AT is the AT-in-progress state, in step 4110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the scenario effect table T3.

  Next, in step 4112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether another scenario lottery table selection condition is satisfied. The determination process of step 4112 is a process of determining whether or not a condition for selecting another scenario lottery table is satisfied according to a game section, an RT state, an AT-related state, and the like. In the third embodiment, other scenario lottery tables are omitted. If Yes in step 4112, in step 4114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects another scenario lottery table, and ends this subroutine.

  If No in step 4108, in step 4116, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is in the AT preparation state 1 or the AT preparation state 2. If Yes in step 4116, in step 4118, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T2.

  If No in step 4116, in step 4120, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is the AT-in-fall state or the specialized fall state. If Yes in step 4120, in step 4122, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the scenario effect table T8.

  If No in step 4120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S moves the processing to step 4112.

  If No in step 4106, in step 4124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the game section is a normal section.

  If Yes in step 4124, in step 4126, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is a fall waiting state.

  If Yes in step 4126, in step 4128, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T6.

  If No in step 4126, in step 4130, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is the low probability state.

  If Yes in step 4130, in step 4132, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the RT state is RT1.

  If Yes in step 4132, in step 4134, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T7.

  If No in step 4132, in step 4136, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T1.

  If No in step 4124 or No in step 4130, the process moves to step 4112.

  By this scenario lottery table determination process, one scenario effect table from six of the scenario effect tables T1, T2, T3, T6, T7, T8 is determined according to a game section, an RT state, an AT-related state, and the like.

<< Example of a production lottery table >>
148 (A) to 148 (C) are tables showing examples of the effect lottery table. Each of the above-described scenarios 1 to 3 is data that defines the time-series order of the effect lottery table used to determine the contents of the effect to be executed in each of a plurality of successive games (see FIG. 147 (B)). )reference). As shown in FIG. 148, the effect lottery table defines various effect contents and their selection probabilities. For each of the effect contents, the number is specified for each type of condition device, and the ease of selection differs depending on the type of the condition device won in the game. The numbers in the tables shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) show an example where the value of the denominator is 256, but the value of the denominator is not limited to this value, and is 65536. And other values, and can be appropriately determined according to the type of the condition device, the type of the effect, the processing, and the like.

  148 (A) shows an effect lottery table A, FIG. 148 (B) shows an effect lottery table B, and FIG. 148 (C) shows an effect lottery table C. As shown in FIG. 147 (B), effect lottery tables D and E are also defined in scenarios 2 and 3, but in FIG. 148, only three effect lottery tables A to C are shown. Each of these effect lottery tables A to E is a table that can be selected when the game section is a normal section and the game state in which the RT state is RT0, and is an effect lottery table that is selected in another game state. There are some, but they are omitted here. Note that at least one of the effect lottery tables A to E may or may not be configured to be selectable even in another game state.

  FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) are effect lottery tables for selecting a plurality of specific effect contents including “no effect” of effect group 1 by lottery processing. As shown in FIG. 148 (A) to FIG. 148 (C), as the specific production contents, “No production” of production group 1, “Character production” of production group 2, “Conversation production” of production group 3, Eight kinds of “cut-in production” of production group 4, “showdown production” of production group 5, “additional battle” of production group 6, “common navigation production” of production group 7, and “targeting production” of production group 8 The production contents are specified. Here, a name such as “character effect” indicates a representative name of effect contents belonging to the effect group. That is, the effect content corresponding to each of the effect groups is not one by one, and as an example, the effect content corresponding to the effect group 2 is not limited to the character effect alone.

  In the third embodiment, each of the effect groups 1 to 8 is configured such that only one specific effect content shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) belongs. However, it may be configured such that a plurality of specific effect contents belong to each effect group. In such a configuration, first, at step 4010 in FIG. 145, an effect group is determined by lottery processing, and then one specific effect content belonging to the effect group may be determined by lottery processing (FIG. Not shown).

<Other production contents>
Further, without being limited to the effect contents shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C), the effect contents (stage effect, notice effect, push order navigation effect) include “W notice”, “small notice”. (Color) "," ambiguous announcement "," continuous production "," sub input button "," stage change "," episode production "," movie production "," BGM change "," hit notification "," development announcement " , "Additional announcement", "announcement sound / lever sound" and the like.

<W Notice>
The “W notification” is an effect mainly for indicating a condition device won in the game, and information indicating at least two condition devices of the condition device won in the game and the other condition devices. Is displayed on the effect display device S40. “W announcement” is a notice effect, and belongs to “cut-in effect” of effect group 4 and the like. For example, in response to the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, information indicating at least two condition devices, ie, the condition device won in the game and the other condition devices, is displayed on the effect display device S40. . The player makes the first stop and the second stop while imagining which condition device is the condition device, and triggered by the third stop, information indicating the condition device won in the game is displayed on the effect display device S40. indicate. As an example, an image (moving image) in which the character A wearing red clothes and the character B wearing yellow clothes are displayed on the effect display device S40 in response to the operation of the start lever, and the effect is displayed. Indicates that the condition device won in the game is a cherry or a bell (push order bell or common bell). When such an effect is performed, the condition device corresponding to the clothes worn by the character B has been won more than the condition device corresponding to the clothes worn by the character A has been won. In such a case, the player may be configured to be more profitable (the probability of winning the bonus or the AT lottery is higher), or two pieces of information (colors) corresponding to the condition device to be displayed in the W notification. May be configured to be able to execute the W notification in the same effect mode. When the W notification is executed in such an effect mode, the relative position is determined when all the W notifications are executed. It may be configured to be highly profitable for the player.

<Notification of small role (color)>
“Small role announcement (color)” is an effect that suggests the condition device won in the game by color, and “small role announcement (color)” is a notice effect, and “cut-in effect” of effect group 4 Belong to. As described above, in the notice effect, the selected condition device, the state of the RT state, the state related to the AT, and the like can be suggested by the display mode such as the color of the item and the goods displayed on the effect display device S40. For example, the character is displayed when the bet button D220 is operated or the start lever D50 is operated, and the goods owned by the character are displayed when the first stop is performed. The color of the goods displayed at this time indicates the winning condition device, and the number of the goods displayed at this time and the timing at which the goods are displayed (third stop or the like) indicate the RT state, the state related to the AT, and the AT. It can be suggested whether or not the lottery has been won.

<Vague notification>
The vague notification is triggered by the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, etc., to execute the above-described conversational effect on the effect display device S40, to turn on the decorative lamp unit D150, and to turn off the backlight S30. It is a directing effect. This ambiguous effect does not necessarily indicate the winning condition device or the current game state, and the effect mode is independent of the condition device, the current RT state, the current AT-related state, and the like that have been won in the game. May be determined. Therefore, the player cannot always obtain information on the won condition device and the current game state by vague notification. On the other hand, the above-described W notification and the small role notification described later are effects for suggesting to the player the condition device or the like that has been won in the game, and are effects that can indicate information that the player wants to know. On the other hand, as described above, the vague presentation differs in that it does not necessarily indicate the condition device won in the game or the current game state.

<Continuous production>
The “continuous effect” is an effect that is continuously performed over a plurality of games, and is preferably an effect in which the content of the effect evolves or changes as the game progresses. In the “continuous production”, the “confrontation production” of the production group 5 and the “additional battle” of the production group 6 are executed over a plurality of games, and the result (the possibility of winning a bonus, the possibility of winning an AT lottery, etc.) of the final game of the continuous production is performed. ). Further, even when the above-described scenario 2 or scenario 3 is determined, a continuous effect can be executed. For example, in the first game (the game), the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 is performed. The first sound effect is output with the operation of. In the next game, the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50 is triggered to output a second sound effect having a different pitch or a different length from the first sound effect. Further, in the next game, the third sound effect having a different pitch or a different length from the first sound effect and the second sound effect is output in response to the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50. I do. In this way, by executing an effect that changes as the game progresses gradually, it is possible to make the player feel unusual unusual feeling and to recognize that a certain gaming state is occurring. Specifically, the degree of expectation to a bonus win or an AT lottery win can be suggested based on the number of consecutive games or a difference in sound effects.

<Sub input button>
The “sub input button” is an effect that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB, which is a staging button that can be operated by the player. Operation), image information, character information, and the like are displayed on the effect display device S40 (the effect is displayed in a display mode different from that when a predetermined operation is not performed on the sub input button SB). At the timing immediately before the timing or the final result is notified, the degree of expectation of the bonus win or the AT win can be suggested. For example, after the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, an image or character information prompting the operation of the sub button is displayed on the effect display device S40 in response to the third stop. When the player operates the sub-button, information indicating a degree of expectation of a bonus win or an AT win is displayed on the effect display device S40.

  In addition, the sub input button SB may be configured to include not only a detection device that detects an operation of the player, but also a driving device (such as a motor or a solenoid). For example, when the player operates the sub input button SB, the driving device causes the sub input button SB to vibrate, and the magnitude and length of the vibration can indicate the degree of expectation of the bonus win or the AT win. It may be so arranged that any profitable event becomes deterministic at the time of oscillation.) Furthermore, by vibrating the sub input button SB in such a manner that the player can visually recognize the sub input button SB at a predetermined timing, for example, the end of the third stop operation, the player can release the sub input button SB The operation can be prompted. That is, an image prompting the operation of the sub input button SB may be displayed on the effect display device S40, or the sub input button SB itself may be vibrated to prompt the player to operate the sub input button SB. Good. The position and the configuration of the sub input button SB are not limited to those in this example. For example, the lower panel D140 may be configured to be operable as the sub input button SB. Do).

  Further, a lamp or the like may be incorporated in the sub input button SB. The degree of expectation of the bonus winning or the AT lottery winning can be indicated by the light emission color, brightness, blinking mode, and the like of the lamp.

<Stage change>
“Stage change” is an effect of changing the background image of the stage effect described above. As described above, the stage effect is an effect performed mainly by displaying a background image or the like. A stage change can be performed by determining one background image from a plurality of predetermined background images based on information on the RT state and the AT. For example, after the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, a background image is determined based on the RT state and the state related to the AT, and the background image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device S40. Since the background image is determined based on the RT state and the state related to the AT, the background image may be changed according to the RT state and the state related to the AT. In addition, you may comprise so that it may be determined based on the condition apparatus won in the said game.

  In addition, during the period from the third stop of the game to the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50 of the next game, the above-mentioned “confrontation effect” is executed, and the result of the confrontation effect of the next game in which the defeat result is defeated With the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, the background image can be determined based on the RT state or the state related to the AT to change the stage. By directing in this manner, the stage can be changed smoothly with a story.

<Episode production>
“Episode effect” is an effect in which character information indicating a story adopted as an effect is displayed on the screen of the effect display device S40. For example, after the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, the background image is determined based on the RT state and the state related to the AT, and the episode is displayed on the screen of the effect display device S40 together with the background image. Note that the “episode effect” may be executed over a plurality of continuous games in addition to the one ended within one game. By increasing the number of consecutive times, the degree of expectation of bonus winning, AT winning, and the like is increased, thereby increasing the player's expectation. Further, character information indicating a story may be displayed on the screen of the effect display device S40 together with the image during the bonus.

<Movie production>
The "movie effect" is an effect performed in one game, and is an effect in which a movie showing an outline of a story or an introduction of a character adopted as an effect is displayed on the screen of the effect display device S40. For example, a predetermined movie is displayed on the screen of the effect display device S40 from the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 of the game to the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 of the next game. can do. For example, one movie can be determined from a plurality of predetermined movies based on information on the RT state and AT, and displayed on the screen of the effect display device S40.

<BGM change>
“BGM change” is an effect of changing the BGM output from the speaker S20. BGM used in one game or BGM used in a plurality of consecutive games may be used. In response to the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, the BGM is determined based on the condition device, the RT state, and the state related to the AT determined in the game, and the determined BGM is output from the speaker S20. . Since the BGM is determined based on the condition device, the RT state, and the state related to the AT determined in the game, the BGM determined by the condition device, the RT state, and the state related to the AT determined in the game may change. is there. It is also possible to prepare a BGM without a song and a BGM with a song, and if the number of remaining AT games is large (for example, 50 or more), a BGM with a song can be selected. With such a configuration, when the player recognizes that BGM with a song is being output, it can recognize that a large number of AT games remain.

<Notification of hit>
The “hit notification” is an effect of displaying an image indicating the expected degree of the bonus win or the AT win on the effect display device S40, or outputting a sound effect indicating the expected degree from the speaker S20. In particular, when a bonus or AT win is determined, by using an image (rainbow-colored item or goods, etc.) or a sound effect (a sound effect such as “Cuin”) different from other images and sound effects, The player can be satisfied.

<Development announcement>
The “development announcement” is an effect that is executed after a continuous effect has been executed over a plurality of consecutive games, for example. For example, when a rare role is elected, the rare role is elected. An example of an effect mode in which a continuous effect is executed from the game that has been performed, “Evolution!” Is displayed on the effect display device S40 at the third stop operation timing after several games, and a confrontation effect and the like are executed from the next game.

  The “addition notification” is an effect that is executed based on the determination of the addition of the number of AT games when the state relating to the AT is a game state in which the number of AT games can be added, such as the state during AT. For example, after the third stop in the game that has been won in addition to the AT game number, the effect display device S40 displays information indicating that the additional game number has been determined together with the number of added games. Further, it can be performed together with the “sub input button SB” described above. For example, when 10 games are added, the number of games is displayed on the effect display device S40 as it is, and when 50 games are added, the “sub input button SB” is prompted after the third stop button is operated. When the information is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the player operates the "sub input button SB", such as when the number of games is displayed on the effect display device S40, such as when the player has a high profit ( When the number of added games is relatively large), the operation of the sub input button SB may be prompted.

  The “lever notice sound” is an effect of outputting a sound when the reel is rotated in response to the operation of the start lever D50. When the start lever D50 is operated, the type of the lever notice sound is determined based on the condition device determined in the game, the RT state, and the state related to the AT, and the lever notice sound is output when the reel rotates. The output timing of the lever notice sound may be output at a timing that is later than the normal timing by a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds). When the lever notice sound is output in this manner, the expectation of higher profit may be higher than when the lever notice sound is output at normal timing.

  In particular, by determining the tone to be output, the delay time until the output, and the like according to the RT state and the state related to the AT, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation.

  The selection of the effect contents defined in the effect lottery table A shown in FIG. 148 (A) is configured as follows.

  When the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and a loss or a non-rare role, “no effect” is most likely to be selected (the value of the number is 128), and then “character effect” (the number of The value is 64), and it is easy to select in the order of “conversation effect” (the value of the number is 62), and other effects are not selected (the value of the number is 0).

  If the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and rare role, "cut-in effect" is most likely to be selected (the number of values is 128), and then "character effect" and "conversation effect" (position Numerical value 64) is easy to select, and other effects are not selected (numeric value is 0).

  In the case where the condition device is a bonus duplication and is a non-rare role, “conversation effect” is most likely to be selected (the value of the numerical value is 192), and then “cut-in effect” (the value of the numerical value is 32), "Character effect" (number of values is 16) and "no effect" are likely to be selected in this order, and other effects are not selected (value of number is 0).

  If the condition device is a bonus duplication and the role is rare, “cut-in effect” is most likely to be selected (the number of values is 192), and then “conversation effect” (value of the number is 32). ), "Character effect" (numeric value is 16) and "no effect" in that order, and other effects are not selected (numeric value is 0).

  As described above, when the effect lottery table A shown in FIG. 148 (A) is selected, if a bonus is duplicated, either the “conversation effect” or the “cut-in effect” is most likely to be performed (the number of characters). Value 192). If "conversation effect" is selected, the condition device is likely to be a bonus duplication and a non-rare role. If “cut-in effect” is selected, the condition device is likely to be a bonus duplication and a rare role.

  Next, if bonuses do not overlap, either “no effect” or “cut-in effect” is most likely to be performed (the value of the number is 128). When “no effect” is selected, it is highly possible that the condition device is non-overlapping bonus and is a non-rare role. Also, when “cut-in effect” is selected, it is highly possible that the condition devices are non-overlapping bonuses and are rare.

  As described above, this is the case where the effect lottery table A shown in FIG. 148 (A) is selected, and when the “cut-in effect” is selected, the condition device determines whether the bonus is non-overlapping or bonus non-overlapping. It is likely to be a role.

  The selection of an effect defined in the effect lottery table B shown in FIG. 148 (B) is configured as follows.

  In all cases where the condition device is a bonus overlap and a bonus non-overlap, only the “character effect” (the number of values is 256) is selected, and the other effects are not selected (numbers). Is 0).

  The effect selection specified in the effect lottery table C shown in FIG. 148 (C) is configured as follows.

  In all cases where the condition device is a bonus overlap and a bonus non-overlap, only the “confrontation effect” (the number of values is 256) is selected, and other effects are not selected (number of values). Is 0).

<< Example of the progress of the production >>
FIG. 149 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect that proceeds by the effect content determination process described above.

<First game>
As shown in FIG. 149, first, in the first game, the result of the lottery process is a loss. In the first game, a scenario has not been selected yet (scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149), it is determined that the scenario has not been executed in step 4002 in FIG. 145, and in step 4004 in FIG. The scenario lottery table corresponding to the relevant state and the RT state is selected, and in step 4006 of FIG. 145, scenario 1 is selected from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage of FIG. 149). Then, in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 149), and in step 4010 of FIG. It is determined to be none (stage of the effect lottery in FIG. 149). In this first game, since the scenario 1 has been selected, the second game is determined to have no scenario (the stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<2nd game>
In the second game, the result of the lottery process is replay-A. Also, in the second game, a scenario has not been selected yet (scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149), it is determined that the scenario has not been executed in step 4002 in FIG. 145, and in step 4004 in FIG. The scenario lottery table corresponding to the relevant state and the RT state is selected, and in step 4006 in FIG. 145, scenario 1 is selected again from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage in FIG. 149). Next, in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 149), and in step 4010 of FIG. It is determined that there is none (stage of the effect lottery in FIG. 149). Since scenario 1 is also selected in the second game, it is determined that there is no scenario in the third game (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<3rd game>
In the third game, the result of the lottery process is winning-A1. Also, in the third game, a scenario has not yet been selected (scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149), it is determined in step 4002 in FIG. 145 that the scenario has not been executed, and in step 4004 in FIG. The scenario lottery table corresponding to the relevant state and the RT state is selected, and in step 4006 of FIG. 145, scenario 1 is selected from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage of FIG. 149). Next, in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 149), and in step 4010 of FIG. An effect is determined (stage of effect lottery in FIG. 149). Since scenario 1 is also selected in the third game, it is determined that there is no scenario in the fourth game (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<4th game>
In the fourth game, the result of the lottery process is winning-C. In the fourth game, a scenario has not been selected yet (scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149), it is determined that the scenario has not been executed in step 4002 in FIG. 145, and in step 4004 in FIG. The scenario lottery table according to the status and the RT state is selected, and in step 4006 in FIG. 145, scenario 2 is selected from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage in FIG. 149). Next, in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 149), and in step 4010 of FIG. It is determined to be an in-production (the production lottery stage in FIG. 149). In the fourth game, due to the selection of Scenario 2, the fifth game is determined as the production lottery table B, the sixth game is determined as the production lottery table B, and the seventh game is determined as the production lottery table C. It is determined that there is no scenario in the eighth game (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<Fifth game>
In the fifth game, the result of the lottery process is a loss. Also, in the fifth game, since scenario 2 has already been selected (stage of presence / absence of scenario in FIG. 149), it is determined that the scenario is being executed in step 4002 in FIG. 145, and steps 4004 and 4006 in FIG. The process is not executed, and in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table B is selected (stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 145). In step 4010 of FIG. In the game, the character effect is determined (stage of the effect lottery in FIG. 149). In this fifth game, since the scenario 2 is selected in the fourth game, the effect lottery table up to the seventh game is determined (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (FIG. 147 (B)). reference).

<Sixth game>
In the sixth game, the result of the lottery process is replay-A. Also, in the sixth game, since scenario 2 has already been selected (stage of presence / absence of scenario in FIG. 149), it is determined that the scenario is being executed in step 4002 of FIG. 145, and the steps 4004 and 4006 of FIG. The process is not executed. In step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table B is selected (stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 149). In step 4010 of FIG. In the game, it is determined to be a character effect (stage of effect lottery in FIG. 149). Since the scenario 2 is selected in the fourth game also in the sixth game, the effect lottery table up to the seventh game is determined (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (FIG. 147 (B) reference).

<7th game>
In the seventh game, the result of the lottery process is winning-B. In the seventh game, since scenario 2 has already been selected (stage of presence / absence of scenario in FIG. 149), it is determined that the scenario is being executed in step 4002 in FIG. 145, and the steps 4004 and 4006 in FIG. The process is not executed, and in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table C is selected (stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 149). In step 4010 of FIG. In the game, it is determined to be a confrontation effect (stage of effect drawing in FIG. 149). Note that, even in the seventh game, since the scenario 2 is selected in the fourth game, the effect lottery table up to the seventh game is determined (the stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (FIG. 147 (B)). reference).

<8th game>
In the eighth game, the result of the lottery process is a loss. In the eighth game, scenario 2 has already been selected, but in the eighth game there is no scenario (see the fifth game in scenario 2 in FIG. 147 (B)) (scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149). In step 4002 of FIG. 145, it is determined that the scenario has not been executed. In step 4004 of FIG. 145, a scenario lottery table corresponding to the state relating to the AT and the RT state is selected, and in step 4006 of FIG. Is selected from the list (scenario lottery stage in FIG. 149). In step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (the stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 149). In step 4010 of FIG. 145, the effect is not produced in the eighth game by the lottery process using the effect lottery table A. It is determined (stage of the production lottery in FIG. 149). In the eighth game, since the scenario 1 is selected, it is determined that the ninth game has no scenario (the stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<9th game>
In the ninth game, the result of the lottery process is replay-A. In the ninth game, no scenario has been selected (scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149), it is determined in step 4002 in FIG. 145 that the scenario has not been executed, and in step 4004 in FIG. 145, and a scenario lottery table corresponding to the RT state is selected. At step 4006 in FIG. 145, scenario 1 is selected from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage in FIG. 149). Next, in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (stage of the effect lottery table of FIG. 149), and in step 4010 of FIG. It is determined to be none (stage of the effect lottery in FIG. 149). Since the scenario 1 is also selected in the ninth game, it is determined that there is no scenario in the tenth game (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<10th game>
In the tenth game, the result of the lottery process is winning-A1. In the tenth game, no scenario has been selected (scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149), and it is determined in step 4002 in FIG. 145 that the scenario has not been executed. In step 4004 in FIG. 145, and a scenario lottery table corresponding to the RT state is selected. At step 4006 in FIG. 145, scenario 1 is selected from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage in FIG. 149). Next, in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected, and in step 4010 of FIG. 145, any effect content is determined by the lottery process using the effect lottery table A.

<<< Example of effect selection result >>>
FIGS. 150 (A) to 155 (A) show the above-described eight types of “no effect”, “character effect”, “conversation effect”, “cut-in effect”, “showdown effect”, “additional battle (during ART) This is an effect selection probability table indicating the probability that the effects of “dedicated)”, “common navigation effect” and “target effect” are selected corresponding to each of the condition devices.
FIGS. 150 (B) to 155 (B) are scenario selection probability tables showing the probability that the above-described three scenarios are selected corresponding to each of the condition devices. FIG. 150 (A) and FIG. 150 (B) to FIG. 155 (A) and FIG. 155 (B) show the game section, the RT state, and the state relating to the AT, focusing on six representative types. It is a table. In the following, it is assumed that the setting is set to setting 1.

  FIGS. 150 (A) and (B) show an effect when the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state regarding the AT is a low probability state (hereinafter, referred to as a first target game state). It is a selection probability table and a scenario selection probability table. FIGS. 151 (A) and (B) show a case where the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is AT preparation state 2 (hereinafter, referred to as a second target game state). It is an effect selection probability table and a scenario selection probability table. FIGS. 152 (A) and (B) show an effect when the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state relating to the AT is the AT in-state (hereinafter, referred to as a third target game state). It is a selection probability table and a scenario selection probability table. FIGS. 153 (A) and (B) show effects in a case where the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to the AT is a fall waiting state (hereinafter, referred to as a fourth target game state). It is a selection probability table and a scenario selection probability table. FIGS. 154 (A) and (B) show a case where the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1 (the state has been shifted to RT1 by itself), and the state relating to the AT is a low probability state (hereinafter, the first state). 5 (referred to as a target gaming state) and a scenario selection probability table. FIGS. 155 (A) and (B) show a case where the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to the AT is the AT state after the fall (hereinafter, referred to as a sixth target game state). Is an effect selection probability table and a scenario selection probability table.

  The numerical values indicating the probabilities shown in each of FIGS. 150 (A) and (B) to FIGS. 155 (A) and (B) are set to the setting 1, and the first target game state to the sixth It is a value indicating the result of totaling each of the target gaming states.

<< First target game state >>
As described above, in the first target game state, the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to the AT is the low probability state. FIG. 150 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the first target gaming state. FIG. 150B is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the first target gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 150 (B), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and is a loss or a non-rare role, scenario 1 is most easily selected, and scenarios 2 and 3 may be selected. . When the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and rare combination, scenario 2 is most likely to be selected, and then scenario 3 is easily selected, but scenario 1 is not selected. If the condition device is a bonus duplication and a non-rare role, either scenario 2 or 3 is most likely to be selected, and then scenario 1 is more likely to be selected. If the condition device is a bonus duplication and a rare role, scenario 2 is most easily selected, then scenario 3 is easily selected, and scenario 1 may be selected.

  As shown in FIG. 150 (A), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and loses or a non-rare role, “no effect” is most likely to be selected, and then “character effect”, “conversation” The effect is likely to be selected in the order of “effect”, and “confrontation effect” may be selected, but other effects are not selected. When the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and rare role, one of “character production”, “conversation production”, “cut-in production”, and “showdown production” is selected with the same probability, but other Is not selected. When the condition device is a bonus duplication and a losing or non-rare role, "showdown effect" is most likely to be selected, and then "conversation effect" is likely to be selected, and "no effect" or "character effect" May be selected, but no other effect is selected. When the condition device is a bonus duplication and a rare role, "cut-in production" or "showdown production" is most easily selected, and then "conversation production" is easily selected, and "no production" or "character" In some cases, "effect" is selected, but no other effect is selected.

<<< second target game state >>>
As described above, in the second target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state relating to the AT is the AT preparation state 2. FIG. 151 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the second target gaming state. FIG. 151 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the second target gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (B), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping, and loses, a non-rare role, and a rare role, only scenario 1 is selected, and other scenarios 2 and 3 are selected. There is no case. If the condition apparatus is a bonus duplication and a loss, a non-rare role, and a rare role, scenario 1 is most likely to be selected, and then scenario 2 or 3 is more likely to be selected.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (A), when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and has a lost or non-rare role, only “no effect” is selected, and no other effects are selected. . If the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a rare role, only “common navigation effect” is selected, and no other effect is selected. If the condition device is a bonus duplication and a losing or non-rare role, only "no effect" is selected, and no other effects are selected. If the condition device is a bonus duplication and a rare role, only the “common navigation effect” is selected, and no other effect is selected.

<<< third target game state >>>
As described above, in the third target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to the AT is the AT state. FIG. 152 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the third target gaming state. FIG. 152 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the third target gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (B), if the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and is a lost or non-rare role, scenario 1 is most likely to be selected, and then scenario 2 and scenario 3 are selected in that order. Easy to be. When the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and rare combination, scenario 2 is most likely to be selected, and then scenario 3 is easily selected, but scenario 1 is not selected. If the condition device is a bonus duplication and a losing or non-rare role and a rare role, scenario 2 is most likely to be selected, then scenario 3 is more likely to be selected, and scenario 1 may be selected.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (A), when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a lost or non-rare role, “no effect” is most likely to be selected, and then “conversation effect” is selected. It is easy to select “Confrontation Effect”, but no other effect is selected. When the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and rare role, one of “cut-in effect”, “showdown effect”, and “additional battle (for exclusive use during ART)” is selected with the same probability and “conversation effect” May be selected, but no other effect is selected. If the condition device is a bonus duplication and it is a loss or a non-rare role, "No effect" is most likely to be selected, then select "Conversation effect", "Cut-in effect", "Confrontation effect". , But no other production is selected. If the condition device is a bonus duplication and a rare role, one of “cut-in effect”, “showdown effect”, and “additional battle (for exclusive use during ART)” is selected with the same probability, and then “effect” Either “none” or “conversation effect” is likely to be selected with the same probability, but no other effect is selected.

<<< fourth target game state >>>
As described above, in the fourth target game state, the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to the AT is a fall waiting state. FIG. 153 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the sixth target gaming state. FIG. 153 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the sixth target gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (B), when the condition devices are non-overlapping bonuses, and lose, non-rare, and rare, only scenario 1 is selected and other scenarios 2 and 3 are selected. There is no case. If the condition device is a bonus duplication and a loss, a non-rare role, and a rare role, scenario 2 is most likely to be selected, and then either scenario 1 or scenario 3 is likely to be selected with the same probability.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (A), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and loses or a non-rare role, “no effect” is most likely to be selected, and then “character effect” or “conversation” One of the effects is likely to be selected with the same probability, but the other effects are not selected. If the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and rare role, or if the bonus is a bonus non-losing non-rare role or a rare role, the “cut-in effect” is most likely to be selected, and then the “character” Either “effect” or “conversation effect” is likely to be selected with the same probability, but other effects are not selected.

<<< fifth target gaming state >>>
As described above, in the fifth target game state, the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1 (the state has been shifted to RT1 by itself), and the state related to the AT is a low probability state. FIG. 154 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the fifth target gaming state. FIG. 154 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the fifth target gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (B), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and loses or a rare combination, only scenario 1 is selected, and scenarios 2 and 3 are not selected. If the condition device is a bonus duplication and a loss or a non-rare role, either scenario 2 or 3 is most likely to be selected, and then scenario 1 is more likely to be selected. If the condition device is a bonus duplication and a rare role, scenario 2 is most easily selected, then scenario 3 is easily selected, and scenario 1 may be selected.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (A), when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus and loses, “no effect” is most likely to be selected, and then “character effect”, “conversation effect” , It is easy to select, and there is a case where “showdown effect” is selected, but other effects are not selected. If the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and a non-rare role, only the "target effect" is selected, and no other effects are selected. When the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and rare role, one of “character production”, “conversation production”, “cut-in production”, and “showdown production” is selected with the same probability, but other Is not selected. When the condition device is a bonus duplication and a losing or non-rare role, "showdown effect" is most likely to be selected, and then "conversation effect" is likely to be selected, and "no effect" or "character effect" May be selected, but no other effect is selected. When the condition device is a bonus duplication and a rare role, "cut-in production" or "showdown production" is most easily selected, and then "conversation production" is easily selected, and "no production" or "character" In some cases, "effect" is selected, but no other effect is selected.

<<< sixth target game state >>>
As described above, in the sixth target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to the AT is a fall-in-AT state. FIG. 155 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the sixth target gaming state. FIG. 155 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the sixth target gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (B), when the condition devices are the bonus non-overlap and the bonus overlap, and are the loss, the non-rare role, and the rare role, only the scenario 1 is selected, and the other scenarios 2 and 3 are selected. Is not selected.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (A), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and loses or a non-rare role, only “no effect” is selected, and no other effects are selected. . If the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and rare role, "additional battle (for exclusive use during ART)" is most likely to be selected, and then either "cut-in effect" or "showdown effect" is the same. It is easy to select by probability, and then "conversation effect" is easy to select, but no other effect is selected. If the condition device is a bonus duplication and it is a lost or non-rare role, "No effect" is most likely to be selected, then select "Conversation effect", "Showdown effect", Cut-in effect , But no other production is selected. If the condition device is a bonus duplication and is a rare role, either “cut-in effect” or “confrontation effect” is likely to be selected with the same probability, and then “no effect” or “conversation effect” Either one is likely to be selected with the same probability, but no other effects are selected.

<<<< Comparison of target game state >>>>
Below,
(Comparative 1) First target gaming state and second target gaming state (Comparative 2) Second target gaming state and third target gaming state (Comparative 3) First target gaming state and fourth target gaming state State (Comparison 4) The probability that an effect is executed is compared for five combinations of the target game state of the third target game state and the sixth target game state. Note that, in this comparison, it is assumed that BB is excluded and that the setting is set to 1. Further, as described above, the condition devices belonging to the group “rare role” are simply referred to as “rare role”, and the condition devices belonging to the group “replay” and the group “bell” are simply referred to as “non-rare role”. The condition devices belonging to the group “one type BB” may be simply referred to as “one type BB” or “single one type BB”. The group “one type BB” includes “one type BB-A”, “one type BB-B”, and “one type BB-C”, and may be referred to as “single bonus”.

<< (Comparative 1) First Target Game State and Second Target Game State >>
<First target game state>
First, the probability that an effect is executed in the first target game state is
(A) When the condition device is “rare role” with no bonus overlap (b) When the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with no bonus overlap (c) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and “ (D) Calculate for each of the cases where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”. As described above, in the first target game state, the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to the AT is the low probability state.

<(A) When the condition device is a “rare role” with no bonus overlap>
The winning rate at which the condition device when the game is executed in the first target game state becomes “rare role” due to non-overlapping bonus is added to the number of all conditional devices belonging to the bonus non-overlapping group “rare role”. It is obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (1-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105). In equation (1-1), the number 3204 of “winning-B”, the number 1000 of “winning-C”, the number 700 of “winning-D”, and the number of “winning-E” are given. The number 300 was used (refer to the column numbers of RT0 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the first target game state, if the condition device is a bonus with no bonus and is a “rare role”, “no effect” is not selected, and the effect is executed with a 100% probability (FIG. 150 bonus non-overlapping, see "Rare role" section). As shown in FIG. 150, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonuses, “character production” (25%), “conversation production” (25%), “cut-in production” (25%), “showdown” Either effect of “effect” (25%) is selected. Therefore, in the case of the first target gaming state, when the condition device is a bonus and the bonus is “rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is:
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 Formula (1-2)
Becomes Here, the result of Expression (1-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping>
The winning rate at which the condition device when the game is executed in the first target game state is “losing” and “non-rare role” due to non-overlapping bonuses is the winning rate of all the members belonging to the group “losing” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the number of condition devices. In particular,
(65536-367-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 Formula (1-3)
Becomes Here, the numerical value “367” in the expression (1-3) is the sum of the number of units that the condition device that becomes the single bonus wins and the number of units that the condition device that overlaps with the bonus wins.

  The sum of the numbers to be won by the condition device which becomes the single bonus is the number 40 of “1 type BB-A”, the number 40 of “1 type BB-B”, and the number of “1 type BB-C”. This is the sum of Expression 40 and 120 (= 40 + 40 + 40) (see the column numbers of the row RT0 in FIG. 105).

  In addition, the number of wins of the condition device that overlaps with the bonus is a number of 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-C”, a number of 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-D”, and “1 type BB-B + winning-D”. Numerical value 40 of "BB-B + winning-E", numerical value 40 of "1 type BB-C + winning-C", numerical number 40 of "1 type BB-C + winning-D", and "1 type BB- The sum 240 (= 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40) of the numeral 40 and the numeral 40 of "C + win-E" (see the numeral in the row of RT0 in FIG. 105) and the numeral 1 of "1 type BB-B + replay-A" Numerical value 1 of "1 type BB-B + winning-A1", numerical value 1 of "1 type BB-B + winning-A2", and numerical value 1 of "1 type BB-B + winning-A3", " The sum 7 of the numerical value 1 of the type 1 BB-B + winning-A4, the numerical value 1 of the type 1 BB-B + winning-A5, and the numerical value 1 of the type 1 BB-B + winning-A6 = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) and a (sum 247 (= 240 + 7 with reference numeral input columns of RT0 in Fig. 105)).

  Therefore, the numerical value “367” of the equation (1-3) can be calculated by the sum of the setting number 120 that is won by the condition device that becomes the single bonus and the setting number 247 that is won by the condition device overlapping with the bonus. Also, the numerical value “5204” in Expression (1-3) is the result of Expression (1-1). As shown in Expression (1-3), by calculating “65536-367-5204”, the number of condition devices that are to be a single bonus and the number of condition devices that are overlapped with the bonus are to be calculated. The number of “rare combination” can be excluded, and the number of cases where the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare combination” with bonus non-overlap can be calculated.

  Further, in the first target game state, when the condition devices are “losing” and “non-rare role” due to non-overlapping bonus, both effects are executed with a probability of 50% (the bonus non-overlapping state in FIG. 150). (Refer to the column of "Loss" and "Non-rare role" in duplication.) As shown in FIG. 150, the probability of “no effect” for each of the group “losing”, the group “replay”, and the group “bell” is 50%, and the probability of performing any effect is 100%. -50 = 50. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 150, in each of the group “losing”, the group “replay”, and the group “bell”, “character production” (25%), “conversation production” (24%), “confrontation” Either effect of “effect” (1%) is selected.

Therefore, in the case of the first target gaming state, when the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping, the probability of performing some effect is
59965/65536 × 50/100
$ 29983/65536 Formula (1-4)
Becomes Here, the result of equation (1-3) (“59965/65536”) was used.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus>
From the above, the probability that any effect is executed when the condition device is non-bonus non-overlap in the first target gaming state is calculated from Expression (1-2) and Expression (1-4) from 5204/65536 + 29983/65536.
= 35187/65536 Formula (1-5)
Becomes

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "rare role">
The winning rate at which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes a “rare role” when the game is executed in the first target game state is obtained by adding the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to the bonus overlap group “rare role”. Obtained by: In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 Formula (1-6)
Becomes In the expression (1-6), the first “80” is the sum of the numeral 40 of “1 type BB−B + winning−C” and the numerical number 40 of “1 type BB−C + winning−C”. The next “80” is the sum of the number 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-D” and the number 40 of “1 type BB-C + winning-D”, and the last “80” is , BB-B + win-E ”and the 40 of“ one BB-C + win-E ”(see the row of RT0 in FIG. 105).

  Further, in the first target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a “rare role”, the effect is executed with a probability of 93.75%. That is, as shown in FIG. 150, the probability of “no effect” in the group “rare role” is 6.25%, and the probability of performing any effect is 100−6.25 = 93.75. . Specifically, as shown in the column of “rare role” in the bonus duplication of FIG. 150, “character effect” (6.25%), “conversation effect” (12.5%), “cut-in effect” ( 37.5%) or any of the effects of “showdown effect” (37.5%).

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the first target gaming state and is a “rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is calculated using Expression (1-6),
240/65536 × 93.75 / 100
= 225/65536 Formula (1-7)
Becomes

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”>
The winning rate at which the condition device when the game is executed in the first target gaming state overlaps with the bonus and becomes “1 type BB” and “non-rare role” is the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role”. Is obtained by adding the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 Formula (1-8)
Becomes In the expression (1-8), the first “120” is a numeral 40 of “1 type BB-A”, a numeral 40 of “1 type BB-B”, and a “1 type BB-C”. The next “1” is the number 1 of “1 type BB-B + replay-A”, and the last “6” is “1 type BB-B + winning A1”. Is the sum 6 of the numbers 1 of "1 type BB-B + winning A6" (see the numbers in the row of RT0 in FIG. 105).

  Further, in the first target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”, the effect is executed with a probability of 93.75%. That is, as shown in FIG. 150, the probability of “no effect” for the group “1 type BB”, the probability of “no effect” for the group “replay”, and the probability of “no effect” for the group “Bell” are: Is also 6.25%, and the probability of performing any effect is 100−6.25 = 93.75. Specifically, as shown in the column of “1 type BB” and “non-rare role” in the bonus duplication of FIG. 150, each of the group “1 type BB”, the group “re-game”, and the group “bell” is “ One of the character effects (6.25%), the conversation effect (12.5%), and the confrontation effect (75%) is selected.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the first target gaming state and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability that some effect is executed is
127/65536 × 93.75 / 100
$ 119/65536 Formula (1-9)
Becomes

<Probability that some effect is executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the first target gaming state is determined by the formulas (1-7) and (1-9) from 225/65536 + 119/65536.
= 344/65536 Formula (1-10)
Becomes

<Probability that an effect will be executed in the first target gaming state>
From the above, the probability that some effect is executed in the first target gaming state is calculated from the equations (1-5) and (1-10) as follows.
35187/65536 + 344/65536
= 35531/65536 Formula (1-11)
Becomes

<Second target game state>
Next, the probability that an effect is executed in the second target gaming state is determined in the same manner as in the first target gaming state.
(A) When the condition device is “rare role” with no bonus overlap (b) When the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with no bonus overlap (c) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and “ (D) Calculate for each of the cases where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”. As described above, in the second target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state relating to the AT is the AT preparation state 2.

<(A) When the condition device is a “rare role” with no bonus overlap>
When the game is executed in the second target game state, the winning rate at which the condition device becomes “rare role” due to non-overlapping bonus is added to the number of all condition devices belonging to the bonus non-overlapping group “rare role”. It is obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (2-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105). In addition, in Expression (2-1), similarly to Expression (1-1), the numeral 3204 of “winning-B”, the numeral 1000 of “winning-C”, and the numeral of “winning-D” 700 and the number 300 of "winning-E" were used (see the numbers in the row of RT0 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the second target gaming state, if the condition device is a bonus and the bonus is “rare role”, “no effect” is not selected, and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (FIG. 151 bonus non-overlapping, see "Rare Role" section). As shown in FIG. 151, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonus, "common navigation effect" is always selected. Therefore, in the case of the second target game state, when the condition device is the bonus non-overlapping and the “rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is:
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 Formula (2-2)
Becomes Here, the result of Expression (2-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping>
When the game is executed in the second target game state, the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping, and the winning rate of “losing” and “non-rare role” is all conditions belonging to the group “losing” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the numbers of the devices. In particular,
(65536-367-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 Formula (2-3)
Becomes Here, the numerical value “367” in the expression (2-3) is the sum of the number of units that the condition device that becomes the single bonus wins and the number of units that the condition device that overlaps with the bonus wins. In addition, the numerical value “367” can be calculated in the same manner as in the expression (1-3) of the first target gaming state (see the numbers in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105).

  In the second target game state, when the condition devices are “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping, the probability of “no effect” is 100% for all (see FIG. 151) The effect is not executed when the bonus is not overlapped (refer to the columns of "losing" and "non-rare role").

Therefore, in the case of the second target game state, when the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping, the probability of performing any effect is as follows:
59965/65536 × 0/100
= 0/65536 Formula (2-4)
Becomes

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect is executed when the condition device is non-bonus non-overlapping in the second target gaming state is calculated from Expression (2-2) and Expression (2-4) from 5204/65536 + 0/65536.
= 5204/65536 Formula (2-5)
Becomes

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "rare role">
The winning rate at which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes a “rare role” when the game is executed in the second target game state is obtained by adding the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to the bonus overlap group “rare role”. Obtained by: In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 Formula (2-6)
Becomes Note that this equation (2-6) can be calculated in the same manner as equation (1-6) for the first target game state (see the numbers in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105).

If the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the second target gaming state and is a “rare role”, “no effect” is not selected, and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (FIG. (Refer to the column "Rare role" in 151 bonus duplication). Specifically, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus, only “common navigation effect” is selected. Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the second target game state and is a “rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is:
240/65536 × 100/100
= 240/65536 Formula (2-7)
Becomes Here, the result of equation (2-6) (“240/65536”) was used.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”>
The winning rate at which the condition device when executing the game in the second target gaming state overlaps with the bonus and becomes “1 type BB” and “non-rare role” is the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role”. Is obtained by adding the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 Formula (2-8)
Becomes Note that this equation (2-8) can be calculated in the same manner as equation (1-8) for the first target game state (see the numbers in the row of RT0 in FIG. 105).

  Further, in the second target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”, the effect is executed with a probability of 0% (see FIG. 151). ).

Therefore, in the second target game state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability of performing some effect is:
127/65536 × 0/100
= 0/65536 Formula (2-9)
Becomes Here, the result of equation (2-8) (“127/65536”) was used.

<Probability that some effect is executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect is executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the second target gaming state is calculated from Expressions (2-7) and (2-9) from 240/65536 + 0/65536.
= 240/65536 Formula (2-10)
Becomes

<Probability that an effect will be executed in the second target game state>
From the above, the probability that any effect is executed in the second target game state is calculated from the equations (2-5) and (2-10) as follows.
5204/65536 + 240/65536
= 5444/65536 Formula (2-11)
Becomes

<Comparison result between first target gaming state and second target gaming state>
The probability of executing any effect in the first target game state is calculated from Expression (1-11) as follows.
35511/65536
It is. In addition, the probability of executing any effect in the second target game state is calculated from Expression (2-11).
5444/65536
It is.

Therefore,
3551/65536> 5444/65536 Formula (2-12)
Holds, and when comparing the first target game state and the second target game state, the probability of executing some effect in the first target game state is higher than the probability of executing some effect in the second target game state. Is also configured to be high.
As described above, in the first target game state, the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to the AT is the low probability state. On the other hand, in the second target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state relating to the AT is the AT preparation state 2. Therefore, when both the RT states of the target gaming state are RT0, the effect is more easily performed in the normal section than in the advantageous section. When the player looks at the advantageous section indicator YH, it can be determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section. For this reason, if the game section can be recognized as a normal section, the willingness to play decreases, and during the normal section, various effects are frequently executed to enter the advantageous section. Is expected to be performed, the probability of executing any effect in the first target game state is increased. Note that, in the first target game state, an effect indicating the current set value may be more easily executed than in the second target game state. For example, in a game related to a loss that has not been won in a bonus or an AT lottery, an effect that can be executed only in a normal section may be provided, and the higher the set value of the effect, the higher the occurrence rate. With this configuration, the player's willingness to proceed with the game even in the normal section is improved.

<< (Comparison 2) Second Target Game State and Third Target Game State >>

<Second target game state>
As described above, in the second target game state, the probability of executing any effect is given by the following equation (2-11).
5444/65536
It is.

<Third target game state>
First, the probability that the effect is executed in the third target game state,
(A) When the condition device is “rare role” with no bonus overlap (b) When the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with no bonus overlap (c) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and “ (D) Calculate for each of the cases where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”. As described above, in the third target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state relating to the AT is the AT in-state.

<(A) When the condition device is a “rare role” with no bonus overlap>
The winning rate at which the condition device when the game is executed in the third target game state becomes “rare role” due to non-overlapping bonus is added to the number of all condition devices belonging to the bonus non-overlapping group “rare role”. It is obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (3-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105). In equation (3-1), the number 3204 of “winning-B”, the number 1000 of “winning-C”, the number 700 of “winning-D”, and the number of “winning-E” The number 300 was used (refer to the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the third target gaming state, when the condition device is a bonus with no bonus and is “rare role”, “no effect” is not selected, and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (FIG. 152 bonus non-overlapping, see "Rare Role" section). As shown in FIG. 152, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonus, “conversation effect” (12.5%), “cut-in effect” (25%), “showdown effect” (25%), One of the effects of “Additional battle (for exclusive use during ART)” (37.5%) is selected. Therefore, in the case of the third target game state, when the condition device is the bonus rare and the “rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 Formula (3-2)
Becomes Here, the result of Expression (3-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping>
The winning rate at which the condition device when the game is executed in the third target gaming state is “losing” and “non-rare role” due to non-overlapping bonuses is determined for all the groups belonging to the group “losing” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the number of condition devices. In particular,
(65536-367-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 Formula (3-3)
Becomes Here, the numerical value “367” in the expression (3-3) is the sum of the number of units that are won by the condition device that becomes the single bonus and the number of units that are won by the condition device that overlaps with the bonus.

  The sum of the numbers to be won by the condition device which becomes the single bonus is the number 40 of “1 type BB-A”, the number 40 of “1 type BB-B”, and the number of “1 type BB-C”. This is the sum of the number 40 and 120 (= 40 + 40 + 40) (see the entry in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  In addition, the number of wins of the condition device that overlaps with the bonus is a number of 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-C”, a number of 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-D”, and “1 type Numerical value 40 of "BB-B + winning-E", numerical value 40 of "1 type BB-C + winning-C", numerical number 40 of "1 type BB-C + winning-D", and "1 type BB- The sum of the numeral 40 and the numeral 40 of “C + win-E” (= 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40) (see the numeral in the row of RT1 in FIG. 105) and the numeral 1 of “1 type BB-B + replay-A” Numerical value 1 of "1 type BB-B + winning-A1", numerical value 1 of "1 type BB-B + winning-A2", and numerical value 1 of "1 type BB-B + winning-A3", " The sum 7 of the numerical value 1 of the type 1 BB-B + winning-A4, the numerical value 1 of the type 1 BB-B + winning-A5, and the numerical value 1 of the type 1 BB-B + winning-A6 = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) and a (sum 247 (= 240 + 7 with reference numeral input columns of RT1 in FIG. 105)).

  Therefore, the numerical value “367” of the equation (3-3) can be calculated by the sum of the setting number 120 that is won by the condition device serving as the single bonus and the setting number 247 that is won by the condition device overlapping with the bonus. Also, the numerical value “5204” in the equation (3-3) is the result of the equation (3-1). As shown in the equation (3-3), by calculating “65536-367-5204”, the number of condition devices that are to be a single bonus and the number of condition devices that are overlapped with the bonus are to be calculated. The number of “rare combination” can be excluded, and the number of cases where the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare combination” with bonus non-overlap can be calculated.

  Also, in the third target game state, when the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlap, both effects are executed with a probability of 13.5% (see FIG. 152). Bonus non-overlapping, see "Loss" and "Non-rare roles"). As shown in FIG. 152, the probability of “no effect” of each of the group “losing”, the group “replay”, and the group “bell” is 86.5%, and the probability of performing any effect is , 100−86.5 = 13.5. Note that, specifically, as shown in FIG. 152, in each of the group "losing", the group "replay", and the group "bell", "conversation effect" (12.5%), "confrontation effect" (1% ) Is selected.

Therefore, in the case of the third target game state, when the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping, the probability of performing any effect is:
59965/65536 x 13.5 / 100
$ 8095/65536 Formula (3-4)
Becomes Here, the result of equation (3-3) (“59965/65536”) was used.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-bonus non-overlap in the third target gaming state is calculated from Expression (3-2) and Expression (3-4) from 5204/65536 + 8095/65536.
= 13299/65536 Formula (3-5)
Becomes

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "rare role">
The winning rate at which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes a “rare role” when the game is executed in the third target game state is obtained by adding the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to the bonus overlapping group “rare role”. Obtained by: In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 Formula (3-6)
Becomes In the equation (3-6), the first “80” is the sum of the numeral 40 of “1 type BB−B + winning−C” and the numerical value 40 of “1 type BB−C + winning−C”. The next “80” is the sum of the number 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-D” and the number 40 of “1 type BB-C + winning-D”, and the last “80” is , BB-B + win-E ”and the 40 of“ one BB-C + win-E ”(see the numbers in the row of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  In the case where the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the third target gaming state and is a “rare role”, the effect is executed with a probability of 87.5%. That is, as shown in FIG. 152, the probability of “no effect” in the group “rare role” is 12.5%, and the probability of performing any effect is 100-12.5 = 87.5. . Specifically, as shown in the column of “rare role” which overlaps with the bonus in FIG. 152, “conversation effect” (12.5%), “cut-in effect” (25%), “confrontation effect” (25%) %) Or “Additional battle (for exclusive use during ART)” (25%).

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the third target game state and is a “rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is calculated using Expression (3-6).
240/65536 × 87.5 / 100
= 210/65536 Formula (3-7)
Becomes

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”>
The winning rate at which the condition device when executing the game in the third target gaming state overlaps with the bonus and becomes “1 type BB” and “non-rare role” is the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role”. Is obtained by adding the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 Formula (3-8)
Becomes In the expression (3-8), the first “120” is the numerical value 40 of “one type BB-A”, the numerical value 40 of “one type BB-B”, and the “one type BB-C”. The next “1” is the number 1 of “1 type BB-B + replay-A”, and the last “6” is “1 type BB-B + winning A1”. Is the sum 6 of the numbers 1 of "1 type BB-B + winning A6" (see the numbers in the row of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  Further, in the third target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”, the effect is executed with a probability of 43.75%. That is, as shown in FIG. 152, the probability of “no effect” of the group “1 type BB”, the probability of “no effect” of the group “replay”, and the probability of “no effect” of the group “Bell” are Is also 56.25%, and the probability of performing any effect is 100−56.25 = 43.75. Specifically, as shown in the columns of “1 type BB” and “non-rare role” overlapping with the bonus of FIG. 152, all of the group “1 type BB”, the group “re-game”, and the group “bell” One of “conversation effects” (25%), “cut-in effects” (6.25%), and “showdown effects” (12.5%) is selected.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the third target game state and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability of performing some effect is
127/65536 x 43.75 / 100
$ 56/65536 Formula (3-9)
Becomes

<Probability that some effect is executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus>
From the above, the probability that an effect will be executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the third target gaming state is calculated from Expression (3-7) and Expression (3-9) as 210/65536 + 56/65536.
= 266/65536 Formula (3-10)
Becomes

<Probability that an effect will be executed in the third target game state>
From the above, the probability that any effect is executed in the third target game state is calculated from Expression (3-5) and Expression (3-10),
13299/65536 + 266/65536
= 13565/65536 Formula (3-11)
Becomes

<Comparison result between second target gaming state and third target gaming state>
The probability of executing any effect in the second target game state is given by Expression (2-11).
5444/65536
It is. In addition, the probability of executing any effect in the third target game state is calculated from Expression (3-11) as follows.
13565/65536
It is.

Therefore,
5444/65536 <13565/65536 Formula (3-12)
Holds, and comparing the second target game state with the third target game state, the probability of executing any effect in the third target game state is higher than the probability of executing some effect in the second target game state. Is also configured to be high.

  As described above, in the second target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state relating to the AT is the AT preparation state 2. On the other hand, in the third target game state, the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to the AT is the AT in-state. Therefore, when the game sections in the target game state are both advantageous sections, the effect is more easily executed when the RT state is RT1 than when the RT state is RT0. Since the second target gaming state is the AT preparation state 2, and it is definitive to shift to the third target gaming state, the player has an expectation for shifting to the third target gaming state. Since it is not necessary to make the player feel the expectation of the effect (there is no need to excessively inflate the player by the effect), it is preferable to end the second target game state by making the effect as simple as possible. The probability of executing any effect in the target game state 2 is reduced.

<< (Comparative 3) First Target Game State and Fourth Target Game State >>

<First target game state>
As described above, in the first target gaming state, the probability of executing any effect is given by the following equation (1-11).
35511/65536
It is.

<Fourth target game state>
First, the probability that an effect will be executed in the fourth target gaming state,
(A) When the condition device is the bonus and the role is "rare" (b) When the condition device is the bonus and the role is "losing" and "non-rare" (c) When the condition device overlaps the bonus and " (D) Calculate for each of the cases where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”. As described above, in the fourth target game state, the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to the AT is a fall waiting state.

<(A) When the condition device is a “rare role” with no bonus overlap>
The winning rate at which the condition device when the game is executed in the fourth target game state is “rare role” due to non-overlapping bonus is added to the number of all conditional devices belonging to the bonus non-overlapping group “rare role”. It is obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (4-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105). In equation (4-1), the number 3204 of “winning-B”, the number 1000 of “winning-C”, the number 700 of “winning-D”, and the number of “winning-E” The number 300 was used (refer to the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the fourth target gaming state, when the condition device is “rare role” with bonus non-overlapping, “no effect” is not selected, and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (FIG. 153 bonus non-overlapping, see "Rare Role" section). As shown in FIG. 153, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonus, one of “character production” (5%), “conversation production” (5%), and “cut-in production” (90%) Is selected. Therefore, in the case of the fourth target gaming state, when the condition device is the bonus rare and the “rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is:
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 Formula (4-2)
Becomes Here, the result of Expression (4-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping>
The winning rate at which the condition device when the game is executed in the fourth target game state becomes “losing” and “non-rare role” due to non-overlapping bonuses is the winning rate of all the members belonging to the group “losing” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the numbers of the condition devices (see the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105). In particular,
(65536-367-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 Formula (4-3)
Becomes Here, the RT state of the fourth target game state is RT1, and Expression (4-3) can be calculated in the same manner as Expression (3-3).

  In the fourth target game state, if the condition devices are “losing” and “non-rare role” due to non-overlapping bonuses, the effect is executed with a probability of 5% (see FIG. 153). (Refer to the column of "Loss" and "Non-rare role" in duplication) As shown in FIG. 153, the probability of “no effect” of each of the group “losing”, the group “replay”, and the group “bell” is 95%, and the probability of performing any effect is 100%. -95 = 5. Note that, specifically, as shown in FIG. 153, in each of the group “losing”, the group “replay”, and the group “bell”, “character production” (2.5%) and “conversation production” (2%) .5%).

Therefore, in the case of the fourth target game state, when the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping, the probability of performing any effect is:
59965/65536 × 5/100
$ 2998/65536 Formula (4-4)
Becomes Here, the result of equation (4-3) (“59965/65536”) was used.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping in the fourth target gaming state is calculated from Expression (4-2) and Expression (4-4) from 5204/65536 + 2998/65536.
= 8202/65536 Formula (4-5)
Becomes

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "rare role">
The winning rate at which the condition device overlaps with the bonus when the game is executed in the fourth target game state and becomes a “rare role” is obtained by adding the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to the bonus overlap group “rare role”. Obtained by: In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 Formula (4-6)
Becomes The expression (4-6) can be calculated in the same manner as the expression (3-6) (see the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  If the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the fourth target gaming state and is a “rare role”, “no effect” is not selected, and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (FIG. It overlaps with the bonus of 153, and see the column of "rare role"). As shown in FIG. 153, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonus, one of “character production” (5%), “conversation production” (5%), and “cut-in production” (90%) Is selected.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the third target gaming state and is a “rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is:
240/65536 × 100/100
= 240/65536 Formula (4-7)
Becomes Here, the result of equation (4-6) (“240/65536”) was used.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”>
The winning rate at which the condition device when the game is executed in the fourth target game state overlaps with the bonus and becomes “1 type BB” and “non-rare role” is the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role”. Is obtained by adding the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 Formula (4-8)
Becomes The expression (4-8) can be calculated in the same manner as the expression (3-8) (see the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  In the fourth target game state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”, “no effect” is not selected, and the effect is 100%. It is executed with a probability (see the column of “1 type BB” and “non-rare role” in the bonus duplication of FIG. 153). As shown in FIG. 153, specifically, in the case of overlapping with the bonus, one of “character production” (5%), “conversation production” (5%), and “cut-in production” (90%) Is selected.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the fourth target gaming state and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is:
127/65536 × 100/100
= 127/65536 Formula (4-9)
Becomes

<Probability that some effect is executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus>
From the above, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the fourth target gaming state, the probability that some effect is executed is calculated from Expressions (4-7) and (4-9) from 240/65536 + 127/65536.
= 367/65536 Formula (4-10)
Becomes

<Probability that an effect will be executed in the fourth target game state>
From the above, the probability that some effect is executed in the fourth target game state is calculated from the equations (4-5) and (4-10) as follows.
8202/65536 + 367/65536
= 8569/65536 Formula (4-11)
Becomes

<Comparison result of first target gaming state and fourth target gaming state>
The probability of executing any effect in the first target game state is calculated from Expression (1-11) as follows.
35511/65536
It is. In addition, the probability of executing any effect in the fourth target gaming state is calculated from Expression (4-11).
8569/65536
It is.

Therefore,
35531/65536> 8569/65536 Formula (4-12)
Holds, and when comparing the first target gaming state with the fourth target gaming state, the probability of executing any effect in the first target gaming state is higher than the probability of executing some effect in the fourth target gaming state. Is also configured to be high.

  As described above, in the first target game state, the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to the AT is the low probability state. On the other hand, in the fourth target game state, the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1, and the state relating to the AT is a fall waiting state. Therefore, when the game sections in the target game state are both normal sections, the effect is more easily executed when the RT state is RT0 than when the RT state is RT1. In this case, the fourth target gaming state transitions from the advantageous section to the normal section, and is in a falling waiting state before transitioning to the low-probability state. It is preferable to shift to the advantageous section again, and it is not necessary to give a sense of expectation by performing the effect, and it is not necessary to make it feel as if it is still an advantageous section. The probability of executing any kind of effect is reduced. That is, in the fall waiting state, since the ART state has ended for the player = the high profit state has ended, it is desired to urge the player to proceed with the game aiming for the next AT winning, and the information regarding the advantageous section is provided. In order to make it clear that everything has been cleared, the production frequency of the effect is configured to be relatively low.

<< (Comparative 4) Third Target Game State and Sixth Target Game State >>

<Third target game state>
As described above, the probability of executing any effect in the third target game state is calculated from the equation (3-11) as follows.
13565/65536
It is.

<Sixth target game state>
First, the probability that the effect is executed in the sixth target game state,
(A) When the condition device is “rare role” with no bonus overlap (b) When the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with no bonus overlap (c) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and “ (D) Calculate for each of the cases where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”. As described above, in the sixth target game state, the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to the AT is the fall-in-AT state.

<(A) When the condition device is a “rare role” with no bonus overlap>
When the game is executed in the sixth target game state, the winning rate at which the condition device becomes “rare role” due to non-overlapping bonus is added to the number of all condition devices belonging to the bonus non-overlapping group “rare role”. It is obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (6-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105). The expression (2-1) can be calculated in the same manner as the expression (1-1) (see the numbers in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the sixth target gaming state, when the condition device is “rare role” with bonus non-overlapping, “no effect” is not selected, and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (FIG. 155 bonus non-overlapping, see "Rare" section). As shown in FIG. 155, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonus, “conversation effect” (12.5%), “cut-in effect” (25%), “showdown effect” (25%), One of the effects of “Additional battle (for exclusive use during ART)” (37.5%) is always selected. Therefore, in the sixth target game state, when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and is a “rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is:
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 Formula (6-2)
Becomes Here, the result of Equation (6-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping>
The winning rate at which the condition device when the game is executed in the sixth target gaming state is “losing” and “non-rare role” due to non-overlapping bonuses is determined for all the groups belonging to the group “losing” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the number of condition devices. In particular,
(65536-367-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 Formula (6-3)
Becomes Here, the numerical value “367” in the equation (6-3) is the sum of the number of single bonus wins and the number of bonus duplicate wins. Note that the numerical value “367” can be calculated in the same manner as in Expression (1-3) of the first target game state.

  Also, in the sixth target gaming state, when the condition devices are “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping, the probability of “no effect” is 100% for all (see FIG. 151) The effect is not executed when the bonus is not overlapped (refer to the columns of "losing" and "non-rare role").

Therefore, in the case of the second target game state, when the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping, the probability of performing any effect is as follows:
59965/65536 × 0/100
= 0/65536 Equation (6-4)
Becomes

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus>
From the above, the probability of performing any effect when the condition device is non-bonus non-overlap in the sixth target gaming state is calculated from Expression (6-2) and Expression (6-4) from 5204/65536 + 0/65536.
= 5204/65536 Formula (6-5)
Becomes

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "rare role">
The winning rate at which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes a “rare role” when the game is executed in the sixth target game state is obtained by adding the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to the bonus overlap group “rare role”. Obtained by: In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 Formula (6-6)
Becomes The expression (6-6) can be calculated in the same manner as the expression (1-6) for the first target game state.

  In the sixth target game state, if the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a “rare role”, the effects are all executed with a probability of 12.5% (“rare” in the bonus overlap of FIG. 155). Role "). The probability that any effect is executed is 100-12.5 = 87.5. Note that, specifically, as shown in FIG. 155, one of “conversation effect” (12.5%), “cut-in effect” (37.5%), and “showdown effect” (37.5%) Is selected.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the sixth target game state and is a “rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is calculated using Expression (6-6).
240/65536 × 87.5 / 100
= 210/65536 Formula (6-7)
Becomes Here, the result of equation (6-6) (“240/65536”) was used.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the sixth target game state, the winning rate at which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes “1 type BB” and “non-rare role” is the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role”. Is obtained by adding the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 Formula (6-8)
Becomes The expression (6-8) can be calculated in the same manner as the expression (1-8) for the first target game state.

  Further, in the sixth target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”, the effect is executed with a probability of 43.75% (FIG. (Refer to the "Rare role" column, overlapping with the 155 bonus). The probability that any effect is executed is 100−56.25 = 43.75. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 155, any one of “conversation effect” (25%), “cut-in effect” (6.25%), and “confrontation effect” (12.5%) Is selected.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the sixth target game state and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is:
127/65536 x 43.75 / 100
= 56/65536 Formula (6-9)
Becomes Here, the result of equation (6-8) (“127/65536”) was used.

<Probability that some effect is executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect is executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the sixth target gaming state is calculated from Expressions (6-7) and (6-9) as 210/65536 + 56/65536.
= 266/65536 Equation (6-10)
Becomes

<Probability that an effect will be executed in the sixth target gaming state>
From the above, the probability that any effect is executed in the second target game state is calculated from Expression (6-5) and Expression (6-10),
5204/65536 + 266/65536
= 5470/65536 Formula (6-11)

<Comparison result of third target gaming state and sixth target gaming state>
The probability of executing any effect in the third target game state is given by the following equation (3-11).
13565/65536
It is. In addition, the probability of executing any effect in the sixth target game state is calculated from Expression (6-11).
5470/65536
It is.

Therefore,
5470/65536 <13565/65536 Formula (6-12)
Holds, and when comparing the third target game state and the sixth target game state, the probability of executing any effect in the third target game state is higher than the probability of executing some effect in the sixth target game state. Is also configured to be high.

  As described above, in the third target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to the AT is the AT state. On the other hand, in the sixth target game state, the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to the AT is the fall-in-AT state. Therefore, when the game sections are both advantageous sections, the effect is more easily executed when the RT state is RT1 than when the RT state is RT0. This tendency is the same as in Comparison 2, and when the game section is an advantageous section, the effect is easily executed when the RT state is RT1. This case is a case where the RT state has shifted from RT1 to RT0 in spite of the AT in-progress state, which is a little earlier than increasing the sense of expectation by the effect when the RT state is RT0. Since it is preferable to return the RT state to RT1, the probability that any effect is executed in the sixth target game state is reduced. Further, by providing a dedicated effect in this state, it is possible to prevent the processing from being complicated and securing image data for the effect.

<<< Modification 1-1 >>>
In the above-described third embodiment, the AT counter is decremented when the state related to the AT is the AT state, and the state related to the AT is shifted to a fall waiting state on condition that the value of the AT counter becomes zero. The state related to the AT is shifted to the low-probability state on the condition that the state of the AT is shifted from RT1 to RT0 when the state related to the AT is the fall waiting state.

  FIG. 159 is a block diagram showing an AT state transition diagram of Modification Example 1-1. In the modified example 1-1, as shown in FIG. 159, when the value of the AT counter becomes 0 in a situation where the gaming section is an advantageous section, the state is shifted to the AT falling waiting state, and the RT state is set because the navigation is not performed. When is changed from RT1 to RT0, the state related to the AT is shifted to the pulled back (weak) state. As described above, in the modified example 1-1, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to the AT is a pullback (weak) state (hereinafter, referred to as a seventh target gaming state). ) Is provided.

  If the player wins the rare role (win-C, win-D, win-E) during the pullback (weak) state (during 10 games), the state relating to the AT is pulled back (weak). To return to the pre-return state. Further, when the replay 06 symbol can be stopped and displayed by the navigation while in the return sign state, it is possible to return to the AT in-state. If the player does not win the rare role (winning-C, winning-D, winning-E) in the pullback (weak) state, the advantageous section ends and the state shifts to the low probability state.

<< AT state transition control processing >>
FIG. 160 and FIG. 161 are flowcharts illustrating a part of the AT state transition control processing in the modified example 1-1. In the modified example 1-1, the processing in FIG. 114 of the third embodiment is executed in the same manner. FIG. 160 is a process corresponding to FIG. 116 of the third embodiment, and the process shown in FIG. 160 is executed in the case of No in step 1832 or 1834 in FIG. 115. FIG. 161 is a process corresponding to FIG. 117 of the third embodiment, and steps that perform the same processes as in FIG. 117 are denoted by the same reference numerals. As described above, in the modified example 1-1, first, the processing in FIGS. 114 and 115 of the third embodiment is executed, and then the processing in FIGS. 160 and 161 is executed.

  First, in the case of No in step 1832 or 1834 in FIG. 115, in step 1952 in FIG. 160, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is the AT in-progress state. If Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT counter value is 0 in the game. If Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the AT fall waiting state, and ends this subroutine. If No in step 1954, this subroutine is immediately terminated.

  If No in step 1952, in step 1958, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is an AT fall waiting state. If Yes in step 1958, in step 1960, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is replay-D1 to D3. If Yes in step 1960, in step 1962, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device. Then, this subroutine ends. If No in step 1960, this subroutine is immediately ended.

  The selection candidates for the state related to the AT after the next game in the processing of step 1962 include the pulled back (weak) state. As shown in FIG. 162, when the state related to the AT of the game is the AT fall waiting state, there are two selection candidates, the AT fall waiting state and the pullback (weak) state. When the re-game 01, the re-game 02, and the re-game 03 are stopped and displayed, the AT fall waiting state is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game, and when the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed, the next game is stopped. The pullback (weak) state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the game.

  If No in step 1958, in step 1964, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the retracted (weak) state. If Yes in step 1964, in step 1966, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not 10 games have been executed in the pulled back (weak) state. If Yes in step 1966, in step 1968, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the low probability state, and ends this subroutine.

  If No in Step 1966, in Step 1970, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the winning-C, the winning-D, and the winning-E have been won. If Yes in step 1970, in step 1972, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game as the return indication state, and ends this subroutine. If No in step 1970, this subroutine is immediately terminated.

  If No in step 1964, in step 1974, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the return precursor state. If Yes in step 1974, in step 1976, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is replay-E1 to E3. If Yes in step 1976, in step 1978, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a candidate for selecting a state relating to the AT after the next game based on the state relating to the current AT and the winning condition device. Then, this subroutine ends.

  The selection candidates for the state relating to the AT after the next game in the processing of step 1978 include the AT-in-progress state. As shown in FIG. 162, when the state related to the AT of the game is the return sign state, there are two selection candidates, the return sign state and the AT in-state. When the re-game 01, the re-game 02, and the re-game 03 are stopped and displayed, the sign-in-return state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game, and when the re-game 06 is stopped and displayed, the next game is displayed. The AT-in-progress state is selected as the subsequent state relating to the AT.

  If No in step 1974 or 1976, the process moves to step 1440 in FIG. Steps 1440, 1442 and 1444 in FIG. 161 are the same as the processing shown in FIG. 117.

<< Scenario lottery table determination processing >>
FIG. 163 is a flowchart illustrating the scenario lottery table determination process in the modified example 1-1. As described above, in the modification example 1-1, the state related to the AT includes the retraction (weak) state, and the scenario effect table corresponding to the retraction (weak) state is selected. Note that, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 163, steps for performing the same processing as in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  First, in the case of No in step 4120, in step 4152, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is pulled back (weak).

  If Yes in step 4152, in step 4154, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T4. In this way, the scenario effect table T4 is selected as the scenario effect table corresponding to the pull-back (weak) state.

  If the determination in Step 4152 is No, the CPU SC of the sub control board S moves the processing to Step 4112.

  As shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 159, the modification 1-1 does not have a fall waiting state as a state relating to the AT. Therefore, in the case of Yes in step 4124, in step 4130, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the state regarding the AT is the low probability state. If Yes in step 4130, in step 4132, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the RT state is RT1.

  If Yes in step 4132, in step 4134, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T7.

  If No in step 4132, in step 4136, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T1.

  In the case of No in Step 4124 and in the case of No in Step 4130, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts the processing to Step 4112.

<<< seventh target game state >>>
As described above, in the seventh target game state, the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to the AT is the retraction (weak) state. FIG. 164 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the seventh target gaming state. FIG. 164 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the seventh target gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (B), when the condition devices are bonus non-overlap and bonus overlap, and are a loss, a non-rare role, and a rare role, only scenario 1 is selected, and other scenarios 2 and 3 are selected. Is not selected.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (A), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and loses or a non-rare role, only “no effect” is selected, and no other effects are selected. . If the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and rare role, or if the bonus is a bonus non-losing role or a rare role, only the "cut-in effect" is selected and another effect is selected. It will not be done.

Next, the probability that the effect is executed in the seventh target game state is
(A) When the condition device is “rare role” with no bonus overlap (b) When the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with no bonus overlap (c) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and “ (D) Calculate for each of the cases where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”. As described above, in the seventh target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state relating to the AT is a pullback (weak) state.

<(A) When the condition device is a “rare role” with no bonus overlap>
The winning rate at which the condition device when the game is executed in the seventh target game state is “rare role” due to non-overlapping bonus is added to the number of all condition devices belonging to the bonus non-overlapping group “rare role”. It is obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (7-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105). Note that, in the equation (7-1), similarly to the equation (2-1), the number 3204 of “winning-B”, the number 1000 of “winning-C”, and the number of “winning-D” 700 and the number 300 of "winning-E" were used (see the numbers in the row of RT0 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the seventh target game state, when the condition device is a bonus with no bonus and is “rare role”, “no effect” is not selected, and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (FIG. 164 bonus non-overlapping, see "Rare Role" section). As shown in FIG. 164, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonus, “cut-in effect” is always selected. Therefore, in the case of the second target game state, when the condition device is the bonus non-overlapping and the “rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is:
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 Formula (7-2)
Becomes Here, the result of equation (7-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping>
When the game is executed in the seventh target gaming state, the condition device is a bonus non-overlap, and the winning rate of “losing” and “non-rare role” is all conditions belonging to the group “losing” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the numbers of the devices. In particular,
(65536-367-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 Formula (7-3)
Becomes Here, the numerical value “367” in the equation (7-3) is the sum of the number of units that the condition device that becomes the single bonus wins and the number of units that the condition device that overlaps with the bonus wins. Note that the numerical value “367” can be calculated in the same manner as in the expression (2-3) for the second target game state (see the arrangement number in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105).

  In the seventh target gaming state, when the condition devices are “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping, the probability of “no effect” is 100% for all (see FIG. 164) The effect is not executed when the bonus is not overlapped (refer to the columns of “losing” and “non-rare role”).

Therefore, in the seventh target game state, when the condition device is “non-rare” and “losing” due to non-overlapping bonuses, the probability of performing any effect is:
59965/65536 × 0/100
= 0/65536 Equation (7-4)
Becomes

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus>
From the above, the probability that any effect is executed when the condition device is non-bonus non-overlap in the seventh target gaming state is calculated from Expression (7-2) and Expression (7-4) from 5204/65536 + 0/65536.
= 5204/65536 Formula (7-5)
Becomes

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "rare role">
The winning rate at which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes a “rare role” when the game is executed in the seventh target game state is obtained by adding the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to the bonus overlap group “rare role”. Obtained by: In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 Formula (7-6)
Becomes Note that this equation (7-6) can be calculated in the same manner as equation (2-6) for the second target game state (refer to the numbers in the row of RT0 in FIG. 105).

If the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the seventh target gaming state and is a “rare role”, “no effect” is not selected, and the effect is executed with a 100% probability (FIG. (Refer to the column "Rare Role" in 164 bonus duplications.) Specifically, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus, only “cut-in effect” is selected. Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the seventh target gaming state and is a “rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is
240/65536 × 100/100
= 240/65536 Formula (7-7)
Becomes Here, the result of equation (7-6) (“240/65536”) was used.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”>
The winning rate at which the condition device when executing the game in the second target gaming state overlaps with the bonus and becomes “1 type BB” and “non-rare role” is the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role”. Is obtained by adding the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 Formula (7-8)
Becomes Note that this equation (7-8) can be calculated in the same manner as equation (2-8) for the second target game state (see the numbers in the row of RT0 in FIG. 105).

  If the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the seventh target game state and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”, the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (FIG. 164). (Refer to the column of "1 type BB" and "non-rare role" of bonus duplication). Specifically, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus, only “cut-in effect” is selected.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the seventh target game state and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is as follows:
127/65536 × 100/100
= 127/65536 Formula (7-9)
Becomes Here, the result of equation (7-8) (“127/65536”) was used.

<Probability that some effect is executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus>
From the above, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the seventh target gaming state, the probability that some effect is executed is calculated from Expressions (7-7) and (7-9) from 240/65536 + 127/65536.
= 367/65536 Formula (7-10)
Becomes

<Probability that an effect will be executed in the seventh target game state>
From the above, the probability that any effect is executed in the seventh target gaming state is calculated from Expression (7-5) and Expression (7-10).
5204/65536 + 367/65536
= 5571/65536 Formula (7-11)
Becomes

<Comparison result between first target gaming state and seventh target gaming state>
The probability of executing any effect in the first target game state is calculated from Expression (1-11) as follows.
35511/65536
It is. In addition, the probability of executing any effect in the seventh target game state is calculated from Expression (7-11).
5571/65536
It is.

Therefore,
3551/65536> 5571/65536 Formula (7-12)
Holds, and when comparing the first target game state and the seventh target game state, the probability of executing some effect in the first target game state is higher than the probability of executing some effect in the seventh target game state. Is also configured to be high.

  As described above, in the first target game state, the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to the AT is the low probability state. On the other hand, in the seventh target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to the AT is a pullback (weak) state. Therefore, when the RT states of the target gaming state are both RT0, the effect is more easily executed in the normal section than in the advantageous section. The seventh target game state is a state in which after the end of the AT state, there is a possibility of returning to the AT state via the return precursor state, but basically, a state in which the game section returns to the normal section. It is. For this reason, it is preferable to suggest returning to the normal section by a simple effect, rather than giving an expectation of returning to the state during AT. The seventh target game state ends when 10 games elapse, in other words, since the stay period is short, when the effect occurs, the effect is generated so that the degree of expectation to return (retract) to the AT state when the effect occurs increases. It is preferable to reduce the frequency in order to improve the interest of the game.

<<< Modification 1-2 >>>
As described above, in the third embodiment, the AT counter is decremented when the state related to the AT is the AT state, and the state related to the AT is changed from the AT state to the condition that the value of the AT counter becomes 0. The state is shifted to the fall waiting state, and the state related to the AT is shifted to the low probability state on condition that the RT state has shifted from RT1 to RT0 when the state related to the AT is the fall waiting state.

  FIG. 165 is a block diagram showing an AT state transition diagram of Modification Example 1-2. In the modified example 1-2, as shown in FIG. 165, even when the value of the AT counter becomes 0 when the state related to the AT is the AT in-progress state, the state related to the AT is not shifted to the fall waiting state. Move to the pullback (strong) state. As described above, in the modified example 1-2, the gaming section is the advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to the AT is the pullback (strong) state (hereinafter, referred to as an eighth target gaming state). ).

  In this pullback (strong) state, since the RT state is RT1, the same state as the RT state in the AT state is maintained. For this reason, by returning to the AT state under the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the pulled back (strong) state, it is possible to increase the expectation that the profit can be further increased by executing the navigation.

<< AT state transition control processing >>
FIG. 166 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the AT state transition control processing in Modification Example 1-2. In the modified example 1-2, the processing of FIG. 114 of the third embodiment and the processing of FIG. 161 of the modified example 1-1 are similarly executed. FIG. 166 is a process corresponding to FIG. 116 of the third embodiment. If No in step 1832 or 1834 in FIG. 116, the process illustrated in FIG. 166 is executed. After the processing illustrated in FIG. 166 is completed, the processing proceeds to the processing in FIG. 161 of the modified example 1-1. As described above, in the modified example 1-2, first, the processing of FIGS. 114 and 115 of the third embodiment is executed, and then the processing of FIGS. 166 and 161 is executed.

  First, in the case of No in step 1832 or 1834 in FIG. 115, in step 2952 in FIG. 166, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is the AT in-progress state. If Yes in step 2952, in step 2954, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the AT counter value is 0 and the RT state is RT1 in the game. If Yes in step 2954, in step 2956, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the state relating to the AT subsequent to the next game (strong) state, and ends this subroutine. I do. If No in step 2954, this subroutine is immediately ended.

  If No in step 2952, in step 2958, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a pullback (strong) state. If Yes in step 2958, in step 2960, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is replay-D1 to D3. If Yes in step 2960, in step 2962, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a selection candidate of a state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device. Then, this subroutine ends. In the case of No at step 2960, this subroutine is immediately terminated.

  The selection candidates for the state relating to the AT after the next game in the processing of step 2962 include the AT in-state. As shown in FIG. 167, when the state related to the AT of the game is the pullback (strong) state, there are two selection candidates, an AT-in-progress state and a low-probability state. When the re-game 01, the re-game 02, and the re-game 03 are stopped and displayed, the AT-in-progress state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game, and when the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed, the next game is displayed. The low probability state is selected as a state relating to the AT thereafter.

<< Scenario lottery table determination processing >>
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing a scenario lottery table determination process in the modified example 1-2. As described above, in the modified example 1-2, the state related to the AT includes the pullback (strong) state, and the corresponding scenario rendering table is selected when the state is the pullback (strong) state. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 168, steps for performing the same processing as in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  First, in the case of No in step 4108, in step 4162, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is pulled back (strong). If Yes in step 4162, in step 4164, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T5. In this way, the scenario effect table T5 is selected as the scenario effect table corresponding to the pull-back (strong) state.

  If No in step 4162, in step 4116, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is the AT preparation state 2. If Yes in step 4116, in step 4118, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T2.

  In addition, as shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 166, the modified example 1-2 does not have a fall waiting state as a state relating to the AT. Therefore, in the case of Yes in step 4124, in step 4130, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the state regarding the AT is the low probability state. If Yes in step 4130, in step 4132, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the RT state is RT1.

  If Yes in step 4132, in step 4134, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T7.

  If No in step 4132, in step 4136, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T1.

  In the case of No in Step 4124 and in the case of No in Step 4130, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts the processing to Step 4112.

<< Eighth target game state >>
As described above, in the eighth target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to the AT is the retraction (strong) state. FIG. 169 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the eighth target gaming state. FIG. 169 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the eighth target gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 169 (B), if the condition devices are non-overlapping bonuses and lose, non-rare, and rare, only scenario 1 is selected and other scenarios 2 and 3 are selected. There is no case. If the condition device is a bonus duplication and a loss, a non-rare role, and a rare role, scenario 1 is most likely to be selected, and then either scenario 2 or 3 is likely to be selected with the same probability.

  As shown in FIG. 169 (A), when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus and loses, only “no effect” is selected, and other effects are not selected. If the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and a non-rare role, only the "target effect" is selected, and no other effects are selected. If the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and rare role, or if the bonus is a bonus non-losing role or a rare role, only the "cut-in effect" is selected and another effect is selected. It will not be done.

<Eighth target gaming state>
In the eighth target game state, the probability that the effect is executed
(A) When the condition device is “rare role” with no bonus overlap (b) When the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with no bonus overlap (c) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and “ (D) Calculate for each of the cases where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”. As described above, in the eighth target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to the AT is a pullback (strong) state.

<(A) When the condition device is a “rare role” with no bonus overlap>
When the game is executed in the eighth target game state, the winning rate at which the condition device becomes “rare role” due to non-overlapping bonus is added to the number of all condition devices belonging to the bonus non-overlapping group “rare role”. It is obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (8-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105). In equation (8-1), the number 3204 of “winning-B”, the number 1000 of “winning-C”, the number 700 of “winning-D”, and the number of “winning-E” are set. The number 300 was used (refer to the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the eighth target gaming state, if the condition device is a bonus with no bonus and is “rare role”, “no effect” is not selected, and the effect is executed with a 100% probability (FIG. 1690 bonus non-overlapping, see "Rare Role" section). As shown in FIG. 169, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonus, “cut-in effect” is selected. Therefore, in the eighth target gaming state, when the condition device is the bonus rare and the “rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is:
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 Formula (8-2)
Becomes Here, the result of Expression (8-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping>
The winning rate at which the condition device when the game is executed in the eighth target gaming state is “losing” and “non-rare role” due to the non-overlapping bonus is determined for all the groups belonging to the group “losing” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the number of condition devices. In particular,
(65536-367-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 Formula (8-3)
Becomes Here, the numerical value “367” in the expression (8-3) is the sum of the number of units that the condition device that becomes the single bonus wins and the number of units that the condition device that overlaps with the bonus wins.

  The sum of the numbers to be won by the condition device which becomes the single bonus is the number 40 of “1 type BB-A”, the number 40 of “1 type BB-B”, and the number of “1 type BB-C”. This is the sum of the number 40 and 120 (= 40 + 40 + 40) (see the entry in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  In addition, the number of wins of the condition device that overlaps with the bonus is a number of 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-C”, a number of 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-D”, and “1 type Numerical value 40 of "BB-B + winning-E", numerical value 40 of "1 type BB-C + winning-C", numerical number 40 of "1 type BB-C + winning-D", and "1 type BB- The sum of the numeral 40 and the numeral 40 of “C + win-E” (= 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40) (see the numeral in the row of RT1 in FIG. 105) and the numeral 1 of “1 type BB-B + replay-A” Numerical value 1 of "1 type BB-B + winning-A1", numerical value 1 of "1 type BB-B + winning-A2", and numerical value 1 of "1 type BB-B + winning-A3", " The sum 7 of the numerical value 1 of the type 1 BB-B + winning-A4, the numerical value 1 of the type 1 BB-B + winning-A5, and the numerical value 1 of the type 1 BB-B + winning-A6 = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) and a (sum 247 (= 240 + 7 with reference numeral input columns of RT1 in FIG. 105)).

  Therefore, the numerical value “367” of the equation (8-3) can be calculated by the sum of the setting number 120 that is won by the condition device that becomes the single bonus and the setting number 247 that is won by the condition device overlapping with the bonus. Also, the numerical value “5204” in Expression (8-3) is the result of Expression (8-1). As shown in Expression (8-3), by calculating “65536-367-5204”, the number of condition devices that are to be a single bonus and the number of condition devices that are overlapped with the bonus are to be calculated. The number of “rare combination” can be excluded, and the number of cases where the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare combination” with bonus non-overlap can be calculated.

In addition, when the game is executed in the eighth target game state, the winning rate at which the condition device becomes “losing” due to non-overlapping bonuses,
19827/65536 Formula (8-3-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105). Furthermore, when the game is executed in the eighth target game state, the winning rate at which the condition device becomes the “non-rare role” due to the bonus non-overlapping is
(59965-19827) / 65536
= 40138/65536 Formula (8-3-2)
It is.

  When the condition device is “losing” due to non-overlapping bonus in the eighth target gaming state, the probability of “no effect” is 100%, and no effect is performed (the group in FIG. 169). See the "Loss" column).

  Furthermore, when the condition device is the bonus non-overlapping and the “non-rare role” in the eighth target gaming state, the probability of the effect being executed is 100%. Specifically, as shown in the columns of the groups “re-game” and “belt” in FIG. 169, “target aiming” is always executed.

Therefore, in the eighth target gaming state, when the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping, the probability of performing any effect is as follows:
19827/65536 × 0/100
+ 40138/65536 × 100/100
= 0/65536 + 40138/65536
= 40138/65536 Formula (8-4)
Becomes Here, the results of Equations (8-3-1) and (8-3-2) were used.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect is executed when the condition device is non-bonus non-overlap in the eighth target gaming state is calculated from Expression (8-2) and Expression (8-4) as follows: 5204/65536 + 40138/65536
= 45342/65536 Formula (8-5)
Becomes

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "rare role">
The winning rate at which the condition device overlaps with the bonus when the game is executed in the eighth target game state and becomes a “rare role” is obtained by adding the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to the bonus overlap group “rare role”. Obtained by: In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 Formula (8-6)
Becomes In Expression (8-6), the first “80” is the sum of the numeral 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-C” and the numeral 40 of “1 type BB-C + winning-C”. The next “80” is the sum of the number 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-D” and the number 40 of “1 type BB-C + winning-D”, and the last “80” is , BB-B + win-E ”and the 40 of“ one BB-C + win-E ”(see the numbers in the row of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  In the case where the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the eighth target gaming state and is a “rare role”, the probability of the effect being executed is 100%. Specifically, as shown in the column of the group “rare technique” in FIG. 169, “cut-in effect” is always executed.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the eighth target gaming state and is a “rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is calculated using Expression (8-6).
240/65536 × 100/100
= 240/65536 Formula (8-7)
Becomes

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the eighth target gaming state, the winning rate at which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes “1 type BB” and “non-rare role” is the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role”. Is obtained by adding the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 Formula (8-8)
Becomes In the expression (3-8), the first “120” is the numerical value 40 of “one type BB-A”, the numerical value 40 of “one type BB-B”, and the “one type BB-C”. The next “1” is the number 1 of “1 type BB-B + replay-A”, and the last “6” is “1 type BB-B + winning A1”. Is the sum 6 of the numbers 1 of "1 type BB-B + winning A6" (see the numbers in the row of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  In addition, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the eighth target gaming state and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability of the effect being executed is 100%. Specifically, as shown in the columns of the group “one type BB” and “non-rare role” in FIG. 169, “cut-in effect” is always executed.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the eighth target game state and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is as follows:
127/65536 × 100/100
= 127/65536 Formula (8-9)
Becomes

<Probability that some effect is executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus>
From the above, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the eighth target gaming state, the probability that some effect is executed is calculated from Expressions (8-7) and (3-9) from 240/65536 + 127/65536.
= 367/65536 Formula (8-10)
Becomes

<Probability that an effect will be executed in the eighth target gaming state>
From the above, the probability that any effect is executed in the eighth target game state is calculated from Expressions (8-5) and (8-10) as follows:
45342/65536 + 367/65536
= 45709/65536 Formula (8-11)
Becomes

<Comparison result of third target game state and eighth target game state>
The probability of executing any effect in the third target game state is given by the following equation (3-11).
13565/65536
It is. In addition, the probability of executing any effect in the eighth target game state is calculated from Expression (8-11) as follows.
45709/65536
It is.

Therefore,
13565/65536 <45709/65536 Formula (8-12)
Holds, and comparing the third target game state with the eighth target game state, the probability of executing any effect in the eighth target game state is higher than the probability of executing some effect in the third target game state. Is also configured to be high.

  As described above, in the eighth target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to the AT is a pullback (strong) state. On the other hand, in the third target game state, the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to the AT is the AT in-state. The eighth target game state is a withdrawal (strong) state in which the RT state shifts to a state in which the AT state is terminated while maintaining the RT state, and the withdrawal condition (in this example, re-game-D1 to D3 winning) If the state other than the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed), it is a state where there is a possibility that the state can be sufficiently returned to the AT-in-progress state. For this reason, it is preferable that the player has an expectation that the player can return to the AT-in-progress state. In the eighth target game state, the probability of executing any effect is higher than that in the third target game state. ing.

  In the eighth target game state, when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and is a “non-rare role”, if the condition device is a replay, “aiming effect” is always executed, while the condition device is a bell. In such a case, a configuration may be made such that the “target effect” is not executed. Further, in this example, the probability of executing any effect in the eighth target game state is configured to be higher than the probability of executing any effect in the third target game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By adjusting the frequency of occurrence of "target aiming" and the lottery probability of a loss, a bell, a replay, etc., the probability of executing any effect in the eighth target gaming state is to execute some effect in the third target gaming state. You may comprise so that it may become lower than a probability.

<<< Modification 1-3 >>>
In the flow of the representative state in the third embodiment described above, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, and after the bonus in the advantageous section ends, the state related to the AT is shifted to the AT in-state. Was.

  FIG. 170A is a block diagram showing an RT state transition diagram of Modification Example 1-3. FIG. 170 (B) is a block diagram showing an AT state transition diagram. Note that the RT state transition shown in FIG. 170 (A) and the AT state transition shown in FIG. 170 (B) selectively describe typical states, and have other RT states and states related to the AT. Can be.

  As shown in FIG. 170 (A), in the modified example 1-3, the RT state includes “RT0”, “RT1”, “RT2”, “under bonus internal winning”, and “bonus”. “RT0” is an RT state in which the condition device has the lowest probability of winning the re-game, and “RT1” is an RT state in which the condition device has the highest probability of winning the re-game.

  For example, when the RT state is “RT0”, when the replay 04 symbol is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to “RT1” (arrow (1)). When the RT state is "RT1" and the replay 06 symbol is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to "RT2" (arrow (2)). When the RT state is "RT1" or "RT2", when the winning 08 to 11 symbols are stopped and displayed, the flow shifts to "RT0" (arrow (3)).

  Furthermore, when the RT state is “RT0”, “RT1” or “RT2”, if the bonus is won, the process goes to “internal winning”, and if the “winning”, the bonus The symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the display shifts to "1 type BB-A, B, C", and returns to the original RT state when "1 type BB-A, B, C" is completed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 170 (B), when the game section is a normal section, the state relating to the AT is a normal state. In this normal state, the RT state is either “RT0” or “RT1”. Further, when the state relating to the AT is the normal state, the state relating to the AT changes to the AT-in-progress state by shifting the RT state to “RT2”. When a predetermined termination condition, for example, a condition that the AT counter becomes zero, is satisfied while the AT is in the AT state, the state related to the AT returns to the normal state. Although not shown, in the modified example 1-3, in a state where the player has shifted to RT1 by himself / herself, a push order replay game that can shift to RT2 (for example, a three-select push order replay game, If the game is stopped in order, the replay that shifts from RT1 to RT2 is stopped and displayed, and if the game is stopped in the push order of incorrect answers, the game that shifts from RT1 to RT0 is stopped and displayed (the replay that maintains RT1 is stopped and displayed). )), A push order game is generated ("?????" is displayed on the effect display device S40), and the push order in which the replay in which the game shifts to RT2 by itself is stopped is displayed. When it is hit, it is configured to shift to RT2 and to shift to the AT in progress state.

  Regardless of whether the game section is a normal section or an advantageous section, if a bonus is won, the process shifts to “internal winning”, and when “internal winning”, the symbol of the bonus is displayed. By stopping and displaying, the mode shifts to "1 type BB-A, B, C", and when "1 type BB-A, B, C" ends, the state returns to the original AT-related state.

  Modification 1-3 is a fifth example in which the game section is the normal section, the RT state is RT1 (the state has been shifted to RT1 by itself), and the state related to the AT is the normal state (low probability state). This is referred to as a target gaming state.

<Fifth target gaming state>
First, the probability that an effect is executed in the fifth target game state is
(A) When the condition device is “rare role” with no bonus overlap (b) When the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with no bonus overlap (c) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and “ (D) Calculate for each of the cases where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”. As described above, in the fifth target game state, the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to the AT is the low probability state.

<(A) When the condition device is a “rare role” with no bonus overlap>
When the game is executed in the fifth target game state, the winning rate at which the condition device becomes the “rare role” due to the non-overlapping bonus is added to the number of all the condition devices belonging to the bonus rare group “rare role”. It is obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (5-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105). The expression (5-1) can be calculated in the same manner as the expression (3-1) (refer to the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the fifth target gaming state, when the condition device is a bonus with no overlap and is "rare role", "no effect" is not selected, and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (FIG. 154 bonus non-overlapping, see "Rare Role" section). As shown in FIG. 154, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonuses, “character production” (25%), “conversation production” (25%), “cut-in production” (25%), “confrontation” Either effect of “effect” (25%) is selected. Therefore, in the fifth target game state, when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and is a “rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is:
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 Formula (5-2)
Becomes Here, the result of equation (5-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping>
The winning rate at which the condition device when the game is executed in the fifth target gaming state is “losing” and “non-rare role” due to non-overlapping bonuses is determined for all the groups belonging to the group “losing” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the numbers of the condition devices (see the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105). In particular,
(65536-367-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 Formula (5-3)
Becomes Here, the RT state of the fifth target game state is RT1, and Expression (5-3) can be calculated in the same manner as Expression (3-3).

In addition, when the game is executed in the fifth target game state, the winning rate at which the condition device becomes “losing” due to non-overlapping bonus is:
19827/65536 Formula (5-3-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105). Furthermore, the winning rate at which the condition device when the game is executed in the fifth target gaming state becomes the “non-rare role” due to the non-overlapping bonus,
(59965-19827) / 65536
= 40138/65536 Formula (5-3-2)
It is.

  Also, in the fifth target game state, when the condition device is “losing” due to non-overlapping bonus, the effect is executed with a probability of 50%. The probability of “no effect” is 50%, and the probability of performing any effect is 100−50 = 50. Specifically, as shown in the column of the group “losing” in FIG. 154, any one of “character production” (25%), “conversation production” (24%), and “showdown production” (1%) Is selected.

  Further, in the fifth target gaming state, when the condition device is the bonus non-overlapping and “non-rare role”, the probability of the effect being executed is 100%. Specifically, as shown in the columns of the groups “re-game” and “belt” in FIG. 154, “target aiming” is always executed.

Therefore, in the fifth target gaming state, when the condition device is “losing” and “non-rare role” with bonus non-overlapping, the probability of performing any effect is:
19827/65536 × 50/100
+ 40138/65536 × 100/100
$ 9914/65536 + 40138/65536
= 50052/65536 Formula (5-4)
Becomes Here, the results of Equations (5-3-1) and (5-3-2) were used.

<Probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus>
From the above, the probability that some effect will be executed when the condition device is non-overlapping in the fifth target game state is calculated from Expression (5-2) and Expression (5-4) from 5204/65536 + 50052/65536.
= 55256/65536 Formula (5-5)
Becomes

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is "rare role">
The winning rate at which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes a “rare role” when the game is executed in the fifth target gaming state is obtained by adding the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to the bonus overlap group “rare role”. Obtained by: In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 Formula (5-6)
Becomes The expression (5-6) can be calculated in the same manner as the expression (3-6) (see the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  In the case where the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the fifth target gaming state and is a “rare role”, the effect is executed with a probability of 93.75%. That is, as shown in FIG. 154, the probability of “no effect” in the group “rare role” is 6.25%, and the probability of performing any effect is 100−6.25 = 93.75. . Specifically, as shown in the column of “rare role” which overlaps with the bonus of FIG. 154, “character production” (6.25%), “conversation production” (12.5%), “cut-in production” (37.5%) or any of the effects of “showdown effect” (37.5%).

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the fifth target gaming state and is a “rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is
240/65536 × 93.75 / 100
= 225/65536 Formula (5-7)
Becomes Here, the result of equation (5-6) (“240/65536”) was used.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the fifth target game state, the winning rate at which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes “1 type BB” and “non-rare role” is the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role”. Is obtained by adding the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 Formula (5-8)
Becomes The expression (5-8) can be calculated in the same manner as the expression (3-8) (see the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  Further, in the fifth target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”, the effect is executed with a probability of 93.75%. That is, as shown in FIG. 61, the probability of “no effect” in the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role” is 6.25%, and the probability of performing any effect is 100-6. .25 = 93.75. Specifically, as shown in the column of the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role” in the bonus duplication of FIG. 154, “character production” (6.25%), “conversation production” (12 .5%) or any of the effects of “showdown effect” (75%).

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the fifth target game state and is “one type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability of performing any effect is as follows:
127/65536 × 93.75 / 100
$ 119/65536 Formula (5-9)
Becomes

<Probability that some effect is executed when the condition device overlaps with the bonus>
From the above, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the fifth target gaming state, the probability of performing any effect is calculated from Expression (5-7) and Expression (5-9) from 225/65536 + 119/65536.
= 344/65536 Formula (5-10)
Becomes

<Probability that an effect will be executed in the fifth target game state>
From the above, the probability that some effect is executed in the fifth target game state is calculated from the equations (5-5) and (5-10) as follows.
55256/65536 + 344/65536
= 55600/65536 Formula (5-11)
Becomes

<Comparison result of first target gaming state and fifth target gaming state>
The probability of executing any effect in the first target game state is calculated from Expression (1-11) as follows.
35511/65536
It is. In addition, the probability of executing any effect in the fifth target game state is calculated from Expression (5-11) as follows.
55600/65536
It is.

Therefore,
35531/65536 <55600/65536 Formula (5-12)
Holds, and when comparing the first target game state and the fifth target game state, the probability of executing any effect in the fifth target game state is higher than the probability of executing some effect in the first target game state. Is also configured to be high.

  As described above, in the first target game state, the game section is the normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to the AT is the normal state (low probability state). On the other hand, in the fifth target game state, the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1 (a state in which the state is shifted to RT1 by itself), and the state related to the AT is a normal state (a low probability state). Therefore, although the game sections in the target game state are both normal sections, the effect is more easily performed when the RT state is RT1 than when the RT state is RT0. .

  As described above, if the player looks at the advantageous section indicator YH, it can be determined whether or not the game section is currently an advantageous section. For this reason, if the game section can be recognized as a normal section, the willingness to play decreases, and during the normal section, various effects are frequently executed to enter the advantageous section. Expectation for the transition to the future. Furthermore, when the RT state changes, it can be an opportunity to change the type of the effect, and by not only increasing the frequency at which the effect is executed, but also executing the effect narrowed down to a certain one, Further, the sense of expectation can be increased, and by changing the effect in the normal section, the player is less likely to get tired and the motivation to continue the game can be increased.

<<< Modification 1-4 >>>
In the above-described effect content determination processing of FIG. 145, first, the scenario is determined, and then the specific effect is determined in the order. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, first, the effect contents may be determined by a lottery process, and then, if a scenario has not been determined, the scenario may be determined by a lottery process. Thus, when a scenario has not been determined, a specific effect can be immediately executed.

<<< Modification 1-5 >>>
Further, processing may be performed so as to determine the scenario and the effect contents at the same time. For example, the presence or absence of a scenario is associated with each effect content. Execute the production according to the scenario.

  For example, the numbers 1 to 99 of the lottery processing of the effect contents are assigned so as to execute the confrontation effect of one game, and the numbers 100 to 199 of the lottery processing of the effect contents are assigned to execute the character effect of one game. The allocation and the number of lottery processing of the effect contents are set to 200 to 299 so that a confrontation effect of four games is executed. When a confrontation effect of four games is determined, a confrontation effect is executed from the game to the fourth game. By executing such a lottery process, the scenario and the effect contents can be determined at the same time, and the process can be simplified.

<<<< Modification 1-6 >>>>
Further, other elements (parameters) such as an effect mode may be introduced. In the above-described example, the effect is determined based on the game section, the state related to the AT, and the RT state. Therefore, when these match, all are determined to be the same game state, and the effect contents are determined. The state of the game section, the state relating to the AT, and the RT state are determined by the main control board M, and the sub-control board determines the effect content by using other elements such as the effect mode to produce the effect. You can expand your choice of content. For example, it is possible to include the direction of change in the state according to the current RT state and the original RT state, and the state related to the current AT and the state related to the original AT, and to determine the effect mode by determining the effect mode based on these. The lottery table for determining the content can be different, and the effect can be further developed.

  For example, in the case of shifting to RT1 by itself in the low-probability state of the normal section and the case of returning to the normal section from the advantageous section while maintaining RT1 and in the low-probability state, the state relating to the game section and the AT and the RT state are: , But with a different direction of state change. By including such a direction of change, the effect can be easily developed.

<<<< Modification 1-7 >>>>
Furthermore, when a freeze effect is determined on the main control board M side, a specific effect lottery table may be referred to on the sub control board S side.

<<< 4th Embodiment >>>
As described above, in the third embodiment, the advantageous section has a single advantageous BB state.

  FIG. 171 is a block diagram showing an AT state transition diagram of the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 171, the advantageous section has four states A to D, and is configured to be able to shift from the normal section to any of the states A to D. Further, the state D is configured to be able to be shifted only from the normal section.

  In the fourth embodiment, the condition devices include cherry 1, cherry 2, cherry 3, and cherry 4 + 1 type BB-C. Further, in the second embodiment, the RT state mainly staying in the state A to the state C of the normal section and the advantageous section is RT0, and the RT state mainly staying in the state D of the advantageous section is more advantageous than the RT0. RT1 (the winning rate of the replay is high), and the RT state inside the BB and inside the advantageous BB is RT2 different from RT0 and RT1.

<State A>
When the cherry is won by the lottery process when the state relating to the AT is the low probability state, the state shifts to the “advantageous state A” of the state A of the advantageous section. When the player wins the BB in the "advantageous state A", the game proceeds to the "advantageous BB inside game", and thereafter, the symbol of the BB combination is stopped and displayed, thereby shifting to the "advantageous BB state" and executed. When the BB ends, the state returns to the advantageous state A. The state A is a state composed of the “advantageous state A”, the “game inside the advantageous BB”, and the “advantageous BB state”. The state returns to the low probability state on condition that the number of games executed in state A reaches a predetermined number A of games. For example, the number of games A can be set to 500 games or the like.

<State B>
When the state regarding the AT is the low probability state and the cherry 2 is won by the lottery process, the state shifts to the “advantageous state B” of the state B of the advantageous section. When the BB is won in the “advantageous state B”, the game shifts to the “advantageous BB inside game”, and thereafter, the symbol of the BB combination is stopped and displayed to shift to the “advantageous BB state” and executed. When BB ends, the state returns to the advantageous state B. The state B is a state including the “advantageous state B”, the “game inside the advantageous BB”, and the “advantageous BB state”. The state returns to the low probability state on condition that the number of games executed in state B reaches a predetermined number B of games. For example, the number of games B can be 300 games or the like.

<State C>
If the cherry is won by the lottery process when the state related to the AT is the low probability state, the state shifts to the “advantageous state C” of the state C of the advantageous section. When the BB is won in the "advantageous state C", the game shifts to the "advantageous BB inside game", and thereafter, the symbol of the BB combination is stopped and displayed, thereby shifting to the "advantageous BB state" and executed. When BB ends, the state returns to the advantageous state C. The state C is a state composed of the “advantageous state C”, the “game inside the advantageous BB”, and the “advantageous BB state”. The state returns to the low probability state on condition that the number of games executed in state B reaches a predetermined number of games C. For example, the number of games C can be set to 100 games. Thus, in the second embodiment, “the number of games A> the number of games B> the number of games C”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 171, when the state has shifted to the state A, the state B, and the state C, the pushing order bell can be executed when the pushing order bell is won for the first time, but the following pushing order bell is won. In the game that has been performed (the same applies to the game that has been selected for the pressing order replay), the pressing order navigation is not executed. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the state D described later, all the games that have been won in the pushing order bell and the games that have been won in the pushing order replaying game are configured to execute the pushing order navigation. The game state is more advantageous for the player than the game state.

<State D>
When the state related to the AT is the low probability state, the state is shifted to “state D” by winning of the cherry 4 + 1 type BB-C. "State D" of the second embodiment has the same configuration as the advantageous section of the present embodiment.

  When the state relating to the AT is the low probability state, and if the cherry 4 + 1 type BB-C is won by the lottery process, the state shifts to the advantageous section BB inside medium game in the advantageous section state D. By stopping and displaying the symbol of the BB combination in the “advantageous BB inside game”, the state shifts to the “advantageous BB state”. Upon completion of the executed BB, the state shifts to the AT preparation state 1, and the state shifts to the “AT in state” via the AT preparation state 2. The transition between “AT in progress”, “specialization precursor”, “additional specialization”, “after fall”, “in AT after fall”, and “after bell overflow” is implemented. Same as the form.

  When the state related to the AT is the “AT-in-progress state” and the AT counter value is 11 or more, the state shifts to the “additional specialization state” with half the probability of winning the watermelon B Acquire rights and move to a "specialized precursor" state. On the other hand, if the state relating to the AT is the “AT-in-progress state” and the AT counter value is 10 or less, even if the watermelon B is won, the right to shift to the “additional specialization state” is acquired. The lottery (which may also be referred to as a specialization state transition lottery) is not executed, and is configured not to transition to the “specialization precursor state” and the “additional specialization state”.

  Further, when the state related to the AT is the “specialization precursor state”, the state related to the AT shifts to the “additional specialization state” on condition that the stop display of the replay 07 symbol is performed. In the “additional specialization state”, the process returns to the “AT-in-progress state” on condition that the stop display of the replay game 06 symbol is performed.

  Further, as described above, similarly to the third embodiment, the state includes the “AT state after falling”, the “state after bell overflow”, and the “special state after falling”, and under the same transition condition. Can be migrated.

<< AT state transition control processing >>
172 and 173 are flowcharts illustrating a part of the AT state transition control processing according to the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 172 is processing corresponding to FIG. 114 of the third embodiment, and steps that perform the same processing as in FIG. 114 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the case of No in step 1402, when the process of step 3000 is performed, in step 5002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the low probability state. If Yes in step 5002, in step 5004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the status promotion combination (Cherry 1). If Yes in step 5004, in step 5006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the advantageous state A, and ends this subroutine.

  If No in step 5002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S proceeds to step 5020.

  If No in step 5004, in step 5008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device related to the game is the status promotion combination (Cherry 2). If Yes in step 5008, in step 5010, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the advantageous state B, and ends this subroutine.

  If No in step 5008, in step 5012, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the status promotion combination (Cherry 3). If Yes in step 5012, in step 5014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the advantageous state C, and ends this subroutine.

  If No in step 5012, in step 5016, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a status promotion combination (Cherry 4 + 1 type BB-C). If Yes in step 5016, in step 5018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the advantageous state D (advantageous inside middle game), and ends this subroutine.

  If No in step 5016, the CPU SC of the sub control board S shifts to step 5020.

  If No in step 5002 or step 5016, in step 5020, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the current state regarding the AT is the advantageous state A.

  If Yes in step 5020, in step 5022, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of games has reached the predetermined number A of games in the game.

  If Yes in step 5022, in step 5024, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the state regarding the AT after the next game as the low probability state, and ends this subroutine.

  If No in step 5020, in step 5026, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the current state related to the AT is the advantageous state B.

  If Yes in step 5026, in step 5028, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of games has reached the predetermined number B of games in the game.

  If Yes in step 5028, in step 5030, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the state regarding the AT after the next game as the low probability state, and ends this subroutine.

  If No in step 5026, in step 5032, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the current state related to the AT is the advantageous state C.

  If Yes in step 5032, in step 5034, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of games has reached a predetermined number of games C in the game.

  If Yes in step 5034, in step 5036, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the state regarding the AT after the next game to the low probability state, and ends this subroutine.

  Also in the case of No in step 5034, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S ends this subroutine.

  FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect performed when the gaming state changes. FIG. 174 (A) shows an effect that is executed when shifting from the advantageous state A to the normal section. When in the advantageous state A, a confrontation effect is executed, an effect for winning (success) is executed as a result of the confrontation, and the routine shifts to a normal section. On the other hand, FIG. 174 (B) shows an effect that is executed when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous state A. During the normal section, a confrontation effect is executed, and an effect of losing (failing) is executed as a result of the confrontation, and the state shifts to the advantageous state A. Note that FIG. 174 (A) is also an effect executed when shifting from the advantageous state B or the advantageous state C to the normal section, and FIG. 174 (B) is a transition from the ordinary section to the advantageous state B or the advantageous state C. It is also a production performed when you do. The effect of FIG. 174 (B) may be executed when the transition from the advantageous state A, the advantageous state B, or the advantageous state C to the normal section is not performed (when the number of games still remains). Further, FIG. 174 (A) is an effect executed when the state shifts from the normal section to the state D. Incidentally, since there is no transition from the advantageous state A, the advantageous state B or the advantageous state C to the state D, FIG. 174 (A) is not executed in the advantageous state A, the advantageous state B or the advantageous state C.

<<<< Modification 2-1 >>>>
In the example described above, the termination conditions of the advantageous section states A to C are based on the completion of a predetermined number of games A to C. However, a predetermined condition device, for example, winning -A1 to winning -A6 is won. The game may be returned to the normal section when the symbols of winning 01, winning 02, or winning 03 are stopped and displayed in the game. Before the predetermined number of games A to C is exhausted, it is possible to return to the normal section, and to make it possible to advance the timing of shifting to the advantageous section state D, thereby causing the transition to the advantageous section state D to be expected. Can be. In addition, even if the predetermined number of games A to C is subtracted based on the winning of the prize-C, the prize-D, or the prize-E, the possibility that the timing at which the state can be shifted to the advantageous section state D is advanced. This can be expected to shift to the advantageous section state D.

<<< Modification 2-2 >>>
Further, in the above-described example, the transition from the state A to the state D of the advantageous section has to be performed once through the normal section. State. In particular, it is possible to make a transition from any one of the states A to C in the advantageous section to the state D. For example, by winning such as a rare combination (“winning-B”, “winning-C”, “winning-D”, “winning-E”), it is possible to shift to another advantageous section state. By doing so, it is possible to expect that the state can be directly shifted to the state D even in the state A to the state C in the advantageous section.

<<<< Modification Example 2-3 >>>>
Furthermore, in the above-described example, the termination condition of the advantageous section states A to C is based on the digestion of a fixed number of games A to C. However, these game numbers A to C are determined by a lottery process. You may do so. For example, the number of games A to C can be determined by referring to a table in which the numbers are different for each of the states A to C of the advantageous section. Specifically, in the case of state A, the number is set so that 10 games are 10%, 50 games are 10%, 100 games are 10%, 300 games are 30%, and 500 games are 40%. The average number of games can be 306 games. In the case of state B, the number is set so that 10 games are 20%, 50 games are 20%, 100 games are 20%, 300 games are 20%, and 500 games are 20%. Into 192 games. In the case of state C, the number is set so that 10 games are 50%, 50 games are 30%, 100 games are 20%, 300 games are 0%, and 500 games are 0%. Into 40 games. By doing so, even when the state shifts from the state A to the state C in the advantageous section, there is a possibility that the game can return to the normal section with a small number of games, and the expectation of the player can be increased.

<<<< Modification 2-4 >>>>
In addition, as described above, the RT state that mainly stays in the state A to the state C of the normal section and the advantageous section is RT0, but the RT state with the highest stay rate is the state A to the state of the advantageous section. An RT state with a high stay rate in C may be configured as RT5 (an RT state that shifts by stopping and displaying the cherries 1 to 3), and an RT state with a high stay rate in a normal section may be configured as RT0. The development of the game can be diversified. Further, by configuring the winning rate of the replay in RT0 to be higher than that in RT5, the winning rate of the replay is higher in the normal section than in the state A to the state C of the advantageous section. It can be configured as follows.

<<< Rare role suggestion effect >>>
An execution mode of an effect applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail below. The rare effect suggestion effect is an effect performed in the game that has won the rare role, and is a notice effect that suggests to the player that the rare role has been won in the game. A preview effect executed only in a game that has won the rare role may be a rare effect suggestion effect, or all advance effects performed in a game that has won the rare role may be rare effect suggestion effects.

  In addition, the timing at which the player can recognize that the player has won the rare role may be used as the start timing of the rare role suggestion effect, or the timing at which the image or the like at which the player can guess the winning role of the game being executed is displayed. May be used as the start timing of the rare part suggestion effect. As an example of the start timing of the rare role suggestion production, (1) an image of a pattern color related to the rare role (a red apple is related to cherry, a green apple is related to watermelon, etc.) (2) An image of a color having a relatively high expectation of a rare combination (a color in which a pattern related to the color does not exist, for example, purple) is started. Start timing of display of symbols and characters related to the role (“CHANCE”, “!”, “!?”, Etc.); (4) Execution start timing of an action having a relatively high expectation of a rare role (character jumps) (5) Preliminary production start timing (for example, a character starts a “stumble on stone” action as an action with a relatively low expectation of a rare role) Place Also, only to have the possibility to which the action is to win the rare role).

  The rare role suggestion effect is not limited to the effect displayed on the effect display device S40. The effect sound output from the speaker S20 may indicate the rare role, and the lighting mode of the decorative lamp unit D150 may be used. You may suggest a rare role. That is, a rare role suggestion effect in a configuration in which the execution timing of the rare effect suggestion effect is compared between the execution of the continuous effect and the non-execution of the continuous effect described later may be used as the effect sound output from the speaker S20, or the decorative lamp unit. The lighting mode of D150 may be used. Further, these may be combined, and for example, the execution timing of the rare combination suggestion effect, which is the display on the effect display device S40, and the rare combination suggestion effect, which is the lighting mode of the decorative lamp unit D150, may be compared. .

Further, the rare role may be defined as follows.
<Definition 1>
A role with a relatively low appearance rate may be a rare role. For example, a condition device in which a lottery probability (winning probability) is 1/50 or less in all RT states except during a bonus, and a role excluding a bonus role May be a rare role. When applied to this embodiment, re-game-B, re-game-C, winning-C, winning-D, and winning-E are rare. It should be noted that the winning number of “BB role + rare role” (duplicate role of BB role and rare role) such as “1 type BB-B + winning-C” of the winning number 21 is also included in the rare role. You may.

<Definition 2>
A role other than the acquisition of a game medal, which is likely to be high profit (or relatively high) for the player, may be a rare role. For example, the state relating to the AT shifts to an advantageous state (“low probability state → high probability state”, etc.), and when applied to the present embodiment, winning-C, winning-D, and winning-E are lost. Rare role.

<Definition 3>
A role that has a relatively high expectation that overlaps with the bonus role may be a rare role. For example, a role that overlaps with the bonus with a probability of 1/100 (1%) or more in a situation that is not inside the bonus. May be a rare role. More specifically, as the hand including the cherry of winning-C, the number to be won in the winning number 14 not overlapping with the bonus hand is “1000”, and the winning number 21 overlapping with the bonus hand is Since the winning number of 25 is "40 + 40 = 80", the expected degree of winning the bonus role when winning the role including winning-C is "80/1080 × 100 / 7.4%". And winning prize-C will be a rare role. When applied to the present embodiment, winning-C, winning-D, and winning-E are rare.

<Definition 4>
Of the winning numbers excluding the winning number including the bonus role and the loss, the role having only one winning number corresponding to one effect group number may be the rare role (bonus execution). When applied to the present embodiment, re-game-A, re-game-B, re-game-C, prize-B, prize-C, prize-D, and prize-E serve as rare roles. In addition, among the winning numbers excluding the winning number that results in a loss, a role having only one condition device (winning or replaying) corresponding to one effect group number may be a rare role. When defined in this way, the winning number 14 differs from the winning number 14 winning type-C and the winning number 21 type BB-B + winning-C. Therefore, the condition difference except for the bonus is the same (overlapping), and the role becomes a rare role. When applied to the present embodiment, re-game-A, re-game-B, re-game-C, prize-B, prize-C, prize-D, and prize-E serve as rare roles.

  Further, a condition device or a winning number similar to that of the third embodiment described above may be defined as a rare combination.

  Next, FIG. 175 is a diagram showing the occurrence timing of the rare combination suggestion effect. In the same figure, in the case of “(a) Normal production”, a production completed in one game (a production that is not a continuous production) is a winning-C cherry and a rare combination suggestion production is executed. In the game in the middle of the execution of "(b) continuous production (night mode)", the case where the winning combination -C is won and the rare combination suggestion production is executed is illustrated.

  First, "(a) Normal production" will be described. Note that the normal effect is a game executed in a situation where the continuous effect is not executed.

  In “(a) Normal production”, the start lever is operated, and the rotation of the reel starts. In this game, a cherry (winning-C) is won as a result of the internal lottery. After the start lever operation, the rare role suggestion effect has not occurred (when the start lever operation is performed). Thereafter, the rare combination suggestion effect does not occur even after the first stop button operation and the second stop button operation. After that, after the third stop button is operated, a rare role suggestion effect “red apple (many)” is generated, which indicates that there is a possibility that the cherry is won in the game being executed. In addition, "red apples (many)" is a production in which a large amount of red apples fall from a tree, suggesting that the cherry pattern has been elected because the design is based on red. ing. It is to be noted that indicating that the cherry has been won means that the winning number including the cherry has been won. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the winning number 14 of “winning-C” ”, The winning number 21“ 1 type BB-B + winning-C ”or the winning number 25“ 1 type BB-C + winning-C ”. When the reels are stopped in the order of “left reel → center reel → right reel”, the first stop is a left reel, the second stop is a middle reel, and the third stop is a right reel. As described above, at the time of the (a) normal effect in the drawing, the operation of the third stop button is triggered to start the execution of the rare combination suggestion effect.

  Next, “(b) continuous production (night mode)” will be described. In the same drawing, a case where no bonus is won will be exemplified. First, in the first game of the continuous production performed over four games, the start lever is operated in a situation where the background production is in the night mode, and the rotation of the reels starts. In this game, the result of the internal lottery is lost, and in this game, the rare combination suggestion effect is not executed. Next, in the second game of the continuous production performed over the four games, the start lever is operated and the rotation of the reels is started. In this game, a cherry (win-C) has been won as a result of an internal lottery, and when the start lever is operated (in other words, before the first stop button is operated), the rare role suggestion effect "CHANCE" Is displayed. The "CHANCE!" Is continuously displayed until the next game is started (the display may be deleted after the third stop button is operated). In this way, when a rare role is won during a continuous production, the timing at which a rare role suggestion production occurs is relatively earlier than when the rare role is won during a discontinuous production. . With such a configuration, in a game in which the possibility of winning a bonus or AT is relatively higher than in a non-continuous production, the rare role is won in the “continuous production”, and the game is more likely than in the non-continuous production. By suggesting the winning of the rare role at a relatively early timing, it is possible to clearly notify that the game requires eye-catching, and the player can concentrate on the result of the continuous production. Also, the player does not get discouraged by missing the rare role during "continuous production" (that is, does not cause a misunderstanding such as that the result of the continuous production was not successful because the rare role was missed) ) It is possible to develop the production as follows. Here, "Red apple (many)" and "CHANCE!" Are illustrated as the productions that indicate that the cherry has been won. However, "Red apple (many)" and "CHANCE!" A configuration that indicates that there is a high possibility of winning in any one of them (for example, cherry, watermelon, chance, etc.) may be used. Also, as a rare role suggestion effect corresponding to cherry, it may be configured to have a red apple (many) and a red apple (small). By adjusting the appearance frequency of the effect, the red apple (many) is more likely to overlap with the bonus, is more likely to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player, etc. It is possible to provide a high-performance gaming machine. In the same figure, the game executed in the situation where the continuous effect is not executed and the game executed during the execution of the continuous effect are compared. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A situation in which a scenario that has not been performed is determined to be a game in which the above-mentioned “scenario no (none)” is determined, and a game executed during the execution of the continuous production is determined to be a game other than the above-described “scenario no (none)”. Games. The same applies to the configuration relating to the continuous production described later. Also, in the case of executing the red apple (many), the red apple (many) is displayed by the third stop operation as compared with the case where the red apple (many) is displayed by the first stop operation. The case may be such that the possibility of overlapping with the bonus is higher, the possibility of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher, and so on. With such a configuration, the later the timing at which the rare role suggestion effect is executed is likely to be more profitable to the player, the more the start lever on → first stop operation → second stop operation → third stop operation ", It is possible to raise the expectation that the rare role suggestion production has not been executed yet.

  Next, FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating the occurrence timing of the rare combination suggestion effect in the game in which the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. In this figure, the operation is the same as that of FIG. 175, and therefore only the differences will be described. Both “(a) during normal production” and “(b) during continuous production” are normal sections, and in the game executed in a state where the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off, the cherry is won. After that, the third stop button is operated and the last reel is stopped, and then the advantageous section is set, so that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. In other words, in the game in which the advantageous section indicator YH controlled by the CPU C100 of the main control board M is newly lit, the execution start timing of the rare role suggestion effect in the game that has won the rare role during the discontinuous effect. The execution start timing of the rare role suggestion effect in the game that has won the rare role during the continuous effect is configured to be relatively earlier. With this configuration, it is suggested at a relatively early timing that an event advantageous to the player may have occurred (for example, a rare role has been won) in the game that triggered the execution of the continuous production. It is possible to reduce the possibility of the rare role being missed and to pay attention to the continuous production. In addition, "It is a normal section and the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off. → It is elected to the first rare role. → It is a normal section and the advantageous section indicator YH is still extinguished, and it is elected to the first rare role. As a trigger, the continuous production of the four games is executed. → The second rare role is won in the second game of the continuous production. → By winning the second rare role, an advantageous section is formed after the third stop. In the case where the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on, it is possible to recognize that the continuous production is being performed with the first rare role being won, and to confirm the advantageous section indicator YH. As a result, it is possible to confirm that the advantageous section has been triggered by the election of the second rare role, and the rare role (the first rare role), which triggered the continuous production, and the rare elected during the continuous production. Role (the second rare role It is possible to prevent a situation in which confuse or should be expected to either of the.

  Next, FIG. 177 is a diagram showing the occurrence timing of the rare combination suggestion effect at the time of the normal effect and at the time of determining the bonus. "(A) Normal production" is the same as that in FIG. “(B) When the bonus is confirmed” is an example of an operation when displaying a bonus confirmation screen that informs the player that the bonus has been won. As an example, `` Winning of the overlapping role of the rare role and the bonus role → execution of the continuous production → notification of the success of the continuous production as a result of the continuous production → the bonus confirmation screen is displayed from the next game → The bonus symbol is stopped and displayed → the bonus confirmation screen is erased, and the screen is displayed during the bonus ”. In addition, when the bonus role is stopped and displayed before the result of the continuous production is announced after the winning of the overlapping role of the rare role and the bonus role (or a game for reporting the result of the continuous production), The screen is displayed during the bonus without displaying the bonus confirmation screen.

  The operation of "(b) When the bonus is determined" will be described in detail. "Bonus determined!" Indicating that the bonus has been won and the bonus has been determined is displayed, and the bonus determination screen is displayed. In a game executed in a situation where the bonus is inside the bonus (for example, the state related to the AT is “normal BB inside game”), when the cherry is won, after the start lever is operated (in other words, the first stop button) Before the operation of (i.e., after the game start condition is satisfied), “CHANCE!” Is displayed as a rare combination suggestion effect. The “CHANCE!” Is continuously displayed until the next game starts (or until the last reel stops). In other words, when the rare role is won while the bonus confirmation screen is being displayed (during the inside of the bonus), the execution is performed in a state where the normal production is not performed (the continuous production is not performed and the bonus confirmation screen is not displayed). This may be during a non-bonus game or during a bonus game.) It is configured. With this configuration, when the bonus is determined, the bonus combination has already been won and the player is concentrated on stopping the bonus combination, so the bonus combination is stopped. Since it is assumed that the player is not concentrated in a game other than the game in which the rare role is possible, it is possible to prevent the rare role from being missed by suggesting that the possibility of the rare role is relatively high relatively quickly. Here, "Red apple (many)" and "CHANCE!" Are illustrated as the productions that indicate that the cherry has been won. However, "Red apple (many)" and "CHANCE!" A configuration that indicates that there is a high possibility of winning in any one of them (for example, cherry, watermelon, chance, etc.) may be used. As shown in the figure, the display mode of the rare role suggestion effect displayed when the rare role is won in the game executed during the display of the bonus confirmation screen, and the process executed during the execution of the continuous effect. May be the same as the display mode of the rare role suggestion effect displayed by winning the rare role in the game, or may be displayed by winning the rare role in the game executed during the display of the bonus confirmation screen. The display mode of the rare role suggestion effect to be displayed may be different from the display mode of the rare role suggestion effect displayed by winning the rare role in the game executed during the execution of the continuous effect. .

  Next, FIG. 178 is an example of a rare combination suggestion effect selection mode applicable to this example. The table in the upper part of the drawing illustrates, as an example of a case where the rare role is won, the selection ratio of the effect executed in the game that has been won the cherry for each situation. It should be noted that the selection rate in the figure is a rate at which the effect is selected as a result.

  First, in the upper part of the figure, the selection mode of the rare combination suggestion effect at the time of cherry winning will be described in detail. During the non-execution of the continuous production during the AT (the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation occurs, for example, during the AT), the common production, the fruit production, and the cut-in production can be executed as the rare role suggestion production. It is configured. A common effect (for example, an effect similar to the above-described common navigation effect) is selected in 80/256 when a cherry is won during the non-execution of the continuous effect in AT, and 50/256 of the operations of the start lever are performed. The rare role suggestion effect is started at the opportunity, the rare role suggestion effect is started at 5/256 when the first stop button is operated, and the rare role suggestion effect is triggered at the 5/256 operation of the second stop button. Is started, and 5/256 starts execution of the rare combination suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the third stop button.

  Next, a fruit effect (the above-mentioned apple red (many) or the like is a fruit effect) is selected at 80/256 when the cherry is won during the non-execution of the continuous effect during AT, and 0/256 of them is selected. When the start lever operation is performed, the rare role suggestion effect is started to be executed (when the fruit effect is performed, the rare role suggestion effect is not performed when the start lever is operated). , The rare role suggestion effect is started to be executed, 30/256 is triggered by the operation of the second stop button, and the rare role suggestion effect is started, and 15/256 is triggered by the operation of the third stop button. The performance starts.

  Next, the cut-in effect is selected at 96/256 when the cherry is won during the non-execution of the continuous effect during the AT, and 36/256 of them start executing the rare role suggestion effect when the start lever is operated. Then, on 15/256, the rare role suggestion effect is started when the first stop button is operated, and on 10/256, the rare role suggestion effect is started when the second stop button is operated, and on 35/256, the rare role suggestion effect is started. The execution of the rare combination suggestion effect is started with the operation of the third stop button.

  As described above, the rare combination suggestion effect executed when the continuous effect is not executed during the AT has a case where the execution is not started with the start lever as an opportunity or a case where the execution is started at the timing after the first stop button. . Although FIG. 5 shows that the continuous effect is not being executed, a situation where the bonus confirmation screen is not displayed is shown. Note that the effect execution start timing is in the order of “start lever → first stop → second stop → third stop” from an earlier timing.

  Next, it is configured such that a CHANCE effect can be executed as a rare role suggesting effect during the execution of the continuous effect during the AT. The CHANCE production is selected at 256/256 when the cherry is won during the execution of the continuous production during AT. In other words, when the cherry is won during the execution of the continuous production during AT, only the CHANCE production is performed. The execution of the rare combination suggestion effect is started when 256/256 (all) of them are operated by operating the start lever.

  Next, a CHANCE effect may be executed as a rare combination suggestion effect during the display of the bonus confirmation screen during the AT (for example, the state regarding the AT when the bonus confirmation screen is displayed, for example, during the advantageous BB inside game). It is configured as follows. The CHANCE production is selected by 256/256 when the cherry is won during the display of the bonus confirmation screen during the AT. In other words, the CHANCE production is performed when the cherry is won during the display of the bonus confirmation screen during the AT. Are executed, and among them, 256/256 (all) start execution of the rare combination suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the start lever.

  In this manner, when the rare role (cherry in the figure) is won during the AT, the rare role is won during the execution of the continuous production than when the rare role is won during the non-execution of the continuous production. Is configured such that the execution of the rare role suggestion effect is easily started at a relatively early timing. Also, when the player wins the rare role (cherry in the same figure) during the AT, the player wins the rare role while the bonus confirmation screen is displayed rather than when the bonus confirmation screen is not displayed. Is configured such that the execution of the rare role suggestion effect is easily started at a relatively early timing.

  Next, in a non-AT state (a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation is not executed, for example, in a low probability state), if the rare role is won during the non-execution of the continuous production, It is configured such that a common effect, a jump effect, and a cut-in effect can be executed.

  The common effect is selected at 80/256 when a cherry is won during the non-AT continuous effect not being executed, and among them, 50/256 starts performing the rare role suggestion effect when the start lever is operated, and 5 / 256 starts execution of the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the first stop button, 5/256 starts the rare position suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the second stop button, and 5/256 executes the third stop The execution of the rare role suggestion effect is started with the operation of the button.

  Next, the jump effect is selected at 80/256 when the cherry is won during the non-AT continuous effect is not being executed, and 0/256 of the effects are started when the start lever is operated. (At the time of the fruit effect execution, the rare role suggestion effect is not executed when the start lever is operated.) 35/256 starts the rare role suggestion effect when the first stop button is operated, and 30/256 starts. The rare combination suggestion effect is started when the second stop button is operated, and the rare combination suggestion effect is started on 15/256 when the third stop button is operated.

  Next, the cut-in effect is selected at 96/256 when the cherry is won during the non-AT continuous effect is not being executed, and 36/256 of these effects are triggered by the operation of the start lever. 15/256 starts execution of a rare role suggestion effect triggered by operation of the first stop button, and 10/256 starts execution of a rare role suggestion effect triggered by operation of the second stop button. The execution of the rare combination suggestion effect is started when the third stop button is operated.

  As described above, the rare combination suggestion effect that is executed when the continuous effect is not executed during the non-AT has a case where the execution is not started with the start lever as an opportunity, or a case where the execution is started at the timing after the first stop button. I have. Although FIG. 5 shows that the continuous effect is not being executed, a situation where the bonus confirmation screen is not displayed is shown. Note that the effect execution start timing is in the order of “start lever → first stop → second stop → third stop” from an earlier timing.

  Next, it is configured such that a CHANCE effect can be executed as a rare role suggestion effect during the execution of the continuous effect during non-AT. The CHANCE production is selected by 256/256 when a cherry is won during the execution of the continuous production during the non-AT. In other words, when the cherry is won during the execution of the continuous production during the non-AT, the CHANCE production is performed. Are executed, and among them, 256/256 (all) start execution of the rare combination suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the start lever.

  Next, a CHANCE effect is executed as a rare combination suggestion effect during the display of the bonus confirmation screen during the non-AT (when the bonus confirmation screen is displayed, for example, during the normal BB internal middle game). It is configured to obtain. The CHANCE effect is selected by 256/256 when the cherry is won during the display of the bonus confirmation screen during the non-AT. In other words, when the cherry is won during the display of the bonus confirmation screen during the non-AT. Only the CHANCE effect is executed, and among them, 256/256 (all) start the rare combination suggestion effect when the start lever is operated.

  Thus, when the rare role (cherry in the figure) is won during the non-AT, the rare role is won during the execution of the continuous production than when the rare role is won during the non-execution of the continuous production. In the case, it is configured such that the execution of the rare combination suggestion effect is easily started at a relatively early timing. Also, when a rare role (cherry in the same figure) is won during a non-AT, the rare role is won during the display of the bonus confirmation screen than when the rare role is won while the bonus confirmation screen is not displayed. In the case, it is configured such that the execution of the rare combination suggestion effect is easily started at a relatively early timing.

  First, the manner of selecting an effect at the time of winning in the pushing order will be described in detail in the lower part of FIG. During an AT (a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation occurs, for example, during an AT), the start lever of the start lever is displayed during execution of the continuous production, non-execution of the continuous production, and display of the bonus confirmation screen. The push order navigation effect is executed with the operation as a trigger. In addition, during non-AT (a state related to an AT in which the pushing order navigation does not occur, for example, a low probability state), during the execution of the continuous effect, no effect is selected at all (all the operations are triggered by the operation of the start lever). Although the effect is not executed, the announcement effect corresponding to the winning of the pushing order bell is not executed due to the operation of the start lever because the operation of the start lever is performed), all the pressing order navigation effect is selected while the bonus confirmation screen is displayed, and the continuous effect During the non-execution of, a common effect, a jump effect, a conversation effect, a cut-in effect, and no effect can be selected. In addition, during the non-AT continuous performance is not being executed (while the bonus confirmation screen is not being displayed), the announcement effect execution start timing when the push order bell is won may be triggered by the operation of the start lever, The operation may be triggered by operation of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button. In addition, when the continuous production is not performed, the same production (for example, a cut-in production) may be performed when the push order bell is won and when the cherry (rare role) is won. The CHANCE effect, which is a rare combination suggestion effect that is executed during the execution of the effect or during the display of the bonus confirmation screen, cannot be executed at the time of winning the pushing order bell. That is, when the player visually recognizes the CHANCE effect as the rare effect suggestion effect, the player can recognize that the rare role has been won.

  In the figure, only the case where a cherry is won as a rare role is illustrated. However, when a configuration is adopted in which a cherry and a watermelon A are provided as a rare role, the cherry is won during the non-execution of the continuous production during the AT. In such a game, apple red (many) is configured to be executed as a fruit effect, and in a game in which the watermelon A is won during the non-execution of the continuous effect during AT, apple green (many) is executed as a fruit effect. And during the non-execution of the continuous production during the AT, the rare role suggestion production can be executed in a different production mode depending on whether to win the cherry or the watermelon A. In a game that has won the cherry during the continuous production of "ACH", "CHANCE!" Is displayed as the CHANCE production, and the watermelon A is won during the continuous production during the AT. During the continuous production during the AT, even if the player wins either Cherry or Watermelon A, the rare role is displayed in the same production mode so that "CHANCE!" You may comprise so that a suggestion effect may be performed. Further, even during the execution of the continuous production during the AT, it may be configured such that the rare role suggestion production can be performed in different production modes depending on whether the cherry is won or the watermelon A is won. In the case of the configuration, in the game that has won the cherry during the non-execution of the continuous production during the AT, the production mode of the rare contribution suggestion production and the rare contribution suggestion production in the game that has won the watermelon A are the same as the ratio. , During the execution of the continuous production during the AT, the ratio in which the production mode of the rare combination suggested effect in the game won as the cherry and the rare combination suggested effect in the game elected as the watermelon A becomes higher is higher. Is preferred.

  Similarly, when the game is configured to have cherry and watermelon A as the rare role, in the game that has won the cherry while the bonus confirmation screen during the AT is not displayed, apple red (many) is produced as a fruit effect. In the game which is configured to be executed and in which the watermelon A is won while the bonus confirmation screen during the AT is not displayed, the apple green (many) is configured to be executed as a fruit effect, and the bonus confirmation screen during the AT is executed. Is hidden, the rare role suggestion effect is configured to be executed in different effect modes depending on which of the cherry and the watermelon A is won, and the cherry is won during the display of the bonus confirmation screen during AT. In the game, “CHANCE!” Is displayed as a CHANCE effect, and the game that has won watermelon A while the bonus confirmation screen during AT is being displayed is displayed. Even when the bonus confirmation screen during the AT is displayed, as in the CHANCE production, "CHANCE!" Is displayed. You may comprise so that an effect may be performed. In addition, even during the display of the bonus confirmation screen during the AT, the rare role suggestion effect may be executed in a different effect mode depending on whether the cherry is won or the watermelon A. In the case of the configuration described above, the ratio in which the production mode of the rare role suggestion effect and the rare effect suggestion effect in the game selected for watermelon A are the same in the game that has won the cherry while the bonus confirmation screen during the AT is not displayed. During the display of the bonus confirmation screen during the AT, the ratio at which the rendering mode of the rare role suggestion effect in the game won as the cherry and the rare role suggestion effect in the game elected as the watermelon A becomes the same is higher. It is preferable to configure as follows. The above configuration has been described in detail only during AT, but this is merely an example, and the same configuration can be applied to a production mode of a rare combination suggestion production during non-AT.

  With this configuration, an event that is advantageous to the player may have occurred in the game that triggered the execution of the continuous production, so if the rare role was won during the execution of the continuous production, By notifying the player of the rare role suggestion effect with a simple display and at an earlier timing than when the rare role is won during the non-execution of the effect, the possibility of the player missing the rare position is reduced. And the player can concentrate on the results of the continuous production. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which of the rare role that triggered the execution of the continuous production and the rare combination that was won during the execution of the continuous production.

  In this specification, the description that B is more easily executed than A includes the case where A is not executed, and the rate at which B is executed is higher than the rate at which A is executed. Note that the description "includes the case where A is not executed."

(Fifth embodiment)
In the third embodiment, a game machine having a high degree of interest is created by enabling a freeze that delays the progress of a game, but the execution condition of the freeze is that of the third embodiment. Is not limited. Therefore, a configuration of a spinning-type gaming machine capable of executing a freeze different from the configuration of the third embodiment will be described as a fifth embodiment, and only differences from the third embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 179 is a flowchart of a freeze lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3100 in FIG. 112 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the third embodiment is step 3140, that is, in step 3140, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a combination including a bonus. In the case of Yes in step 3140, in step 3106, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific freeze execution lottery in which the winning is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10). Next, in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the specific freeze execution lottery executed in step 3106 has been won. If Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the freeze execution flag. Next, in step 3112, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a specific freeze execution command (command to the sub-control board S side), and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1550). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 3140 or 3108, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1550).

  Here, the right side of the figure is a list of winning numbers in which a specific freeze can be executed. In the same drawing, the numerical value when the set value is set to 1 is illustrated. In addition, the total number of entries is 65536. For example, when the number of entries is 10, it indicates that the winning is achieved by 10/65536. As shown in the drawing, the combination including the bonus in the determination processing of step 3140 is the winning numbers 19 to 40, and the single bonus combination of the winning numbers 19, 20, and 24 (duplicate with the winning combination and the replaying combination) A role of only a bonus role that has not been won), a “rare role + bonus role” which is an overlapping role of the rare role and the bonus role of the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27, and a winning number of 24 to 40 It is composed of "rare role + bonus role" which is an overlapping role of a non-rare role and a bonus role. Here, the rare role in the figure is winning-C (cherry), winning-D (watermelon A) and winning E (watermelon B), and the non-rare role is replay-A, winning- A1, winning-A2, winning-A3, winning-A4, winning-A5, and winning-A6. That is, as in the above-described “Definition 1”, in the fifth embodiment, a role having a relatively low appearance rate is a rare role, and a lottery probability (winning probability) is obtained in all RT states except during a bonus. A condition device that is 1/50 or less is used as a rare role. With this configuration, the probability of executing the specific freeze execution lottery by winning the rare role is (40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40) / 65536 = 240/65536, and executing the specific freeze execution lottery by winning the non-rare role. Probability is (1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) / 65536 = 7/65536, and the configuration is such that the specific freeze execution lottery is more easily executed when the rare role is won than the non-rare role, in other words, the specific freeze is easily executed. Have been. In a game in which a specific freeze is executed, a specific freeze effect is executed on the sub control board S side.

  Also, the definition of the rare role is not limited to this, and if it is defined in the same way as the above-mentioned “Definition 4”, winning-C (cherry), winning-D (watermelon A) and winning E (watermelon B) , Re-game-A, and the non-rare roles are winning-A1, winning-A2, winning-A3, winning-A4, winning-A5, and winning-A6. That is, a role having only one condition device (winning role or replaying role) corresponding to one effect group number can be set as a rare role among the winning numbers excluding the winning number that results in a loss. .

  In such a configuration, the effect group number corresponding to the winning-C is “7” in all of the winning numbers 14, 21, and 25, and the effect group number corresponding to the winning-D is the winning number 15 , 22, and 26 are all "8", and the effect group number corresponding to the winning-E is "9" in all the winning numbers 16, 23, and 27, and corresponds to the replay-A. The effect group number is “1” in all of the winning numbers 1 and 34, and there is only one condition device (winning or replay) corresponding to one effect group number. On the other hand, prize-A1, prize-A2, prize-A3, prize-A4, prize-A5, and prize-A6 have different condition devices, but the corresponding effect group numbers are all "5". . As described above, even when the rare role and the non-rare role are defined, the probability of winning the rare role and executing the specific freeze execution lottery is (40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 1) / 65536 = 241/65536. The probability that the specific freeze execution lottery is executed after being won is (1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) / 65536 = 6/65536, and the specific freeze execution lottery is more easily executed when the rare role is won than the non-rare role. Then, it is configured such that the specific freeze is easily executed. With such a configuration, a specific freeze is more likely to be executed at the time of winning a rare role in which an advantageous event (winning of a bonus in the drawing) is relatively likely to occur for the player than at the time of winning a non-rare role. It is possible to configure a gaming machine that appropriately executes a freeze.

Also, the specific freeze may be executed only when the rare role is won, or the execution mode (freeze time) of the freeze and the effect mode on the sub-control board S side may be different for each rare role. Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to associate the condition device (winning part or replaying part) serving as a rare combination with the production group number on a one-to-one basis, and to grasp (limit) the winning combination from the production group number. It is possible to simply execute a freeze effect unique to the winning combination.

  Next, FIG. 180 is a button effect execution image in the fifth embodiment. It should be noted that the embodiment to which the button effects illustrated in the drawing can be applied is not limited to only the fifth embodiment, but can be applied to all embodiments illustrated in this example.

  First, (a) shown in the upper part of FIG. In a normal game state (a non-AT state in which the push order navigation is not executed, for example, a "low probability state"), the start lever is operated to execute the game (reel rotation starts). Thereafter, in a situation where the reels are rotating and the first stop operation is not executed (the first stop button is not operated and all the reels are rotating), the button effect of the sub input button is performed as a button effect. An image prompting the player to perform an operation is displayed. Thereafter, the sub input button is operated, and the above-mentioned red apple (many) is displayed. Note that, in the game, a case where a cherry is won is illustrated. As described above, in the present example, the button effect is configured to be displayed also as an execution trigger of the rare combination suggestion effect described above. In the case where the button effect is executed in the normal game state and the rare-portion suggestion effect is executed by operating the sub input button, the start lever operation is triggered in the above-mentioned “AT state”. As a result, the execution of the rare role suggestion effect is started at a timing later than the execution of the rare role suggestion effect. In the case of such a configuration, when "reel rotation starts → button effect starts display → sub input button is operated → first stop button is operated", operation of the sub input button is performed. If the red apple (many) is displayed as an opportunity and the following message is displayed: “Start reel rotation → Start button effect display → First stop button is operated → Sub input button is operated” A configuration may be adopted in which red apples (many) are not displayed upon operation.

  Next, (b) shown in the lower part of FIG. During an AT (a game state in which a push order navigation can be executed, for example, an “AT state”), a start lever is operated to execute a game (reel rotation starts), and rare in the game. Since the player has won the role of cherry, "!!!!" which is a rare role suggestion effect is displayed when the start lever is operated. Thereafter, a third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed, and after all reels stop, an image prompting the player to operate the sub input button is displayed as a button effect. Although FIG. 5 illustrates the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry is stopped and displayed, the player mistakenly performs the reel stop operation (pushing) and the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry is stopped and displayed. A button effect may be configured to be executed even when there is no button effect. Thereafter, the sub input button is operated, and “+ 50G” is displayed as a display for notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added. As described above, in this example, the button effect is configured to be able to be displayed even when the additional number of AT games is notified.

  It should be noted that the button effects illustrated in the drawing can be configured to be executable in various situations, but when the rare role is won, when the AT lottery is won, or when the number of AT games is added (previous (Including the case where the additional number of AT games has occurred before the game and the additional number of AT games has not been notified), and the like, it is easily executed when the degree of expectation that an advantageous result for the player occurs is relatively high. You may comprise so that it may become. As an example of such a configuration, a configuration in which a button effect is more likely to occur when a rare role is won than when a role other than a rare role is won can be exemplified. Also, when the rare role is defined as in the above-described “Definition 4”, the condition device (winning role or replaying role) corresponding to one production group number out of the winning numbers excluding the winning number that results in a loss. ) Can be exemplified so that a button effect is more easily executed in a game that has won a rare role, which is only one role, than in a game that has won a role other than the rare role. With this configuration, it is possible to make the button production a production with a relatively high degree of expectation, and it is possible to manage the button production by the production group number, thereby configuring a gaming machine that is not easily damaged by fraud. be able to.

  In addition, the above-described vague presentation (fuzzy announcement) can be exemplified by a configuration in which the vague presentation is less likely to occur when the rare role is won than when the role other than the rare role is won. Also, when the rare role is defined as in the above-described “Definition 4”, the condition device (winning role or replaying role) corresponding to one effect group number out of the winning numbers excluding the winning number that results in a loss. ) Can be exemplified so that a game that has won the rare role, which is only one role, is less likely to execute an ambiguous effect than a game that has won a role other than the rare role. With such a configuration, the vague production can be a production with relatively low expectation, a difference from other productions such as a button production can be provided, and the vague production is managed by the production group number. A gaming machine that is less susceptible to fraud. Similarly, for the various productions having a difference in the production occurrence probability between the rare role winning and the rare combination winning described above, the rare combination is defined using the production group number and the production occurrence probability is compared. It should be noted that is possible.

  In addition, the configuration in which the rare combination is defined based on the number of types of the winning numbers corresponding to the production group numbers and the production occurrence probabilities are compared has been described above. When transmission is possible only in the “section”, the effect generation probability in the “normal section” may be compared.

<<<< Character selection screen >>>>
Next, a configuration relating to a character selection screen applicable to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the effect configuration described below is applicable to all the embodiments illustrated in this example.

<< 1st pattern >>
First, FIG. 181 is a transition diagram when a determination is made by operating the start lever of the first pattern. First, in the game that has transitioned to the AT-in-progress state, a display of “lunar stage entry” is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a display indicating that the AT is to be started (sometimes referred to as an AT start screen) (AT You may perform a freeze at the start). Next, after the third stop of the game in which the AT start screen is displayed, a character selection screen is displayed. Note that, after the third stop one game before the transition to the “AT-in-progress state”, a “lunar stage entry” or a character selection screen may be displayed. As a presentation mode of the character selection screen, one selection candidate character (here, elephant) is lit (highlighted), and the other selection candidate characters (here, lion and giraffe) are dark. (Not highlighted). Note that the configuration is such that the glowing selection candidate character is changed (the glowing character changes) every predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and the character is determined by the timing at which the player performs the determination operation. It is configured. In the figure, as a determination operation, by operating a start lever (by performing a game start operation) in a state in which a specified number is bet, a glowing character (here, an elephant) is determined, and AT (Lunar stage) starts, and the screen during reel rotation in the AT state is displayed. In the figure, the case where the start lever, which is the operation member controlled on the main control board M side, is operated as the determination operation, but the max bet button is operated as the operation member controlled on the main control board M side. The bet may be determined by making a bet. It is preferable that the operation of the settlement button (payment of game medals) is not determined.

  In addition, when a game medal is settled by operating the settlement button in a state where the character selection screen is not displayed, the standby screen may be displayed, while the settlement button is operated while the character selection screen is displayed. When the medals are settled, the standby screen may not be displayed. In addition, the standby screen may be displayed even when the game medal is settled by operating the payment button while the character selection screen is being displayed. In such a case, the standby screen may be displayed. It is preferable that the character is not determined even if a game medal is inserted during the display. Furthermore, the character may not be determined even if the sub input button is operated while the standby screen is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where a character is determined even when the character selection screen is not displayed, and the player can smoothly determine a desired character. Can be configured.

  Next, FIG. 182 is a transition diagram in a case where the determination is made by operating the sub-input button of the first pattern. First, in the game that has transitioned to the AT-in-progress state, a display of “lunar stage entry” is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a display indicating that the AT is to be started (sometimes referred to as an AT start screen) (AT You may perform a freeze at the beginning.) Next, after the third stop of the game in which the AT start screen is displayed, a character selection screen is displayed. In addition, after the third stop one game before the transition to the “at-AT state”, a “lunar stage entry” or a character selection screen may be displayed. As a production mode of the character selection screen, one selection candidate character (here, elephant) is lit (highlighted), and the other selection candidate characters (here, lion and giraffe) are dark. (Not highlighted). Note that the configuration is such that the glowing selection candidate character is changed (the glowing character changes) every predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and the character is determined by the timing at which the player performs the determination operation. It is configured. Next, as a determination operation, a sub input button, which is an operation member controlled on the sub control board S side, is operated to determine the glowing character and to display "Elephant determined". It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a notification image. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the display of "decided to be an elephant", which is the decision notification image, is erased, AT (the lunar stage) starts, and the reel rotating in the AT in-state is displayed. A similar screen will be displayed. If the game is started by operating the start lever before the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the decision notification image is displayed at the game start time (the start lever operation reception time). The screen is erased and the reel rotating screen in the AT-in-state is displayed.

  Thus, at the time of the selection operation by the player (here, the operation for selecting the character), the case where the player operates the start lever which is the operation member controlled on the main control board M side and the case where the sub control board is operated The display mode of the effect is different between the case where the sub input button which is the operation member controlled on the S side is operated, in other words, the player operates the start lever which is the operation member controlled on the main control board M side. In this case, the determined notification image is not displayed, and when the sub input button, which is an operation member controlled by the sub-control board S, is operated, the determined notification image is displayed. The player confused which of the sub input button, which is the operation member on the sub side, and the start lever, which is the operation member on the main side, which affected the result of the game, was operated. It is possible to prevent the Ukoto. In addition, by executing the effect that is displayed only when the sub input button is pressed, it is possible to motivate the player to press the sub input button, and the player who wants to enjoy the effect can press the sub input button. By operating, the effect can be enjoyed, and a player who wants to progress the game can quickly progress the game by operating the start lever.

  When the bet button, which is an operation member on the main side, which affects the game result, is operated in the same manner as when the start lever is operated. Is clearly distinguished by a difference in the effect transition between the case where the operation member is operated and the operation member on the sub side which does not affect the result of the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. . The music at the start of the AT is the same when the main operation member (start lever, bet button) is operated and when the sub operation member (sub input button) is operated. Or may be configured differently.

<< 2nd pattern >>
Next, FIG. 183 is a transition diagram in a case where the determination is made by operating the start lever of the second pattern. First, in the game that has transitioned to the AT-in-progress state, a display of “lunar stage entry” is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a display indicating that the AT is to be started (sometimes referred to as an AT start screen) (AT You may perform a freeze at the start). Thereafter, in a situation where all reels are stopped and a predetermined condition (for example, the operating member controlled by the main control board M is not operated for 5 seconds after all reels are stopped) is satisfied, the sub input is performed. When the button is operated, a customization screen (sometimes referred to as a menu screen) is displayed on the effect display device S40. While the customization screen is displayed, the user selects which customization (for example, music selection, volume adjustment, character selection, light amount adjustment, etc.) to be performed by operating the cross key and the sub input button. Here, move the cursor to "Song selection" by operating the cross key and operate the sub input button to select "Song selection", and move to the song selection screen to select which song to select Then, the cursor is positioned on song A. Thereafter, when the player operates the start lever (satisfies the game start condition) in a situation where the music has not been determined and the specified number has been bet, the music whose cursor is set (here, , Song A), the reels for the next game start to rotate, and the reel rotating screen in the AT state is displayed.

  Next, FIG. 184 is a transition diagram in a case where determination is made by operating the sub-input button of the second pattern. First, in the game that has transitioned to the AT-in-progress state, a display of “lunar stage entry” is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a display indicating that the AT is to be started (sometimes referred to as an AT start screen) (AT You may perform a freeze at the beginning.) Thereafter, in a situation where all reels are stopped and a predetermined condition (for example, the operating member controlled by the main control board M is not operated for 5 seconds after all reels are stopped) is satisfied, the sub input is performed. When the button is operated, a customization screen (sometimes referred to as a menu screen) is displayed on the effect display device S40. While the customization screen is displayed, the user selects which customization (for example, music selection, volume adjustment, character selection, light amount adjustment, etc.) to be performed by operating the cross key and the sub input button. Here, move the cursor to "Song selection" by operating the cross key and operate the sub input button to select "Song selection", and move to the song selection screen to select which song to select Then, the cursor is positioned on song A. Then, when the sub input button is operated again in a situation where the cursor is positioned on song A, the song on which the cursor is positioned (here, song A) is determined, and “determine on song A”. Is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a decision notification image. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the display of “decided to be song A”, which is the decision notification image, is erased, AT (the lunar stage) starts, and the reel is spinning in the AT in-state. Will be displayed. In addition, when the song is determined by operating the sub input button or when the start lever is operated to determine the song, the determined song is the song to which the cursor is set. It has become.

  As described above, also in the customization screen, similarly to FIGS. 181 and 182, the game display mode is configured to be different between when the player operates the start lever and when the sub input button is operated. The player may be confused as to which of the sub input button, which is the sub-side operation member that does not affect the result of the game, and the start lever, which is the main side operation member, which has an effect on the game result, is operated. Can be prevented. In addition, by executing an effect that is displayed only when the sub input button is pressed, it is possible to motivate the player to press the sub input button, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As described above, when the operation member (for example, the sub input button) controlled on the sub-control board S is operated during the execution of the customization screen (menu screen), the character selection screen, the button effect, and the like, the identification is performed. An effect (for example, a decision notification image) is displayed, and when an operation member (for example, a start lever) controlled on the main control board M side is operated, a specific effect (for example, a decision notification image) is not displayed. With this configuration, it is easy to determine whether the player has operated the operation member controlled on the sub-control board S side or the operation member controlled on the main control board M side, and the player is confused. It is possible to configure a gaming machine that does not allow the game machine to be operated. In the above, it is determined that a determination operation has been performed (for example, a character has been determined) when a game start condition is satisfied by operating a start lever as an operation member controlled on the main control board M side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to determine that a determination operation has been performed (for example, a character has been determined) by operating various bet buttons such as a max bet button. . In such a configuration, since various bet buttons such as the max bet button are operation members controlled on the main control board M side, even if the determination operation is performed by operating the various bet buttons such as the max bet button. The specific effect is not executed.

<<<< Configuration related to back lamp production >>>>
Next, a configuration relating to a character selection screen applicable to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the effect configuration described below is applicable to all the embodiments illustrated in this example.

  Next, FIG. 185 and FIG. 186 are diagrams showing the lighting pattern of the reel by the turning backlight S30. First, "(a) when replay is established" will be described with reference to FIG. In the figure, the effective line is one of the middle horizontal lines, that is, the "middle left reel, middle middle reel, middle right reel" is the effective line. Although the effective line is one of the middle horizontal lines in the figure, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is a line descending to the right as in this embodiment, such as “upper left reel, middle reel middle, right reel. There is no problem even if it is a "lower" line, and there is no problem even if the number of valid lines is not one. First, a symbol combination corresponding to a replaying combination is stopped and displayed on a line that is not an active line (a line that is lower right and is a line of “left reel upper stage, middle reel middle stage, right reel lower stage”).

  Note that the symbol on the reel corresponding to the re-playing role is a replay A symbol in which the letter "R" is drawn in a circle (since the names of the symbols on the reel are the same as in the present embodiment, , See FIGS. 7 to 9), and the player recognizes that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination has stopped and displayed by visually recognizing that the replay A symbol has been stopped and displayed in a straight line. . In the same figure, in the game won as the replay, the replay A symbol is stopped and displayed in a straight line on the lower right line which is not the effective line, but since the effective line is in the middle line, The symbol stopped and displayed on the activated line is “Black Seven Replay A. Bell”. At this time, should the player see the symbol combination of “Black Seven Replay A Bell” on the activated line or should see the symbol combination of “Replay A / Replay A / Replay A” falling to the right May be confused. Actually, you can look at either (replay (replay) with “Black Seven Replay A. Bell”, which has the same meaning as Replay A symbol arrangement, which is an apparent symbol arrangement). However, it is preferable to provide a notification in a unified notification mode so that even if a confusion occurs, the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the figure, a back lamp effect of lighting the backlight of the reels in the order of left reel → middle reel → right reel is executed (left → middle → right lighting pattern). Although details will be described later, the turning backlight S30 is configured to be able to be turned on and off for each area corresponding to each symbol stop position of each reel. Corresponding area, area corresponding to the left reel middle, area corresponding to the left reel lower, area corresponding to the middle reel upper, area corresponding to the middle reel middle, area corresponding to the middle reel lower, and corresponding to the upper right reel At least nine regions, that is, a region corresponding to the middle stage of the right reel and a region corresponding to the lower stage of the right reel, are configured to be able to be turned on and off (lighting control is possible) by dividing at least nine regions.

  Note that the left-> center-> right lighting pattern shown in the figure is a lighting pattern corresponding to the replaying role, so that a player who is not used to the gaming machine (has not played much) can play the game. Even if the active line and the stop display combination (symbol combination of the winning combination) are unknown, the player can easily recognize that the game is the replay by the lighting pattern.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186, “(b) when the bell is established” will be described. In FIG. 186, as in the case of “(a) When replay is established” in FIG. 185, the effective line is one of the middle horizontal lines. First, a symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is stopped and displayed on a line that is not an active line (a line that rises to the right and is a line of “left reel lower stage, middle reel middle stage, right reel upper stage”).

  The symbol on the reel corresponding to the role of the bell is a bell symbol (the names of the symbols on the reel are the same as in the present embodiment, so refer to FIGS. 7 to 9). By visually recognizing that has been stopped and displayed in a straight line, it is recognized that the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination has been stopped and displayed. In the same figure, in the game in which the bell role is won, the bell symbol is stopped and displayed in a straight line on the upward-sloping line which is not the above-mentioned active line. Is stopped and displayed as "Replay B, Bell Replay A". At this time, the player is confused whether to see the symbol combination of “Replay B, Bell, Replay A” on the activated line, or to see the symbol combination of “Bell, Bell, Bell” falling to the right. There is fear. Actually, you can look at either one ("Replay B, Bell, Replay A", which is a bell, and has the same meaning as the bell symbol arrangement, which is an apparent symbol arrangement). However, it is preferable that the notification is made in a unified notification manner so that the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the same figure, a back lamp effect in which the backlight of the reel is turned on so as to swirl counterclockwise is executed.

  Since the lighting pattern that swirls counterclockwise as shown in the figure is a lighting pattern corresponding to the role of a bell, a player who is not used to the gaming machine is playing a game, and an active line or stop display is performed. Even if the role (symbol combination of the winning role) is unknown, the player can easily recognize the bell by the lighting pattern.

  With this configuration, even if the same symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the activated line due to the design of the gaming machine (the symbols are not aligned), the player does not mistakenly recognize the winning combination (stop display combination). Can be configured.

  Next, FIG. 187 is an execution image of a back lamp effect applicable to this example. As described above, in the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example, the area corresponding to the upper left reel, the area corresponding to the middle left reel, the area corresponding to the lower left reel, the area corresponding to the upper middle reel, At least nine areas of the area corresponding to the middle reel of the reel, the area corresponding to the lower middle reel, the area corresponding to the upper right reel, the area corresponding to the middle middle of the right reel, and the area corresponding to the lower middle of the right reel are divided and turned on and turned on. In the figure, the area corresponding to the upper left reel = 1, the area corresponding to the middle left reel = 2, the area corresponding to the lower left reel = 3, the middle reel in FIG. Area corresponding to upper row = 4, area corresponding to middle reel middle row = 5, area corresponding to middle reel lower row = 6, area corresponding to upper right reel = 7, area corresponding to right reel middle row = 8, right reel under And it is described as an area = 9 corresponding to. Note that the valid lines are “2”, “5”, and “8”.

  First, the details of the backlamp effect when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is stopped and displayed in the “bell stop display” in the upper part of FIG. During the rotation of the reel (while any of the reels are rotating), the back lamp is configured to light up all the areas from “1” to “9”. Hereinafter, description will be made using a table shown in the upper left part of FIG. In this table, time elapses from left to right.

(1) First, in a situation where the reels are rotating and the back lamps in all the areas from “1” to “9” are lit, a third stop operation (final stop operation) is executed, and the bell The symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped and displayed.
(2) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: lighting”, “2: lighting”, “3: off”, “4: lighting”, “5: lighting”, “6: off”, “7: lighting”. "," 8: ON ", and" 9: OFF ".
(3) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: lighting”, “2: lighting”, “3: lighting”, “4: lighting”, “5: lighting”, “6: lighting”, “7: turning off”. "," 8: turn off ", and" 9: turn off ".
(4) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: off”, “2: on”, “3: on”, “4: off”, “5: on”, “6: on”, “7: off” "," 8: lighting ", and" 9: lighting ".
(5) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: off”, “2: off”, “3: on”, “4: on”, “5: on”, “6: on”, “7: on” "," 8: lighting ", and" 9: lighting ".
(6) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: lighting”, “2: off”, “3: lighting”, “4: lighting”, “5: off”, “6: lighting”, “7: lighting”. "," 8: lighting ", and" 9: lighting ".
(7) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: lighting”, “2: lighting”, “3: lighting”, “4: lighting”, “5: off”, “6: lighting”, “7: lighting”. "," 8: lighting ", and" 9: lighting ".
(8) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: lighting”, “2: lighting”, “3: lighting”, “4: lighting”, “5: lighting”, “6: lighting”, “7: lighting”. "," 8: lighting ", and" 9: lighting ".

  As described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination (exemplifying the bell in the push order) is stopped and displayed, the backlight of the reel is turned on in a counterclockwise spiral as a back lamp effect. It is configured to execute a back lamp effect. It should be noted that the back lamp effect may be executed only when the symbol combination corresponding to the pressing order bell combination is stopped and displayed, or the back lamp effect may be executed even when the common bell is won. May be. Also, at the time of the winning of the bell in the pushing order, the above-described backlamp effect is executed only when the symbol combination which becomes the maximum payout number is stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination which becomes the payout number smaller than the maximum payout number is stopped and displayed. , A back lamp effect may not be executed or a back lamp effect may be executed in an effect mode different from the above.

  Next, the upper right part of the figure is an example of a symbol combination corresponding to a bell role (push order bell role). (A) As shown in (a), "bell, bell, bell" stops on the activated line, and (b), the activated line is a different line and the symbol stop position on the activated line. The case where "bell, bell, bell" stops on the line rising to the right that partially overlaps (the middle reel is the symbol stop position where the middle row overlaps) and, as shown in FIG. A case where "bell, bell, bell" stops on a line in a lower straight line which is a different line and does not overlap with the symbol stop position on the activated line can be exemplified. In this way, by visually recognizing that the player has stopped and displayed in a straight line, the bell symbol that recognizes that the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination has been stopped and displayed is the case where all three symbols are stopped and displayed on the activated line, There is a case where only one (partially) stop display is performed and a case where no stop display is performed. In any of the stop displays, the same backlamp effect corresponding to the bell combination is executed. This allows the player to proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable. In addition, even when no bell symbol is displayed on the activated line, the player is not required to misunderstand the player when the back lamp effect corresponding to the bell role is executed. The corresponding area (the area of “2”, “5”, and “8” in the figure) is always turned off once (“light-on → light-off → light-on”), so that the effective line It is configured to clearly notify the original symbol combination stopped and displayed above.

  Next, details of the backlamp effect when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed in the “replay stop display” at the bottom of FIG. During the rotation of the reel (while any of the reels are rotating), the back lamp is configured to light up all the areas from “1” to “9”. Hereinafter, description will be made using a table shown in the lower left part of FIG. In this table, time elapses from left to right.

(1) First, in a situation where the reels are rotating and the back lamps of all the areas from “1” to “9” are lit, the third stop operation (final stop operation) is executed, and The symbol combination corresponding to the gaming combination is stopped and displayed.
(2) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: lighting”, “2: lighting”, “3: lighting”, “4: lighting”, “5: lighting”, “6: lighting”, “7: lighting”. "," 8: lighting ", and" 9: lighting ".
(3) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: off”, “2: off”, “3: off”, “4: on”, “5: on”, “6: on”, “7: on” "," 8: lighting ", and" 9: lighting ".
(4) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: off”, “2: off”, “3: off”, “4: on”, “5: on”, “6: on”, “7: on” "," 8: lighting ", and" 9: lighting ".
(5) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: lighting”, “2: lighting”, “3: lighting”, “4: not lighting”, “5: not lighting”, “6: not lighting”, “7: lighting”. "," 8: lighting ", and" 9: lighting ".
(6) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: lighting”, “2: lighting”, “3: lighting”, “4: turning off”, “5: turning off”, “6: turning off”, “7: lighting”. "," 8: lighting ", and" 9: lighting ".
(7) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: lighting”, “2: lighting”, “3: lighting”, “4: lighting”, “5: lighting”, “6: lighting”, “7: turning off”. "," 8: turn off ", and" 9: turn off ".
(8) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: lighting”, “2: lighting”, “3: lighting”, “4: lighting”, “5: lighting”, “6: lighting”, “7: turning off”. "," 8: turn off ", and" 9: turn off ".

  As described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, a back lamp effect in which the backlight of the reel is turned on from left to right is executed as the back lamp effect. It should be noted that the back lamp effect may be configured to be executed only when the symbol combination corresponding to some of the replays is stopped, or the symbol combination corresponding to all the replays may be stopped and displayed. The backlamp effect may be executed only in such a case.

  Next, the lower right part of the drawing is an example of a symbol combination corresponding to the replaying role. As shown in (a), the case where “Replay A, Replay A, Replay A” stops on the active line, and as shown in (b), the active line is a different line and The case where “Replay A, Replay B, Replay A” stops at the line rising to the right that partially overlaps with the symbol stop position (the middle reel is the symbol stop position that overlaps the middle row), as shown in FIG. The case where “Replay A, Replay B, Replay B” is stopped on a line in the lower straight line which is a line different from the activated line and does not overlap with the symbol stop position on the activated line can be exemplified. . In this way, by visually recognizing that the player has stopped and displayed in a straight line, the replay A or the replay B is stopped and displayed in a straight line as a symbol to recognize that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination has been stopped and displayed. Just do it. Note that this does not apply in the case where the above-mentioned re-game-B or the like is won. In this manner, by visually recognizing that the player has stopped and displayed in a straight line, the replay A symbol and the replay B symbol, which recognize that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination has been stopped and displayed, are all three in the activated line. It is configured to have a case where a stop display is performed, a case where only one (partially) stop display is performed, and a case where no stop display is performed. , The player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable. In addition, even when neither the replay A symbol nor the replay B symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the activated line is not activated when the backlamp effect corresponding to the replay combination is executed so as not to mislead the player. The region corresponding to the upper symbol stop position (the region of "2", "5", "8" in the figure) is always turned off at least once ("light on → light off → light on"). By doing so, the original symbol combination stopped and displayed on the activated line is clearly notified. Note that the replay A symbol and the replay B symbol are similar in shape and design, and even if the same symbol is stopped in a straight line as in “replay A / replay A / replay A”, the player can use “replay B symbol”. Even if a similar symbol such as “Replay A / Replay A” stops in a straight line, it is configured to recognize that the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination has been stopped and displayed. The straight line may be an effective line or a straight line different from the effective line.

  In addition, even if a symbol combination different from that during normal rotation is apparently stopped and displayed due to the above-described reel rotation failure, the back lamp effect corresponding to the winning combination and the replaying combination stopped and displayed as internal processing is performed. By executing, the player can recognize which combination of symbols has been stopped and displayed.

  The lighting mode of the back lamp is different between the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B. The order and the flashing time of the area corresponding to the symbol stop position where the back lamp flashes (turns off) in the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B. The lighting mode may be different when the (light-off time) or the combination is different, and even if the symbol stop position where the back lamp blinks (turns off) in the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B is the same combination, The lighting mode may be different if the blinking speed of the lamp is different.

  Also, in the above, the case where the back lamp effect is executed after the symbol combination stop display after the third stop is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the back lamp effect is executed after the first stop or the second stop. May be configured. As a specific example, when the bell symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line (stop positions of “2”, “5”, and “8”) in FIG. 187, when the left reel is stopped as the first stop, “1” is displayed. And the back lamps corresponding to the areas "3" are turned off, and then, when the middle reel is stopped as the second stop, the back lamps corresponding to the areas "4" and "6" are turned off. When the right reel is stopped as the third stop, immediately after the back lamps corresponding to the regions “7” and “9” are turned off, the back lamp effect after the bell stop display illustrated in FIG. 187 is executed. You may comprise. With this configuration, the back lamp in the area corresponding to the activated line is not turned off in the first stop operation and the second stop operation, but is activated in the third stop operation (after all reels are stopped). The backlamp can be configured to be extinguished, and when any of the reels is spinning, in other words, when the player needs to perform a stop operation in the game being executed, the visibility of the active line is reduced. The back lamp in the area corresponding to the activated line is illuminated so as not to obstruct it, and after stopping all reels, it is not necessary for the technician to perform a stop operation in the game, so that the back lamp including the activated line is not By executing the back lamp effect using all the areas where the lamp can blink, the effect of the back lamp effect can be enhanced.

  Also, when the role of Bell is elected, the bell symbol may be aligned with a straight line different from the activated line, or when the replay symbol is elected, the replay symbol may be aligned with a linear line different from the activated line. With such a configuration, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the symbols on the reels is increased, and a more entertaining gaming machine can be created.

  In addition, the above-described decorative lamp unit may be configured to be able to execute a frame lamp effect to be turned on (flashing) at the time of a bell winning or a replay stop display. It is preferable that a frame lamp effect is executed in a corresponding effect mode. In other words, the effect of the frame lamp effect when the symbol combination corresponding to the pressing order bell is stopped and displayed is different from the effect of the frame lamp effect when the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying game is stopped and displayed. Is preferred.

<<<< Operation when the reels are stopped in the push order different from the push order navigation >>>>
Next, the operation when the reels are stopped in the pushing order different from the pushing order navigation applicable to the present example will be described in detail below. It is to be noted that the operation exemplified below is applicable to all the embodiments exemplified in this example.

  First, FIG. 188 and FIG. 189 are conceptual diagrams at the time of occurrence of push navigation during AT. First, "(a) Successful pressing order (during continuous production: warp production)" will be described. In this example, the game is in the “AT state”, which is a game state in which the push order navigation can be executed, and the continuous effect (warp effect) executed over a plurality of games described above is being executed. As a result of winning the bell, a push order navigation of “left → right → middle” has occurred.

  First, the left stop button corresponding to the first stop of the correct push order displayed on the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the first stop of the push order navigation (display of "1") is erased. The left reel stops. Next, the right stop button corresponding to the second stop of the correct answer displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the second stop of the push order navigation (display of “2”) is erased. , The right reel stops. Next, the middle stop button corresponding to the third stop of the correct push order displayed on the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the third stop of the push order navigation (display of “3”) is erased. , The middle reel stops. Since the stop button is operated in the order of pressing the correct answer, the 11 game medals with the largest payout number are awarded to the player at the time of winning the pressing order bell.

  Next, “(b) Failure in pressing order (during continuous production: warp production)” will be described. In this example, the game is in the “AT state”, which is a game state in which the push order navigation can be executed, and the continuous effect (warp effect) executed over a plurality of games described above is being executed. As a result of winning the bell, a push order navigation of “left → right → middle” has occurred.

  First, the left stop button corresponding to the first stop of the correct push order displayed on the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the first stop of the push order navigation (display of "1") is erased. The left reel stops. Next, the middle stop button is operated instead of the right stop button corresponding to the second stop of the correct push order displayed on the push order navigation, and the display corresponding to the third stop of the push order navigation ("3") Is erased, and the middle reel stops. After that, since the stop operation was not performed in the correct push order, the display of the push order navigation is erased. Thereafter, as a third stop, the right stop button is operated, and the right reel stops. Since the stop button was not operated in the order of the correct answer, one player medal having a payout number smaller than 11 having the largest payout number will be given to the player at the time of winning the push order bell.

  As described above, when the push order navigation is performed during the continuous rendering, the background rendering changes even when the reels are stopped in the correct pushing sequence or when the reels are stopped in the incorrect pushing sequence. It is configured not to be. Although not shown, when notifying (suggesting) that the continuous production has failed in the final game of the continuous production (for example, that the player has not won the additional number of AT games) as the notification of the result of the continuous production. Is configured so that the background effect darkens at any timing in the final game (for example, after the third stop operation). With this configuration, the pressing order navigation is executed during the execution of the continuous effect, and even if the player mistakenly operates the stop button and stops the reels in the pressing order of the incorrect answer, the background effect is also provided. Is not darkened, the player can continue to pay attention to the continuous production without erroneously recognizing that the result of the continuous production is unsuccessful even though the result of the continuous production is not notified.

  Next, "(c) Success in pressing order (during discontinuous production)" will be described. Here, the game state is the “AT state”, which is a game state in which the push order navigation can be executed, and the continuous effect (warp effect) executed over the plurality of games is not executed, and the push operation is performed. By winning the order bell, the push order navigation of "left → right → middle" has occurred.

  First, the left stop button corresponding to the first stop of the correct push order displayed on the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the first stop of the push order navigation (display of "1") is erased. The left reel stops. Next, the right stop button corresponding to the second stop of the correct answer displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the second stop of the push order navigation (display of “2”) is erased. , The right reel stops. Next, the middle stop button corresponding to the third stop of the correct push order displayed on the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the third stop of the push order navigation (display of “3”) is erased. , The middle reel stops. Since the stop button is operated in the order of pressing the correct answer, the 11 game medals with the largest payout number are awarded to the player at the time of winning the pressing order bell. In other words, when the stop button is operated in the same order as the pressing order navigation, there is a difference in the background effect between the continuous effect and the discontinuous effect during the AT, but other effect transitions (such as whether the background effect changes or not). The same applies to ()).

  Next, “(d) Failure in pressing order (during discontinuous production)” will be described. Here, the game state is the “AT state”, which is a game state in which the push order navigation can be executed, and the continuous effect (warp effect) executed over the plurality of games is not executed. By winning the order bell, the push order navigation of "left → right → middle" has occurred.

  First, the left stop button corresponding to the first stop of the correct push order displayed on the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the first stop of the push order navigation (display of "1") is erased. The left reel stops. Next, the middle stop button is operated instead of the right stop button corresponding to the second stop of the correct push order displayed on the push order navigation, and the display corresponding to the third stop of the push order navigation ("3") Is erased, and the middle reel stops. After that, since the stop operation was not performed in the correct push order, the display of the push order navigation is erased, and the background effect darkens. Thereafter, as a third stop, the right stop button is operated, and the right reel stops. Since the stop button was not operated in the order of the correct answer, one player medal having a payout number smaller than 11 having the largest payout number will be given to the player at the time of winning the push order bell. It should be noted that even when a reel different from the correct pressing order is stopped, the display of the pressing order navigation may be continuously displayed without being erased. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the display of the navigation in the pressing order is darkened as well as the background effect.

  As described above, in the situation where the continuous production is not performed, the player does not misidentify the player even if the background production is darkened when the reels are stopped in the pushing order different from the correct answer. By accurately notifying that there has been a disadvantageous operation to the player, the player plays the game with more care so as not to make a mistake in the pressing order in the next game in which the pressing order navigation is executed. As a result, disadvantages of the player can be prevented.

In this example, when the reels are stopped in the pushing order different from the pushing order navigation during the execution of the continuous production (the pushing order is incorrect), the screen does not darken (the brightness of the screen decreases). On the other hand, if the reels are stopped in the push order different from the push order navigation while the continuous production is not performed (the push order is incorrect), the screen darkens (screen Brightness is reduced and visibility is reduced), but is not limited thereto.
(1) If the reels are stopped in the push order different from the push order navigation during the execution of the continuous production (the push order is incorrect), the reels are stopped in the correct push order (stop button). (For example, an effect in which an enemy character is defeated) while the reel is stopped in a push order different from the push order navigation while the continuous effect is not executed (the push order is not correct). If the answer is correct), perform an effect different from the case where the reels are stopped in the order of pressing the correct answer (operate the stop button) (for example, an effect in which the enemy character cuts),
(2) If the reels are stopped in the push order different from the push order navigation during the execution of the continuous effect (when the push order is incorrect), the specific effect sound is not output, but the continuous effect is not performed. If the reels are stopped in the push order different from the push order navigation during the execution (when the push order is incorrect), a specific effect sound (for example, “awawa” is output) is output.
(3) If the reels are stopped in the push order different from the push order navigation during execution of the continuous effect (when the push order is incorrect), a specific effect (for example, an effect in which the screen darkens) is performed. When a non-executable and specific effect sound (for example, “Awakawa” is output) is output and the reels are stopped in a different push order than the push order navigation during the continuous effect (the push order was incorrect). Case) executes a specific effect and outputs a specific effect sound,
You may comprise as mentioned above.

<<<< Volume and BGM tempo >>>>
Next, an example of the configuration of the volume output from the speaker and the tempo of the BGM applicable to the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Note that the configuration exemplified below is applicable to all embodiments illustrated in this example.

  First, FIG. 190 is a diagram showing the volume of sound output from the speaker and the tempo of BGM. During a non-AT (a state related to an AT that does not execute the push order navigation, for example, a “low probability state”), four types of stay stages, a grassland stage, a desert stage, a wilderness stage, and a volcanic stage, and an AT stage (A state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, for example, an “AT state”), two types of stay stages of a lunar stage and a Saturn stage are provided as stay stages. Although FIG. 2 illustrates a case where only one type of BGM is output in one stay stage, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to be determined from among a plurality of types of selection candidates. In the case of such a configuration, the average tempo of the BGM in one stay stage may be calculated and compared for each game state. For example, in the (1) grassland stage, the first BGM having a tempo of 100 If the second BGM with a tempo of 60 can be output, the average tempo is set to 80 and the average tempo is compared for each game state, that is, (100 + 60) ÷ 2 = 80. The sum of the tempos is divided by the number of BGM types to calculate the average tempo, and the average tempo is compared for each gaming state. (2) In the grassland stage, the first BGM and the tempo 60, which are the tempo 100, are used. If a certain second BGM can be output and the output period ratio of the output BGM is “first BGM: second BGM = 2: 1”, (100 × 2 + 60) Assuming that the average tempo is 86.6 as in {3} 86.6, the average tempo is compared for each game state, that is, the average tempo is taken into account in consideration of the ratio of the output period of the output BGM. May be calculated, and the average tempo may be compared for each gaming state. The ratio of the output period of the output BGM may be the ratio of the average time during which the BGM is output in one stay stage, or the selection ratio of the BGM output in one game in one stay stage. It may be. When there is a period (time) during which BGM is not output, an average tempo in a period during which BGM is output in one stay stage may be calculated and compared for each game state. Note that the unit of the tempo shown in the drawing is not a problem as long as it is the same unit, but is, for example, BPM.

  The volume switch is an operation member that can be operated by opening the front door and that is controlled by the sub-control board S that can be operated only by the administrator. (Sometimes referred to as a master volume) can be adjusted, and the volume can be adjusted to three levels of “high”, “medium”, and “low”. Note that the three steps are merely examples, and the volume may be adjusted in more detail by a knob that can be rotated. Further, the volume of the sound output from the speaker can be adjusted by operating the sub input button or the cross key, which is an operation member controlled by the sub-control board S that can be operated by the player. The level can be adjusted to five levels of “level 1”, “level 2”, “level 3”, “level 4”, and “level 5” (the volume may be referred to as a sub input button volume). ). Note that the three steps are merely examples, and the volume may be adjusted in more detail. It is to be noted that the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the volume output from the speaker is determined by a combination of the volume setting (stage) of the volume switch and the volume setting (stage) of the sub input button volume. ing.

  In FIG. 190, the BGM tempos (average tempos) at the four types of stay stages during non-AT are, respectively, grassland stage: tempo 100, desert stage: tempo 90, wilderness stage: tempo 95, volcano stage: tempo 100, and so on. Has become. The two types of stay stages during the AT are a lunar stage: tempo 110 and a Saturn stage: tempo 120, respectively.

  In the four types of stay stages during non-AT, there is no difference in the sound volume due to the combination of the sub input button volume and the volume switch depending on the stay stage. When the volume switch is large, the level is 1:80 (unit: dB). , Level 2:82, level 3:85, level 4:90, level 5:90, when the volume switch is in the middle, level 1:75, level 2:78, level 3:80, level 4:85, level 5 : 88, when the volume switch is small, the level is 1: 1, level 2:68, level 3:70, level 4:72, level 5:75. Also, the two types of stay stages in the AT have no difference in the sound volume due to the combination of the sub input button volume and the volume switch depending on the stay stage. When the volume switch is large, the level 1:85, the level 2:89, Level 3:92, Level 4:92, Level 5:92, When the volume switch is medium, Level 1:80, Level 2:85, Level 3:90, Level 4:90, Level 5:90, Volume switch When it is small, the levels are level 1: 1, level 2:75, level 3:78, level 4:82, and level 5:85.

  In addition, when an error occurs, an error sound with a tempo of 80 (for example, "the door is open", "call a clerk", etc.) is output. The volume levels are 1-5: 95 when the volume switch is high, 1-5: 90 when the volume switch is medium, and 1-5: 78 when the volume switch is low. .

  Here, comparing the stay stage during non-AT and the stay stage during AT, the tempo of BGM in the stay stage during AT is (110 + 120) １２０2 = 115, and the BGM tempo in the stay stage during non-AT The tempo of BGM is (100 + 90 + 95 + 100) /4=96.25, and the tempo of BGM in the stay stage during AT is relatively faster than the tempo of BGM in the non-AT stay stage. .

  Further, at the same volume switch level (high, medium, low) and the same volume level (levels 1 to 5), the BGM volume in the stay stage during AT is relatively lower than the BGM volume in the non-AT stay stage. (Because they are the same or larger, the volume of the BGM in the entire AT is relatively higher than the volume of the BGM in the entire non-AT. By increasing the sound volume and the tempo relatively faster during the non-AT than during the AT, it is possible to increase the number of balls during the AT, which is an advantageous period for the player. In addition, when an error occurs, an error sound is output at a slower tempo (tempo 80) than during AT and non-AT. However, when the volume of the error sound is set to the same volume switch, the error sound is configured to be the same as or larger than during AT and non-AT, so that the clerk or the player at the game store may receive an error. Can be clearly recognized.

  Although the tempo and volume of the BGM during AT, non-AT, and at the time of an error have been described as examples, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a difference in the lighting mode of the LED. For example, when the AT is compared with the non-AT, the switching interval of the lighting mode of the LED may be shorter (the LED blinks flashy) during the AT. However, even if it is configured that the number of luminescent colors at one timing is likely to increase, it is possible to easily feel a sense of exaltation in which the number of payouts increases during AT, which is an advantageous period for the player.

  In FIG. 190, only one type of error sound is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode and volume of the error sound may be different depending on the type of error. In such a case, an error that has a large effect on the game result such as an unrecoverable error (an error of high importance, for example, a display determination error) is an error of low importance (for example, a medal). It is preferable that the sound volume is set to be relatively larger than the sound error.

  As described above, the configuration of the spinning-type gaming machine has been exemplified as the gaming machine, but the above-described configuration is applied to various types of gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, rock ball gaming machines, arrangement balls, game machines, casino machines, and the like. it can.

  Among the above-described configurations, the configuration regarding the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, the setting key switch, the setting / reset button, and the like (for example, the configuration illustrated in FIG. 59) is also applied to the pachinko gaming machine having the setting value Applicable.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiment. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above-described embodiments are added to these concepts, as well as combining and separating the concepts listed (upper concept). You may.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (1)
A belt-shaped reel tape (for example, a reel band MO) wound around an outer periphery of a reel base (for example, a reel frame MW);
On the reel tape, a plurality of types of symbols are arranged along a longitudinal direction of the reel tape,
The type of the symbol has at least a first symbol (for example, a white seven symbol) and a second symbol (for example, a bell symbol),
The maximum width value of the first symbol is configured to be larger than the maximum width value of the second symbol,
The second symbol is arranged on at least one of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape, and the first symbol is not arranged on each of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. ,
The gaming machine is characterized in that a length of the reel tape in a longitudinal direction is longer than an outer circumference of a surface of the reel base on which the reel tape is wound.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (2)
Gaming machine body,
A front door (for example, a front door DU) attached to the gaming machine body so as to be openable and closable;
In a revolving-type gaming machine having a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside a gaming machine body,
Inside the gaming machine body,
A pedestal portion on which the reel unit is installed (for example, a pedestal portion BU);
A main tank member (e.g., hopper H40) installed below the pedestal portion and storing game media;
An auxiliary tank member (e.g., a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed near the main tank member for retracting surplus game media stored in the main tank member;
Part of the main tank member is provided with a slope portion (for example, an inclined surface H64) descending from the main tank member to the auxiliary tank member,
The reel unit and the pedestal are detachably held by a locking part (for example, a screw BS),
A gaming machine, wherein the slope portion is located vertically below the locking component which is closest to the side on which the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (3)
Gaming machine body,
A front door (for example, a front door DU) attached to the gaming machine body so as to be openable and closable;
In a revolving-type gaming machine having a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside a gaming machine body,
Inside the gaming machine body,
A pedestal portion on which the reel unit is installed (for example, a pedestal portion BU);
A main tank member (e.g., hopper H40) installed below the pedestal portion and storing game media;
An auxiliary tank member (e.g., a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed near the main tank member for retracting surplus game media stored in the main tank member;
The reel unit and the pedestal are detachably held by a locking part (for example, a screw BS),
A gaming machine, wherein the auxiliary tank member is located vertically below the locking component that is closest to the side where the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to the present mode (4),
A plurality of reels (for example, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (for example, a stop button D40);
An effect display unit capable of displaying an effect (for example, an effect display device S40);
An operation member (for example, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2) capable of changing display contents of the effect,
After rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped according to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation is finally stopped among the plurality of reels. One game can be ended by performing a final stop switch operation that is an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel and stopping all of the plurality of reels,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, if a first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, , Standby screen) can be displayed.
When a predetermined operation member (for example, a sub input button SB) is operated after one game is completed, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the predetermined image is displayed by operating the predetermined operation member, a second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. Then, it is configured to be able to display the specific image in the effect display unit,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined time is longer than the first predetermined time.

The gaming machine according to the present mode (5),
A plurality of reels (for example, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (for example, a stop button D40);
An effect display unit capable of displaying an effect (for example, an effect display device S40);
An operation member (for example, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2) capable of changing display contents of the effect,
After rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped according to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation is finally stopped among the plurality of reels. One game can be ended by performing a final stop switch operation that is an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel and stopping all of the plurality of reels,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, if a first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, , Standby screen) can be displayed.
When a predetermined operation member (for example, a sub input button SB) is operated after one game is completed, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the predetermined image is displayed by operating the predetermined operation member, a second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. Then, it is configured to be able to display the specific image in the effect display unit,
The second predetermined time is configured to be longer than the first predetermined time,
When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, the second predetermined time is displayed while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. If a specific operation member (for example, the cross key SB2) is operated before the elapse of the predetermined time, the predetermined image is displayed and displayed at a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. 2 Even if the predetermined time has elapsed, the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, the stop switch is newly added before the first predetermined time elapses without a bet from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. Even if the above operation is performed, if the first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, the specific image can be displayed on the effect display unit. It is composed of
When the final stop switch operation is performed, if a bet is made before the first predetermined time elapses without a bet being made from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. Wherein, even if the first predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined timing after the last stop switch operation was performed, the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit. Machine.

The gaming machine according to the present mode (6),
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
A setting switch (e.g., a setting switch) that is electrically connected to the main game unit and operated to shift to a setting change mode (e.g., a setting change mode) in which a setting value related to the degree of advantage for the player can be changed. Key switch) and
The main game unit is configured to be able to execute an interrupt process that is a process executed at predetermined time intervals,
The power switch is turned off in a predetermined gaming state other than the setting change mode, the setting switch is turned on in a situation where power is not supplied to the gaming machine, power supply to the gaming machine is started, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode. If power is cut off after the power supply is started and power is supplied to the gaming machine after the setting switch is turned off, the game machine is configured to shift to the setting change mode,
A power failure occurs in a predetermined gaming state that is not the setting change mode, the setting switch is turned on under a situation where power is not supplied to the gaming machine, power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine, and from the start of supplying the power. If the power is cut off before the predetermined time elapses and the power supply to the gaming machine is started after the setting switch is turned off, it is configured not to shift to the setting change mode. It is a game machine characterized by this.

The gaming machine according to the present mode (7),
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
A stop switch (for example, a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, a right stop button D43) provided for each of the reels and operated by a player when stopping the rotation of the reels;
Storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game media within a predetermined number range;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) for outputting a production sound,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the output of the effect,
The main game department
Role lottery means for performing a role lottery,
When the stop switch is operated, reel control means for stopping and controlling the reel so as to correspond to the result of the lottery by the lottery means,
A storage number increase process for increasing the number of game media stored in the storage means,
And a payout process for paying out game media,
When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the reel control means, it is configured to be able to give a game medium to the player,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and when a specific number of game media is given, the storage number increasing process is executed. Is configured to execute payout processing without
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is provided. In the case, it is configured to execute the storage number increase process and not execute the payout process,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number When the game medium of is given, it is configured to execute the payout processing after executing the storage number increase processing,
The main game department
After the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the game medium provision information is configured to be transmitted to the sub game unit,
The sub game department,
Based on the reception of the game medium provision information, it is configured to be able to output from the speaker a game medium provision sound that is an effect sound related to the provision of the game medium,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and when the specific number of game media is provided, the game medium provision information Based on the reception of the game media, a predetermined game medium imparting sound (for example, a game medium imparting sound output when the credit increases by one, a game medium imparting sound output when one game medal is paid out) is generated. Output is possible,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is provided. In this case, the predetermined game medium providing sound can be output based on the reception of the game medium providing information,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number When the game medium is provided, it is possible to output the predetermined game medium provision sound based on the reception of the game medium provision information,
During execution of the stored number increasing process, the time value from when the number of game media stored in the storing means becomes A (A is a natural number) to A + 1, and N (N is a natural number and 2 ≦ N ) During the execution of the payout process for paying out the game media, M + 1 (M is a natural number and 1 ≦ M ≦ (N−1)) from the start of the payout process for the payout process for the (n) th game media A gaming machine characterized in that the time value until the start of the execution of the payout process for the eye game medium is different.

The gaming machine according to this mode (8) includes:
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
A sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect,
A game lamp (for example, a lamp unit) that can be turned on at the time of performing the effect,
A setting value display unit (for example, a setting display LED) capable of displaying a setting value,
The game lamp has a plurality of lighting patterns (for example, element 6 in FIG. 77),
The lighting pattern is configured by combining a plurality of lighting modes (for example, element 5 in FIG. 77),
The lighting mode is a combination of a lighting color (for example, element 1 in FIG. 77) and a lighting time pattern (for example, element 4 in FIG. 77).
The lighting time pattern is a combination of a lighting time (for example, element 2 in FIG. 77) and a light-off time (for example, element 3 in FIG. 77),
It has a plurality of the lighting colors, has a plurality of lighting times, has a plurality of lighting times,
As the lighting pattern, a first lighting pattern that can be executed when a predetermined abnormality occurs, a second lighting pattern that can be executed when a set value is displayed on the set value display section, And a third lighting pattern that can be implemented when the set value is not displayed in the section.
The first lighting pattern is configured to include a predetermined lighting mode,
The second lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured not to include the predetermined lighting mode,
The second lighting pattern is configured to include a specific lighting mode,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern do not include the specific lighting mode.

The gaming machine according to the present mode (9),
Storage means capable of electrically storing game media within a predetermined number range (for example, in this example, game medals can be electrically stored as credits in the gaming machine);
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting game media stored in the storage means and that can bet a plurality of game media;
A predetermined lamp (for example, a 3-bet lamp D213) capable of notifying that a specified number which is a maximum bet number per game in a predetermined game state is bet;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is valid;
With role determining means that can determine the winning role,
As the winning combination determined by the combination determining means, it is configured to be able to determine a replaying combination,
The predetermined gaming state, and the replaying role has not been won in the game executed immediately before, and the sum of the game medium stored in the storage means and the bet number is not less than the specified number, And, in a situation where the bet number is less than the prescribed number, the specific lamp is configured to light up,
In the gaming machine, when the specific lamp is turned on and the bet number reaches the specified number, the specific lamp is turned off after the predetermined lamp is turned on.

The gaming machine according to the present mode (10),
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
A sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect,
The time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the program of the main gaming section is longer than the time from the occurrence of power interruption to the end of power supply to the gaming machine. Is composed of
The time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the program of the main game unit is longer than the time from the start of power supply to the game machine to the start of the program of the sub game unit. It is a gaming machine characterized by having such a configuration.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A1) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is determined and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels. The predetermined symbol combination is displayed even under a situation where a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a subsequent final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation. A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming value corresponding to the combination is not provided to a player.

The gaming machine according to the aspect (A2) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the respective reels. The predetermined symbol combination is displayed even when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the power-off process based on the detection of the power-off being performed and the stop operation performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming value corresponding to the combination is not provided to the player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A3) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop is performed as a final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the specific symbol combination is displayed by the stop operation at the timing, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop is performed as a final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even though the stop operation is performed at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. Is

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A4) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation,
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, it is configured such that the next game can be executed regardless of the insertion of the game value,
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the game value is Is configured so that the next game can be executed regardless of

The gaming machine according to the aspect (A5) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the drawing state, the first drawing state and the first drawing state have at least a second drawing state in which the probability that at least a specific result is determined is different,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation of a player,
In the game that is executed when the first drawing state is set, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is displayed on each reel. It is configured to be stopped, and to be able to shift to the second drawing state after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed,
In the game that is executed when the first drawing state is set, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is displayed on each reel. Despite being stopped and the player has been stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation thereafter, a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation The gaming machine is configured to be able to shift to the second drawing state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A6) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel; and a predetermined lamp (for example, a re-game lamp D290) that can be turned on based on the determination of a specific result,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation,
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to be turned on,
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined The gaming machine is characterized in that the lamp is turned on.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A7) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
A reel control means for controlling the reel; and a predetermined lamp (for example, a re-game lamp D290) that can be turned on based on the determination of a specific result,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation,
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to be turned on,
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even if the stop operation was performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination was displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply was not changed. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined lamp is turned on after returning.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A8) includes:
N (N is a natural number of 3 or more) reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) for outputting a production sound,
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
In a game executed in a specific gaming state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation of the N-1st reel of the player, and a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel. After that, a predetermined effect sound (for example, tempai sound) can be output from the speaker,
In the game executed in the specific game state, a predetermined rotation of the N-1st reel is performed even though the player has performed a stop operation at the specific timing as a stop operation on the N-1st reel. A gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined effect sound can be output from a speaker even after a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel due to a defect. .

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A9) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing a game value within a predetermined number range;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means and that can bet a plurality of game values;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is valid;
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation,
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel is provided with the specific symbol combination. After the corresponding symbols are stopped, respectively, after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is not issued. Is composed of
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel is provided with the specific symbol combination. Although the corresponding symbols are stopped, and the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the specified rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation causes the identification. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific lamp is not informed that the specific lamp is valid even after a symbol combination other than the symbol combination is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A10) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing a game value within a predetermined number range;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means and that can bet a plurality of game values;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is valid;
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation,
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel is provided with the specific symbol combination. After the corresponding symbols are stopped, respectively, after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is not issued. Is composed of
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel is provided with the specific symbol combination. The corresponding symbols are stopped, and the power-off process based on the detection of the power-off is executed despite the stop operation being performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. A gaming machine characterized in that, even when a symbol combination other than a specific symbol combination is displayed, the specific lamp is not notified that the specific lamp is valid after power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A11) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing a game value within a predetermined number range;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means and that can bet a plurality of game values;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is valid;
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reels have the predetermined symbol combination. After the corresponding symbols have been stopped, respectively, after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, it is notified that the specific lamp is valid. In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, The symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are respectively stopped, and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Regardless, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the information that the specific lamp is valid is notified. A gaming machine characterized in that:

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A12) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing a game value within a predetermined number range;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means and that can bet a plurality of game values;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is valid;
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reels have the predetermined symbol combination. After the corresponding symbols have been stopped, respectively, after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, it is notified that the specific lamp is valid. In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, The symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are respectively stopped, and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Regardless, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off process based on the detection of the power-off, it is notified that the specific lamp is valid after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine characterized by being constituted.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A13) includes
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The game state has at least a special game state advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined game state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
When the end condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the end of the bonus) can be executed.
A special game state, which is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, and the internal drawing means In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and are stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, and the predetermined operation is stopped. After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze is configured to be executable,
A special game state, which is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, and the internal drawing means In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Nevertheless, the predetermined freeze can be executed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. Gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A14) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The game state has at least a special game state advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
When the end condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the end of the bonus) can be executed.
A special game state, which is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, and the internal drawing means In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and are stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, and the predetermined operation is stopped. After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze is configured to be executable,
A special game state, which is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, and the internal drawing means In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Nevertheless, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off process based on the detection of the power interruption, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. A gaming machine characterized in that:

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A15) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. It is configured as
In the game in which the predetermined game state is determined and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels. After the player is stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation of the player, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. The gaming machine is configured not to give a game value corresponding to the game value to the player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A16) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. It is configured as
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the respective reels. After the player is stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation of the player, and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming value corresponding to the combination is not provided to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A17) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation,
In the game in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player corresponds to the specific symbol combination. Each symbol is stopped, and after the player is stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game is executed regardless of the insertion of the game value. Configured to be executed
In the game in which the predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means in the predetermined game state, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels. After that, the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the game value is input. A gaming machine characterized by being configured so that the next game cannot be executed irrespective of being played.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A18) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation,
In the game in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player corresponds to the specific symbol combination. Each symbol is stopped, and after the player is stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game is executed regardless of the insertion of the game value. Configured to be executed
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the game value is A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the next game irrespective of the insertion of a game.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A19) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As a gaming state, it has at least a special game transferable state advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
In the game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
After the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, until the specific symbol combination is stopped, it is configured to be in the special game transferable state,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. After the player is stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation of the player and the special symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a bonus) can be executed. ,
In the game in which the special game transfer is not possible and the lottery result of the combination by the combination lottery means is a predetermined result different from the specific result, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is displayed on each reel. After the respective symbols are stopped, the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player thereafter, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation, A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined freeze is not executed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A20) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
In the game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. After the player is stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a bonus) can be executed. ,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop is performed as a final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even though the stop operation is performed at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. A gaming machine characterized by having

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A21) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the drawing state, the first drawing state and the first drawing state have at least a second drawing state in which the probability that at least a specific result is determined is different,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation of a player,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the game is executed when the first drawing state is performed, and is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. The symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively, and after the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the second symbol is displayed. It is configured to be able to shift to the drawing state,
In the game which is a game executed in the first drawing state, and in which a predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the specific symbol combination is provided on each reel. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation of the player thereafter, and symbols other than the specific symbol combination are displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation. After the combination is displayed, the gaming machine is configured not to shift to the second winning combination state.

The gaming machine according to the aspect (B1) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop is performed as a final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the stop operation is performed at the timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a special game) can be executed,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop is performed as a final stop operation of the player thereafter. Despite the stop operation at the timing, even if the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to the execution of the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. Is a gaming machine characterized by the following.

The gaming machine according to the aspect (B2) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation,
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, it is configured such that the next game can be executed regardless of the insertion of the game value,
In the predetermined gaming state, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even if the stop operation was performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination was displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply was not changed. A gaming machine characterized in that the next game can be executed irrespective of the game value being input after the return.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B3) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the drawing state, the first drawing state and the first drawing state have at least a second drawing state in which the probability that at least a specific result is determined is different,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation of a player,
In the game that is executed when the first drawing state is set, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is displayed on each reel. It is configured to be stopped, and to be able to shift to the second drawing state after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed,
In the game that is executed when the first drawing state is set, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is displayed on each reel. The symbols other than the specific symbol combination are executed by executing the power-off process based on the detection of the power-off even though the player is stopped and the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to shift to the second drawing state after power is restored even when a combination is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B4) includes:
N (N is a natural number of 3 or more) reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) for outputting a production sound,
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
When a power-off is detected, the power-off process is configured to be executable,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player,
In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. Are stopped, and after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the power supply is not changed. It is configured to give a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the return,
In a game executed in a specific gaming state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation of the N-1st reel of the player, and a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel. After that, a predetermined effect sound (for example, tempai sound) can be output from the speaker,
In the game executed in the specific gaming state, the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off even though the player has performed the stop operation at the specific timing as the stop operation on the (N-1) th reel. Is executed, even if a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel, the predetermined effect sound can be output from the speaker after the power is restored. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

The gaming machine according to the aspect (B5) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53);
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the drawing state, the first drawing state and the first drawing state have at least a second drawing state in which the probability that at least a specific result is determined is different,
In the game in which a specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation of a player,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, the game is executed when the first drawing state is performed, and is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. The symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively, and after the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the second symbol is displayed. It is configured to be able to shift to the drawing state,
In the game that is executed when the first drawing state is set, and in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal drawing means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is displayed on each reel. Despite being stopped and the player has been stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation thereafter, a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination due to a predetermined rotation failure on a reel corresponding to the final stop operation The gaming machine is configured to be able to shift to the second drawing state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to the aspect (C1) includes:
A plurality of reels (for example, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (for example, a stop button M40);
An effect notifying unit capable of notifying an effect (for example, effect display device S40);
Internal lottery means for performing internal lottery,
A suggestion effect (for example, a rare role suggestion effect) that can be executed in a game in which a specific result (for example, winning-C in FIG. 10) is determined by the internal lottery means, and that indicates that the specific result has been determined. Can be notified by the directing notification unit,
As the suggested effect, a first suggested effect (for example, display of “CHANCE!” In FIG. 175) started to be notified when the game start condition is satisfied, and a notification is started when a predetermined stop operation is performed. (For example, red apples (many) in FIG. 175).
In the game in which the first suggestion effect has been executed, the second suggestion effect is configured not to be executed,
A continuous effect (for example, a night mode in FIG. 175) which is an effect notified over a plurality of games can be notified by the effect notifying unit,
In the case where the suggested effect is performed in a game in which the specific result is determined in a predetermined gaming state and in which the continuous effect is reported, the first suggested effect is Is configured to be more easily executed than the second suggestion effect,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined, the case where the game is a game executed in a situation where the continuous production is informed is the case where the game is the continuous production. Is configured so that the first suggestion effect is more easily executed than a case where the game is executed in a situation where is not notified.

The gaming machine according to the aspect (C2) includes:
A plurality of reels (for example, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (for example, a stop button M40);
An effect notifying unit capable of notifying an effect (for example, effect display device S40);
Main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, main control board M);
A sub-control means (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the effect,
The main control means includes:
Internal lottery means for performing an internal lottery,
A freeze executing means for executing a freeze for delaying the progress of the game,
As a gaming state, it has a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
The winning numbers that can be determined by the internal lottery means include at least a first winning number (for example, winning number 14 in FIG. 10) and a second winning number (for example, winning number 7 in FIG. 10),
The winning number that can be determined by the internal lottery means includes a winning number (for example, winning number 21 in FIG. 10) including a special result (for example, one type BB-B) that triggers the transition to the special gaming state. And
The production group information (for example, production group number) corresponding to the winning number determined by the internal lottery means can be derived,
The effect group information corresponding to the first winning number is first information (eg, effect group number 7 in FIG. 10),
The effect group information corresponding to the second winning number is second information (for example, effect group number 5 in FIG. 10),
Among the winning numbers corresponding to the first information, the winning number not including the special result is only the first winning number,
Among the winning numbers corresponding to the second information, a winning number that does not include the special result has other than the second winning number,
The main control means is configured to be able to transmit the derived effect group information to the sub control means,
In the game in which a predetermined freeze (for example, a specific freeze) is executed, the sub-control means can notify a predetermined freeze execution suggestion effect (for example, a specific freeze effect) by an effect notification unit,
The game in which the sub-control means receives the first information from the main control means is more effective than the game in which the sub-control means receives the second information from the main control means. Is configured to be easily notified.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C3) includes:
Main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, main control board M);
A sub-control means (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the effect,
A plurality of reels (for example, reel M50);
Storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game media within a predetermined number range;
A bet switch (e.g., a max bet button) that is operated when betting game media stored in the storage means and is controlled by the main control means capable of betting a plurality of game media;
An effect notifying unit capable of notifying an effect (for example, effect display device S40);
An operable sub-operation member (for example, a sub-input button SB) controlled by the sub-control means,
The main control means includes:
Equipped with internal lottery means for performing internal lottery,
The sub-control means,
In a situation where the plurality of reels are stopped, an operation effect (for example, a button effect) can be notified by the effect notification unit as an effect that prompts the player to operate the sub-operation member,
When the sub-operation member is operated in a predetermined gaming state and in a state where the operation effect is notified, the notification of the operation effect ends, and a specific effect (for example, a determination notification image) is displayed. Configured to announce,
In the predetermined game state, the replaying game has not been won in the game executed immediately before, and one or more game media are stored in the storage means, and the number of bets in the game is When the bet switch is operated in a situation where the number of bets is less than the prescribed number which is the maximum number of bets and the operation effect is notified, the operation effect notification is ended and the specific effect is not notified. It is configured as
If the bet switch is operated in the predetermined gaming state, and in a situation where the replaying game has been won in the game executed immediately before and the operation effect is notified, It is configured to continue the notification of the operation effect, and not to notify the specific effect,
When the bet switch is operated in a state where the predetermined gaming state is set, and no game medium is stored in the storage means, and the operation effect is notified, the operation effect is notified. It is configured not to notify the specific effect,
When the bet switch is operated in the predetermined gaming state and the number of bets is the specified number and the operation effect is notified, the notification of the operation effect is continued, A torsion-type gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is not notified.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C4) includes:
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a reel M50);
A plurality of back lamps provided inside the plurality of reels and capable of turning on and off (for example, a turning backlight S30);
Internal lottery means for performing internal lottery,
The symbols provided on the reel include at least a symbol belonging to a first symbol group (for example, a bell symbol) and a symbol belonging to a second symbol group (for example, a replay A symbol, a replay B symbol). ,
As a result that can be determined by the internal lottery means, at least a predetermined result (for example, winning-A1 in FIG. 10) and a specific result (for example, replay-A in FIG. 10) are provided,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined, the combination of the symbols belonging to the first symbol group is a predetermined straight line different from the active line (eg, the left reel middle, the middle reel middle, and the right reel middle in FIG. 187). There are cases where the reels stop at the symbol stop position of each of the reels on the line (for example, the lower left reel, the middle reel middle, and the upper right reel in FIG. 187).
In the game in which the specific result has been determined, the symbol stop position of each reel on a specific straight line in which the combination of the symbols belonging to the second symbol group is different from the activated line (for example, in FIG. (Lower reel, middle reel, upper right reel).
A back lamp effect of turning on or off a back lamp corresponding to each symbol stop position on the plurality of reels can be executed,
As a lighting mode of the back lamp effect, a first lighting mode (for example, a lighting mode corresponding to “bell stop display” shown in the upper part of FIG. 187) and a second lighting mode different from the first lighting mode (For example, a lighting mode corresponding to the “re-game stop display” shown in the lower part of FIG. 187).
When a back lamp effect is executed in the first lighting mode, the back lamp corresponding to each symbol stop position on the activated line is configured to be turned off at least once, respectively.
When a back lamp effect is executed in the second lighting mode, the back lamp corresponding to each symbol stop position on the activated line is configured to be turned off at least once, respectively.
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined, a back lamp effect can be executed in the first lighting mode, but a back lamp effect is not executed in the second lighting mode,
In the game in which the specific result is determined, a back lamp effect can be executed in the second lighting mode, but a back lamp effect is not executed in the first lighting mode. This is a spinning-type gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C5) includes:
A plurality of reels (for example, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (for example, a stop button M40) and an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying an effect,
Internal lottery means for performing internal lottery,
By satisfying a predetermined condition, it is possible to control to a notification state (for example, an AT state),
In a situation in which a predetermined result (for example, winning-A1 in FIG. 10) is determined by the internal lottery means under the situation where the notification state is controlled, the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined result can be specified. Information can be displayed on the effect display unit,
It is possible to execute a privilege suggestion effect (for example, a continuous effect in FIG. 189) that is an effect that is performed over one or more games and that indicates whether or not a bonus is given to the player,
As a result of the privilege suggestion effect, when suggesting that a bonus is not given to the player, a background effect can be displayed on the effect display unit in a specific mode,
In the game executed in the notification state, when the privilege suggestion effect is not executed, and information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined result is displayed, the displayed stop switch When the stop switch is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode, the display brightness in the effect display unit is configured to be reduced,
In the game executed in the notification state, when the privilege suggestion effect is executed, and when information that can specify an operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined result is displayed, the displayed stop switch is displayed. When the stop switch is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode, a brightness of a display on the effect display section is not reduced, and the turning type gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C6) includes:
A speaker (for example, speaker D20) capable of outputting a production sound,
An operation member A (for example, a sub input button) that can be operated by a player;
An operation member B (for example, a volume switch) that cannot be operated by the player,
The game state includes a normal state (for example, a low probability state), an advantageous state (for example, an AT state) which is more advantageous for the player than the normal state, and an error state in which an error is detected. At least have
Based on the operation state of the operation member A, the volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker is configured to be adjustable,
Based on the operation state of the operation member B, the volume level of the production sound output from the speaker is configured to be adjustable,
The sound level of the effect sound output from the speaker is determined based on the operation state of the operation member A and the operation state of the operation member B,
It is possible to output a plurality of types of BGM that are repeatedly reproduced over one or more games as a production sound,
The BGM output in the advantageous state is configured to be easier to select a BGM having a relatively fast tempo than the BGM output in the normal state,
In a situation where the volume level of the production sound is determined to be a predetermined volume, the volume output in the advantageous state is configured to be relatively higher than in the normal state,
In a situation where the volume level of the production sound is determined to be the predetermined volume, an error occurs in the normal state and the error state occurs, and an error occurs in the advantageous state and the error state occurs. In the case of, an error sound that is a staging sound when an error occurs at the same volume is configured to be output,
The advantageous state is configured such that the output sound volume is relatively louder than the normal state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the error state is configured to output a relatively higher volume in the error state than in the advantageous state.

P-turn machine, DU front door (door)
D door board, D10s input receiving sensor D20s first input sensor, D30s second input sensor D40 stop button, D41 left stop button D42 middle stop button, D43 right stop button D50 start lever, D60 settlement button D70 display panel, D80 door switch D90 coin shooter, D100 blocker D130 upper panel, D140 lower panel D150 decorative lamp unit, D160 reel window D170 medal slot, D180 start lamp D290 replaying lamp, D300 insertable lamp D200 credit number display device, D210 insertion number display light D220 Bet button, D230 medal tray D240 outlet, D250 special game status display device D260 keyhole, D270 Number of payout display device (push order display device)
D280 AT counter value display device M main control board M20 setting key switch, M30 setting / reset button C main control chip, M50 reel M51 left reel, M52 middle reel M53 right reel, M60 AT counter M70 game interval minimum timer S sub-control board , S10 LED lamp S20 speaker, S30 turn back light S40 effect display device, SC sub-control chip E power board, E10 power switch H medal payout device, H10s first payout sensor H20s second payout sensor, H40 hopper H50 disk, H50a Disc rotation axis H60 Game medal exit, H70 Ejection urging means H80 Hopper motor S50 Bed button lamp, S60 stop button lamp K turn body board, K10 turn body motor K20 turn body sensor IN relay board, SB sub input button K c High security failure counter, YKc-1 advantageous section remaining game number counter FZt Freeze execution timer RU Reel unit, BU pedestal, H62 discharge guide, H64 slope HS medal auxiliary tank, BS screw, DE full detection electrode M55 1st End, M57 second end, M58 overlapped portion, M59 cut MW reel frame, MO reel band

Claims (1)

Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Multiple reels,
Storage means capable of electrically storing a game value within a predetermined number range,
A start switch,
Max bet switch,
Checkout switch,
An operable sub-operation member,
The main control means includes:
Equipped with internal lottery means for performing internal lottery,
It is possible to execute a predetermined operation effect as an effect that prompts the player to operate the sub operation member,
It is configured such that the specific result can be determined by the internal lottery means, and has at least a first specific result and a second specific result as the specific result,
When the sub-operation member is operated in a state where the predetermined operation state is being performed and the predetermined operation effect is being executed, the execution of the predetermined operation effect can be ended and the specific effect can be executed. It is configured as
The predetermined gaming state, the automatic bet is not placed, and one or more game values are stored in the storage means, and the bet number is less than a specific number which is the maximum bet number ; and In a situation where the predetermined operation effect is being executed, when the max bet switch is operated and a bet is made, the execution of the predetermined operation effect is configured to be terminated,
When the Max Bet switch is operated in a state where the predetermined gaming state is set, an automatic bet is made, and the predetermined operation effect is being executed, the execution of the predetermined operation effect is continued. And is configured not to execute the specific effect,
If the max bet switch is operated in a state where the game state is the predetermined game state, the storage value is not stored in the storage unit, and the predetermined operation effect is being executed, It is configured to continue execution of the operation effect, and not to execute the specific effect,
When the settlement switch is operated in a state where the game state is the predetermined game state, a game value is stored in the storage means, and the predetermined operation effect is being executed, the predetermined operation is performed. It is configured to end the execution of the effect,
The specific result can be executed in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, and a suggestion effect that is an effect related to the specific result is configured to be executable,
The suggestion effect includes a case where the execution based on the operation of the start switch Ru is started, and if performed based on the predetermined stop operation has been Ru is started, and at least has,
Have special conditions that are advantageous to the player,
Before shifting to the special state, a predetermined confirmation screen can be displayed,
In the game in which the first specific result or the second specific result is determined and the suggestion effect is executed , a case where the game is a game executed in a situation where the predetermined confirmation screen is displayed. However, the execution of the suggested effect is started based on the operation of the start switch , as compared with the case where the game is a specific game state and the game is a game executed in a predetermined situation where the predetermined confirmation screen is not displayed. probability of being is configured as relatively high,
The suggestion that the execution is started based on an operation of a start switch that can be executed in a game in which the first specific result or the second specific result is executed in a situation where the predetermined determination screen is displayed. Than the number of types of effects, in the game in which the first specific result or the second specific result is determined in the specific gaming state and executed in a predetermined situation where the predetermined confirmation screen is not displayed A gaming machine characterized in that the number of types of the suggested effects whose execution is started based on the operation of a start switch that can be executed is larger than the number of types of the suggested effects.

Images